JP2023014205A - Game board - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game board featuring display means.

SOLUTION: A game board having display means, a door body, detection means capable of detecting an opening/closing state of the door body, operation means, and sound output means completes display of a door body opening display and starts displaying a management display when a certain operation is performed in a state in which the door body is in an open state, a detection state of the detection means is an opening detection state, and a door body opening display is under display on the display means, and completes display of a sound volume setting display but does not start displaying a management display when the certain operation is performed when the door body is in an open state, a detection state of the detection means is a closing detection state, and a sound volume setting display is under display on the display means. The sound output means can output a door opening sound in a state in which a door body opening display is under display on the display means, and becomes a state in which the game board does not output sound when the certain operation is performed in a state in which a door opening sound is under output.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 144

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to amusement machines typified by pinball game machines (pachinko machines) and reel game machines (slot machines).

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, for example, a slot machine is known as one of game machines. This slot machine spins the reels by inserting medals and operating the start lever, determines the role internally by internal lottery, and stops the reels by operating the stop button. A winning combination is established when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed in response to internal determination. When a winning combination involving the payout of medals is established, a specified number of medals corresponding to the established winning combination is paid out.

Among such game machines, there is a game machine in which certain settings regarding the game machine can be set by both an administrator's operation and a player's operation (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-296354 A

With conventional amusement machines, it is necessary to visually check the scale of the switches when checking the setting values set by the administrator's operation. There is also the problem that it is difficult to provide dedicated display means for displaying values.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine having a characteristic display means.

In order to achieve the above object, the game machine according to the present invention, as one aspect thereof,
display means;
A door body that is provided on the front of the game table and can be opened and closed,
a detecting means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door;
an operating means;
sound output means capable of outputting sound;
A game machine comprising
The detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state,
The detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to an open detection state when the door body is in an open state,
By performing a predetermined operation on the detection means, the detection state of the detection means is set to the closed detection state even when the door body is in the open state,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a volume setting display capable of setting the volume,
The display means is means capable of displaying a door body open display indicating that the door body is in the open state when the door body is in the open state,
When the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and the door body open display is displayed on the display means, an operation is performed on the operation means. is configured to end the display of the door opening display and start displaying the management display,
In a state where the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, and the volume setting display is displayed on the display means, when the certain operation is performed, the volume setting is performed. is configured to finish displaying the display but not to start displaying the administrative display;
In a state in which the door open display is displayed on the display means, the sound output means can output a sound indicating that the door is in the open state (hereinafter referred to as "door opening sound"). is configured to
In a state where the door opening sound is output from the sound output means, when the certain operation is performed on the operation means, the sound output means is configured to be in a state of not outputting sound. ing,
It is characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine having a characteristic display means.

1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention; FIG. 1 is a front view of the slot machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention with its front door opened; FIG. FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of a controller of the slot machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention; (a) A plan view showing an array of symbols provided on reels of the slot machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. (b) A diagram showing pay lines of the slot machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. (a) A diagram showing types of winning combinations (including activated combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and activation or payout of each winning combination in a three-coin bet game. (b) A diagram showing types of winning combinations (including activated combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and activation or payout of each winning combination in a two-coin bet game. (a) A transition diagram of a game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. FIG. (b) A transition diagram of an AT-based game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. FIG. (a) A diagram showing a lottery table used for internal lottery processing for a winning combination in a three-coin bet game. (b) It is a diagram for explaining the correct operation order of the pushing order of the slot machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. (c) A diagram showing part of a lottery table used for internal lottery processing for a winning combination in a two-coin bet game. It is the figure which corresponded the display data and the lighting mode of the payout number indicator 127. FIG. (a) shows an image of an effect table provided in the first sub-controller 400; (b) It is the figure which showed an example of the LMT state production table. (c) is a diagram showing a modification of the LMT state rendering table. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU 404 of a first sub-controller 400; 4B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400; (c) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. (d) It is a flow chart of the effect control processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU 504 of a second sub-controller 500; (b) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. (c) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. (d) A flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. 11(a) is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of bet number setting/start operation reception processing in step S102 of FIG. (b) It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the high navigation state update process of step S201 of Fig.14 (a). (a) It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the production|presentation state control process A of FIG.10 S106. (b) It is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the process common to every game in step S401 of FIG. 15(a). (a) It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the low navigation state process A of step S404 of Fig.15 (a). (b) It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of high navigation state transition processing of step S601 of Fig.16 (a). FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of high navigation state processing A in step S405 of FIG. 15(a). FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of common high-navigation state processing A in step S801 of FIG. 17; FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of normal state processing A in step S803 of FIG. 17; FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of final notification state processing A in step S805 of FIG. 17; FIG. 18A is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of AT1 state processing A in step S807 of FIG. 17; (b) A diagram showing an example of a lottery table used for the lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions. 18 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of AT2 state processing A in step S811 of FIG. 17; FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of pullback state processing A in step S813 of FIG. 17; FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of instruction information setting processing in step S814 of FIG. 17; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of effect state control processing B in step S113 of FIG. 10; FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of high navigation state processing B in step S1704 of FIG. 25. FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of normal state processing B in step S1802 of FIG. 26; FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of final notification state processing B in step S1804 of FIG. 26; FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of AT1 start setting processing in step S2006 of FIG. 28; FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of AT1 state processing B in step S1806 of FIG. 26; FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of AT2 state processing B in step S1810 of FIG. 26; FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of pullback state processing B in step S1812 of FIG. 26; FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of LMT state processing B in step S1813 of FIG. 26; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state ending process in step S114 of FIG. 10; FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of number display-related processing in step S3301 of FIG. 12; FIG. (a) It is the figure which showed an example of control of the update of the count value of various counters, and a display in a time series. (b) It is the figure which showed the specific example 1 of the update of the count value of various counters, and a display. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 of updating and displaying count values of various counters; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 of updating and displaying count values of various counters; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 of updating and displaying count values of various counters; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 5 of updating and displaying count values of various counters; (a) It is the figure which showed the specific example 6 of the update of the count value of various counters, and a display. (b) It is the figure which showed the specific example 7 of the update of the count value of various counters, and a display. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a specific example 8 of updating and displaying count values of various counters; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a specific example 9 of updating and displaying count values of various counters; (a), (b) It is the figure which showed the update of the count value of various counters, and the specific example 10 of a display. (c) A diagram showing an example of screen transition of the three-bet game described with reference to FIG. 44(a). (d) A diagram showing an example of the screen transition of the double bet game described with reference to FIG. 44(b). (a) It is a diagram showing an example of screen transition when a 2-coin game is performed after the 3-coin game explained with reference to FIG. 44(a), and then a 3-coin game is performed again. (b) It is a diagram showing an example of screen transition of the double-bet game described with reference to FIG. 44(b). (c) and (d) are diagrams showing Modified Example 1 of updating and display of count values of various counters. (a), (b) It is the figure which showed the update of the count value of various counters, and the modified example 2 of a display. 1 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 1-1 of the present application; FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 1-2 of the present application; FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 1-3 of the present application; FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an outline of inventions 1-4 of the present application; FIG. (a) It is a diagram showing a configuration example of a "first advantageous gaming state" according to the present invention. (b) It is a diagram showing an example of transition from the normal game state to the "second advantageous game state" according to the present invention via the "first advantageous game state" according to the present invention. (a) It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for high navigation state scenario determination. (b) A diagram showing an example of a high navigation state scenario table. (c) It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for development season determination. (d) It is a figure which shows an example of a CZ shift lottery table. (e) A diagram showing an example of an AT promotion lottery table. (a) It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for AT transferable point determination. (b) It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for AT transfer point determination. (c) It is a figure which shows an example of an AT transition point production table. (d) It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for determination of season type. (a) is a flow chart showing the flow of low navigation state processing A; (b) is a flow chart showing the flow of high navigation state transition processing according to the second embodiment. FIG. 54B is a flow chart showing the flow of the normal state start setting process (step S704) in the high navigation state transition process described with reference to FIG. 54(b). 10 is a flow chart showing the flow of high navigation state common processing A according to Embodiment 2. FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing the flow of normal state processing A according to the second embodiment; 58 is a flow chart showing the flow of NM1 state processing A (step S1021) in normal state processing A described using FIG. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing the flow of NM2 state processing A (step S1023) in normal state processing A described with reference to FIG. 57; FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the flow of CZ state processing A (step S1055) in NM2 state processing A described using FIG. 59; FIG. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing the flow of NM3 state processing A (step S1024) in normal state processing A described with reference to FIG. 57; 10 is a flow chart showing the flow of final notification state processing A according to the second embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the production|presentation state control B which concerns on Embodiment 2. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the flow of normal state processing B according to the second embodiment; FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing the flow of NM1 state processing B (step S1913) in normal state processing B described with reference to FIG. 64; FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the flow of cycle start setting processing (step S1925) in the NM1 state processing B described with reference to FIG. 65; FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing the flow of the season start setting process (step S1938) in the periodic start setting process described with reference to FIG. 66; FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing the flow of NM2 state processing B (step S1915) in normal state processing B described with reference to FIG. 64; 69 is a flow chart showing the flow of the CZ state start setting process (step S1960) in the NM2 state process B described with reference to FIG. 68; FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing the flow of CZ state processing B (step S1961) in NM2 state processing B described with reference to FIG. 68; 65 is a flow chart showing the flow of NM3 state processing B (step S1916) in normal state processing B described with reference to FIG. 64; 10 is a flow chart showing the flow of final notification state processing B according to the second embodiment. It is the figure which showed the change of various counters and flags in the example 1 of transition of production|presentation state in a time series. It is the figure which showed the change of various counters and flags in the example 1 of transition of production|presentation state in a time series. It is the figure which showed the change of various counters and flags in the example 1 of transition of production|presentation state in a time series. (a) It is the figure which showed the change of various displays and the production|presentation in the transition example 1 of an production|presentation state in a time series. (b) It is the figure which showed an example of a certain production|presentation performed in specific production|presentation mode. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing changes in various counters, flags, various displays, and effects in the transition example 2 of the effect state in chronological order. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing changes in various counters, flags, various displays, and effects in a time-series transition example 3 of the effect state; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing changes in various counters, flags, various displays, and effects in a transition example 4 of the effect state in chronological order. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing changes in various counters, flags, various displays, and effects in a transition example 5 of the effect state in chronological order. (a) It is the figure which showed the modification of the transition of the production|presentation state. 78B is a diagram showing a modification of the effect state transition example 3 described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. (c) It is the figure which showed the modification of specific production mode demonstrated using FIG.76(b). (a) It is the figure which showed the modification of a display. (b) It is the figure which showed the modification of suggestion production|presentation. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an overview of Inventions 2-1 and 2-2 of the present application; 10 is a flow chart showing the flow of NM2 state processing A according to Embodiment 3. FIG. 84(a) is a flow chart showing the flow of CZ precursor setting processing (step S1057) in the NM2 state processing A described using FIG. (b) A diagram showing an example of a table for determining the number of CZ portent games (main portent). (c) A diagram showing an example of a table for determining the number of CZ omen games (false omen). 10 is a flow chart showing the flow of CZ state processing A according to Embodiment 3. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for determining display contents at the start of a season; (a) It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the display process at the time of a season start which concerns on Embodiment 3. FIG. 88(b) is a flow chart showing the flow of the season start time display process 1 (step S3003) in the season start time display process described with reference to FIG. 88(a). (c) A flowchart showing the flow of season start time display processing 2 (step S3005) in the season start time display processing described using FIG. 88(a). (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a set game. (b-1) It is a diagram showing the flow of the game in a time series when the CZ transition is won (Embodiment 1). (b-2) It is a diagram showing the flow of the game in time series when the CZ shift is won (Embodiment 2). (a) It is the figure which showed the flow of the game in a time series when CZ shift winning is carried out (Example 3). (b-1) is a diagram showing a comparative example with the CZ transition winning (Example 4) described with reference to FIG. 90(b-2). (b-2) It is a diagram showing the flow of the game in a time series when CZ transition is won (Embodiment 4). (a-1) is a diagram showing a comparative example with the CZ transition winning (Example 5) described with reference to FIG. 91 (a-2). (a-2) It is a diagram showing the flow of the game in time series when the CZ transition is won (Embodiment 5). (b) It is the figure which showed the example which transfers to AT1 state from a normal state in a time series. (a) It is a diagram showing changes in various counters and flags in chronological order when the predictive effect of CZ shift winning (second embodiment) described with reference to FIG. 89 (b-2) is executed. (b) A diagram showing changes in various counters and flags in chronological order at the time of execution of the predictive effect of CZ shift winning (Example 4) described with reference to FIG. 90(b-2). (c) A diagram showing changes in various counters and flags in chronological order at the time of execution of the predictive effect of CZ shift winning (embodiment 5) described with reference to FIG. 91(a-2). (a) It is the figure which showed an example of normal production|presentation (fake omen production|presentation) in time series. (b) is a diagram showing an example of an omen effect according to the first embodiment in chronological order. (c) It is the figure which showed an example of the omen production|presentation which concerns on Example 2 in time series. (d) It is a diagram showing changes in various counters and flags in chronological order when the portent effect is executed. (a) It is the figure which showed the example of a change of sign production. (b-1) is a diagram showing a change example of seasonal effects and seasonal displays. (b-2) is a diagram showing a modification example of the CZ transition notification effect. (c) It is a diagram showing an example of changing the start timing of the omen effect. (a) It is the figure which showed the flow of the game in time series when the special game is performed in the 1st set game (NM2 state: 1st year summer) SET1 demonstrated using Fig.89 (a). (b) A diagram corresponding to FIG. 90(b-2), and FIG. 95(c) is a diagram showing the flow of the game in chronological order in the case of shifting to the special game state during execution of the precursor effect. . (a-1) is a diagram showing a set game (cycle) according to Modification 1. FIG. (a-2) is a diagram showing a set game (cycle) according to Modification 2. FIG. (a-3) is a diagram showing a set game (cycle) according to Modification 3. FIG. (b-1) A diagram showing an example of an AT continuation scenario table. (b-2) A diagram showing a modified example of the high navigation state scenario table described with reference to FIG. 52(b). It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of a production|presentation state. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an overview of Inventions 3-1 and 3-2 of the present application; (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an effect state in each game state of the AT system. (a) is a diagram showing, from the left, the states passed through in the transition from the normal game state to the AT1 state, and (b) and (c) are diagrams showing specific examples of the transition. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a high navigation state scenario determination lottery table, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a high navigation state scenario table, and (c) is an AT judge state transition rate. It is a diagram showing an example, (d) is a diagram showing an example of setting rate of seasonally advantageous state, (e) is a diagram showing an example of icon types and selection rate, (f) is 4 is a diagram showing an example of a number-of-additional-games lottery table; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a success rate (AT state transition rate) and an AT promotion rate in an AT judge state, (b) is a diagram showing an example of an icon acquisition point lottery table, (c) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the content of the suggestion display and the lottery probability during the additional game (state NM4), and FIG. It is a diagram. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the flow of high navigation state processing A according to Embodiment 4; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the flow of normal state processing A according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the flow of NM1 state processing A according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the flow of NM2 state processing A according to Embodiment 4; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the flow of NM3-state processing A according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the flow of NM4 state processing A according to Embodiment 4; FIG. 16 is a diagram showing the flow of icon acquisition point update processing according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the flow of AT judge state processing A according to Embodiment 4; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the flow of instruction information setting processing according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the flow of high navigation state processing B according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the flow of normal state processing B according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the flow of NM1 state processing B according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the flow of period start setting processing according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 16 is a diagram showing the flow of season start setting processing according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the flow of NM2 state processing B according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the flow of NM3-state processing B according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the flow of NM4 state processing B according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the flow of NM4 state start setting processing according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the flow of AT judge state start setting processing according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the flow of AT judge state processing B according to Embodiment 4; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the flow of NM4 status display processing according to the fourth embodiment; (a) starts from a low navigation state, and in the following normal state of a high navigation state, a set game with NM2 state and NM3 state as one cycle is performed four times (the upper limit of the number of cycles), and then the AT judge state is changed. (b) shows the flow from the low navigation state to the low navigation state, and the set game in which the NM2 state and the NM3 state are set as one cycle in the normal state of the subsequent high navigation state. After four times (the upper limit of the number of cycles), it is a diagram showing the flow from the AT judge state to the final notification state. After a set game with NM2 state and NM3 state as one cycle is performed once in the normal state of the navigation state, it is a diagram showing the flow through the AT judge state and further to the final announcement state. It is a diagram showing a difference in the required number of games required in the period from the start of the set game until reaching the ceiling period and shifting to the AT judge state. FIG. 125(a) is a diagram showing an example in which, in addition to the flow of FIG. FIG. 125B is a diagram showing an example in which, in addition to the flow of FIG. 125B, the setting probability of the AT1 type “high” is set to 80% at the start of the normal state. In a configuration in which two types of advantageous games, an advantageous game A and an advantageous game B that can be set subsequently, and a periodic game are provided as normal games in the previous stage, the difference in the number of games required when reaching the ceiling period is determined. FIG. 10 shows. The 1st to 4th columns are diagrams showing an example of the effect from the end of the NM1 state to the transition to the normal game state (low navigation state). It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation from the time of completion|finish to transfer to AT1 state through a fixed announcement state. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect when an icon is acquired by icon acquisition points, (b) and (c) are diagrams showing an example of an effect when the NM2 state is shortened, ( d) is a diagram showing an example of an effect when an icon is acquired in the icon specialized state. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of suggestion display in the slot machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment, and (c) and (d) are diagrams showing a modification of the slot machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment. be. It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of this invention 4-1. It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of the limited invention of this invention 4-1. It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of this invention 4-2. (a) A volume setting value table showing an example of setting values for volume setting. (b) A usage table showing an example of usage of sound output means and light output means. (c) A light amount setting value table showing the relationship between the setting value of the light amount setting and the duty ratio (luminance). (a) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a 1st sub-control part main process. (b) is a flow chart showing the flow of command reception interrupt processing. (c) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a 1ms timer interruption process. (d) is a flow chart showing the flow of 10 ms timer interrupt processing. (e) A flowchart showing the flow of DMA interrupt processing. (a) It is a flow chart showing the flow of player setting screen display processing. (b) is a flow chart showing the flow of sound control loop processing. (c) is a flow chart showing the flow of sound driver processing. (d) A flow chart showing the flow of volume switch processing. (a) is a flow chart showing the flow of administrator set value control processing. (b) is a flow chart showing the flow of volume value change processing. 1 is a diagram showing an example of a conventional volume setting method in chronological order; FIG. (a) It is the figure which showed the volume setting method which concerns on Example 1 in time series. (b) A diagram showing the volume setting method according to the embodiment 1-2 in chronological order. It is the figure which showed the conventional volume setting method in time series. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a time series of a volume setting method according to the second embodiment; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a time series of a volume setting method according to the third embodiment; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a time series of a volume setting method according to a modification of the third embodiment; FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a time series of a volume setting method according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a time series of a volume setting method according to Example 5; (a) It is the figure which showed the volume setting method based on Example 6 in time series. (b) It is the figure which showed the volume setting method based on Example 7 in time series. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an outline of the invention 5 of the present application; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an outline of the invention 6 of the present application; FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to Embodiment 6 of the present invention; FIG. 12 is a front view of the slot machine according to Embodiment 6 of the present invention with the front door opened. FIG. 11 is a circuit block diagram of a control section of a slot machine according to Embodiment 6 of the present invention; (a) A plan view showing an array of symbols provided on reels of a slot machine according to Embodiment 6 of the present invention. (b) A diagram showing pay lines of the slot machine according to Embodiment 6 of the present invention. (a) A diagram showing types of winning combinations (including activated combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and activation or payout of each winning combination in a three-coin bet game. (b) A diagram showing types of winning combinations (including activated combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and activation or payout of each winning combination in a two-coin bet game. (a) A transition diagram of a game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. FIG. (b) A transition diagram of an AT-based game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. FIG. (a) A diagram showing a lottery table used for internal lottery processing for a winning combination. (b) is a diagram for explaining the correct operation order for pushing first in the slot machine according to Embodiment 6 of the present invention. It is the figure which corresponded the display data and the lighting mode of the payout number indicator 127. FIG. (a) shows an image of an effect table provided in the first sub-controller 400; (b) It is the figure which showed an example of the judgment state production|presentation table. (c) It is the figure which showed an example of the LMT state production table. (d) is a diagram showing a modified example of the LMT state rendering table. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU 404 of a first sub-controller 400; 4B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400; (c) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU 504 of a second sub-controller 500; (b) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. (c) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. (d) A flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. 159(a) is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the bet number setting/start operation acceptance process in step S102 of FIG. 158; 162(b) is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of high navigation state update processing in step S201 of FIG. 162(a). (a) It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the production|presentation state control process A of FIG.158 S106. (b) It is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the process common to every game in step S401 of FIG. 163(a). (a) It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the low navigation state process A of step S404 of Fig.165 (a). (b) It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of high navigation state transition processing of step S601 of Fig.164 (a). FIG. 163(a) is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of high navigation state processing A in step S405 of FIG. 163(a). FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of high navigation state common processing A in step S801 of FIG. 165. FIG. FIG. 166 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of normal state processing A in step S803 of FIG. 165; FIG. FIG. 166 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of final notification state processing A in step S805 of FIG. 165; FIG. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of AT1 state processing A in step S807 of FIG. 165; FIG. FIG. 166 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of judgment state processing A in step S809 of FIG. 165; FIG. FIG. 166 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of AT2 state processing A in step S811 of FIG. 165; FIG. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of pullback state processing A in step S813 of FIG. 165; FIG. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing in detail the instruction information setting process in step S814 of FIG. 165; FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of effect state control processing B in step S113 of FIG. 158. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of high navigation state processing B in step S1704 of FIG. 174; FIG. 176 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of normal state processing B in step S1802 of FIG. 175; FIG. FIG. 176 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of final notification state processing B in step S1804 of FIG. 175; FIG. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of AT1 state processing B in step S1806 of FIG. 175; FIG. FIG. 176 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of judgment state processing B in step S1808 of FIG. 175; FIG. FIG. 176 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of AT2 state processing B in step S1810 of FIG. 175; FIG. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of pullback state processing B in step S1812 of FIG. 175; FIG. FIG. 176 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of LMT state processing B in step S1813 of FIG. 175; FIG. FIG. 159 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state ending process in step S114 of FIG. 158; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of normal state processing A according to Modification 1; 10 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of normal state processing A according to modification 2; 10 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of a confirmation notification state process A according to Modification 1. FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of confirmation notification state processing A according to Modification 2; FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of final notification state processing A according to Modification 3. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of final notification state processing B according to Modification 3. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including activated combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and activation or payout of each winning combination. (a) A transition diagram of the game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine according to the modification of the sixth embodiment of the present invention. (b) and (c) are transition diagrams of the AT system game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine according to the modification of the sixth embodiment of the present invention. (a) A diagram showing a lottery table used for internal lottery processing for a winning combination. (b) It is a figure explaining the correct operation order of the push hand of this embodiment. It is the figure which corresponded the display data and the lighting mode of the payout number indicator 127. FIG. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit main processing according to a modification of the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the main control unit main processing according to the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. 158; (a) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the production|presentation state control process A based on the modification of Embodiment 6, and is a figure corresponding to the production|presentation state control process A based on Embodiment 6 shown to Fig.163 (a). (b) A flowchart showing the flow of common processing for each game according to a modification of Embodiment 6, and a diagram corresponding to the processing common to every game according to Embodiment 6 shown in FIG. 163(b). 165 is a flowchart showing the flow of high navigation state processing A according to a modification of the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the high navigation state processing A according to the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. 165. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the flow of effect processing according to a modification of Embodiment 6. FIG. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the flow of the effect state control process B according to the modification of the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the effect state control process B according to the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. 174. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the flow of high navigation state processing B according to a modification of the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the high navigation state processing B according to the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. 175. FIG. In the case where the production state in the high navigation state shifts in the order of AT2 state→judge state→LMT state (limit state), and then shifts to the normal state in the low navigation state, the number of counters when only 3 bet games are performed. It is the figure which showed an example of an update display. When the performance state shifts in the order of AT2 state→judge state→LMT state (limit state) in the high navigation state, and then shifts to the normal state in the low navigation state, both the 3-bet game and the 2-bet game are performed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an update display of a counter when performed. (a) It is a diagram showing an example of the update display of the counter when no judgment effect is performed by the two-coin bet game. (b) It is a diagram showing an example of counter update display when the judge effect and the ED effect are not performed by the two-coin bet game. ED production and freeze production when only 3 bet games are performed in the case where the production state shifts in the order of judge state to LMT state (limit state) in the high navigation state and then shifts to the normal state in the low navigation state. It is the figure which showed an example. (a) A 3-coin bet game and a 2-coin bet game are performed in the case where the performance state shifts in the order of judge state to LMT state (limit state) in the high-navigation state and then shifts to the normal state in the low-navigation state. It is the figure which showed an example of ED production|presentation of time, and freeze production|presentation. FIG. 204 is a diagram showing a modification of the setting suggestion effect described with reference to FIG. 204(a); It is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect when continuing the two-coin bet game in the judge state of the high navigation state. (a) It is the figure which showed an example of the 2nd freeze production|presentation at the time of performing a 3-coin bet game. (b) It is a diagram showing an example of a second freeze effect when a two-coin bet game is performed in the middle of the AT2 state. It is the figure which showed an example of the ED production|presentation at the time of performing a three-coin bet game. (a) It is a diagram showing an example of an ED effect in the case of shifting to the LMT state after performing a two-coin bet game in the normal state. (b) It is a diagram showing an example of an ED effect when a two-coin bet game is continued in a normal state. (a) It is the figure which showed an example of the ED production performed after BB game. (b) It is a diagram showing an example of an ED effect performed during internal winning of BB. (a) It is the figure which showed the flow of the production|presentation when interlocking production|presentation progresses normally. (b) It is the figure which showed the flow of the production|presentation when interlocking production|presentation does not progress normally. (a) It is the figure which showed the flow of the production|presentation when ED production|presentation is started, without progressing normally, interlocking production|presentation. (b) It is a diagram showing an example of an interlocking effect when the two-coin bet game is continued in the judge state. It is the figure which showed the interlocking production and its modification. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when a 3-coin bet game is performed when the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state. (b) It is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when a two-coin bet game is performed when the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state. (a) It is a diagram showing a modification of the flow of effects when a 3-coin bet game is performed when the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state. (b) It is a diagram showing a modification of the flow of effects when performing a double bet game when the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state. It is the figure which showed the specific example of the flow of the production|presentation containing specific display. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when a 3-card game is played in the high navigation state and reaches the ceiling, and the effects state shifts in the order of normal state→determined announcement state→AT1 state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when a two-coin bet game is performed in a high navigation state and the game does not reach the ceiling, and the normal state of the effects is maintained. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when a 3-coin game and a 2-coin bet game are performed in a high navigation state, the ceiling is reached, and the production state shifts in the order of normal state→determined announcement state→AT1 state. . It is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when a 3-coin game and a 2-coin bet game are performed in the high navigation state, and the state is shifted to the LMT state without reaching the ceiling. It is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when a 3-coin game and a 2-coin bet game are performed in the high navigation state, and the state is shifted to the low navigation state without reaching the ceiling. It is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the effect when the 3-coin game and the 2-coin bet game are performed in the finalized announcement state of the high navigation state and the promotion counter is not updated. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when operation navigation is not performed in the finalized notification state of the high navigation state. It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the production|presentation in case AT1 classification is promoted in the fixed announcement state of a high navigation state. It is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when the ceiling is not reached in the high navigation state final notification state. It is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when reaching the ceiling in the high-navi state final notification state. (a) It is a diagram showing an example of an ED effect when a 3-coin bet game is performed in the LMT state. (b) A diagram showing an example of an ED effect when a two-coin bet game is performed in the LMT state. FIG. 215 is a diagram showing a modification of the specific display shown in FIG. 215(D). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 7-1 of the present application; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an outline of invention 7-2 of the present application; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 7-3 of the present application; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an outline of invention 7-4 of the present application; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an outline of invention 7-5 of the present application; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an outline of invention 7-6 of the present application; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an outline of invention 7-7 of the present application; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 7-8 of the present application; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 7-9 of the present application; (a) is a flow chart showing the flow of AT2 state processing A according to the seventh embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the AT2 state processing A according to the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. 171 above. (b) It is the figure which showed an example of the lottery table. (a) is a flow chart showing the flow of judgment state processing B according to the seventh embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the judgment state processing B according to the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. 171 above. (b) A diagram showing an example of an AT2 initial number lottery table. (c) It is the figure which showed an example of the lottery table. 181 is a flowchart showing the flow of AT2 state processing B according to Embodiment 7, and is a diagram corresponding to AT2 state processing B according to Embodiment 6 shown in FIG. 180 above; FIG. 181(a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the pulled-back state process B according to the seventh embodiment, and corresponds to the pulled-back state process B according to the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. 181. FIG. (b) It is the figure which showed the example of a transition of AT state in a high navigation state. (a) It is a diagram showing the flow of effects when the effect state shifts in the order of AT2 state→judge state→pull-back state in the high navigation state, and then shifts to the normal state in the low navigation state. (b) It is a diagram showing the flow of effects when the effect state transitions in the order of the AT2 state to the LMT state in the high navigation state and then transitions to the normal state in the low navigation state. 240(a) is a diagram showing the flow of effects when the effect state shifts in the order of AT2 state→judge state→pull-back state→AT2 state in the high navigation state, and shows the flow of the effect described using FIG. 240(a). It shows the continuation. (b) In the high-navigation state, the production state shifts in the order of AT2 state→LMT state, then shifts to the normal state of the low-navigation state, and then shifts again to the high-navigation state, where the production state changes from the normal state to the final announcement state. It is the figure which showed the flow of the production|presentation when it transfers in order of AT1 state, and has shown the continuation of the production|presentation demonstrated using FIG.240(b). (a) It is a diagram showing an example of notification when a winning combination is established in the AT2 state. (b) A diagram showing an example of notification when a winning combination is established in the LMT state. (a) It is the figure which showed the flow of the production|presentation in the case of correct|amending AT2 initial times. (b) It is a diagram showing the flow of effects when the number of remaining games is falsely displayed in the AT2 state. (b) It is a diagram showing the flow of effects when the number of remaining games is falsely displayed in the AT2 state. (a) It is the figure which showed the flow of the production|presentation in the case of performing a result display after transfer to AT2 state. (b) is a diagram showing the flow of effects when the result is not displayed after the end of the AT2 state, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 243(a). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an outline of the invention 8-1 of the present application; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 8-2 of the present application; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 8-3 of the present application; It is the figure which showed the state transition of PUSH button operation, cross key operation, throwing operation, and lever operation. (A) is a diagram showing an example of various operations for switching display between a normal screen and a demo screen in chronological order. (B) is a diagram showing an example of various operations in time series when volume adjustment is performed using the setting screen. (C) is a diagram showing an example of various operations in time series when volume adjustment is performed without displaying a setting screen. (D) and (E) are diagrams showing an example of other various operations in chronological order. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing in chronological order the character selection operation when the production state transitions from the judge state to the AT2 state in the high navigation state. (A) It is the figure which showed Example 5 of character selection operation in time series. (B) is a diagram showing Example 6 of the character select operation in chronological order. (A) It is the figure which showed Example 6 of character selection operation in time series. (B) It is the figure which showed Example 7 of character selection operation in time series. (C) It is the figure which showed Example 8 of character selection operation in time series. (A) It is the figure which showed the modification 1 of character selection operation in time series. (B) is a diagram showing modification 2 of the character select operation in chronological order. It is a diagram showing the outline of the invention 9-1 of the present application. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 9-2 of the present application; FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to Embodiment 9 of the present invention; FIG. 20 is a front view of the slot machine according to Embodiment 9 of the present invention with the front door opened. FIG. 20 is a circuit block diagram of a control section of a slot machine according to Embodiment 9 of the present invention; (a) A plan view showing an array of symbols provided on reels of a slot machine according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention. (b) A diagram showing pay lines of the slot machine according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention. (a) A diagram showing types of winning combinations (including activated combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and activation or payout of each winning combination in a three-coin bet game. (b) A diagram showing types of winning combinations (including activated combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and activation or payout of each winning combination in a two-coin bet game. (a) A transition diagram of a game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. FIG. (b) A transition diagram of an AT-based game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. FIG. (a) A diagram showing a lottery table used for internal lottery processing for a winning combination in a three-coin bet game. (b) It is a diagram for explaining the correct operation order of the pushing order of the slot machine according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention. (c) A diagram showing part of a lottery table used for internal lottery processing for a winning combination in a two-coin bet game. It is the figure which corresponded the display data and the lighting mode of the payout number indicator 127. FIG. (a) shows an image of an effect table provided in the first sub-controller 400; (b) It is the figure which showed an example of the LMT state production table. (c) is a diagram showing a modification of the LMT state rendering table. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU 404 of a first sub-controller 400; 4B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400; (c) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. (d) It is a flow chart of the effect control processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU 504 of a second sub-controller 500; (b) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. (c) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. (d) A flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. 266(a) is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the bet number setting/start operation acceptance process in step S102 of FIG. 265; (b) A flow chart showing in detail the flow of high navigation state update processing in step S201 of FIG. 269(a). (a) is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of effect state control processing A in step S106 of FIG.265. (b) It is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the process common to every game in step S401 of FIG. 270(a). (a) It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the low navigation state process A of step S404 of Fig.270 (a). (b) A flow chart showing in detail the flow of high navigation state transition processing in step S601 of FIG. 271(a). FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of high navigation state processing A in step S405 of FIG. 270(a). FIG. 273 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of high navigation state common processing A in step S801 of FIG. 272. FIG. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of normal state processing A in step S803 of FIG. 272; FIG. FIG. 273 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of final notification state processing A in step S805 of FIG. 272; FIG. 273(a) is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of AT1 state processing A in step S807 of FIG. 272; (b) A diagram showing an example of a lottery table used for the lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions. 273 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of AT2 state processing A in step S811 of FIG. 272; FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of pullback state processing A in step S813 of FIG. 272; FIG. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing in detail the instruction information setting process in step S814 of FIG. 272; FIG. 265. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the production|presentation state control process B of FIG.265 S113. 281 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of high navigation state processing B in step S1704 of FIG. 280; FIG. 282 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of normal state processing B in step S1802 of FIG. 281; FIG. FIG. 282 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of final notification state processing B in step S1804 of FIG. 281; FIG. FIG. 284 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of AT1 start setting processing in step S2006 of FIG. 283; FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of AT1 state processing B in step S1806 of FIG. 281; FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of AT2 state processing B in step S1810 of FIG. 281; FIG. FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of pullback state processing B in step S1812 of FIG. 281; FIG. FIG. 282 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of LMT state processing B in step S1813 of FIG. 281; FIG. FIG. 266 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state ending process in step S114 of FIG. 265; FIG. FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of number display-related processing in step S3301 of FIG. 267; FIG. (a) It is the figure which showed an example of control of the update of the count value of various counters, and a display in a time series. (b) It is the figure which showed the specific example 1 of the update of the count value of various counters, and a display. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 of updating and displaying count values of various counters; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 of updating and displaying count values of various counters; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 of updating and displaying count values of various counters; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 5 of updating and displaying count values of various counters; (a) It is the figure which showed the specific example 6 of the update of the count value of various counters, and a display. (b) It is the figure which showed the specific example 7 of the update of the count value of various counters, and a display. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a specific example 8 of updating and displaying count values of various counters; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a specific example 9 of updating and displaying count values of various counters; (a), (b) It is the figure which showed the update of the count value of various counters, and the specific example 10 of a display. (c) is a diagram showing an example of screen transition of the three-bet game described with reference to FIG. 299(a). (d) is a diagram showing an example of the screen transition of the double bet game described with reference to FIG. 299(b). 299(a) is a diagram showing an example of screen transition when a 2-coin game is performed after the 3-coin game explained with reference to FIG. 299(a), and then a 3-coin game is performed again. (b) is a diagram showing an example of screen transition of the double-bet game described with reference to FIG. 299(b). (c) and (d) are diagrams showing Modified Example 1 of updating and display of count values of various counters. (a), (b) It is the figure which showed the update of the count value of various counters, and the modified example 2 of a display. It is a diagram showing an outline of the invention 10-1 of the present application. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an outline of the invention 10-2 of the present application; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 10-3 of the present application; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an outline of the invention 10-4 of the present application; (A) and (B) are diagrams showing common outlines of inventions 11-1 to 11-5 of the present application. (C) is a diagram showing features of Invention 11-1 of the present application. (A) is a diagram showing features of Invention 11-2 of the present application. (B) is a diagram showing features of Invention 11-3 of the present application and a conventional example. (C) is a diagram showing features of Invention 11-4 of the present application. (A) is a diagram showing features of Invention 11-5 of the present application. (B) and (C) are diagrams showing modifications of the present invention 11-5. FIG. 20 is a game state transition diagram of the main control unit of the slot machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing conditions for shifting to the LMT state in the high navigation state of the slot machine according to the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining clearing processing at the end of the high navigation state and setting change processing of the slot machine according to the eleventh embodiment, and a winning combination that can be shifted to the high navigation state. 29 is a flow chart showing the flow of high navigation state transition processing of the slot machine according to the eleventh embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing the flow of high navigation state common processing A of the slot machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is a table comparing high navigation state start setting processing 1 and high navigation state start setting processing 2 of the slot machine according to the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the flow of judge state processing A of the slot machine according to the eleventh embodiment, and is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a release lottery table used for a release lottery according to the judge mode. FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the flow of AT2 state processing A of the slot machine according to the eleventh embodiment, and schematically showing the contents of a judge mode lottery table used for judge mode lottery. 29 is a flow chart showing the flow of instruction information setting processing of the slot machine according to the eleventh embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing the flow of high navigation state processing B of the slot machine according to the eleventh embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing the flow of AT2 state processing B of the slot machine according to Embodiment 11. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the flow of standby state processing B and LMT1 state processing B of the slot machine according to Embodiment 11. FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram specifically explaining the control of the effect state of the slot machine according to the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram specifically explaining the control of the effect state of the slot machine according to the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram specifically explaining the relationship between the specific flag of the slot machine and the high navigation state start setting process according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing conditions for shifting to the LMT state in the high navigation state of the slot machine according to the eleventh embodiment (modification). FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an outline of inventions 12-1 and 12-2 of the present application; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 12-3 of the present application;

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

[Embodiment 1]
In the slot machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of reels, into which a predetermined number of game media are inserted and on which a plurality of types of symbols are respectively applied, start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the receipt of the rotation start instructing operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of wins is determined by a lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instructing operation, If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game is finished, and if not, the game medium is discarded. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of the game table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown) are housed in the center of the main body 101 and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. and a light-receiving portion, a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line. The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 to be activated.

The notification lamp 123 informs the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. It's a lamp to let you know. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment lights up until the bonus game ends after the bonus notification for notifying the bonus determination. Note that the notification lamp 123 may be lit before the bonus is announced (during the bonus or just before the bonus is announced). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation executing device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110 to 112. . More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped.

Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be called the first stop reel, the reel to be stopped by the second stop operation may be called the second stop reel, and the reel to be stopped by the third stop operation may be called the third stop reel.

Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137-139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110-112 is called the operation order or the pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be lit to inform the player.

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the AT system game state of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can recognize the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190 .

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) changes to the front of the slot machine 100 (game display). (user side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

It should be noted that, even if the display device is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen is rectangular, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Note that the notification lamp 123 and the high-navigation state lamp 190 notify the predetermined information by lighting the lamps, but the manner of notification is not limited to the lighting of the lamps. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a partial area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a full liquid crystal slot machine, the area near the reels 110 to 112 may be used). In the following description, the lighting of the notification lamp 123 or the high-navigation state lamp 190 is meant to include notification by other production devices (for example, a display device, etc.) having the same function.

<Inside the housing>
FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. The main body 101 is a box-shaped body surrounded by an upper plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a lower plate 264 and a rear plate 242, and having an open front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board housing case 210 containing a main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242. Three reels 110-112 are arranged below. On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the left side plate 260, a first sub control board housing the first sub control board constituting the first sub control unit is stored. A case 220 is provided. In addition, an external centralized terminal board 248 connected to the main control board and outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in the bucket) is disposed on the lower plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is arranged, and a power switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252 . The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate when the door is closed.

The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies power to each of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, etc., which will be described later. Supplied to the control unit and each device. In addition, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided for supplying power to predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after external power is cut off. there is

A medal auxiliary storage box 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal dispensing device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind it (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 265 , and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101 . there is

The front door 102 is hinged to the side plate 260 on the left side of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276. Above the liquid crystal display device 157, a production device 160 and a production control board (illustrated) for controlling the production device 160 are provided. omitted), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. Below the liquid crystal display device 157, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals, and a path 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals onto the medal receiving tray 161. there is Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 180 .

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and stopping of the reels. A ROM 306 for storing positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A WDT (watch dog timer) 314 is mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a random number generation circuit 316 that is activated when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). ).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110, index sensor of the reel 111, index sensor of the reel 112, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detects a put operation when The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the respective reels 110 to 112. Each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, the L become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (win line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, accumulated number display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 for driving the indicator 126, the payout number indicator 127, and the high navigation status lamp 190) is provided.

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output. In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 detects that the voltage value of the power supply is a predetermined value (this embodiment). 9v), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. Signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. there is This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. are doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like. are provided.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

The first sub-controller 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422. The drive circuit 422 is connected to various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input/output interface. 123, etc.) are connected.

A drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163 is provided in the first sub-controller 400, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. A timer 512 is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The second sub-controller 500 also has a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the second sub-controller 500 as a whole, image display data, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 516 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4(a), the pattern arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. In addition, FIG. 1(a) is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols provided on each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (20 frames numbered 0 to 19 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (eight types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in this embodiment, the frame numbered 19 on the left reel 110 has a "bell pattern", the frame numbered 19 on the middle reel 111 has a "blank pattern", and the frame numbered 18 on the right reel 112 has a "seven 2 Designs” are arranged respectively. In the following description, "Seven 1 pattern" may be referred to as "Blue 7 (design)", and "Seven 2 design" may be referred to as "Red 7 (design)".

<Winning line>
Next, the winning line will be described with reference to FIG. 4(b). FIG. 1(b) is a diagram showing the winning lines of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

The symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 1) is displayed on the left reel upper stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 2). The symbol displayed is the left reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 3) is the left reel bottom stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (4 shown in the figure). position (also referred to as symbol position 4) is the middle reel upper stage symbol, the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 5) is the middle reel middle stage symbol, The symbol displayed on the lower stage of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 6) is displayed on the middle reel lower stage symbol and the upper stage of the right reel 112 (position 7 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 7). The symbol displayed is the right reel upper stage symbol, the symbol displayed in the middle stage of the right reel 112 (the position of 8 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 8) is the right reel middle stage symbol, and the symbol displayed in the right reel 112 lower stage (9 shown in the figure) (also referred to as symbol position 9) are called right reel lower symbols, and each symbol on each reel 110 to 112 is vertically three-dimensionally displayed on each reel 110 to 112 through a symbol display window 113. , a total of nine are displayed.

In this embodiment, one prize line 114 is provided, which is a middle prize line L1 composed of a left reel middle pattern (symbol position 2), a middle reel middle pattern (symbol position 5) and a right reel middle pattern (symbol position 8). ing. The winning line 114 is a line set at a symbol stop position that can be visually recognized through the reel window 113, and is a symbol corresponding to a winning combination to be described later with reference to FIGS. This is the line on which it is determined whether or not the combination has been displayed. FIG. 4(b) shows the middle winning line L1. A valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “valid line”) is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media.

The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment can bet three or two (hereinafter, "bet" may be referred to as "bet"), and when the number of inserted medals is less than two, None of the winning lines are activated, and the winning line L1 is activated when three or two medals are betted. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 .

Also, the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, a right-down winning line consisting of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel lower symbols, and left reel lower symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel upper symbols. A total of three pay lines 114 may be set as the valid pay lines 114, or the number of pay lines 114 corresponding to the number of bets may be set as the valid pay lines 114.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5(a) and 5(b). FIG. 10(a) shows the types of winning combinations (including activated combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the activation or payout of each winning combination in a three-coin bet game. (b) is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including active combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and activation or payout of each winning combination in a two-coin bet game.

The winning combination of the slot machine 100 includes special combinations (special combination 1, special combination 2), general combinations (replay combination 1 to replay combination 13, small combination 1 to small combination 5), and the like. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Of the winning combinations in this embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations that shift to a special game state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. Further, the replay combination 1 to replay combination 13 are combinations that can be replayed without inserting new medals. These winning hands are sometimes referred to as "working hands". Further, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. Winning a special role 2 and a replay role 1 to a replay role 13 are included.

The special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations (operating combination) that shift to a special game state by winning a prize. In this example, the special combination 1 is a combination that can be won only in the 3-coin bet game, and the special combination 2 is a combination that can be won only in the 2-coin bet game. It should be noted that no medals are paid out for winning this role. The corresponding symbol combination is "seven 1-seven 1-seven 2" for special role 1 (BB1) and "BAR-BAR-seven 1" for special role 2 (BB2).

When the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to this internally won combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special combination 1, the main control unit 300 shifts the game state to the internal winning state of the special combination 1 (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2). Further, when the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special combination 2, the main control unit 300 shifts the game state to the internal winning state of the special combination 2 (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3). .

This flag is kept ON until the internal winning combination is won, and the state in which the internally winning combination is likely to be won in the next and subsequent games. That is, even if the special role is not won in the game in which the special role 1 or the special role 2 is internally won, the special role will be internally won in the game after the next time, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (for example, special If the winning combination 1 is internally won, the pattern combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2 (BB1)") will be in a state where it is easy to win all together. This special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2) and special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

The main control unit 300 shifts the game state to a special game state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special prize 1 or the special prize 2. Furthermore, in this special game state, when a predetermined number of payouts (in this example, 110 for winning by BB1 and 55 for winning by BB2) are paid out, a replay low probability state (hereinafter, this state will be referred to as RT1) there is). The special game state (RT4) and the low replay probability state (RT1) will be described later.

The “replay role (replay role 1 to replay role 13)” is a winning role (operating role) that can be played without inserting medals (game media) in the next game due to winning, No medals will be paid out. In addition, the corresponding symbol combination is "replay-replay-replay" for replay role 1 (normal replay), "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1" for replay role 2 (effect replay 1), and replay role 3 (Effect replay 2) is as shown in FIG. 5, such as "seven 1-seven 2-seven 1".

“Small wins (small wins 1 to 5)” are winning wins in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning. As shown in FIG. 5, the role 2 (watermelon 1) is "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon". Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in the figure. In the case of "ANY-cherry-ANY", the symbol of the middle reel 111 should be "cherry", and the symbols of the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 may be any symbols.

<Reel stop control>
Next, the outline of the stop control of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. For reel stop control, one of a plurality of types of predetermined reel stop control data is selected based on a predetermined condition (for example, the result of an internal lottery process for a winning combination to be described later), and the selected reel is stopped. Based on control data.

In this embodiment, so-called pull-in control (frame sliding control) is performed. The pull-in control shifts the stop positions of the reels 110-112 within a certain number of frames (the number of symbols) after the player operates the stop buttons 137-139. refers to control. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300 . Each reel stop data consists of permissive control that permits the symbol combination of a predetermined winning combination to be displayed together on the winning line, and prohibition control that the symbol combination of any winning combination is not displayed together on the winning line. , is roughly divided into.

Examples of the allowable control are, for example, when a winning combination is internally won, or when a special combination is internally won (while the flag is being carried over), and the timing at which the player operates each stop button 137 to 139. Control is performed so that the symbol combination of the winning combination is displayed in a uniform manner within the range of the number of frames, even if it is bad. However, since it is only "accepted", there are cases where the symbol combination is not complete depending on the timing of operating each of the stop buttons 137-139.

For example, when the small win 2 (watermelon 1) is internally won, the watermelon pattern is arranged in more than 4 frames. don't stop at

Of course, depending on the arrangement of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 and the number of drawn frames, there are cases where the symbols are aligned 100%. For example, since the replay symbol arrangement interval corresponding to the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is a maximum of 4 frames, if the replay combination 1 is internally won, the player wins 100% regardless of the timing.

On the other hand, an example of prohibition control is, for example, when the internal lottery result is a loss and the internal winning of the special role is not in progress (flag carried over), and the timing of operating each stop button 137 to 139 by the player. At best, the control is performed so that the symbol combination of the winning combination is not displayed together within the range of the above number of frames.

<Types of game state>
Next, the types and transitions of game states of the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 6A is a game state transition diagram of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. FIG.

The main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a low replay probability state (RT1), a high replay probability state and a special prize 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a replay high probability state and a special prize 2 internal winning state. It has a state (RT3) and a special game state (RT4). In the present embodiment, these four game states are referred to as RT-based game states. In addition, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls a state related to so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter referred to as an AT-based game state), and according to the AT-based game state determined by the main control unit 300, The first sub-control section 400 is designed to set the game state. The game state of the AT system will be described later with reference to FIG. 6(b).

In addition, the replay low probability state (RT1) is a state in which the probability of operating the condition device related to the replay combination does not change (default state), a special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a special combination 2 internal winning state. (RT3) and the special game state (RT4) are also states in which the probability of activation of the condition device relating to the replay combination varies from the default state.

<Lottery table>
FIG. 7(a) is a diagram showing a lottery table used for internal lottery processing for a winning combination in a 3-bet game, and FIG. 7(c) is a diagram for internal lottery processing for a winning combination in a 2-bet game. It is a figure which shows a part of lottery table used. The horizontal axis represents each game state (RT type game state), and the vertical axis represents the lottery value of each winning combination. In addition, the item "No." in each figure is a number attached to each lottery result for convenience, and in the case of a single role, one "No." corresponds to one "condition device" However, in the case of duplicate hands, one "No." corresponds to multiple "conditional devices."

Although the lottery table used in the 2-bet game is different from the lottery table used in the 3-bet game, FIG. omitted. In this example, the expected value of game media obtained by a small winning combination is set to be higher in the 2-ply game than in the 3-ply game.

The internal winning probability of a winning combination in each gaming state, which will be explained later, is obtained from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306, and the numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each winning combination is obtained at the time of the internal lottery. It is obtained by a value divided by numerical data within a numerical range (eg, 65535). For example, in the replay low probability state (RT1), the lottery value for the small winning combination 2 is 512, and the winning probability for the small winning combination 1 is 512/65536×100≈0.8%. The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination and loss.

A random number value obtained as a result of executing an internal lottery is determined as a value corresponding to lottery data corresponding to which combination, and an internal lottery combination is determined. Setting 1 to setting 6 are prepared for this lottery data with different winning probabilities of at least one combination, and the staff of the game parlor can arbitrarily select and set any of the setting values. It should be noted that the internal winning probability shown in this figure is an example, and the probability is not limited to this.

Hereinafter, the RT system game state of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The low replay probability state is the lowest (disadvantageous to the player) game state among the other game states (for example, game states excluding the special game state) in which the internal winning probability of replay is the lowest, and is referred to as the normal game state. There is also In the replay low-probability state, a winning combination for internal winning is selected by referring to the lottery table in the row of "RT1" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 7(a).

Winning hands that are internally won in the replay low probability state include special hand 1 (condition device No. 1, only 3 bet games), special hand 2 (not shown, only 2 bet games), replay hand 1 ( Condition device No. 2), replay hands 2, 4 to 10 (condition device No. 3), replay hands 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13 (condition device No. 4), small hand 1 to small There is a role 5 (condition device No. 5 to 9). If the winning combination is not won, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. It should be noted that the fact that the symbol combination relating to the winning line is not stopped may be referred to as "losing". In addition, there is a case where the fact that the player did not win the winning role is expressed as "won the wrong way".

Here, "replay hands 2, 4 to 10" are replay hands 2, replay hands 4, replay hands 5, replay hands 6, replay hands 7, replay hands 8, replay hands 9 , and replay combination 10 are internally elected at the same time. In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to which combination is displayed is determined according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order (in this example, when the stop operation is performed by pressing in the reverse direction), the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 2 is displayed. Displayed on the winning line, otherwise, replay combination 4, replay combination 5, replay combination 6, replay combination 7, replay combination according to the timing of the stop operation of each reel 110 to 112 8, a symbol combination corresponding to either a replay combination 9 or a replay combination 10 is displayed on the winning line. It should be noted that, like this "replayed combination 2, 4 to 10", there is a case where the combination in which the winning combination is determined by the order of operations is called a "push order combination".

Further, "replay hands 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13" are replay hands 3, replay hands 4, replay hands 6, replay hands 8, replay hands 10, replay hands 11 , replay combination 12, and replay combination 13 are internally elected at the same time. In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to which combination is displayed is determined according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order (in this example, when the stop operation is performed by pressing in the reverse direction), the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 3 is displayed. Displayed on the winning line, otherwise, replay combination 4, replay combination 6, replay combination 8, replay combination 10, replay combination according to the timing of the stop operation of each reel 110 to 112 11, a replay combination 12, and a replay combination 13 are displayed on the winning line.

When the "small winning combination 4" is internally won, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (bell) is displayed on the winning line in accordance with the operation order of the player (FIG. 7 ( a) See remarks). More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order, "Bell-Bell-Bell" is displayed on the winning line, and 11 medals are paid out ( bell award). On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed according to the correct operation order, "Bell-Bell-Bell" is not displayed on the winning line (losing).

In addition, even if the "small win 4" is internally won and the stop operation is not performed according to the correct operation order, there is a case where the player wins a one-coin win where one medal is paid out. If the stop operation is performed in accordance with the predetermined incorrect operation order, the win is won, and if the stop operation is performed in accordance with the other incorrect operation order, the win is not awarded, It is configured so as not to pay out medals.

Further, the "small winning combination 4" is composed of the "small winning combination 4a" and the "small winning combination 4b", and when the "small winning combination 4a" is internally won, "Bell-Bell-Bell" is selected according to the order of operation of the player. ” is displayed on the pay line. On the other hand, if the “small win 4b” is internally won, “Bell-Bell-Bell” is displayed on the pay line regardless of the operation order. It may be configured as

Here, with reference to FIG. 7(b), the operation sequence for the correct answer of "small winning combination 4" will be described in detail. "Small role 4" is exactly six of "small role 4LCR", "small role 4LRC", "small role 4CLR", "small role 4CRL", "small role 4RLC", and "small role 4RCL". , and a different correct operation order is assigned to each of the subdivided "small wins 4". It should be noted that the range of the lottery data associated with each of the six subdivided "small wins 4" is the same.

For example, when the "small win 4LCR" of the "small win 4" is internally won, the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The stop operation is the correct operation, and the other stop operations are the incorrect operations. Further, when the "small winning combination 4 CRL" of the "small winning combination 4" is internally won, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110. The stop operation is the correct operation.

FIG. 6(a) shows that when the special combination 1 is internally elected (when the condition (A) is satisfied), the state shifts to the special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2), which will be described later. When the special combination 2 is internally elected (when the condition (B) is satisfied), it is indicated that the state shifts to the special combination 2 internal election state (RT3) described later.

In addition, in the present embodiment, until the special combination 2 is internally won in the replay low probability state (RT1), the two-coin bet game is urged by performing the notification for urging the two-coin bet game.

<Special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), Special role 2 internal winning state (RT3)>
Special combination internal winning state (RT2) and special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) (hereinafter collectively referred to as "special combination internal winning state") are replay low probability states (RT1 ), the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is set to ON, and the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing. By doing, it is a game state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the special role corresponding to this flag can be displayed.

In the special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), the internal winning winning combination is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the "RT2" column on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. In RT3), the lottery table in the row of "RT3" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. Winning hands internally won in the special role internal winning state include replay hand 1, replay hands 2, 4 to 10, replay hands 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13, small hand 1 to small hand 4. There is

If the winning combination is not won, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. In addition, in FIG. 6(a), when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is displayed in the special role internal winning state (when the condition (C) is satisfied), a special game to be described later is performed. A transition to state (RT4) is shown.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3), the three-coin bet game is urged by ending the notification for urging the two-coin bet game.

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special game state (RT4) is the most advantageous game state for the player among all the game states. In the special game state, the lottery table in the row of "RT4" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. The winning combination internally won in the special game state is only the small combination 5. - 特許庁Also, if the winning combination is not won, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed.

FIG. 6(a) shows that in the special game state (RT4), when the prescribed number of coins is paid out (when the condition (D) is satisfied), the state is shifted to the replay low probability state (RT1). ing. Specifically, when the special game state is entered based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1, when more than 110 medals are paid out, the replay low probability state (RT1) is entered. transition to In addition, when the state is shifted to the special game state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 2, the state is shifted to the replay low probability state (RT1) when more than 55 medals are paid out. .

In the present embodiment, the special game state ends when the specified number of payouts is executed. For example, the game may end when a prize is won eight times, or when a predetermined number of games (for example, six times) are played. That is, condition (D) shown in FIG. 6A is not limited to this example.

<Transition of game state of AT system>
Next, the game state of the AT system will be described with reference to FIG. 6(b). FIG. 6B is a transition diagram of the AT system game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 .

The game state of the AT system is roughly classified into a low navigation state and a high navigation state, as shown in FIG. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode. The high-navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is higher than in the low-navigation state, and is also called an AT mode. Here, the operation navigator means that an internal winning combination (in this example, replay combination 2, 4 to 10, replay combination 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13, or a small combination 4) is won. In this case, an effect to notify the correct operation order (push order) (details will be described later) and an effect to notify the operation timing (for example, grouping the reel patterns into one or more groups (color coding, symbols and numbers given) and suggesting one or more groups (colors, symbols, numbers, etc.), or an effect that notifies both the correct operation order (push order) and operation timing.

That is, operation navigation refers to an effect that notifies the content of a stop operation for obtaining medals, or the content of a stop operation for shifting to an advantageous game state or maintaining an advantageous game state.

Operation navigation will now be described with reference to FIGS. 7(b) and 8. FIG. In this embodiment, the payout number display 127 and effect image display device 157 are used to execute operation navigation. FIG. 7(b) is a diagram for explaining the order of correct operation for the pushing order of the slot machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention, and FIG. It is a diagram.

For example, the display data 01 is data suggesting a stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel, the display data 02 is data suggesting a stop operation with the middle reel 111 as the first stop reel, and the display data 03 is , and data suggesting a stop operation with the right reel 112 as the first stop reel.

Therefore, when "replay hands 2, 4 to 10" or "replay hands 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13" are internally won in the AT mode, the first stop reel is the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is correct, the display data 03 suggesting that the first stop operation is right is selected, and the payout number indicator 127 displays a lighting mode corresponding to the display data 03, and an effect image is displayed. Device 157 displays an image (eg, the characters “--1”) that suggests that the first stopping reel is right reel 112 .

The display data 04 is data suggesting a stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel, the middle reel 111 as the second stop reel, and the right reel 112 as the third stop reel, and the display data 05 is the first stop reel. is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the middle reel 111. Display data 06 is the first stop reel, the middle reel 111, and the second stop reel. Data suggesting a stop operation with the left reel 110 and the third stop reel as the right reel 112, and the display data 07 are the first stop reel as the middle reel 111, the second stop reel as the right reel 112, and the third stop reel as the left reel. Data suggesting a stop operation with the reel 110, the display data 08 is data suggesting a stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112, the second stop reel as the left reel 110, and the third stop reel as the middle reel 112. , the display data 09 is data suggesting a stop operation with the right reel 112 as the first stop reel, the middle reel 111 as the second stop reel, and the left reel 110 as the third stop reel.

Therefore, when the small win 4CLR of the "small win 4" is internally won in the AT mode, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is correct, the display data 06 suggesting that the first stop operation is middle, the second stop operation is left, and the third stop operation is right is selected. and the effect image display device 157 indicates that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. An image (for example, the characters “213”) is displayed.

In this embodiment, based on the lighting mode of the payout number indicator 127, it is possible to determine whether the internal winning combination is a replay combination or a small combination of 4. However, for example, the stop operation of the correct answer for the small winning combination 4 may be three choices like the replay winning combination, and the small winning combination 4 may also be notified using the display data 01-03. In this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode. In addition, it is also possible to configure the stop operation of the correct answer for the replay combination to be six options such as the small combination 4, and to notify the replay combination using the display data 04 to 09 as well. Also in this case, it is not possible to determine the internal winning combination only by the lighting mode.

In the present embodiment, the low navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of manipulation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of manipulation navigation is higher than in the low navigation state. The state in which the operation navigation is not executed and the high navigation state may be set as the state in which the operation navigation is executed. When the stop operation is performed according to the operation content of the operation navigation, a result advantageous to the player is brought about, so the high navigation state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state. Here, the term “advantageous” specifically refers to the total number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machine as compared to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets when playing the game for a predetermined period of time. It refers to the ratio, the so-called payout rate (ball output rate).

In this embodiment, when a certain condition is satisfied in the low navigation state (for example, when winning a winning combination other than losing), the game shifts to the normal state of the high navigation state. After that, as shown in FIG. 6(c), for example, the transition is made in the order of fixed announcement state→AT1 state→AT2 state, and from this AT2 state, the route moves to the normal game state via the withdrawal state; There is a route for shifting (returning) from the AT2 state to the AT1 state again. In this embodiment, there is one set of AT states (AT1 state and AT2 state), and in principle, when two sets are completed, the state shifts to the pullback state.

Here, the AT1 state is an AT state in which the progress of the game is controlled by the number of games (AT state of game number management), and ends when, for example, a certain number of games (for example, 20 G) are completed. On the other hand, the AT2 state is an AT state in which the progress of the game is controlled by the difference in the number of game media (AT state of management of the difference in the number of game media). end if

In addition, the AT1 state and AT2 state both have a ball payout rate set to a value greater than 1. It is an AT state in which the ball rate is set low, and the AT2 state is an AT state in which the ball payout rate is set higher than that in the AT1 state. In the AT1 state, for example, when the pressing order bell is won, the probability of operation navigation being executed is lower than in the AT2 state, or the pressing order is notified by two-choice navigation (two-choice operation navigation), or , and by performing operation navigation that combines these, the payout rate is lower than in the AT2 state.

Here, "two-choice navigation (two-choice operation navigation)" is a kind of operation navigation, and the operation order (push order) of the correct stop operation, the timing of the stop operation, etc. are notified with two options. Say. For example, when the small win 4CLR of the "small win 4" is internally won in the AT mode, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The stop operation is the correct answer, but in 2-choice navigation, while suggesting that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, an image that conceals the operation order of the second stop reel and the third stop reel (for example, (image including letters and numbers “?1?”) is displayed on the effect image display device 157 .

In this example, the player performs a stop operation with the middle reel 111 as the first stop reel, the left reel 110 as the second stop reel, and the right reel 112 as the third stop reel, or the middle reel 111 as the first stop reel, A stop operation is performed by selecting either one of the stop operation with the right reel 112 as the second stop reel and the left reel 110 as the third stop reel (selecting one from two kinds of pressing orders). Become.

Further, although details will be described later, if a certain condition is satisfied in the high navigation state, the vehicle shifts to the LMT (limit) state.

<AT system state transition>
FIG. 6(b) is a diagram showing the effect state in each game state of the AT system. Each game state of the AT system is subdivided and managed as shown in FIG. 6(b), which is called an effect state. Specifically, the low-navigation state rendering state includes a normal state, and the high-navigation state rendering state includes a normal state, a fixed notification state, a retraction state, an AT1 state, an AT2 state, and an LMT (limit) state. Note that the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state are, in principle, states in which the number of paid balls increases.

Here, the limit state means, in principle, the remaining 20 games or less in the high-navigation state, that is, the presentation state from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high-navigation state. In this embodiment, when the high-navigation state becomes 20 or less games remaining, an ending effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ED effect") suggesting the end of the high-navigation state is executed.

<Production table>
Next, the effect table provided in the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 9(a) shows an image of an effect table provided in the first sub-controller 400. FIG. The storage means (for example, the ROM 406 and the RAM 408 shown in FIG. 3) of the first sub-control section 400 stores an effect table provided for each effect state. The first sub-control unit 400, in the command processing (step S3604) of the first sub-control unit main processing to be described later, effect information included in the command received from the main control unit 300 (for example, effect state, high navigation state counter, Production state counter, etc.) is acquired, and in the subsequent production control process (step S3605), the production table corresponding to the production state, etc. is referred to, and production corresponding to the production state counter, etc. is performed. For example, when the current effect state is the AT1 state, the effect table corresponding to the AT1 state (AT1 state effect table) is referred to, and processing such as reading effect data for executing the later-described AT1 effect from the ROM 406 is performed. If the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

Further, when the current effect state is the LMT state, the effect table corresponding to the LMT state (LMT state effect table) is referred to, and processing such as reading effect data for executing the LMT effect described later from the ROM 406 is performed. If the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

FIG. 9(b) is a diagram showing an example of the LMT state rendering table. When the effect state included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is the LMT state, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the LMT state effect table as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the corresponding opportunity (starting condition, end condition, etc. of the performance) has arrived, and when the opportunity has arrived, the performance corresponding to the counter is performed.

Specifically, when effect control is performed according to the LMT state effect table shown in FIG. When the pressing operation (lever on) is received, from among multiple types of effects A1 to A3 using the lottery table for setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 9 (b) (2), according to the current setting value to select a predetermined effect, perform processing such as reading effect data for executing the effect from the ROM 406, and execute setting suggestion effect A (for example, display of a character image).

Also, when the value of the effect state counter is 0 (the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0) and the third stop operation is received, the lottery table for setting suggestion effect B shown in FIG. Select a predetermined effect from among a plurality of types of effects B1 to B10 according to the current set value, perform processing such as reading effect data for executing the effect from the ROM 406, etc., and perform setting suggestion effect B (for example, the background image of the end screen).

Further, although the details will be described later, in the case of a two-coin bet game, in the case of controlling to continuously display a specific scene (not to display the subsequent scene) in the interlocking effect, the main control unit 300 is in the effect state. Since the counter value is not updated, the first sub-control unit 400 continues to display the scene corresponding to the same rendering state counter value. It should be noted that the method of controlling to continuously display a specific scene (not to display subsequent scenes) in the interlocked effect is not limited to this example. It may be configured not to transmit the command for displaying the subsequent scene in the presentation.

Note that the effect mode, type, determination method, etc. of the setting suggestion effect are not limited to this example. For example, as shown in FIG. , the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be changed. For example, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be higher or lower when the effect state counter (the number of remaining games in the LMT state) is larger than when it is small.

<Operation of the slot machine>
Based on the above characteristics, the processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt is disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables to be stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the WDT 314 is permitted to operate, and the initialization is performed. Set values, etc.

In step S102, a bet number setting/start operation acceptance process (details will be described later) is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted, and preparations are made to send an insert command indicating that the medals have been inserted. When the player wins the replay role in the previous game, the processing of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so the player does not need to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, winning line determination processing is performed to determine the number of inserted medals and to determine an effective winning line.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is obtained, and internal winning combination lottery processing is performed. In the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the acquired random number, and the result of this internal lottery is displayed. Prepare to send the internal lottery command to the first sub-controller 400 . As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the working combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is turned on.

In step S105, reel stop data selection processing for selecting reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery processing. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300. FIG. Also, in step S105, preparations are made to transmit a reel stop data command containing information about the selected reel stop data to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S106, an effect control process A (details will be described later) relating to the control of the game state of the AT system is executed based on the start lever operation. In step S107, the process for production|presentation is performed. In this effect processing, freeze effect control and the like are performed.

Here, the freeze effect refers to a effect that makes the originally planned effect seem to be interrupted in the middle, a effect that makes the slot machine stop responding, or the like. Furthermore, with regard to light emission, for example, stopping the change in lighting mode is referred to as freezing. With regard to sound output, for example, continuing to output the same sound is referred to as freezing. Stopping may be referred to as freezing. In step S108, reel rotation start processing is executed to start rotation of all the reels 110-112.

In step S109, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, it is possible to accept the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when one of the stop buttons is pressed, a stop table of reel stop data is created in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. One of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of frames to be drawn set in the stop table. When all the reels 110-112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S110. In this step S109, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (more specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command, the second stop operation, and the for the stop button reception 2 command, and for the third stop operation, prepare to transmit the stop button reception 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel (Specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop command for the third stop operation 3 command) to the first sub-controller 400.

In step S110, winning determination processing for determining winning is performed. In this winning determination process, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the activated pay line, it is determined that a small win 3 (Bell) has been won. Also, in this step S110, preparations are made to transmit a prize determination command indicating the result of the prize determination to the first sub-control section 400. FIG.

In step S111, medal awarding processing is performed. In the medal awarding process, if the player wins some winning combination with a payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S112, game state control processing is performed. In the game state control processing, processing relating to the transition of each game state of the RT system is performed, and the game state is shifted when the start condition or end condition is met. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command including information indicating the current RT-system game state.

In step S113, an effect control process B (details will be described later) relating to the control of the game state of the AT system is executed. In step S114, a high-navigation state termination process (details will be described later) relating to termination of the high-navigation state is executed.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. Various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission processing (step S2006 in FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit, which will be described later.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S2001, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S2002, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S2003, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S2004, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed. In step S2005, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S<b>2006 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S2007, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S2008, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S2003, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S2009, it monitors whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (power shutdown is detected), the process proceeds to step S2011, and if the low voltage signal is off (power shutdown is not detected), the process proceeds to step S2010.

In step S2010, various processes for ending the timer interrupt ending process are performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S2001 are set in the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S2011, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 when power is restored, and power failure processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 10 is returned to.

<Processing of the first sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 12A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 12(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 12(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 12(d) is a flow chart of effect control processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, the main processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 12(a).

When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S3001. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state.

In step S3002, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S3003. In step S3003, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S3004, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S3005, effect control processing is performed. Although details will be described later, here, processing related to display of the number of coins and processing such as production preparation are performed according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408 . This preparation includes, for example, processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and updating the effect data when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S3006, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command for the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S3005, this command is output to the sound source IC 418. FIG. In step S3007, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to various lamps 420 in the performance data read in step S3005, this command is output to the drive circuit 422. FIG.

In step S3008, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the performance data read in step S3005, this command is output to the driving circuit 424. FIG. In step S3009, information output processing is performed to set the transmission of a command to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-controller 500 in the effect data read out in step S3005, the setting for outputting this control command is made, and the process returns to step S3002.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 12(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S3101 of command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 12(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S3201, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S3002 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 12A and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S3002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S3202, the command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S3009, the random number value for effect is updated, and the like.

Next, the effect control processing of the first sub-control section 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 12(b). At step S3301 of this effect control process, the number display related process (details will be described later) is performed, and at the next step S3302, after other effect control processes are performed, the effect control process is terminated.

<Processing of the second sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 13A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 13(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 13(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 13(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S4001 of FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S4001. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, initialization processing of storage areas in the VRAM 536, and the like are performed.

In step S4002, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S4003. In step S4003, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S4004, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S4005, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S4004, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S4006, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S4005. For example, if there is an image control instruction in the effect data read in step S4005, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S4002.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 13(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S4101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command. Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 13(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S4201, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S4002 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 13A, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S4002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S4202, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing in step S4006 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 13(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S4301, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 536), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 534 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S4302, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 534. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S4303; otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S4303, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S4301, the CPU 504 obtains information of the image data forming the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 536, image size, and so on). , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), transparency, etc.) to the VDP 534 . The VDP 534 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S4304, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S4305, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 534 based on the end of image rendering. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S5306; wait for is entered.

In step S4306, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Bet number setting/start operation acceptance process>
Next, with reference to FIG. 14(a), the bet amount setting/start operation receiving process will be described. FIG. 14(a) is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the bet number setting/start operation acceptance process in step S102 of FIG.

In step S201, in a medal-insertable state before the start lever is operated, a high-navigation state update process (details will be described later) relating to the transition from the low-navigation state to the high-navigation state and the update of the high-navigation state is executed.

In step S202, other bet amount setting/start operation acceptance processing is executed. That is, the number of bets is set, and it is determined whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated.

<High navigation state update process>
Next, high navigation state update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 14(b). FIG. 14(b) is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the advanced navigation state update process in step S201 of FIG. 14(a).

In step S301, it is determined whether or not high navigation state counter>0. If the high navigation state counter>0, the process proceeds to step S302; otherwise, the high navigation state update process ends. In step S302, 1 is subtracted from the value of the high navigation state counter.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state flag is off. The high navigation state flag is a flag indicating whether or not the game state of the AT system is in the high navigation state. When ON, it indicates a high navigation state, and when OFF, it indicates a low navigation state. If the high navigation state flag is off, the process proceeds to step S304; otherwise, the high navigation state update process ends.

In step S304, the high navigation state flag is turned on. In this embodiment, an initial value (in this example, 1000) is set to the high navigation state counter in the game in which the transition from the low navigation state to the high navigation state is determined (see step S703 in FIG. 16B, which will be described later). , and when the start lever of the next game is operated, it shifts to the high navigation state. By turning on the high navigation state flag, the high navigation state lamp 190 starts lighting.

<Production State Control Processing A>
Next, the effect state control process A will be described with reference to FIG. 15(a). FIG. 15(a) is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of effect state control processing A in step S106 of FIG.

In step S401, a game common process (details will be described later) is executed. In step S402, it is determined whether or not the processing prohibition flag is off. The processing prohibition flag is a flag indicating whether or not to execute processing related to the high navigation state in the high navigation state. When the processing prohibition flag is off, the game is capable of executing processing related to the high navigation state. , and when the processing prohibition flag is ON, it indicates that the game does not execute the processing related to the high navigation state. If the process prohibition flag is off, the process proceeds to step S403, otherwise, that is, if the process prohibition flag is on, the process proceeds to step S406.

In step S403, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state flag is off. If the high navigation state flag is off, the process proceeds to step S404, and if the high navigation state flag is not off, that is, it is on, the process proceeds to step S405. In step S404, since the vehicle is in the low navigation state, low navigation state processing A (details will be described later) is executed. In step S405, since the vehicle is in the high navigation state, high navigation state processing A (details will be described later) is executed. In step S406, another effect state control process A is executed.

In the effect state control process A of this embodiment, a process prohibition flag is provided, and only when the process prohibition flag is off, the low navigation state process A or the high navigation state process A is executed, but the process prohibition flag is not provided. may In this case, the low navigation state processing A or the high navigation state processing A is always executed in the effect state control processing A.

<Process common to each game>
Next, the processing common to each game will be described with reference to FIG. 15(b). FIG. 15(b) is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the process common to every game in step S401 of FIG. 15(a).

In step S501, it is determined whether or not the conditions for executing high navigation state related processing are satisfied. Here, the condition for executing the high navigation state related processing is, for example, that the game is a recommended number game (in this example, a 3-coin bet game). The recommended number-of-numbers game is not limited to the 3-pieces game, and the recommended number-of-numbers game may differ for each state of the slot machine. As a result of the determination in step S501, if the conditions for executing high navigation state related processing are satisfied (for example, if the game is a 3-bet game), proceed to step S502, otherwise (for example , if the game is a two-coin bet game), the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S502, the processing prohibition flag is turned off. In step S503, the processing prohibition flag is turned on. In step S504, other common processing for each game is executed.

<Low navigation state processing A>
Next, the processing common to each game will be described with reference to FIG. 16(a). FIG. 16(a) is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the low navigation state process A in step S404 of FIG. 15(a).

In step S601, high navigation state transition processing (details will be described later) for determining whether to transition to the high navigation state is executed. In step S602, another low navigation state process A is executed.

<High navigation state transition processing>
Next, high navigation state transition processing will be described with reference to FIG. 16(b). FIG. 16(b) is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state transition processing in step S601 of FIG. 16(a).

In step S701, high navigation state transition determination is executed. In this high navigation state transition determination, when the high navigation state transition condition is satisfied (in this example, when winning a winning combination other than losing in the winning combination internal lottery process), it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied, and the following Decide to go from game to high nav state.

In step S702, it is determined whether or not the transition to the high navigation state has been determined. If so, the process proceeds to step S703, and if not, the high navigation state transition processing ends.

In step S703, an initial value (1000 in this example) is set to the high navigation state counter. Needless to say, the initial value of the high navigation state counter is not limited to 1,000, and may be, for example, 1,500. In step S705, other high navigation state transition processing is executed. Here, the number of games to be executed after shifting to the high-navigation state is set. For example, the ceiling counter is set to an initial value (700 in this example).

In step S701, in the high-navigation state transition determination, it is decided to transition to the high-navigation state when a winning combination other than a losing combination is won, but the high-navigation transition condition is not limited to this. The transition to the high navigation state may be determined based on the result of the lottery used, or a lottery may be conducted using a lottery value set for each winning combination, and the transition to the high navigation state may be made based on the result of the lottery. may be determined.

<High navigation state processing A>
Next, high navigation state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing in detail the high navigation state process A in step S405 of FIG. 15(a).

In step S801, high navigation state common processing (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S802, it is determined whether or not the rendering state is the normal state. If so, go to step S803, otherwise go to step S804. In step S803, normal state processing A (details will be described later) is executed. Although the details will be described later, in this normal state process A, for example, the number of games in the effect state (premonition state) is decremented. In addition, effect setting is performed according to the result of the internal winning combination lottery process of the game.

In step S804, it is determined whether or not the production state is the final notification state. In step S805, a confirmation notification state process A (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S806, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT1 state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S807, and if not, the process proceeds to step S810. In step S807, AT1 state processing A (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S810, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT2 state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S811, and if not, the process proceeds to step S812. In step S811, AT2 state processing A (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S812, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the pullback state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S813, and if not, the process proceeds to step S814. In step S813, pullback state processing A (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S814, an instruction information setting process (details will be described later) regarding setting of instruction information is executed.

<High navigation state common processing A>
Next, high navigation state common processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing in detail the high navigation state common processing A in step S801 of FIG.

In step S901, it is determined whether or not the rendering state counter>0. If the rendering state counter>0, the process proceeds to step S902, otherwise, the process proceeds to step S903. In step S902, 1 is subtracted from the value of the effect state counter. Here, the effect state counter is a counter for managing the transition of the effect state. If the number of games in each production state is determined by lottery, table, etc., the value of the production state counter may be set to the result of the lottery or the value obtained from the table, etc., or the state may be shifted to the high navigation state. When the game is played, the number of games in which some or all of the effects are performed may be collectively determined.

In step S903, it is determined whether or not the current rendering state is the LMT state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S904, and if not, the process proceeds to step S909.

In step S904, it is determined whether or not the value of the high navigation state counter is equal to or less than the LMT transition value A (19 in this example). The process proceeds to step S905. In this example, since the LMT state is 20G, the LMT transition value A is set to 19 (=20G-1G), but other numerical values may be used.

In step S905, it is determined whether or not the value of the difference number counter is equal to or less than the LMT shift value B (1840 in this example). Proceed to S909. In this example, when the LMT state is 20G, the maximum number of payouts in the 3-bet game is 11 (the maximum increase is 8), and the difference number exceeds 2000, the high-navigation state is terminated. Therefore, the LMT shift value B is set to 1840 (=2000 sheets−8 sheets×20 G), but other numerical values may be used.

In step S906, the LMT initial value (19 in this example) is set in the effect state counter, and in the next step S907, freeze information (various information for executing the freeze effect) is set. Also, in step S908, after the LMT state is set in the presentation state, the process proceeds to step S909. As a result, the presentation state shifts from the game to the LMT state.

In this example, the LMT initial value is set to 19 (=20G-1G) in order to shift from the game to the LMT state, but other values may be used. Also, the processing itself in step S906 may be deleted. With such a configuration, after shifting to the LMT state, it is possible to stay in the high navigation state until the number of games reaches the maximum number of games or until the difference number reaches the maximum difference number. , the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

In step S909, after executing other high navigation state common processing A, the high navigation state common processing A ends.

<Normal state processing A>
Next, the normal state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of normal state processing A in step S803 of FIG.

In step S1001, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter>0. If the ceiling counter>0, the process proceeds to step S1002; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1002, 1 is subtracted from the value of the ceiling counter. Here, the ceiling counter is a counter for managing the number of games up to the ceiling. In the present embodiment, the initial value (700 in this example) is set to the ceiling counter in step S705 of the high navigation state transition process described with reference to FIG. may

In step S1003, it is determined whether the AT1 winning flag is off or on, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S1004, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1011. In step S1004, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter is 0. If so, the process proceeds to step S1007, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1005. At step S1005, an AT1 transition lottery is performed. Here, the AT1 shift lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the AT1 state, and in this example, determination is made based on the results of internal lottery processing for winning combinations, random numbers, and the like. The content of the AT1 transition lottery is not limited to this example, and for example, the value of the high navigation state counter may be taken into account to determine the success or failure, or the points may be determined based on the results of the internal lottery process for the winning combination. may be given and the eligibility may be determined based on the points.

In step S1006, it is determined whether or not the AT1 transition lottery in step S1005 has been won. If the lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S1007, and if the lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S1016. In step S1007, an AT1 type lottery is performed. Here, the AT1 type lottery is a lottery for determining the type of the AT1 state, and in this example, either "high" or "low" is determined based on a random number or the like. In addition, the contents of the AT1 type lottery are not limited to this example, for example, "high" is selected as the AT1 type in the lottery when winning the AT1 transition lottery rather than the lottery when reaching the ceiling. A configuration that is easy (or difficult to be selected) may be adopted.

In step S1008, the result of the AT1 type lottery in step S1007 is set to AT1 type, and in the next step S1009, the number of games is determined by lottery, and the number of games is set in the effect state counter. Also, in step S1010, after turning on the AT1 winning flag, the process proceeds to step S1016.

At step S1011, it is determined whether or not the AT1 type is "low". In step S1012, a promotion counter addition lottery is performed. Here, the promotion counter addition lottery is a lottery for determining the numerical value to be added to the promotion counter, and in this example, the numerical value is determined based on a random number or the like. In step S1013, the numerical value (lottery result value) determined by the promotion counter addition lottery in step S1012 is added to the promotion counter, and then the process proceeds to step S1016.

In step S1016, after other normal state processing A is performed, the normal state processing A ends.

<Confirmation notification state processing A>
Next, the confirmation notification state process A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the decision notification state process A in step S805 of FIG.

In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the AT1 type is "low". In step S1102, a promotion counter addition lottery is performed. As described above, the promotion counter addition lottery is a lottery for determining the numerical value to be added to the promotion counter, and in this example, the numerical value is determined based on a random number or the like. In step S1103, the numerical value (lottery result value) determined by the promotion counter addition lottery in step S1102 is added to the promotion counter, and then the process proceeds to step S1104.

In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the value of the promotion counter is equal to or greater than the ceiling value (for example, 700). At step S1105, the AT1 type is set to "high" and the process proceeds to step S1109.

In step S1109, after performing other confirmation notification state processing A, the confirmation notification state processing A is terminated.

Although illustration is omitted, when the AT1 type is "high" in this example, an additional lottery may be performed to add (add) the number of sets of AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state). However, an AT2 expected acquisition number addition lottery, which will be described later, may be performed, or the number of game media that can be acquired in the AT2 state may be added by a lottery different from the AT2 expected acquisition number addition lottery.

<AT1 state processing A>
Next, the AT1 state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21(a) is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of AT1 state processing A in step S807 of FIG. be.

In step S1201, a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions is performed. This AT2 expected acquisition number addition lottery is a lottery for adding the number of game media that can be acquired in the AT2 state. The number of coins to be added is determined based on the winning combination and the random number. In the next step S1202, the lottery result (additional number) of the AT2 expected acquisition number addition lottery in step S1201 is added to the count value of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter stored in the RAM 308, and then the process proceeds to step S1203.

In step S1203, after performing other AT1 state processing A, the AT1 state processing A ends. In the other AT1 state process A, for example, a process of transmitting a command including information indicating the updated count value of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter (AT2 expected acquisition number information) to the first sub-controller 400 is performed.

Here, the lottery table (for AT1) used in the lottery for adding the number of game media expected to be acquired in step S1201 is for determining the initial value (initial number) of the number of game media that can be acquired in the AT2 state, which will be described later. Compared to the lottery table (for AT2) shown in FIG. It is not added, but in the lottery table (for AT1), game media are added even if you lose and replay).

Note that the lottery table used in the AT2 expected acquisition number addition lottery in the AT1 state process A is not limited to the example shown in FIG. , is set so as to increase the probability of adding game media. Therefore, for example, the lottery table (for AT1) may have more lottery results (winning combinations) to be added than the lottery table (for AT2), and in the case of the first lottery result, the lottery table ( It is always added in the lottery table (for AT1), but may not be added (or may not be added) in the lottery table (for AT2), and in the case of the first lottery result, the lottery table (AT1 (for AT2) and the lottery table (for AT2) are always added, but the added value may be different (or the same).

<AT2 state processing A>
Next, the AT2 state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22(a) is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of AT2 state processing A in step S811 of FIG.

In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the previous game is non-replay (whether or not a replay role has been won), and in the case of non-replay, the process proceeds to step S1302, and in the case of replay, the process proceeds to step S1303. . In step S1302, after subtracting the inserted number (3 in this example) in the game from the AT2 expected acquisition number counter, the process proceeds to step S1303.

In step S1303, a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions is performed. This AT2 expected acquisition number addition lottery is a lottery for adding the number of game media that can be acquired in the AT2 state. The number of coins to be added is determined based on the winning combination and the random number. In the next step S1304, the lottery result (number of additions) of the AT2 expected acquisition number addition lottery in step S1303 is added to the count value of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter, and then the process proceeds to step S1305.

In step S1305, after other AT2 state processing A is performed, the AT2 state processing A ends. In the other AT2 state processing A, for example, a process of transmitting a command including information indicating the count value of the AT2 planned acquisition number counter after updating (AT2 expected acquisition number information) to the first sub control unit 400, A command including information indicating the count value of the AT planned acquisition number counter (AT2 expected acquisition number information) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

<Pullback state processing A>
Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the retraction state process A will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of pullback state processing A in step S813 of FIG.

At step S1501, a pull-back lottery is performed, and at step SS1502, it is determined whether or not the pull-back lottery has been won. In step S1503, the retracted state is set to the determined state. In this example, the lottery result of the pullback lottery in step S1501 is set to the pullback state. In step S1504, after performing other pullback state processing A, the pullback state processing A ends.

<Instruction information setting process>
Next, referring to FIG. 24, instruction information setting processing will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing in detail the instruction information setting process in step S814 of FIG.

In step S1601, it is determined whether or not the winning combination is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process. In this example, the pushing hand means the internal winning of "small hand 4" in the conditional device. If the player is internally elected to the winning hand, the process advances to step S1602; otherwise, the instruction information setting process ends. Note that the "push order" according to the present invention includes a winning combination that allows a prize to be won when an operation is performed in accordance with a predetermined correct operation order (push order), as well as a predetermined operation. Timing (for example, grouping reel symbols into one or more (color coding, assigning symbols and numbers, etc.), and suggesting by reporting one or more groups (color, symbol, number, etc.) A winning combination that allows a prize to be won when an operation is performed according to timing), or when an operation is performed in accordance with both a predetermined correct operation order (push order) and predetermined operation timing. includes a prize-winning combination that can win a prize.

In step S1602, it is determined whether or not the current rendering state is the AT2 state or the LMT state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S1603, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1604.

In step S1603, the pressing order of the correct answer is set in the information (instruction information) regarding the notification contents of the instruction information notification. As a result, operation navigation using the payout number display 127 is executed (see FIG. 8). Also, although illustration is omitted, in step S1603, other operation navigation information setting processing is executed. For example, preparations are made to transmit to the first sub-controller 400 an operation navigation command including instruction information indicating the order of pressing the correct answer. As a result, the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 is executed by the first sub-controller 400 .

In addition, in the confirmed announcement state of this example, the number of medals will continue to decrease until the small win corresponding to the AT1 type is won. In the case of internal winning, the operation navigation is executed only in a specific type of pressing order (for example, if the small winning combination 4 is internally selected, any one of the small winning combination 4LCR, ..., small winning combination 4RCL, or Execute operation navigation for multiple), or execute operation navigation at a rate of once every three times (for example, if you can not win three times in the order of pushing, Push order navigation may be executed when a role is internally elected).

In step S1604, it is determined whether or not the current rendering state is the AT1 state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S1605, and if not, the instruction information setting process ends. In step S1605, the pressing order obtained by converting the correct pressing order (pressing order after conversion) is set in the information (instruction information) regarding the notification contents of the instruction information notification.

As described above, in the AT1 state, for example, when the pressing order bell is won, the probability of operation navigation being executed is lower than in the AT2 state, or the pressing order is notified by two-choice navigation (two-choice operation navigation). Or, by performing an operation navigation that combines these, the rate of ball output is lower than in the AT2 state. Processing such as conversion of timing and the like to two-choice navigation (two-choice operation navigation) is performed.

In the present embodiment, it is sufficient that the payout rate of the AT1 state is lower than that of the AT2 state, and the payout rate of the AT1 state and the AT2 state may be changed by other methods. In addition, as a method of lowering the probability of operation navigation being executed in the AT1 state than in the AT2 state, for example, when winning the push order bell, operation navigation is performed only once every N times (N is a positive integer). There is a method in which operation navigation is performed only once in N times, and a method in which operation navigation is performed only once in N times and 2-choice navigation is performed for others.

<Production State Control Processing B>
Next, the effect state control process B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the effect state control process B in step S113 of FIG.

In step S1701, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state flag is off. If the high navigation state flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S1702, and if the high navigation state flag is not OFF, that is, if the high navigation state flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S1704. In step S1702, it is determined whether or not the processing prohibition flag is off. If the processing prohibition flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1703; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1707.

In step S1703, since the vehicle is in the low navigation state, low navigation state processing B is executed. Although illustration is omitted, in the low navigation state process B, when it is determined to shift to the high navigation state, a process for setting an effect state based on information regarding each effect state is performed.

In step S1704, the process advances to step S1705 after updating the difference number counter. In this difference number counter update process, the number of medals inserted by the player in the game (number of inserted medals) is subtracted from the number of medals obtained by the player (given to the player) in the relevant game (the number of medals paid out). By adding this value to the current counter value of the difference number counter, the count value of the difference number counter is updated. Also, preparations are made to transmit to the first sub-controller 400 a payout command containing at least information on the number of inserted coins and information on the number of payouts indicating the number of coins to be paid out.

In step S1705, it is determined whether or not the processing prohibition flag is off. If the processing prohibition flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1706; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1707.

In step S1706, since the vehicle is in the high navigation state, high navigation state processing B (details will be described later) is executed. At step S1707, the effect state control process B is terminated after the other effect state control process B is executed.

<High navigation state processing B>
Next, high navigation state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of high navigation state processing B in step S1704 of FIG.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the rendering state is normal. In step S1802, normal state processing B (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S1803, it is determined whether or not the presentation state is the final notification state. In step S1804, final notification state processing B (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S1805, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT1 state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S1806, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1809. In step S1806, AT1 state processing B (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S1809, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT2 state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S1810, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1811. In step S1812, AT2 state processing B (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S1811, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the pullback state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1812, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1813. In step S1812, pullback state processing B (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S1813, after executing LMT state processing B (details will be described later), high navigation state processing B ends.

<Normal state processing B>
Next, normal state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of normal state processing B in step S1802 of FIG.

In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the rendering state counter=0 (whether or not the normal state has ended). If the rendering state counter=0, the process proceeds to step S1902, otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1903. In step S1902, after setting the fixed notification state in the effect state, the process proceeds to step S1903. As a result, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the normal state to the confirmed notification state, and an effect (for example, bonus confirmation display) corresponding to the confirmed notification state is started. In step S1903, after performing other normal state processing B, the normal state processing B ends.

<Confirmation notification state processing B>
Next, the confirmation notification state process B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the decision notification state process B in step S1804 of FIG.

In step S2001, it is determined whether the decision notification flag is off or on. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S2002, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2002, after turning on the confirmation notification flag, the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2003, it is determined whether or not the result is an internal winning result related to the AT1 type.

Specifically, in this example, when the AT1 type is low, it is determined whether the internal winning result is "replay combination 2, 4 to 10" of the condition device No. 3, and the AT1 type is In the case of high, it is determined whether or not the internal winning result is "replay combination 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13" of condition device No. 4. As a result of the determination, if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2004, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S2007.

In step S2004, an AT set count lottery is performed. In this AT set count lottery, a lottery is performed to determine the AT set count (the number of executions of the AT1 state and the AT2 state) using a lottery value or the like. In this example, the number of AT sets to be won with the highest probability is two. Note that the number of AT sets is not limited to the example determined by lottery, and may be a fixed value (for example, two times). In the next step S2005, the lottery result (the number of AT sets) of the AT set number lottery in step S2004 is set in the AT set remaining number counter as the AT set initial value, and the process proceeds to step S2006. In step S2006, AT1 start setting processing (details will be described later) is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2007, after performing other confirmed notification state processing B, the confirmed notification state processing B ends.

<AT1 start setting processing>
Next, the AT1 start setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing in detail the AT1 start setting process in step S2006 of FIG.

In step S2051, the AT set remaining number counter is decremented by one, and in the next step S2052, AT1 initial number lottery is performed. In this AT1 initial number lottery, a lottery is performed to determine the number of games in the AT1 state (the number of AT1 games) using a lottery value or the like. A lottery may be performed based on the AT1 type (high and low), etc. The number of AT1 games is not limited to being determined by lottery, and may be a fixed value. In the next step S2053, the lottery result (the number of AT1 games) of the AT1 initial number lottery in step S2052 is set in the effect state counter as the AT1 initial value, and the process proceeds to step S2054. A step S2054 ends the AT1 start setting process after setting the AT1 state in the effect state.

<AT1 state processing B>
Next, the AT1 state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of AT1 state processing B in step S1806 of FIG.

In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter=0 (whether or not the AT1 state has ended). If the rendering state counter=0, the process proceeds to step S2102, otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2102, after setting the AT1 state in the presentation state, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, after performing other AT1 state processing B, the AT1 state processing B ends.

<AT2 state processing B>
Next, the AT2 state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of AT2 state processing B in step S1810 of FIG.

In step S2301, after adding the payout number in the game to the AT2 acquisition number counter, the process proceeds to step S2302. In this step S2302, even when the internal winning combination is not won (when the internal winning combination is lost), the payout number corresponding to the internal winning combination is added.

In step S2302, it is determined whether or not the count value of the AT acquisition number counter is equal to or greater than the count value of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter. .

In step S2303, it is determined whether or not the AT set remaining number counter is greater than 0. If so, the process advances to step S2304 to perform the AT1 start setting process described with reference to FIG. Proceed to S2305. At step S2305, the initial pullback value (in this example, 1) is set to the effect state counter, and at the next step S2306, after setting the pullback state to the effect state, the process proceeds to step S2307.

In step S2307, after performing other AT2 state processing B, the AT2 state processing B ends. In the other AT2 state process B, for example, a process of transmitting a command including information (AT2 acquired number information) indicating the updated count value of the AT2 acquired number counter to the first sub-controller 400 is performed.

<Pullback state processing B>
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the retraction state process B will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of pullback state processing B in step S1812 of FIG.

In step S2401, it is determined whether or not the pullback state is determined (whether or not to pull back). In step S2402, an AT set count lottery is performed. In this AT set count lottery, a lottery is performed to determine the AT set count (the number of executions of the AT1 state and the AT2 state) using a lottery value or the like. In this example, the number of AT sets to be won with the highest probability is two. Note that the number of AT sets is not limited to the example determined by lottery, and may be a fixed value (for example, two times). In the next step S2403, the lottery result (the number of AT sets) of the AT set number lottery in step S2402 is set in the AT set remaining number counter as the AT set initial value, and the process proceeds to step S2404. In step S2404, after performing the AT1 start setting process described using FIG. 29, the process proceeds to step S2407.

In step S2405, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter=0 (whether or not the pullback state has ended). In step S2406, the high navigation state end standby flag is turned on, and then the process proceeds to step S2407. In step S2407, after other pullback state processing B is performed, the pullback state processing B ends.

<LMT state processing B>
Next, the LMT state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of LMT state processing B in step S1813 of FIG.

In step S2501, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter=0 (whether or not the LMT state has ended). If the rendering state counter=0, the process proceeds to step S2502, and if not, the LMT state processing B ends. In step S2502, the high navigation state end waiting flag is set to ON, and then the process proceeds to step S2503. In step S2503, after performing other LMT state processing B, the LMT state processing B ends.

<High navigation state end processing>
Next, high navigation state end processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high-navigation state end processing in step S114 of FIG.

In step S2601, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state flag is ON. If the high navigation state flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S2602; otherwise, the high navigation state end processing is terminated. In step S2602, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state end waiting flag is ON. If the high-navi state end standby flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S2603; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2604.

In step S2603, the high navigation state end standby flag is turned off. After the process of step S2603, the process proceeds to step S2606.

In step S2604, it is determined whether or not the value of the high navigation state counter is zero. If there is a game with the process prohibition flag ON, the value of the high navigation state counter may become 0 before the high navigation state end waiting flag is turned ON, so this corresponds to this case. is. If the value of the high navigation state counter is 0, proceed to step S2606; otherwise, proceed to step S2605.

In step S2605, it is determined whether or not difference number counter > high navigation state end maximum value. If yes, go to step S2606. This is because if there is a game for which the processing prohibition flag is ON, the condition of difference number counter>high navigation state end maximum value may be satisfied before the high navigation state end waiting flag is turned ON. It corresponds to the case.

In step S2606, the high navigation state flag is turned off. As a result, the high navigation state lamp 190 that has been lit is extinguished. In step S2607, after executing other high-navi state end processing, the high-navi state end processing ends. Other high-navigation state end processing includes, for example, setting the AT system game state to a low-navigation state (normal mode), and processing to initialize various flags and counters used for high-navigation state transition control. conduct.

<Number of sheets display related processing>
Next, the number display related processing executed by the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of number display related processing in step S3301 of FIG.

In step S2701, it is determined whether or not an operation of the start lever 135 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "lever on") has been accepted. If the operation has been accepted, the process proceeds to step S2702. The process advances to step S2705. In step S2702, the count value of the total winning number display counter stored in the RAM 408 is updated based on the inserted number information and the paid-out number information received from the main control unit 300. FIG.

In step S2703, it is determined whether or not it is a 3-bet game, and if it is a 3-bet game, the process proceeds to step S2704, and if it is not a 3-bet game (in this example, in the case of a 2-bet game) goes to step S2715. In step S2704, the RAM 408 is stored based on the AT2 expected acquisition number information (AT2 expected acquisition number information count value) and the AT2 acquisition number information (AT2 acquisition number counter count value) received from the main control unit 300. Update the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter. In step S2704, it is possible to determine whether or not the AT2 state ends by updating the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter. Therefore, when it is determined that the AT2 state ends, the AT2 state ends. It is also possible to display a message suggesting that the user has completed the process (for example, display an image including the characters "LAST").

In step S2705, it is determined whether or not one game has ended, and if one game has ended, the process proceeds to step S2706, and if one game has not ended (if the game is in progress), the process proceeds to step S2715. In step S2706, the count value of the total acquired number display counter is updated based on the inserted number information and the paid-out number information received from the main control unit 300. FIG.

In step S2707, it is determined whether or not it is a 3-bet game, and if it is a 3-bet game, the process proceeds to step S2708, and if it is not a 3-bet game (in this example, in the case of a 2-bet game) goes to step S2712. In step S2708, based on the AT2 expected acquisition number information (the count value of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter) and the AT2 acquisition number information (the count value of the AT2 acquisition number counter) received from the main control unit 300, an AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter is displayed. update the count value of

In step S2709, it is determined whether or not the total acquired number has reached a predetermined number (whether or not the count value of the total acquired number display counter has reached a certain value). If not, the process advances to step S2715. In step S2710, it is determined whether or not the current rendering state is the AT2 state or the LMT state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S2711, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2712.

In step S2711, a predetermined number acquisition display is determined based on the count value of the total acquisition number display counter. Although the method of determining the predetermined number of winning display is not particularly limited, in this example, a predetermined number of winning display lottery table is referred to, and the predetermined number of winning display is determined based on the set value, the predetermined number, and the random number.

For example, if it is determined in step S2709 that the total number of acquired cards has reached 135, when the setting value is an odd number (setting 1, setting 3, or setting 5), the probability of reaching 135 is 2/100. If the set value is an even number, the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed. Therefore, when the predetermined number acquisition display indicating that the number of cards has reached 135 is displayed, it is determined that the set value is an odd number (setting 1, setting 3, or setting 5). For this reason, the display can be said to be a display suggesting that the set value is an odd number (display suggesting odd number setting).

Also, when it is determined in step S2709 that the total number of obtained cards has reached 246, when the setting value is an even number (setting 2, setting 4, or setting 6), the probability of reaching 246 is 2/100. If the set value is an odd number, the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed. Therefore, when the predetermined number acquisition display indicating that the number of cards has reached 246 is displayed, it is determined that the set value is an even number (setting 2, setting 4, or setting 6). For this reason, the display can be said to be a display suggesting that the set value is an even number (display suggesting an even number setting).

If it is determined in step S2709 that the total number of acquired cards has reached 333, a predetermined number of acquisition display ( For example, when the set value is set to 4, the same predetermined number of acquisition display is performed with a probability of 2/100, and when the set value is set to 5 or set 6. In addition, the same predetermined number acquisition display is performed with a probability of 1/100, and the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed at other set values. Therefore, when the predetermined number acquisition display indicating that 333 cards have been reached is displayed, it is determined that the set value is 3 or more. Therefore, the display can be said to be a display suggesting that the set value is 3 or higher (display suggesting 3 or higher setting).

When the total number of acquired cards reaches 456, 555, and 666, the predetermined number of acquisition display also indicates that the set value is 4 or more (display indicating that the set value is 4 or more), and the set value is set. A display suggesting that the value is 5 or more (display suggesting setting 5 or more) and a display suggesting that the setting value is 6 (display suggesting setting 6).

If it is determined in step S2709 that the total number of obtained cards has reached 500, a predetermined number of obtained display (for example, " 500 cards" is displayed), and if it is determined in step S2709 that the total number of cards acquired has reached 1,000, there is a 100/100 probability that 1,000 cards have been reached regardless of the set value. A display indicating that a predetermined number of coins has been acquired (for example, a display including a character string of "over 1000") is displayed.

In step S2712, display update processing for updating the display of the total acquired number of sheets is performed based on the count value of the total acquired number display counter updated in step S2706. Based on the count value of the acquired number display counter, display update processing for updating the AT2 remaining acquired number display is performed, and then the flow advances to step S2714.

In step S2714, the processing for displaying the display of the acquisition of the predetermined number determined in step S2711 is performed, and then the flow advances to step S2715. In step S2715, after performing other processing related to display of the number of sheets, the processing related to display of number of sheets ends.

In this example, the set value is suggested by the predetermined number acquisition display. In a gaming machine in which a mode regarding an AT-related advantage (high (or low) addition probability, etc.) can be set, the mode may be suggested.

<Updating and displaying count values of various counters>
Next, updating and display of count values of various counters provided in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 46. FIG. 36 to 46 are timing charts showing the count values of various counters and the flow of various effects, and show the effect mode of the effects to be executed and the count values displayed in association with the timing charts.

Here, prior to explaining the update and display of the count values of the various counters, the update and display control of the count values of the various counters will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 36(a). FIG. 36A is a diagram showing an example of control of updating and display of count values of various counters in chronological order. The item "high navigation state counter" in FIG. 36(a) indicates the number of remaining games in the high navigation state updated by the main control unit 300 in the high navigation state, and the contents thereof are as described above. .

<Difference number counter>
The item "difference number counter" in FIG. 36A indicates the count value of the difference number counter managed by the main control unit 300. FIG. Note that the "difference number counter" may be managed by another control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500).

At the end of the game (in this embodiment, in step S1704 of the effect state control process B (FIG. 25)), the main control unit 300 determines the number of medals (given to the player) obtained by the player in the game ( After the count value of the difference number counter is updated by adding the value obtained by subtracting the number of medals inserted by the player in the game (the number of inserted medals) from the number of payouts) to the current counter value of the difference number counter. , a payout command including at least information on the number of inserted coins indicating the number of coins to be inserted and information on the number of coins to be paid out indicating the number of coins to be paid out to the first sub-controller 400 .

For example, as shown in FIG. 36(a), in a state where the count value of the difference number counter before lever-on is 42, when the main control unit 300 receives the lever-on of the three-bet game, the main control unit 300 At the end of the game, the value (8 in this example) obtained by subtracting the number of inserted coins (3 in this example) from the number of payouts (11 in this example) is added to the current counter value of the difference number counter (42 in this example). By doing so, after the count value of the differential number counter is updated to 50 in this example, a payout command including at least information on the number of inserted pieces (3) and information on the number of paid out pieces (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control section 400. .

<AT2 Expected Acquisition Number Counter>
The item "AT2 expected winning number counter" in FIG. Note that the "AT2 expected number-of-acquisition counter" may be managed by another control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500).

When the main control unit 300 receives Lebaon (in the AT1 state processing A (FIG. 21) and the AT2 state processing A (FIG. 22) in this embodiment), the AT2 expected acquisition number addition lottery is performed, and the lottery After the lottery result (additional number of sheets) is added to the AT2 scheduled acquisition number counter, a command including information indicating the updated count value of the AT2 scheduled acquisition number counter (AT2 scheduled acquisition number information) is sent to the first sub-control unit 400. Send to

For example, as shown in FIG. 36(a), in a state where the count value of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before lever-on is 300, when the main control unit 300 receives the lever-on of the three-bet game, the main control unit After receiving Lebaon, 300 performs an AT2 expected win count addition lottery, adds the lottery result (0 in this example) to the AT2 expected win count counter, and then updates the AT2 expected win count counter. A command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating a count value (300 in this example) is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 .

<AT2 acquisition counter>
The item "AT2 Acquisition Number Counter" in FIG. Note that the "AT2 acquisition number counter" may be managed by another control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500).

When the production state is the AT2 state and lever-on is received (in the AT2 state process A (FIG. 22) in this embodiment), the main control unit 300 determines the number of insertions in the game from the AT2 acquisition number counter (this example Then, after subtracting 3), a command including information indicating the updated count value of the AT acquisition sheet counter (AT2 acquisition sheet information) is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . Therefore, in this embodiment, when the effect state is the AT1 state, the AT2 acquisition number counter is configured not to be updated. If a replay role is won in the immediately preceding game, the game can be played without inserting game media, so the number of inserted coins in the game is zero.

For example, as shown in FIG. 36(a), in the state where the count value of the AT2 acquisition number counter before lever-on is 0, when the main control unit 300 receives the lever-on of the three-bet game, the main control unit 300 , after receiving Levaon, subtracts the number of inserted pieces in the game (3 in this example) from the AT2 acquired number counter, and then AT2 acquired number information indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter (- in this example) 3) is sent to the first sub-controller 400.

Also, at the end of the game (in the AT2 state process B (FIG. 31) in this embodiment), by adding the number of payouts in the game to the AT2 acquired number counter, the count value of the AT2 acquired number counter is updated. A command including information indicating the count value of the AT2 acquired number counter (AT2 acquired number information) is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 .

For example, as shown in FIG. 36(a), in a state where the count value of the AT2 acquisition number counter after lever-on is -3, when the main control unit 300 pays out 11 cards, the main control unit 300 , At the end of the game, after adding the number of payouts in the game (11 in this example) to the count value of the AT2 acquisition number counter (-3 in this example), the updated count value of the AT acquisition number counter (in this example 8) is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400, including AT2 acquired sheet information.

<AT2 Remaining Acquisition Number Counter>
The item "AT2 Remaining Acquired Number Display Counter" in FIG. Note that the "AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter" may be managed by another control unit (for example, the main control unit 300 or the second sub-control unit 500).

Triggered by the fact that the main control unit 300 has accepted Lebaon (in the number display related process (FIG. 35) in the present embodiment), the first sub-control unit 400 receives the AT2 expected acquisition number information from the main control unit 300. and the AT2 acquisition number information, the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter stored in the RAM 408 is updated.

For example, as shown in FIG. 36(a), in a state where the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter before lever-on is 300, the first sub-control unit 400 is triggered when the main control unit 300 accepts lever-on. Then, based on the AT2 expected number of acquisition information (300) and the AT2 acquisition number information (-3), the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter after Lebaon is updated from 300 to 303 (= 300 - (-3)) do. After Leva-on, the display corresponding to the count value (303 in this example) of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter may or may not be updated.

In addition, at the end of the game (in the number display related process (FIG. 35) in this embodiment), the first sub-control unit 400 receives from the main control unit 300 the AT2 expected number of acquisition information and the AT2 acquisition number information. , update the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter.

For example, as shown in FIG. 36(a), when the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter after lever-on is 303, the 3-coin game ends, and 11 coins are paid out in the game. , at the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 303 based on the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300) and the AT2 acquisition number information (8). to 292 (=300-8).

<Total acquisition number display counter>
The item "total acquired number display counter" in FIG. Note that the "total acquired number display counter" may be managed by another control unit (for example, the main control unit 300 or the second sub-control unit 500).

Triggered by the fact that the main control unit 300 has accepted the lever-on (in the number display related process (FIG. 35) in this embodiment), the first sub-control unit 400 receives the input number information and the payout number information received from the main control unit 300. Based on the number information, the count value of the total acquired number display counter stored in the RAM 408 is updated.

For example, as shown in FIG. 36(a), when the count value of the total winning number display counter before lever-on is 42, when the main control unit 300 accepts the lever-on of the three-bet game, the first sub When the main control unit 300 accepts Lebaon, the control unit 400 updates the count value of the total acquired number display counter after Lebaon to 39 (=42-3) based on the inserted number information (3). do. After Leva-on, the display corresponding to the count value (39 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter may or may not be updated.

In addition, although not shown, when the main control unit 300 accepts a double-bet game with a count value of 42 in the total winning number display counter before lever-on, the first sub-control unit 400 When the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the count value of the total acquired number display counter after Reba-on is updated to 40 (=42-2) based on the inserted number information (2).

Also, at the end of the game (in the number display related process (FIG. 35) in this embodiment), the first sub-control unit 400, based on the input number information and the payout number information received from the main control unit 300, Update the count value of the number display counter.

For example, as shown in FIG. 36(a), in a state where the count value of the total winning number display counter after lever-on is 39, when the three-bet game ends and 11 coins are paid out in the game, At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 updates the count value of the total win number display counter at the end of the game to 50 (=39+11) based on the payout number information (11). Also, although not shown, when the count value of the total winning number display counter after Lebaon is 40, the double bet game ends and 11 payouts are made in the game, the first sub At the end of the game, the control unit 400 updates the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game to 51 (=40+11) based on the payout number information (11).

<Specific example of update and display of count values of various counters>
Next, specific examples of updating and displaying count values of various counters will be described with reference to FIGS.

It should be noted that the item "low/high navigation state" in each figure indicates the game state of the AT system (high navigation state or low navigation state in this example), and the item "production state" in each figure It shows the effect state (in this example, normal state, final notification state, withdrawal state, AT1 state, AT2 state, or LMT (limit) state) in each game state of the AT system.

The item "high navigation state counter" in each figure indicates the number of remaining games in the high navigation state that the main control unit 300 updates in the high navigation state. , shows the count value of the difference number counter, and the item "effect state counter" in each figure indicates the number of remaining games in each effect state updated by the main control unit 300 in each effect state. Also, the item "AT2 Planned Acquisition Number Counter" in each figure indicates the count value of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter managed (updated) by the main control unit 300, and the details will be described using FIG. 36(a). As I said. Also, the item "AT2 acquisition number counter" in each figure indicates the count value of the AT2 acquisition number counter managed (updated) by the main control unit 300, and the details are as described with reference to Fig. 36(a). is.

Further, the item "Condition Device" in each figure shows the No. (see FIG. 7) corresponding to the winning combination in each game. As described above, the item "No." in FIG. 7 is a number attached to each lottery result for convenience. ”, but in the case of duplicate hands, one “No.” corresponds to a plurality of “conditional devices”.

Also, the item "BET" in each figure indicates the number of bets (BET number) of game media in each game. Also, the item "AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter" in each figure shows the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter managed (updated) by the first sub-control unit 400, details of which are shown in FIG. It is as explained using The item "total acquired number display counter" in each figure indicates the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter managed (updated) by the first sub-control unit 400. For details, refer to Fig. 36(a). As explained.

<Specific example 1 of updating and displaying count values of various counters>
FIG. 36B is a diagram showing a specific example 1 of updating and displaying count values of various counters.

This example is an example in which the presentation state shifts in order from the AT1 state to the AT2 state in the high navigation state. As described above, the AT1 state is an AT state in which the game progress is controlled by the number of games (AT state of game number management), and ends when, for example, a certain number of games (eg, 20 G) are completed. On the other hand, the AT2 state is an AT state in which the progress of the game is controlled by the difference in the number of game media (AT state of management of the difference in the number of game media). end if

<Concrete example 1/AT1 state (game R378)>
Game R378 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 378 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state is 28, and a 3-coin bet game is performed.

Since the effect state is the AT1 state, the game R378 uses the effect image display device 157 to execute the AT1 effect corresponding to the AT1 state with the receipt of Lebaon as a trigger, No. 8) is internally won, so the operation navigation corresponding to the AT1 state (in this example, the display of two-choice navigation "?-1-?" that informs the correct operation order of the minor winning combination 4 with two options) is displayed. Running.

In addition, since the number of remaining games in the AT1 state (count value of the effect state counter) is 28, a display including an image indicating the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, "LAST28G") display of images containing characters).

Subsequently, after accepting Lebaon, the main control unit 300 performs an AT2 expected acquisition number addition lottery, adds the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter, and then after updating While transmitting a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (0 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter to the first sub-control unit 400, since the effect state is the AT1 state, AT2 acquisition The number counter is not updated, and the display of the remaining number display DP including an image showing the remaining number of obtainable numbers in the AT2 state (the count value of the AT2 remaining number of acquisition number display counter) The total payout number display AP including the image showing the count value of ) is not displayed either. In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (0), and obtains AT2 remaining after Reba-on. The count value of the number display counter is updated from 0 to 0 (=0-(0)).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R378, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won a small win 4 (condition device No. 8), after paying out the number of payout medals corresponding to the small win 4 (11 in this example) (at the end of the game) ), and the value (8 in this example) obtained by subtracting the number of input (3 in this example) from the number of payouts (11 in this example) is added to the current counter value of the difference number counter (0 in this example). , after updating the count value of the difference number counter to 8 in this example, a payout command including at least information on the number of inserted coins (3) and information on the number of payouts (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, Since the effect state is the AT1 state, the AT2 acquisition number counter is not updated, and the remaining number display DP including an image showing the remaining number of acquisition possible in the AT2 state (the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter). Neither the display nor the display of the total payout number display AP including the image showing the total number of payouts (the count value of the counter for displaying the total number of acquired coins) is performed.

In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (0) at the end of the game, and changes the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter from 0 at the end of the game. Update to 0 (=0-0).

<Concrete example 1/AT1 state (game R377)>
The next game R377 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 377 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state is 27, and a 3-coin bet game is performed.

After Leva-on of this game R377, since the effect state is the AT1 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT1 effect corresponding to the AT1 state, and the small combination 1 (condition device No. 5) Since the player has won the internal prize, a small winning combination announcement (in this example, the display of "!-!-!" indicating that the small winning combination 1 has been internally won) is executed.

Also, since the number of remaining games in the AT1 state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 27, a display including an image indicating the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, "LAST27G" display of images containing characters).

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after receiving Lebaon, and sets the lottery result of the lottery (30 in this example) to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (0 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (30 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, while the effect state is Since it is in the AT1 state, the AT2 acquisition number counter is not updated, and the display of the remaining number display DP including an image showing the remaining number of acquisition possible in the AT2 state (the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) The display of the total payout number display AP including the image showing the total number of payouts (the count value of the counter for displaying the total number of acquired coins) is not displayed either.

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (30), and obtains AT2 remaining after Reba-on. The count value of the number display counter is updated from 0 to 30 (=30-(0)).

In addition, in this game R377, since the number of additions to the number of AT2 scheduled acquisitions is determined to be 30 by the AT2 scheduled acquisition number addition lottery, an additional effect UG for AT2 (in this example, the AT2 scheduled acquisition number is increased by 30) display of an image containing the characters "+30 sheets" suggesting that the In addition, when the AT2 state is not the number management but the game number management, an effect that suggests the number of games added in the AT2 state (for example, the characters "+30G" suggesting that the number of AT2 games has been added by 30G) display of images containing images) may be performed. In addition, when the effect state is the AT1 state, the display corresponding to the AT2 expected number-of-acquisition counter is configured not to be displayed, but may be displayed.

Next, since the game has ended in this game R377, the small winning announcement is erased. In addition, since the main control unit 300 has won a small win 1 (condition device No. 5), after paying out the number of payout medals corresponding to the small win 1 (3 in this example) (at the end of the game ), and the value (0 in this example) obtained by subtracting the number of input (3 in this example) from the number of payouts (3 in this example) is added to the current counter value of the difference number counter (8 in this example). , after updating the count value of the difference number counter to 8 in this example, a payout command including at least information on the number of inserted coins (3) and information on the number of payouts (3) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, Since the effect state is the AT1 state, the AT2 acquisition number counter is not updated, and the remaining number display DP including an image showing the remaining number of acquisition possible in the AT2 state (the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter). Neither the display nor the display of the total payout number display AP including the image showing the total number of payouts (the count value of the counter for displaying the total number of acquired coins) is performed.

At the end of the game, the first sub control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (30), and changes the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game from 0 to Update to 30 (=30-0).

<Concrete example 1/AT1 state (game R376)>
The next game R376 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 376 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state is 26, and a 3-coin bet game is performed.

Although illustration is omitted, since the effect state is the AT1 state after Leva-on of this game R376, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT1 effect corresponding to the AT1 state, and a small win 4 (condition Device No. 8) is internally won, so operation navigation corresponding to AT1 state (in this example, display of 2-choice navigation "?-1-?" indicating the correct operation sequence for minor winning 4 with 2 options) running

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and sets the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (30 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (30 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, while the effect state is Since it is in the AT1 state, the AT2 acquisition number counter is not updated, and the display of the remaining number display DP including an image showing the remaining number of acquisition possible in the AT2 state (the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) The display of the total payout number display AP including the image showing the total number of payouts (the count value of the counter for displaying the total number of acquired coins) is not displayed either.

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (30), and obtains AT2 remaining after Reba-on. The count value of the number display counter is updated from 0 to 30 (=30-(0)).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R376, the operation navigation is deleted. In addition, since the main control unit 300 made a mistake in the operation of the 2-choice navigation and won the one-coin win of the small win 4 (conditional device No. 8), the number of payouts corresponding to the one-couple win of the small win 4 ( In this example, after paying out 1 medal) (at the end of the game), the number of payouts (1 in this example) minus the number of inserted medals (3 in this example) is subtracted (-2 in this example). , is added to the current counter value of the difference number counter (8 in this example) to update the count value of the difference number counter to 6 in this example, and then input number information (3) and payout number information (1) While sending a payout command containing at least to the first sub-control unit 400, since the effect state is the AT1 state, the AT2 acquisition number counter is not updated, and the remaining acquirable number in the AT2 state ( The display of the remaining number display DP including an image showing the AT2 remaining winning number display counter) and the display of the total payout number display AP including an image indicating the total number of payouts (the count value of the total winning number display counter) are also displayed. Absent.

At the end of the game, the first sub control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (30), and increases the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game from 30. Update to 30 (=30-0).

<Concrete example 1/AT2 state (game R349)>
Game R349 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 349, the number of medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of medals to be obtained in AT2) is 300, and a 3-coin bet game.

After Leva-on of this game R349, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) Since the internal lottery has been won, operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, display of operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the minor winning combination 4) is executed.

In addition, since the remaining number of obtainable sheets in the AT2 state at Lebaon (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 300, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "300 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (the count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 42 , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 42") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (300 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (300 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before lever-on After subtracting the number of insertions in the game (3 in this example) from the acquired number counter (0 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (-3 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter The included command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (-3) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), The count value of the acquired number display counter is updated to 303 (=300-(-3)), and the input number information (3) is subtracted from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (42 in this example). , the count value of the counter for displaying the total number of acquired cards after Lebaon is updated to 39 (=42-3).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R349, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won a small win 4 (condition device No. 8), after paying out the number of payout medals corresponding to the small win 4 (11 in this example) (at the end of the game) ), and the value (8 in this example) obtained by subtracting the number of input (3 in this example) from the number of payouts (11 in this example) is added to the current counter value of the difference number counter (42 in this example). , after the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 50 in this example, a payout command including at least information on the number of inserted coins (3) and information on the number of payouts (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the number of payouts in the game (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter, a command containing AT2 acquired number information (8 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is sent to the first sub. Send to the control unit 400 .

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (8) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 292 ( = 300-8), and the payout number information (11) is added to the count value (39 in this example) of the total winning number display counter after lever-on, and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 50 (=39+11).

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 50, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 50 sheets").

<Concrete example 1/AT2 state (game R345)>
Game R345 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 345, a 3-coin bet game is played, and a small winning combination 4 (conditional device No. 8) is internally won, but the small winning combination 4 is not won. .

In this game R345, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after receiving Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (in this example 310), and then send a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the updated count value (310 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter to the first sub-control unit 400, while Levaon After subtracting the number of insertions in the game (3 in this example) from the previous AT2 acquisition number counter (16 in this example), AT2 acquisition number information (13 in this example) indicating the count value of the AT acquisition number counter after updating ) to the first sub-controller 400.

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (13) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (310), and obtains AT2 remaining after Reba-on. Update the count value of the number display counter to 297 (= 310 - (13)), subtract the number of input information (3) from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (58 in this example), and After that, the count value of the total acquired number display counter is updated to 55 (=58-3).

At the end of the game R345, the main control unit 300 does not pay out medals because the small win 4 (conditional device No. 8) was not won, and the payout number (0 in this example) is inserted. By adding the value obtained by subtracting the number of sheets (3 in this example) (-3 in this example) to the current counter value of the difference number counter (55 in this example), the count value of the difference number counter is 55, a payout command containing at least the inserted number information (3) and the payout number information (0) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the AT2 acquired number counter (13 in this example) After adding the number of payouts in the game (in this example, the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) was missed, but the number of payouts corresponding to the small combination 4 is 11), the updated AT acquisition number counter A command including the AT2 acquisition number information (24 in this example) indicating the count value is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 .

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (24) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (310), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 286 ( = 310-24), and the payout number information (0) is added to the count value of the total winning number display counter after lever-on (55 in this example), and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 55 (=55+0).

In this example, even if the internal winning combination is not won (if the internal winning combination is lost), the number of payouts corresponding to the internal winning combination (11 in this example) is added to the AT2 winning combination counter. Therefore, the number of game media that can be acquired in the AT2 state is reduced.

<Specific example 2 of update and display of count values of various counters>
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 of updating and displaying count values of various counters.

This example is an example in which the production state shifts in order from the AT1 state to the AT2 state in the high navigation state, and the difference number reaches the predetermined number (500 in this example) in the AT2 state.

<Concrete example 2/AT2 state (game R221)>
Game R221 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 221, and the number of medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of medals to be obtained in AT2) is 280, and a 3-coin bet game is performed.

After Lebaon of this game R221, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) Since the internal lottery has been won, operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, display of operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the minor winning combination 4) is executed.

In addition, since the remaining number of obtainable numbers in the AT2 state at Lebaon (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 272, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "272 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (the count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 498 , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 498") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (280 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (280 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before Lebaon After subtracting the number of insertions in the game (3 in this example) from the acquired number counter (8 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (5 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (5) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (280), and obtains AT2 remaining after Reba-on. The count value of the number display counter is updated to 275 (=280-5), and the number of input information (3) is subtracted from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (498 in this example), and after Lebaon The count value of the total acquired number display counter is updated to 495 (=498-3).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R221, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won a small win 4 (condition device No. 8), after paying out the number of payout medals corresponding to the small win 4 (11 in this example) (at the end of the game) ), and the value (8 in this example) obtained by subtracting the number of inputs (3 in this example) from the number of payouts (11 in this example) is added to the current counter value of the difference number counter (498 in this example). , after the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 506 in this example, a payout command including at least information on the number of inserted coins (3) and information on the number of payouts (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the payout number in the game (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (5 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (16 in this example) indicating the count value of the AT acquired number counter after updating is included. command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

Also, at the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (16) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (280), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 264 ( = 280-16), and add payout number information (11) to the count value (495 in this example) of the total winning number display counter after lever-on, and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 506 (=495+11).

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 506, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 506 sheets").

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game, and the total number of acquired numbers reaches a predetermined number (the count value of the total acquired number display counter reaches a certain value), and If the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of winning display is determined based on the count value of the total winning number display counter.

In the game R221 of this example, since the total acquired number has reached the predetermined number (500) and the effect state is AT2, the count value (500 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter is used. , determine the predetermined number of acquisition display, and display the predetermined number of acquisition display TG (in this example, "500 medals Display that includes the character string "Breakthrough").

<Concrete example 2/AT2 state (game R207)>
Game R207 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 207, and the number of medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of medals to be obtained in AT2) is 280, and is a three-bet game.

The game R207 of this example is the same as the game R221 in that the total winning number reaches the predetermined number (500) and the effect state is the AT2 state. In game R207, after the display of obtaining the predetermined number of medals is performed once, the display of obtaining the predetermined number of medals is not performed in the AT2 state thereafter. The specified number of acquisition display suggesting is not performed.

The slot machine according to this example includes a first counter (in this example, a differential number counter) that counts the total number of game media acquired by the player based on at least the number of game media paid out during a certain game period. and a display means (this In the example, when the first count value reaches a predetermined value (500 in this example), the effect image display device 157) displays a predetermined number of acquisition display (in this example, 500 is reached as shown in FIG. and the certain game period includes a first game period (in this example, a period during which the production state is AT1 state) and a second game period. It is a game period composed of a plurality of game periods including a period (in this example, the period in which the production state is AT2 state), and the first game period (in this example, the period in which the production state is AT1 state) to the second game period (in this example, the period in which the effect state is AT2 state), and in the second game period (in this example, AT2 state), the first count value (this In this example, after the count value of the differential number counter reaches a predetermined value (500 in this example), the first count value falls below the predetermined value, and then the first count value reaches the predetermined value again. Even when the number of cards reaches 500, the predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, the predetermined number acquisition display TG shown in FIG. 37, suggesting that 500 cards have been reached) is not displayed.

According to the slot machine of this example, after the first count value reaches the predetermined value in the second game period, the first count value falls below the predetermined value, and then the first count value Even when the predetermined value is reached again, the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed, so that it is possible to alleviate the feeling that the game media have not increased during the same game period.

<Specific example 3 of updating and displaying count values of various counters>
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 of updating and displaying count values of various counters.

In this example, when the production state in the high-navigation state shifts in the order of AT1 state→AT2 state, in the AT1 state, the difference number of sheets reaches a predetermined number of sheets (500 in this example) and then falls below the predetermined number of sheets. After that, in the AT2 state, the difference number reaches the predetermined number (500 in this example) again.

<Concrete example 3/AT1 state (game R243)>
Game R242 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 243 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state is 20, and a 3-coin bet game is performed.

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game R243, and the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total acquisition number display counter reaches a certain value). ), and if the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of win display is determined based on the count value of the total win number display counter.

In the game R243 of this example, the total number of acquired medals has reached the predetermined number (500), but since the production state is the AT1 state and not the AT2 state (or LMT state), the number of acquired medals is The specified number of sheets acquisition display suggesting that the number of sheets has reached 500 is not displayed.

<Concrete example 3/AT2 state (game R222)>
Game R222 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 222, and the number of medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of medals to be obtained in AT2) is 280, and a 3-coin bet game is performed.

After Leva-on of this game R222, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and replay combination 1 (condition device No. 2). Therefore, a small winning combination announcement (in this example, an image containing three characters of "R" for Replay) suggesting internal winning of a replay combination is executed.

In addition, since the remaining obtainable number in the AT2 state at the time of lever-on (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 280, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "280 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 498 , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 498") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (280 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (280 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before Lebaon After subtracting the number of insertions in the game (0 in this example) from the acquired number counter (0 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (0 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (280), and obtains AT2 remaining after Reba-on. Update the count value of the number display counter to 280 (= 280 - 0), subtract the number of input information (0) from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (498 in this example), and after Lebaon The count value of the total acquired number display counter is updated to 498 (=498-0).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R222, the small winning announcement is erased. In addition, since the replay combination 1 (condition device No. 2) is won, the main control unit 300 does not pay out medals, and changes the number of payouts (0 in this example) to the number of insertions (0 in this example). is subtracted (0 in this example) to the current count value of the difference number counter (498 in this example), so that the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 498 in this example. A payout command containing at least information (0) and payout number information (0) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the number of payouts in the game (0 in this example) is set in the AT2 acquisition number counter (0 in this example) 0) is added, and then a command including AT2 acquired sheet information (0 in this example) indicating the updated count value of the AT acquired sheet counter is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 .

Also, at the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (280), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 280 ( = 280-0), and add payout number information (0) to the count value (498 in this example) of the total winning number display counter after lever-on, and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 498 (=498+0).

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 498, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 498 sheets").

<Concrete example 3/AT2 state (game R221)>
Game R221 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 221, and the number of medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of medals to be obtained in AT2) is 280, and a 3-coin bet game is performed.

After Lebaon of this game R221, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) Since the internal lottery has been won, operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, display of operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the minor winning combination 4) is executed.

In addition, since the remaining obtainable number in the AT2 state at the time of lever-on (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 280, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "280 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 498 , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 498") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (280 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (280 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, while After subtracting the number of insertions (3 in this example) in the game from the AT2 acquisition number counter (0 in this example), AT2 acquisition number information indicating the count value of the AT acquisition number counter after updating (-3 in this example) to the first sub-controller 400.

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (-3) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (280), The count value of the acquired number display counter is updated to 283 (=280-(-3)), and the input number information (3) is subtracted from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (498 in this example). , the count value of the counter for displaying the total number of acquired cards after Lebaon is updated to 495 (=498-3).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R221, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won a small win 4 (condition device No. 8), after paying out the number of payout medals corresponding to the small win 4 (11 in this example) (at the end of the game) ), and the value (8 in this example) obtained by subtracting the number of inputs (3 in this example) from the number of payouts (11 in this example) is added to the current counter value of the difference number counter (498 in this example). , after the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 506 in this example, a payout command including at least information on the number of inserted coins (3) and information on the number of payouts (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the number of payouts in the game (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (-3 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (8 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter The included command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (8) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (280), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 272 ( = 280-8), and the payout number information (11) is added to the count value of the total winning number display counter after lever-on (495 in this example), and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 506 (=495+11).

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 506, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 506 sheets").

In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game, and the total number of acquired numbers reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total acquired number display counter reaches a certain value). Moreover, when the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number acquisition display is determined based on the count value of the total acquired number display counter.

In the game R221 of this example, since the total acquired number has reached the predetermined number (500) and the effect state is AT2, the count value (500 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter is used. , determine the predetermined number of acquisition display, and display the predetermined number of acquisition display TG (in this example, "500 medals Display that includes the character string "Breakthrough").

In the slot machine according to this example, after a first count value (in this example, the count value of the difference number counter) reaches a predetermined value (in this example, 500), the first count value reaches the predetermined value. In the state below, the first game period (in this example, the period in which the production state is AT1 state) to the second game period (in this example, the period in which the production state is AT2 state), When the first count value reaches the predetermined value in the second game period, the predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, the second predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that the number has reached 500 shown in FIG. 38) TG) can be displayed.

Further, after the first count value (in this example, the count value of the difference number counter) reaches a predetermined value (in this example, 500), the first count value falls below the predetermined value, and then the first count value count value has reached the predetermined value again, the first game period (in this example, the period in which the production state is AT1 state) to the second game period (in this example, the production state is AT2 state), the transition to the second game period alone indicates that the predetermined number of coins has been obtained (in this example, the second predetermined number indicating that 500 cards have been reached, as shown in FIG. 38). The number-of-gain display TG) is not displayed, and the predetermined number-of-gain display can be displayed based on the execution of the game during the second game period.

According to the slot machine according to the present example, the display of obtaining the predetermined number of coins is displayed based on the execution of the game in the second game period, so that it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the display of obtaining the predetermined number of coins.

In addition, the expected value of the increase in the number of game media per game in the first game period (in this example, the period in which the production state is AT1 state) is more than the second game period (in this example, the production state is in AT2 state). The expected value of the increase in the number of game media per game during the period is configured to be higher.

According to the slot machine of this embodiment, since the predetermined number acquisition display is performed in the game period in which the expected value of the increased number of game media is higher, the player's desire to play until the next display of the predetermined number acquisition display is displayed. can be sustained.

<Specific example 4 of update and display of count values of various counters>
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 of updating and displaying count values of various counters.

In this example, when the effect state shifts in order from the AT1 state to the AT2 state in the high navigation state, in the AT1 state, when the difference number of sheets reaches a predetermined number (500 in this example), the state shifts to the AT2 state. For example.

<Specific example 4/AT1 state (game R223)>
The game R223 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 223 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state is 0 (the final game in the AT1 state), and is a game in which three bets are played.

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game R223, and the total acquisition number reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total acquisition number display counter reaches a certain value). ), and if the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of win display is determined based on the count value of the total win number display counter.

In the game R223 of this example, the total number of acquired medals has reached the predetermined number (500), but since the production state is the AT1 state and not the AT2 state (or LMT state), the number of acquired medals is The specified number of sheets acquisition display suggesting that the number of sheets has reached 500 is not displayed. Also in the game R243 of this example, the total number of acquired medals has reached the predetermined number (500), but since the production state is the AT1 state and not the AT2 state (or LMT state), the number of acquired medals The specified number of sheets acquisition display suggesting that the number of sheets has reached 500 sheets is not performed.

<Specific example 4/AT2 state (game R222)>
Game R222 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 222, and the number of medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of medals to be obtained in AT2) is 280, and a 3-coin bet game is performed.

After Leva-on of this game R222, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and replay combination 1 (condition device No. 2). Therefore, a small winning combination announcement (in this example, an image including the character "R" for Replay) is executed to suggest internal winning of a replay combination.

In addition, since the remaining obtainable number in the AT2 state at the time of lever-on (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 280, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "280 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (the count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 514 , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 514") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (280 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (280 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before Lebaon After subtracting the number of insertions in the game (0 in this example) from the acquired number counter (0 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (0 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (280), and obtains AT2 remaining after Reba-on. The count value of the number display counter is updated to 280 (=280-0), and the number of input information (0) is subtracted from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (514 in this example), and after Lebaon The count value of the total acquired number display counter is updated to 514 (=514-0).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R222, the small winning announcement is erased. In addition, since the replay combination 1 (condition device No. 2) is won, the main control unit 300 does not pay out medals, and changes the number of payouts (0 in this example) to the number of insertions (0 in this example). is subtracted (0 in this example) to the current count value of the difference number counter (514 in this example), so that the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 514 in this example. A payout command containing at least information (0) and payout number information (0) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the number of payouts in the game (0 in this example) is set in the AT2 acquisition number counter (0 in this example) 0) is added, and then a command including AT2 acquired sheet information (0 in this example) indicating the updated count value of the AT acquired sheet counter is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 .

Also, at the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (280), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 280 ( = 280-0), and the payout number information (0) is added to the count value of the total winning number display counter after lever-on (514 in this example), and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 514 (=514+0).

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 514, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 514 sheets").

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game, and the total number of acquired numbers reaches a predetermined number (the count value of the total acquired number display counter reaches a certain value), and If the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of winning display is determined based on the count value of the total winning number display counter.

In the game R222 of this example, the total winning number reaches the predetermined number (500) and the effect state is AT2 state, but in the slot machine according to this example, one or more medals are paid out in AT2 state. In game R222, the display of obtaining the predetermined number of medals suggesting that the number of medals obtained has reached 500 is not displayed because it is configured to perform the display of obtaining the predetermined number of medals when a winning combination is won. .

<Specific example 4/AT2 state (game R221)>
Game R221 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 221, and the number of medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of medals to be obtained in AT2) is 280, and a 3-coin bet game is performed.

After Lebaon of this game R221, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) Since the internal lottery has been won, operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, display of operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the minor winning combination 4) is executed.

In addition, since the remaining obtainable number in the AT2 state at the time of lever-on (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 280, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "280 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (the count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 514 , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 514") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (280 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (280 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before Lebaon After subtracting the number of insertions in the game (3 in this example) from the acquired number counter (0 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (-3 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter The included command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (-3) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (280), The count value of the acquired number display counter is updated to 283 (=280-(-3)), and the input number information (3) is subtracted from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (514 in this example). , the count value of the counter for displaying the total number of cards won after Lebaon is updated to 511 (=514-3).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R221, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won a small win 4 (condition device No. 8), after paying out the number of payout medals corresponding to the small win 4 (11 in this example) (at the end of the game) ), the number of payouts (11 in this example) minus the number of insertions (3 in this example) is subtracted (8 in this example) to the current counter value of the difference number counter (514 in this example). , after the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 522 in this example, a payout command including at least information on the number of inserted coins (3) and information on the number of paid coins (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the number of payouts in the game (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (-3 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (8 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter The included command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (8) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (280), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 272 ( = 280-8), and add payout number information (11) to the count value (511 in this example) of the total winning number display counter after lever-on, and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 522 (=511+11).

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 522, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 522 sheets").

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game, and the total number of acquired numbers reaches a predetermined number (the count value of the total acquired number display counter reaches a certain value), and If the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of winning display is determined based on the count value of the total winning number display counter.

In the slot machine according to this example, when a winning combination with one or more medals paid out is won in the AT2 state, a predetermined number of medals has been obtained is displayed. Since the number of medals has reached a predetermined number (500), the effect state is AT2, and the winning combination with the payout of 11 medals has been won, the count value of the total number of medals display counter (in this example, 500), the predetermined number acquisition display TG (this example display including the character string "over 500 sheets").

In the slot machine according to this example, the first count value (in this example, the count value of the difference number counter) is a first predetermined value (456 in this example) and a second predetermined value (500 in this example). ) in a state in which both predetermined values have been reached, the second game period (AT1 state in this example) transitions to the second game period (AT2 state in this example), and then the second game During the period, a first predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, a predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that 456 cards have been reached) and a second predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, indicating that 500 cards have been reached) (predetermined number acquisition display) (in this example, predetermined number acquisition display TG indicating that 500 cards have been reached, shown in FIG. 39) can be displayed.

According to the slot machine of this example, the first count value reaches both the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value, and the first game period to the second game period , since only one of the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display can be displayed during the second game period, the predetermined number acquisition display is excessively displayed. By not doing so, it is possible not only to prevent excessive gambling, but also to prevent misrecognition of the predetermined number acquisition display.

<Specific example 5 of updating and displaying count values of various counters>
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a specific example 5 of updating and displaying count values of various counters.

In this example, in a game machine set to a certain setting value of 4 or more, when the production state shifts in the order of AT1 state → AT2 state in the high navigation state, in the AT2 state, the difference number is the first This is an example of reaching a second predetermined number (500 in this example) after reaching a predetermined number (456 in this example).

<Specific example 5/AT2 state (game R238)>
Game R238 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 238, the number of expected medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of expected medals to be obtained in AT2) is 300, and a 3-coin bet game.

After Leva-on of this game R238, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) Since the internal lottery has been won, operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, display of operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the minor winning combination 4) is executed.

In addition, since the remaining number of obtainable sheets in the AT2 state at Lebaon (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 300, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. (In this example, the display of the image containing the characters "300 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (the count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 450. , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 450") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (300 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (300 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before lever-on After subtracting the number of insertions in the game (3 in this example) from the acquired number counter (0 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (-3 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter The included command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (-3) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), The count value of the acquired number display counter is updated to 303 (=300-(-3))), and the input number information (3) is subtracted from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (450 in this example). Then, the count value of the total acquired number display counter after Lebaon is updated to 447 (=450-3).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R238, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won a small win 4 (condition device No. 8), after paying out the number of payout medals corresponding to the small win 4 (11 in this example) (at the end of the game) ), and the value (8 in this example) obtained by subtracting the number of inputs (3 in this example) from the number of payouts (11 in this example) is added to the current counter value of the difference number counter (450 in this example). , after the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 458 in this example, a payout command including at least information on the number of inserted coins (3) and information on the number of payouts (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the number of payouts in the game (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (-3 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (8 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter The included command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (8) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 292 ( = 300-8), and the payout number information (11) is added to the count value (447 in this example) of the total winning number display counter after lever-on, and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 458 (=447+11).

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 458, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 458 sheets").

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game, and the total number of acquired numbers reaches a predetermined number (the count value of the total acquired number display counter reaches a certain value), and If the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of winning display is determined based on the count value of the total winning number display counter.

In the game R238 of this example, since the total number of acquired cards reaches the predetermined number (456 cards) and the effect state is AT2, the count value (456 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter is used. , a predetermined number acquisition display is determined by lottery, and since the lottery has been won, the number of acquired medals has reached 456 and the set value is set to 4 or more. A display TG1 (in this example, a display including a character string "over 456 sheets") is performed.

In this example, when the total number of obtained cards reaches a predetermined number (456 cards), a display is made to indicate that the set value is 4 or more, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the same way as when the total number of acquired cards reaches 555 or 666, a display may be made suggesting that the set value is set to 5 or 6, or in the same way as when the total number of acquired cards reaches 246, A display may be made to indicate that the set value is an even number (setting 2, setting 4, or setting 6), or if the setting value is an odd number (setting 1 , setting 3, or setting 5).

<Specific example 5/AT2 state (game R227)>
Game R227 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 227, and the number of medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of medals to be obtained in AT2) is 300, and a three-coin bet game is performed.

After Lebaon of this game R227, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) Since the internal lottery has been won, operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, display of operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the minor winning combination 4) is executed.

In addition, since the remaining number of obtainable sheets in the AT2 state at Lebaon (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 252, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "252 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (the count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 498 , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 498") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (300 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (300 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before lever-on After subtracting the number of insertions in the game (3 in this example) from the acquired number counter (48 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (45 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (45) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), and obtains AT2 remaining after Reba-on. The count value of the number display counter is updated to 255 (= 300-45)), and the number of input number information (3) is subtracted from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (498 in this example), after Lebaon to 495 (=498-3).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R227, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won a small win 4 (condition device No. 8), after paying out the number of payout medals corresponding to the small win 4 (11 in this example) (at the end of the game) ), and the value (8 in this example) obtained by subtracting the number of inputs (3 in this example) from the number of payouts (11 in this example) is added to the current counter value of the difference number counter (498 in this example). , after the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 506 in this example, a payout command including at least information on the number of inserted coins (3) and information on the number of payouts (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the number of payouts in the game (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (45 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (56 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (56) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 244 ( = 300-56), and the payout number information (11) is added to the count value of the total winning number display counter after lever-on (495 in this example), and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 506 (=495+11).

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 500, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 500 sheets").

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game, and the total number of acquired numbers reaches a predetermined number (the count value of the total acquired number display counter reaches a certain value), and If the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of winning display is determined based on the count value of the total winning number display counter.

In the game R227 of this example, since the total number of acquired cards reaches the predetermined number (500 cards) and the effect state is AT2, the count value (500 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter is used. , a predetermined number of acquisition display is determined, and a second predetermined number of acquisition display TG2 (in this example, display including the character string "over 500 sheets").

In the slot machine according to this example, in the second game period (in this example, the AT2 state), the first count value (in this example, the count value of the difference number counter) is changed to a second predetermined value (in this example, , 500) and when the first count value reaches a first predetermined value (456 in this example), the first predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, shown in FIG. 40) , a first predetermined number acquisition display TG1 suggesting that 456 cards have been reached can be displayed, and in the second game period (AT2 state in this example), the first count value (this In the example, the count value of the difference number counter) reaches the first predetermined value (456 in this example), and the first predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, reaches 456 as shown in FIG. 40). After the first predetermined number acquisition display TG1) suggesting is displayed and the first count value reaches a second predetermined value (500 in this example), a second predetermined number acquisition A display (in this example, a second predetermined number acquisition display TG2 indicating that the number of sheets has reached 500, shown in FIG. 40) can be displayed.

In addition, at least one display of the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, the first predetermined number of sheets indicating that the number of sheets has reached 456 shown in FIG. 40) Acquisition display TG1) is a display as a setting suggestion rendering that suggests a set value (in this example, a display that suggests that the set value is 4 or more).

According to the slot machine of this example, in addition to the number of acquired game media, it is also possible to obtain information on the set value, so it is possible to further enhance interest and convenience of the player.

<Concrete example 6 of update and display of count values of various counters>
FIG. 41(a) is a diagram showing a specific example 6 of updating and displaying count values of various counters.

In this example, in the high navigation state, when the production state shifts in the order of AT1 state → AT2 state, in the AT1 state, after the difference number of sheets reaches the first predetermined number (456 in this example), the second This is an example of shifting to the AT2 state when the predetermined number of sheets (500 in this example) is reached.

<Specific example 6/AT1 state (game R265)>
Game R265 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 265 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state is 25, and a 3-coin bet game is performed.

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game R265, and the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total acquisition number display counter reaches a certain value). ), and if the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of win display is determined based on the count value of the total win number display counter.

In the game R265 of this example, the total acquired number has reached the predetermined number (456), but since the production state is the AT1 state and not the AT2 state (or LMT state), the 456 cards have been reached. The specified number of acquisition display suggesting is not performed.

<Specific example 6/AT1 state (game R247)>
Game R247 is a game (final game) in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 247 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state is 0, and a three-coin bet game is performed.

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of game R247, and when the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total acquisition number display counter reaches a certain value). ), and if the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of win display is determined based on the count value of the total win number display counter.

In game R247 of this example, the total number of acquired medals has reached the predetermined number (500), but since the production state is the AT1 state and not the AT2 state (or LMT state), the number of acquired medals is The specified number of sheets acquisition display suggesting that the number of sheets has reached 500 is not displayed.

<Specific example 6/AT2 state (game R239)>
Game R239 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 239, the number of medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of medals to be obtained in AT2) is 300, and a 3-coin bet game.

After Leva-on of this game R239, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and a replay combination 1 (condition device No. 2) is executed. Therefore, a small winning combination announcement (in this example, an image containing three characters of "R" for Replay) suggesting internal winning of a replay combination is executed.

In addition, since the remaining number of obtainable sheets in the AT2 state at Lebaon (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 300, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. (In this example, the display of the image containing the characters "300 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (the count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 514. , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 514") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (300 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (300 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before lever-on After subtracting the number of insertions in the game (0 in this example) from the acquired number counter (0 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (0 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), and obtains AT2 remaining after Reba-on. The count value of the number display counter is updated to 300 (=300-0), and the number of input information (0) is subtracted from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (514 in this example), and after Lebaon The count value of the total acquired number display counter is updated to 514 (=514-0).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R239, the small winning announcement is erased. In addition, since the replay combination 1 (condition device No. 2) is won, the main control unit 300 does not pay out medals, and changes the number of payouts (0 in this example) to the number of insertions (0 in this example). is subtracted (0 in this example) to the current count value of the difference number counter (514 in this example), so that the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 514 in this example. A payout command containing at least information (0) and payout number information (0) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the number of payouts in the game (0 in this example) is set in the AT2 acquisition number counter (0 in this example) 0) is added, and then a command including AT2 acquired sheet information (0 in this example) indicating the updated count value of the AT acquired sheet counter is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 .

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 300 ( = 300-0), and the payout number information (0) is added to the count value (514 in this example) of the total winning number display counter after lever-on, and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 514 (=514+0).

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 514, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 514 sheets").

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game, and the total number of acquired numbers reaches a predetermined number (the count value of the total acquired number display counter reaches a certain value), and If the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of winning display is determined based on the count value of the total winning number display counter.

In the game R239 of this example, the total winning number reaches the predetermined number (500) and the effect state is AT2 state. In the slot machine according to this example, one or more medals are paid out in AT2 state In game R239, the display for obtaining the predetermined number of medals suggesting that the number of medals obtained has reached 500 is not displayed because it is configured to perform the display for obtaining the predetermined number of medals when a winning combination is won. .

<Concrete example 6/AT2 state (game R238)>
Game R238 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 238, the number of expected medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of expected medals to be obtained in AT2) is 300, and a 3-coin bet game.

After Leva-on of this game R238, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) Since the internal lottery has been won, operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, display of operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the minor winning combination 4) is executed.

In addition, since the remaining number of obtainable sheets in the AT2 state at Lebaon (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 300, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "300 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (the count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 522 , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 522") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (300 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (300 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, while After subtracting the number of insertions (3 in this example) in the game from the AT2 acquisition number counter (0 in this example), AT2 acquisition number information indicating the count value of the AT acquisition number counter after updating (-3 in this example) to the first sub-controller 400.

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (-3) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), The count value of the acquired number display counter is updated to 303 (=300-(-3)), and the input number information (3) is subtracted from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (514 in this example). , the count value of the counter for displaying the total number of cards won after Lebaon is updated to 511 (=514-3).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R238, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won a small win 4 (condition device No. 8), after paying out the number of payout medals corresponding to the small win 4 (11 in this example) (at the end of the game) ), and the value (8 in this example) obtained by subtracting the number of input (3 in this example) from the number of payouts (11 in this example) is added to the current counter value of the difference number counter (511 in this example). , after the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 519 in this example, a payout command including at least information on the number of inserted coins (3) and information on the number of payouts (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the number of payouts in the game (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (-3 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (8 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter The included command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (8) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 292 ( = 300-8), and add payout number information (11) to the count value (511 in this example) of the total winning number display counter after lever-on, and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 522 (=511+11).

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 522, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 522 sheets").

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game, and the total number of acquired numbers reaches a predetermined number (the count value of the total acquired number display counter reaches a certain value), and If the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of winning display is determined based on the count value of the total winning number display counter.

In the game R238 of this example, since the total number of acquired cards reaches the predetermined number (500 cards) and the effect state is AT2, the count value (500 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter is used. , the predetermined number acquisition display is determined, and the predetermined number acquisition display TG (in this example, includes the character string "over 500") indicating that 500 cards have been reached with a probability of 100/100 regardless of the set value. display).

In the slot machine according to this example, the first count value (in this example, the count value of the difference number counter) is a first predetermined value (456 in this example) and a second predetermined value (500 in this example). ) in a state where both predetermined values are reached, the first game period (in this example, the period in which the production state is AT1 state) to the second game period (in this example, the production state is in AT2 state) period), in the second game period, a first predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, a predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that 456 cards have been reached) and a second predetermined number acquisition display ( In this example, either one (in this example, the one with the larger predetermined value) is displayed (in this example, in FIG. 41(a) Only the specified number acquisition display TG) suggesting that the number of sheets has reached 500 can be displayed.

According to the slot machine of this example, the first count value reaches both the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value, and the first game period to the second game period , since only one of the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display can be displayed during the second game period, the predetermined number acquisition display is excessively displayed. By not doing so, it is possible not only to prevent excessive gambling, but also to prevent misrecognition of the predetermined number acquisition display.

It should be noted that, in this example, only the display of the first predetermined number of acquisition display and the second predetermined number of acquisition display, whichever has the larger predetermined value, is displayed, but the first predetermined number of acquisition display is shown. and the second predetermined number of winning display, only the display with the smaller predetermined value may be displayed, or only the display of the one selected by lottery may be displayed.

<Concrete example 7 of update and display of count values of various counters>
FIG. 41(b) is a diagram showing a specific example 7 of updating and displaying count values of various counters.

This example shows a continuation of the specific example 6 explained with reference to FIG. is performed, and after the difference number falls below the first predetermined number (456 in this example), it reaches the first predetermined number (456 in this example) again. In addition, in this example, an example of performing a 2-piece game over the period of games R237 to R176 is shown, but a 3-piece game may be performed during the same period, or a 2-piece game and a 3-piece game may be played. You can do both.

<Specific example 7/AT2 state (game R174)>
Game R174 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 174 and the expected number of medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (AT2 expected number of medals to be obtained) is 300, and a 3-coin bet game is performed.

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game R174, and the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total acquisition number display counter reaches a certain value). ), and if the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of win display is determined based on the count value of the total win number display counter.

In the game R174 of this example, the total acquired number has reached the first predetermined number (456). is performed, the predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that the number of cards has reached 456 is not performed.

In the slot machine according to this example, the first count value (in this example, the count value of the difference number counter or the count value of the total winning number display counter) is the first predetermined value (456 in this example) and the second predetermined value. value (500 in this example) in a state in which both predetermined values are reached, the first game period (AT1 state period in this example) to the second game period (AT2 state period in this example) , the second predetermined number acquisition display of the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display in the second game period (in this example, it indicates that 500 cards have been reached) After only the suggested predetermined number acquisition display TG) is displayed, after the first count value falls below the first predetermined value in the second game period, it returns to the first predetermined value again. It is configured so that the display of obtaining the first predetermined number of sheets is not displayed even when the number of sheets reaches the predetermined number.

According to the slot machine according to the present example, it is possible to prevent excessive gambling by preventing the display of obtaining the predetermined number of coins excessively. In addition, for example, after displaying the larger number, if the player intentionally plays a game in which the player loses and displays the smaller number, the display with the larger number is displayed again. In this case, if it is displayed again, it will lead to excessive display of the acquisition of the predetermined number, and if it is not displayed again, the game will Players (players who have once forgotten that the larger number is displayed) may feel distrustful, so even if they intentionally lose a game, they will get a predetermined number of coins. By structuring so that no display is performed, it is possible to prevent the player from losing.

<Concrete example 8 of update and display of count values of various counters>
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a specific example 8 of updating and displaying count values of various counters.

In this example, in the high navigation state, when the production state shifts in the order of AT1 state → AT2 state, in the AT2 state, after the difference number of sheets reaches the first predetermined number (500 in this example), the second This is an example of reaching a predetermined number (555 in this example).

<Specific example 8/AT2 state (game R238)>
Game R238 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 238, the number of expected medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of expected medals to be obtained in AT2) is 300, and a 3-coin bet game.

After Leva-on of this game R238, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) Since the internal lottery has been won, operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, display of operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the minor winning combination 4) is executed.

In addition, since the remaining number of obtainable sheets in the AT2 state at Lebaon (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 300, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "300 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (the count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 498 , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 498") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (300 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (300 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before lever-on After subtracting the number of insertions in the game (3 in this example) from the acquired number counter (0 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (-3 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter The included command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (-3) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), The count value of the acquired number display counter is updated to 303 (=300-(-3))), and the input number information (3) is subtracted from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (450 in this example). Then, the count value of the total acquired number display counter after Lebaon is updated to 495 (=498-3).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R238, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won a small win 4 (condition device No. 8), after paying out the number of payout medals corresponding to the small win 4 (11 in this example) (at the end of the game) ), and the value (8 in this example) obtained by subtracting the number of inputs (3 in this example) from the number of payouts (11 in this example) is added to the current counter value of the difference number counter (498 in this example). , after the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 506 in this example, a payout command including at least information on the number of inserted coins (3) and information on the number of payouts (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the number of payouts in the game (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (-3 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (8 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter The included command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (8) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 292 ( = 300-8), and add payout number information (11) to the count value (495 in this example) of the total winning number display counter after lever-on, and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 506 (=495+11).

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 506, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 506 sheets").

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game, and the total number of acquired numbers reaches a predetermined number (the count value of the total acquired number display counter reaches a certain value), and If the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of winning display is determined based on the count value of the total winning number display counter. In the game R238 of this example, since the total number of acquired cards reaches the predetermined number (500 cards) and the effect state is AT2, the count value (500 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter is used. , a second predetermined number acquisition display TG2 (in this example, the characters "over 500") suggesting that 500 cards have been reached with a probability of 100/100 regardless of the set value. display including columns).

<Specific example 8/AT2 state (game R227)>
Game R227 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 227, and the number of medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of medals to be obtained in AT2) is 300, and a three-coin bet game is performed.

After Lebaon of this game R227, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) Since the internal lottery has been won, operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, display of operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the minor winning combination 4) is executed.

In addition, since the remaining number of obtainable numbers in the AT2 state at Lebaon (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 244, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "244 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 554 , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 554") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (300 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (300 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before lever-on After subtracting the number of insertions in the game (3 in this example) from the acquired number counter (56 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (53 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (53) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), and obtains AT2 remaining after Reba-on. The count value of the number display counter is updated to 247 (= 300-53)), and the number of inserted number information (3) is subtracted from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (554 in this example), after Lebaon update the count value of the total acquired number display counter to 551 (=554-3).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R227, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won a small win 4 (condition device No. 8), after paying out the number of payout medals corresponding to the small win 4 (11 in this example) (at the end of the game) ), the number of payouts (11 in this example) minus the number of insertions (3 in this example) is subtracted (8 in this example) to the current counter value of the difference number counter (554 in this example). , after the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 562 in this example, a payout command including at least information on the number of inserted coins (3) and information on the number of payouts (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the number of payouts (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (53 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (64 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

Also, at the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (64) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 236 ( = 300-64), and add payout number information (11) to the count value (551 in this example) of the total winning number display counter after lever-on, and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 562 (=551+11).

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 562, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 562 sheets").

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game, and the total number of acquired numbers reaches a predetermined number (the count value of the total acquired number display counter reaches a certain value), and If the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of winning display is determined based on the count value of the total winning number display counter. In the game R227 of this example, since the total number of acquired cards reaches the predetermined number (555 cards) and the effect state is AT2, the count value (555 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter is used. , a predetermined number acquisition display is determined by lottery, and since the lottery has been won, the number of acquired medals has reached 555, and a second predetermined number acquisition indicating that the set value is 5 or more. A display TG2 (in this example, a display including a character string of "exceeding 555 sheets") is performed.

In the slot machine according to this example, the first count value (the count value of the difference number counter in this example) changes to the second predetermined value (this example 500 in this example) and when the first count value reaches a first predetermined value (456 in this example), the first predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, shown in FIG. 40, A first predetermined number acquisition display TG1) suggesting that 456 cards have been reached can be displayed, and a first count value ( In this example, the count value of the difference number counter) reaches the first predetermined value (456 in this example), and the first predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, 456 is reached as shown in FIG. 40). If the first count value reaches a second predetermined value (500 in this example) after the suggested first predetermined number acquisition display TG1) is displayed, the second predetermined number acquisition display is displayed. (In this example, the second predetermined number acquisition display TG2, shown in FIG. 40, indicating that the number of sheets has reached 500) can be displayed.

In addition, at least one display of the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, the first predetermined number of sheets indicating that the number of sheets has reached 456 shown in FIG. 40) Acquisition display TG1) is a display as a setting suggestion rendering that suggests a set value (in this example, a display that suggests that the set value is 4 or more).

According to the slot machine of this example, in addition to the number of acquired game media, it is also possible to obtain information on the set value, so it is possible to further enhance interest and convenience of the player.

<Specific example 9 of update and display of count values of various counters>
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a specific example 9 of updating and displaying count values of various counters.

In this example, when the production state in the high navigation state is shifted in the order of AT1 state → AT2 state, in the AT1 state, after the difference number of sheets reaches the first predetermined number (500 in this example), the second This is an example of shifting to the AT2 state when the predetermined number of sheets (555 in this example) is reached.

<Specific example 9/AT1 state (game R265)>
Game R265 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 265 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state is 25, and a 3-coin bet game is performed.

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game R265, and the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total acquisition number display counter reaches a certain value). ), and if the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of win display is determined based on the count value of the total win number display counter.

In the game R265 of this example, the total acquired number has reached the predetermined number (500), but since the production state is in the AT1 state and not in the AT2 state (or LMT state), it has reached 500. The specified number of acquisition display suggesting is not performed.

<Specific example 9/AT1 state (game R247)>
Game R247 is a game (final game) in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 247 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state is 0, and a three-coin bet game is performed.

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of game R247, and when the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total acquisition number display counter reaches a certain value). ), and if the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of win display is determined based on the count value of the total win number display counter.

In the game R247 of this example, the total number of acquired medals has reached the predetermined number (555), but since the production state is the AT1 state and not the AT2 state (or LMT state), the number of acquired medals is There is no indication that the specified number of cards has been obtained indicating that the number of cards has reached 555.

<Specific example 9/AT2 state (game R239)>
Game R239 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 239, the number of medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of medals to be obtained in AT2) is 300, and a 3-coin bet game.

After Leva-on of this game R239, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and a replay combination 1 (condition device No. 2) is executed. Therefore, a small winning combination announcement (in this example, an image containing three characters of "R" for Replay) suggesting internal winning of a replay combination is executed.

In addition, since the remaining number of obtainable sheets in the AT2 state at Lebaon (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 300, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "300 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 570 , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 570") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (300 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (300 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before lever-on After subtracting the number of insertions in the game (0 in this example) from the acquired number counter (0 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (0 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), and obtains AT2 remaining after Reba-on. Update the count value of the number display counter to 300 (= 300-0), subtract the number of input information (0) from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (570 in this example), and after Lebaon The count value of the total acquired number display counter is updated to 570 (=570-0).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R239, the small winning announcement is erased. In addition, since the replay combination 1 (condition device No. 2) is won, the main control unit 300 does not pay out medals, and changes the number of payouts (0 in this example) to the number of insertions (0 in this example). is subtracted (0 in this example) to the current counter value of the difference number counter (570 in this example), so that the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 570 in this example. A payout command containing at least information (0) and payout number information (0) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the number of payouts in the game (0 in this example) is set in the AT2 acquisition number counter (0 in this example) 0) is added, and then a command including AT2 acquired sheet information (0 in this example) indicating the updated count value of the AT acquired sheet counter is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 .

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 300 ( = 300-0), and the payout number information (0) is added to the count value (570 in this example) of the total winning number display counter after lever-on, and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 570 (=570+0).

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 570, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 570 sheets").

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game, and the total number of acquired numbers reaches a predetermined number (the count value of the total acquired number display counter reaches a certain value), and If the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of winning display is determined based on the count value of the total winning number display counter.

In the game R239 of this example, the total winning number reaches a predetermined number (555) and the effect state is AT2 state, but the slot machine according to this example pays out one or more medals in AT2 state. In game R239, the display for obtaining the predetermined number of medals indicating that the number of medals obtained has reached 555 is not displayed because it is configured to perform the display for obtaining the predetermined number when a winning combination is won. .

<Specific example 9/AT2 state (game R238)>
Game R238 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 238, the number of expected medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of expected medals to be obtained in AT2) is 300, and a 3-coin bet game.

After Leva-on of this game R238, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) Since the internal lottery has been won, operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, display of operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the minor winning combination 4) is executed.

In addition, since the remaining number of obtainable sheets in the AT2 state at Lebaon (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 300, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "300 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 570 , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 570") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (300 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (300 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, while After subtracting the number of insertions (3 in this example) in the game from the AT2 acquisition number counter (0 in this example), AT2 acquisition number information indicating the count value of the AT acquisition number counter after updating (-3 in this example) to the first sub-controller 400.

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (-3) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), The count value of the acquired number display counter is updated to 303 (=300-(-3)), and the input number information (3) is subtracted from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (570 in this example). , the count value of the counter for displaying the total number of acquired cards after Lebaon is updated to 567 (=570-3).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R238, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won a small win 4 (condition device No. 8), after paying out the number of payout medals corresponding to the small win 4 (11 in this example) (at the end of the game) ), and the value (8 in this example) obtained by subtracting the number of input (3 in this example) from the number of payouts (11 in this example) is added to the current counter value of the difference number counter (570 in this example). , after the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 578 in this example, a payout command including at least information on the number of inserted coins (3) and information on the number of payouts (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the number of payouts in the game (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (-3 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (8 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter The included command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (8) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 292 ( = 300-8), and add payout number information (11) to the count value (567 in this example) of the total winning number display counter after lever-on, and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 578 (=567+11).

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 578, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 578 sheets").

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game, and the total number of acquired numbers reaches a predetermined number (the count value of the total acquired number display counter reaches a certain value), and If the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of winning display is determined based on the count value of the total winning number display counter.

In the game R238 of this example, the total winning number reaches the predetermined number (555) and the effect state is AT2. A predetermined number acquisition display is performed based on the count value of the number display counter (555 in this example). 500) is configured to display the acquisition of a predetermined number of sheets.

For this reason, when the lottery is won, as shown in FIG. display) is performed, and if the lottery is not won, as shown in FIG. display including character strings).

In the slot machine according to this example, the first count value (in this example, the count value of the difference number counter) is a first predetermined value (500 in this example) and a second predetermined value (555 in this example). ) in a state where both predetermined values are reached, the first game period (in this example, the period in which the production state is AT1 state) to the second game period (in this example, the production state is in AT2 state) period), in the second game period, a first predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, a predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that 500 cards have been reached) and a second predetermined number acquisition display ( In this example, one of the predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that 555 cards have been reached) (in this example, the person who won the lottery) display (in this example, shown in FIG. 43(a), A predetermined number acquisition display TGa) indicating that the number of sheets has reached 555 can be displayed.

According to the slot machine of this example, the first count value reaches both the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value, and the first game period to the second game period , since only one of the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display can be displayed during the second game period, the predetermined number acquisition display is excessively displayed. By not doing so, it is possible not only to prevent excessive gambling, but also to prevent misrecognition of the predetermined number acquisition display.

Note that this example shows an example of displaying the display of the winner in the lottery (or the display of the one who did not win in the lottery) of the first predetermined number of winning display and the second predetermined number of winning display. However, it is also possible to display only one of the first predetermined number of winning display and the second predetermined number of winning display, whichever wins the lottery. Further, when both the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value are reached in the first game period, the predetermined number of the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display is displayed. The display with the larger value (or the display with the smaller predetermined value) may always be displayed regardless of the lottery result.

<Specific example 10 of update and display of count values of various counters>
FIGS. 44(a) and 44(b) are diagrams showing a concrete example 10 of updating and displaying count values of various counters.

The example shown in FIG. 44(a) is an example in which only the 3-bet game is performed in the AT2 state, and the difference number has reached a predetermined number (500 in this example).

<Specific example 10/AT2 state (game R221), 3-card game>
Game R221 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 221, and the number of medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of medals to be obtained in AT2) is 280, and a 3-coin bet game is performed. After Lebaon of this game R221, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) Since the internal lottery has been won, operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, display of operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the minor winning combination 4) is executed.

In addition, since the remaining number of obtainable numbers in the AT2 state at Lebaon (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 272, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "272 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (the count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 498 , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 498") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (280 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (280 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before Lebaon After subtracting the number of insertions in the game (3 in this example) from the acquired number counter (8 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (5 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (5) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (280), and obtains AT2 remaining after Reba-on. The count value of the number display counter is updated to 275 (=280-5), and the number of input information (3) is subtracted from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (498 in this example), and after Lebaon The count value of the total acquired number display counter is updated to 495 (=498-3).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R221, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won a small win 4 (condition device No. 8), after paying out the number of payout medals corresponding to the small win 4 (11 in this example) (at the end of the game) ), and the value (8 in this example) obtained by subtracting the number of inputs (3 in this example) from the number of payouts (11 in this example) is added to the current counter value of the difference number counter (498 in this example). , after the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 506 in this example, a payout command including at least information on the number of inserted coins (3) and information on the number of payouts (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the payout number in the game (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (5 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (16 in this example) indicating the count value of the AT acquired number counter after updating is included. command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

Also, at the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (16) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (280), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 264 ( = 280-16), and add payout number information (11) to the count value (495 in this example) of the total winning number display counter after lever-on, and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 506 (=495+11).

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 506, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 506 sheets").

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game, and the total number of acquired numbers reaches a predetermined number (the count value of the total acquired number display counter reaches a certain value), and If the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of winning display is determined based on the count value of the total winning number display counter.

In the game R221 of this example, since the total acquired number has reached the predetermined number (500) and the effect state is AT2, the count value (500 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter is used. , determine the predetermined number of acquisition display, and display the predetermined number of acquisition display TG (in this example, "500 medals Display that includes the character string "Breakthrough").

The slot machine according to this example is in a first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state in this example) and displays a first display (remaining number display DP shown in FIG. 44(a) in this example). When the first game (in this example, a 3-ply game) is executed in a state where the first result is (11 in this example, the number of payouts of game media is different from 3, which is the number of uses). , the number of game media used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game are the first count value (in this example, the count value of the difference number counter) and the second count value (in this example, the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter), and the number of used game media and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game can be reflected in the first display.

Also, in the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state in this example), the first display (in this example, the remaining number display DP shown in FIG. 44 (a)) and the second display (in this example, A first game (in this example, a three-bet game) is executed in a state in which both displays of the total payout number display AP) shown in FIG. , the number of game media paid out is 11) different from the number of uses of 3, the number of used game media and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game are equal to the first count value (in this example, the difference count value of the number counter), second count value (in this example, AT2 remaining acquired number display counter), and third count value (in this example, count value of total acquired number display counter) In addition, the number of used game media and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game can be reflected on both the first display and the second display.

<Concrete example 10/AT2 state (game R221), double-play game>
The example shown in FIG. 44(b) is an example in which, in the AT2 state, a 3-coin game is performed after a 2-coin game, and the difference number reaches a predetermined number (500 in this example).

Game R221 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 221, and the number of medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of medals to be obtained in AT2) is 280, and is a two-bet game.

After Lebaon of this game R221, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and a small combination 4 (condition Since the device No. 18) was internally selected, the operation navigation is not displayed.

In addition, since the remaining number of obtainable numbers in the AT2 state at Lebaon (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 272, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "272 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (the count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 498 , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 498") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (280 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the updated count value (280 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400, Since it is a game, the count value of the AT2 acquisition number counter is not updated.

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Leva-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the input number information (2) from the count value (498 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter before Leva-on. Then, while updating the count value of the total acquired number display counter after Lebaon to 496 (= 498 - 2), since it is a double bet game, the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter is not updated, Further, the display of the remaining number display DP including an image showing the remaining number of obtainable cards in the AT2 state (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtainable number display counter) is not updated.

Next, since the game has ended in this game R221, the main control unit 300 wins a small winning combination 4 (condition device No. 8), so the number of payouts corresponding to the small winning combination 4 with 2-coin (this In this example, after 11 medals have been paid out (at the end of the game), the value (9 in this example) obtained by subtracting the number of inserted medals (2 in this example) from the number of payouts (11 in this example) is used as the current difference number of medals. By adding to the counter value of the counter (498 in this example), the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 507 in this example. While the payout command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, the count value of the AT2 acquisition number counter is not updated because it is a two-play game.

Also, at the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 adds the payout number information (11) to the count value (496 in this example) of the total winning number display counter after lever-on, and displays the total winning number at the end of the game. While the count value of the counter is updated to 507 (=496+11), since it is a double bet game, the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter is not updated, and the remaining acquisition number in the AT2 state ( The display of the remaining number display DP including the image showing the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) is not updated either.

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 507, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 507 sheets").

<Specific example 10/AT2 state (game R220), 3-card game>
Game R220 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 220, and the number of medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of medals to be obtained in AT2) is 280, and is a three-bet game.

After Leva-on of this game R220, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) Since the internal lottery has been won, operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, display of operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the minor winning combination 4) is executed.

In addition, since the remaining number of obtainable numbers in the AT2 state at Lebaon (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 272, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "272 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (the count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 507 , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 507") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (280 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (280 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before Lebaon After subtracting the number of insertions in the game (3 in this example) from the acquired number counter (8 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (5 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (5) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (280), and obtains AT2 remaining after Reba-on. The count value of the number display counter is updated to 275 (=280-5), and the number of input information (3) is subtracted from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (507 in this example), and after Lebaon The count value of the total acquired number display counter is updated to 504 (=507-3).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R220, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won a small win 4 (condition device No. 8), after paying out the number of payout medals corresponding to the small win 4 (11 in this example) (at the end of the game) ), and the value (8 in this example) obtained by subtracting the number of inputs (3 in this example) from the number of payouts (11 in this example) is added to the current counter value of the difference number counter (507 in this example). , after the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 515 in this example, a payout command including at least information on the number of inserted coins (3) and information on the number of payouts (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the payout number in the game (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (5 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (16 in this example) indicating the count value of the AT acquired number counter after updating is included. command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

Also, at the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (16) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (280), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 264 ( = 280-16), and the payout number information (11) is added to the count value of the total winning number display counter after lever-on (504 in this example), and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 515 (=504+11).

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 515, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 515 sheets").

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game, and the total number of acquired numbers reaches a predetermined number (the count value of the total acquired number display counter reaches a certain value), and If the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of winning display is determined based on the count value of the total winning number display counter. In the game R220 of this example, since the total acquired number has reached the predetermined number (500) and the effect state is AT2, the count value (500 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter is used. , determine the predetermined number of acquisition display, and display the predetermined number of acquisition display TG (in this example, "500 medals Display that includes the character string "Breakthrough").

The slot machine according to this example is in a first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state in this example) and displays a first display (remaining number display DP shown in FIG. 44(b) in this example). When the second game (in this example, a two-play game) is executed in the state where the second game is played and the second result (in this example, the number of payouts of game media is 11, which is different from the number of uses of 3) , the number of game media used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are the first count value (in this example, the count value of the difference number counter) and the second count value (in this example, the AT2 remaining acquired number of the display counter), and the number of used game media and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are not reflected in the first display. there is

According to the slot machine of this example, the number of game media used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are not reflected in the first display. It is possible to inform the player that the second game has been executed in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. Also, even when the second game is executed, the number of game media used and the number of payouts are reflected in the first count value. In some cases, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing the game. Further, even if the number of game media increases in the second game, the number of used game media and the number of payouts of game media are not reflected in the second count value, and the first advantageous game state end condition is not affected. Therefore (because the first advantageous game advantageous state does not progress), it is possible to reduce the disappointment (feeling of loss) of the player who has executed the second game due to an operation error or the like.

In addition, the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state in this example), the first display (in this example, the remaining number display DP shown in FIG. 44 (b)) and the second display (in this example, The second game (in this example, a double-bet game) is executed in a state where both displays of the total payout number display AP) shown in FIG. , the number of game media paid out is 11) different from the number of uses of 3, the number of used game media and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game are equal to the first count value (in this example, the difference the count value of the number counter), the second count value (in this example, the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter), and the third count value (in this example, the count value of the total acquired number display counter) and the third count value, and the number of game media used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are not reflected in the first display, but in the second display It is configured so that it can be reflected.

According to the slot machine of this example, the number of game media used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are not reflected in the first display, but can be reflected in the second display. By updating the second display related to the unfavorable profit, it is possible to prevent distrust from being given to the player.

FIG. 44(c) is a diagram showing an example of the screen transition of the three-bet game explained with reference to FIG. 44(a), and FIG. 44(d) is explained with reference to FIG. 44(b). It is the figure which showed an example of the screen transition of a 2-ply game.

When the game Rn has a 3-bet game, as shown in FIG. 44(c), at the end of the game Rn (at the timing indicated by symbol T1 in FIG. 44(c)), the first display is displayed. Both the display (remaining number display DP) and the second display (total payout number display AP) are updated.

On the other hand, when the game Rn is played with a double bet, as shown in FIG. Neither the display (remaining number display DP) nor the second display (total payout number display AP) is displayed, and after the end of the game Rn, when accepting the BET operation for the next game Rn+1 (FIG. 44(d) ), both the first display (remaining number display DP) and the second display (total payout number display AP) are updated.

That is, in the slot machine according to this example, in the first advantageous game state (AT2 state in this example), the first display (remaining number display DP) and the second The timing of updating the second display (total payout number display AP) is different.

FIG. 45(a) is a diagram showing an example of screen transition when a 2-coin game is performed after the 3-coin game described with reference to FIG. 44(a), and then a 3-coin game is performed again. .

When a double bet game is performed in the game Rm after performing a three bet game in the game Rn, as shown in FIG. After that, when the 3-bet game is performed again, the first display (remaining number display DP) is the difference number MP including the image showing the count value of the difference number counter (in this example, "LAST 2240/2400 ” may be displayed).

Here, as described with reference to FIG. 18, in the high navigation state common processing A, when the value of the high navigation state counter is equal to or less than the LMT transition value A (19 in this example), or when the differential number counter is configured to set the freeze information (various information for executing the freeze effect) when the LMT transition value B (1840 in this example) or more is set, and the freeze information is set In this case, for example, a freeze effect FG shown in FIG. 45(a) is executed.

That is, the slot machine according to this example is in the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state in this example) and displays the first display (remaining number display DP shown in FIG. 45(a) in this example). When the second game (in this example, the two-ply game) is executed in the state of being played, and then the first game (in this example, the three-ply game) is executed, the first game A third display (in this example, the difference number display MP shown in FIG. 45(a)) can be displayed without displaying the display.

According to the slot machine according to this example, when the first game is executed after the second game, the third display can be displayed without displaying the first display. In some cases, it may be possible to make the player realize that he or she was playing a second game that is more disadvantageous.

FIG. 45(b) is a diagram showing an example of screen transition of the double-bet game described with reference to FIG. 44(d).

When the game Rn is played with a double bet, as shown in FIG. 45(b), in the game Rn, the special screen SP is displayed both at the start of the game and at the end of the game, and the first display ( If neither the remaining number display DP) nor the second display (total payout number display AP) is displayed and the 3-bet game is played again after that, when the BET operation of the game Rm is accepted, the second After updating both the first display (remaining number display DP) and the second display (total payout number display AP), the freeze effect FG is executed, and the first display (remaining number display DP) changes to the difference number. In some cases, the difference number MP includes an image showing the count value of the counter (in this example, the display of an image including characters “LAST 2240/2400”). That is, the slot machine according to this example is in the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state in this example) and displays the first display (remaining number display DP shown in FIG. 45(b) in this example). When the second game (in this example, the two-ply game) is executed in the state of being played, and then the first game (in this example, the three-ply game) is executed, the first game The third display (in this example, the difference number display MP shown in FIG. 45B) can be displayed without displaying the display.

According to the slot machine according to this example, when the first game is executed after the second game, the third display can be displayed without displaying the first display. In some cases, it may be possible to make the player realize that he or she was playing a second game that is more disadvantageous.

<Modified example 1 of update and display of count values of various counters>
FIGS. 45C and 45D are diagrams showing modification 1 of updating and displaying count values of various counters.

The example shown in FIG. 45(c) is an example in which a button effect is performed after the third stop in a certain game in the AT2 state, and an additional effect is performed when an operation of the operation means for effect is received.

In this example, in a certain game in the AT2 state, a chance production CG (in this example, a display of "!-!-!" indicating the possibility (chance) of giving the player an advantageous profit at the time of lever-on) is displayed. ) is displayed, and when the third stop is received (at the end of the game), a button effect BG (in this example, the appearance of the button is changed to A display consisting of a simulated image, the text "Press!", and an image of a downward arrow) is performed. Then, when the operation of the production operation means (production button) is received, the additional production UG for AT2 (in this example, the characters "+30" suggesting that the number of AT2 scheduled acquisitions has increased by 30) (including image display).

That is, the slot machine according to the present example performs the performance operation after all of the plurality of reels have been stopped by the operation of the plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 137 to 139 in this example). A certain effect (in this example, the button effect BG shown in FIG. 45(c)) can be started when the means (in this example, the effect button) is operated.

The example shown in FIG. 45(d) is an example in which the button effect described with reference to FIG. 45(c) is performed after the predetermined number acquisition display is started in a certain game in the AT2 state.

In this example, in a certain game in the AT2 state, a chance production CG (in this example, a display of "!-!-!" indicating the possibility (chance) of giving the player an advantageous profit at the time of lever-on) is displayed. ) is displayed, and when the third stop is received (at the end of the game), a predetermined number of medals obtained display TG indicating that the number of medals obtained has reached 500 (in this example, "Over 500"). display including a character string), and a button effect BG (in this example, an image imitating the appearance of the button and the text “Press!” , and an image of a downward arrow). Also, in this example, at least a portion of the predetermined number acquisition display TG is overlapped with at least a portion of the button effect BG. It will be erased and all the button effects will be visible.

That is, the slot machine according to the present example performs the performance operation after all of the plurality of reels have been stopped by the operation of the plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 137 to 139 in this example). The predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, the predetermined number acquisition display TG shown in FIG. 45(d)) can be started to be displayed before the means (in this example, the production button) is operated, After all the reels out of the plurality of reels have been stopped by the operation of the plurality of stop operation means, a certain effect (in this example, FIG. 45 ( The button effect BG) shown in d) can be started to be executed.

According to the slot machine according to the present example, it becomes easier for the player to recognize both the certain effect and the display of obtaining the predetermined number of coins, and it may be possible to prevent the overlooking of the certain effect and the display of obtaining the predetermined number of coins.

It should be noted that the additional effect UG may be executed or may not be executed when the throwing operation or lever-on is performed without operation of the effect operation means (effect button). Also, in the case where it is configured to be executed, there may be a case where the display timing of the predetermined number acquisition display TG and the additional effect UG shown in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 45(d), when there is an operation of the operation means for effect (effect button), the predetermined number acquisition display TG and the additional effect UG are overlapped, but when the insertion operation or lever on is performed, the predetermined number acquisition display TG is performed. disappears, it does not overlap with the display of the additional effect UG.

<Modified example 2 of update and display of count values of various counters>
FIGS. 46A and 46B are diagrams showing Modified Example 2 of update and display of count values of various counters.

In the first embodiment, the AT2 state is the AT state in which the progress of the game is controlled by the difference in the number of game media (AT state in which the difference in the number of game media is managed). Alternatively, an AT state in which the game progress is controlled by the number of games (AT state for managing the number of games) may be used.

FIG. 46(a) shows an example in which a three-bet game is performed in games R222 and R221.

<Modification 2/AT2 State (Game R222)>
The game 222 is a game in which the number of remaining games is 222 in the high navigation state and the number of remaining games is 2 in the AT2 state, and is a three-bet game.

Since the effect state is the AT2 state, the game R222 uses the effect image display device 157 to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state with the receipt of Lebaon as a trigger, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) is internally won, so operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, display of operation "2-1-3" for informing the correct operation order of minor winning combination 4) is being executed. In addition, since the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is 2, the remaining game display RG (in this example, " LAST2G”) is executed.

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at Lebaon is 490, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, " TOTAL 490 sheets of images including characters) are being executed.

Next, since the game has ended in this game R222, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won a small win 4 (condition device No. 8), after paying out the number of payout medals corresponding to the small win 4 (11 in this example) (at the end of the game) ), and the value (8 in this example) obtained by subtracting the number of input (3 in this example) from the number of payouts (11 in this example) is added to the current counter value of the difference number counter (490 in this example). , the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 498 in this example.

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 498, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 498 sheets").

<Modification 2/AT2 State (Game R221)>
The game 221 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 221 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 1, and is a three-coin bet game.

Since the effect state is the AT2 state, the game R221 uses the effect image display device 157 to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state with the receipt of Lebaon as a trigger, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) is internally won, so operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, display of operation "2-1-3" for informing the correct operation order of minor winning combination 4) is being executed. In addition, since the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 1, the remaining game display RG (in this example, " LAST1G”) is executed.

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at Lebaon is 498, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, " TOTAL 498 sheets of images including characters) are being executed.

Next, since the game has ended in this game R221, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won a small win 4 (condition device No. 8), after paying out the number of payout medals corresponding to the small win 4 (11 in this example) (at the end of the game) ), and the value (8 in this example) obtained by subtracting the number of inputs (3 in this example) from the number of payouts (11 in this example) is added to the current counter value of the difference number counter (498 in this example). , the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 506 in this example.

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 506, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 506 sheets").

In addition, in the game R221 of this example, since the total number of acquired cards reaches the predetermined number (500 cards) and the effect state is AT2, the count value (500 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter Based on this, a predetermined number of acquisition display is determined, and a predetermined number of acquisition display TG (in this example, " display including the character string "500 sheets surpassed").

FIG. 46(b) shows an example in which a 3-coin game is performed in the game R222, a 2-coin game is performed in the game R221, and a 3-coin game is performed in the subsequent game R220. Note that the 3-bet game of the game R222 and the game R220 is the same as that explained with reference to FIG. 46(a), so the explanation thereof will be omitted.

<Modification 2/AT2 State (Game R221)>
The game 221 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 221 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 2, and is a two-coin bet game.

Since the effect state is the AT2 state, the game R221 uses the effect image display device 157 to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state with the receipt of Lebaon as a trigger, and also the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state. The operation navigation is not displayed because the small win 4 (conditional device No. 18) was internally won.

In addition, after accepting Lebaon, the main control unit 300 does not update the count value of the effect state counter because it is a two-play game, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter ) is not updated, but since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total winning number display counter) is 498, an image showing the count value of the total winning number display counter is included. A total payout number display AP (in this example, display of an image including characters of "TOTAL 498") is executed.

<Invention 1-1>
As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "the present invention 1-1") includes operating means (for example, shown in FIG. stop buttons 137-139) and any of a plurality of states including normal state (e.g., low-navi state shown in FIG. 6(b)) and advantageous state (e.g., high-navi state shown in FIG. 6(b)). A control means (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) for shifting to that state, and a display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. In the game machine, operation information of the operation means (for example, operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 8, operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 36(b), etc. information that can identify the stop position, stop order, stop timing, etc. of each reel), and the advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, A first counter that counts the total number of game media acquired by the player based on the number of game media used and the number of game media paid out in the advantageous state The first count value of the first counter (for example, the count value of the difference number counter shown in FIG. 47, FIG. 36A, etc.) each time one game is played in the advantageous state ) can be updated, and when an advantageous state ending condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is changed to the normal state, and the advantageous state ending condition is the first count value reaches a first value (for example, when the number of games played after shifting to an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times), and in the advantageous state, among the plurality of advantageous game states One of the plurality of advantageous game states is a first advantageous game state (for example, AT2 state), and the first advantageous game state. A second counter (for example, FIG. 47 or FIG. 36 ( a), etc.), and each time one game is played in the first advantageous game state, the second count value of the second counter (for example, FIG. 47 or FIG. 36 ( a) AT2 remaining acquired number display counter shown in count value) can be updated, and when the condition for ending the first advantageous game state is satisfied, the first advantageous game state ends, and the first advantageous game state ends. The termination condition is a condition that can be established when the second count value reaches the second value (for example, when the number of game media paid out after shifting to the AT2 state reaches the AT2 expected acquisition number). and one of the plurality of types of display is a first display indicating a value related to the second count value (for example, the remaining number display DP shown in FIG. 47, FIG. 36(b), etc.). A first game (e.g., a three-bet game) in which the bet amount of the game medium is a first number (e.g., 3), and a second game in which the bet amount of the game medium is a second number (e.g., 2) A second game (for example, a double bet game) is configured to be executable, the second number is a number different from the first number, and in the first advantageous game state, the The first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game (for example, the number of game media paid out per hour is large, the profit amount per hour is large, the net increase in the number of games per game is large) , it is easy to shift from a normal state to an advantageous state, it is difficult to shift from an advantageous state to a normal state, etc.). The execution result of the second game may be the second result, and the first result is the number of payouts of game media that differs from the first number (for example, 11), and the second result is a result in which the number of payouts of game media is different from the second number (for example, 11), and the first advantageous gaming state is achieved. The first game is executed in a state where the first display is displayed (for example, the state shown in FIG. 47(A) or the state shown by game R221 in FIG. 44(a)). , the number of game media used (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game can be reflected in both the first count value and the second count value. and the number of game media used (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game can be reflected in the first display, and the first advantageous gaming state is when the second game is executed while the first display is displayed and the second result is obtained, the number of game media used (or the number of bets) related to the execution of the second game; If the number of payouts is equal to the first count value and the second can be reflected only in the first count value among the count values of , and the number of game media used (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are not reflected in the first display It is a game machine characterized by being configured as follows. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an outline of the invention 1-1 of the present application.

According to the gaming machine according to Invention 1-1 of the present application, the number of game media used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are not reflected in the first display. It is possible to inform the player of the fact that the disadvantageous second game has been executed in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. Also, even when the second game is executed, the number of game media used and the number of payouts are reflected in the first count value. In some cases, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing the game. Further, even if the number of game media increases in the second game, the number of used game media and the number of payouts of game media are not reflected in the second count value, and the first advantageous game state end condition is not affected. Therefore (because the first advantageous game advantageous state does not progress), it is possible to reduce the disappointment (feeling of loss) of the player who has executed the second game due to an operation error or the like.

It should be noted that the gaming machine according to Invention 1-1 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, the ``second counter'' according to the present invention is a ``counter for counting the total number of game media acquired by the player based on at least the number of game media paid out in the first advantageous game state. and includes a "counter for counting the total number of game media acquired by the player based on the number of game media used and the number of payouts in the first advantageous game state." Further, the "first display" according to the present invention may be a display indicating a value related to the second count value, and may be a value indicating the second count value itself, or a value indicating the second count value. and other values may be calculated.

In addition, a third counter (for example, a total counter shown in FIG. 47, FIG. The certain game period is a period including at least the game period in the first advantageous game state, and each time one game is played in the certain game period, the third The third count value of the counter (for example, the count value of the total acquired number display counter shown in FIG. 47, FIG. 36(a), etc.) can be updated. is a second display (e.g., total payout number display AP shown in FIG. 47, FIG. 36(b), etc.) indicating a value related to the third count value, and is the first advantageous gaming state and the In a state where both the first display and the second display are displayed (for example, the state shown in FIG. 47(A) or the state shown in game R221 in FIG. 44(a)), the first display When the game is executed and the first result is obtained, the number of used game media and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game are equal to the first count value, the second count value and the third count value. All of the count values can be reflected, and the number of game media used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game can be reflected in both the first display and the second display. The state in which both the first display and the second display are displayed in the first advantageous gaming state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 47(B) or the 44(a) in the state indicated by the game R221), when the second game is executed and the second result is obtained, the number of used game media and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are One count value, the second count value and the third count value, which can be reflected in the first count value and the third count value and are related to the execution of the second game The number of media used and the number of payouts may not be reflected on the first display, but may be reflected on the second display.

With such a configuration, the number of game media used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are not reflected in the first display, but can be reflected in the second display. By updating the second display related to , it is possible to prevent distrust from being given to the player.

Further, one display among the plurality of types of display is a third display indicating a value related to the first count value (for example, difference number display MP shown in FIG. 45(a), etc.). The display mode of the third display and the display mode of the second display are different display modes, and the second game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state and the first display is displayed. The third display may be displayed without displaying the first display when the game is executed and the first game is executed thereafter.

With such a configuration, when the first game is executed after the second game, the third display can be displayed without displaying the first display. In some cases, it is possible to make the player aware that he or she has been playing a second game that is disadvantageous.

In addition, the execution of the second game in the first advantageous game state does not cause the first advantageous game state to end based on the establishment of the first advantageous game state end condition. Even if it is configured such that the execution of the second game in the first advantageous gaming state may terminate the first advantageous gaming state based on the establishment of the advantageous state ending condition. good.

With such a configuration, the execution of the first game may not terminate the first advantageous game state, while the execution of the second game may terminate the first advantageous game state. , it may be possible to ensure fairness between the player who is playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

<Invention 1-2>
As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "claimed invention 1-2") is capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), and a first game (for example, 3 game) and a second game (for example, a double-bet game) in which the bet number of the game medium is a second number (for example, 2), and the second number is , a number different from the first number, and the first game is more advantageous for the player than the second game (for example, the number of game media paid out per time is larger, the amount of profit is large, the number of net increases per game is large, it is easy to shift from a normal state to an advantageous state, it is difficult to shift from an advantageous state to a normal state, etc.). A first counter for counting the total number of game media acquired by the player (for example, the total acquired number display counter shown in FIG. 48, FIG. 36(a), etc.) is provided based on , the first count value of the first counter (for example, the count value of the total winning number display counter shown in FIG. 48, FIG. 36(a), etc.) can be updated each time one game is played. The display means can display a predetermined number acquisition display (for example, a predetermined number acquisition display TG shown in FIG. 48, FIG. 37, etc.) when the first count value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 500). When the first count value reaches the predetermined value due to the execution of the first game in the certain game period, the predetermined number acquisition display is displayed based on the execution of the first game. can be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 48(A) and game R221 in FIG. 44(a)), and the first count value is displayed by executing the second game during the certain game period reaches the predetermined value, the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed based on the execution of the second game (for example, FIG. 48 (B) or FIG. 44 ( (See game R211 in b)). FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an outline of the invention 1-2 of the present application.

According to the amusement machine according to the present invention 1-2, even if the first count value reaches the predetermined value due to the execution of the second game in a certain game period, the execution of the second game Therefore, the player's disappointment (feeling of loss) that has executed the second game due to an operation error or the like can be reduced. In addition, since the first count value is updated even when the second game is executed, fairness between the player executing the first game and the player executing the second game may be guaranteed.

It should be noted that the gaming machine according to Invention 1-2 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, operating means (eg, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1), normal state (eg, low navigation state shown in FIG. 6(b)) and advantageous state (eg, shown in FIG. 6(b) a control means (for example, main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) for shifting to one of a plurality of states including high navigation state), and operation information of the operation means (for example, Information that can identify the stop position, stop order, stop timing, etc. of each reel, such as operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. ), wherein the advantageous state is a state more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and based on the number of game media used and the number of game media paid out in the advantageous state , a second counter for counting the total number of game media acquired by the player (for example, the difference number counter shown in FIG. 48, FIG. When the second count value of the second counter (for example, the count value of the difference number counter shown in FIG. 48, FIG. 36(a), etc.) can be updated, and the advantageous state end condition is satisfied Secondly, the advantageous state is transitioned to the normal state, and the advantageous state end condition is when the second count value reaches the first value (for example, transition to the advantageous state When the number of games played from the game reaches the upper limit number of times), it is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous game states in the advantageous state, and the plurality of advantageous game states One of the advantageous gaming states is a first advantageous gaming state, and a third counter relating to management of the first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 remaining acquisition shown in FIG. 48, FIG. 36(a), etc. number display counter), and every time one game is played in the first advantageous gaming state, the third count value of the third counter (for example, AT2 remaining acquisition shown in FIG. 48 and FIG. 36(a) The count value of the number display counter) is configured to be able to update, and when the first advantageous gaming state end condition is satisfied, the first advantageous gaming state is terminated, and the first advantageous gaming state is terminated. The advantageous game state end condition is that when the third count value reaches the second value (for example, when the number of game media paid out after shifting to the AT2 state reaches the AT2 expected acquisition number) It is a condition that can be established, and the plurality of types of display One of the displays is a first display indicating a value related to the third count value (for example, the remaining number display DP shown in FIG. 48, FIG. 36(b), etc.). A first game (e.g., 3 bet game) with a first number (e.g., 3), and a second game (e.g., 2 The second number is a number different from the first number, and in the first advantageous game state, the second number is higher than the second game. One game is more advantageous to the player (for example, the number of game media paid out per hour is large, the amount of profit per hour is large, the net increase in the number of games per game is large, and the normal state is changed to an advantageous state. (e.g., it is difficult to move from an advantageous state to a normal state, etc.). may result in a second result, and the first result is a result in which the number of game media paid out is a number (e.g., 11) different from the first number, The second result is a result in which the number of payouts of game media is different from the second number (for example, 11), and the first display is displayed in the first advantageous game state. (for example, the state shown in FIG. 47(A) or the state shown by game R221 in FIG. 44(a)), when the first game is executed with the first result, The number of game media used (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts related to execution of the first game can be reflected in both the second count value and the third count value, and The number of game media used (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts related to execution of the game are configured to be reflected in the first display, and the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state. (for example, the state shown in FIG. 47A or the state shown in game R221 in FIG. The number of game media used (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game can be reflected only in the second count value out of the second count value and the third count value, and The number of game media used (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game may not be reflected in the first display.

With such a configuration, the number of used game media and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are not reflected in the first display. It is possible to inform the player that the game has been played in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. Also, even when the second game is executed, the number of game media used and the number of payouts are reflected in the first count value. In some cases, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing the game. Further, even if the number of game media increases in the second game, the number of used game media and the number of payouts of game media are not reflected in the second count value, and the first advantageous game state end condition is not affected. Therefore (because the first advantageous game advantageous state does not progress), it is possible to reduce the disappointment (feeling of loss) of the player who has executed the second game due to an operation error or the like.

Further, the third counter may be a counter that counts the total number of game media acquired by the player based on at least the number of game media paid out in the first advantageous game state.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to ensure fairness between the player who is playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

In addition, by executing the first game, it is possible to win a certain combination (for example, a small combination 4 (conditional device No. 8)), and the number of payouts of game media based on the winning of the certain combination is A certain number of 1 or more (for example, 11), and in a certain state in which the first count value has reached the predetermined value due to the execution of the second game during the certain game period, The display of reaching the predetermined number is not displayed when a winning combination is not won by the execution of the first game. In a certain state in which the first count value has reached the predetermined value, when the certain winning combination is won by the execution of the first game, the display of reaching the predetermined number can be displayed. (see, for example, game R211 in FIGS. 38 and 39).

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player feel a greater sense of accomplishment because the display is made in a state favorable to the player. In addition, in the case where an effect is produced by winning a prize, it is possible to make the game even more lively by a synergistic effect with the winning effect.

Further, one of the plurality of types of display is a second display indicating a value related to the first count value (for example, total payout number display AP shown in FIG. 48, FIG. 36(b), etc.). Yes, the first game was executed in the first advantageous game state and both the first display and the second display were displayed, resulting in the first result. the number of game media used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game can be reflected in all of the first count value, the second count value and the third count value and the number of used game media and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game can be reflected in both the first display and the second display, and the first advantageous game state is achieved. and when the second game is executed in a state where both the first display and the second display are displayed and the second result is obtained, the second game The number of game media used and the number of payouts related to execution can be reflected in the first count value and the second count value out of the first count value, the second count value and the third count value. and the number of used game media and the number of payouts related to execution of the second game may not be reflected on the first display, but may be reflected on the second display.

With such a configuration, the number of game media used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are not reflected in the first display, but can be reflected in the second display. By updating the second display related to , it is possible to prevent distrust from being given to the player.

<Invention 1-3>
As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "claimed invention 1-3") has a display capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), and the number of game media acquired by the player is calculated based on at least the number of game media paid out during a certain game period. A first counter for counting the total number (for example, a difference number counter shown in FIG. 49, FIG. 36(a), etc.) is provided, and each time one game is played in the certain game period, the first counter of the first counter (for example, the count value of the difference number counter shown in FIG. 49 or FIG. 36(a)) can be updated, and the display means displays that the first count value is a predetermined value (for example, 500), it is means capable of displaying a predetermined number of winning display (for example, a predetermined number of winning display TG shown in FIGS. 49 and 37), and the certain game period is equivalent to the first game period ( For example, a period in which the production state is the AT1 state) and a second game period (for example, a period in which the production state is the AT2 state). It is configured to be able to shift from the period to the second game period, and after the first count value reaches the predetermined value in the second game period, the first count value falls below the predetermined value. After that, even if the first count value reaches the predetermined value again, the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed (for example, FIG. 49(A) or FIG. 41 ( (See game R174 of b)), after the first count value reaches the predetermined value, the second game is played from the first game period in a state in which the first count value is less than the predetermined value. period, and when the first count value reaches the predetermined value in the second game period, the predetermined number acquisition display can be displayed (for example, FIG. 49(B), See game R221 in FIG. 37). It should be noted that FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 1-3 of the present application.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention 1-3, after the first count value reaches the predetermined value in the second game period, the first count value falls below the predetermined value, and then the first count value Even when the count value reaches the predetermined value again, the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed, so it is possible to alleviate the feeling that the game media have not increased during the same game period. Further, the first game period is shifted to the second game period while the first count value is lower than the predetermined value, and the first count value reaches the predetermined value in the second game period. Since the predetermined number of acquisition display can be displayed when the number is reached, the predetermined number of acquisition display may enhance the interest of the player.

When a game state is crossed (and a player who can perceive that it is transitioning), there are many people who have expectations for a new advantageous game state and think of it separately from the advantageous game state before the transition. Therefore, for such a player, by performing a predetermined number reached display, it is possible to moderately encourage the new advantageous game state. In some cases, it is easy to grasp the increase in the number of

It should be noted that the gaming machine according to Inventions 1-3 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, the "first counter" according to the present invention may be "a counter that counts the total number of game media acquired by the player based on at least the number of game media paid out during a certain game period." It may also include "a counter that counts the total number of game media acquired by the player based on the number of game media used and paid out during a certain game period".

Further, after the first count value reaches the predetermined value, the first count value falls below the predetermined value, and then the first count value reaches the predetermined value again. When one game period shifts to the second game period, the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed only by shifting to the second game period, and the execution of the game in the second game period is not performed. (See, for example, FIG. 49(C) and game R221 in FIG. 38).

With such a configuration, the display of obtaining the predetermined number of coins is displayed based on the execution of the game during the second game period, so that it may be possible to prevent the player from overlooking the display of obtaining the predetermined number of coins.

Further, the expected value of the increased number of game media per game in the second game period is higher than the expected value of the increased number of game media per game in the first game period (for example, the net increase in the number of game media per game). may be configured higher.

With such a configuration, since the predetermined number acquisition display is performed in the game period in which the expected value of the increased number of game media is higher, the player's desire to play the game is maintained until the next predetermined number acquisition display is displayed. sometimes it is possible.

Also, a certain effect (for example, the additional effect UG shown in FIGS. 49(A), 36(b), 45(c), and (d), or button effect BG) can be executed, and the execution frequency of the certain effect during the first game period is higher than the execution frequency of the certain effect during the second game period. , and the certain effect may be a effect related to the profit of the second game period.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for the second game period even in the first game period, and to maintain the player's willingness to play from the first game period to the second game period. may be able to

It should be noted that the "effect related to the profit in the second game period" according to the present invention is not limited to the AT2 additional effect or the button effect. Also included are effects related to the number of navigations in AT (managed by how many times navigation is performed in AT), mode-up of AT2 (a good mode has a high probability of addition, a large number of additions, and a combination of both).

Also, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate, and a plurality of stop operation means operated to individually stop the plurality of reels (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) and production operation means (for example, production buttons not shown and bet button 130 shown in FIG. 1), and by operating the plurality of stop operation means After all the reels out of the plurality of reels have stopped and before the operation means for effect is operated, the predetermined number acquisition display (for example, predetermined number acquisition shown in FIG. 45(d) display TG) is configured to be able to start displaying, and the effect operation means is operated after all of the plurality of reels have been stopped by the operation of the plurality of stop operation means. 45(c) and (d) of FIG. 45) can be started to be executed.

With such a configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize both the certain effect and the display of obtaining the predetermined number of coins, and it may be possible to prevent the overlooking of the certain effect and the display of obtaining the predetermined number of coins.

It should be noted that it may be possible to start executing the certain effect based on the operation of an operation means other than the effect operation means (for example, the bet button 130 or the start lever 135 shown in FIG. 1), It may be configured such that the certain effect is not executed based on the operation of the operation means other than the effect operation means.

In addition, it is configured to be able to execute a plurality of types of freeze effects (for example, freeze effects FG shown in FIGS. 45(a) and 45(b)), and one of the plurality of types of freeze effects is , is the first freeze effect (for example, effect to lock the reels 110 to 112, etc.) performed at the first timing in one game (for example, the timing at which Lebaon is accepted), and is one of the plurality of types of freeze effects One freeze effect is performed at a second timing different from the first timing in one game (for example, the timing at which any one of the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation is received). This is a second freeze effect (for example, a screen darkening effect, an additional effect, an effect at the start of the ED effect, etc.), and in the second game period, the first freeze effect is performed. Based on the above, the display of reaching the predetermined number may be displayed, and in the second game period, the display of reaching the predetermined number based on the execution of the game in which the second freeze effect is performed may be configured so as not to be displayed.

With such a configuration, the player is prevented from feeling distrustfulness by making it possible to display the predetermined number acquisition display as much as possible while making it possible to give priority to the execution of the freezing performance which is generally highly expected. be able to.

<Invention 1-4>
As described above, the amusement machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "present invention 1-4") has a display capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), and the number of game media acquired by the player is calculated based on at least the number of game media paid out during a certain game period. A first counter for counting the total number (for example, a differential number counter shown in FIG. 50, FIG. 36(a), etc.) is provided, and each time one game is played in the certain game period, the first (for example, the count value of the difference number counter shown in FIG. 50 and FIG. 36(a)) can be updated. Means capable of displaying a predetermined number acquisition display when reaching any one of them, and the certain game period includes a first game period (for example, a period in which the effect state is the AT1 state) and a second game period. (for example, a period in which the effect state is the AT2 state). The predetermined number of winning display can be displayed during the second game period, and the display means can display a first predetermined number of winning display as the predetermined number of winning display (for example, FIG. 50(A) or Means capable of displaying a plurality of predetermined number acquisition displays including a predetermined number acquisition display TG1 shown in FIG. 40) and a second predetermined number acquisition display (for example, predetermined number acquisition display TG2 shown in FIG. 50(A) and FIG. 40) , the first predetermined number acquisition indication is an indication corresponding to a first predetermined value (for example, 456) of the plurality of predetermined values, and the second predetermined number acquisition indication is an indication corresponding to the plurality of is a display corresponding to a second predetermined value (e.g., 500) among the predetermined values of, and the first count value can reach the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value in this order. When the first count value reaches the first predetermined value before the first count value reaches the second predetermined value in the second game period (See, for example, FIG. 50(A) and game R238 in FIG. 40). after the first predetermined value is reached and the first predetermined number acquisition display is displayed; When the first count value reaches the second predetermined value, the second predetermined number acquisition display can be displayed (for example, see FIG. 50(A) or game R227 in FIG. 40). ), in a state in which the first count value has reached both the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value, the game period is shifted from the first game period to the second game period. After that, during the second game period, only one of the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display can be displayed (for example, FIG. 50 ( B), game R238 in FIG. 41(a), and game R238 in FIG. 43). Note that FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 1-4 of the present application.

According to the amusement machine according to the invention 1-4 of the present application, when the first count value reaches both the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value, the second game period starts from the first game period. after the transition to the game period of (2), since only one of the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display can be displayed in the second game period, the predetermined number of sheets is acquired By not displaying excessively, it is possible not only to prevent excessive gambling, but also to prevent misrecognition of the predetermined number acquisition display.

Note that the gaming machine according to Inventions 1-4 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, the "first counter" according to the present invention may be "a counter that counts the total number of game media acquired by the player based on at least the number of game media paid out during a certain game period." It may also include "a counter that counts the total number of game media acquired by the player based on the number of game media used and paid out during a certain game period".

Further, the first game period is shifted to the second game period while the first count value has reached both the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value. Later, after only the second predetermined number of winning display out of the first predetermined number of winning display and the second predetermined number of winning display is displayed in the second game period, the second predetermined number of winning display is displayed. Even when the first count value falls below the first predetermined value in the game period and then reaches the first predetermined value again, the first predetermined number acquisition display is displayed. (see, for example, game R174 in FIG. 41(b)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent excessive gambling by preventing the predetermined number of winning display from being performed excessively. In addition, for example, after displaying the larger number, if the player intentionally plays a game in which the player loses and displays the smaller number, the display with the larger number is displayed again. In this case, if it is displayed again, it will lead to excessive display of the acquisition of the predetermined number, and if it is not displayed again, the game will Players (players who have once forgotten that the larger number is displayed) may feel distrustful, so even if they intentionally lose a game, they will get a predetermined number of coins. By structuring so that no display is performed, it is possible to prevent the player from losing.

Also, the first game period in a state where the first count value has reached both the first predetermined value (for example, 456) and the second predetermined value (for example, 500) to the second game period, the first predetermined number acquisition display (for example, the first predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that 456 cards have been reached) and the first predetermined number acquisition display in the second game period Of the two predetermined number acquisition indications (for example, the second predetermined number acquisition indication suggesting that 500 cards have been reached), after only the first predetermined number acquisition indication is displayed, the second predetermined number acquisition indication is displayed. The display of the second predetermined number of coins obtained may be displayed during the game period.

With such a configuration, the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display are displayed a plurality of times. Since the acquisition display of the predetermined number is performed from 1, it is possible to moderately stimulate the gambling spirit and give the player a sense of accomplishment.

Also, the first game period in a state where the first count value has reached both the first predetermined value (for example, 456) and the second predetermined value (for example, 500) to the second game period, the first predetermined number acquisition display (for example, the first predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that 456 cards have been reached) and the first predetermined number acquisition display in the second game period After both of the two predetermined number acquisition indications (for example, the second predetermined number acquisition indication suggesting that 500 cards have been reached) are not displayed, the first predetermined number of pieces is displayed during the second game period. The acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display may be configured so as not to be displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from making a loss by arranging so that the predetermined number acquisition display is not performed even if the player deliberately plays a game that causes a loss.

Further, the plurality of predetermined number acquisition indications include a third predetermined number acquisition indication, and the third predetermined number acquisition indication is set to a third predetermined value (for example, 1000) among the plurality of predetermined values. A corresponding display, wherein the first count value has reached both the first predetermined value (e.g., 456) and the second predetermined value (e.g., 500). After the transition from one game period to the second game period, the first predetermined number acquisition display (for example, the first predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that 456 cards have been reached) is displayed in the second game period. ) and the second predetermined number acquisition display (for example, the second predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that 500 cards have been reached) are not displayed, in the second game period, the second Although one predetermined number of acquisition display and the second predetermined number of acquisition display are not displayed, the third predetermined number of acquisition display (for example, a third predetermined number of acquisition display suggesting that 1000 cards have been reached) is displayed. ) may be configured to be displayable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from making a loss by configuring so that the predetermined number acquisition display is not performed even if the player intentionally loses a game. A sense of accomplishment can be given to the player at appropriate timing.

In addition, at least one of the first predetermined number of sheets obtained display and the second predetermined number of sheets obtained display (for example, the first predetermined number of sheets indicating that 456 sheets have been reached, as shown in FIG. 40) The acquisition display TG1) may be a display as a setting suggestion effect suggesting a set value (for example, a effect suggesting that the set value is set to 4 or more).

With such a configuration, in addition to the acquired number of game media, information on the set value can be obtained, so that the interest and convenience of the player can be further enhanced.

The configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the above embodiment. ), for example, it may be configured to be determined by lottery from a plurality of AT types such as game number management, difference number management, and Bernavi number management.

Also, two-choice navigation may be executed in the AT2 state. For example, in step S2301 of AT2 state processing B shown in FIG. adds 11 to the AT2 acquisition number counter, the first stop operation is operated according to the navigation during two-choice navigation, and if the second stop operation is missed, adds 1 to the AT2 acquisition number counter, and two-choice navigation Even if the first stop operation is performed without following the navigation and the number of sheets becomes 0, 11 may be added to the AT2 acquisition sheet counter.

Also, in the AT1 state, it may be configured so that "TOTAL 0 sheets", which is the total number of acquired sheets, is not displayed, in the AT1 state, a display corresponding to the AT2 expected acquired number counter may be performed, or +30 or the like may be displayed. It may be displayed by stacking them.

Also, for example, the time from the timing of the third stop operation for displaying the predetermined number of acquisition display TG1 (over 456) to the display start timing of the predetermined number acquisition display TG2 (over 500) shown in FIG. As shown, when the count value of the difference number counter exceeds 500 in the AT1 state, from the timing of the third stop operation in the subsequent AT2 state to the display start timing of the predetermined number acquisition display TG (over 500) times may be different.

[Embodiment 2]
A slot machine according to Embodiment 2 of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

In addition, in the second embodiment, in principle, only the configuration different from that of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment will be described in order to avoid redundant description. 51 to 83 are basically used only for the explanation of the second embodiment, and even if overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the The code shown in 83 has priority.

<First Advantageous Gaming State, Second Advantageous Gaming State>
FIG. 51(a) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the "first advantageous game state" according to the present invention, and FIG. It is the figure which showed the example which transfers to the "second advantageous game state" which concerns on this invention via "game state."

The "first advantageous game state" according to the present invention is a state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (low navigation state) with respect to the notification of operation information of the operation means, and is a set game that can be played a predetermined number of times. It is a game that can be executed multiple times, and the normal state of this example corresponds to an example of the "first advantageous game state." As shown in FIG. 51(a), the normal state of this example is composed of NM1 state, NM2 state, and NM3 state, and NM2 state further includes season 1, season 2, . is a positive integer) and the CZ (chance zone) state. Here, the "operation information" is, for example, operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 8, operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. It is information that can identify the stop position, stop order, stop timing, etc.

The "second advantageous gaming state" according to the present invention is a state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous gaming state regarding the notification of operation information of the operation means, and the AT1 state of this example is the "second advantageous gaming state". It corresponds to an example of As shown in FIG. 51(a), the AT1 state of this example has two types, AT1 type "high" and AT1 type "low", and this AT1 type is determined by the above-mentioned AT type lottery.

In the example shown in FIG. 51 (b) (1), the production state shifts in the order of normal game state → normal state → fixed announcement state → AT1 state (low or high), and in the normal state, NM1 state is executed. After that, the set game (in this example, NM2 state (season 1→...→season N)→NM3 state) is executed twice. The set game in the normal state is not limited to this example, and for example, "NM1 state→NM2 state (season 1→...→season N)→NM3 state" may be set as the set game.

In the example shown in FIG. 51 (b) (2), the effect state shifts in the order of normal game state → normal state → AT1 state (low), and in the normal state, after executing the NM1 state, the set game (this The example shows an example in which the NM2 state (Season 1→...→Season N)→NM3 state) is executed multiple times. Also, in this example, the NM3 state of the normal state is shifted to the AT1 state (low) without going through the final notification state.

In the example shown in FIG. 51(b)(3), the effect state shifts in the order of normal game state→normal state→fixed notification state→AT1 state (low or high), and in the normal state, NM1 state is executed. After that, after the first set game (in this example, NM2 state (season 1 -> season N) -> NM3 state) is executed once, the second set game (in this example, NM2 state (season 1→...→... CZ state)) is executed once. Further, in this example, the state is shifted from the CZ state of the NM2 state of the normal state to the fixed notification state without going through the NM3 state.

In the example shown in FIG. 51 (b) (4), the production state shifts in the order of normal game state → normal state → AT1 state (high preferential treatment), and in the normal state, after executing NM1 state, set game (In this example, the NM2 state (season 1→...→season N)→NM3 state) is executed only once. Also, in this example, the state is shifted from the NM3 state of the normal state to the AT1 state (high preferential treatment) without going through the final notification state.

In the example shown in FIG. 51 (b) (5), the production state shifts in the order of normal game state → normal state → normal game state → normal state → . , NM1 state→NM2 state (Season 1→...→Season N)→NM3 state) is executed once or more times.

FIG. 51(c) is a diagram showing a modified example of the "second advantageous gaming state" according to the present invention, and the CZ2 (chance zone 2) state of this example is also an example of the "second advantageous gaming state". correspond to In the example shown in FIG. 51(c), the effect state is shifted in the order of normal game state→normal state→CZ2 state→fixed announcement state (or normal game state). That is, the "second advantageous gaming state" according to the present invention is not limited to AT (for example, the above-mentioned AT1 state), but is a state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous gaming state regarding the notification of operation information of the operating means. It may be in a game state other than AT (for example, CZ2 state in this example, final notification state, judge state, etc.).

<Various tables>
Next, various tables provided in the slot machine 100 will be described in detail.

<Lottery table for high navigation state scenario determination>
FIG. 52(a) is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for high navigation state scenario determination. In this high-navi state scenario determination lottery table, the vertical axis represents setting values (settings 1 to 6 in this example), and the horizontal axis represents scenario numbers (scenarios 1 to 10 in this example).

The main control unit 300 refers to this high-navigation state scenario determination lottery table in the high-navigation state scenario lottery of the NM1 state process B, which will be described later, and selects the scenario number (high-navigation state scenario). For example, when the setting value is setting 1, scenario 1 is selected with a probability of 20/100, and when the setting value is setting 2, scenario 1 is selected with a probability of 14/100, and the setting value is set. In the case of 3, scenario 1 is selected with a probability of 18/100, when the set value is set to 4, scenario 1 is selected with a probability of 12/100, and when the set value is set to 5, Scenario 1 is selected with a probability of 16/100, and if the set value is set to 6, scenario 1 is selected with a probability of 10/100.

In the high navigation state scenario determination lottery table according to this example, scenarios 1, 3, 7, and 8 are more likely to be selected when the set value is an odd number than when the set value is an even number (the winning probability is higher), and scenario 2 , 4, 6, and 9 are more likely to be selected when the set value is an odd number than when the set value is an even number (the probability of winning is higher), and scenario 5 is more likely to be selected when the set value is larger (the probability of winning is higher). , Scenario 10 has the same winning probability regardless of the set value. Note that the relationship between the set value and the winning probability of the scenario number is not limited to this example. A plurality of winning probabilities may be the same regardless of the set value.

In addition, the lower the setting value, the higher the ceiling rate (the probability that the value of the cycle counter, which will be described later, exceeds the ceiling cycle value (5 in this example)), and the higher the reset rate (the high navigation state reset scenario described later (in this example, , scenario corresponding to scenario number 8 or 9) may be higher, or conversely, the higher the set value, the higher the ceiling rate and the higher the reset rate. Also, when the set value is an odd number, the ceiling rate may be higher and the reset rate may be higher than when the set value is an even number. The rate may be high and the reset rate may be high.

<High navigation state scenario table>
FIG. 52(b) is a diagram showing an example of a high navigation state scenario table. In this high-navi state scenario table, the vertical axis represents scenario numbers (scenarios 1 to 10 in this example), and the horizontal axis represents cycles (cycles 1 to 5 in this example).

The main control unit 300 refers to this high-navigation state scenario table in the period type setting of the period start setting process to be described later, and based on the scenario number and period at the time of reference, the period type (in this example, period type C , cycle type B, cycle type A, cycle type S). For example, if the scenario number is scenario 1, the cycle type C is set when the cycles are cycles 1, 2, and 4, and the cycle type B is set when the cycles are cycles 3 and 5. If the scenario number is scenario 6, the cycle type C is set when the cycle is 1, the cycle type B is set when the cycle is 2, and the cycle type S is set when the cycle is 3. set.

Also, when the scenario numbers are scenarios 8 and 9 (in the case of a high navigation state reset scenario, which will be described later), and when the scenario number is scenario 10 (in the case of an AT determination scenario, which will be described later), the cycle is only cycle 1. , the cycle type C is set in the scenario 8, the cycle type A is set in the scenario 9, and the cycle type S is set in the scenario 10.

<Lottery table for determining development season>
FIG. 52(c) is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for determining development season. In this development season determination lottery table, the vertical axis represents the cycle type (in this example, cycle type C, cycle type B, cycle type A, and cycle type S), and the horizontal axis represents the development season (in this example, one year 2nd year spring-winter (1-4), 2nd year spring (5), 2nd year summer (6), 2nd year autumn (7), 2nd year winter (8), 3rd year spring (9)) represents.

The main control unit 300 refers to the development season determination lottery table and selects the development season based on the period type and random number at the time of the lottery in the development season lottery of the period start setting process described later. For example, if the cycle type is cycle type C, the spring of the second year is selected with a probability of 60/100, the summer of the second year is selected with a probability of 30/100, and the second year is selected with a probability of 6/100. Select autumn, select winter of the second year with a probability of 3/100, and select spring of the third year with a probability of 1/100.

<CZ transfer lottery table>
FIG.52(d) is a figure which shows an example of a CZ shift lottery table. In this CZ transition lottery table, the vertical axis represents the cycle type (in this example, cycle type C, cycle type B, cycle type A, cycle type S), the horizontal axis represents the cycle (in this example, cycles 1 to 5) represents.

The main control unit 300 refers to this CZ shift lottery table in the CZ shift lottery of the NM2 state processing A to be described later, and determines whether the CZ shift lottery is successful based on the period type, period, and random value at the time of lottery. . As shown in FIG. 52(d), in the CZ shift lottery table of this example, it is more difficult to shift to CZ when the period is 1 than when the period is 2 to 5 (the winning probability of AT is low. ) is configured as This is to suppress the gambling nature and to provide contrast between the AT state and the non-AT state.

For example, if the cycle type is cycle type C, when the cycle is cycle 1, the CZ transition lottery is won with a low probability (for example, a probability of 5/100), and the cycle is one of cycles 2 to 5 Occasionally, you will win the CZ transition lottery with a medium probability (e.g., 30/100 probability). Also, when the cycle type is the cycle type S, when the cycle is cycle 1, the CZ transition lottery is won with a low probability (for example, a probability of 5/100), and the cycle is either cycle 2 or 3 Occasionally, there is a high probability (e.g., 90/100 probability) of winning the CZ transition lottery. Needless to say, the numerical values of low probability, medium probability, and high probability are not limited to this example.

Note that the winning probability of the AT transition lottery in cycle 1 may be lowered regardless of the CZ transition probability. Also, the probability of winning the AT transition lottery may be lower when the NM2 state of the normal state is shifted to the AT1 state via the CZ state than when the NM2 state of the normal state is shifted to the AT1 state. Since the winning probability of the AT transition lottery in the judge performance (CZ state) is the same regardless of the period, it may be possible to prevent the player's expectations for the judge performance from decreasing.

<AT Promotion Lottery Table>
FIG.52(e) is a figure which shows an example of an AT promotion lottery table. In this AT promotion lottery table, the horizontal axis represents the period (cycles 1 to 5 in this example) and the lottery value (numerical values are omitted).

The main control unit 300 refers to this AT promotion lottery table in the AT promotion lottery of the NM3 state process A to be described later, and determines whether or not the AT promotion lottery is successful based on the period and random number at the time of lottery. As shown in FIG. 52(e), in the AT promotion lottery table of this example, the AT1 type is promoted from "low" to "high" when the cycle is 1 rather than when the cycle is 2 to 5. It is structured in such a way that it is easy to use (it is easy to obtain benefits).

For example, if the cycle is cycle 1, the AT promotion lottery is won with a high probability (eg, a probability of 90/100), and if the cycle is any of the cycles 2 to 5, a low probability (eg, 10 / 100 probability) to win the AT promotion lottery. Needless to say, the values of low probability and high probability are not limited to this example.

<Lottery table for determining points that can be transferred to AT>
FIG. 53(a) is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for determining AT transferable points. In this AT transferable point determination lottery table, the vertical axis represents the number of points, and the horizontal axis represents lottery values (numerical values are omitted).

The main control unit 300 refers to this AT shiftable point determination lottery table in the AT shiftable point lottery of the period start setting process to be described later, and based on the random value at the time of the lottery, the AT shiftable point (to AT state) point to determine if migration is possible). Although description of lottery values is omitted, in this example, points within a numerical range of 0 to 900 PT (points) are selected as AT transferable points by lottery for AT transferable points.

<Lottery table for determining AT transfer points>
FIG.53(b) is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for AT transition point determination. In this AT transition point determination lottery table, the vertical axis represents winning combinations, and the horizontal axis represents lottery values (numerical values omitted) and additional points (numerical values omitted).

The main control unit 300 refers to this AT transition point determination lottery table in the AT transition point lottery of the NM1 state processing A and NM2 state processing A to be described later, and based on the winning combination and the random number at the time of the lottery, the AT transition Determines the additional points to be added to the points (initial value 0). Although the description of the lottery value and the additional points is omitted, in this example, points in the numerical range of 0 to 50 PT (points) are selected as the additional points by the AT transition point lottery.

<AT transition point production table>
FIG.53(c) is a figure which shows an example of an AT transition point effect table. In this AT shift point effect table, the vertical axis represents the AT shift point, and the horizontal axis represents the mode of effect.

Although not executed in the slot machine 100 according to the second embodiment, the main control unit 300 refers to this AT transition point effect table in the AT transition point lottery of the NM1 state processing A and the NM2 state processing A to be described later. Based on the AT transition point, the effect mode to be executed may be determined, and an effect suggesting the AT transition point may be performed instead of (or in addition to) the display of the AT transition point, which will be described later.

For example, if the AT transition point is 0 to 199, select white (for example, lighting means (e.g., lamp or LED) or display means (e.g., liquid crystal display) to emit white light) and execute the production, and when the AT transition point is 200 to 399, blue light is emitted using blue (eg, light emitting means (eg, lamp or LED) or display means (eg, liquid crystal display device) Effect to emit light) is selected and the effect is executed, and if the AT transition point is 800 to 999, a rainbow (eg, light emitting means (eg, lamp or LED) or display means (eg, liquid crystal display device) Effect of emitting light of rainbow (seven colors) is selected, and the effect is executed.

<Lottery table for determining season type>
FIG. 53(d) is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for determining season types. In this season type determination lottery table, the vertical axis represents season types (low, medium, high in this example), and the horizontal axis represents lottery values (numerical values are omitted).

The main control unit 300 refers to this lottery table for determining the season type and determines the season type based on the random number at the time of the lottery in the season type setting of the season start setting process to be described later. Although description of the lottery value is omitted, in this example, one of low, medium, or high is selected as the season type according to the season type setting.

<High navigation state transition processing>
Next, high navigation state transition processing will be described with reference to FIG. 54(b). FIG. 54(b) is a flowchart showing the flow of high-navigation state transition processing according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the high-navigation state transition processing described using FIG. 16(b).

The high navigation state transition processing according to this example is obtained by adding normal state start setting processing in step S704 to the high navigation state transition processing described with reference to FIG. 16(b). Although the details will be described later, in this normal state start setting process, a process for starting the normal state of the high navigation state is performed.

<Normal state start setting processing>
Next, normal state start setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing the flow of the normal state start setting process (step S704) in the high navigation state transition process described with reference to FIG. 54(b).

In step S751, the lottery for the number of games in the NM1 state is performed. In this NM1 state game number lottery, the number of games (the number of games played) to be executed in the NM1 state is determined based on the acquired random number value. Next, in step S752, after setting the lottery result value (the number of games) determined by lottery for the number of games in the NM1 state in the effect state counter, in step S753, information indicating the normal state is set in the effect state. do. In step S754, the NM state is set to information indicating that it is in NM state 1 (numerical value 1), and in step S755, after executing other normal state start setting processing, the normal state start setting processing is terminated. .

<High navigation state common processing A>
Next, high navigation state common processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the flow of the high navigation state common processing A according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the high navigation state common processing A described using FIG.

The high navigation state common processing A according to this example is obtained by deleting steps S901 and S902 from the high navigation state common processing A described with reference to FIG. , the effect state counter is not decremented, but decremented in each of the NM1 to NM3 states.

<Normal state processing A>
Next, normal state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the flow of normal state processing A according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to normal state processing A described using FIG.

In the normal state process A according to this example, the processes of steps S1020 to S1024 are applied in place of the processes of steps S1001 to S1016 of the normal state process A described using FIG.

Specifically, in step S1020, it is determined whether or not the NM state is the NM1 state. goes to step S1022. In step S1022, it is determined whether or not the NM state is the NM2 state. If so, the process proceeds to step S1023 to execute NM2 state processing A (details will be described later).If not, the process proceeds to step S1024. , NM3 state processing A (details will be described later) is executed.

<NM1 state processing A>
Next, the NM1 state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing the flow of the NM1 state process A (step S1021) in the normal state process A described using FIG.

In step S1031, 1 is subtracted from the effect state counter, and in the next step S1032, the AT transition point lottery described with reference to FIG. 53(b) is performed. In this AT transition point lottery, the AT transition point determination lottery table shown in FIG. 53(b) is referred to, and the additional points to be added to the AT transition point are determined based on the winning combination and the random number at the time of the lottery.

In step S1033, the lottery result value (additional points) of the AT transition point lottery in step S1032 is added to the current AT transition point to update the AT transition point. Then, in next step S1034, other NM1 state processing Execute A to end NM1 state process A.

<NM2 state processing A>
Next, NM2 state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing the flow of the NM2 state process A (step S1023) in the normal state process A described using FIG.

In step S1041, it is determined whether or not the CZ state flag is off. If it is off (not in the CZ state), the process proceeds to step S1042. After executing state processing A (details of which will be described later), the process proceeds to step S1056. In step S1042, 1 is subtracted from the effect state counter, and in the next step S1043, it is determined whether or not the portent flag is off. If so (when the sign effect is being performed), the process proceeds to step S1049.

In step S1044, the CZ transition lottery described with reference to FIG. 52(d) is performed. In this CZ shift lottery, the CZ shift lottery table shown in FIG. 52(d) is referred to, and the propriety of the CZ shift lottery is determined based on the period type, period, and random number at the time of lottery. In step S1045, it is determined whether or not the CZ shift lottery in step S1044 has been won.If the lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S1046.If the lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S1050.

In step S1046, the number of premonitory games (the number of games in which the premonitory effect suggesting the transition to the CZ state is executed) is determined by lottery using a random value, and in the next step 1047, the lottery determined by the lottery in step S1046 is performed. The result value (the number of precursor games) is set in the precursor counter. In subsequent step S1048, the precursor flag is set to ON, and then the process proceeds to step S1050. In step S1049, after subtracting 1 from the precursor counter, the process proceeds to step S1050.

In step S1050, the AT transition point lottery described with reference to FIG. 53(b) is performed. In this AT transition point lottery, the AT transition point determination lottery table shown in FIG. 53(b) is referred to, and the additional points to be added to the AT transition point are determined based on the winning combination and the random number at the time of the lottery. In step S1051, the lottery result value (additional points) of the AT transition point lottery in step S1050 is added to the current AT transition point to update the AT transition point, and then the process proceeds to step S1052.

In step S1052, it is determined whether or not the AT transition reservation flag is off. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S1053, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1056. In step S1053, it is determined whether or not the numerical value of the AT transition point updated in step S1051 is equal to or greater than the numerical value of the AT transition possible point. move on. In step S1054, since the numerical value of the AT transfer point has become equal to or greater than the numerical value of the AT transferable point, the AT transfer reservation flag is turned on, and then the process proceeds to step S1056. In step S1056, NM2 state processing A is terminated after other NM2 state processing A is performed.

<CZ State Processing A> Next, the CZ state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing the flow of CZ state processing A (step S1055) in NM2 state processing A described using FIG.

At step S1061, 1 is subtracted from the CZ counter, and at the next step S1062, a CZ point addition lottery is performed. In this CZ point addition lottery, additional points to be added to the CZ points are determined based on the obtained lottery value. In step S1063, the lottery result value (additional points) of the CZ point addition lottery in step S1062 is added to the current CZ points to update the CZ points, and then the process proceeds to step S1064. In step S1064, after executing other CZ state processing A, the CZ state processing A ends. In other CZ state processing A in step S1064, for example, an AT transition lottery is performed, and when the lottery is won, a process of turning on an AT transition reservation flag is executed.

In this example, the CZ point is used separately from the AT transition point, but the AT transition point may be used instead of the CZ point. Also, even if the AT transition point is used instead of the CZ point, it may be used as a point for starting addition from 0 in the CZ state.

<NM3 State Processing A> Next, NM3 state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing the flow of the NM3 state process A (step S1024) in the normal state process A described using FIG.

In step S1071, 1 is subtracted from the production state counter, and in the next step S1072, it is determined whether or not the AT shift reservation flag is off. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S1073. move on. In step S1073, an AT transition lottery is performed, and in the next step S1704, it is determined whether or not the AT transition lottery in step S1703 is won.If the lottery is won, the process advances to step S1705 to set the AT transition reservation flag to ON. After that, the process proceeds to step S1081, and if the winning is not made, the process proceeds to step S1081 without setting the AT shift reservation flag to ON.

In step S1706, it is determined whether or not the AT promotion reservation flag is off. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S1077, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1081. In step S1707, the AT promotion lottery described with reference to FIG. 52(e) is performed. In this AT promotion lottery, the AT promotion lottery table shown in FIG. 52(e) is referred to, and the success or failure of the AT promotion lottery is determined based on the period and random number at the time of lottery.

In the next step S1708, it is determined whether or not the AT promotion lottery in step S1707 is won, and if it is won, the process proceeds to step S1709, and after setting the AT promotion reservation flag to ON, the process proceeds to step S1080, and does not win If so, the process proceeds to step S1081. In step S1080, the AT1 type (initial value is 0 indicating "low") is changed to 1 indicating "high", and then the process proceeds to step S1081. In step S1081, after performing other NM3 state processing, NM3 state processing A is terminated.

In the NM3 state process A of this example, when the AT transition reservation flag is off, the AT transition lottery is executed regardless of the value of the AT transition point. Alternatively, if the AT transfer point value is less than the AT transferable points, the AT transfer lottery may not be executed.

<Fixed Notice State Processing A> Next, the fixed notice state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the flow of the confirmation notification state process A according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the confirmation notification state process A described using FIG.

In the confirmation notification state process A according to this example, the processes of steps S1110 to S1114 are applied in place of the processes of steps S1101 to S1105 of the confirmation notification process A described using FIG.

Specifically, in step S1110, it is determined whether or not the AT promotion reservation flag is off, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S1111, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1111, an AT promotion lottery is performed. In this AT promotion lottery, the AT promotion lottery table shown in FIG. 52(e) is referred to, and the success or failure of the AT promotion lottery is determined based on the period and random number at the time of lottery.

In the next step S1112, it is determined whether or not the AT promotion lottery in step S1111 is won, and if it is won, the process proceeds to step S1113, and after setting the AT promotion reservation flag to ON, the process proceeds to step S1114, and does not win If so, the process advances to step S1109. In step S1114, the AT1 type (initial value is 0, which indicates "low") is changed to 1, which indicates "high", and the process proceeds to step S1109.

<Effect state control process B> Next, the effect state control process B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the flow of the rendering state control B according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the rendering state control process B described using FIG.

In the effect state control process B according to this example, the processes of steps S1710 to S1711 are applied in place of the processes of steps S1701 to S1704 of the effect state control process B described using FIG.

Specifically, in step S1710, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state flag is on. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S1711, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S1707. In step S1711, the process advances to step S1705 after the difference number counter update process is performed. In step S1711, the difference number counter update process is performed based on the number of medals (number of payouts) obtained by the player (given to the player) in the game, and the number of medals inserted by the player in the game (number of insertions). is added to the current count value of the difference number counter to update the count value of the difference number counter. Also, preparations are made to transmit to the first sub-controller 400 a payout command containing at least information on the number of inserted coins and information on the number of payouts indicating the number of coins to be paid out.

<Normal State Processing B> Next, normal state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the flow of normal state processing B according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to normal state processing B described using FIG.

In the normal state process B according to this example, the processes of steps S1911 to S1917 are applied in place of the processes of steps S1901 to S1903 of the normal state process B described using FIG.

Specifically, in step S1911, it is determined whether or not the value of the cycle counter is equal to or less than the ceiling cycle value (5 in this example). The process proceeds to S1912, and if not (if the ceiling period is reached), the process proceeds to step S1917.

In step S1912, it is determined whether or not the NM state is the NM1 state. If so, the process advances to step S1913 to execute NM1 state processing B (details will be described later).If not, the process advances to step S1914. . In step S1914, it is determined whether or not the NM state is the NM2 state. If so, the process advances to step S1915 to execute NM2 state processing B (details will be described later).If not, the process advances to step S1916. After executing the NM3 state processing B (details will be described later), the normal state processing B is terminated. In step S1917, since the ceiling cycle has been reached, after AT1 start setting processing (details of which will be described later) is executed, normal state processing B is terminated.

<NM1 State Processing B> Next, NM1 state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the flow of NM1 state processing B (step S1913) in normal state processing B described using FIG.

In step S1920, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter is 0. If it is 0 (in the case of the final game in the NM1 state), the process proceeds to step S1921, and if not 0, the process proceeds to step S1925. In step S1921, the high navigation state scenario lottery described with reference to FIG. 52(a) is performed. In this high-navigation state scenario lottery, a scenario number is selected based on the set values and random numbers at the time of lottery with reference to the high-navigation state scenario determination lottery table shown in FIG. 52(a).

In step S1922, the lottery result (scenario number) of the high-navi state scenario lottery in step S1921 is set to the high-navi state scenario. move on. In step S1924, cycle start setting processing (details of which will be described later) is executed, and in the next step S1905, other NM1 state processing B is executed, and then NM1 state processing B ends.

In this example, the scenario number is determined when transitioning from the NM1 state to the NM2 state, but the timing of determining the scenario number is not limited to this example. (When shifting from the normal game state to the advantageous state), the scenario number may be determined. Also, in this example, since the scenario number is determined when transitioning from the NM1 state to the NM2 state, the scenario cannot be suggested in the NM1 state. When determining the scenario number (when shifting from the normal game state to the advantageous state), the scenario may be suggested in the NM1 state, and in this case, regardless of the scenario, the AT transition point may be added.

<Period Start Setting Process> Next, the period start setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the cycle start setting process (step S1925) in the NM1 state process B described with reference to FIG.

In step S1930, the period type setting described with reference to FIG. 52(b) is performed. In this cycle type setting, the high navigation state scenario table shown in FIG. 52(b) is referred to, and the cycle type is set based on the scenario number and cycle. In the next step S1931, the developing season lottery described with reference to FIG. 52(c) is performed. In this development season lottery, the development season determination lottery table shown in FIG. 52(c) is referred to, and the development season is selected based on the period type set in the period type setting in step S1930 and the random number. In step S1932, the lottery result (development season) of the development season lottery in step S1931 is set to the development season, and in the next step S1933, the season counter is set to 1 (initial value), and the process proceeds to step S1934.

In step S1934, it is determined whether or not the cycle counter matches the AT winning cycle (cycle type S in this example). In step S1935, the lottery for AT transferable points described with reference to FIG. 53(a) is performed. In this AT transferable point lottery, the AT transferable point determination lottery table shown in FIG. 53(a) is referred to, and the AT transferable point is determined based on the random number value. In the next step S1936, the lottery result (AT transferable point) of the AT transferable point lottery in step S1935 is set to the AT transferable point, and then the process proceeds to step S1938.

In step S1937, after setting 0 to the AT transferable point, the process proceeds to step S1938. In this example, when it is determined that the cycle counter matches the AT winning cycle (cycle type S in this example) in step S1934, by setting the AT shift possible point 0 in step S1937, in subsequent processing , the AT shift reservation flag is set to ON, and the effect state shifts to the AT1 state. In step S1938, a season start setting process (details will be described later) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S1939. In step S1939, the cycle start setting process is terminated after executing other cycle start setting processes.

<Season start setting process> Next, the season start setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing the flow of the season start setting process (step S1938) in the periodic start setting process described using FIG.

In step S1940, the season type setting described with reference to FIG. 52(c) is performed. In this season type setting, the development season is selected based on the cycle type and the random number by referring to the development season determination lottery table shown in FIG. 52(c). In step S1941, a seasonal fixed value (20 in this example) is set in the production state counter, and the process proceeds to step S1942. Although the seasonal fixed value is set to 20 in this example, it may be another numerical value (fixed value) or a variable value selected by lottery or the like.

In step S1942, it is determined whether or not the value of the precursor counter is other than 0. If it is 0, the process proceeds to step S1944, and if it is other than 0, the process proceeds to step S1943. In step S1943, the precursor counter is set to 1, and then the process proceeds to step S1944.

In step S1944, the NM state is set to 2, which indicates the NM state 2, and then the process proceeds to step S1945. In step S1945, the season start setting process is terminated after other season start setting processes are executed.

<NM2 State Processing B> Next, NM2 state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the flow of NM2 state processing B (step S1915) in normal state processing B described using FIG.

In step S1950, it is determined whether or not the CZ state flag is off. If it is off (not in CZ state), the process proceeds to step S1951, and if it is on (in CZ state), the process proceeds to step S1961. In step S1951, it is determined whether or not the portent flag is off, and if it is off (not during the portent effect), the process proceeds to step S1953, and if it is on (when the portent effect is being performed), the process proceeds to step S1952.

In step S1952, it is determined whether or not the precursor counter is other than 0. If not, the process proceeds to step S1960, and if so, the process proceeds to step S1953. In step S1953, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter is 0. If it is 0, the process proceeds to step S1954, and if it is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1962.

In step S1954, it is determined whether or not the value of the season counter is smaller than the value of the developing season. If (the value of the season counter ≤ the value of the developing season), the process proceeds to step S1957. In step S1955, the season counter is incremented by 1 to advance the season to the next season, and in step S1956, the season start setting process described with reference to FIG. 67 is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S1962. In step S1957, a lottery for the number of judge games is performed to determine the number of judge games based on a random value in order to advance the presentation state to the NM3 state (judgment state). The result (the number of games) is set in the effect state counter, and in the next step S1959, the NM state is set to the numerical value 3 indicating the NM state 3 (judgment state), and then the process proceeds to step S1962.

In step S1960, CZ state start setting processing (details will be described later) is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S1962. In step S1962, after performing other NM2 state processing B, the NM2 state processing B ends.

<CZ State Start Setting Processing> Next, the CZ state start setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing the flow of the CZ state start setting process (step S1960) in the NM2 state process B described using FIG.

In step S1970, the precursor flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step S1971. In step S1971, a CZ game number lottery is performed to determine the number of CZ games based on the random value, and in the next step S1972, the lottery result (number of games) of the CZ game number lottery in step S1971 is set in the CZ counter. Proceed to S1973. In step S1973, the CZ state flag is set to ON, and then the process proceeds to step S1974. In step S1974, other CZ state start setting processing is performed, and then the CZ state start setting processing ends.

<CZ State Processing B> Next, the CZ state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the flow of CZ state processing B (step S1961) in NM2 state processing B described using FIG.

In step S1980, it is determined whether or not the value of the CZ counter is 0. If it is 0 (in the case of the final game in the CZ state), the process proceeds to step S1981 to turn off the CZ state flag, and then proceeds to step S1982. , 0 (if it is not the final game in the CZ state), the process proceeds to step S1995.

In step S1982, it is determined whether or not the AT transition reservation flag is off. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S1983, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1994. In step S1983, the CZ point is converted into an AT transition point, and in next step S1984, the conversion value converted in step S1983 is added to the current AT transition point. In the next step S1985, it is determined whether or not the numerical value of the AT transition point is greater than or equal to the numerical value of the AT transition possible point. In step S1986, after turning on the AT shift reservation flag, in the next step S1987, it is determined whether or not the production state counter is 0. If it is other than 0, the process proceeds to step S1995. The process advances to step S1988.

In step S1988, it is determined whether or not the value of the season counter is smaller than the value of the growing season. In step S1989, the season counter is incremented by 1, and in the next step S1990, the season start setting process described with reference to FIG. 67 is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S1995. In step S1991, a judge game number lottery is performed to determine the number of judge games based on a random value, and in the next step S1992, the lottery result (the number of games) of the judge game number lottery in step S1991 is set in an effect state counter, In the next step S1993, the NM state is set to the numerical value 3 indicating the NM state 3, and then the process proceeds to step S1995.

In step S1994, after setting the numerical value indicating the final notification state in the effect state, the process proceeds to step S1995. In step S1995, after performing other CZ state processing B, the CZ state processing B ends.

<NM3 State Processing B> Next, NM3 state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the flow of NM3 state processing B (step S1916) in normal state processing B described using FIG.

In step S2020, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter is 0. If it is 0, the process proceeds to step S2021, and if it is other than 0, the process proceeds to step S2027. In step S2021, it is determined whether or not the AT transition reservation flag is off. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S2022, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S2026.

In step S2022, it is determined whether or not the current scenario is the high navigation state reset scenario (in this example, the scenario corresponding to scenario number 8 or 9). In that case, the process proceeds to step S2025. In step S2023, 1 (initial value) is added to the cycle counter, and in next step S2024, the cycle start setting process described with reference to FIG. 66 is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S2027. In step S2025, after turning on the high-navigation state end waiting flag, the process proceeds to step S2027.

In step S2026, after setting the numerical value indicating the final notification state in the effect state, the process proceeds to step S2027. In step S2027, after performing other NM3 state processing B, the NM3 state processing B ends.

In addition, in the NM3 state process B of this example, by turning on the high navigation state end standby flag in step S2025, an example of shifting from the high navigation state to the low navigation state was shown. When the lottery is won, the high navigation state is maintained for a predetermined number of games before shifting to the low navigation state, the high navigation state is restored, or the state is shifted to another presentation state. good too.

<Decision Notice State Processing B> Next, the decision notice state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing the flow of the confirmed notification state process B according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the confirmed notification state process B described using FIG.

In the confirmation notification state process A according to this example, the processes of steps S2001 and S2002 of the confirmation notification process A described using FIG. 20 are deleted, and the processes of steps S2011 and S2012 are added.

Specifically, in step S2011, the AT transition reservation flag is turned off, and in the next step S2012, the AT promotion reservation flag is set to off, and then the process proceeds to step S2007.

<Control of Effect State> Next, the control of the effect state of the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 82. FIG.

First, various counters and flags in each figure will be described in detail. The item "high navigation state counter" indicates the number of remaining games in the high navigation state that the main control unit 300 updates in the high navigation state. It shows the number of remaining games in each effect state to be updated.

"High navigation state scenario" indicates the scenario number selected in the high navigation state scenario lottery described with reference to FIG. (scenario number) is set. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 73, the high navigation state scenario at the start of the NM2 state is scenario 5, so the corresponding numerical value "5" is set. "Period counter" indicates a counter that is set and updated in NM1 state processing B, NM3 state processing B, etc., and its initial value is 1.

"Period type" indicates the type of period set in the period start setting process described with reference to FIG. Numerical values (0, 1, 2, 3 in this example) corresponding to are set. In each figure, in order to facilitate understanding, letters (C, B, A, S) are used instead of numerical values corresponding to cycle type C, cycle type B, cycle type A, or cycle type S. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 73, the cycle type at the start of the NM2 state is the cycle type C, so the letter "C" corresponding to this is described.

"Season type" indicates the season type described with reference to FIG. be done. In addition, in each figure, letters (low, medium, high) are described instead of numerical values corresponding to low, medium, or high for easy understanding. For example, FIG. In the example, since the season type at the start of the NM2 state is low, the character "low" corresponding to this is described.

"Development season" indicates the development season set in the cycle start setting process described with reference to Fig. 52(c). Any numerical value from 1 to 9 corresponding to winter of the second year, spring of the second year, summer of the second year, autumn of the second year, winter of the second year, or spring of the third year is set. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 73, since the development season at the start of the NM2 state is the spring of the second year, the corresponding numerical value "5" is set. "Seasonal counter" indicates a counter that is set and updated in NM1 state processing B, NM2 state processing B, etc., and its initial value is 1.

"AT transferable point" indicates the AT transferable point selected in the AT transferable point lottery described with reference to Fig. 53(a). Any numerical value of 900 is set. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 73, since the AT shiftable point at the start of the NM2 state is 850, the corresponding numerical value "850" is set.

"AT transition point" is the value of the AT transition point after adding the AT transition point (in this example, 0 to 50 PT (points)) selected in the AT transition point lottery described using FIG. 53(b). is shown. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 73, since the AT transition point at the start of the NM1 state (before the start of the AT transition point lottery) is 0, the numerical value corresponding to this is set to "0", and then the AT transition point is added, AT transition points after addition (in this example, description of specific numerical values is omitted by notation of "XXX") is set.

The "AT transition reservation flag" is a flag indicating that the transition to the AT state has been determined. It is set to ON when winning the lottery. The "AT promotion reservation flag" is a flag indicating that the promotion has been decided in the AT state. to "high".

<Transition Example 1 of Rendering State> Next, an rendering state transition example 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75 and FIG. 76(a). 73 to 75 are diagrams showing the changes in various counters and flags in time series in the transition example 1 of the production state, and FIG. is a diagram showing in chronological order.

In this example, the effect state shifts in the order of high navigation state (AT2 state)→low navigation state (normal game state)→high navigation state (normal state→fixed announcement state→AT1 state (low)). In addition, in the normal state of the high navigation state, after executing the NM1 state, the cycle 1 set game (NM2 state (season 1→...→season 5)→NM3 state) is executed, and then the cycle 1 state is executed. A cycle 2 set game (NM2 state (season 1→season 8)→NM3 state) with a different number of seasons from the set game is executed. <Normal state (NM1 state)> More specifically, the game (game R999) in which the high navigation state counter is 999 (game R999) shown in FIG. This is the first game immediately after transitioning to , where the number of remaining games is 999 in the high navi state and the number of remaining games is 19 in the NM1 state.

In this game R999, the AT transition point is set to the initial value (0), and the AT transition reservation flag and the AT promotion are set immediately after the transition from the low navigation state (normal game state) to the high navigation state (normal state). The initial value (off) is set for the reserved flag.

The game (game R980) in which the high navi state counter is 980 shown in FIG. 73 is the game in which the number of remaining games in the high navi state is 980 and the number of remaining games in the NM1 state is 0 (final game in NM1 state). .

In this game R980, since the AT transition point is updated (added), the updated (added) numerical value is set to the AT transition point.

<Cycle 1 of Normal State (NM2 State): Season 1 (Spring of First Year)> The next game (game R979) with a high navigation state counter of 979 shown in FIG. The first game immediately after transitioning to season 1 (spring of year 1), the number of games remaining in high navi state is 979, and the number of games remaining in season 1 (spring of year 1) in NM2 state is 19 games.

Here, in the NM1 state process B of the previous game R980 (the final game in the NM1 state), scenario 5 was selected by the high navigation state scenario lottery, so the scenario number (5) corresponding to this scenario 5 is set. The settings of the previous game R980 are maintained even when the game R979 is started. Also, in the period start setting process of the previous game R980 (the final game in the NM1 state), "period type C" was selected based on scenario number (5) and period (1) by the period type setting. , and a corresponding numerical value (for example, 0) is set, and the setting of the previous game R980 is maintained even at the start of the game R979.

Also, in the season start setting process of the previous game R980 (the final game in the NM1 state), "low" was selected as the season type by the season type setting, so a numerical value (for example, 0) corresponding to this was set. , and the settings of the previous game R980 are maintained at the start of the game R979. In addition, in the period start setting process of the previous game R980 (the final game in the NM1 state), "2nd year spring (5)" was selected based on the period type (low) by the development season lottery. , and the setting of the previous game R980 is maintained even at the start of the game R979.

In addition, in the period start setting process of the previous game R980 (the final game in the NM1 state), the AT transferable points were determined to be 850 by the AT transferable point lottery, so the corresponding numerical value (850) is set. Thus, the settings of the previous game R980 are maintained even at the start of the game R979. In the NM1 state processing B of the previous game R980 (the final game in the NM1 state), the cycle counter is set to the initial value (1), and in the cycle start setting processing, the season counter is set to the initial value (1). Thus, the settings of the previous game R980 are maintained even at the start of the game R979.

In the game R979, since the AT transition point is added by the AT transition point lottery in the NM2 state process A, the AT transition point is updated to the value after the addition.

Also, in the game R979, as indicated by reference numeral R979 in FIG. 76(a), the effect image display device 157 can be used to provide the season display SD corresponding to the season counter, the game state, and a certain privilege. A seasonal effect SE suggesting sexuality, etc., a remaining game display RG indicating the number of remaining games in the current effect state (in this example, the NM2 state, season 1 (spring of the first year)), and an AT indicating an AT transition point. A transition point display AP is performed.

In this example, as the season display SD, a display including the characters "spring of the first year" corresponding to the season counter 1 is displayed, and as the season effect SE, an effect as to whether or not to shift to the AT1 state is performed, and the number of remaining games is displayed. As the display RG, a display including characters "19G" indicating that there are 19 games remaining in season 1 (spring of the first year) is displayed. In this example, the cycle is not displayed, but the cycle may be notified by displaying the cycle (for example, displaying the characters "cycle 1").

Although not shown in FIG. 73, the game with a high navigation state counter of 978 (game R978) has 978 remaining games in the high navigation state, and the remaining games in season 1 (spring of the first year) in the NM2 state. It is a game with 18 numbers.

In this game R978, as indicated by reference numeral R978 in FIG. 76(a), a display including the characters "first year spring" corresponding to the season counter 1 is displayed as the season display SD, and the current season effect SE is displayed. 18 games remaining in season 1 (spring of the first year) are displayed as the remaining game number display RG. The display includes the characters "18G" indicating that the

A game with a high navigation state counter of 960 (game R960) shown in FIG. 73 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 960 and the number of remaining games in season 1 (spring of the first year) in the NM2 state is 0. (last game of Season 1 (Spring of Year 1) in NM2 state).

In this game R960, as indicated by reference numeral R960 in FIG. 76(a), a display including the characters "1st year spring" corresponding to the season counter 1 is displayed as the season display SD, and the current season display SE is displayed. A production is performed to suggest that the production state is normal and that the degree of expectation that a certain privilege will be given is high, and the number of games remaining in the season 1 (spring of the first year) is 0 games as the remaining game number display RG. The display includes the characters "0G" indicating that the

In this game R960, in NM2 state processing B, it is determined whether the value of the season counter is smaller than the value of the developing season, and if so, 1 is added to the season counter. Since the counter value is 1 and the developing season value is 5, the season counter is incremented by 1, and the season counter is updated to 2 representing summer in the first year.

<Normal State (NM2 State) Cycle 1: Season 2 (1st Year Summer)> The game (game R959) in which the high navigation state counter is 959 shown in FIG. First game immediately after transitioning from Season 2 (Summer 1st year) to Season 2 (Summer 1st year) with 959 games remaining in High Nav state and remaining games in Season 2 (Summer 1st year) in NM2 state The number is 19 games.

Here, in the NM2 state processing B of the previous game R960 (the final game in the spring of the first year in the NM2 state), the season counter is updated from 1 to 2. is maintained. Also, in game R959, since the AT transition point is added by the AT transition point lottery in the NM2 state process A, the AT transition point is updated to the value after the addition.

In the game R959, as indicated by reference numeral R959 in FIG. 76(a), a display including the characters "1st year summer" corresponding to the season counter 2 is displayed as the season display SD, and the state of AT1 is displayed as the season effect SE. An effect as to whether or not to shift is performed, and a display including characters "19G" indicating that there are 19 games remaining in season 2 (summer of the first year) is displayed as the number of remaining games display RG.

A game with a high navigation state counter of 940 (game R940) shown in FIG. 73 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 940 and the number of remaining games in season 2 (summer of the first year) in the NM2 state is 0. (The final game of season 2 (summer of the first year) in the NM2 state).

In this game R940, although illustration is omitted, the season display SD and season effect SE of the game R959 are continued, and the number of remaining games display RG in season 2 (summer of the first year) is 0 games. A display including the characters “0G” indicating that In the game R940, in the NM2 state process B, it is determined whether or not the value of the season counter is smaller than the value of the developing season, and if so, the season counter is incremented by 1. Since the value of the season counter is 2 and the value of the developing season is 5, 1 is added to the season counter and the season counter is updated to 3 representing autumn of the first year.

<Normal State (NM2 State) Cycle 1: Season 2 (1st Year Autumn)> The game (game R939) in which the high navigation state counter is 939 shown in FIG. Summer) to Season 3 (Fall Year 1) with 939 games remaining in High Nav state and remaining games in Season 3 (Fall Year 1) in NM2 state The number is 19 games.

Here, in the NM2 state processing B of the previous game R940 (the final game of the summer of the first year in the NM2 state), the season counter is updated from 2 to 3, and even at the start of the game R939, the previous game R940 Settings are preserved. Also, in game R939, since the AT transition point is added by the AT transition point lottery in the NM2 state process A, the AT transition point is updated to the value after the addition.

In this game R939, although illustration is omitted, as the season display SD, a display including characters of "1st year autumn" corresponding to the season counter 3 is displayed, and as the season effect SE, a display relating to whether or not to shift to the AT1 state is performed. An effect is performed, and a display including characters "19G" indicating that there are 19 games remaining in season 3 (autumn of the first year) is displayed as the number of remaining games display RG.

A game with a high navigation state counter of 920 (game R920) shown in FIG. 73 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 920 and the number of remaining games in season 3 (autumn of the first year) in the NM2 state is 0. (Final game of Season 3 (Fall of Year 1) in NM2 state).

In this game R920, although illustration is omitted, the season display SD and season effect SE of the game R939 are continued, and the number of remaining games displayed in the remaining game number display RG is 0 in season 3 (autumn of the first year). A display including the characters “0G” indicating that In game R920, in NM2 state processing B, it is determined whether the value of the season counter is smaller than the value of the developing season, and if so, the season counter is incremented by 1. Since the value of the season counter is 3 and the value of the developing season is 5, the season counter is incremented by 1, and the season counter is updated to 4 representing winter of the first year.

<Normal State (NM2 State) Cycle 1: Season 2 (1st Year Winter)> The game (game R919) in which the high navigation state counter is 919 shown in FIG. 919 games remaining in High Nav state and remaining games in Season 4 (Winter Year 1) in NM2 state The number is 19 games.

Here, in the NM2 state processing B of the previous game R920 (the final game in the fall of the first year in the NM2 state), the season counter is updated from 3 to 4. Settings are preserved. Also, in game R919, since the AT transition point is added by the AT transition point lottery in the NM2 state process A, the AT transition point is updated to the value after the addition.

In this game R919, although illustration is omitted, as the season display SD, a display including characters of "first year winter" corresponding to the season counter 3 is displayed, and as the season effect SE, a display relating to whether or not to shift to the AT1 state is performed. An effect is performed, and a display including characters "19G" indicating that there are 19 games remaining in season 4 (winter of the first year) is displayed as the number of remaining games display RG.

The game (game R900) in which the high navigation state counter is 900 (game R900) shown in FIG. This is the game (final game of season 4 (winter of year 1) in NM2 state).

In this game R900, although illustration is omitted, the season display SD and season effect SE of the game R919 are continued, and the remaining game number display RG of the season 4 (winter of the first year) is 0 games. A display including the characters “0G” indicating that In the game R900, in the NM2 state process B, it is determined whether or not the value of the season counter is smaller than the value of the developing season, and if so, the season counter is incremented by one. Since the value of the season counter is 4 and the value of the developing season is 5, the season counter is incremented by 1, and the season counter is updated to 5 representing spring of the second year.

<Normal State (NM2 State) Cycle 1: Season 2 (Second Year Spring)> The game (game R899) in which the high navigation state counter is 899 shown in FIG. Winter) to Season 5 (Spring of Year 2) with 899 games remaining in High Nav state and remaining games in Season 5 (Spring of Year 2) in NM2 state The number is 19 games.

Here, in the NM2 state processing B of the previous game R900 (the final game in the winter of the first year in the NM2 state), the season counter is updated from 4 to 5. Settings are preserved. Also, in game R899, since the AT transition point is added by the AT transition point lottery in the NM2 state process A, the AT transition point is updated to the value after the addition.

In this game R899, although illustration is omitted, as the season display SD, a display including the characters "2nd year spring" corresponding to the season counter 5 is displayed, and as the season effect SE, a display relating to whether or not to shift to the AT1 state is performed. An effect is performed, and a display including characters "19G" indicating that there are 19 games remaining in season 5 (spring of the second year) is displayed as the number of remaining games display RG.

The game (game R880) with a high navigation state counter of 880 shown in FIG. It is a game (final game of season 5 (spring of year 2) in NM2 state).

In this game R880, as indicated by symbol R880 in FIG. 76(a), the season display SD and season effect SE of the game 900 are continued, and the remainder of season 5 (spring of the second year) is displayed as the remaining game number display RG. A display including characters "0G" indicating that the game is the 0th game is displayed. In game R880, in NM2 state processing B, it is determined whether the value of the season counter is smaller than the value of the developing season, and if so, the season counter is incremented by 1. Since the value of the season counter is 5 and the value of the developing season is 5, the season counter is not updated. In game R880, the number of judge games (9 in this example) determined by lottery for the number of judge games is set in the presentation state counter, and then the NM2 state is set to the NM3 state.

<Normal State (NM3 State)> The game (game R879) shown in FIG. A game in which the number of remaining games is 879 in the high navi state and the number of remaining games is 9 in the NM3 state.

Here, in the NM2 state processing B of the previous game R880 (the final game in the spring of the second year in the NM2 state), the season counter is maintained at 5, and the setting of the previous game R880 is maintained even at the start of the game R879. It is

In this game R879, as indicated by reference numeral R879 in FIG. In the example, the judge production JE suggesting the NM3 state) is performed.

The game (game R870) in which the high navigation state counter is 870 shown in FIG. 74 is the game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 870 and the number of remaining games in the NM3 state is 0 (the final game in the NM3 state). be.

In this game R870, although illustration is omitted, the season display SD and judge effect JE of the game 870 are continued. In the game R870, after adding 1 to the cycle counter and updating it to 2 in the NM3 state process B, in the cycle start setting process, based on the scenario number (5) and the cycle (2), "cycle type A" is set. to select. In addition, in the cycle start setting process, "1st year spring (1)" is selected based on the cycle type (low) by development season lottery, and AT transferable points are determined to be 900 by AT transferable point lottery. there is

<Normal State (NM2 State) Cycle 2: Season 1 (1st Year Spring)> The game (game R869) in which the high navigation state counter is 869 shown in FIG. The first game immediately after transitioning to Season 1 (spring of year 1), with 869 remaining games in high navi state and 19 remaining games in season 1 (spring of year 1) in NM2 state. be.

Here, in the period start setting process of the previous game R870 (final game in NM3 state), "period type A" was selected based on scenario number (5) and period (2) by the period type setting. Therefore, a numerical value (for example, 2) corresponding to this is set, and the setting of the previous game R870 is maintained even at the start of the game R869.

In addition, in the season start setting process of the previous game R870 (the final game in the NM3 state), "low" was selected as the season type by the season type setting, so a numerical value (for example, 0) corresponding to this was set. , and the settings of the previous game R870 are maintained at the start of the game R869. In addition, in the period start setting process of the previous game R870 (the final game in the NM3 state), "second year winter (8)" was selected based on the period type (low) by the development season lottery. , and the setting of the previous game R870 is maintained even at the start of the game R869.

In this way, in cycle 2, "2nd year winter (8)" is selected as the development season, which is more than the development season "2nd year spring (5)" in cycle 1 (the number of games played is Therefore, it is easier to acquire AT possible points in cycle 2 than in cycle 1, and as a result, the probability of shifting to AT is also high. That is, period 2 is more advantageous than period 1 with respect to the possibility of transitioning to AT.

In addition, in the cycle start setting process of the previous game R870 (the final game in the NM3 state), the AT transferable point lottery determined 900 as the AT transferable point, so the corresponding numerical value (900) is set. Thus, even when the game R869 is started, the settings of the previous game R870 are maintained. In addition, in the period start setting process of the previous game R870 (the final game in the NM3 state), the initial value (1) is set to the season counter, and the setting of the previous game R870 is maintained even when the game R869 is started. ing.

In the game R869, since the AT transition point is added by the AT transition point lottery in the NM2 state process A, the AT transition point is updated to the value after the addition.

Further, in the game R869, as indicated by reference numeral R869 in FIG. 76(a), a display including characters "1st year spring" corresponding to the season counter 1 is displayed as the season display SD, and AT1 is displayed as the season effect SE. An effect is produced as to whether or not to transition to the state, and a display including characters "19G" indicating that the number of remaining games in season 1 (spring of the first year) is 19 is displayed as the number of remaining games display RG. there is

A game with a high navigation state counter of 850 (game R850) shown in FIG. 74 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 850 and the number of remaining games in season 1 (spring of the first year) in the NM2 state is 0. (last game of Season 1 (Spring of Year 1) in NM2 state).

It should be noted that the normal state (NM2 state) period 2 season 2 (summer of the first year), season 3 (autumn of the first year), season 4 (winter of the first year), season 5 (spring of the second year), The description of the counter update in season 6 (summer of the second year) and season 7 (autumn of the second year) is omitted, and the description is resumed from season 8 (winter of the second year) shown in FIG.

<Normal State (NM2 State) Cycle 2: Season 8 (Second Year Winter)> The game (game R729) in which the high navigation state counter is 729 shown in FIG. 729 games remaining in High Nav state and remaining games in Season 8 (Winter Year 2) in NM2 state The number is 19 games.

In addition, the game (game R724) with a high navigation state counter of 724 shown in FIG. is a game of

In the NM2 state, in the NM2 state process A, it is determined whether or not the numerical value of the AT transition point is equal to or greater than the numerical value of the AT transition possible point. In R724, the value of the AT shift point is 905, and since the value of the AT shift possible point is 900 or more, the AT shift reservation flag is set to ON.

A game (game R710) with a high navigation state counter of 710 shown in FIG. 75 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 710 and the number of remaining games in season 8 (winter of the second year) in the NM2 state is 0. (The final game of Season 8 (2nd year winter) in NM2 state).

In this game R710, as indicated by symbol R710 in FIG. 76(a), the season display SD and season effect SE are continued, and the remaining games of season 8 (winter of the second year) are displayed as the remaining game number display RG. A display including characters “0G” indicating that it is 0 games is performed. In the game R710, in the NM2 state process B, it is determined whether or not the value of the season counter is smaller than the value of the developing season, and if so, the season counter is incremented by one. Since the value of the season counter is 8 and the value of the developing season is 8, the season counter is not updated. Further, here, after setting the number of judge games (9 in this example) determined by lottery for the number of judge games in the effect state counter, setting is made to shift the NM2 state to the NM3 state.

<Normal State (NM3 State)> The game (game R709) shown in FIG. A game in which the number of remaining games is 709 in the high navi state and the number of remaining games is 9 in the NM3 state.

Here, in the NM2 state processing B of the previous game R710 (the final game in the second winter of the NM2 state), the season counter is maintained at 8, and the setting of the previous game R710 is maintained at the start of the game R709. maintained.

In this game R709, as indicated by symbol R709 in FIG. 76(a), as the season display SD, a display including the characters "2nd year winter" corresponding to the season counter 8 is displayed, and the current rendering state (this In the example, the judge production JE suggesting the NM3 state) is performed.

The game (game R700) in which the high navigation state counter is 700 shown in FIG. 74 is the game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 700 and the number of remaining games in the NM3 state is 0 (final game in NM3 state). .

In this game R700, although illustration is omitted, the season display SD and judge effect JE of the game R709 are continued. In the game R700, since the AT transition reservation flag is ON in the NM3 state process B, the NM3 state is set to transition to the final notification state.

<Definite Announcement State> The game (game R699) with a high navigation state counter of 699 shown in FIG. It's a 699 game.

In the fixed announcement state after this game R699, if the AT1 type is low, it is determined whether or not the internal winning result is "replay combination 2, 4 to 10" of the condition device No. 3, and the AT1 type is high, the internal winning result is "replay hands 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13" of condition device No. 4.

determine whether or not As a result of the determination, if applicable, an AT set count lottery is performed, the AT set count (the number of AT1 and AT2 states performed) is determined using the lottery value, etc., and the final notification state is shifted to the AT1 state. Make settings.

Further, in the game R699, as indicated by reference numeral R699 in FIG. 76(a), a finalized announcement effect KE suggesting the current effect state (in this example, a finalized announcement state) is performed. <AT1 State> The game (game R689) with a high navigation state counter of 689 shown in FIG. is a game of

In the game R689, as indicated by symbol R689 in FIG. 76(a), AT1 effect AE suggesting the current effect state (in this example, AT1 state) is performed, and AT is started.

<Specific Effect Mode> Next, the specific effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. 76(b). FIG.76(b) is the figure which showed an example of a certain production|presentation performed in specific production|presentation mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 76(b), when the effect state shifts in the order of the normal game state→NM1 state→NM2 state, the specific effect mode is set from the normal game state to the NM1 state. In this specific effect mode, a certain effect RE (in this example, an effect including an image of the character sitting on the sandy beach) that does not suggest an advantageous state (high navigation state) is executed, and an advantageous state is executed. The advantageous state notifying means (in this example, the advantageous section lamp made up of an LED) is extinguished (turned off).

According to this example, by providing the specific effect mode, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the transition from the normal game state to the advantageous state, so that the normal game state is prolonged and the player does not realize that there is no chance. can be The number of games in the NM1 state is not particularly limited, and may be fixed or variable. can do.

In addition, in this example, when the NM1 state ends and the state shifts to the NM2 state, the specific effect mode is ended, and in the NM2 state, the suggestion effect SE (this example Now, display the character string "Isn't it time yet?"). The advantageous state notification means (advantageous section lamp in this example) is turned off (off) during the period of the NM2 state, and then turned on (on) when the state shifts to the fixed notification state.

<Transition Example 2 of Rendering State> Next, transition example 2 of the rendering state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing changes in various counters, flags, various displays, and effects in the transition example 2 of the effect state in chronological order. Here, in order to avoid duplication of explanation, only points different from example 1 of transition of the rendering state explained with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76 will be explained.

In this example, the production state is: high navigation state (AT2 state) → low navigation state (normal game state) → high navigation state (normal state) → low navigation state (normal game state) → high navigation state (normal state → confirmed) The transition is made in the order of notification state→AT1 state (low)). In addition, in the normal state of the first high-navigation state, after executing the NM1 state, the first set game of the period 1 (NM2 state (season 1 → season 5) → NM3 state) is executed, In the normal state of the following second high-navigation state, after executing the NM1 state, the second set game of the period 1 (NM2 state (season 1→...→season 5)→NM3 state) is executed. .

<Normal State (NM2 State) Season 1 (1st Spring)> As shown in FIG. The first game immediately after transitioning to season 1 (spring of year 1), the number of games remaining in high navi state is 979, and the number of games remaining in season 1 (spring of year 1) in NM2 state is 19 games.

Here, in the NM1 state process B of the previous game R980 (the final game in the NM1 state), scenario 8 was selected by the high navigation state scenario lottery, so the scenario number (8) corresponding to this scenario 8 is set. The settings of the previous game R980 are maintained even when the game R979 is started. Also, in the period start setting process of the previous game R980 (the final game in the NM1 state), "period type C" was selected based on scenario number (8) and period (1) by the period type setting. , and a corresponding numerical value (for example, 0) is set, and the setting of the previous game R980 is maintained even at the start of the game R979.

In the game R979, as indicated by reference numeral R979 in FIG. 77, a display including the characters "Spring of the first year" corresponding to the season counter 1 is displayed as the season display SD, and the transition to the AT1 state is performed as the season effect SE. The number of remaining games display RG includes characters "19G" indicating that there are 19 games remaining in season 1 (spring of the first year).

<Normal state (NM3 state)> In the game (game R870) in which the high navigation state counter in the first set game is 870 shown in FIG. The game number is 0 (last game in NM3 state).

In this game R870, in the NM3 state process B, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state reset scenario (in this example, the scenario corresponding to scenario number 8 or 9). Therefore, the high navigation state reset scenario is determined, and the high navigation state end standby flag is turned on. When this high navigation state end waiting flag is turned on, the high navigation state lamp 190 is extinguished in the high navigation state end processing described with reference to FIG. ) and initialize various flags and counters used for high navigation state transition control.

<Normal State (NM2 State) Season 1 (Spring of First Year)> The game (game R979) in which the high navigation state counter is 979 in the second set game shown in FIG. The first game immediately after transitioning to season 1 (spring of year 1), the number of games remaining in high navi state is 979, and the number of games remaining in season 1 (spring of year 1) in NM2 state is 19 games.

Here, in the NM1 state process B of the previous game R980 (the final game in the NM1 state), scenario 9 was selected by the high navigation state scenario lottery, so the scenario number (9) corresponding to this scenario 9 is set. The settings of the previous game R980 are maintained even when the game R979 is started. Also, in the period start setting process of the previous game R980 (the final game in the NM1 state), "period type A" was selected based on the scenario number (9) and period (1) by the period type setting. , and a corresponding numerical value (for example, 2) is set, and the setting of the previous game R980 is maintained even at the start of the game R979.

In the game R979, as indicated by reference numeral R979(2) in FIG. 77, a display including the characters "first year spring" corresponding to the season counter 1 is displayed as the season display SD, and AT1 is displayed as the season effect SE. An effect is produced as to whether or not to transition to the state, and a display including characters "19G" indicating that the number of remaining games in season 1 (spring of the first year) is 19 is displayed as the number of remaining games display RG. there is The subsequent processing is the same as the production state transition example 1 explained using FIGS.

<Transition Example 3 of Rendering State> Next, transition example 3 of the rendering state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing changes in various counters, flags, various displays, and effects in the transition example 3 of the effect state in chronological order. Here, in order to avoid duplication of explanation, only points different from example 1 of transition of the rendering state explained with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76 will be explained.

In this example, the presentation state is shifted in the order of high navigation state (AT2 state)→low navigation state (normal game state)→high navigation state (normal state→fixed announcement state→AT1 state (low)). In addition, in the normal state of the high navigation state, after executing the NM1 state, the cycle 1 set game (NM2 state (season 1→...→season 5)→NM3 state) is started, but one game in the NM2 state is started. , the AT shift reservation flag is set to ON.

<Cycle 1 of Normal State (NM2 State): Season 1 (Spring of 1st Year)> The game (game R979) in which the high navigation state counter is 979 shown in FIG. First game after transitioning to Season 1 (Spring Year 1) with 979 games remaining in High Nav state and 19 games remaining in Season 1 (Spring Year 1) in NM2 state is a game of

Here, in the NM1 state process B of the previous game R980 (the final game in the NM1 state), since scenario 10 was selected by the high navigation state scenario lottery, the scenario number (10) corresponding to this scenario 10 is set. The settings of the previous game R980 are maintained even when the game R979 is started. In addition, in the period start setting process of the previous game R980 (the final game in the NM1 state), the period type setting causes the "period type S" (AT fixed scenario) to be set based on the scenario number (10) and period (1). Since it is selected, a corresponding numerical value (for example, 3) is set, and the setting of the previous game R980 is maintained even at the start of the game R979.

Also, in the period start setting process of the previous game R980 (the final game in the NM1 state), it is determined that the period counter coincides with the AT winning period (period type S in this example), and the AT transition possible point is set to 0. , and the settings of the previous game R980 are maintained at the start of the game R979.

In the NM2 state process A of the game R979, it is determined whether or not the value of the AT transfer point is equal to or greater than the value of the AT transfer possible point, and if so, the AT transfer reservation flag is turned on. , and AT shiftable points are set to 0, the AT shift reservation flag is set to ON.

In the game R979, as indicated by reference numeral R979 in FIG. 76(a), the seasonal display SD is displayed including the characters "first year spring" corresponding to the season counter 1, and the seasonal effect SE is AT1. An effect is produced as to whether or not to transition to the state, and a display including characters "19G" indicating that the number of remaining games in season 1 (spring of the first year) is 19 is displayed as the number of remaining games display RG. there is

The processing after the AT transition reservation flag is set to ON is the same as the transition example 1 of the production state described with reference to FIGS. The transition is made in the order of state→AT1 state.

<Transition Example 4 of Rendering State> Next, transition example 4 of the rendering state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing changes in various counters, flags, various displays, and effects in the transition example 4 of the effect state in chronological order. Here, in order to avoid duplication of explanation, only points different from example 1 of transition of the rendering state explained with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76 will be explained.

In this example, the presentation state is shifted in the order of high navigation state (AT2 state)→low navigation state (normal game state)→high navigation state (normal state→AT1 state (low)). In addition, since the value of the period counter exceeds the ceiling period value (5 in this example) in the normal state of the high navigation state, the normal state is shifted to the AT1 state.

<Cycle 6 of Normal State (NM2 State): Season 1 (Spring of 1st Year)> In the normal state process B in which the high navigation state counter is 429 (game R429) shown in FIG. In this example, it is determined whether or not 5) is less than or equal to 5). In this example, since the value of the cycle counter is 6, it is determined that the cycle counter has exceeded the ceiling cycle value (has reached the ceiling). In the AT1 start setting process, after setting the lottery result of the AT1 initial number lottery (the number of AT1 games) as the AT1 initial value in the performance state counter, the AT1 state is set in the performance state. As a result, the presentation state shifts from the normal state to the AT1 state.

Further, in the game R429, as indicated by reference numeral R429 in FIG. 79, a display including the characters "first year spring" corresponding to the season counter 1 is displayed as the season display SD, and a shift to AT is performed as the season effect SE. , and the number of remaining games display RG includes characters "19G" indicating that there are 19 games remaining in season 1 (spring of the first year).

<AT1 State> The game (game R428) shown in FIG. 79 in which the high navigation state counter is 428 is the first game immediately after the transition from the normal state to the AT1 state, and the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 428. It's a game.

In the game R428, as indicated by symbol R428 in FIG. 79, AT1 effect AE suggesting the current effect state (in this example, AT1 state) is performed, and AT is started. In addition, when the cycle counter exceeds the ceiling cycle value (reaches the ceiling), the AT1 type is set to low because it does not shift to the final notification effect state, and the AT starts from the AT1 state (low). be.

<Transition Example 5 of Rendering State> Next, transition example 5 of the rendering state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing changes in various counters, flags, various displays, and effects in the transition example 5 of the effect state in chronological order.

In this example, since the CZ shift lottery was won in the NM2 state of the normal state, the state is shifted to the CZ state during a certain number of games (10 games in this example). In the CZ state, the number of remaining games in the NM2 state is not subtracted.

In the NM2 state process A in which the high navigation state counter is 724 (game R724) shown in FIG. At the same time, the portent flag is set to on. Subsequently, in NM2 state processing B in which the high navigation state counter is 720 (game R720) shown in FIG. , the number of CZ games (10 games in this example) determined by lottery for the number of CZ games is set in the CZ counter, and the CZ state flag is set to ON.

Subsequently, in the NM2 state process A where the high navigation state counter is 719 (game R719) shown in FIG. is not subtracted), CZ state processing A is executed, in this CZ state processing A, the CZ counter is decremented, a CZ point addition lottery is performed, and the lottery result is added to the CZ points.

Further, in game R719, as indicated by symbol R719 in FIG. 80, a display including characters "9 more G" indicating that the remaining games in the CZ state are 9 games, and the current rendering state (in this example, CZ effect CE suggesting CZ state) and the characters "CZPT: 110" indicating that the CZ point is 110 points are displayed.

Subsequently, in NM2 state processing B with a high navigation state counter of 710 (game R710) shown in FIG. 80, since the CZ state flag is ON, CZ state processing B is executed. Since the counter is 0, the CZ state flag is set to OFF and the CZ point is converted to an AT transition point.

Subsequently, in the NM2 state process A in which the high navigation state counter is 709 (game R709) shown in FIG. However, in game R709, the AT shift point value is 920, and the AT shift possible point value is 900 or more, so the AT shift reservation flag is set to ON. there is

In this example, even if the conditions for shifting to AT are satisfied in the CZ state, the transition to AT is prevented until the CZ counter reaches 0 (until the CZ state ends). In this example, when the CZ state ends, the state is returned to the NM2 state, but the state may be changed to the final notification state. Alternatively, an AT transition lottery may be performed in the CZ state, and only when the lottery is won, the state may be shifted to the fixed notification state. , CZ state, the state may be changed to the fixed notification state only when the AT shift lottery is won.

<Another Embodiment> Next, another embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. FIG.

FIG. 81(a) is a diagram showing a modification of transition of the effect state. In the example shown in FIG. 81(a)(1), a set game composed of period 1, period 2, period 3, period 4, and period 5 is executed over X (X is a positive integer) games. In the example shown in (a) and (2), a set game consisting of cycle 1, cycle 1, cycle 1 is executed over Y (Y is a positive integer smaller than X) games. Here, cycle 1 is a cycle that is also set when scenarios 8 and 9 (high navigation state reset scenario) or scenario 10 (AT fixed scenario) is selected by lottery for high navigation state scenario determination.

In the example shown in FIG. 81(a)(2), scenarios 8 and 9 (high navigation state reset scenario) are selected in the first cycle 1, so as described in <Transition example 2 of production state> Then, the game state of the AT system is set to the low navigation state (normal game state) to shift to the low navigation state, and in the second cycle 1 after shifting to the high navigation state, scenarios 8 and 9 (high navigation state reset Scenario) was selected, and after moving to the low navigation state again, in the third cycle 1 in which the transition was made to the high navigation state, scenario 10 (AT confirmed scenario) was selected. As described in Transition Example 3>, the state is transitioned to the AT1 state.

According to the example shown in FIG. 81(a)(2), the high-navigation state is shifted to the low-navigation state, and various flags and counters used for transition control to the high-navigation state are initialized. Even in this case, compared to the example shown in FIG. 81(a)(1), it is possible to make it difficult to feel the ceiling (the upper limit of the number of games played) in the high navigation state.

FIG. 81(b) is a diagram showing a modification of the production state transition example 3 described with reference to FIG.

In the transition example 3 of the effect state shown in FIG. 78, when the cycle type S is set in the cycle type setting of the cycle start setting process, an example of shifting from the normal state to the fixed notification state was shown, but FIG. As shown in b), after performing the seasonal effect SE suggesting a transition to AT in the normal state, there may be a case where the state is shifted to the fixed notification state (or the state may always be shifted to the fixed notification state. ).

FIG.81(c) is the figure which showed the modification of the specific production|presentation mode demonstrated using FIG.76(b).

In this example, in at least a part of the game in the normal game state in the specific effect mode, the first suggestive effect RE can be executed while the second suggestive effect SE is not executed. In the normal state (NM1 state, NM2 state, NM3 state), both the first suggestive effect RE and the second suggestive effect SE are configured to be executable.

Here, the first suggesting effect is a effect suggesting the granting of the first privilege. The first privilege (suggestion of set value) is suggested by the effect to be given). In addition, the second suggestive effect is the effect suggesting the provision of the second privilege. Suggestion effect) suggests the provision of the second privilege (AT).

According to this example, since the first suggested effect RE can be executed in both at least a part of the game in the normal game state in the specific effect mode and in the normal state in the specific effect mode, the change from the normal game state to the advantageous state It is possible to make the transition difficult for the player to understand, and prevent the player from realizing that the normal game state is prolonged and there is no chance. By making the number of games in which the second suggestive effect is executed variable, it is possible to make it even more difficult for the player to understand the transition from the normal game state to the advantageous state.

FIG. 82(a) is a diagram showing a modified example of display.

In this example, the history of the executed cycle is stored in the storage means, and the effect image display device 157 is used to display the history of the cycle, for example, cycle 1, cycle 5, . are doing.

According to this example, it is possible to estimate the degree of expectation for the transition to AT based on the contents of the cycle executed in the past, and the convenience of the player can be enhanced. In the above embodiment, the number of remaining games and AT transition points in each effect state are shown numerically, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the remaining number of games and AT transition points are indicated by colors, symbols, etc. You may As for the AT transition point, for example, the AT transition point effect table shown in FIG. You may perform a suggestive production.

FIG. 82(b) is a diagram showing a modification of the suggestive effect.

In this example, as one of the suggestive effects, when a high navigation state reset scenario (scenarios 8 and 9 in this example) is selected, a reset scenario suggestive effect RSE suggesting that effect is configured to be executable. there is

According to this example, when the high navigation state reset scenario is selected, the reset scenario suggestion effect RSE is executed. For example, the execution frequency of setting effects suggesting set values and developing season effects suggesting developing seasons is reduced. Therefore, depending on the execution frequency of other suggestive effects, the player can have expectations that the reset scenario may have been selected.

<Invention 2> As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "the present invention 2-1") includes operating means (for example, , stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1), and a plurality of states including a normal state (for example, the low-navi state shown in FIG. 6(b)) and an advantageous state (for example, the high-navi state shown in FIG. 6(b)). A game machine comprising control means (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) for shifting to one of the states, wherein operation information of the operation means (for example, payout shown in FIG. 8 Operation navigation using the number display 127, operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. The advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and the advantageous state is changed to the normal state when a condition for ending the advantageous state is satisfied. The advantageous state end condition is a condition that can be established when the number of games played after shifting to the advantageous state reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 1000), and the advantageous state end condition , a first advantageous game state (for example, normal state) and a second advantageous game state (for example, AT1 state) are configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous game states, Said second advantageous game state is more advantageous with respect to notification of said operation information than said first advantageous game state, and a set in which a predetermined number of games can be executed in said first advantageous game state. The game is configured to be executable over a plurality of times, and in the first advantageous game state, an effect (for example, seasonal effect SE shown in FIG. 76A) regarding whether to shift to the second advantageous game state ) can be executed, and after the set game, it is configured to be able to shift from the first advantageous game state to the second advantageous game state, and after shifting to the first advantageous game state The set game executed from (hereinafter referred to as "first set game". For example, the first set game SET1 shown in FIGS. 83 (a) and (b), and the high navigation state shown in FIGS. (Normal state) period 1 game) When not shifting to the second advantageous game state, the next set game (hereinafter referred to as "second set game". For example, in FIG. 83 (a) Second set game SET2 shown, FIGS. 74 to 7 5, high navigation state (normal state) period 2 game) to be executable (for example, shown in FIG. 83 (a), shift from the first set game SET1 to the second set game SET2 74, when transitioning from cycle 1 to cycle 2 of the high navigation state (normal state)), and from the first advantageous game state to the normal state without making the second set game executable When making it possible to shift to a state (for example, when shifting from the first set game SET1 to the normal game state shown in FIG. 83 (b), or when moving from the high navigation state (normal state) to the low navigation ( normal game state)), and the first set game is more likely than the second set game to have the first benefit related to the second advantageous game state (for example , the benefit of increasing the initial number of AT games, the benefit of increasing the number of additional games of AT, and the benefit of increasing the winning probability of AT's additional lottery). It's a playground. It should be noted that FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an outline of Inventions 2-1 and 2-2 of the present application.

In other words, the amusement machine according to Invention 2-1 (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) includes effect means (for example, the effect image display device 157) and operation means (for example, the stop button shown in FIG. 137-139), and any of a plurality of states including a normal state (eg, the low-nav state shown in FIG. 6(b)) and an advantageous state (eg, the high-nav state shown in FIG. 6(b)). State setting means capable of setting states (for example, production state control processing A and production state control processing B shown in FIG. 10), and advantageous state control means capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state (for example, shown in FIG. 17) high-navigation state processing A, high-navigation state processing B shown in FIG. Operation navigation using the device 127, operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. the advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and the state setting means terminates the setting of the advantageous state when a condition for ending the advantageous state is satisfied. and the advantageous state end condition is a condition that can be established when the number of games played after shifting to the advantageous state reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 1000). and the advantageous state control means selects one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states including a first advantageous gaming state (for example, normal state) and a second advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state) in the advantageous state. Means capable of executing control to shift to one of the states, wherein the second advantageous gaming state is more advantageous than the first advantageous gaming state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and the advantageous The state control means is means capable of executing a set game capable of executing a predetermined number of games in the first advantageous game state over a plurality of times. It is a means capable of executing an effect (for example, a seasonal effect SE shown in FIG. 76(a)) regarding whether or not to shift to the second advantageous game state, and the advantageous state control means controls the second game state after the set game. It is a means capable of executing control to shift from one advantageous game state to the second advantageous game state, and the set game executed after shifting to the first advantageous game state (hereinafter referred to as "first "Set game". For example, after the first set game SET1 shown in FIGS. 83(a) and (b), and the high navigation state (normal state) period 1 game shown in FIGS. 73 to 74), the second advantageous game state , the next set game (hereinafter referred to as "second set game". For example, the second set game SET2 shown in FIG. 83 (a), and the high navigation state shown in FIGS. 74 to 75 (Normal state) period 2 game) to be executable (for example, when shifting from the first set game SET1 to the second set game SET2 shown in FIG. 83 (a), or shown in FIG. 74 , when shifting from cycle 1 to cycle 2 of the high navigation state (normal state)), and when making it possible to shift from the first advantageous game state to the normal state without making the second set game executable. (For example, shown in FIG. 83(b), when shifting from the first set game SET1 to the normal game state, or shown in FIG. 77, shifting from the high navigation state (normal state) to the low navigation (normal game state) case), and the first set game is more advantageous than the second set game, the first benefit related to the second advantageous gaming state (for example, the initial number of AT games This game machine is characterized in that a privilege of increasing the number of games, a privilege of increasing the number of games to be added to the AT, and a privilege of increasing the winning probability of the lottery to be added to the AT) can be easily given.

According to the game machine according to the invention 2-1 of the present application, the player is not bothered by the upper limit number of times in the advantageous state, and the player's desire to play is prevented from decreasing after the advantageous state is shifted to the normal state. can be done. In addition, since the first advantageous game state may shift to the normal state, it is possible to easily determine when the game should be stopped, and to give the player a sense of security. In addition, it is possible to expand the options of how to proceed with the game (strategy), such as deciding the number of times to aim for a certain game section, stopping the game when a certain game section ends and the advantageous state does not end, etc. can be enhanced.

Further, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "the present invention 2-2") includes operation means (for example, the stop buttons 137 to 137 shown in FIG. 139) and any one of a plurality of states including a normal state (for example, the low-navi state shown in FIG. 6(b)) and an advantageous state (for example, the high-navi state shown in FIG. 6(b)). A game machine having a control means (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) for shifting, and operation information of the operation means (for example, operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 8 , operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. The advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and is configured to transition from the advantageous state to the normal state when conditions for ending the advantageous state are satisfied. The state end condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the number of games played after shifting to the advantageous state reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 1000), and in the advantageous state, the first advantageous gaming state ( For example, a normal state) and a second advantageous game state (for example, AT1 state) can be shifted to any one of a plurality of advantageous game states, and the first advantageous game state is higher than the first advantageous game state. Said second advantageous game state is a state more advantageous in terms of notification of said operation information, and in said first advantageous game state, a set game capable of executing a predetermined number of games can be executed a plurality of times. In the first advantageous game state, it is possible to execute an effect (for example, a suggestive effect (seasonal effect) SE shown in FIG. 76(a)) regarding whether to shift to the second advantageous game state. It is configured, configured to be able to shift from the first advantageous game state to the second advantageous game state after the set game, and the executed after shifting to the first advantageous game state Set game (hereinafter referred to as "first set game". For example, the first set game SET1 shown in FIGS. 83 (a) and (b), shown in FIGS. 73 to 74, high navigation state (normal state) When not shifting to the second advantageous game state after the cycle 1 game), the next set game (hereinafter referred to as "second set game". For example, the second set shown in FIG. 83 (a) Game SET 2, high navigation shown in FIGS. 74 to 75 State (normal state) period 2 game) to be executable (for example, when moving from the first set game SET1 to the second set game SET2 shown in FIG. 83 (a), or in FIG. 74 When the high navigation state (normal state) shifts from cycle 1 to cycle 2), and the first advantageous game state can be shifted to the normal state without making the second set game executable. Case (for example, shown in FIG. 83 (b), the case of shifting from the first set game SET1 to the normal game state, or shown in FIG. 77, transition from high navigation state (normal state) to low navigation (normal game state) case), and the first set game is given a first privilege (for example, AT) related to the second advantageous gaming state than the second set game Any one of a plurality of set game states relating to the degree of expectation for granting the second privilege can be set for each set game. It is a play table that

In other words, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention 2-2 includes effect means (for example, the effect image display device 157) and operation means (for example, the stop button shown in FIG. 137-139), and any of a plurality of states including a normal state (eg, the low-nav state shown in FIG. 6(b)) and an advantageous state (eg, the high-nav state shown in FIG. 6(b)). State setting means capable of setting states (for example, production state control processing A and production state control processing B shown in FIG. 10), and advantageous state control means capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state (for example, shown in FIG. 17) high-navigation state processing A, high-navigation state processing B shown in FIG. Operation navigation using the device 127, operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. the advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and the state setting means terminates the setting of the advantageous state when a condition for ending the advantageous state is satisfied. and the advantageous state end condition is a condition that can be established when the number of games played after shifting to the advantageous state reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 1000). and the advantageous state control means selects one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states including a first advantageous gaming state (for example, normal state) and a second advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state) in the advantageous state. Means capable of executing control to shift to one of the states, wherein the second advantageous gaming state is more advantageous than the first advantageous gaming state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and the advantageous The state control means is means capable of executing a set game capable of executing a predetermined number of games in the first advantageous game state over a plurality of times. It is a means capable of executing an effect (for example, a seasonal effect SE shown in FIG. 76(a)) regarding whether or not to shift to the second advantageous game state, and the advantageous state control means controls the second game state after the set game. It is a means capable of executing control to shift from one advantageous game state to the second advantageous game state, and the set game executed after shifting to the first advantageous game state (hereinafter referred to as "first "Set game". For example, after the first set game SET1 shown in FIGS. 83(a) and (b), and the high navigation state (normal state) period 1 game shown in FIGS. 73 to 74), the second advantageous game state , the next set game (hereinafter referred to as "second set game". For example, the second set game SET2 shown in FIG. 83 (a), and the high navigation state shown in FIGS. 74 to 75 (Normal state) period 2 game) to be executable (for example, when shifting from the first set game SET1 to the second set game SET2 shown in FIG. 83 (a), or shown in FIG. 74 , when shifting from cycle 1 to cycle 2 of the high navigation state (normal state)), and when making it possible to shift from the first advantageous game state to the normal state without making the second set game executable. (For example, shown in FIG. 83(b), when shifting from the first set game SET1 to the normal game state, or shown in FIG. 77, shifting from the high navigation state (normal state) to the low navigation (normal game state) case), and the first set game is more advantageous than the second set game, the first benefit related to the second advantageous gaming state (for example, the initial number of AT games A benefit of increasing the number of games, a benefit of increasing the number of AT-added games, and a benefit of increasing the winning probability of an AT-added lottery) are easily provided, and a second benefit is provided for each set game. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to be able to set one of a plurality of set game states relating to expectations.

According to the gaming machine according to the invention 2-2 of the present application, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing after the advantageous state is shifted to the normal state without making the player care about the upper limit number of times in the advantageous state. can be done. In addition, since the first advantageous game state may shift to the normal state, it is possible to easily determine when the game should be stopped, and to give the player a sense of security. In addition, it is possible to expand the options of how to proceed with the game (strategy), such as deciding the number of times to aim for a certain game section, stopping the game when a certain game section ends and the advantageous state does not end, etc. can be enhanced.

Note that the gaming machines according to the inventions 2-1 and 2-2 of the present application are not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, the "second advantageous gaming state" according to the present invention is not limited to the AT1 state, and may be, for example, another effect state such as a fixed announcement state, or whether or not to give AT. A lottery, a game, or the like may be performed.

In addition, the "set game" according to the present invention is not limited to the set game composed of the NM2 state and the NM3 state (judgment state). , and NM3 state (judge state), NM2 state, NM3 state (judge state), and CZ state, or only judge state. Also, the number of games that can be executed in the "set game" is not particularly limited, and may be a fixed value or a variable value (for example, a numerical value determined by lottery or the like). Also, even if the set game is composed of the NM2 state and the NM3 state (judgment state), the NM3 state is passed from the NM2 state to another certain state (state composed of one or more games). (judgment state). numerical value).

Further, "possible to shift from the first advantageous gaming state to the second advantageous gaming state" means "from the first advantageous gaming state to the second advantageous gaming state via a certain gaming state." "Transitionable from the first advantageous gaming state to the normal state" includes "possible to transition from the first advantageous gaming state to the normal state via a certain gaming state." It also includes being “transferable”.

In addition, instead of the configuration that "the second set game is configured to be able to shift from the first advantageous game state to the normal state in some cases without enabling execution of the second set game," After executing the second set game, the first advantageous game state may be changed to the normal state.".

Also, a second privilege related to the execution of the set game over the first specific number of times (for example, a privilege to give AT unconditionally when the cycle counter exceeds the ceiling cycle value (reaches the ceiling)) can be given, and the first specific number of times may be a predetermined number of times equal to or greater than 2 (eg, 6).

With such a configuration, it is possible to give a sense of security to the player who wants to receive a payout corresponding to the number of inserted game media (investment). In addition, when a player who plays a game aiming at a certain game section stops playing when the certain game section ends and the advantageous state does not end, the player aims for the second privilege (for example, the ceiling). Since it becomes easier to play games, it becomes easier to select amusement machines, and by increasing the operating rate of the amusement machines, it is possible to improve the profit of the amusement arcade.

Also, in the set game, the first specific condition can be established, and by the establishment of the first specific condition, a fourth privilege (for example, the cycle counter exceeds the ceiling cycle value (reaches the ceiling A privilege of giving an AT unconditionally in the case of (a), a privilege of easily winning an AT transfer lottery, and a privilege of easily winning an AT promotion lottery) may be granted.

In addition, a second specific condition can be established in relation to the execution of the set game over the first specific number of times, and even if the first specific condition is not established, the first It may be configured such that the second privilege can be given by the establishment of two specific conditions.

Further, it may be constructed such that the transition from the first advantageous gaming state to the normal state does not occur without the advantageous profit including the second privilege being awarded.

With such a configuration, when the state is shifted to the normal state, an advantageous profit including the second privilege is always given, so that the player wants to receive a payout for the number of inserted game media (investment). It can make people feel more secure.

Also, in relation to the execution of the set game over the second specific number of times, a third benefit (for example, a benefit that is likely to win the AT transition lottery, a benefit that is likely to win the AT promotion lottery, and the cycle counter exceeds the ceiling cycle value (Privilege to give AT unconditionally when reaching the ceiling)) can be given, and the second specific number of times may be a number less than the first specific number of times .

With such a configuration, a player who wants to play a game aiming at a certain game section and to obtain the benefit of the second privilege (for example, the ceiling) can repeat the transition from the advantageous state to the normal state. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling that it is difficult to provide the second privilege (for example, the ceiling) and from losing the desire to play the game.

Also, the second specific number of times may be one.

With such a configuration, a player who wants to play a game aiming at a certain game section and to obtain the benefit of the second privilege (for example, the ceiling) can repeat the transition from the advantageous state to the normal state. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling that it is difficult to provide the second privilege (for example, the ceiling) and from losing the desire to play the game.

In addition, an effect control means (for example, the first sub-control section 400) is provided, and the effect control means is configured to be able to set a certain effect mode (for example, the specific effect mode described using FIG. 76(b)) The certain production mode may be a production mode that can be set over at least a part of the first set game after being started in the normal state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the transition from the normal state to the advantageous state, and prevent the player from realizing that the normal state is prolonged and that there is no chance.

In addition, in the state in which the certain effect mode is set, a suggestive effect (for example, a suggestive effect SE shown in FIG. 76(b), a suggestive effect SE shown in FIG. The second suggestive effect SE) may not be executed, and the suggestive effect may be executed in a state in which the certain effect mode is not set.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to understand the transition from the normal state to the advantageous state, and it is possible to prevent the player from realizing that the normal state is prolonged and that there is no chance.

Further, the effect regarding whether to shift to the second advantageous game state may be configured to be executable in the set game.

In addition, it is configured to be able to execute a certain kind of suggestive effect (for example, the set scenario effect RSE shown in FIG. 82(b)) that suggests a certain game state in the set game, and the certain kind of suggestive effect. The execution frequency of the set game other than the first set game may be lower than the first set game.

Further, for each set game, it is configured to be able to set one of a plurality of set game states related to the expected degree of granting of the second privilege, and the first set game state is configured to be set from the normal state. In connection with the transition to the advantageous gaming state, a set gaming state pattern lottery (for example, a lottery using a high navigation state scenario determination lottery table shown in FIG. 52(a)) is configured to be executable. The set game state set for each set game may be configured to be uniquely determinable based on the result (scenario) of the set game state pattern lottery.

In addition, an advantageous state notification means (for example, advantageous state notification (advantage section lamp made up of LED) shown in FIG. 76(b)) is provided for notifying that the player has shifted to an advantageous state, and the player has transitioned to the advantageous state. Even in such a case, the notification by the advantageous state notification means may not be started in some cases.

[Embodiment 3]
A slot machine according to Embodiment 3 of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

In addition, in the present embodiment 3, in principle, only the configuration different from the game machines according to the first and second embodiments will be described in order to avoid redundant description. 84 to 98 are basically used only for the explanation of the third embodiment, and even if overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the The code shown in 98 has priority.

<Types of game state>
As described with reference to FIG. 6 and the like, in the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, until the special combination 2 is internally elected in the replay low probability state (RT1), a notification to prompt a two-coin bet game is performed. A two-coin bet game is urged, and in a special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3), notification for urging a two-coin bet game is terminated to prompt a three-coin bet game.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine dedicated to the three-coin bet game. It is configured to shift to the special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) when the internal winning is made in .

<Process common to each game>
As described with reference to FIG. 15(b) and the like, in the gaming machine according to the above embodiment, in the game common processing, whether or not the conditions for executing the high navigation state related processing are established (the game is (whether or not it is a recommended number game (three bet game)), and if applicable, the processing prohibition flag is set to OFF.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the common processing for each game, whether or not the condition for executing the high navigation state related processing is established (in this embodiment, the game state of the game is RT2 or RT3). Whether it is either) is determined, and if applicable, the processing prohibition flag is set to OFF, and if not applicable (in this embodiment, the game state of the game is either RT1 or RT4 case), the processing prohibition flag is set to ON. As a result, in RT1 and RT4, processing related to the high navigation state (for example, processing for updating various counters such as the effect state counter, the precursor counter, the CZ counter, etc.) does not proceed (see FIG. 95 for details). (to be described later).

<NM2 state processing A>
Next, NM2 state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the flow of NM2 state processing A according to the third embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to NM2 state processing A described using FIG.

The NM2 state processing A according to this example applies the processing of step S1057 instead of the processing of steps S1046 to S1048 in the NM2 state processing A described using FIG. It is configured to perform the CZ precursor setting process to be described.

<CZ precursor setting process>
Next, the CZ precursor setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 85(a). FIG. 85(a) is a flow chart showing the flow of the CZ precursor setting process (step S1057) in the NM2 state process A described using FIG.

In step S2901, lottery for the number of precursor games of the main precursor is performed. In this omen game number lottery (main omen), the number of omen effects games to be executed before the start of the CZ state (omen number of games) is determined, the flow advances to step S2902. In the number-of-prediction-game lottery of this example, a lottery value is selected based on the obtained random number (for example, 0 to 255), and a lottery result value corresponding to the selected lottery value (a number of 1 to 8 in this example). to get

In step S2902, it is determined whether or not the value of the season counter is smaller than the value of the developing season. , final period), the process proceeds to step S2903. In step S2903, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect state counter is equal to or greater than the lottery result value (value of the number of portent games) of the portent game number lottery. value), the process proceeds to step S2904, and if not (value of the effect state counter<value of the number of precursor games), the process proceeds to step S2905.

In step S2904, the lottery result value of the number of precursor games lottery (value of the number of precursor games) is set in the precursor counter, and then the process proceeds to step S2906. proceed to In step S2906, the CZ precursor setting process is terminated after the precursor flag is set to ON.

In the CZ precursor setting process of this example, in the final cycle, when the value of the effect state counter<value of the number of precursor games, by setting the value of the effect state counter to the precursor counter, the CZ precursor is set to the remainder of the final cycle. It is configured to run within the number of games. In addition, since the omen counter starts decrementing after the next game, the number of omen games is the value of the omen counter + 1. For example, when the value of the omen counter is set to 1, the number of omen games is 2 games (=1+1).

In addition, in this example, the larger the lottery result value (the number of precursor games) obtained by the lottery for the number of precursor games (the main precursor), the higher the possibility that a privilege advantageous to the player will be granted (for example, CZ It is configured so that the probability of transitioning to the state (CZ transition rate) is increased). With such a configuration, even if the number of precursor games is small, there is a possibility that a privilege advantageous to the player will be given, so that the player's desire to play can be maintained in the precursor effect.

In this example, the main control unit 300 performs the lottery for the number of precursor games (main precursor). It may be configured such that processing such as a precursor game number lottery (main precursor) or the like is performed based on game information (production state counter, etc.) included in the command.

In addition, in the case of a configuration for executing a false omen effect (fake omen), based on the game information (such as the effect state counter) included in the command received by the first sub-control unit 400 from the main control unit 300, A lottery for the number of precursory games (fake precursory) is performed using the table for determining the number of CZ precursory games (fake precursor) shown in FIG. Then, a lottery result value corresponding to the selected lottery value (in this example, a numerical value of 1 to 4 in a numerical range smaller than 1 to 8 of the lottery for the number of omen games (main omen)) is acquired to play a bogus omen game. It should be set to a number. It should be noted that this number-of-prediction lottery (fake prediction) may be configured to be performed by another control unit (for example, the main control unit 300, etc.).

<CZ state processing A>
Next, the CZ state processing A will be explained using FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the flow of CZ state processing A according to the third embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to CZ state processing A described using FIG.

The CZ state processing A according to this example applies the processing of steps S1065 to S1066 in addition to the CZ state processing A described using FIG. Specifically, in step S1065, it is determined whether or not the AT shift lottery has been won. If the lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S1066 to set the AT shift reservation flag to ON. Proceed to S1064.

That is, in the CZ state processing A according to this example, when the AT shift lottery is won, the effect state can be shifted from the CZ state to the AT (AT direct hit route is possible).

<Season start setting process>
Next, the processing of steps S1942 and S1943 of the season start setting processing will be described using FIG. 67 again.

In step S1942, it is determined whether or not the value of the precursor counter is other than 0. If the value is other than 0, the flow advances to step S1943 to set 1 to the precursor counter. Therefore, in the CZ precursor setting process described with reference to FIG. 85(a), the cycle is other than the final cycle (in step S2902, it is determined that the value of the season counter is smaller than the value of the developing season), and When a lottery result value (the number of precursory games) larger than the value of the effect state counter is set in the precursory counter (when the number of precursory games larger than the number of remaining games of the cycle is set in step S2904); Also, in this season start setting process, the number of precursor games is forcibly set to 1, and in this one precursor game, after performing CZ shift notification or the like suggesting a transition to CZ, CZ from the next game It is configured to be able to move to the state.

<Lottery table for determining the display contents at the start of the season>
FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for determining display contents at the start of the season. In this lottery table for determining display contents at the start of the season, the vertical axis represents the number, and the horizontal axis represents the type of effect, the lottery value, and the mode of effect (summary).

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to this lottery table for determining display contents at the start of the season in the season start display processing 1 and 2, which will be described later, and based on the effect type and the random number at the time of the lottery, the season start display is displayed. A content determination lottery is conducted to select a performance mode. In this example, when the type of effect is the start of the season, a lottery value is selected based on the obtained random number (for example, 0 to 255), the effect mode corresponding to the selected lottery value is selected, and the effect is performed. If the type is CZ shift or AT shift, the corresponding effect mode (CZ shift notification or AT shift notification) is selected with a probability of 100%.

<Display processing at the start of the season>
Next, the season start display processing will be described with reference to FIG. 88(a). FIG. 88(a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the season start time display process according to the third embodiment.

This season start time display process is a process executed in the other effect control process (step S3302) of the first sub-control unit effect control process described with reference to FIG. 12(d). In step S3001, the game information included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the previous season counter value and the current season counter value match. The process advances to step S3002, and if they do not match, the season start time display processing ends. In step S3002, it is determined whether or not a command indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "lever on") has been received from the main control unit 300. If so, the process proceeds to step S3003. If not, the process advances to step S3004. In step S3003, the season start display process 1 (details will be described later) is executed, and then the season start display process is terminated.

In step S3004, it is determined whether or not a command indicating that the third stop operation has been performed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "third stop") has been received from the main control unit 300. If so, The process advances to step S3005, and if not applicable, ends the season start time display processing. In step S3005, the season start time display process 2 (details will be described later) is executed, and then the season start time display process is terminated.

<Display processing 1 at the start of the season>
Next, the season start display process 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 88(b). FIG. 88(b) is a flow chart showing the flow of the season start time display process 1 (step S3003) in the season start time display process described with reference to FIG. 88(a).

In step S3101, the game information included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the value of the cycle counter is equal to or less than the ceiling cycle value (5 in this example). If it has not reached the ceiling), the process proceeds to step S3102; otherwise (if it has reached the ceiling), the process proceeds to step S3105. In step S3102, the game information included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is referred to, and it is determined whether the portent flag is off or on. If it is on (in the case of an omen), the process proceeds to step S3104. In step S3103, a lottery is performed to determine the content of display at the start of the season, as described with reference to FIG. After transmitting the effect information corresponding to the mode, the season start display process 1 is terminated.

In step S3104, referring to the lottery table for determining display contents at the start of the season described with reference to FIG. After transmitting the effect information corresponding to the effect mode to the control unit 500, the season start time display process 1 is terminated.

In step S3105, referring to the lottery table for determining the display contents at the start of the season described with reference to FIG. After transmitting the effect information corresponding to the effect mode to the control unit 500, the season start time display process 1 is terminated.

<Display processing 2 at the start of the season>
Next, season start time display processing 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 88(c). FIG. 88(c) is a flow chart showing the flow of the season start time display process 2 (step S3005) in the season start time display process described with reference to FIG. 88(a).

In step S3201, the game information included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the value of the cycle counter is equal to or less than the ceiling cycle value (5 in this example). If it has not reached the ceiling), the process proceeds to step S3202; otherwise (if it has reached the ceiling), the process proceeds to step S3205. In step S3202, the game information included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is referred to determine whether the portent flag is off or on. If so (in the case of an omen), the process proceeds to step S3204. In step S3203, a lottery is performed to determine the content of display at the start of the season, as described with reference to FIG. After transmitting the effect information corresponding to the mode, the process proceeds to step S3206.

In step S3204, referring to the lottery table for determining display contents at the start of the season described with reference to FIG. After transmitting the effect information corresponding to the effect mode to the control unit 500, the process proceeds to step S3206.

In step S3205, referring to the lottery table for determining the display contents at the start of the season described with reference to FIG. After transmitting the effect information corresponding to the effect mode to the control unit 500, the process proceeds to step S3206. In step S3206, after the value of the current season counter is set in the previous season counter, season start time display processing 2 ends.

In this example, since the season start display process is executed at the start of the set game, there is a case where the CZ shift notification is performed when the state shifts to the CZ state in the middle of the set game. When shifting (returning) from the CZ state to the set game, there is no other notification including the CZ shift notification in the set game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly harassed, without performing various notifications multiple times during the set game.

<Set game>
Next, a set game that can be executed by the slot machine according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 89(a).

FIG. 89(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a set game. In principle, the display of the effect image display device 157 in each drawing used in the following description shows an example of the display immediately after the start lever 135 is operated (immediately after lever-on) in each game. , a similar display may be performed when another operation (for example, the third stop) is received.

The slot machine according to the third embodiment can execute a set game capable of executing a plurality of games over a plurality of times, and after a certain set game (first set game) out of a predetermined number of set games, the A certain set game (second set game) next to the first set game can be started.

The 1st year summer (season counter 2) SET1 in the NM2 state shown in FIG. Autumn (season counter 3) SET2 corresponds to an example of the "second set game". In addition, in this example, in each set game, a total of 20 games of 1 to 20 can be executed, but the set game may be a game in which multiple games can be executed. , or 21 times or more.

In addition, in each set game, the performance image display device 157 can be used to notify the contents of the set game, the number of remaining games in the set game, and a certain privilege.

In this example, in the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) SET1, the first game (game with 20 remaining games at the start of the game) SET1-R20, with Lebaon as a trigger, set As a notification of game-related content, a season display SD including characters of "1st year summer" corresponding to the season counter 2 and a normal season presentation (normal) SE1 that does not suggest the possibility of shifting to the AT1 state are performed. . In addition, as notification of the number of remaining games in the set game, a remaining game number display RG including characters "19G" indicating that the number of remaining games in the first set game SET1 is 19 games is performed. As the notification, an AT transition point display AP indicating the AT transition point is performed. Note that in this example, the cycle (in this example, the first year) is not displayed, but the cycle can be notified by displaying the cycle (for example, a display including the characters “cycle 1”). may

Similarly, in the second set game (NM2 state: autumn of the first year), the first game of SET2 (the game with 20 remaining games at the start of the game) SET2-R20, with Lebaon as a trigger, the set game As a notification of the content of the current state, a season display SD including characters of "1st year autumn" corresponding to the season counter 3 and a season presentation (suggestion) SE2 suggesting the possibility of shifting to the AT1 state are performed. In addition, as notification of the number of remaining games in the set game, a remaining game number display RG including characters "19G" indicating that the remaining games of the second set game SET2 are 19 games is performed. As the notification, an AT transition point display AP indicating the AT transition point is performed.

<CZ transition winning>
Next, the flow of the game when winning the CZ shift lottery (CZ shift winning) will be described.

As described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85, in the slot machine according to this example, when the CZ shift lottery is won in the NM2 state process A, the number of precursor games lottery is performed in the CZ precursor setting process, and the CZ state is changed. Determines the number of precursor games to be executed before starting. Then, when the game cycle is the final cycle (when the value of the season counter is equal to the value of the developing season), it is further determined whether or not the value of the presentation state counter is equal to or greater than the number of precursor games, If not applicable (value of the effect state counter < value of the number of precursor games), set the value of the effect state counter to the precursor counter; otherwise, set the value of the number of precursor games to the precursor counter. do.

That is, in the slot machine according to the present example, when "the cycle of the game at the time of CZ transition winning is the final cycle and the value of the effect state counter is less than the value of the number of precursor games", the effect to the precursor counter Set the value of the state counter, ``If the game cycle when CZ transition is won is not the final cycle'', or ``The game cycle when CZ transition is won is the final cycle, but the value of the effect state counter is If the number of precursor games is greater than or equal to the number of precursor games, the value of the number of precursor games is set in the precursor counter.

In addition, in the slot machine according to the present example, when a CZ transition win is made and a numerical value is set in the precursor counter, a notification (in this example Then, CZ shift notification) can be executed, and a specific effect (predictive effect in this example) regarding whether to shift to the specific state can be executed before shifting to the specific state.

In addition, the number of precursor games is not limited to the example determined by lottery, and may be fixed, or may be set several times during the first game period (for example, the end of the set game (for example, at least the final game of the set game). The game period except the game) is determined by lottery, and the second game period (for example, the end of the set game) may be fixed without lottery.

<CZ transition winning (Example 1)>
FIG. 89(b-1) is a diagram showing the flow of the game in time series when the CZ shift wins (Embodiment 1). In this example, the first set game (NM2 state: 1st year summer) SET1 4th game (game with 17 remaining games at the start of the game) SET1-R17 CZ transition winning, This is an example in which the value of the precursor counter is determined to be 2 (the number of precursor games is 3 games) by lottery for the number of games.

In this example, the first set game (NM2 state: 1st year summer) SET1 is not the final cycle, but corresponds to "when the cycle of the game when CZ transition is won is not the final cycle". is set to the number of precursor games (2 in this example).

As a result, in the first set game (NM2 state: 1st year summer) SET1, the precursor effect is started from the game with 17 remaining games (CZ transition winning game), and over a total of 3 games of the game + 2 games After the precursor effect is executed, the effect state shifts from the NM2 state (summer of the first year) to the CZ state, and after the end of the CZ state, the number of remaining games in the NM2 state (summer of the first year) reaches 14 again. Move (return) to the game.

Next, the various displays executed in this example will be described. First set game (NM2 state: first year summer) SET1 third game (game with 18 remaining games at the start of the game) SET1-R18 , with Lebaon as a trigger, the season display SD including the characters "first year summer" corresponding to the season counter 2, the normal season effect (normal) SE1 that does not suggest the possibility of shifting to the AT1 state, and the second A remaining game number display RG including characters "17G" indicating that the number of remaining games in one set game SET1 is 17 games is performed.

Subsequently, in the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year), the fourth game of SET1 (the game with 17 remaining games at the start of the game) SET1-R17, with Lebaon as a trigger, AT1 state A seasonal effect SE3 including a effect (normal) not suggesting the possibility of shifting to the CZ state and an indication effect regarding whether or not to shift to the CZ state is performed.

Subsequently, in the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year), the sixth game of SET1 (the game with 15 remaining games at the start of the game) SET1-R15, FIG. In the season start time display processing 1 described above, since the CZ shift notification was selected as the production mode by lottery, the production (normal) that does not suggest the possibility of shifting to the AT1 state and the CZ state with Lebaon as a trigger A seasonal effect SE4 including a premonitory effect regarding whether or not to shift and a CZ shift notification suggesting a shift to the CZ state is performed.

Subsequently, in the CZ state immediately after the transition from the NM2 state (summer of the first year), with Lebaon as a trigger, the number of remaining games in the CZ state is 9 games, including the characters "9G". A number display RG and a CZ effect CE suggesting that the effect state is the CZ state are performed.

Subsequently, in the NM2 state (summer of the first year), which has shifted (returned) from the CZ state, with Lebaon as a trigger, the season display SD including the characters "summer of the first year" corresponding to the season counter 2 and the AT1 state A normal seasonal effect (regular) SE1 that does not suggest the possibility of shifting to , and a remaining game number display RG including the characters "13G" indicating that the remaining games of the first set game SET1 are 13 games are performed. ing.

According to this example, in the CZ state, the number of remaining games in the period immediately before the CZ state (the value of the effect state counter) does not decrease, and the remaining games can be completed after the CZ state ends. It is possible to prevent the person's desire to play from declining. In addition, the probability that an advantageous privilege is given to the player (for example, the probability of shifting to an advantageous production state such as AT1 state) is higher when CZ transition is won than when CZ transition is not won. Therefore, the player's desire to play can be enhanced. <CZ Transition Winning (Embodiment 2)> FIG. 89(b-2) is a diagram showing the flow of the game in the case of CZ transition winning (Embodiment 2) in chronological order. In this example, the first set game (NM2 state: 1st year summer) SET1 4th game (game with 17 remaining games at the start of the game) SET1-R17 CZ transition winning, the number of precursor games In this example, the value of the portent counter is determined by lottery to be 7 (the number of portent games is 8 games).

In this example, the first set game (NM2 state: 1st year summer) SET1 is not the final cycle, but corresponds to "when the cycle of the game when CZ transition is won is not the final cycle". is set to the number of precursor games (7 in this example).

As a result, in the first set game (NM2 state: 1st year summer) SET1, the sign effect starts from the game with 17 remaining games (CZ transition winning game), and over a total of 8 games of the game + 7 games After the precursor effect is executed, the effect state shifts from the NM2 state (summer of the first year) to the CZ state, and after the end of the CZ state, the number of remaining games in the NM2 state (summer of the first year) reaches 9 again. Move (return) to the game.

Various displays executed in this example are almost the same as those of the CZ transition winning (Example 1) described with reference to FIG.

According to this example, in the CZ state, the number of remaining games in the period immediately before the CZ state (the value of the effect state counter) does not decrease, and the remaining games can be completed after the CZ state ends. It is possible to prevent the person's desire to play from declining. In addition, the probability that an advantageous privilege is given to the player (for example, the probability of shifting to an advantageous production state such as AT1 state) is higher when CZ transition is won than when CZ transition is not won. Therefore, the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

<CZ shift winning (Example 3)>
FIG. 90(a) is a diagram showing, in chronological order, the flow of the game when the CZ shift is won (Embodiment 3). In this example, the first set game (NM2 state: 1st year summer) SET1 18th game (game with 3 remaining games at the start of the game) SET1-R3 CZ transition winning, the number of precursor games In this example, the value of the omen counter is determined by lottery to be 2 (the number of omen games is 3).

In this example, the first set game (NM2 state: 1st year summer) SET1 is not the final cycle, but corresponds to "when the cycle of the game when CZ transition is won is not the final cycle". is set to the number of precursor games (2 in this example).

As a result, in the first set game (NM2 state: 1st year summer) SET1, the precursor effect is started from the game with 3 remaining games (CZ transition winning game), and over a total of 3 games of the game + 2 games After the precursor effect is executed, the effect state shifts from the NM2 state (summer of the first year) to the CZ state, and then shifts (returns) to the NM2 state (summer of the first year) after the CZ state ends. , the number of remaining games in the NM2 state (summer of the first year) is 0, so the next second set game (NM2 state: autumn of the first year) SET2 immediately follows.

Here, in this example, even if the first set game (NM2 state: 1st year summer) CZ transition winning in the CZ state of SET1, the second set game (NM2 state: 1st year autumn) It is configured so as not to shift to the CZ state in SET2.

It should be noted that the various displays executed in this example are almost the same as the CZ transition winning (Example 1) described with reference to FIG. Second set game (NM2 state: fall of first year) In the first game of SET2 (game with 20 remaining games at the start of the game) SET2-R20, the set game is the second set game Seasonal production SE5 that can suggest

According to this example, the probability that an advantageous privilege is given to the player (for example, the probability of shifting to an advantageous effect state such as AT1 state) is higher when CZ transition is won than when CZ transition is not elected. is higher, the player's desire to play can be enhanced. Further, after the CZ state ends, the game is started from the first game of the next cycle, so the player can proceed with the game while clearly recognizing that the cycle has just changed.

<CZ shift winning (Example 4)>
Figure 90 (b-1) is a diagram showing a comparative example with the CZ transition winning (Example 4) described using Figure 90 (b-2), Figure 90 (b-2) is a CZ It is the figure which showed the flow of the game in a time series when transition winning is carried out (Example 4).

The examples shown in FIGS. 90(b-1) and 90(b-2) are both the first set game (NM2 state: first year summer) SET1 18th game (remaining game at the start of the game) This is an example in which a CZ transition win was made in SET1-R3 (game with 3 games), and the value of the precursor counter was determined to be 7 (the number of precursor games is 8) by lottery for the number of precursor games.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 90(b-1), since the value of the number of precursor games (7 in this example) is set in the precursor counter (because the number of precursor games is not adjusted (reduced)), the precursor effect is There is a problem that the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) SET1 and the fifth game of the second set game (NM2 state: autumn of the first year) SET2 are straddled.

In order to solve such a problem, in the example shown in FIG. 90(b-2), the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) SET1 is not the final period, but the "game when CZ shift wins is not the final cycle”, the value of the number of precursor games (2 in this example) is set in the precursor counter. Also, when the production state is shifted from the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) SET1 to the next second set game (NM2 state: autumn of the first year) SET2, use FIG. In the season start setting process described above, since the value of the precursor counter is other than 0, the number of precursor games is forcibly set to 1.

As a result, in the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) SET1, the predictive effect is started from the game with 3 remaining games (CZ transition winning game), and the predictive effect is executed over the game + 2 games. After that, the presentation state shifts from the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) SET1 to the next second set game (NM2 state: autumn of the first year) SET2. Subsequently, even in the game with 20 remaining games in this second set game (NM2 state: 1st year autumn) SET2, the precursor effect is continuously executed, and then the effect state changes to NM2 state: 1st year. After transitioning to the CZ state from autumn, after the CZ state ends, the state shifts (returns) again to the NM2 state: the game in which the number of remaining games in the fall of the first year is 19.

Next, various displays to be executed in this example will be described. First set game (NM2 state: first year summer) SET1 17th game (game with 4 remaining games at the start of the game) SET1-R4 , with Lebaon as a trigger, the season display SD including the characters "first year summer" corresponding to the season counter 2, the normal season effect (normal) SE1 that does not suggest the possibility of shifting to the AT1 state, and the second A remaining game number display RG including characters of "3G" indicating that the number of remaining games in one set game SET1 is 3 games is performed. Subsequently, the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) 18th game of SET1 (game with 3 remaining games at the start of the game) 20th game from SET1-R3 (at the start of the game game with 1 remaining game) In SET1-R1, with Levaon as a trigger, a production (normal) that does not suggest the possibility of shifting to the AT1 state, and a premonition production regarding whether or not to shift to the CZ state. We are doing seasonal production SE3 including.

Subsequently, in the second set game (NM2 state: autumn of the first year), the first game of SET2 (the game with 20 remaining games at the start of the game) SET2-R20, FIG. In the season start time display processing 1 described above, since the CZ transition notification was selected by lottery as the effect mode, the "1st year autumn Seasonal display including the characters " (indication that can be recognized that it is a different cycle from the previous cycle (summer of the first year)) SD and CZ transition notification with content suggesting transition to CZ state We are doing seasonal production SE4.

Subsequently, in the CZ state immediately after shifting from the NM2 state (autumn of the first year), with Lebaon as a trigger, the number of remaining games in the CZ state is 9 games, including the characters "9G". A number display RG and a CZ effect CE suggesting that the effect state is the CZ state are performed.

According to the example shown in FIG. 90 (b-2), the precursor effect is from the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) SET1 to the second set game (NM2 state: autumn of the first year) SET2. Compared to the example shown in FIG. 90(b-1), in which the sign effect is not shortened even though it is straddled, it is possible to reduce the feeling that the time until the ceiling cycle is getting longer, and to maintain the player's desire to play. be able to. In addition, in the CZ state, the number of remaining games (the value of the effect state counter) in the cycle immediately before the CZ state does not decrease, and the remaining games can be completed after the CZ state ends, thereby increasing the player's willingness to play. can be prevented from declining. In addition, the probability that an advantageous privilege is given to the player (for example, the probability of shifting to an advantageous production state such as AT1 state) is higher when CZ transition is won than when CZ transition is not won. Therefore, the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

<CZ shift winning (Example 5)>
Figure 91 (a-1) is a diagram showing a comparative example with the CZ transition winning (Example 5) described using Figure 91 (a-2), Figure 91 (a-2) is a CZ It is the figure which showed the flow of the game in a time series when transition winning is carried out (Example 5).

In addition, the slot machine according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to shift to a predetermined state regarding the player's profit in relation to the execution of the set game, and the set game of the predetermined number of times after the second set game (final game). If the specific state transition lottery is won in the set game), the state is shifted to the specific state before the transition to the predetermined state, and the game in the final set game is not executable after the specific state is completed. It is configured to be able to transition to a state.

Second year winter (season counter 8) SETL in NM2 state shown in FIGS. 91(a-1) and (a-2) of FIG. game)”, the judge state JS corresponds to an example of the “predetermined state”, the CZ transition lottery corresponds to an example of the “specific state transition lottery”, and the CZ state corresponds to the “specific state” It corresponds to an example. In addition, the "predetermined state" according to the present invention is not limited to the judge state, and may be, for example, a state that includes at least both the judge state and the AT state, or a state that includes at least both the judge state and the non-AT state. may be Also, in this example, in the final set game (NM2 state: winter of the second year) SETL, a total of 20 games of 1 to 20 can be executed, and in the judge state JS, a total of 10 games of 1 to 10 can be executed. The game is configured to be executable, but the number of each game is not particularly limited.

The examples shown in FIGS. 91(a-1) and 91(a-2) are both the final set game (NM2 state: second year winter) SETL 18th game (remaining game is 3) CZ transition wins in SETL-R3, and the value of the precursor counter is determined to be 7 (the number of precursor games is 8 games) by lottery for the number of precursor games.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 91(a-1), since the value of the number of precursor games (7 in this example) is set in the precursor counter (because the number of precursor games is not adjusted (reduced)), the precursor effect is the final There is a problem that the set game (NM2 state: winter of the second year) extends from SETL to the fifth game in the judge state JS.

In order to solve such a problem, in the example shown in FIG. 91(a-2), the value of the number of precursor games is 7, the value of the effect state counter is 3, and "the cycle of the game when the CZ transition wins is the last." period and the value of the effect state counter (3 in this example) is less than the value of the number of precursor games (7 in this example). Then set 3).

Further, as described above, the slot machine according to the present embodiment enters the CZ state before shifting to the judge state JS when the CZ transition lottery is won in the final set game (NM2 state: winter of the second year) SETL. After the CZ state ends, the game in the final set game SETL can not be executed and the judgment state JS can be entered.

As a result, in the final set game (NM2 state: winter of the second year) SETL, the precursor production is started from the game with 3 remaining games (CZ transition winning game), and the precursor production is executed over the game + 2 games. After that, the game in the final set game (NM2 state: winter of the second year) SETL is not made executable, and the production state shifts from the final set game (NM2 state: winter of the second year) SETL to the next judge state JS. do. In this example, since the state is shifted from the NM2 state to the judgment state, the value of the precursor counter is reset to 0, and no precursor effect is performed in the judgment state.

In this example, when the CZ shift lottery is won in the final game, the state is shifted to the CZ state before shifting to the judgment state, and the game in the final set game is not made executable after the CZ state is completed. After the end of the CZ state, the game is started from the first game in the judge state. The game can be advanced, and the desire to play increased in the CZ state can be maintained up to the judgment state without diminishing, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased.

Next, various displays executed in this example will be explained. , With Lebaon as a trigger, as a notification of the contents related to the set game, the season display SD including the characters "2nd year winter" corresponding to the season counter 8 and the normal season production that does not suggest the possibility of shifting to the AT1 state ( Normal) SE1 is performed. In addition, as notification of the number of remaining games in the set game, a remaining game number display RG including characters "3G" indicating that the remaining game of the final set game (NM2 state: winter of the second year) SETL is 3 games , and an AT transition point display AP indicating an AT transition point is performed as a notification regarding a certain privilege.

Similarly, in JS-R10, the first game of the judge state JS (the game in which the number of remaining games is 10 at the start of the game), the seasonal counter 8 is notified of the contents of the set game with Lebaon as a trigger. Seasonal display SD including characters of "2nd year winter" and judgment production JE suggesting that it is in judgment state are performed.

In this example, also, since it is configured not to execute the game in the final set game SETL after the predictive effect, and the predictive effect is not performed when the effect state shifts to the next judge state JS, CZ There is no danger of giving the player confusion as to whether it is a precursor of a state or a precursor of a judgment state.

Also, according to the example shown in FIG. 91(a-2), compared to the example shown in FIG. 91(a-1), in which the omen effect is not shortened, the feeling that the time until the ceiling cycle is getting further away is reduced. It is possible to maintain the player's desire to play. In addition, the probability that an advantageous privilege is given to the player (for example, the probability of shifting to an advantageous production state such as AT1 state) is higher when CZ transition is won than when CZ transition is not won. Therefore, the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

In this example, the flow of the game is emphasized, and when the NM2 state is shifted to the judge state, the value of the sign counter is reset to 0, and the sign effect is not performed in the judge state. The invention is not limited to this, and similarly to the CZ transition winning (embodiment 4) described with reference to FIG. may continue.

<AT1 transition due to reaching the ceiling cycle>
FIG. 91(b) is a diagram showing an example of transition from the normal state to the AT1 state in chronological order. Here, in order to avoid duplication of explanation, only points different from example 4 of transition of the effect state explained with reference to FIG. 79 will be explained.

In the normal state process B described with reference to FIG. 64, it is determined whether or not the value of the cycle counter is equal to or less than the ceiling cycle value (5 in this example). Therefore, it is determined that the cycle counter has exceeded the ceiling cycle value (reached the ceiling), and in the AT1 start setting process, the lottery result of the AT1 initial number lottery (the number of AT1 games) is set as the AT1 initial value, and the effect state is set. After setting the counter, the AT1 state is set in the effect state. As a result, the presentation state shifts from the normal state to the AT1 state.

Next, various displays executed in this example will be explained. Lose production mode)) A continuous production including JE2 is performed.

In addition, in the game immediately after the judgment state, as indicated by symbol R1 in FIG. As such, an effect SE including an AT shift notification suggesting a shift to AT is performed.

In addition, in the following AT1 state, in the season start time display process 1 described with reference to FIG. , AT1 effect AE suggesting the current effect state (AT1 state in this example) is performed with Lebaon as a trigger, and AT is started. In addition, when the cycle counter exceeds the ceiling cycle value (reaches the ceiling), the AT1 type is set to low because it does not shift to the final notification effect state, and the AT starts from the AT1 state (low). be.

<Various counters and flags>
Next, various counters and flags in each figure will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

The "effect state counter" is a counter indicating the number of remaining games in each effect state. For example, the effect state counter=16 indicates that the number of remaining games in the effect state is 16G. The "seasonal counter" is a counter indicating the season. For example, the seasonal counter 2 is a counter indicating the season of "first year summer".

The "precursor counter" is a counter set in the CZ predictor setting process described with reference to FIG. 85(a). and the value of the effect state counter is less than the value of the number of precursor games", the value of the effect state counter is set in the precursor counter, and "the cycle of the game when winning the CZ transition is not the final cycle. , or ``when the game cycle at the time of CZ shift winning is the final cycle but the value of the effect state counter is equal to or greater than the number of precursor games'', the value of the number of precursor games is set in the precursor counter.

The "precursor flag" is set to ON when the value of the effect state counter (or the value of the number of precursory games) is set in the precursor counter, and the precursor counter is set in the NM2 state process B described with reference to FIG. is set to 0, the flag is set to OFF in the CZ state start setting process described with reference to FIG.

<Update example 1 of various counters and flags>
FIG. 92(a) is a diagram showing changes in various counters and flags in chronological order when the predictive effect of CZ shift winning (second embodiment) described with reference to FIG. 89(b-2) is executed.

In the CZ transition winning (embodiment 2) shown in FIG. The premonition effect is executed over a total of 8 games (game+7 games). Therefore, in the eight games in which the portent effect is executed, the season counter is set to 2, which is a numerical value indicating the season of "summer of the first year".

In addition, in the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year), the fourth game of SET1 (the game with 17 remaining games at the start of the game) SET1-R17, CZ transition is won, and by the precursor game number lottery The value of the precursor counter is determined to be 7 (the number of precursor games is 8 games), and the value of the number of precursor games (7 in this example) is set to the precursor counter (initial value 0) (0→7). Since the value of the number of precursor games is set in the precursor counter, the precursor flag is set from off to on (off→on).

After that, in the first set game (NM2 state: 1st year summer) 5th to 11th games of SET1 (games with 16 to 10 remaining games at the start of each game) SET1-R16 to R10, One is subtracted from the omen counter for each game, and the omen counter changes from 7 to 0 (7→6→...→1→0). Since the precursor counter has reached 0, the precursor flag is set from ON to OFF (ON→OFF).

Since the effect state is the NM2 state, 1 is subtracted from the effect state counter in the NM2 state process A, and the effect state counter becomes 16 from 17 (17→16). After that, in the first set game (NM2 state: 1st year summer) 5th to 11th games of SET1 (games with 16 to 10 remaining games at the start of each game) SET1-R16 to R10, One is subtracted from the effect state counter for each game, and the effect state counter becomes 9 from 16 (16→15→...→10→9).

<Update example 2 of various counters and flags>
FIG. 92(b) is a diagram showing changes in various counters and flags in chronological order during execution of the predictive effect for CZ shift winning (Example 4) described with reference to FIG. 90(b-2).

In the CZ transition winning (embodiment 4) shown in FIG. 90 (b-2), the first set game (NM2 state: first year summer) The number of remaining games in SET1 is 3 The premonition production is started from the game, After the precursor effect is executed over the game + 2 games, the effect state changes from the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) SET1 to the next second set game (NM2 state: autumn of the first year) SET2. Then, even in the game with 20 remaining games in the second set game (NM2 state: autumn of the first year) SET2, the precursor effect is continuously executed. Therefore, in the 3 games of the first set game in which the precursor effect is executed, the season counter is set to 2, which is the numerical value indicating the season of "first year summer", and the second precursor effect is executed. In one game of the set game, the season counter is set to 3, which is a numerical value indicating the season of "autumn of the first year".

In addition, the first set game (NM2 state: 1st year summer) 18th game of SET1 (game with 3 remaining games at the start of the game) CZ transition winning in SET1-R3, by lottery of precursor games The value of the precursor counter is determined to be 7 (the number of precursor games is 8 games), and the value of the number of precursor games (7 in this example) is set to the precursor counter (initial value 0) (0→7). Since the value of the number of precursor games is set in the precursor counter, the precursor flag is set from off to on (off→on).

After that, in the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) 19th to 20th games of SET1 (games with 2 to 1 remaining games at the start of each game) SET1-R2 to R1, 1 is subtracted from the omen counter for each game, and after the omen counter has changed from 7 to 5, the value of the omen counter is not 0 in the season start setting process described with reference to FIG. It is set to 1 (7→6→5→1).

Subsequently, in the second set game (NM2 state: autumn of the first year), the first game of SET2 (the game in which the number of remaining games is 19 at the start of the game) SET2-R20, 1 is subtracted from the omen counter. , the precursor counter changes from 1 to 0 (1→0). Since the precursor counter has reached 0, the precursor flag is set from ON to OFF (ON→OFF).

Also, since the effect state is the NM2 state, 1 is subtracted from the effect state counter in the NM2 state process A, and the effect state counter becomes 2 from 3 (3→2). After that, the first set game (NM2 state: 1st year summer) 19th to 20th games of SET1 (games with 2 to 1 remaining games before the start of each game) SET1-R2 to R1 , 1 is subtracted from the effect state counter for each game, and the effect state counter changes from 2 to 0 (2→1→0). , an initial value of 20 is set in the presentation state counter, and thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the presentation state counter for each game (20→19→...).

According to this example, since the precursor effect is performed over the next period, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort compared to the CZ shift winning (Example 5) shown in FIG. 91(a-2). , it is possible to perform a novel omen effect that has not existed in the past.

<Update example 3 of various counters and flags>
FIG. 92(c) is a diagram showing changes in various counters and flags in chronological order during execution of the predictive effect for CZ shift winning (embodiment 5) described with reference to FIG. 91(a-2).

In the CZ transition winning (embodiment 5) shown in FIG. 91 (a-2), the final set game (NM2 state: winter of the second year) The sign effect is started from the game with 3 remaining games in SETL, and the game +2 The premonition effect is executed over a total of three games. Therefore, in the three games in which the portent effect is executed, the season counter is set to 8, which is a numerical value indicating the season of "winter of the second year".

Also, in the final set game (NM2 state: winter of the second year), the 18th game of SETL (the game with 3 remaining games at the start of the game), CZ transition wins in SETL-R3, and the omen counter is drawn by the omen game number lottery is determined to be 7 (the number of precursor games is 8), and the value of the effect state counter (2 in this example) is set to the precursor counter (initial value 0) (0→2). Since the value of the number of precursor games is set in the precursor counter, the precursor flag is set from off to on (off→on).

After that, the final set game (NM2 state: winter of the second year) 19th to 20th games of SETL (games with 2 to 1 remaining games at the start of each game) SETL-R2 to R1, 1 game Each time, 1 is subtracted from the precursor counter, and the precursor counter changes from 2 to 0 (2→1→0). Since the precursor counter has reached 0, the precursor flag is set from ON to OFF (ON→OFF).

Also, since the effect state is the NM2 state, 1 is subtracted from the effect state counter in the NM2 state process A, and the effect state counter becomes 2 from 3 (3→2). After that, the final set game (NM2 state: winter of the second year) 19th to 20th games of SETL (games with 2 to 1 remaining games at the start of each game) SETL-R2 to R1, 1 game Each time, 1 is subtracted from the effect state counter, and the effect state counter changes from 2 to 0 (2→1→0).

According to this example, since the precursor effect is not performed over the next period or the effect state, compared to the CZ shift winning (embodiment 4) shown in FIG. can perform.

<Omen production>
Next, an example of the portent effect will be described with reference to FIG. 93 .

<Normal production (fake omen production)>
FIG. 93(a) is a diagram showing an example of a normal effect (fake omen effect) in chronological order. This normal effect is composed of a plurality of parts including a first part PT1 and a second part PT2 performed after the first part, and is executed over four games in this example.

The first part PT1 and the second part PT2 are effects executed over one or more games, respectively. The first part PT1 is a production consisting of a scene in which a basin falls over the head of the character of the lord, and is executed over three games. Also, the second part PT2 is an effect consisting of a scene in which the display of the first part PT1 is erased, and is executed in one game.

Note that the first part PT1 of the normal effect in this example has the same contents as the third part PT3 of the precursor effect described later, and the player cannot , it can be said that the normal effect of this example is a false predictive effect (false predictive effect). <Omen Effect (Embodiment 1)> FIG. 93(b) is a diagram showing an example of an omen effect according to Embodiment 1 in chronological order. This premonition effect is composed of a plurality of parts including a third part PT3 and a fourth part PT4 performed after the third part PT3, and is executed over 8 games in this example. The third part PT3 and the fourth part PT4 may be played continuously, or may be played (discontinuously) with one or more games interposed.

A third part PT3 and a fourth part PT4 are effects executed over one or more games, respectively. The third part PT3 is a production consisting of the same (common) scene as the first part PT1 of the normal production shown in FIG. Yes, and runs for 3 games. The following fourth part PT4 is a scene different from the second part PT2 of the normal production shown in FIG. and is executed over 5 games.

Although the fourth part PT4 of this example is a production that indicates a certain result (in this example, the result of winning the confrontation) (a production that suggests the possibility that the player will be given an advantage) On the other hand, the third part PT3 of this example is different in the aspect of presentation in that it is a presentation that does not indicate a certain result (a presentation that does not suggest the possibility of giving the player an advantage). In addition, in the CZ transition winning (embodiment 5) described using FIG. It may be configured to preferentially select (leave) an effect indicating a certain result over an effect not indicating a result.

<Omen production (Example 2)>
FIG. 93(c) is a diagram showing an example of an omen effect according to the second embodiment in chronological order. This premonition effect is composed of a plurality of parts including a third part PT3 and a fifth part PT5 performed after the third part PT3, and is executed over eight games in this example. The third part PT3 and the fifth part PT5 may be played continuously, or may be played (discontinuously) with one or a plurality of games interposed therebetween.

A third part PT3 and a fifth part PT5 are effects executed over one or more games, respectively. The third part PT3 is a production consisting of the same (common) scene as the first part PT1 of the normal production shown in FIG. Yes, and runs for 3 games. The fifth part PT5 consists of a scene different from the second part PT2 of the normal production shown in FIG. Runs throughout the game. The fifth part PT5 of this example is a presentation (a presentation suggesting the possibility of giving the player an advantageous benefit) showing a certain result (in this example, the result of successfully capturing a samurai). On the other hand, the third part PT3 of this example is different in the aspect of presentation in that it is a presentation that does not indicate a certain result (a presentation that does not suggest the possibility of giving the player an advantageous profit). .

<Execution timing of omen effect>
FIG. 93(d) is a diagram showing changes in various counters and flags in chronological order when the portent effect is executed. The third part PT3 of the foreshadowing effect of this example is the same (common) scene as the first part PT1 shown in FIGS. This is an effect consisting of three games in the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) SET1.

On the other hand, the fourth part PT4 consists of a CZ effect that suggests that it is in the CZ state, the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year), the second set game (NM2 state: 1 Fall of year) In SET2, one game is executed.

According to this example, although the portent effect is executed across a plurality of set games, the third part PT3 of the portent effect is completed in the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) SET1, The fourth part PT4, which suggests the CZ state, is executed in the first game of the next second set game (NM2 state: autumn of the first year) SET2, so the foreshadowing production is performed for each set game. The mode can be varied, and the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In the first part PT1, instead of the normal effect, a specific role-related effect indicating that the specific role has been won may be performed. For managing the execution of three types of production, the production of the first part PT1 of (including the premonition production) and the CZ transition notification production that suggests the transition to the CZ state (in the case of winning the CZ transition) Acts as a counter.

<Examples of changes in various productions>
Next, modified examples of various effects will be described.

<Examples of changes to various productions / Omen production>
FIG. 94(a) is a diagram showing a change example of the portent effect. In the sign effect explained using FIG. 93(d), in the second set game (NM2 state: autumn of the first year) SET2, the fourth part PT4 suggesting the CZ state is executed in one game. I gave an example.

When such an omen effect is performed, the season start display processing described with reference to FIG. , a certain character and a balloon are displayed as part PT4-1 of the fourth part PT4 by executing the season start time display processing 1 described with reference to FIG. When the condition is satisfied (in this example, when the third stop operation is accepted), the second part of the fourth part PT4 is displayed by executing the season start time display process 2 described with reference to FIG. 88(c). As the part PT4-2, a notification suggesting the CZ state (in this example, a notification displaying characters "It's CZ" in a balloon) may be performed.

Also, as another part PT4-2 of the fourth part PT4, instead of a notification suggesting that it is in the CZ state (in this example, a notification that displays the characters "It's CZ" in a balloon), or (For example, a notification that indicates that the probability of receiving a special benefit (e.g., points) is high (e.g., a notification that displays the text "This season is a high probability of PT" in a balloon), and the possibility of transitioning to a judgment state. Suggestive notification (for example, a notification that displays the characters "Are you in a judgment state yet?" notification), or notification suggesting that the transition to the AT state has been confirmed (for example, notification by displaying characters "It's AT" in a balloon).

<Examples of changes to various productions/Seasonal production, seasonal display>
FIG. 94(b-1) is a diagram showing an example of changing seasonal effects and seasonal displays. In the seasonal effects and seasonal displays explained using FIG. shows an example of executing the seasonal effect (normal) SE1.

When performing such a seasonal effect or seasonal display, when the first condition is met (in this example, when a lever-on operation is received), a certain character and, as part of the seasonal effect or seasonal display, Display a notification that displays the characters "next" in a balloon, and when the second condition is satisfied (in this example, when the third stop operation is received), a seasonal effect or another part of the seasonal display , a notification that suggests (notice) the details of the effects and benefits that occur in each game in the season (cycle) (in this example, each square in the calendar is regarded as one game, and the effects and benefits that occur in the game (Notification suggesting the contents of the privilege etc. by graphics or symbols) may be performed, and in the next game, the graphics or symbols corresponding to the game may be indicated by an arrow (↓).

According to this example, since it is possible to grasp in advance the contents of effects, benefits, etc. that will occur after the game, even if the game result in the game is not good, the player's desire to play can be maintained. sometimes it is possible.

<Change examples of various effects / CZ shift notification effect>
FIG. 94(b-2) is a diagram showing a modification of the CZ transition notification effect. In the CZ transition notification effect explained with reference to FIG. 90(b-2) and the like, an example of executing the seasonal effect SE4 including the CZ transition notification is shown.

When performing such CZ shift notification, the example of changing the seasonal effect and seasonal display described with reference to FIG. 94(b-1) is applied, and when the second condition is ), as part of the CZ transition notification effect, a notification (notice) that the CZ transition notification effect will occur in each game in the season (cycle) (in this example, each square of the calendar Assuming that one game is played, a notification that suggests a game in which a CZ transition notification effect occurs with a star may be performed.

According to this example, since it is possible to grasp in advance that the CZ shift notification will occur after the game, even if the game result in the game is not good, the player's desire to play can be maintained. may be possible.

<Examples of changes to various productions/Others>
FIG. 94(c) is a diagram showing an example of changing the start timing of the portent effect. In the above embodiment, when the CZ shift is won, an example is shown in which the predictive effect is started from the game in which the CZ shift is won. good.

According to this example, for example, when the CZ transition is won in the final game of the period, the precursor effect is not started in the final game, so that the discomfort caused by the start of the precursor effect in the final game can be eliminated.

In this example, in the game in which the CZ transition is won, instead of the premonitory effect, an effect relating to the specific role, which suggests that the specific role has been won, may be executed. Since the effect related to the specific role also serves as an indication effect suggesting a shift to the CZ state, in the slot machine according to the present example, the first indication effect (including false indication effect), It can be said that three types of precursor effects, ie, the second precursor effect of CZ transition notification effect and the third precursor effect of effect relating to a specific role, are configured to be executable.

<Special game during omen production>
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the special game during the premonition effect will be described. FIG. 95(a) shows the flow of the game in chronological order when the special game is executed in the first set game (NM2 state: first year summer) SET1 explained with reference to FIG. 89(a). It is a diagram.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the common processing for each game, whether or not the condition for executing the high navigation state related processing is met (in the present embodiment, the game state of the game is either RT2 or RT3 or not), and in RT1 and RT4, the processing related to the high navigation state (for example, processing to update various counters such as the effect state counter, the precursor counter, the CZ counter, etc.) is configured not to proceed. there is

In this example, the first set game (NM2 state: 1st year summer) SET1 3rd game (game with 18 remaining games at the start of the game) corresponds to special role 1 or special role 2 Since the symbol combination is displayed, from the next game onwards, the special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) is shifted to the special game state (RT4). In this special game state (RT4), the high navigation state counter is updated (decremented), but the performance state counter is not updated (decremented).

Further, after the special game state (RT4) ends, the transition is made to a replay low probability state (RT1), and even in this replay low probability state (RT1), the high navigation state counter is updated (decremented). However, it is configured so as not to update (subtract) the effect state counter. In addition, in the replay low probability state (RT1), both the high navigation state counter and the effect state counter may be updated (subtracted).

FIG. 95(b) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 90(b-2), and FIG. 95(c) shows the flow of the game in chronological order in the case of shifting to the special game state during execution of the precursor effect. It is a diagram.

In this example, the second set game (NM2 state: autumn of the first year) corresponds to the special role 1 or the special role 2 in the first game of SET2 (the game with 20 remaining games at the start of the game) A symbol combination is displayed, and the special game state (RT4) is entered from the next game. In this special game state (RT4), the high navigation state counter is updated (decremented), but the performance state counter is not updated (decremented).

Further, after the special game state (RT4) ends, the transition is made to a replay low probability state (RT1), and even in this replay low probability state (RT1), the high navigation state counter is updated (decremented). However, it is configured so as not to update (subtract) the effect state counter.

Next, various displays executed in this example will be described. Second set game (NM2 state: first year autumn) SET2 first game (game with 20 remaining games at the start of the game) SET2-R20 , when the first condition is met (in this example, when a lever-on operation is received), a certain character and a balloon are displayed as part of the premonition effect.

However, since the gaming state is the special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3), even if the second condition is established (in this example, when the third stop operation is accepted), the indication effect and other As part of, the notification suggesting that it is in the CZ state (in this example, the notification that displays the characters "CZ" in the balloon) is not started, and instead, the transition to the special game state (RT4) A special game transition notification SP that suggests that has been started.

In the special game transition notification SP of this example, a display that suggests that the set game is interrupted (in this example, a display that includes the characters "during rest") and suggests conditions until returning to the set game (in this example, a display including the characters "until return" and a display showing the number of remaining games and the number of payouts in the special game state (RT4)). This special game transition notification SP ends when the special game state (RT4) ends, or when the conditions for ending the special game state (RT4) are met and a BET operation for the next game is received. (erased). In addition, in the following replay low probability state (RT1), the special game shift notification SP may be continued or terminated (deleted).

<Modified example of set game>
Next, a modification of the set game will be described with reference to FIGS. 96(a-1) to 96(a-3). In the above embodiment, as an example of the "first set game", the first year summer (season counter 2) SET1 in the NM2 state shown in FIG. As an example, autumn of the first year (seasonal counter 3) SET2 in the NM2 state shown in FIG. 88A is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this.

FIG. 96(a-1) is a diagram showing a set game (cycle) according to Modification 1. FIG. The slot machine according to this example is configured to be able to execute five set games of first to fifth set games S1 to S5, and each of these first to fifth set games S1 to S5 is further It consists of a plurality of variable-length (3 to 5 in this example) subset games, and 20 games can be played in each of these subset games. It should be noted that the subset games marked with the letter "J" in the drawing are in the judgment state.

In this example, each of the first to fifth set games S1 to S5 and/or each of the variable-length subset games that constitute the set game is the "set game capable of executing multiple games" according to the present invention. ” corresponds to an example. In addition, in this example, the fifth set game S5 reaching the ceiling is composed of five subset games, but the number of subset games constituting the set game is not limited to this example, for example, one It may consist of a subset game of In addition, the condition for determining whether or not the ceiling is reached is not limited to the number of set games reaching a predetermined number (5 in this example). If the number of games is exceeded, it may be determined to be the ceiling.

FIG. 96(a-2) is a diagram showing a set game (cycle) according to Modification 2. FIG. The slot machine according to this example is configured to be able to execute five set games of first to fifth set games S1 to S5, and each of these first to fifth set games S1 to S5 is further It consists of a plurality of fixed-length (five in this example) subset games, and 20 games can be played in each of these subset games.

In this example, each of the first to fifth set games S1 to S5 and/or each of the fixed-length subset games constituting the set game is the "set game capable of executing multiple games" according to the present invention. ” corresponds to an example.

FIG. 96(a-3) is a diagram showing a set game (cycle) according to Modification 3. FIG. The slot machine according to this example is configured to be able to execute five set games of the first to fifth set games S1 to S5, and in each of these first to fifth set games S1 to S5, a plurality of variable-length game can be executed. The number of games that can be executed in each of the first to fifth set games S1 to S5 is determined based on the game results (eg, internal winning combination and lottery value), etc. For example, 1000 points ( PT) is given (=when 100 games are completed on average in the set game), the set game is ended and the next set game is started.

In this example, each of the first to fifth set games S1 to S5 configured to be able to execute a plurality of variable-length games is an example of the "set game capable of executing multiple games" according to the present invention. Applicable. Note that the game result in this example is not limited to the points based on the lottery value, and may be, for example, the number of times a specific hand is established. When the number of times is exceeded, the set game may be terminated and the next set game may be started. Whether or not to execute the judgment state in each set game may also be determined based on the game result in the set game.

<Modified examples of various tables>
Next, modified examples of various tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 96(b-1) to 96(b-2).

FIG. 96(b-1) is a diagram showing an example of an AT continuation scenario table. In the above embodiment, an example of shifting to the AT2 state via the AT1 state was shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of AT games is set to a fixed value ( For example, after the AT 30) is determined and the AT is started, the AT continuation scenario table shown in FIG. 96(b-1) may be used to determine the number of AT continuation games.

In this example, referring to the AT continuation scenario table, based on the scenario number (in this example, scenarios 1 to 10) and cycle type (in this example, cycle type C, cycle type B, cycle type A, cycle type S) to determine the number of games that the AT will continue to play. For example, in the case of cycle type S, the continuation of AT is determined with a probability of 100%, in the case of cycle type A, the continuation of AT is determined with a probability of 80%, and in the case of cycle type B, it is determined with a probability of 500%. The continuation of AT is determined by probability, and in the case of cycle type C, the continuation of AT is determined with a probability of 20%. Further, when the continuation of the AT is not determined, the number of games to be continued for the AT is determined based on the game result or the like during the AT. For example, if the rare role is internally won, the continuation of the AT is determined with a probability of 100%, and if the special replay is internally elected, the AT is determined with a probability of 80%.

FIG. 96(b-2) is a diagram showing a modified example of the high navigation state scenario table described with reference to FIG. 52(b). In the example described with reference to FIG. 52(b), the high-navi state scenario table is referred to, and the cycle type is set based on the scenario number and cycle at the time of reference, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it determines the continuation scenario of the AT based on the scenario number and period at the time of reference. For example, if the scenario number is scenario 1, low is set as the AT continuation scenario when the cycles are 1, 3 and 4, and medium is set as the AT continuation scenario when the cycles are 2 and 5. If the scenario number is scenario 10, the AT continuation scenario is set to high when the cycle is cycle 1. That is, the smaller the scenario number, the higher the possibility that a low scenario will be selected as the AT continuation scenario, and the greater the scenario number, the higher the possibility that the high scenario will be selected as the AT continuation scenario. Note that an AT continuation scenario may be suggested as the notification at the start of the season.

<Example of changing control of production state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, an example of changing the control of the effect state will be described. FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the rendering state.

In the example described with reference to FIG. 83, the second advantageous game state (eg, AT state) after the first set game executed after shifting to the first advantageous game state (eg, normal state) When the transition is not made, the following second set game can be executed, and the first advantageous game state is shifted to the normal state (for example, low navigation state) without making the second set game executable. Examples have been described that may be configured to allow.

In this example, the first set game after the specific state (eg, CZ state) executed after shifting to the first advantageous gaming state (eg, normal state) (eg, normal (cycle) first time cycle) after the second advantageous gaming state (eg, AT state) when not transitioning to, as shown in FIG. 97 (a-1), the next second set game (eg, normal (cycle) 2nd cycle) can be executed, and as shown in FIG. 97 (a-2), the normal state (for example, low navigation state).

According to this example, the player does not have to worry about the upper limit number of times in the advantageous state, and it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from declining after the transition from the advantageous state to the normal state. In addition, since the first advantageous game state may shift to the normal state, it is possible to easily determine when the game should be stopped and to give the player a sense of security. In addition, it is possible to expand the options of how to proceed with the game (strategy), such as deciding the number of times to aim for a certain game section, stopping the game when a certain game section ends and the advantageous state does not end, etc. can be enhanced.

Further, in this example, the advantageous state (high navigation state) is maintained even after the second advantageous gaming state (AT state) ends, and the first advantageous gaming state (AT state) before the second advantageous gaming state (AT state) is maintained. It may be configured to shift to the game state (normal (cycle)), or may be configured to shift to the first advantageous game state (normal (cycle)) via the withdrawal zone. Also, again, when shifting from the first advantageous gaming state (normal (period)) to the second advantageous gaming state (AT state), the game information in the second advantageous gaming state (AT state) (for example, Whether or not the transition condition is met may be determined according to the number of games played, the total number of game media acquired, etc.).

Also, only when a certain normal state transition condition is established (only), it may be possible to shift from the first advantageous game state to the normal state (low navigation state) without making the second set game executable, As a certain normal state transition condition, for example, when reaching the reset scenario, when winning a special role, when winning the lottery, when reaching the LMT state, the first advantageous game state (or each set game ) reaches a certain number of times, or the total number of acquired game media in the first advantageous game state (or each set game) reaches a certain number. Further, the number of games after the normal (cycle) start after the AT state may be less than the number of normal (cycle) games that are not after the AT state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 97(b-1), when the low navigation state is entered due to a factor other than a change in the set value, the configuration is such that the transition to the high navigation state is followed by a transition to the CZ state. 97 (b-2), when the transition to the low navigation state is caused by a change in the setting value (when certain information is changed or reset (initialized) due to the change in the setting value), the high It may be configured not to shift to the CZ state after shifting to the navigation state.

Also, rather than shifting to the low navigation state due to a factor other than the change in the setting value, the transition to the low navigation state due to a change in the setting value is more likely at a certain timing (for example, at the time of transition to the high navigation state). ) may have a lower transition rate to the CZ state. For example, if the transition rate to CZ state is 100% when transitioning to low navigation state due to a factor other than a change in setting value, the transition rate to CZ state when transitioning to low navigation state due to a change in setting value may be less than 100% (including 0%), or the former may be greater than 0% and the latter may be 0%. Also, in this case, instead of the transition rate to the CZ state, the advantage of the CZ state may be applied.

Also, as shown in FIG. 97(c), when a certain trigger occurs in the high navigation state before shifting to the low navigation state (for example, when a specific role is internally won), the state shifts to the low navigation state. When the navigation state is to be changed, the predictive success effect SE is performed, and when shifting to the high navigation state, the predictive failure effect (not shown) is performed. It may be configured to execute the standby effect WE.

Also, before the CZ effect, an effect indicating the success rate in the CZ state (possibility of shifting to AT) may be performed. Also, when the success rate in the CZ state is low. The precursor effect may be performed in the high navigation state without transitioning to the low navigation state, and the state may be shifted to the CZ state. It doesn't have to be.

<Invention 3>
As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "present invention 3-1") has a plurality of types of identification that can be individually identified. A variable display section (for example, the pattern display window 113 shown in FIG. 1) is provided to allow information to be displayed in a variable manner, and a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game media. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the display result to the variable display section, and a prize can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display section, and a plurality of games are performed. The executable set game is configured to be executable over a plurality of times, and in relation to the execution of the set game a predetermined number of times (for example, based on the execution of the ninth cycle "spring of the third year") 98(a) and 98(c), and judgment states shown in FIGS. 91(b) and 91(a-1). 98 (a) to (c), or the CZ transition lottery shown in FIG. 59), a specific state (eg, FIG. 98 (a) to (c) of the same figure, the CZ state shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, etc.), and the specific state is a state different from the predetermined state. , the transition to the specific state is more advantageous for the player than the transition to the specific state, and the specific state extends over a plurality of the set games. It is configured so as not to be set (configured so that the specific state is not executed across a plurality of set games), and a certain set of the set games of the predetermined number of times Game (hereinafter referred to as "first set game". For example, the first set game SET1 shown in FIGS. 98 (a) to (c), the first set game SET1 shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, etc. ), a set game next to the first set game (hereinafter referred to as "second set game". For example, the second set game SET1 shown in FIG. 98 (a) and (b) And, the second set game SET1) shown in FIGS. 89 to 91 etc. is configured to be able to start, and when the specific state transition lottery is won in the first set game in the state that is not the specific state , If it is possible to shift to the specific state in the first set game (for example, shown in FIG. 98 (a), in the first set game SET1 89 (b-1), (b-2) shown in FIG. 89 (b-1), the case of shifting to the CZ state in the first set game SET1), and in the first set game When it is possible to shift to the specific state in the second set game without shifting (for example, shown in FIG. 98 (b), when shifting to a specific state in the second set game SET2, FIG. 90 (b- 2), shown in FIG. 91(a-2), in the case of shifting to the CZ state in the second set game SET2). It should be noted that FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an outline of Inventions 3-1 and 3-2 of the present application.

In other words, the gaming machine according to Invention 3-1 (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a variable display unit (for example, A symbol display window 113) shown in FIG. A gaming machine that allows a prize to be awarded according to the display result derived to the variable display unit after one game is completed, wherein any one of a plurality of types of states relating to the player's advantage can be selected. Settable state setting means (for example, production state control processing A and production state control processing B shown in FIG. 10), and set game control means (for example, figure 17, high navigation state processing B shown in FIG. 26, etc.), and the set game control means is means capable of executing control to execute the set game multiple times. , the state setting means sets a predetermined state (for example, the figure 98(a), a predetermined state shown in FIG. 98(c), and a judgment state shown in FIGS. Transition lottery (for example, specific state transition lottery shown in FIGS. 98(a) to (c), and CZ transition lottery shown in FIG. 59), a specific state (for example, FIG. 98(a) to the same (c), CZ state shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, etc.), the specific state is a state different from the predetermined state, The transition to the specific state is more advantageous to the player than the transition to the specific state, and the specific state may be set over a plurality of set games. The set game control means is a set game of the set game of the predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "first set game". For example, FIG. 98 (a) ~ same After the first set game SET1 shown in FIG. (c) and the first set game SET1 shown in FIGS. Second set game ". For example, Figure 98 (a), the second set game SET1 shown in the same figure (b), Figures 89 to 91, etc. The second set game SET1) shown in is a means capable of executing the control to start, and when the specific state transition lottery is won in the first set game in the state that is not in the specific state, the first When it is possible to shift to the specific state in the set game (for example, when shifting to the specific state in the first set game SET1 shown in FIG. 98 (a), FIG. 89 (b-1), the same figure (b- 2), when shifting to the CZ state in the first set game SET1), and when it is possible to shift to the specific state in the second set game without shifting in the first set game (for example, Shown in FIG. 98 (b), when the transition to the specific state in the second set game SET2, or shown in FIG. 90 (b-2), FIG. 91 (a-2), CZ state in the second set game SET2 A game machine characterized in that it is configured so that there is a case of shifting to.

Conventionally, in a game machine capable of executing a cyclic performance that gives a benefit to a player when a ceiling cycle is reached, when a CZ transition lottery is won at the end of the cycle (for example, the final game of the cycle), the transition to the CZ state is made in the cycle. If this happens, the CZ state may cause the player to feel that the time until the ceiling period is too long. In such a game machine, by updating the periodic G number counter even during the CZ state (by advancing the periodic game), it is possible to shift to the next periodic game even during the CZ state. A method to do so is also conceivable. However, when such a method is adopted, when returning to the periodic game from the CZ state, there is a possibility that the number of remaining games in the periodic game will be significantly reduced. There was a problem that I could not have expectations for. Moreover, when the mode of the CZ state is made exclusive, there is a possibility that the feeling of playing a periodic game may be spoiled.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention 3-1, when the specific state transition lottery is won in the first set game, there is a case where it is possible to shift to the specific state in the second set game, so the ceiling period until It is possible to reduce the feeling that time is going away, and to maintain the player's desire to play. In addition, the set game after the specific state can be made to have expectations.

Further, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "present invention 3-2") variably displays a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable. A variable display unit (for example, the symbol display window 113 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a game medium. A set capable of executing a plurality of games, in which one game is completed by deriving a display result to a display part and a prize can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display part. The game is configured to be able to be executed a plurality of times, and in relation to the execution of the set game a predetermined number of times (for example, based on the execution of the ninth cycle "spring of the third year") 98(a) and 98(c), and judgment states shown in FIGS. 91(b) and 91(a-1)). State transition lottery (for example, specific state transition lottery shown in FIGS. 98 (a) to (c), and CZ transition lottery shown in FIG. 59), a specific state (for example, FIG. 98 (a) to 89 to 91), and the specific state is a state different from the predetermined state. The transition to the specific state is more advantageous for the player than the transition to the specific state, and the specific state is set over a plurality of the set games. (It is configured so that the specific state is not executed across a plurality of set games), and a set game out of the set games of the predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "First set game".For example, after the first set game SET1 shown in Figure 98 (a) ~ Figure (c), the first set game SET1) shown in Figure 89 ~ Figure 91 etc., A certain set game next to the first set game (hereinafter referred to as "second set game". For example, the second set game SET1 shown in FIG. 98 (a) and the same figure (b), or FIG. ~ The second set game SET1) shown in Fig. 91 etc. is configured to be able to start, and when the specific state transition lottery is won in the first set game in the state that is not the specific state, the first If it is possible to shift to the specific state in the set game (for example, shown in FIG. 98 (a), in the first set game SET1 to the specific state When shifting, or when shifting to the CZ state in the first set game SET1 shown in FIG. 89 (b-1) and (b-2)), without shifting in the first set game When it is possible to shift to the specific state in the second set game (for example, shown in FIG. 98 (b), when shifting to a specific state in the second set game SET2, FIG. 90 (b-2), FIG. 91 (a-2), when shifting to the CZ state in the second set game SET2), and before shifting to the specific state, whether to shift to the specific state (For example, a specific effect shown in FIG. 98(b), or an indication effect shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, etc.) is configured to be executable.

In other words, the gaming machine according to Invention 3-2 of the present application (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a variable display unit (for example, A symbol display window 113) shown in FIG. A gaming machine that allows a prize to be awarded according to the display result derived to the variable display unit after one game is completed, wherein any one of a plurality of types of states relating to the player's advantage can be selected. Settable state setting means (for example, production state control processing A and production state control processing B shown in FIG. 10), and set game control means (for example, figure 17, high navigation state processing B shown in FIG. 26, etc.), and the set game control means is means capable of executing control to execute the set game multiple times. , the state setting means sets a predetermined state (for example, the figure 98(a), a predetermined state shown in FIG. 98(c), and a judgment state shown in FIGS. Transition lottery (for example, specific state transition lottery shown in FIGS. 98(a) to (c), and CZ transition lottery shown in FIG. 59), a specific state (for example, FIG. 98(a) to the same (c), CZ state shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, etc.), the specific state is a state different from the predetermined state, The transition to the specific state is more advantageous to the player than the transition to the specific state, and the specific state may be set over a plurality of set games. The set game control means is a set game of the set game of the predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "first set game". For example, FIG. 98 (a) ~ same After the first set game SET1 shown in FIG. (c) and the first set game SET1 shown in FIGS. Second set game ". For example, Figure 98 (a), the second set game SET1 shown in the same figure (b), Figures 89 to 91, etc. The second set game SET1) shown in is a means capable of executing the control to start, and when the specific state transition lottery is won in the first set game in the state that is not in the specific state, the first When it is possible to shift to the specific state in the set game (for example, when shifting to the specific state in the first set game SET1 shown in FIG. 98 (a), FIG. 89 (b-1), the same figure (b- 2), when shifting to the CZ state in the first set game SET1), and when it is possible to shift to the specific state in the second set game without shifting in the first set game (for example, Shown in FIG. 98 (b), if the transition to a specific state in the second set game SET2, or shown in FIG. 90 (b-2), FIG. 91 (a-2), CZ state in the second set game SET2 ), and before transitioning to the specific state, a specific effect (for example, a specific effect shown in FIG. 98(b) or a 89 to 91, etc.) are configured to be executable.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention 3-2, when the specific state transition lottery is won in the first set game, there is a case where it is possible to shift to the specific state in the second set game, so the ceiling period until It is possible to reduce the feeling that time is going away, and to maintain the player's desire to play. In addition, the set game after the specific state can be made to have expectations.

Note that the gaming machines according to the inventions 3-1 and 3-2 of the present application are not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, the "predetermined state" according to the present invention is not limited to the judge state, and may be a state including both the judge state and the AT state, or a state including both the judge state and the non-AT state. There may be. Also, the "predetermined number of times" according to the present invention may be a fixed value or a variable value determined by lottery or the like.

In addition, the "specific state" according to the present invention is not limited to the CZ state, for example, a state ( Specialized point acquisition state) and items for making the predetermined lottery (point acquisition lottery) advantageous in the set game (for example, double the point acquisition, increase the percentage of points that can be acquired, target role It may be in a state where it is possible to acquire a state in which a lottery (for example, an AT direct hit lottery) is performed which is not performed in the set game.

Also, the first set game and the second set game are not limited to set games that are executed continuously, even if another set game is executed between the first set game and the second set game good. That is, the second set game may be a certain set game after the first set game.

Also, when the specific state transition lottery is won at the end of the first set game (for example, several games including the final game), the second set game is more specific than the first set game It may be configured to facilitate the transition to the state.

With such a configuration, when the specific state transition lottery is won at the end of the first set game, the transition to the specific state is likely to occur in the second set game, so the time to the ceiling cycle becomes longer. Such feeling can be alleviated, and the player's desire to play can be maintained.

Further, when winning the specific state transition lottery in the final game in the first set game, it may be configured to be able to transition to the specific state in the second set game.

With such a configuration, when the specific state transition lottery is won in the final game in the first set game, there is a case where it is possible to shift to a specific state in the second set game, so the time until the ceiling cycle It is possible to reduce the feeling of being away from the player, and to maintain the player's desire to play.

Also, when the specific state transition lottery is won in the final game in the first set game, it is possible to shift to the specific state in the second set game, and the specific state is completed before the second A notification that can suggest that it is the next set game of one set game (for example, shown in FIG. 90 (b-2), seasonal production SD that can recognize that the season is “autumn in the first year”) It may be configured to be executable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the set game is progressing and that the ceiling period is approaching, so that the player's desire to play can be maintained.

Also, when the specific state transition lottery is won in the final game in the first set game, it is possible to shift to the specific state in the second set game, and the second set after the specific state ends It is configured to be able to execute a game in a game, and the set game of the predetermined number of times after the second set game (hereinafter referred to as "final set game". For example, FIG. c), when the specific state transition lottery is won in the final game in the final set game SETL) shown in FIG. 91 (for example, when the specific state transition lottery is won in the final set game shown in FIG. Before shifting to the predetermined state, the predetermined state (for example, shown in FIG. 98(c)) is made without making the game in the final set game executable after the specific state is completed. It may be configured to be able to shift to a predetermined state or a judgment state JS shown in FIG.

With such a configuration, when the specific state transition lottery is won in the final game, the state is shifted to the specific state before shifting to the predetermined state, and the game in the final set game is started after the specific state is completed. can be shifted to the predetermined state without being executable, the desire to play increased in the specific state can be maintained up to the predetermined state without diminishing, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased.

In addition, control to shift to one of a plurality of states including the operating means and the advantageous game state (for example, the advantageous game state shown in FIG. 98 (a) and the AT1 state shown in FIG. 91 (b)) means (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3), and the advantageous gaming state is controlled by operation information (for example, operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 8, shown in FIG. 36(b), etc. Information that can identify the stop position, stop order, stop timing, etc. of each reel, such as operation navigation using the effect image display device 157). , AT other than the AT1 state, and the judge state), the game state can be shifted to the advantageous game state. A certain notification that can suggest the degree of expectation (for example, the point notification PG shown in FIG. 98(d), the notification including the characters "This cycle is easy to accumulate PT", and other graphics , symbols or colors) can be executed, and in the set game, the certain notification can be executed, and the notification mode of the certain notification being executed can be changed, It may be constructed such that the degree of expectation for transition to the advantageous game state suggested by the certain notification is higher when the specific state is shifted than when it is not shifted to the specific state in the set game.

For the player aiming to reach the ceiling period, the transition to the specific state may cause a negative feeling because the player will be far away from the specific state by the number of games played to digest the specific state. When the state is shifted to the state, the shift expectation degree is easily notified, so that the desire to continue playing the set game after the end of the specific state can be improved while suppressing the negative emotion.

Also, in a certain period after the end of the first set game (for example, the first game of the second set game), the notification of the contents of the second set game (hereinafter referred to as "first notification" For example, as shown in Fig. 90 (b-2), a seasonal effect SD capable of recognizing that the season is "autumn of the first year" can be executed. When the specific state transition lottery is won in the game, notification of content suggesting transition to the specific state in the certain period (hereinafter referred to as "second notification". For example, shown in FIG. 98 (e) It may be configured to be able to execute the CZ shift notification and the seasonal effect SE4 including the CZ shift notification shown in FIG. 89(b-2). In addition, the "a certain period" according to the present invention is not limited to the first game of the second set game, for example, in a certain period in a certain state between the first set game and the second set game There may be.

If the game that wins the specific state transition lottery and the game that transitions to the specific state are separated, there is a problem that a sense of stagnation occurs, and in the configuration where the specific state transition lottery is performed by winning a rare role, there are problems. Although there is a problem that the player who sees it is given a sense of distrust, such a configuration can reduce the distrust. In addition, by performing the first notification and the second notification, the flow of the game is not disturbed compared to the case where either one is performed, and the player can comfortably proceed with the set game. By performing notification in a certain period after the end of the first set game, it is possible to stimulate the desire to play the next set game and promote the operation of the game machine.

Further, when the second notification is not performed in the certain period, in the second set game, it may be configured not to shift to the specific state based on the game result in the first set game. . Further, when the second notification is performed in the certain period, the first notification may not be performed in the second set game after the specific state. With such a configuration, the player is not agitated more than necessary.

Further, when the second notification is performed in the certain period, a part of the first notification may be executable in the second set game after the specific state. With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the content related to the set game, but the player is not unnecessarily provoked.

In addition, in the specific state (for example, CZ state), by executing a production (for example, CZ production) that suggests that the specific state It may be configured so that it is not possible to comprehend the fact that it is "Autumn". With such a configuration, it is possible to concentrate on the game in the specific state without worrying about the set game, and before shifting to the specific state, attention can be paid to the notification of the contents related to the set game.

Further, it may be possible to win (or win) a special role (for example, a real bonus, a role bonus) in the advantageous state. Also, when the special role is won (or won) in a certain game (for example, the first game) of the second set game, the first notification or the second notification is not performed. You may

In addition, the first notification is a notification composed of a plurality of parts including a first part and a second part performed after the first part, and the second notification is a notification composed of a first part and a second part performed after the first part The notification consists of multiple parts including a third part and a fourth part that follows the third part, and the first part and the third part contain the same notification content. (For example, the notification PT4-1 including the display of a certain character and a balloon shown in FIG. 94(a), and the notification including the display of a certain character and a balloon three stops before, shown in FIG. 98). Yes, the second part is a notification that suggests that it is the second set game (for example, a notification including the display of characters "PT high probability in this season" shown in FIG. 94 (a), 98, and the fourth part is a notification that suggests a transition to the specific state (for example, FIG. 94 (a ), the notification PT4-2 including the display of characters "It's CZ", or the CZ shift notification) shown in FIG. 98(e).

With such a configuration, since a part of the first notification and the second notification includes the same notification content, even when the first notification is performed, the expectation for the second notification is generated. In some cases, it is possible to make the player hold the player and increase the player's desire to play the game, and to prevent the player from overlooking the notification. Further, by performing the notification, the first set game and the second set game can be given sharpness.

Further, a specific effect game number determining means (for example, a sign game number lottery) for determining the number of games in which the specific effect (for example, a sign effect) is executed is provided, and the specific state transition is performed in the final game in the first set game. When the lottery is won, the number of games determined by the specific effect game number determining means in the first set game (for example, the number of precursor games) is the remaining number of games in the first set game (for example, the effect state counter), it may be configured to be able to shift to the specific state in the second set game.

Further, when the specific state transition lottery is won in the final game in the first set game, the number of games (for example, the number of precursor games) determined by the specific effect game number determination means in the first set game , when it is larger than the number of remaining games in the first set game (for example, the production state counter), the number of games in which the specific production is executed is set to the number of remaining games in the first set game. may be configured to With such a configuration, it is possible to execute all of the specific effects in the rest of the game, and it is possible to provide a natural effect.

In addition, the specific effect is a second specific effect in which a series of effects are performed over a plurality of games until a conclusion is drawn (for example, the fourth part PT4 shown in FIG. 93(b), or the 93(b) and 93(c)). Further, the specific effect is a first specific effect executed before the second specific effect is executed (for example, the third part PT3 shown in FIG. 93(b) and FIG. 93(c) ) (for example, an indication effect shown in FIGS. 93(b) and 93(c)). Further, when the specific state transition lottery is won in the final game in the first set game, the second specific effect may not be executed in the first set game. With such a configuration, since it is not necessary to perform an effect over a plurality of games, the number of precursor games can be easily adjusted (reduced), and a comfortable effect can be provided.

In addition, a plurality of types of second specific effects (for example, precursor effects shown in FIGS. 93(b) and (c)) are provided, and the first specific effects (for example, FIGS. 93(b) and (c)) are provided. 3) may be a common (identical) effect executed before the second specific effect is executed. In addition, the first specific effect is common ( same). Also, the second specific effect may not be executed after the first specific effect.

In addition, if the special role is won (or won) during the execution of the first type of specific effect (for example, the main omen effect), a notification that suggests that the special role has been won (or won) , the specific effect may be resumed from the continuation. In addition, if the special role is won (or won) during the execution of the second type of specific effect (for example, fake omen effect), notification suggesting that the special role has been won (or won) , the specific effect may be resumed from the continuation (or may not be resumed). Further, when power is cut off during execution of the first kind of specific effect (for example, main precursor effect), the specific effect may be resumed from the continuation after power is restored. In addition, when power is cut off during execution of the second type of specific effect (for example, false portent effect), the specific effect may be resumed from the continuation after power is restored (or may not be restarted).

Further, when the specific state transition lottery is won in the first set game, the number of games (for example, the number of precursor games) determined by the specific effect game number determination means in the first set game is When it is larger than the number of remaining games in one set game (for example, production state counter), the second specific production in the first set game (for example, the fourth part PT4 shown in FIG. 93 (b) Or, even if the number of games that can be executed in the fifth part PT5) shown in FIG. 93(c) remains, the first specific effect is executed without executing the second specific effect. may be configured.

Also, when winning (or winning) a specific role in the first set game, it may be configured to be able to shift to the specific state in the second set game, and in this case, the specific state , a specific effect (for example, an omen effect) regarding whether to transition to the specific state may be executed. In addition, when winning (or winning) a specific role in the first set game, notification (for example, notification of light by light output means such as LED, speaker, etc.) 2) may be performed by the sound output means), and in this case, the notification may be terminated before the second set game is started.

Further, when the specific state transition lottery is won in the first set game, the profit given to the player in the specific state becomes larger than the profit given to the player in the first set game. For example, the probability of giving the privilege to the player in the specific state is higher than the probability of giving the privilege (for example, AT, item) to the player in the first set game It may be higher, and the number of benefits given to the player in the specific state may be larger than the number of benefits (for example, the number of points) given to the player in the first set game.

Further, the advantageous game state (for example, AT1 state) may be configured so that a set game capable of executing a plurality of games can be executed over a plurality of times. Also, in the advantageous game state, when the specific state transition lottery is won in the first set game, while it is possible to shift to the specific state in the first set game, in the second set game It may be configured not to shift to the specific state.

Moreover, you may perform the production|presentation which suggests that it is the said final set game. In addition, after executing the production suggesting that it is the final set game, if the specific state transition lottery is won in the final set game, the specific production (for example, the premonition production) is not executed. good too. Further, when an effect suggesting that the game is the final set game is executed, the effect suggesting a shift to the predetermined state (for example, judge state) may not be performed.

In addition, a special effect different from the specific effect (for example, an effect suggesting the addition of an item) is configured to be executable, and the specific state transition lottery is won in the first set game, and the specific effect (for example, an omen When a performance is executed, the special performance may be executed first when the conditions for starting the execution of the special performance are established before the specific performance is executed.

[Embodiment 4]
A slot machine according to Embodiment 4 of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

In the fourth embodiment, in principle, only the configuration different from the game machines according to the first to third embodiments will be described in order to avoid redundant description. 99 to 123 are basically used only for the explanation of the fourth embodiment, and even if overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the The code shown in 123 has priority.

<AT system state transition>
FIGS. 99(a) and (b) are diagrams showing the effect state in each game state of the AT system. Each game state of the AT system is subdivided and managed as shown in FIG. 99(a), which is called an effect state. Specifically, the production state of the low navigation state is the normal state, and the production state of the high navigation state is the normal state, the final announcement state, the AT judge state, the withdrawal state, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state. there is Note that the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state are, in principle, states in which the number of paid balls increases. Regarding the transition of these production states in the fourth embodiment, among the transitions of the production state described with reference to FIG. It differs in that a route from the AT judge state to the normal game state is provided.

<Specific example of AT system state transition>
A specific example of the transition from the normal game state to the AT1 state among the transitions of the state of the AT system will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 100(a) is a diagram arranging states passed through in the transition from the normal game state to the AT1 state in order from the left, and FIGS. 100(b) and 100(c) are diagrams showing specific examples of the transition.

The normal state is more advantageous than the normal game state (low-navigation state) regarding the notification of the operation information of the operation means, and is configured to be able to execute a set game that can execute a predetermined number of games over a plurality of times. As shown in FIG. 100(a), the normal state of this example is composed of NM1 state, NM2 state, NM3 state, and NM4 state, and NM2 state further includes season 1, season 2, season 3, and season 4. Consists of In the NM4 state, the number of games played may be long or short.

Here, the "operation information" is, for example, operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 8, operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. It is information that can identify the stop position, stop order, stop timing, etc.

Also, as shown in FIG. 100(a), the AT1 state of this example has two types, AT1 type "high" and AT1 type "low", and this AT1 type is determined by the above-mentioned AT type lottery. .

In the example shown in FIG. 100(b), the effect state shifts in the order of normal game state→normal state→AT judge state→final announcement state→AT1 state (low or high), and in the normal state, NM1 state is executed. After that, the set game (in this example, NM2 state (season 1→...→season 4)→NM3 state) is executed over a plurality of cycles (here, 4 cycles). The set game in the normal state is not limited to this example, and for example, "NM1 state→NM2 state (season 1→...→season 4)→NM3 state" may be set as the set game. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 100(c), the NM4 state is interrupted and executed in the middle of the NM2 state (between seasons 2 and 3) in the 4th round of the set game. <Various Tables> Next, various tables provided in the slot machine 100 will be described in detail.

<Lottery table for high navigation state scenario determination>
FIG. 101(a) is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for determining a high navigation state scenario. In this high-navi state scenario determination lottery table, the vertical axis represents setting values (settings 1 to 6 in this example), and the horizontal axis represents scenario numbers (scenarios 1 to 6 in this example).

The main control unit 300 refers to this high-navigation state scenario determination lottery table in the high-navigation state scenario lottery of the NM1 state process B, which will be described later, and selects the scenario number (high-navigation state scenario). For example, when the setting value is setting 1, scenario 1 is selected with a probability of 50/100, and when the setting value is setting 2, scenario 1 is selected with a probability of 45/100, and the setting value is set. In the case of 3, scenario 1 is selected with a probability of 40/100, when the set value is set to 4, scenario 1 is selected with a probability of 35/100, and when the set value is set to 5, Scenario 1 is selected with a probability of 30/100, and if the set value is set to 6, scenario 1 is selected with a probability of 25/100.

In the high navigation state scenario determination lottery table according to this example, scenario 2 is more likely to be selected when the set value is an odd number than when the set value is an even number (the winning probability is higher), and scenario 5 is more likely to be selected when the set value is an odd number. Even numbers are more likely to be selected (higher probability of winning) than the case of , Scenario 4 is more likely to be selected (higher probability of winning) as the set value is larger, and Scenarios 3 and 6 are more likely to be selected (higher probability of winning) regardless of the set value. Winning probabilities are the same. Note that the relationship between the set value and the winning probability of the scenario number is not limited to this example. A plurality of winning probabilities may be the same regardless of the set value.

Also, the lower the set value, the higher the ceiling rate (the probability that the value of the period counter, which will be described later, reaches the ceiling period value (4 in this example)). Conversely, the higher the set value, the higher the ceiling rate. You can make it Also, the ceiling rate may be higher when the setting value is an odd number than when the setting value is an even number, and conversely, when the setting value is an even number, the ceiling rate may be higher than when the setting value is an odd number. . Also, if some condition (e.g. winning a direct hit lottery when internally winning a rare role) is established, the state is shifted to the AT judge state regardless of the value of the cycle counter, and if this condition is not established, the cycle counter is established. It may be arranged not to shift to the AT judge state until the value of reaches the ceiling period value.

<High navigation state scenario table>
FIG. 101(b) is a diagram showing an example of a high navigation state scenario table. In this high-navi state scenario table, the vertical axis represents scenario numbers (scenarios 1 to 6 in this example), and the horizontal axis represents cycles (cycles 1 to 4 in this example).

The main control unit 300 refers to this high-navigation state scenario table in the period type setting of the period start setting process to be described later, and based on the scenario number and period at the time of reference, the period type (in this example, period type C , period type B, period type A, period type S) are set. For example, if the scenario number is scenario 1, cycle type C is set when the cycle is 1 to 3. If the scenario number is scenario 2, the cycle type C is set when the cycle is 1 or 2, and the cycle type B is set when the cycle is 3. If the scenario number is scenario 6, the period type S is set when the period is period 1, and the period type A is set when the period is periods 2 and 3.

<AT judge state transition rate>
FIG. 101(c) is a diagram showing an example of an AT judge state transition rate. In this figure, the vertical axis represents the cycle types (cycle types S, A, B, and C in this example).

The main control unit 300 refers to the cycle type in the AT judge state transition lottery of the cycle start setting process to be described later, and sets whether or not to shift to the AT judge state based on this AT judge state transition rate (AT judge set the state transition reservation flag to ON).

<Ratio of seasonally favorable conditions>
FIG. 101(d) is a diagram showing an example of setting rates for seasonally advantageous states. In this figure, the vertical axis represents cycle types (cycle types S, A, B, and C in this example), and the horizontal axis represents seasons (corresponding to seasons 1 to 4 and season counters 1 to 4 in this example). represent.

The main control unit 300 refers to the cycle type and the seasonal counter in the seasonal advantage transition lottery of the season start setting process, which will be described later, and sets the seasonal advantage (seasonal advantage flag is set) based on the setting rate of the season advantage. on).

<Icon type and selection rate>
FIG. 101(e) is a diagram showing an example of icon types and selection rates. In this figure, the vertical axis represents the types of icons (in this example, six types of icons J1 to J3 and R1 to R3), and the horizontal axis represents the functions of the icons. Icon selection rate, icon selection rate by lottery when the icon specialization state is set in the AT judge state.

The main control unit 300 determines the acquired icon (updates the AT right information) based on the setting ratio shown in this figure in the acquired icon lottery of the icon acquired point update process and the acquired icon lottery of the AT judge status process A, which will be described later. do.

<Additional game lottery table>
FIG. 101(f) is a diagram showing an example of a number-of-additional-games lottery table. In this number-of-additional-games lottery table, the vertical axis represents the number of additional games.

The main control unit 300 sets the number of additional games by referring to a table corresponding to the state of the icon specialization state transition reservation flag in the additional game number lottery of the NM4 state start setting process described later. For example, when the icon specialization state transition reservation flag is off, the number of additional games is set to 3 with a probability of 80/100, the number of additional games is set to 5 with a probability of 10/100, and the number of additional games is set to 5 with a probability of 10/100. Set 10 to the number of additional games with a probability. When the icon-specific state transition reservation flag is ON, the number of additional games is set to 10 with a probability of 90/100, and the number of additional games is set to 20 with a probability of 10/100.

<AT state transition rate and AT promotion rate>
FIG. 102(a) is a diagram showing an example of the success rate (AT state transition rate) and AT promotion rate in the AT judge state.

The main control unit 300 determines whether or not to shift to the AT state (sets the AT shift reservation flag to ON) based on the success rate shown in this drawing in the AT shift lottery of the AT judge state process A to be described later. Also, if the AT transfer lottery is won, the suitability of the AT promotion lottery is determined based on the promotion rate shown in this figure. It should be noted that the probabilities shown in this figure are the values when there is no icon, and these probabilities are configured to change when the icon is obtained separately.

<Icon Acquisition Point Lottery Table>
FIG. 102(b) is a diagram showing an example of an icon acquisition point lottery table. In this icon acquisition point lottery table, the vertical axis represents condition devices, and the horizontal axis represents points to be added.

The main control unit 300 determines the additional value of the icon acquisition points by referring to the table corresponding to the effect state and the flag state in the icon acquisition point lottery of the icon acquisition point update process described later. For example, if the internal lottery is lost when referring to Table 1, 1 is added to the icon acquisition point with a probability of 90/100, and 3 is added to the icon acquisition point with a probability of 10/100. Further, for example, when the replay is internally won with reference to Table 3, 2 is added to the icon acquisition points with a probability of 20/100, and 6 is added to the icon acquisition points with a probability of 80/100.

<Suggestion display contents during additional game>
FIG. 102(c) is a diagram showing an example of the content of the suggestion display and the lottery probability during the additional game (NM4 state). In this figure, the vertical axis represents the types of suggestion display (displays 1 to 20), and the horizontal axis represents the contents of suggestions and setting values.

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the setting value and the random number in the suggestive display lottery of the NM4 state display process, which will be described later, and selects the suggestive display based on the probability shown in this figure. For example, when the setting value is setting 1, display 1 is selected with a probability of 10/100, and display 2 is selected with a probability of 2/100. For example, when the setting value is setting 3, display 1 is selected with a probability of 10/100, display 2 is selected with a probability of 2/100, and display 3 is selected with a probability of 10/100.

<Details of each state suggestion display>
FIG. 102(d) is a diagram showing an example of the content of the suggestive display in each state other than during the additional game (NM4 state). In this figure, the vertical axis represents the type of suggestion display, and the horizontal axis represents the content and timing of the suggestion.

The first sub-control unit 400, in the other effect control processing (step S3302) of the first sub-control unit effect control processing described using FIG. may be executed. For example, when transitioning to the high-navigation state, a suggestion as to whether or not to enter the icon-specific state and a suggestion as to the type of scenario may be performed. Also, at the start of the season (at the start of the NM2 state and at the time of updating the season counter), there are cases in which suggestions of a seasonal advantageous state, a suggestion of an AT transition rate, and a suggestion of a transition to the AT judge state in the cycle are executed. Also, at the start of the cycle (at the start of NM2), there are cases where a suggestion of transition to the AT judge state in the cycle is executed. In addition, regarding these suggestions, a plurality of suggestions may be executed in the same game.

<High navigation state processing A>
Next, high navigation state processing A in step S405 of FIG. 15(a) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the flow of the high navigation state process A according to the fourth embodiment, and corresponds to the high navigation state process A according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 17 above.

In the high navigation state process A according to the fourth embodiment, steps S808 and S809 are added to the high navigation state process A according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in step S808, it is determined whether or not the production state is the AT judge state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S809, and if not, the process proceeds to step S810. In step S809, AT judge state processing A (details will be described later) is executed.

<Normal state processing A>
Next, normal state processing A in step S803 of FIG. 103 will be described using FIG. FIG. 104 is a flow chart showing the flow of the normal state processing A according to the fourth embodiment, and corresponds to the normal state processing A according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 57 above.

In the normal state process A according to the fourth embodiment, steps S1025 and S1026 are added to the normal state process A according to the second embodiment described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in step S1025, it is determined whether or not the NM state is the NM3 state. advances to step S1026 to execute NM4 state processing A (details will be described later).

<NM1 state processing A>
Next, the NM1 state processing A will be explained using FIG. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the flow of NM1 state processing A (step S1021) in normal state processing A described using FIG.

In the NM1 state processing A according to this example, the processing of step S1035 is applied instead of the processing of steps S1032 and S1033 of the NM1 state processing A described using FIG.

Specifically, in step S1035, icon acquisition point update processing (details will be described later) is executed.

<NM2 state processing A>
Next, the NM2 state processing A will be explained using FIG. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the flow of NM2 state processing A (step S1023) in normal state processing A described using FIG. Note that the NM2 state process A according to this example is a process that replaces the NM2 state process A described with reference to FIG.

In step S1041, 1 is subtracted from the effect state counter, and in the next step S1042, it is determined whether or not the season shortening condition (for example, internal winning of minor combination 3, hereinafter referred to as rare combination) is established, If it is established, the process proceeds to step S1043, and if not established, the process proceeds to step S1045. It should be noted that this season shortening condition is not limited to being established by internally winning some role, but may be established by a lottery other than the internal lottery for the role, and if an internal lottery is won for any role It may be established by lottery, and arbitrary conditions can be adopted. Moreover, one such condition may be provided, or a plurality of such conditions may be provided.

In step S1043, the production state counter is set to 0, and in the next step S1044, the NM4 state transition schedule flag is set to ON, and then the process proceeds to step S1045. In this embodiment, when the season shortening condition is satisfied, the effect state counter is set to 0, and the period corresponding to the value of the season counter ends (in terms of effect, the season ends). end condition (hereinafter referred to as season end condition) is also satisfied. In this case, the season shortening condition can also be said to be the season ending condition. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, the value of the effect state counter may be decremented more than usual when the season shortening condition is met. In this case, the season does not necessarily end when the season shortening condition is met, but the period corresponding to the value of the season counter is shortened.

In step S1045, icon acquisition point update processing (details will be described later) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1046. In step S1046, the NM2 state process A ends after the other NM2 state process A is executed.

<NM3 state processing A>
Next, NM3 state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the flow of NM3 state processing A (step S1024) in normal state processing A described using FIG. Note that the NM3-state process A according to this example is a process that replaces the NM3-state process A described with reference to FIG.

At step S1051, 1 is subtracted from the effect state counter, at the next step S1052, icon acquisition point update processing (details will be described later) is executed, and at next step S1053, other NM3 state processing A is executed, then NM3 Terminate state processing A.

<NM4 state processing A>
Next, NM4 state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the flow of NM4 state processing A (step S1026) in normal state processing A described using FIG.

At step S1054, 1 is subtracted from the performance state counter, and at the next step S1055, after executing other NM4 state processing A, the NM4 state processing A is terminated.

<Icon Acquisition Point Update Processing>
Next, icon acquisition point update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 109 shows icon acquisition point update processing (step S1035) in the NM1 state processing A described using FIG. 105, icon acquisition point update processing (step S1045) in the NM2 state processing A described using FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of icon acquisition point update processing (step S1052) in NM3 state processing A described using .

In step S1061, it is determined whether or not the presentation state is normal, and if so, the process proceeds to step S1062, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1067. At step S1062, it is determined whether or not the NM state is the NM1 state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S1063 to set the icon acquisition point lottery table 1 shown in FIG. 102(b), and the process proceeds to step S1068. . At step S1064, it is determined whether or not the seasonally advantageous state flag is on. If so, the process advances to step S1066 to set the icon acquisition point lottery table 3 shown in FIG. 102(b), and the process advances to step S1068. In step S1067, the icon acquisition point lottery table 4 shown in FIG. 102(b) is set, and the process proceeds to step S1068.

In step S1068, an icon acquisition point lottery is performed based on the set icon acquisition point lottery table, and the result of this lottery is added to the icon acquisition points in subsequent step S1069.

In step S1070, it is determined whether or not the icon acquisition points are equal to or greater than a predetermined value. In step S1071, a lottery for the acquired icon is executed, and in step S1072, the AT right information corresponding to the icon acquired by this lottery is updated. In the following step S1073, a predetermined value is subtracted from the icon acquisition points, and the process proceeds to step S1074. In step S1074, the icon acquisition point update process is terminated after executing other icon acquisition point update processes.

<AT judge status processing A>
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the AT judge status process A will be explained. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of AT judge state processing A (step S809) of high navigation state processing A described using FIG.

In step S1081, 1 is subtracted from the effect state counter, and in the next step S1082, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. goes to step S1086.

In step S1083, it is determined whether or not the icon specialization state flag is ON. In step S1084, a lottery for an acquired icon is executed, and if an icon is acquired by this lottery, the AT right information is further updated, and the process proceeds to step S1085. In step S1085, the above-described icon acquisition point update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to the next step S1096.

In step S1086, it is determined whether or not the AT transition lottery executed flag is off, and if so, the process proceeds to step S1087, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1096. In step S1087, an AT shift lottery is executed based on the AT right information, and in the next step S1088, the AT shift lottery executed flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S1089. In the fourth embodiment, the AT transition lottery executed flag is used, and the AT transition lottery in the AT judge state is executed only once. Related lottery) may be executed, or the AT shift lottery may be executed multiple times in the AT judge state.

In step S1089, it is determined whether or not the AT shift lottery in step S1087 has been won, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1090, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1096. In step S1090, the AT shift reservation flag is set to ON, and in subsequent step S1091, an AT promotion lottery is executed based on the AT right information, and the process proceeds to step S1092.

In step S1092, it is determined whether or not the AT promotion lottery in step S1091 is won, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1093, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1095. In step S1093, the AT promotion reservation flag is set to ON, and in subsequent step S1094, the AT1 type is set to "high", and the process proceeds to step S1096. In step S1095, the AT1 type is set to "low", and the process proceeds to step S1096.

In step S1096, after executing other AT judge state processing A, the AT judge state processing A ends.

<Instruction information setting process>
Next, referring to FIG. 111, instruction information setting processing will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing in detail the instruction information setting process (step S814) of the high-navigation state process A described with reference to FIG.

The instruction information setting process according to this example is obtained by changing the determination process in step S1602 of the instruction information setting process described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in step S1602, the current effect state AT judge state, AT2 state, or determine whether or not LMT state, if applicable, proceed to step S1603, if not applicable goes to step S1604.

<High navigation state processing B>
Next, high navigation state processing B in step S1706 of FIG. 25 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the flow of the high navigation state process B according to the fourth embodiment, and corresponds to the high navigation state process B according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 26 above.

In the high navigation state process B according to the fourth embodiment, steps S1807 and S1808 are added to the high navigation state process B according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in step S1807, it is determined whether or not the production state is the AT judge state. In step S1808, AT judge state processing B (details will be described later) is executed.

<Normal state processing B>
Next, normal state processing B in step S1802 in FIG. 112 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing the flow of the normal state process B according to the fourth embodiment, and corresponds to the normal state process B according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 64 above.

In the normal state process B according to the fourth embodiment, steps S1911 and S1917 of the normal state process B according to the second embodiment described with reference to FIG. 64 are deleted, and steps S1918 and S1919 are added. there is Specifically, in step S1918, it is determined whether or not the NM state is the NM3 state. advances to step S1919 to execute NM4 state processing B (details will be described later).

<NM1 state processing B>
Next, NM1 state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the flow of NM1 state processing B (step S1913) in normal state processing B described using FIG.

The NM1 state processing B according to this example is obtained by adding steps S1926, S1927, S1928, and S1929 between steps S1922 and S1923 of the NM1 state processing B described with reference to FIG. be.

Specifically, an icon specialization state transition lottery is executed in step S1926, and it is determined whether or not the icon specialization state transition lottery is won in step S1927. If not, the process proceeds to step S1929. In step S1928, the icon specialization state transition reservation flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S1923. In step S1929, the icon specialization state transition reservation flag is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to step S1923.

Note that the lottery table of FIG. 101(a) is used in the high navigation state scenario lottery in step S1921.

<Cycle start setting process>
Next, the period start setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 is a flow chart showing the cycle start setting process (step S1925) in the NM1 state process B described with reference to FIG. Note that the cycle start setting process according to this example is a process that replaces the cycle start setting process described with reference to FIG.

In step S1930, the period type setting described with reference to FIG. 101(b) is performed. In this cycle type setting, the high navigation state scenario table shown in FIG. 101(b) is referred to, and the cycle type is set based on the scenario number and cycle. In the next step S1931, it is determined whether or not the value of the cycle counter is 4. If so, the process proceeds to step S1934, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1932. In step S1932, the AT judge state transition lottery described with reference to FIG. 101(c) is performed. In this AT judge state transition lottery, the period type set in step S1930 is referred to, and a lottery for reserving a transition to the AT judge state is performed based on the AT judge state transition rate shown in FIG. 101(c). In the next step S1933, it is determined whether or not the lottery in step S1932 has been won. If so, the process proceeds to step S1934, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1935. In step S1934, the AT judge state reservation flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S1936. In step S1935, the AT judge state reservation flag is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to step S1936.

In step S1936, 4 is set to the value of the growing season. Note that the value of the development season in this example is a fixed value. In the next step S1937, the season counter is set to 1 (initial value), and the process proceeds to step S1938. In step S1938, a season start setting process (details will be described later) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S1939. In step S1939, the cycle start setting process is terminated after executing other cycle start setting processes.

<Season start setting process>
Next, the season start setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a flow chart showing the flow of the season start setting process (step S1938) in the periodic start setting process described with reference to FIG. Note that the season start setting process according to this example is a process that replaces the season start setting process described with reference to FIG.

In step S1940, the seasonal advantage transition lottery described with reference to FIG. 101(d) is performed. In this seasonal advantageous state transition lottery, the period type set in step S1930 of FIG. , conduct a lottery to set the seasonal advantage. In the next step S1941, it is determined whether or not the lottery in step S1940 has been won. If so, the process proceeds to step S1942, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1943. In step S1942, the seasonally advantageous state flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S1944. In step S1943, the seasonally advantageous state flag is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to step S1944.

In step S1944, a seasonal fixed value (30 in this example) is set in the production state counter, and the process proceeds to step S1945. Although the seasonal fixed value is set to 30 in this example, it may be another numerical value (fixed value) or a variable value selected by lottery or the like. In step S1945, the NM state is set to 2, which indicates the NM state 2, and then the process proceeds to step S1946. In step S1946, the season start setting process is terminated after other season start setting processes are executed.

<NM2 state processing B>
Next, the NM2 state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the flow of NM2 state processing B (step S1915) in normal state processing B described using FIG. Note that the NM2 state process B according to this example is a process that replaces the NM2 state process B described with reference to FIG.

In step S1950, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter is 0. If so, the process proceeds to step S1951, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1958. In step S1951, it is determined whether or not the NM4 state transition reservation flag is off. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S1952, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1957. In step S1952, it is determined whether or not the value of the season counter is less than the value of the growing season.

In step S1953, the season counter is incremented by 1 to advance the season to the next season, and in subsequent step S1954, the season start setting process described with reference to FIG. 116 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1958. In step S1955, the NM3 state game count fixed value is set in the effect state counter, and in the succeeding step S1956, the NM state is set to numerical value 3 indicating NM state 3, and then the process proceeds to step S1958. In step S1957, NM4 state start setting processing (details will be described later) is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S1958.

In step S1958, after other NM2 state processing B is performed, NM2 state processing B ends.

<NM3 state processing B>
Next, NM3 state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the flow of NM3 state processing B (step S1916) in normal state processing B described using FIG. Note that the NM3-state process B according to this example is a process that replaces the NM3-state process B described with reference to FIG.

In step S1960, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter is 0. If it is 0, the process proceeds to step S1961, and if it is other than 0, the process proceeds to step S1965. In step S1961, it is determined whether or not the AT judge state transition reservation flag is off. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S1962, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1964.

In step S1962, 1 is added to the cycle counter, and in next step S1963, the cycle start setting process described with reference to FIG. 115 is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S1965. In step S1964, AT judge state start setting processing (details will be described later) is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S1965.

In step S1965, after performing other NM3 state processing B, the NM3 state processing B ends.

<NM4 state processing B>
Next, NM4 state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the flow of NM4 state processing B (step S1919) in normal state processing B described using FIG.

In step S1970, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter is 0. If so, the process proceeds to step S1971, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1976. In step S1971, it is determined whether or not the value of the season counter is less than the value of the growing season.

In step S1972, the season counter is incremented by 1 to advance the season to the next season, and in subsequent step S1973, the season start setting process described with reference to FIG. 116 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1976. In step S1974, the NM3 state game count fixed value is set in the effect state counter, and in the succeeding step S1975, the numerical value 3 indicating the NM state 3 is set in the NM state, and then the process proceeds to step S1976.

In step S1976, after other NM4 state processing B is performed, NM4 state processing B ends.

<NM4 state start setting processing>
Next, the NM4 state start setting process will be described using FIG. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the NM4 state start setting process (step S1957) of the NM2 state process B described using FIG.

In step S1980, it is determined whether or not the icon specialization state transition reservation flag is off. In step S1981, table 1 for number-of-additional-game lottery shown in FIG. 101(f) is set, and the process proceeds to step S1983. In step S1982, the additional game number lottery table 2 shown in FIG. 101(f) is set, and the process proceeds to step S1983.

At step S1983, the additional game number lottery is performed based on the set additional game number lottery table, and the result of this lottery is set in the effect state counter at the following step S1984, and the process proceeds to step S1985.

In step S1985, the NM4 state transition reservation flag is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to step S1986. In step S1986, the NM state is set to 4, which indicates the NM state 4, and then the process proceeds to step S1987. In step S1987, after executing other NM4 state start setting processing, the NM4 state start setting processing ends.

<AT judge state start setting process>
Next, the AT judge state start setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the AT judge state start setting process (step S1964) of the NM3 state process B described using FIG.

In step S1988, the AT judge state game number fixed value is set in the production state counter, and the process proceeds to step S1989. In this example, a fixed value is set, but a variable value selected by lottery or the like may be used.

In step S1989, it is determined whether or not the icon specialization state transition reservation flag is on. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S1990; if it is off, the process proceeds to step S1992. In step S1990, the icon specialization state flag is set to ON, in the next step S1991, the icon specialization state transition reservation flag is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to step S1992.

In step S1992, the AT judge state transition reservation flag is set to OFF, and in the next step S1993, the effect state is set to the AT judge state. In subsequent step S1994, the AT judge state start setting process is terminated after other AT judge state start setting processes are executed.

<AT judge status processing B>
Next, the AT judge status process B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the flow of AT judge state processing B (step S1808) in high navigation state processing B described using FIG. In step S1995, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter is 0. If it is 0, the process proceeds to step S1996, and if it is other than 0, the process proceeds to step S1999. In step S1996, it is determined whether or not the AT shift reservation flag is on. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S1997, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S1998. In step S1997, the effect state is set to the final notification state, and the process proceeds to step S1999. In step S1998, the high navigation state end standby flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S1999.

In step S1999, after performing other AT judge state processing B, the AT judge state processing B ends.

<NM4 status display processing>
Next, the NM4 status display processing will be described using FIG. FIG. 123 is a flow chart showing the flow of the NM4 state display process in the first sub-control section effect control process described with reference to FIG. 12(d). This NM4 state display process is a process executed in the other effect control process (step S3302) of the first sub-control unit effect control process described with reference to FIG. 12(d). In this example, when the NM4 state is set, a command including information indicating that the NM4 state is set is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 when the lever is turned on, and this information is transmitted. This process is executed in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command containing

In step S3400, it is determined whether or not the icon specialization state transition reservation flag is on. In step S3401, a lottery for suggestive display is performed based on the additional game suggestive display table shown in FIG. 102(c). By this lottery, one of the displays 1 to 20 may be set as the suggestive display. Incidentally, even when the icon specialization state transition reservation flag is off, a lottery for suggestive display may be performed. In step S3402, the NM4 status display process is terminated after executing other NM4 status display processes.

<Regarding the number of games required to reach the ceiling cycle>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127, the number of games required to reach the ceiling period in the slot machine 100 and the configuration related thereto will be described.

In the fourth embodiment, the initial state is a normal game state with a low navigation state, from which the game transitions to a high navigation state. In the high navigation state, it goes through the normal state and the AT judge state, and when it shifts to the AT1 state, it shifts to the AT1 state through the final notification state, and when it does not shift to the AT1 state, it returns to the low navigation state. (Fig. 99). Of these, the normal state is composed of four types of states, NM1 to 4 states (Fig. 100(a)), and after the NM1 state is set first, the set game in which the NM2 state and the NM3 state are set as one cycle is repeated one to four times (FIG. 100(b)). Since the upper limit of the number of cycles (hereafter referred to as the ceiling cycle value) is fixed, when the number of cycles reaches this ceiling cycle value, the state always shifts to the AT judge state. In FIG. 124(a), starting from a low navigation state, in the following normal state of a high navigation state, a set game with NM2 state and NM3 state as one cycle is performed four times (the upper limit of the number of cycles), AT The flow is shown through the judge state and back to the low-navi state. Also, in FIG. 124(b), after starting from the low-navigation state and following the normal state of the high-navigation state, the set game having the NM2 state and the NM3 state as one cycle is performed four times (the upper limit of the number of cycles). , the AT judge state, and further to the final notification state. In addition, in FIG. 124(c), after starting from a low navigation state and performing a set game with NM2 state and NM3 state as one cycle in the normal state of the following high navigation state, it goes through the AT judge state. Then, the flow is shown until it shifts to the final notification state.

The NM2 state of the normal state consists of periods corresponding to seasons 1 to 4 (corresponding to season counters 1 to 4, respectively), but the remaining period of the season is canceled (shortened) when the season shortening condition is met. and the NM4 state may interrupt (FIG. 100(c)). In this case, the number of games required to shift to the AT judge state varies depending on the shortened amount of the NM2 state and the number of games in the interrupted NM4 state (the number of additional games). It should be noted that the number of additional games, if it is confirmed that the icon specialization state in the AT judge state (if the icon specialization state transition reservation flag is ON), it is confirmed that the icon specialization state. A larger value is more likely to be set than when not (when the icon specialization state transition reservation flag is off) (FIG. 101(f)).

Hereinafter, referring to FIG. 125, the period from the start of the set game to reaching the ceiling period and shifting to the AT judge state will be targeted, and the required number of games required for this targeted period will be compared. First, as shown in FIG. 125(a), the required number of games when the season shortening condition is not satisfied during the target period is set as the reference number of games. Next, as shown in FIG. 125(b), the required number of games during the target period when the season shortening condition (here, internal winning of a rare role) is satisfied with the icon specialization state transition reservation flag turned off. be the first number of games. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 125(c), the required number of games when the season reduction condition (here, internal winning of a rare role) is established with the icon specialization state transition reservation flag turned on during the target period is calculated as follows. It is the second number of games. Comparing these, the first number of games tends to be larger than the number of games in the NM4 state, which is interrupted by the reduction in the NM2 state, and therefore tends to be shorter than the reference number of games. On the other hand, the second number of games tends to be smaller than the number of games in the NM4 state, in which the reduction in the NM2 state interrupts, and thus tends to be longer than the reference number of games. That is, the first number of games tends to be smaller than the reference number of games than the second number of games, and the second number of games tends to be larger than the reference number of games than the first number of games. there is

When the icon specialization state transition reservation flag is set to ON, the icon specialization state is set in the AT judge state, and the probability of transition to the AT1 state increases Icons (icons J1 to J3, FIG. 101(e)) have the opportunity to acquire Therefore, when the icon-specialized state transition reservation flag is ON, the rate of transition from the AT judge state to the AT1 state is higher than when the icon-specialized state transition reservation flag is OFF, which is an advantageous state. I can say. When the icon-specialized state transition reservation flag is on, the number of games required to reach the ceiling period becomes longer (the second number of games), and there is a risk that the willingness to play may decrease, but the transition rate to the AT1 state is high, it is possible to suppress the gambling nature while preventing the motivation for the game from decreasing as a whole. On the other hand, when the icon specialization state transition reservation flag is off, the number of games required to reach the ceiling period is short (the first number of games). In this case, although the transition rate to the AT1 state is low, there are cases where the transition to the AT1 state is not performed, but the period to the AT judge state can be enjoyed by shortening the period to the AT judge state. Also, even if the state does not shift to the AT1 state, the game can be continued by quickly changing the mindset. In the fourth embodiment, the timing for turning on the icon-specific state transition reservation flag is at the end of the NM1 state (step S1928 in FIG. 114). The same flag may be switched from off to on at the same time.

In the fourth embodiment, there are two types of states in the AT1 state, one in which the AT1 type is "high" and the other in which the AT1 type is "low". The period is configured to be longer (for example, the initial value is large, the frequency of addition is high, the amount of addition is large). That is, when the AT1 type is "high" and when it is "low", it can be said that the former is more advantageous for the player. This AT1 type is set in the AT judge state (FIG. 110), but the setting probability of the AT1 type "high" may be determined before the transition to the AT judge state. When this configuration is employed, in determining the number of additional games, in addition to the state of the icon specialization state transition reservation flag, the set probability of this AT1 type "high" may be referred to. For example, the more advantageous the setting probability of the AT1 type "high" is, the more likely it is that a larger number of additional games will be selected. Later, a configuration for adding the value of the number of additional games with reference to the setting probability of AT1 type "high" (for example, if the setting probability of AT1 type "high" is 80%, add 2, AT1 type "high" is 20%, 0 may be added). Further, it may be configured to determine whether or not to refer to the setting probability of the AT1 type "high" depending on the state of the icon specialization state transition reservation flag. Even with these configurations, it is possible to suppress gambling while improving the interest of the game.

If the profit difference due to the difference in AT1 type is smaller than the difference in profit due to the presence or absence of transition to the AT1 state, the number of additional games will be adjusted based on the advantages and disadvantages of the set probability of AT1 type "high". If the state is changed significantly, the number of games required to shift to the AT judge state will unnecessarily lengthen even though the state does not shift to the AT1 state, and there is a risk that the interest in the game will be diminished. For this reason, at least for a state in which the probability of transition to the AT1 state is low, the above configuration (configuration in which the state of the icon specialization state transition reservation flag and the setting probability of the AT1 type "high" are referred to when determining the number of additional games). In adopting this, the influence of the set probability of the AT1 type "high" in determining the number of additional games may be reduced. For example, in the example of FIG. 125, the first number of games, which is the required number of games when the season shortening condition (in this case, internal winning of a rare role) is satisfied with the icon specialization state transition reservation flag turned off, is the standard. I explained that it tends to be shorter than the number of games, but even when referring to the set probability of AT1 type "high", the number of required games tends to be shorter than the standard number of games. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which Also, when the icon specialization state transition reservation flag is off, the set probability of the AT1 type "high" may not be referred to in determining the number of additional games. In addition to the flow of FIG. 125(b), FIG. 126(a) shows an example in which the AT1 type “high” setting probability is set to 20% at the start of the normal state. ) shows, in addition to the flow of FIG. 125(b), an example in which the setting probability of the AT1 type “high” is set to 80% at the start of the normal state. These Figures 126 (a) (b) is an example of a configuration that does not refer to the setting probability of AT1 type "high", the period from the start of the set game to reaching the ceiling period and shifting to the AT judge state, It is shown that the number of games (first number of games) is the same as in FIG.

In addition, depending on the number of additional games, the state of the icon specialization state transition reservation flag may be grasped, but the timing of turning on the flag is at least prior to the timing of increasing the setting probability of AT1 type "high". , it may be possible to entertain the player at an earlier stage.

In the above-described configuration, the AT judge state and the AT1 state that can be set subsequently are two types of advantageous games, and the period game is provided as a preliminary stage, and the period game is shortened and added. It is a configuration that can be provided. This configuration is not limited to the configuration of the fourth embodiment, but includes two types of advantageous games, an advantageous game A and an advantageous game B that can be set subsequently, and a periodic game as a normal game in the preceding stage. can be applied. FIG. 127 is a diagram showing the difference in the required number of games when reaching the ceiling period for this configuration. In FIG. 127(a), arrows indicate an example of the required number of games when there is no shortening or additional portion of the normal game. Note that the reference number of games described above corresponds to the normal game period in this figure. Also, in FIGS. 127(b) and 127(c), arrows indicate an example of the required number of games in the case where there is a reduction in the normal game and an additional game. Of these, FIG. 127(b) is an example in which the normal game is shortened in a state in which the transition rate to the advantageous state B is lower than that in FIG. 127(c). , Advantageous game A is started at an earlier stage (see leftward arrow) compared to FIG. 127(a). Note that the first number of games described above corresponds to the period in which the normal games and additional games are combined in this figure. On the other hand, FIG. 127(c) is an example in which the normal game is shortened in a state in which the rate of transition to advantageous state B is higher than in FIG. 127(b). Advantageous game A is started later (see rightward arrow) than in FIG. 127(a). The above-mentioned second number of games corresponds to the period of normal games and additional games combined in this figure. In the above configuration, two types of transition rates to advantageous state B are high and low, but in the case of a configuration in which multiple types of transition rates to advantageous state B are provided, the above relationship It suffices if a configuration having a property is included. Further, the configuration for differentiating the transition rate to the advantageous state B is not limited to the icon specialization state transition reservation flag as in the fourth embodiment. and the transition rate to the advantageous state B may be changed based on this state, or the transition rate to the advantageous state B may be changed depending on the scenario or set value. There may be, and the configuration is not limited.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 126, it is assumed that the setting probability of the AT1 type "high" is determined before the transition to the AT judge state, and for the state with the low transition probability to the AT1 state, the icon specialization A configuration has been described in which the number of additional games is determined by referring to the state of the state transition reservation flag and the setting probability of the AT1 type "high" while reducing the influence of the setting probability of the AT1 type "high". This configuration can be applied to a configuration in which the advantage after advantageous game B is determined before advantageous game A. In applying this configuration, it is preferable that the difference in profit due to the difference in the degree of advantage after the advantageous game B is smaller than the difference in profit due to the presence or absence of transition to the advantageous game B. This relationship is indicated by an inequality in the upper right frame of FIG. Also, FIG. 127(d) shows an example in which in the flow of FIG. In the flow of 127(b), an example is shown in which the advantage degree after the advantageous game B is set high in the normal game. These FIGS. 127(d) and 127(e) show that the advantageous game A starts at the same timing as in FIG. 127(b) regardless of the advantage after the advantageous game B. That is, in a state where the transition rate to the advantageous state B is low (FIGS. 127(b), 127(d), and 127(e)), the ceiling cycle is reached more than when there is no shortening and additional portion of the normal game (FIG. 127(a)). Any configuration is acceptable as long as the required number of games is likely to be reduced when , and any configuration in which the degree of advantage after the advantageous state B does not significantly affect the start timing of the advantageous game A (FIG. 127 is an example of no influence). In the above configuration, the case where two types of high and low advantages are provided after the advantageous state B, but the configuration is such that a plurality of types of advantages are provided after the advantageous state B. Also, it is sufficient that these advantages do not affect the start timing of the advantageous game A so much.

As an example of deriving the profit difference due to whether or not there is a transition to the advantageous game B as described above, if the number of winnings in the advantageous game B is managed, the number of winnings is used as the profit difference. Things are mentioned. Also, if the number of executions of operation navigation is managed in advantageous game B, the number obtained by following operation navigation (for example, the number of winning bells) is multiplied by the minimum number of executions. It can be used as a profit difference. Further, when the number of games of the advantageous game B is managed, a value obtained by multiplying the net increase number per game by the minimum value of the number of games may be used as the profit difference.

Also, as an example of deriving the profit difference due to the difference in the degree of advantage after the advantageous game B, as described above, if there is a difference in the initial value of the acquired number in the advantageous game B due to the difference in the degree of advantage, this The difference may be used as the profit difference. Also, if there is a difference in the initial value of the number of times operation navigation is executed in advantageous game B due to the difference in the degree of advantage, the number of acquisitions when following operation navigation (for example, the number of winning bells) A value obtained by multiplying the difference may be used as the profit difference. Furthermore, if there is a difference in the initial value of the number of games in the advantageous game B, a value obtained by multiplying the net increase in the number of games per game by the difference between these initial values may be used as the profit difference.

<Production example (1): Shift from AT judge state to normal game state>
Next, an example of effects in the slot machine 100 according to Embodiment 4 and applicable effects will be described with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 124(a), from the normal game state (low navigation state), 4 cycles of NM1 state, NM2 state and NM3 state are repeated (ceiling cycle value reached), AT judge state, then normal game state (low navigation state) 128, the first to fourth columns of the flow of effects shown in FIG. ) is a diagram showing an example of an effect until the transition to .

First, on the first screen in the first row, an introductory effect of a set game having NM2 state and NM3 state as one cycle is executed. The number "100PT" shown in the lower right of this screen indicates the icon acquisition points.

The NM2 state of the first cycle starts from the next game. Here, taking the opportunity of accepting Lebaon, "1st year spring" in the upper left of the screen, "Seasonal production (suggestion introduction)" in the center of the screen, "Remaining 30 km" in the lower left of the screen, "100 PT" in the lower right of the screen Four different displays are shown to appear (first column, second from left). Here, since it is the start of the season and the start of the cycle, various suggestions are executed (FIG. 102(d)). It indicates that the introductory part is being executed. Also, the display on the upper left of the screen corresponds to the value of the cycle counter and the value of the season counter. "Autumn" and "Winter" correspond to values 1 to 4 of the season counter, respectively. The display at the bottom left of the screen corresponds to the value of the effect state counter, and in this example, the value of the effect state counter is displayed in units of "km". The display at the bottom right of the screen continues to show icon acquisition points.

After the third stop in this game, the display of "seasonal effect (suggestion)" in the center of the screen indicates that various suggestions were made at the start of the game (first row, left third from). Also, the display at the lower left of the screen shows that the value of the effect state counter is reduced by 1 from the value at the start of the game (changed from 30 to 29 here). The display at the bottom right of the screen indicates that the number of icon acquisition points has increased since the start of the game (here, 100 to 103) due to the acquisition of icon acquisition points.

In the next game, it is indicated that the presentation in the center of the screen has been switched to "Seasonal presentation (normal)" (first row, fourth from the left) with the reception of Lebaon as a trigger. This effect is a effect executed in accordance with each season counter. Furthermore, after the third stop in this game, the display at the bottom left of the screen shows a value 1 less than that at the start of the game due to the subtraction of the value of the effect state counter (changed from 29 to 28 here). is shown. The display at the lower right of the screen indicates that the number of icon acquisition points has increased since the start of the game (here, 103 to 104) due to the acquisition of icon acquisition points.

As the game progresses further, the last screen in the first row indicates that the value of the effect state counter has become 1 and the value of icon acquisition points has become 150. At the beginning of the second row, the screen after receiving Lebaon to start the next game is shown. After the third stop in this game, the display at the bottom left of the screen shows that the value of the effect state counter is decremented to 0, and the display at the bottom right of the screen shows that the icon acquisition points have reached 153. (Second row, second from left). When the value of the effect state counter becomes 0, the value of the season counter is incremented by 1 (step S1953 in FIG. 117), and the value of the effect state counter is newly set (30 in this example) (step S1944 in FIG. 116). .

Then, when Lebaon is accepted to start the next game, the display on the upper left of the screen changes from "1st year spring" to "1st year summer", and the display on the lower left of the screen changes to "Remaining 30 km" (2 columns 3rd from the left). In addition, since it is the beginning of the season as well as the beginning of the "spring of the first year", various suggestions are executed (FIG. 102(d)). "Seasonal production (suggestion introduction)" shown in the center of the screen indicates that the introduction part of this suggestion is being executed. Furthermore, after the third stop in this game, the display of "seasonal effect (suggestion)" in the center of the screen indicates that various suggestions were made at the start of the game (second column 4th from left). Also, the display at the lower left of the screen shows that the value of the effect state counter has been decremented, resulting in a value that is one less than at the start of the game (changed from 30 to 29 here). The display at the lower right of the screen shows that the number of icon acquisition points has increased since the start of the game (here, 153 to 156) due to the acquisition of icon acquisition points.

As the game progresses further, the value of the season counter reaches 4 (displayed at the upper left of the screen is "1st year winter"), the value of the presentation state counter reaches 1, and the value of icon acquisition points reaches 280. The state (fifth from the left in the second row) will be described. After the third stop in this game, the display at the bottom left of the screen shows that the value of the effect state counter is decremented to 0, and the display at the bottom right of the screen shows that the icon acquisition points have reached 283. (Second row, 6th from left). Here, when the value of the season counter is 4 and the value of the effect state counter becomes 0, a new value is set to the effect state counter and the state shifts to NM3 (steps S1955 and S1956 in FIG. 117).

Then, when Lebaon is accepted to start the next game, the display on the upper left of the screen remains "winter of the first year" and the display on the lower left of the screen disappears (7th from the left in the second row). Also, an effect in the NM3 state is executed. ``Departure (introduction)'' shown in the center of the screen indicates that the introductory portion of this presentation is being executed. The game progresses further, and at the beginning of the third row, the game in which the value of the effect state counter becomes 0 (the end of the NM3 state) is shown. In this game, "Go to battle (failure)" is displayed in the center of the screen, suggesting that the game will not shift to the AT judge state. Here, when the AT judge state transition reservation flag is turned off and the value of the production state counter becomes 0, 1 is added to the value of the cycle counter and a new set game from the next game (from the NM2 state start) is set (Yes in step S1961 of FIG. 118).

In the next game, when Levaon is accepted, the same display as in the first period appears (third row, second from the left). Here, since the value of the period counter is 2 and the value of the season counter is 1, the display on the upper left of the screen has changed from "winter of the first year" to "spring of the second year". "Seasonal presentation (suggestion introduction)" in the center of the screen indicates that the introduction part of various suggestions executed at the start of the season and the start of the cycle is being executed. Also, at the lower left of the screen, a display of "30 km remaining" corresponding to the value of the effect state counter appears. The display at the bottom right of the screen continues to show icon acquisition points.

In the flow described above, the effect of each period is executed. From here, the game progresses further, the cycle counter value becomes 4, the season counter value becomes 4 (the display at the upper left of the screen is "4th year winter"), the effect state counter value becomes 1, and icon acquisition points are obtained. is 910 (third column from the left). After the third stop in this game, the display at the bottom left of the screen shows that the value of the effect state counter is decremented to 0, and the display at the bottom right of the screen shows that the icon acquisition points have reached 913. (3rd row, 4th from left). Here, when the value of the season counter is 4 and the value of the effect state counter becomes 0, a new value is set to the effect state counter and the state shifts to NM3 (steps S1955 and S1956 in FIG. 117).

Then, when Levaon is accepted to start the next game, the display on the upper left of the screen remains "Winter of the 4th Year", and the display on the lower left of the screen disappears (5th from the left in the 3rd column). Also, an effect in the NM3 state is executed. ``Departure (introduction)'' shown in the center of the screen indicates that the introductory portion of this presentation is being executed. The game progresses further, and at the end of the third row, the game in which the value of the effect state counter becomes 0 (the end of the NM3 state) is shown. In this game, the word "going into battle (successful)" is displayed in the center of the screen, suggesting that the game will shift to an AT judge state. Here, the AT judge state transition reservation flag is turned on and the value of the effect state counter becomes 0, so that the AT judge state start setting process is executed (determination of No in step S1961 in FIG. 118), and the effect state The setting of the counter value and the AT judgment state is executed.

Then, when Lebaon is accepted to start the next game, an AT judge state effect is executed (fourth row, first from the left). "AT judge (introduction)" shown in the center of the screen indicates that the introductory portion of this effect is being executed. "Icon specialization: none" shown at the top of the screen indicates that the icon specialization state is not set (icon specialization state flag is off). Also, the display at the lower left of the screen corresponding to the value of the rendering state counter is hidden. The display at the bottom right of the screen continues to show icon acquisition points. Here, since the AT transition reservation flag is off, the content of the effect in the AT judge state indicates that the AT state is not transitioned. "AT Judge (Boss Battle)" shown in the center of the second screen from the left in the fourth row is the introduction part of this production, and "AT Judge (Boss Battle)" shown in the center of the third screen from the left in the fourth row "Loss)" is an example of the effect content indicating that the AT state is not to be entered. Then, when the AT judge state ends, the normal game state (low navigation state) is entered (step S1998 in FIG. 122). In this example, in the normal game state (low navigation state), the introduction effect of the set game with one cycle of the NM2 state and the NM3 state is executed (fourth row from the left).

In the set game, the display corresponding to the value of the effect state counter (display of "km" at the bottom left of the screen) is performed, but the value of this counter is not directly displayed, for example, it is displayed with a meter, The value may be multiplied by n and displayed. Also, in the above example, this display is changed at the timing of the third stop, but this timing is not limited and may be, for example, the timing of Levaon, and furthermore, the value of the effect state counter may be different from the change timing of .

<Production example (2): Transition from AT judge state to AT1 state through final announcement state>
Next, an example of effects in the slot machine 100 according to Embodiment 4 and applicable effects will be described with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 124(b), from the normal game state (low navigation state), 4 cycles of NM1 state, NM2 state and NM3 state are repeated (ceiling cycle value reached), AT judge state, and transition to final announcement state 128, the 1st to 3rd columns and the 5th column of the production flow shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation until it transfers to . The 5th column of the flow of the production shown in FIG. 128 shows the flow of the production after the AT judge state, and the production of the previous stage is the 1st to 3rd columns described in <Example of production (1)>. It has basically the same configuration as the operation up to. For this reason, in the following description, descriptions of contents that overlap with <effect example (1)> will be omitted, and the description will be made from the fifth column.

When the last game in the NM3 state is completed and a lever-on is received to start the next game, an AT judge state effect is executed (fifth row, first from the left). "AT judge (introduction)" shown in the center of the screen indicates that the introductory portion of this effect is being executed. "Icon specialization: none" shown at the top of the screen indicates that the icon specialization state is not set (icon specialization state flag is off). Also, the display at the lower left of the screen corresponding to the value of the rendering state counter is hidden. The display at the bottom right of the screen continues to show icon acquisition points. Here, since the AT transition reservation flag is ON, the content of the effect in the AT judge state indicates transition to the AT state. "AT Judge (Boss Battle)" shown in the center of the second screen from the left in the fifth row is the introduction part of this production, and "AT Judge (Boss Battle)" shown in the center of the third screen from the left in the fifth row Victory)” is an example of the content of the effect indicating that the game is to be shifted to the AT state. Then, when the AT judge state ends, it shifts to the final notification state (step S1997 in FIG. 122).

In the final announcement state, an effect (promoting promotion) that makes the player expect that the AT1 type "high" will be set is executed (fifth row, fourth from the left). Then, an effect indicating the presence or absence of promotion is executed according to the AT1 type. In this example, it is shown that an effect (no promotion) when there is no promotion (AT1 type "low" is set) has been executed (fifth row from the left). After that, it shifts to the AT1 state (step S2006 in FIG. 72). Here, it is shown that an effect indicating that the AT1 state has started (AT1 start effect) has been executed (fifth row, sixth from the left).

<Production example (3): Icon acquisition by icon acquisition points>
Next, with reference to FIG. 129(a), an example of an effect when an icon is acquired by icon acquisition points will be described.

In the example of FIG. 129(a), the period counter value is 4, the season counter value is 4, the effect state counter value is 30, and the icon acquisition point value is 998. In this game, it is assumed that the value of icon acquisition points is increased by 3 and becomes 1001 (step S1069 in FIG. 109). Here, when the icon acquisition point value exceeds the predetermined value (1000), an acquisition icon lottery is executed, and the predetermined value is subtracted from the icon acquisition point value (Yes in step S1070 in FIG. 109). Here, the explanation is continued assuming that the icon J1 (see FIG. 101(e)) is acquired.

When the third stop is made in this game, an effect in which the value of icon acquisition points is added is executed (second in FIG. 129(a)). In addition, when the icon acquisition point exceeds a predetermined value, an effect is executed in which the predetermined value is subtracted from the icon acquisition point value (third in FIG. 129(a)), and then the acquired icon is displayed ( 4th in FIG. 129(a)). This icon is displayed until the AT judge state. Since this icon increases the probability of shifting from the AT judge state to the AT1 state, it can be said that the display of this icon notifies that the AT judge state will be in an advantageous state.

<Production example (4): When the NM2 state is shortened (1)>
Next, with reference to FIG. 129(b), an example of an effect when the NM2 state is shortened will be described.

In FIG. 125(b), when the season shortening condition is established in the NM2 state (here, internal winning of a rare role), the season ends (the value of the production state counter becomes 0), and after the NM4 state is interrupted, the next We have described the example of the beginning of a season. The flow of effects shown in FIG. 129(b) is a diagram showing an example of effects from the satisfaction of the season shortening condition in the NM2 state of the flow of FIG. 125(b) to the start of the next season.

In the example of FIG. 129(b), at the end of the game, the cycle counter value is 1, the season counter value is 1, the effect state counter value is 9, and the icon acquisition point value is 134. explain. From this state, it is assumed that the lever-on for starting the next game is accepted, and the season shortening condition is established at this time (second in FIG. 129(b)). In this case, the value of the effect state counter becomes 0, and the NM4 state transition reservation flag is set to ON (No determination in step S1042 of FIG. 106).

When the third stop is made in this game, the NM4 state is set (No determination in step S1951 of FIG. 117). At this time, the number of additional games is determined by lottery (step S1983 in FIG. 120). Here, the icon specialization state transition reservation flag is off, and a relatively short number of additional games (for example, 3 to 5) is determined. shall be assumed. In terms of effects, the value at the bottom left of the screen corresponding to the value of the effect state counter is updated to 0, and an effect is executed in which the value of icon acquisition points is added (third in FIG. 129(b)). Further, the display itself at the bottom left of the screen is hidden (fourth in FIG. 129(b)). In this case, the value in the lower left corner of the screen corresponding to the value of the effect state counter may be displayed in such a manner that it is counted down from 9 to 0. When there are many changes, the display may be made to make the changes easier to understand. The display at the bottom left of the screen corresponding to the value of the effect state counter is not limited to being hidden when the NM2 state is shortened, and may be displayed in a different manner from when it is not shortened. A configuration in which at least part of the interface is hidden may be used.

Then, when Lebaon is accepted to start the next game, the NM4 state effect corresponding to the relatively short number of additional games is executed (fifth in FIG. 129(b)). "Additional effect (short)" in the center of the screen indicates that an effect corresponding to a relatively short number of additional games is being executed. This effect is executed until the end of the NM4 state (6th in FIG. 129(b)). When the NM4 state ends (the value of the production state counter is 0), since the value of the season counter is 1 here, 1 is added to the value of the season counter, and season start processing is executed (step in FIG. 119). Determination of Yes in S1971).

Then, when Lebaon is accepted to start the next game, the display on the upper left of the screen becomes "summer of the first year" and the display on the lower left of the screen becomes "30 km left" (7th in FIG. 129(b)). . Also, since it is the beginning of the season, various suggestions are made (FIG. 102(d)). "Seasonal production (suggestion introduction)" shown in the center of the screen indicates that the introduction part of this suggestion is being executed. The display at the bottom right of the screen continues to show icon acquisition points. In this case, the value on the lower left of the screen corresponding to the value of the effect state counter may be displayed in such a manner that it is counted up from 0 to 30, and the value of the effect state counter changes greatly in this way. In this case, the change may be displayed to make it easier to understand.

<Production example (5): When the NM2 state is shortened (2)>
Next, with reference to FIG. 129(c), an example of an effect when the NM2 state is shortened will be described.

In FIG. 125(c), when the season shortening condition is established in the NM2 state (in this case, a rare hand is internally won), the season ends (the value of the production state counter becomes 0), and after the NM4 state is interrupted, the next We have described the example of the beginning of a season. The flow of effects shown in FIG. 129(c) is a diagram showing an example of effects from the establishment of the season shortening condition in the NM2 state of the flow of FIG. 125(c) to the start of the next season.

In the example of FIG. 129(c), at the end of the game, the cycle counter value is 1, the season counter value is 1, the effect state counter value is 9, and the icon acquisition point value is 134. explain. From this state, it is assumed that Lebaon is accepted for starting the next game, and the season shortening condition is established at this time (second in FIG. 129(c)). In this case, the value of the effect state counter becomes 0, and the NM4 state transition reservation flag is set to ON (No determination in step S1042 of FIG. 106).

When the third stop is made in this game, the NM4 state is set (No determination in step S1951 of FIG. 117). At this time, the number of additional games is determined by lottery (step S1983 in FIG. 120). Here, the icon specialization state transition reservation flag is ON, and a relatively long number of additional games (for example, 20) is determined. and In terms of effects, the value at the bottom left of the screen corresponding to the value of the effect state counter is updated to 0, and an effect is executed in which the value of icon acquisition points is added (third in FIG. 129(c)). Further, the display itself at the bottom left of the screen is hidden (fourth in FIG. 129(c)). The display at the bottom left of the screen corresponding to the value of the rendering state counter is not limited to being hidden when the NM2 state is shortened, and may be displayed in a different manner from when it is not shortened. A configuration in which at least part of the interface is hidden may be used.

Then, when Lebaon is accepted to start the next game, the NM4 state effect corresponding to the relatively long number of additional games is executed (fifth in FIG. 129(c)). "Additional effect (long)" in the center of the screen indicates that an effect corresponding to a relatively long number of additional games is being executed. This effect is executed until the end of the NM4 state (6th in FIG. 129(c)). In addition, in this effect, since the icon specialization state transition reservation flag is ON, setting values may be suggested (step S3401 in FIG. 123). This set value suggestion also suggests that the icon-specialized state transition reservation flag is on, since it is executed with the icon-specialized state transition reservation flag turned on. "Suggestion display 2" at the end of this presentation indicates that this suggestion is being executed. Suggestion of this set value may be executed with the icon specialization state transition reservation flag turned on. It can be said that the larger the number, the easier the suggestion is to be executed. In suggesting setting values, it is not limited to the configuration in which the content is determined by lottery. If the configuration is such that the effect changes, the difference in the effect indirectly suggests the set value. Such an indirect setting suggestion may be adopted. When the NM4 state ends (the value of the production state counter is 0), since the value of the season counter is 1 here, 1 is added to the value of the season counter, and season start processing is executed (step in FIG. 119). Determination of Yes in S1971).

Then, when Levaon is accepted to start the next game, the display on the upper left of the screen becomes "1st year summer" and the display on the lower left of the screen becomes "Remaining 30 km" (7th in FIG. 129(c)). . Also, since it is the beginning of the season, various suggestions are made (FIG. 102(d)). "Seasonal production (suggestion introduction)" shown in the center of the screen indicates that the introduction part of this suggestion is being executed. The display at the bottom right of the screen continues to show icon acquisition points.

<Production example (6): Icon acquisition in icon specialization state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 129(d), an example of an effect when an icon is acquired in the icon specialization state will be described.

In the example of FIG. 129(d), the AT judge state is the icon specialized state, and the value of the icon acquisition point is 943. The state will be described. "AT Judge (Introduction)" shown in the center of the screen indicates that the introductory portion of the performance in the AT Judge state is being executed. Further, "icon specialization: present" shown in the upper part of the screen indicates that the icon specialization state is set (icon specialization state flag is on).

In the icon specialization state, icon acquisition points are added (step S1085 in FIG. 110), but apart from this, a lottery for acquisition icons is executed (step S1084 in FIG. 110), and the icon is acquired regardless of the acquisition points. There are opportunities to do so. In the example of FIG. 129(d), the icon acquisition point values increase to 943, 953, and 961, but do not reach the predetermined value (1000) for icon acquisition. (1st to 3rd in FIG. 129(d)). However, it is shown that an icon J1 has been acquired (second in FIG. 129(d)) and an icon J3 has been acquired (third in FIG. 129(d)) through a lottery of winning icons. After that, the introduction part (AT judge (boss battle)) of the production indicating whether or not to shift to the AT state is executed (fourth in FIG. 129 (d)), and the production (AT judge (boss battle) Victory)) is being executed (fifth in FIG. 129(d)).

<Production example (7): Suggestion display>
Next, an example of suggestion display in the slot machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 130(a) and 130(b).

In Embodiment 4, various suggestions may be made at the start of the season and the start of the cycle (FIG. 102(d)). For example, in the first and second flows from the left in FIG. 130(a), when the third stop is made in the first game of the season, the display of "This season is PT high probability" is executed. is shown, but this display is an example of suggesting that it will be in a seasonally advantageous state. In addition, the display of "Judge is near!" (third screen from the left) in FIG. Various configurations can be adopted for these suggestions depending on the target of the suggestions. For example, the display of "Scenario N or better?" (fourth screen from the left) in FIG. 130(a) is an example of suggesting the type of scenario. Note that if the rate of transition to the AT1 state differs depending on the scenario, the suggestion of the scenario can be the suggestion of the transition to the AT1 state. Also, for example, when the value of the effect state counter is set to decrease more than usual, as a display suggesting this state, the display (left hand side) of FIG. 5th screen from ). Also, for example, when the setting probability of AT1 type "high" has already been determined, as a display suggesting this state, the display of "Judge wins and AT high probability!" screen). In addition, it may be configured to suggest a setting value, or may be configured to have a plurality of suggested contents.

Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the icon specialization state transition schedule flag indicates an ON state. It should be noted that if this suggestion is carried out too much, the information can be grasped regardless of the skill of the game, and there is a risk that the interest in the game of the skilled person will decrease. For this reason, for example, suggesting the state in which the icon-specialized state transition schedule flag is on is less likely to be executed than suggesting the setting probability of the AT1 type "high", thereby making it difficult for the expert's interest in the game to decline. sometimes it is possible. Note that the timing at which the icon-specialized state transition schedule flag indicates the ON state may be at least before the end of the AT judge state.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, various suggestions may be executed at the start of the season and cycle, but the timing of these suggestions may be other timings. You can do it when you migrate. FIG. 130(b) shows that some kind of suggestion (suggestion X) is being carried out while the introductory effect is being carried out in the game that has shifted to the high navigation state.

<Modification of Embodiment 4>
Next, a modification of the slot machine 100 according to Embodiment 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 130(c).

In the fourth embodiment, when a predetermined condition (season shortening condition) is satisfied in a set game, the game to be originally executed is canceled and the number of additional games is added. The configuration in which the number of games until the AT judge state is changed has been described. Here, not limited to such a set game configuration, for example, the value of the counter updated with the progress of the game is configured to shift to the AT judge state by reaching a predetermined value, and a predetermined condition (season shortening condition ) is established, the game to be originally executed is canceled and the number of additional games is added, so that the required number of games until the AT judge state is changed compared to the case where the predetermined condition is not established. may be Hereinafter, an example will be described in which a counter (hereinafter referred to as an AT judge counter) until reaching the AT judge state is subtracted by a value corresponding to the result of the lottery for each game, and when the value reaches 0, the AT judge state is entered.

FIG. 130(c) is a diagram showing an example of the flow when a predetermined condition (season shortening condition) is not satisfied. In this example, it is shown that "800 km remaining" corresponding to the value of the AT judge counter is displayed on the lower left of the screen (first from the left). Then, when this value reaches 0, it is shown that it shifts to the AT judge state (second and third from the left).

FIG. 130(d) is a diagram showing an example of the flow when a predetermined condition (season shortening condition) is satisfied. In this example, when the AT judge counter has decreased to 680 (first from the left), the season shortening condition is established, and when the third stop is made in this game, the value of the AT judge counter is reduced by 100 to 580. (second from the left), and the display at the bottom left of the screen is temporarily hidden (third from the left). After that, after the games corresponding to the number of additional games are executed (4th and 5th from the left), the normal game (the AT judge counter is decremented by 1) with the AT judge counter decreased to 580. It is shown returning (6th from the left). In this example, the AT judge counter does not change during the additional game, but the AT judge counter may be subtracted by the minimum decrement per game.

In the modified example described above, as in the fourth embodiment, when a predetermined condition (season shortening condition) is satisfied, the number of games until the AT judge state is changed compared to when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. can do. Note that the configuration applicable in the fourth embodiment can also be applied in this modified example.

<Invention 4>
As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "present invention 4-1") is
A variable display unit (for example, the pattern display window 113 shown in FIG. 1) that can variably display multiple types of identification information that can be identified,
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a game medium, and one game is finished by deriving a display result on the variable display section, and the variable display is performed. A game machine capable of winning according to the display result derived to the unit,
It is possible to control the setting of multiple types of states related to the player's advantage (for example, FIG. 99(a), normal game in FIG. 127, advantageous game A, advantageous game B, specific state in FIG. 131, advantageous game state). state setting means (for example, the main control unit 300),
Set game consisting of a plurality of games (for example, cycles 1 to 4 in Figure 100, normal game in Figure 127, first set game in Figure 131, final set game) game control means capable of executing control (for example , a main control unit 300),
The state setting means, through the execution of the set game with the execution of a predetermined number of times as an upper limit, specific state (for example, AT judge state of FIG. 99 (a), advantageous game A of FIG. 127, specific state of FIG. 131) is a means by which the
The game control means is a means capable of shortening the required number of games of the set game when a certain condition is established during the set game (for example, FIG. 127(b), (c), FIG. 131(b ) (c)),
The state setting means sets a first advantageous state (for example, a non-item specialized state (item specialized state flag is off), a low rate of transition to advantageous game B in FIG. 127, a low transition rate in FIG. 131 first advantageous state) and second advantageous state (for example, item specialized state (item specialized state flag on), advantageous game B transition rate high in FIG. 127, second advantageous state in FIG. 131) Means capable of setting any one of a plurality of advantageous states,
The second advantageous state is more advantageous than the first advantageous state (for example, the probability of shifting to a state in which profits can be obtained is high),
"When the set game is executed the predetermined number of times, and the game in which the certain condition is established in any of the set games of the predetermined number of times is in the second advantageous state (hereinafter , referred to as "second case"), a certain number of games required from the start of the first set game out of the predetermined number of set games to the start of the specific state (hereinafter referred to as "second game number" (For example, the second number of games in FIG. 125(c), the period from the start of the normal game to the start of the advantageous game A in FIG. 127(c), the second number of games in FIG. 131(c)). Also, "When the set game is executed the predetermined number of times and the game in which the certain condition is established in any of the set games of the predetermined number of times is in the first advantageous state (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), a certain number of games required from the start of the first set game out of the predetermined number of set games to the start of the specific state (hereinafter referred to as "first game (For example, the first number of games in FIG. 125(b), the period from the start of the normal game to the start of the advantageous game A in FIG. 127(b), the first number of games in FIG. 131(b)). ' is 'in a certain case where the set game is executed the predetermined number of times without the certain condition being satisfied, the start of the specific state from the start of the first set game out of the set games of the predetermined number of times A certain number of games required until (hereinafter referred to as "reference game number" (for example, the reference game number in FIG. 125(a), the period from the start of the normal game to the start of the advantageous game A in FIG. 127(a), the a) reference number of games).)” (for example, Fig. 125, Figs.
The second number of games is more likely than the first number of games to be greater than the reference number of games (for example, FIG. 125, FIGS. 127(a) to (c), and FIG. 131),
It is a game machine characterized by
It should be noted that FIG. 131 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 4-1 of the present application. In addition, the description of "particular state breakthrough rate ~%" in Figs. 131(b) and (c) indicates the probability of shifting to the advantageous gaming state following the specific state. In the fourth embodiment, the probability of success (AT1 state transition) in the AT judge state is 90% when the icon specialized state transition reservation flag is ON, and 50% when it is OFF. do. Also, instead of the icon-specific state transition reservation flag as in the fourth embodiment, for example, when a configuration is adopted in which the probability of success in the AT judge state is also set at the time of determining the production scenario, this success probability This corresponds to the above example. In this case, the success probability may be added until the transition to the AT judge state, or may be reset to a higher probability.

Some conventional amusement machines have a game property that increases the profit of a game state (AT, etc.) that is advantageous to the player and lengthens the normal game state before shifting to the advantageous game state. Such a game machine is configured to shift from a normal game state to an advantageous game state when a predetermined condition is established (for example, a predetermined ceiling condition is reached). In such a game machine, if a predetermined condition is likely to be satisfied when, for example, a rare combination is drawn in a normal game state, there arises a problem that the gambling nature becomes too high. In addition, since the period until the so-called ceiling is reached is shortened, the profits of advantageous game states (AT, etc.) have to be reduced. On the other hand, however, there remains the problem that the normal game state cannot be enjoyed unless there is a change in the period until reaching the so-called ceiling when a rare combination is drawn in the normal game state.

According to Invention 4-1 of the present application, it is possible to provide a case in which the period until the so-called ceiling is reached is shortened by the establishment of a certain condition, thereby making it possible to entertain the period until a specific state is reached. By providing a case where the period until reaching the ceiling is lengthened, it is possible to suppress gambling as a whole. More specifically, in the case of a relatively disadvantageous situation, by making it easier to actually shorten the period until the ceiling is reached, it is possible to give a sense of satisfaction even in a disadvantageous situation, and to achieve a relatively advantageous situation. In the case of the state, even if the period until reaching the ceiling is actually longer, it is in an advantageous state, so it is possible to give a sense of satisfaction.

It should be noted that the "specific state" according to the present invention, as long as it moves through the execution of the set game with the execution of a predetermined number of times as an upper limit, in addition to the AT judge state of the fourth embodiment, for example, the precursor state, It may be in the CZ, AT state, or the like.

In addition, the "second advantageous state" is a state in which the game in the specific state can be advanced more advantageously than the "first advantageous state", a state in which it is promised to be advanced, and a state in which the game can be advanced. It is acceptable if it is a state in which something else is promised for becoming a state, a point specialization for becoming advantageous is decided, and a state in which it is easy to shift to an advantageous state. That is, the "first advantageous state" and "second advantageous state" are not limited to those in which there is a difference in the advantages and disadvantages in this specific state, and the specific state A difference may be provided in the probability of becoming in some advantageous state thereafter.

In addition, the "set game" is, for example, a unit of a plurality of games in which the flow is determined, and if this unit is configured to be repeatedly executable within the upper limit number of times, this unit is regarded as a set game. , This set game may be shortened. Regarding shortening, part of the set game is subject to shortening, for example, a part of the set game (for example, 10 games) is shortened depending on the establishment of a certain condition with respect to the period of 30 games during the set game. It should be In addition, if there is a period during which points are renewed for shifting to a specific state and a period during which points are not renewed within one unit, the latter period can be appropriately added or deleted as a game before shifting to a specific state. Since it is possible (it is not a game that requires reaching the ceiling), as a set game, only the period in which the value for shifting to a specific state such as the former is updated may be targeted.

In addition, the ``certain condition'' may be established by a lottery other than the internal lottery for the role, may be established along with the progress of the game, or may be established by a lottery when an internal lottery is won for a certain role. and any conditions can be adopted. Further, the configuration is not limited to shortening the set game in the same game as the game in which a certain condition is established, and the configuration may be such that the shortening is performed in a later game. Also, in this case, the state of the game in which a certain condition is satisfied may be different from the state of the game to be shortened.

Further, regarding the above invention, the first effect (for example, the effect in the addition (short) of FIG. 125 (b), the first effect of FIG. 131 (b)) and the second effect (for example, the ) addition (long) effect, the second effect of FIG. In addition, in the first case, the game control means executes control to shorten the set game, and the effect means is configured to be able to execute the first effect (for example, FIG. 125(b)) , FIG. 131 (b)), in the second case, the game control means executes control to shorten the set game, and the effect means is configured to be able to execute the second effect (for example , FIG. 125(c), FIG. 131(c)), the second effect requires more games to be executed than the first effect (for example, FIG. 125(b), (c), FIG. 131(b)(c)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to guess whether it is the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state depending on the performance execution period.

Further, in the above invention, the effect means is means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects as the second effect, and the type of the second effect to be executed is determined in relation to at least a set value. (for example, an effect including the suggestive display in FIG. 102(c), FIG. 129(c)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by making the player guess the set value.

Further, with respect to the above invention, the state setting means terminates the setting of the specific state and sets an advantageous game state (for example, AT1 state in FIG. 126, advantageous game B in FIG. 127, FIG. 131, FIG. 132 advantageous gaming states), and the state setting means can set a third advantageous state (for example, AT1 type " High" setting probability 20%, advantage after advantageous game B in FIG. 127 (d): low, third advantageous state in FIG. AT1 type "high" setting probability 80%, advantage after advantageous game B in FIG. 127 (e): high, fourth advantageous state in FIG. The state is a means that can be set so as to overlap with the state of the degree of advantage related to the specific state, and the fourth advantageous state is more advantageous than the third advantageous state (for example, more high probability of transition to a state in which profits can be obtained), "the set game is executed the predetermined number of times, and the game in which the certain condition is established in any of the set games of the predetermined number of times is the game A certain number of games (for example, , which is the same as the first number of games in FIG. 126(a), and the third number of games in FIGS. The first number of games in a) is smaller than the reference number of games in FIG. 125(a), FIG. 127(a)(d), FIG. and in a certain case where the game in which the certain condition is established in any of the set games of the predetermined number of set games is the first advantageous state and the fourth advantageous state, the predetermined A certain number of games required from the start of the first set game out of the number of set games to the start of the specific state (for example, the same as the first number of games in FIG. 126(b), FIG. The fourth number of games in 132(c)) is likely to be less than the reference number of games (for example, the first number of games in FIG. 126(b) is less than the reference number of games in FIG. 125(a), 127 (a) (e), and FIGS. 132 (a) (c)). FIG. 132 is a diagram showing an outline of the limited invention of Invention 4-1 of the present application.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress discomfort caused by changing the period until reaching the ceiling in an advantageous state in which the player may not realize that the game is advantageous.

Further, the above invention may be characterized in that the second advantageous state is more likely to be set earlier than the fourth advantageous state.

With such a configuration, it can be estimated at an early stage whether or not the vehicle is in the second advantageous state.

Further, with respect to the above invention, the fourth advantageous state is an advantageous state in which the initial profit amount related to operation navigation in the advantageous gaming state is more advantageous than the third advantageous state. may be configured.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect to be more advantageous when shifting to the advantageous game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the above invention, the notification suggesting that the fourth advantageous state is more likely to be executed than the notification suggesting that the second advantageous state is obtained. may be configured. With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent the second advantageous state from being easily guessed, thereby making it difficult for the skilled player to lose interest in the game.

Further, with respect to the above invention, the "advantage state regarding the specific state" is "advantage state regarding the transition rate from the specific state to the advantageous gaming state". may be configured to

With such a configuration, even if the period until reaching the ceiling becomes long, it is possible to easily shift to an advantageous game state, thereby making it difficult for the interest in the game to decline.

Further, the above invention may be characterized in that the suggestion regarding the second advantageous state can be executed at least before the end of the specific state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player grasp the second advantageous state and improve the interest of the game.

As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "present invention 4-2") has a plurality of types of identification that can be individually identified. A variable display section (for example, the pattern display window 113 shown in FIG. 1) is provided to allow information to be displayed in a variable manner, and a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game media. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the display result to the variable display unit, and a prize can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display unit. A state setting that can execute control related to the setting of multiple types of states (for example, FIG. 99(a), normal game in FIG. 127, advantageous game A, advantageous game B, specific state in FIG. 131, advantageous game state) means (e.g., main control unit 300), counting means (e.g., main control unit 300), and production control means (e.g., first sub-control unit 400) capable of executing control related to production, and the state The setting means is a means capable of setting a specific state (for example, AT judge state in FIG. 99(a), advantageous game A in FIG. 127, specific state in FIG. 131), and the state setting means relates to the specific state. As the state of the player's advantage, the first advantageous state (for example, non-item specialized state (item specialized state flag off), low transition rate to advantageous game B in FIG. 127, first advantageous state in FIG. 133) and second Two advantageous states (for example, item specialization state (item specialization state flag on), advantageous game B transition rate high in FIG. 127, second advantageous state in FIG. 133) Any one of a plurality of advantageous states including means for setting a state, wherein the second advantageous state is more advantageous than the first advantageous state (for example, the probability of transition to a state where profit can be obtained is high), and the effect control The means is a means capable of setting a specific effect state corresponding to the specific state (for example, the specific effect of FIG. 133), and the counting means is means for controlling a counter related to the specific effect state (for example, , variations shown in FIGS. 130 (c) and (d), FIG. 133), the effect control means is means capable of executing display control of the counter display corresponding to the value of the counter (for example, FIG. 130 (c )(d), FIG. 133), the effect control means changes the value indicated by the counter display as the game progresses (for example, the modification shown in FIGS. 130(c) and 130(d)). ) is a viable means, and the production The control means is means capable of setting the specific effect state in relation to the fact that the value indicated by the counter display reaches a certain value (for example, the modifications shown in FIGS. 130(c) and (d), the 133), and is configured such that the amount of change in the value indicated by the counter display is greater when a certain condition is met than when it is not met (for example, in FIGS. 130(c) and 130(d)). Fig. 133), "When the game in which the certain condition is established until the counter display reaches the certain value is in the second advantageous state (hereinafter referred to as "the second case. ), a certain number of games required from the start of the executable state of the change display to the start of the specific state (hereinafter referred to as "second number of games" (for example, the second number of games in FIG. 133(c) ).)" rather than ``a case in which the game in which the certain condition was satisfied before the counter display reached the certain value was in the first advantageous state (hereinafter referred to as ``first case ), a certain number of games required from the start of the executable state of the change display to the start of the specific state (hereinafter referred to as the "first number of games" (for example, the first The number of games of ).)” is better for “when the counter display reaches the certain value without the certain condition being satisfied, the number of times from the start of the executable state of the change display to the specific state A certain number of games (hereinafter referred to as the "reference number of games" (for example, the reference number of games in FIG. 133(a)) required until the start of the game) tends to be less (for example, FIG. 133), The gaming machine is characterized in that the second number of games tends to be larger than the reference number of games (for example, FIG. 133).

It should be noted that FIG. 133 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 4-2 of the present application. In addition, the description of "particular state breakthrough rate ∼%" in Figs. 133(b) and (c) indicates the probability of shifting to the advantageous gaming state following the particular state. In the fourth embodiment, the probability of success (AT1 state transition) in the AT judge state is 90% when the icon specialized state transition reservation flag is ON, and 50% when it is OFF. do. Also, instead of the icon-specific state transition reservation flag as in the fourth embodiment, for example, when a configuration is adopted in which the probability of success in the AT judge state is also set at the time of determining the production scenario, this success probability This corresponds to the above example. In this case, the success probability may be added until the transition to the AT judge state, or may be reset to a higher probability.

Some conventional amusement machines have a game property that increases the profit of a game state (AT, etc.) that is advantageous to the player and lengthens the normal game state before shifting to the advantageous game state. Such a game machine is configured to shift from a normal game state to an advantageous game state when a predetermined condition is established (for example, a predetermined ceiling condition is reached). In such a game machine, if a predetermined condition is likely to be satisfied when, for example, a rare combination is drawn in a normal game state, there arises a problem that the gambling nature becomes too high. In addition, since the period until the so-called ceiling is reached is shortened, the profits of advantageous game states (AT, etc.) have to be reduced. On the other hand, however, there remains the problem that the normal game state cannot be enjoyed unless there is a change in the period until reaching the so-called ceiling when a rare combination is drawn in the normal game state.

According to Invention 4-2 of the present application, it is possible to provide a case in which the period until reaching the ceiling is shortened by the establishment of a certain condition, thereby making it possible to entertain the period until a specific state is reached. By providing a case where the period until reaching the ceiling is lengthened, it is possible to suppress gambling. More specifically, in the case of a relatively disadvantageous situation, by making it easier to actually shorten the period until the ceiling is reached, it is possible to give a sense of satisfaction even in a disadvantageous situation, and to achieve a relatively advantageous situation. In the case of the state, even if the period until reaching the ceiling is actually longer, it is in an advantageous state, so it is possible to give a sense of satisfaction.

It should be noted that the "specific state" according to the present invention, as long as it moves through the execution of the set game with the execution of a predetermined number of times as an upper limit, in addition to the AT judge state of the fourth embodiment, for example, the precursor state, It may be in the CZ, AT state, or the like.

In addition, the "second advantageous state" is a state in which the game in the specific state can be advanced more advantageously than the "first advantageous state", a state in which it is promised to be advanced, and a state in which the game can be advanced. It is acceptable if it is a state in which something else is promised for becoming a state, a point specialization for becoming advantageous is decided, and a state in which it is easy to shift to an advantageous state. That is, the "first advantageous state" and "second advantageous state" are not limited to those in which there is a difference in the advantages and disadvantages in this specific state, and the specific state A difference may be provided in the probability of becoming in some advantageous state thereafter.

As for the "counter display", it is acceptable as long as it changes from the initial value to the target value. good. Also, for example, in the fourth embodiment, the effect state counter is repeatedly updated from the initial value of 30 to the target value of 0 in the NM2 state. may be executed. The initial value, the target value, and the update amount for one game may be fixed values or variable values.

In addition, the ``certain condition'' may be established by a lottery other than the internal lottery for the role, may be established along with the progress of the game, or may be established by a lottery when an internal lottery is won for a certain role. and any conditions can be adopted. Further, when the amount of change in the counter display is increased due to the establishment of a certain condition, it may be the same game as the game in which the same condition is established, or it may be a later game. In this case, the state of the game in which a certain condition is satisfied may be different from the state of the game in which the amount of change is increased.

Further, with respect to the above invention, the effect control means provides a first effect (for example, a effect in addition (short) in FIG. 125(b), a first effect in FIG. 133(b)) and a second effect ( For example, it is a means that can control any one of a plurality of types of effects including the effect in the addition (long) of FIG. 125 (c) and the second effect of FIG. In the case, the effect control means changes the value indicated by the counter display, and is configured to be able to execute the first effect (for example, FIG. 133 (b)), and in the second case, the The effect control means changes the value indicated by the counter display, and is configured to be able to execute the second effect (for example, FIG. 133 (c)), and the second effect is the first effect. It may be configured to be characterized by the fact that the number of games required for execution is larger than that for performance (for example, FIGS. 133(b) and (c)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to guess whether it is the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state depending on the performance execution period.

Further, in the above invention, the effect control means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects as the second effect, and the type of the second effect to be executed is at least related to the set value. determined (for example, an effect including the suggestive display in FIG. 102(c), FIG. 129(c)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by making the player guess the set value.

Further, with respect to the above invention, the state setting means terminates the setting of the specific state and sets an advantageous game state advantageous to the player (for example, AT1 state in FIG. 126, advantageous game B in FIG. 127, advantageous game B in FIG. 133). The state setting means can set a third advantageous state (for example, AT1 type "high" in FIG. "Set probability 20%, advantage after advantageous game B in FIG. 127(d): low, third advantageous state in FIG. 132(a)) and fourth advantageous state (for example, AT1 in FIG. 126(b) Type "high" setting probability 80%, advantage after advantageous game B in FIG. is a means that can be set overlappingly with the state of the degree of advantage related to the specific state,

The fourth advantageous state is more advantageous than the third advantageous state (for example, there is a higher probability of transitioning to a state in which more profit can be obtained), and "the counter display indicates the certain value In a certain case where the game in which the certain condition is established before reaching the is the first advantageous state and the third advantageous state, from the start of the change display executable state to the start of the specific state A certain number of games (for example, the same as the first number of games in FIG. 126(a), the third number of games in FIGS. 127(d) and 132(b))" is tend to decrease (for example, the first number of games in FIG. 126(a) is smaller than the reference number of games in FIG. 125(a), FIGS. 127(a)(d), FIGS. 132(a)(b)), "In a certain case where the game in which the certain condition is established before the counter display reaches the certain value is the first advantageous state and the fourth advantageous state, the change display can be executed. A certain number of games required from the start of the state to the start of the specific state (for example, the same as the first number of games in FIG. 126(b), the fourth number of games in FIGS. 127(e) and 132(c) )” is likely to be less than the reference number of games (for example, the first number of games in FIG. 126(b) is less than the reference number of games in FIG. 125(a), FIGS. 132(a)(c)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress discomfort caused by changing the period until reaching the ceiling in an advantageous state in which the player may not realize that the game is advantageous.

Further, the above invention may be characterized in that the second advantageous state is more likely to be set earlier than the fourth advantageous state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to estimate at an early stage whether or not the vehicle is in the second advantageous state.

Further, with respect to the above invention, the fourth advantageous state is an advantageous state in which the initial profit amount related to operation navigation in the advantageous gaming state is more advantageous than the third advantageous state. may be configured.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect to be more advantageous when shifting to the advantageous game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the above invention, the notification suggesting that the fourth advantageous state is more likely to be executed than the notification suggesting that the second advantageous state is obtained. may be configured.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent the second advantageous state from being easily guessed, thereby making it difficult for the skilled player to lose interest in the game.

Further, with respect to the above invention, the "advantage state regarding the specific state" is "advantage state regarding the transition rate from the specific state to the advantageous gaming state". may be configured to

With such a configuration, even if the period until reaching the ceiling becomes long, it is possible to easily shift to an advantageous game state, thereby making it difficult for the interest in the game to decline.

Further, the above invention may be characterized in that the suggestion regarding the second advantageous state can be executed at least before the end of the specific state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player grasp the second advantageous state and improve the interest of the game.

[Embodiment 5]
A slot machine according to Embodiment 5 of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, in principle, only the configuration different from the game machines according to the first to fourth embodiments will be described in order to avoid redundant description. 134 to 148 are basically used only for the explanation of the fifth embodiment, and even if overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the The code shown at 148 has priority.

<Front door and open/close sensor>
First, the front door 102 described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2 and the open/close sensor for detecting the open/close state of the front door 102 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276 and is a door body that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 . That is, the front door 102 is provided on the front surface of the slot machine (gaming machine) 100 and is a door that can be opened and closed. In this example, the front door 102 locked in the closed state can be opened by inserting a key owned by an administrator (for example, an amusement store clerk, etc.) into the door key hole 140 . Therefore, the administrator can unlock the front door 102 (change the closed state to the open state), but a person other than the administrator (for example, a player) cannot unlock the front door 102. .

An optical sensor (open/close sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting part and a light receiving part is provided on the right side plate 260 of the main body 101. It is configured so that a light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the door 102 can pass through.

The main control unit 300 monitors the states of various sensors 318 including this open/close sensor at each interrupt time. When the front door 102 is in a closed state and the light shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 is blocked, the open/close sensor outputs a signal ( For example, a low level signal) is output toward the main control unit 300 .

On the other hand, when the front door 102 is in the open state and the light shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where it does not block the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101, the open/close sensor indicates that it is in the open detection state. A signal (for example, a high level signal) is output toward the main control unit 300 .

That is, the open/close sensor is a detecting means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the front door (door body) 102. When the front door 102 is closed, the detection state becomes the closed detection state, and the front door 102 is open. , the detection state becomes the open detection state.

The "detection means" according to the present invention is not limited to an optical sensor, and may be a magnetic sensor, a proximity switch, a micro switch, a Hall element, or the like. Further, it is not limited to switching between the open detection state and the closed detection state as the door body is opened and closed. Conversely, even when the door is in the closed state, the detection state may be the open detection state.

Here, the opening/closing sensor according to the present example is configured so that the detection state changes to the closed detection state even when the front door (door body) 102 is in the open state by performing a predetermined operation. Specifically, when the front door 102 is in the open state, a light shielding piece of a certain length is inserted between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 and fixed with tape or the like, and the main body is opened. By shielding the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor 101, even if the front door 102 is open, the detection state of the open/close sensor can be forced to the closed detection state.

The "predetermined operation" according to the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a DIP switch may be provided to set the open/close sensor to the closed detection state, and the DIP switch may be operated as the predetermined operation. Also, when the detection means is composed of a magnetic sensor, the detection state of the open/close sensor may be set to the closed detection state by bringing the magnet close.

As described with reference to FIG. 11, the main control unit 300 reads the signal states of various sensors 318 in the device monitoring process (step S2008), and executes error processing when an error is detected. In this example, in this device monitoring process, when the detection state of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 becomes an open detection state, a front door open error indicating that the front door 102 is in an open state is detected. are doing.

When the main controller 300 detects a front door open error, the main controller 300 transmits a command to notify the occurrence of the front door open error to the second sub controller 500 via the first sub controller 400 . In the image control process, the second sub-control unit 500 executes a process of reading out from the ROM 506 effect data for image control related to the front door open error based on the received command. As a result, the display area of the effect image display device 157 displays a front door open error display (for example, a display including character information such as "the door is open" shown in FIG. 139 and the like). That is, the effect image display device (display means) 157 can display a front door open error display (a certain error display) when the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state.

<Volume setting and light intensity setting>
Next, volume setting and light intensity setting will be described with reference to FIG.

The slot machine 100 includes sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3) and light output means (for example, various lamps 420 shown in FIG. 3) as informing means capable of informing game information and various errors. ), display means (for example, effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), movable means (for example, shutter 163 and reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1), and the like.

The slot machine 100 also includes a first operating means (for example, an administrator switch MSW shown in FIG. 147) and a second operating means (for example, an administrator switch MSW shown in FIG. 147) used to change the volume setting of the sound output means and the light intensity setting of the light output means. For example, a player switch PSW shown in FIG. 147 is provided. That is, the gaming machine (slot machine) according to the present invention comprises a plurality of types of operating means including first operating means and second operating means, which are used to change certain settings related to notification means.

Here, the volume setting for the sound output means includes, for example, the volume (sound pressure), sound quality, number of channels, frequency, etc. of the sound output from the sound output means. The amount of light output from the means (duty ratio), color, luminance, time interval between lighting and extinguishing, etc. are included.

<Volume setting and light intensity setting/first operation method>
The "first operating means" according to the present invention is a means provided at a position that can be operated only when the front door (door body) 102 is in the open state of the closed state and the open state. , back knobs (rotary switches), slide switches, and the like used by administrators (game store clerks, etc.). In this example, a rotary switch is used as the first operating means, and the administrator setting value (first type of setting value) can be changed in 16 steps (scale from 0 to F). That is, the setting value of the volume setting (certain setting) related to the sound output means includes an administrator setting value (first kind of setting value) that can be changed by operating the administrator switch MSW (first operating means). included.

When the main control unit 300 accepts the operation of the administrator switch MSW, it transmits a command including the administrator setting value to the first sub-control unit 400. Upon receiving the command, the first sub-control unit 400 changes the administrator setting value. Depending on the value, the volume setting for the sound output means and the light amount setting for the light output means are performed.

In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a command including the administrator setting value to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control unit 500 that receives the command executes the received administrator setting value in the image control process. Based on the setting value, a process of reading effect data from the ROM 506 for displaying the administrator setting value (first type setting value display) indicating the administrator setting value (first type setting value) is executed. . As a result, the display area of the effect image display device 157 displays the administrator setting value display (for example, the administrator setting value display MD shown in FIG. 139(a)(4)). That is, the effect image display device (display means) 157 can display a display indicating the first type of set value (first type of set value display).

<Volume setting and light intensity setting/Second operating means>
The "second operation means" according to the present invention is a means provided at a position that can be operated even when the front door (door body) 102 is in a closed state. A cross key having a button and an enter button, a production button, a touch panel, etc. correspond to this. In this example, the left and right buttons of the cross key are used as the second operation means, and it is possible to change the player setting value (second type setting value) in 16 steps (scale 0 to 15). . That is, the setting value of the volume setting (certain setting) related to the sound output means includes the player setting value (second type of setting value) that can be changed by operating the player switch PSW (second operating means). included.

When receiving the operation of the player switch PSW, the main control unit 300 transmits a command including the player setting value to the first sub-control unit 400. Upon receiving the command, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the player setting. Depending on the value, the volume setting for the sound output means and the light amount setting for the light output means are performed.

In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a command including the player setting value to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control unit 500 that has received the command, in the image control process, Based on the setting value, a process of reading effect data from the ROM 506 for displaying the player setting value (second type setting value display) indicating the player setting value (second type setting value) is executed. . As a result, the player set value display (for example, the player set value display PD shown in FIG. 139(a)(2)) is displayed in the display area of the effect image display device 157 . That is, the effect image display device (display means) 157 can display a display indicating the second type of setting value (second type of setting value display).

Note that the first operating means and the second operating means according to this example are means used for changing both the volume setting and the light intensity setting, but the first operating means and the second operating means according to the present invention The operation means is not limited to this, and may be a means used for changing either one of the volume setting and the light intensity setting, or for settings other than the volume setting and the light intensity setting (for example, settings related to the display means). It may be the means used.

<Volume setting and light intensity setting/various tables>
FIG. 134(a) is a volume setting value table showing an example of volume setting values. FIG. 134(b) is a usage table showing an example of the usage of the sound output means and the light output means, and FIG. 134(c) shows the relationship between the set value of the light amount setting and the duty ratio (brightness). It is a light amount setting value table.

The method of measuring the volume specified in the volume setting value table is not particularly limited. For example, the sound volume is measured by attaching the sensor to a position near the head of a tall player (a position approximately 700 mm above the seat).

The slot machine 100 changes the administrator setting value (first type setting value) by operating the manager switch MSW, or changes the player setting value (second type setting value) by operating the player switch PSW. By changing , the volume setting for the sound output means (in this example, the setting for the volume (sound pressure) of the sound output from the sound output means) and the light intensity setting for the light output means (in this example, from the light output means It is possible to set the amount of light to be output (duty ratio).

The first sub-control unit 400 stores various tables shown in FIG. Volume setting and light intensity setting are performed based on

In this example, as shown in the application table of FIG. 134(b), among the administrator setting values (0 to F), "5" to "F" are used for normal business (normal mode), and "4 ' is used for power saving mode A, '3' is used for power saving mode B, '1' and '2' are used for development and promotion, and '0' is used for application .

<Volume setting and light intensity setting / for normal business use (normal mode)>
When the administrator setting value is "F", the volume setting initial value is set to 8, and the sound pressure initial value is set to 93 dB. That is, when the volume setting screen (for example, the volume setting screen shown in FIG. 138(a)(1)) is displayed, the player setting value of volume is set to scale 8 (sound pressure 93 dB) as default. In the figure, the default value of the scale (sound pressure) for each setting is surrounded by a thick frame. In the setting "F", the sound pressure can be adjusted to each level of 85 dB to 100 dB at intervals of 1 dB corresponding to scales 0 to 15 of the player setting values.

Further, when the setting is "F", the light amount setting initial value is set to "bright (duty ratio 100%)" with the highest light amount. The amount of light can be adjusted by selecting and confirming any of the rectangular images (dark, medium, bright) on the light amount setting screen. (duty ratio 100%)”.

When the administrator setting value is "E", the volume setting initial value is set to 8, and the sound pressure initial value is set to 86 dB. That is, when the screen is shifted to the volume setting screen, the player's volume setting value is set to scale 8 (sound pressure 86 dB) as a default. In the setting "E", the sound pressure can be adjusted to each level of 78 dB to 93 dB at intervals of 1 dB corresponding to the player set value scales 0 to 15, respectively. In addition, the initial value for setting the amount of light is the same as when setting "F".

When the administrator setting value is "D", the volume setting initial value is set to 8, and the sound pressure initial value is set to 79 dB. That is, when the screen is shifted to the volume setting screen, the player's volume setting value is set to scale 8 (sound pressure 79 dB) as a default. In the setting "D", the sound pressure can be adjusted to each level of 71 dB to 86 dB at intervals of 1 dB corresponding to the scales 0 to 15 of the player setting values. In addition, the initial value for setting the amount of light is the same as when setting "F".

When the administrator setting value is "C", the volume setting initial value is set to 8, and the sound pressure initial value is set to 72 dB. That is, when the screen is shifted to the volume setting screen, the player's volume setting value is set to scale 8 (sound pressure 72 dB) as a default. In the setting "C", the sound pressure can be adjusted to each level of 64 dB to 79 dB at intervals of 1 dB corresponding to scales 0 to 15 of the player setting values. In addition, the initial value for setting the amount of light is the same as when setting "F".

When the administrator setting value is "B", the volume setting initial value is set to 8, and the sound pressure initial value is set to 65 dB. That is, when the screen is shifted to the volume setting screen, the player's volume setting value is set to scale 8 (sound pressure 65 dB) as a default. In the setting "B", the sound pressure can be adjusted to each level of 57 dB to 72 dB at intervals of 1 dB corresponding to each of the scales 0 to 15 of the player setting values. In addition, the initial value for setting the amount of light is the same as when setting "F".

When the administrator setting value is "A", the volume setting initial value is set to 8, and the sound pressure initial value is set to 58 dB. That is, when the screen is shifted to the volume setting screen, the player's volume setting value is set to scale 8 (sound pressure 58 dB) as a default. In the setting "A", the sound pressure can be adjusted to each level of 50 dB to 65 dB at intervals of 1 dB corresponding to each of the scales 0 to 15 of the player setting values.

Further, when the setting is "A", the light intensity setting initial value is set to "medium (duty ratio 70%)" which is lower in light intensity than "bright (duty ratio 100%)". The amount of light can be adjusted by selecting and confirming any of the rectangular images (dark, medium, bright) on the light amount setting screen. (Duty ratio 70%)”.

When the administrator setting value is "9", the volume setting initial value is set to 8, and the sound pressure initial value is set to 51 dB. That is, when the screen is shifted to the volume setting screen, the player's volume setting value is set to scale 8 (sound pressure 51 dB) as a default. At the setting "9", the sound pressure can be adjusted to each level of 43 dB to 58 dB at intervals of 1 dB corresponding to the scales 0 to 15 of the player setting values. In addition, the initial value for setting the amount of light is the same as in setting "A".

When the administrator setting value is "8", the volume setting initial value is set to 8, and the sound pressure initial value is set to 44 dB. That is, when the screen transitions to the volume setting screen, the player's volume setting value is set to scale 8 (sound pressure 44 dB) as a default. At the setting "8", the sound pressure can be adjusted to each level of 36 dB to 51 dB at intervals of 1 dB corresponding to scales 0 to 15 of the player setting values. In addition, the initial value for setting the amount of light is the same as in setting "A".

When the administrator setting value is "7", the volume setting initial value is set to 8, and the sound pressure initial value is set to 37 dB. That is, when the screen is shifted to the volume setting screen, the player's volume setting value is set to scale 8 (sound pressure 37 dB) as a default. In the setting "7", the sound pressure can be adjusted to each level of 29 dB to 44 dB at intervals of 1 dB corresponding to the player set value scales 0 to 15, respectively.

Further, when the setting is "7", the light intensity setting initial value is set to "dark (duty ratio 40%)" which is lower in light intensity than "medium (duty ratio 70%)". The amount of light can be adjusted by selecting and confirming any of the rectangular images (dark, medium, bright) on the light amount setting screen. (40% duty ratio)”.

When the administrator setting value is "6", the volume setting initial value is set to 8, and the sound pressure initial value is set to 30 dB. That is, when the screen transitions to the volume setting screen, the player's volume setting value is set to scale 8 (sound pressure 30 dB) as a default. At the setting "6", the sound pressure can be adjusted to each level of 22 dB to 37 dB at intervals of 1 dB corresponding to each of the scales 0 to 15 of the player setting values. Also, the initial value of the light amount setting is the same as when the setting is "7".

When the administrator setting value is "5", the volume setting initial value is set to 8, and the sound pressure initial value is set to 23 dB. That is, when the screen transitions to the volume setting screen, the player's volume setting value is set to scale 8 (sound pressure 23 dB) as a default. At the setting "5", the sound pressure can be adjusted to each level of 15 dB to 30 dB at intervals of 1 dB corresponding to the player set value scales 0 to 15, respectively. Also, the initial value of the light amount setting is the same as when the setting is "7".

As described above, if the administrator setting value is in the range of "5" to "F" for normal business, the lower the setting (the closer to "5"), the default volume and the default Lowers the set brightness.

In this example, in normal business use (normal mode), the player setting value of volume is set to scale 8 as default, but either scale 0 to 7 or 9 to 15 is set as default. good too. In addition, when the screen transitions to the volume setting screen, an example is shown in which the player set value for volume is set to the default scale (8 in this example). If the administrator setting value is changed from D to F while the setting screen is not displayed, immediately after the transition to the volume setting screen, the administrator setting value is F and the player setting value is the previous value. When the sound pressure corresponding to 10 (95 dB in this example) is set and a predetermined time has passed, the administrator setting value is F and the player setting value corresponds to the default scale (8 in this example). It may be configured to set the sound pressure (93 dB in this example).

<Volume setting and light intensity setting/power saving>
When the administrator setting value is "4", the operation mode is set to the power saving mode A, the volume setting by the player is disabled, and the sound pressure is fixed at 60 dB. Further, when the administrator setting value is "4", the player cannot set the light amount, and the light amount setting initial value is the minimum brightness that can be set when the administrator setting value is "5" to "F". (That is, the minimum luminance that can be set by the player) is fixed to "extremely dark (duty ratio 10%)" which is lower than "dark (duty ratio 40%)".

When the administrator setting value is "3", the operation mode is set to power saving mode B, and the initial sound pressure value is lower than the sound pressure 60 dB when the administrator setting value is "4". Set to 0 dB (muted). Also, when the administrator setting value is "3", the player cannot set the sound volume, and the sound pressure is fixed at 0 dB. Also, when the administrator setting value is "4", the player cannot set the light amount. %)” is fixed to “OFF (duty ratio 0%)”.

As described above, in the power saving modes A and B, the player cannot set the volume and the amount of light. In this example, the power saving modes A and B are set by operating the manager switch PSW, but the power saving mode is set in accordance with predetermined operations such as setting confirmation and setting change of the slot machine 100 by the game clerk. Power modes A and B may be settable.

<Volume setting and light intensity setting/for development and sales promotion>
When the administrator setting value is "2" (for development and promotion), the volume setting initial value is set to 2, and the sound pressure initial value is set to 70 dB. That is, when the screen transitions to the volume setting screen, the player's volume setting value is set to scale 2 (70 dB) as a default. When the administrator setting value is "2", the sound pressure level that can be adjusted on the volume adjustment screen is different from any of the settings "5" to "F". Scales 1 to 15 of player setting values correspond to sound pressures of 64 dB, 70 dB, 74 dB, 77 dB, 80 dB, 83 dB, 86 dB, 87 dB, 88 dB, 89 d, 90 dB, 91 dB, 92 dB, 93 dB and 94 dB, respectively. Also, the initial light amount setting value is “bright (duty ratio 100%)”, which is the same as the settings “B” to “F”.

When the administrator setting is "1" (for development and promotion), the initial volume setting is set to 1 and the initial sound pressure is set to 64 dB. That is, when the screen is changed to the volume setting screen, the player's volume setting value is set to scale 1 (64 dB) as a default. It should be noted that the sound pressure corresponding to each of the scales 1 to 15 of the player setting value and the initial light intensity setting value are the same as when the administrator setting value is "2".

<Volume setting and light intensity setting / for application>
When the administrator setting value is "0" (for application), the volume setting initial value is set to 0, and the sound pressure initial value is set to 0 dB. When transitioning to the volume setting screen, the player's volume setting value is set to scale 0 (0 dB) as a default. It should be noted that the sound pressure corresponding to each of the scales 1 to 15 of the player setting value and the initial light intensity setting value are the same as when the administrator setting value is "2".

<Main processing of the first sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 135(a). FIG. 135(a) is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the first sub-controller.

When a reset signal is input from a reset circuit (not shown), the first sub-controller 400 is reset-started by a reset interrupt and executes processing according to a control program pre-stored in the ROM 406 . First, in step S4001, initialization is performed. In this initialization, initialization of input/output ports, initialization processing of various variables (including processing for initializing a variable CNT to 0, which will be described later), and the like are performed.

In step S4003, it is determined whether or not the variable CNT stored in the RAM 408 is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (33 in this example). Execute the process repeatedly. Here, the variable CNT is a variable that is incremented every 1ms in the 1ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later. Therefore, the process of determining whether or not the variable CNT is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (33 in this example) in step S4003 is performed after 33 ms has elapsed since the variable CNT was initialized to 0 in step S4001 or step S4005. It is synonymous with the process of determining whether or not. In step S4005, after initializing the variable CNT to 0, the process proceeds to step S4007. Note that the processing of step S4003 is not limited to this example, and for example, the main loop processing (steps S4005 to S4023) may be executed three times in 100 ms (30 times in one second).

In step S4007, liquid crystal reception driver processing is performed. In this liquid crystal reception driver processing, a command received from a liquid crystal control unit (not shown) (a control unit that controls the effect image display device 157) is processed. In step S4009, effect control driver processing is performed. In this effect control receiving driver process, the command received from the second sub-control unit 500 is processed.

In step S4011, a production control main loop process is performed. In this effect control main loop processing, an unprocessed command received by a command reception interrupt process, which will be described later, is acquired from a command storage area provided in the RAM 408, a process corresponding to the unprocessed command is performed, and a predetermined effect execution timing is obtained. It controls lamps and sounds based on the data.

In step S4013, lamp control main loop processing is performed. In this lamp control main loop process, control related to the lamp is performed based on the lamp data set in the effect control main loop process of step S4011. In step S4015, sound control main loop processing is performed. In this sound control main loop process, control related to sound (sound) is performed based on the sound data set in the effect control main loop process of step S4011.

In step S4017, lamp driver processing is performed. In this lamp driver process, light output from various lamps 420 is controlled based on the lamp control information set in the lamp control main loop process of step S4013. In step S40190, sound driver processing is performed. In this sound driver processing, sounds output from the speakers 272 and 277 via the sound source IC 418 are controlled based on the sound control information set in the sound control main loop processing of step S4015.

In step S4021, liquid crystal communication driver processing is performed. In this liquid crystal communication driver processing, processing for transmitting a command to a liquid crystal control unit (not shown) and the like are performed. In step S4023, effect control unit communication driver processing is performed. In this effect control communication driver process, after performing a process of transmitting a command to the second sub-control unit 500, etc., the process proceeds to step S4003.

The first sub-control unit 400 repeats the processing of steps S4003 to S4023 except for interruption due to command reception interrupt processing, 1 ms timer interrupt processing, 10 ms timer interrupt processing, or DMA interrupt processing, which will be described later. .

<Command reception interrupt processing>
Next, command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 135(b). FIG. 135(b) is a flowchart showing the flow of command reception interrupt processing.

This command reception interrupt process is a process that is triggered by a command reception interrupt that occurs when the first sub control unit 400 receives a command from the main control unit 300 . In step S4101, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command, and then the process ends.

<1 ms timer interrupt processing>
Next, the 1 ms timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 135(c). FIG. 135(c) is a flow chart showing the flow of 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

The first sub-control unit 400 has a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt once in a predetermined time (1 ms in this example). do. In step S4201, the process ends after the process of adding 1 to the variable CNT provided in the RAM 406 is performed.

<10 ms timer interrupt processing>
Next, the 10ms timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 135(d). FIG. 135(d) is a flow chart showing the flow of the 10 ms timer interrupt processing.

The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt once in a predetermined time (10 ms in this example). do. In step S4301, the first sensor reading process is performed, and in the next step S4303, the second sensor reading process is performed, and then the process ends. Here, in the first sensor reading process, for example, a detection signal of the shutter sensor 428 is acquired via the sensor circuit 426 (see FIG. 3), and a process of storing the acquired detection signal in the RAM 408 is performed. Also, in the second sensor reading process, a process of acquiring detection signals from other switches and storing the acquired detection signals in the RAM 408 is performed.

<DMA interrupt processing>
Next, DMA interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 135(e). FIG. 135(e) is a flow chart showing the flow of DMA interrupt processing.

The first sub-controller 400 has a hardware timer that generates a DMA interrupt that indicates the end of DMA transfer, and uses this DMA interrupt as a trigger to execute DMA interrupt processing. In step S4401, the process ends after performing various processes associated with the end of the DMA transfer. <Volume setting screen display processing>

Next, the volume setting screen display process executed in the effect control main loop process (step S4011) in the first sub-control unit main process will be described with reference to FIG. 137(a). FIG. 137(a) is a flow chart showing the flow of the volume setting screen display process.

In step S4501, it is determined whether or not the volume setting screen display start condition is satisfied. In step S4503, after starting to display the volume setting screen, the process proceeds to step S4505. Here, the volume setting screen display start condition is, for example, when a specific operation means is operated during demonstration display, or when a specific operation means is operated other than during a jackpot game.

In step S4505, it is determined whether or not the condition for ending display of the volume setting screen is satisfied. In step S4507, the process ends after the volume setting screen is displayed. Here, the condition for ending display of the volume setting screen is, for example, when a specific operation means is operated.

<Sound control main loop processing>
Next, the sound control main loop processing (step S4015) in the main processing of the first sub-controller will be described with reference to FIG. 137(b). FIG. 137(b) is a flow chart showing the flow of sound control loop processing.

In step S4601, sound data update processing is performed. In this sound data update processing, control such as reproduction and stop of the sound included in the performance set in the performance control main loop processing, and processing such as fade-in, fade-out and panning are performed for the sound being reproduced. Also, in the next step S4603, volume switch processing is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this volume switch process, the volume is changed by the player switch PSW.

<Sound driver processing>
Next, the sound driver processing (step S4019) in the main processing of the first sub-controller will be described with reference to FIG. 137(c). FIG. 137(c) is a flowchart showing the flow of sound driver processing.

In step S4701, administrator setting value control processing is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this administrator setting value control processing, update processing of administrator setting values and the like are performed. In step S4703, other sound driver processing (initialization processing of sound source IC 418, diagnostic processing, error processing, etc.) is performed, and then the processing ends.

<Volume switch processing>
Next, volume switch processing (step S4603) in the above-described sound control main loop processing will be described with reference to FIG. 137(d). FIG. 136(d) is a flow chart showing the flow of volume switch processing.

In step S4801, volume value change processing is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this volume value change process, a volume change process and the like are performed by the administrator switch PSW. In step S1302, the process ends after performing other volume switch processes.

<Administrator setting value control processing>
Next, referring to FIG. 137(a), the administrator setting value control processing (step S4701) in the sound driver processing described above will be described. FIG. 137(a) is a flow chart showing the flow of the administrator set value control process.

In step S5001, the current port value stored in the RAM 408 is saved in the previous port value stored in the RAM 408. In step S5003, the signal output from the administrator switch PSW is read and set to the current port value. do.

In step S5005, the current port value and the previous port value are compared, and if the values are the same, the process proceeds to step S5007. finish. In step S5007, 1 is added to the variable F_CNT stored in the RAM 408, and in the next step S5009, it is determined whether or not the variable F_CNT is 15 or more. If the result of determination is 15 or more, the value currently stored in the port value is stored in the administrator setting value stored in the RAM 408 in step S5011, and the variable F_CNT is initialized to 0 in step S5013. to end the process.

<Volume value change processing>
Next, the volume value change processing (step S4801) in the volume switch processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. 137(b). FIG. 137(b) is a flow chart showing the flow of volume value change processing.

In step S4901, the detection signal of the administrator switch PSW is acquired, and the acquired detection signal is stored in the RAM 408 as the current administrator setting value. In step S4903, it is determined whether or not the current administrator setting value acquired in step S4901 and the previous administrator setting value stored in the RAM 408 match. to step S4905.

At step S4905, the above-described player setting value is obtained, and at step S4907, 1 is set to variable CH_CNT. In step S4909, the processes of steps S4911 to S4917 are repeated until the variable CH_CNT becomes 1 to 32.

In step S4911, it is determined whether or not there is a phrase being output to the channel (CH_CNT). In step S4913, the volume of the channel (CH_CNT) is calculated, and in the next step S4915, processing for setting the volume of the channel (CH_CNT) is performed, and then the flow advances to step S4917. In step S4917, 1 is added to CH_CNT, and then the process proceeds to step S4909.

In step S4919, the previous administrator setting value is updated by setting the current administrator setting value to the previous administrator setting value, and then the process ends.

<Conventional volume setting method>
Next, a conventional volume setting method will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 138 is a diagram showing an example of a conventional volume setting method in chronological order.

Here, a supplementary explanation of the terms used in the subsequent drawings will be given. The "door body open state" indicates that the front door 102 is in an open state (open state), and the "door body closed state" indicates that the front door 102 is in a closed state (closed state). "Open detection state" indicates that the detection state of the open/close sensor is the open detection state, and "closed detection state" indicates that the detection state of the open/close sensor is the closed detection state.

Also, "BGM" is the sound output from the speakers (sound output means) 272, 277 during the execution of a certain effect, etc., and "operation sound" is the sound output from the speaker when a certain operation means is operated. (sound output means) 272 and 277, and "error sound" is a sound output from speakers (sound output means) 272 and 277 when an error occurs. .

In addition, the "cross key" is the above-mentioned first operation means (means provided at a position that can be operated only when the front door 102 is in the open state, out of the closed state and the open state). The "rear knob" is the above-mentioned second operating means (means provided at a position that can be operated even when the front door 102 is closed).

<Conventional Volume Setting Method/First Method>
FIG. 138(a) is a diagram showing a first method among conventional volume setting methods in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 138(a)(1) shows a state in which the administrator changes the player setting value using the cross key while the front door 102 is in the closed state and the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state. . When the front door 102 is opened in this state, as shown in FIG. 138(a)(2), the front door 102 shifts to the door body open state, the open/close sensor shifts to the open detection state, and a front door open error occurs. . Then, the open/close sensor shifts to the open detection state, and a front door open error occurs, so an error sound (in this example, a sound saying "the door is open") is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and an effect image is generated. In the display area of the display device 157, a front door open error display (in this example, a display including character information such as "the door is open") is displayed.

138(a) and 138(3) show a state where the front door 102 is in the open state and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state, and the administrator uses the back knob to change the administrator setting value. there is When the front door 102 is closed in this state, as shown in FIG. BGM is output at a volume corresponding to the changed administrator setting value (3 in this example).

138(a)(5) shows a state in which the manager changes the player setting value using the cross key while the front door 102 is in the closed state and the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state. This is the same state as in FIG. 138(a)(1). 138(a), (6) to (7), the front door 102 is in the door body open state, and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state. 138(a)(2) to (3) are the same as those shown in FIG.

In an amusement arcade, in order to confirm the sound volume setting of the gaming machine, for example, after changing the administrator setting value by one step from the minimum value 0 (0→1), the player setting value is changed from 0 in ascending order. (0→…→8→9→…→15), and after changing the administrator set value by one step (1→2), the player set value is changed in ascending order from 0 (for example, 0→…→8→ 9→...→15) may be repeated until the administrator set value reaches the maximum value F.

When performing such volume setting work, in the first method, the front door 102 cannot be changed (operating the back knob) while the front door 102 is closed. It is necessary to shift to the open state, but since the player set value cannot be confirmed (displayed) in this door closed state, after the front door 102 is shifted to the door closed state again, the player set value need to be changed (using the four-way controller). That is, in the first method, it is necessary to repeatedly open and close the front door 102 in the work of setting the sound volume, which causes the problem that the work of setting the sound volume takes time.

<Conventional Volume Setting Method/Second Method>
FIG. 138(b) is a diagram showing a second conventional volume setting method in chronological order. The states shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. 138(b) are the same as those of (1) and (2) of FIG. 138(a), so the description thereof will be omitted.

The opening/closing sensor according to the present example is configured such that a detection state changes to a closed detection state even when the front door (door body) 102 is in an open state by performing a predetermined operation.

The state shown in FIG. 138(b)(3) shows a state in which the front door 102 is in the door body open state, and the administrator performs a predetermined operation to change the open/close sensor to the closed detection state. In this state, the front door 102 is open, but the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state, so that the administrator can change the set value (operate the back knob).

Therefore, in the second method, there is no need to repeatedly open and close the front door 102 in the volume setting operation, and the volume setting operation time can be shortened compared to the first method described with reference to FIG. 138(a). be able to. In addition, since the front door opening error can be canceled by a predetermined operation, the work can be performed efficiently without outputting an error sound or displaying the front door opening error display.

However, in the second method, in addition to eliminating the front door open error display, etc., which serves as a separator between changing the administrator's setting value (operation of the back knob) and changing the player's setting value (operation of the cross key), Since the display of the volume setting screen is continued, there is a new problem that, for example, an operation error as shown in FIG. 138(c) occurs.

In the example shown in FIG. 138(c), in order to confirm the sound volume setting of the gaming machine, after changing the manager setting value by one step from 3 (3→4), the player setting value is changed from 0 in ascending order. 138 (0→...→8→9→...→15) and intended to check the volume after change, but as shown in FIG. Instead, the administrator setting value is changed from 4 to 5.

In this way, the second method has the advantage of being able to shorten the work time for setting the volume, etc., but it does operation) becomes unclear, there is a problem that an operation error is induced and one of the operations is skipped.

<Volume setting method of the present invention>
Next, the volume setting method of the present invention will be described.

<Volume setting method of the present invention/Embodiment 1>
FIG. 139(a) is a diagram showing the volume setting method according to the first embodiment in chronological order.

Here, a supplementary explanation of the terms used in the subsequent drawings will be given. "Administrator setting value" indicates an administrator setting value (first type of setting value) that can be changed by operating an administrator switch MSW (first operating means), and "player setting value" indicates a game A player setting value (second type of setting value) that can be changed by operating the player switch PSW (second operating means) is shown, and the "volume value" is output from the speakers (sound output means) 272, 277. indicates the sound pressure of the sound that

"Operating state" indicates the operating state (game state, etc.) of the slot machine 100, "Operation" indicates the content of an operation on a certain operation means or the front door 102, and "Display example" indicates an effect image. An example of display contents displayed in the display area of the display device (display means) 157 is shown.

The state shown in FIG. 139(a)(1) is when the slot machine 100 is not playing, the front door 102 is closed, and the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state. 10, and from the speakers 272 and 277, BGM (in this example, the sound corresponding to the effect during stop) is output at a volume (81 dB in this example) corresponding to the administrator setting value and the player setting value. , the display area of the effect image display device 157 shows a state in which the stop effect is displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 139(a)(1), when an operation of a certain operation means (determination button in this example; not shown) is accepted, the volume can be set by operating the player switch PSW. 139(a)(2) is displayed in the display area of the effect image display device 157. FIG. In the volume setting screen of this example, a display suggesting that the volume can be set (in this example, a display including character information such as "volume setting screen"), and a player setting value display PD ( In this example, a display including information on the player setting value such as "volume: 10" is displayed.

In addition, when the front door 102 is closed, the sound volume can be set by operating the player switch PSW. Therefore, when the right button of the player switch PSW is operated, the player setting value is increased by one step. , when the operation of the left button of the player switch PSW is accepted, the player setting value is decreased by one step.

In the example shown in FIG. 139(a)(3), since the operation of the right button of the player switch PSW is accepted, the player setting value is increased by one step from 10 to 11, and the speaker 272, 277 outputs , BGM (in this example, the sound corresponding to the effect during stop) is output at a volume (82 dB in this example) corresponding to the administrator setting value and the player setting value, and the display area of the effect image display device 157 is changed A display player setting value PD indicating the subsequent player setting value (in this example, a display including information on the player setting value such as "volume: 11") is displayed.

When the front door 102 is opened by the administrator in this volume setting enabled state, the front door 102 shifts to the door open state and the open/close sensor shifts to the open detection state, as shown in FIG. 139(a)(4). , front door open error. Then, the open/close sensor shifts to the open detection state, and a front door open error occurs, so an error sound (in this example, a sound saying "the door is open") is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and an effect image is generated. In the display area of the display device 157, a front door open error display ED (in this example, a display including character information such as "the door is open") is displayed in an overlapping manner in front of the display of the volume setting screen.

Here, in this example, in the state shown in FIG. 139(a)(2), the BGM is output at a volume (82 dB in this example) corresponding to the administrator setting value and the player setting value, but ) In the state shown in (4), since the front door opening error occurs, the volume of the error sound is set in advance instead of the volume (82 dB in this example) corresponding to the administrator setting value and the player setting value. An error sound is output at the set volume (100 dB in this example). The volume of the error sound may be lower than the volume corresponding to the administrator setting value and the player setting value.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 139(a)(4), the front door 102 is in the door open state, and the volume can be set by operating the manager switch (first operating means) MSW. An administrator setting value display MD indicating the administrator setting value (in this example, a display including an icon simulating a speaker and information of the administrator setting value such as "D") is displayed.

Here, in this example, in the closed state of the front door 102 shown in FIG. In the open state of the front door 102 shown in 139(a)(4), in addition to the player setting value display PD indicating the player setting value, the manager setting value display MD indicating the manager setting value is displayed. do.

139(a) and 139(4), in the open state of the front door 102, the sound volume can be set by the administrator switch MSW. The administrator setting value is increased by one step, and when the administrator switch MSW is rotated leftward, the administrator setting value is decreased by one step.

In the example shown in FIG. 139(a)(6), since the administrator switch MSW is rotated rightward, the administrator setting value is increased by two steps from D to F, and the effect image display device 157 In the display area of , a display administrator setting value MD indicating the changed administrator setting value (in this example, a display including an icon simulating a speaker and information on the administrator setting value such as "F") is displayed. Even if the administrator setting value is changed, the volume of the error sound (100 dB , a voice such as "the door is open") is output.

On the other hand, in the open state of the front door 102 shown in FIG. 139(a)(4), the volume cannot be set by the player switch PSW. Even if the operation of the right button of the switch PSW is accepted, the player setting value is not changed, and the player setting value display PD indicating the player setting value is also not changed.

<Volume setting method of the present invention/Embodiment 1-2>

FIG. 139(b) is a diagram showing the volume setting method according to the embodiment 1-22 in chronological order. Since the state shown in FIG. 139(b)(1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 139(a)(1), description thereof will be omitted.

In the state shown in FIG. 139(b)(2), the front door 102 is opened by the administrator, the front door 102 shifts to the door body open state, the open/close sensor shifts to the open detection state, and a front door open error occurs. is.

As described with reference to FIG. 139(a), in the closed state of the front door 102 shown in FIG. is accepted, the state shifts to a volume setting possible state in which the volume can be set by operating the player switch PSW. (Decision button in this example; not shown) has been accepted, so the state has not shifted to the volume setting enabled state in which the volume can be set.

On the other hand, in the open state of the front door 102 shown in FIG. 139(b)(2), the volume can be set by the administrator switch MSW. 139(b) ( 5), BGM is output at a volume (95 dB in this example) corresponding to the administrator setting value and the player setting value. In the example shown in FIG. 139(b)(4), since the transition to the volume setting enabled state is not performed, while the administrator setting value is changed, the display area of the effect image display device 157 after the change is displayed. The display showing the administrator setting value of is not displayed.

<Volume setting method of the present invention/Embodiment 2>
Next, before describing the volume setting method according to the second embodiment, a conventional volume setting method will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing a conventional volume setting method in chronological order.

As described with reference to FIG. 138(a), in the conventional volume setting method, the front door 102 is opened to change the administrator setting value, while the front door 102 is closed to change the player settings. Since it is necessary to change the value, it is necessary to repeatedly open and close the front door 102 in the operation of setting the volume, which causes a problem that the operation of setting the volume takes time.

For example, conventionally, when confirming the sound volume setting of a game machine in an amusement arcade, a certain operation means (in this example, the decision button ; not shown) to shift to the volume setting enable state shown in FIG. 141(a)(2).

Then, in this volume settable state, as shown in FIGS. 140(a) (2) to (4), the right button of the player switch PSW is operated to change the player setting value step by step while changing the volume. is confirmed, and when the player setting value reaches the upper limit value of 15, the front door 102 is shifted to the door body open state shown in FIG. Only one step is changed (C→D in this example).

140(a) (7) to (9), the right button of the player switch PSW is operated to change the player setting value step by step. When the player setting value reaches the upper limit value of 15, the front door 102 is shifted to the open state of the front door 102 shown in FIG. Only steps are changed (D→E in this example), and after that, it is necessary to repeat the change of the player setting value and the change of the administrator setting value (opening and closing of the front door 102) until the confirmation of the volume setting is completed. .

In such a conventional volume setting method, it is necessary to repeatedly open and close the front door 102 in the work of setting the volume. There is a problem that a sound is output and a front door open error display is displayed, which causes inconvenience to the players during business hours.

Also, as shown in FIG. 140(b), originally, when the administrator setting value is E, it is necessary to check the volume while changing the player setting value from 8 to 15 step by step. Due to an operation mistake such as this, the administrator setting value was changed by two steps (D → F in this example), and the volume of 87 dB to 92 dB corresponding to the administrator setting value E and the player setting value 9 to 15 was confirmed. There were times when it would fly. In other words, in the conventional volume setting method, since the boundary between changing the manager setting value and changing the player setting value becomes unclear, there is a problem that an operation error is induced and one of the tasks is skipped.

FIG. 141 is a diagram chronologically showing the volume setting method according to the second embodiment.

For example, when the manager sets the sound volume, the front door 102 is in the closed state and the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state, as shown in FIG. 141(1). The volume is checked while the value is changed step by step, and when the player set value reaches the upper limit of 15, the front door 102 is opened, and the front door 102 is opened as shown in FIG. 141(2). state, the open/close sensor shifts to the open detection state.

In this example, a predetermined operation related to the open/close sensor (detection means) (in this example, an operation of inserting a light shielding piece of a certain length between the light projecting part and the light receiving part of the open/close sensor and fixing it with tape, etc.) is performed, even if the front door (door body) 102 is in the open state, the detection state becomes the closed detection state. When the front door 102 is opened and the open/close sensor detects the open state, the front door 102 is opened and the open/close sensor is detected as shown in FIG. transitions to the closure detection state.

In this state, the front door 102 is open, but the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state, so that the manager setting value can be changed by operating the manager switch MSW.

According to this example, it is not necessary to repeatedly open and close the front door 102 in the volume setting operation, and the volume setting operation time can be shortened compared to the conventional volume setting method described with reference to FIG.

Further, in this example, when the front door 102 is in the open state, the detection state of the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state, and the volume setting screen (a certain setting display) is displayed, the manager switch MSW is pressed. When a certain operation is performed on (first operation means), the displayed volume setting screen (certain setting display) is terminated, but the front door open error display (error display) is not displayed. It is configured.

Therefore, when the front door 102 is in the open state and the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 141(4), the volume setting screen displayed when the front door 102 is closed and the open/close sensor is detecting closure ends, and the front door 102 is opened and the open/close sensor is closed. The front door open error display that was displayed in the open detection state is not displayed.

Similarly, when the front door 102 is in the open state and the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state, as shown in FIG. 141(8), the displayed volume setting screen ends, and the front door open error display is not displayed.

As described with reference to FIGS. 138(c) and 140(b), in the conventional sound volume setting method, the boundary between changing the administrator setting value and changing the player setting value is unclear. There is a problem that a mistake is induced and one of the tasks is skipped. However, according to this example, when a certain operation is performed on the administrator switch MSW, the displayed volume setting screen is terminated. , the volume setting can be performed while accurately grasping that the setting value of the administrator setting value is changed, and an operation error can be prevented. Further, since the front door open error display is not displayed when a certain operation is performed on the administrator switch MSW, visibility is not hindered by the front door open error display. Setting work can be done efficiently.

Further, in this example, when the front door 102 is in the open state, the detection state of the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state, and the volume setting screen (a certain setting display) is not displayed, the player switch PSW is pressed. When a certain operation is performed on (the second operation means), a volume setting screen (a certain setting display) is displayed.

Therefore, when the player switch PSW is operated while the front door 102 is in the open state and the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state shown in FIG. 141(4), as shown in FIG. , the volume setting screen is displayed. Similarly, when the front door 102 is in the open state and the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state, as shown in FIG. 141(8), when the player switch PSW is operated, A volume setting screen is displayed, as shown.

In the conventional volume setting method, the difference between changing the administrator setting value and changing the player setting value is unclear, so there is a problem that operation errors are induced and one task is skipped. According to an example, when a certain operation is performed on the player switch PSW (on the second operating means), the volume setting screen is displayed, so that it is possible to accurately confirm that the setting value of the player setting value has been changed. It is possible to set the volume while grasping the actual volume, thereby preventing an operation error. <Volume setting method of the present invention/Embodiment 3>

FIG. 142 is a diagram chronologically showing the volume setting method according to the third embodiment.

In this example, in the first game state (for example, during non-game), both the manager setting value and the player setting value can be changed, but the second game state different from the first game state (For example, during a game), it is possible to change the manager's setting value, but it is configured so that the player's setting value cannot be changed.

Therefore, in the first game state (non-game in this example) shown in (a) (1) to (3) of FIG. The player setting value can be changed by operating the player switch PSW. For example, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 142(a)(3), by operating the right button of the player switch PSW, the player setting value can be changed (10→11 in this example).

Also, although not shown, in the first game state (in this example, during non-game play), when the front door 102 is in the door body open state and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state, the administrator can operate the administrator switch MSW to Setting values can be changed.

On the other hand, in the second game state (playing in this example) shown in FIG. The player setting value cannot be changed by operating the switch PSW, and for example, even if the enter button of the player switch PSW is operated, the state does not shift to the volume setting enabled state.

142(b) (3) to (4), in the second game state (playing in this example), when the front door 102 is in the door body open state and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state, the manager The administrator setting value can be changed by operating the switch MSW. For example, as shown in FIG. (D→F in this example).

According to this example, for example, at the time of lever-on in the second game state (in this example, during a game) in which the player setting values cannot be changed, as shown in FIG. When there is a desire to enjoy the effect by setting the volume to the maximum volume after sensing that the game will be started, the manager setting value is changed even in the second game state (in this example, during the game). Therefore, by requesting the manager to set the sound volume, the desired sound volume can be set, and the player's satisfaction can be improved.

Also, even in the first game state (not playing in this example) in which the player setting value can be changed, when the sound volume is determined according to both the administrator setting value and the player setting value In this case, by requesting the manager to set the sound volume, the desired sound volume can be set, and the degree of satisfaction of the player can be enhanced.

Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to this example, and in the second gaming state (for example, during gaming), it may be possible to change both the administrator setting value and the player setting value. 143 is a diagram chronologically showing a volume setting method according to a modification of the third embodiment; FIG.

In this example, in the second game state (in this example, during a game), when the front door 102 is closed and the opening/closing sensor is in a closed detection state, the player's set value can be changed by operating the player switch PSW. For example, as shown in FIG. 143(2), by operating the determination button of the player switch PSW, the state shifts to the volume setting enabled state, and as shown in FIG. 143(3), the player switch PSW. By operating the right button of , the player setting value can be changed (10→15 in this example).

In the second game state (playing in this example), when the front door 102 is in the open state and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state, the manager setting value can be changed by operating the manager switch MSW. For example, as shown in FIG. 143(5), the administrator setting value can be changed (D→F in this example) by rotating the administrator switch MSW to the right.

Further, in this example, when the front door 102 is in the open state, the detection state of the open/close sensor is in the open detection state, and the volume setting screen (a certain setting display) is displayed, the administrator switch MSW is pressed. When a certain operation is performed on the (first operating means), the displayed volume setting screen (a certain setting display) is terminated.

For example, as shown in FIG. 143(4), when the front door 102 is in the open state and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state, the administrator setting value is increased by one step by operating the administrator switch MSW. As shown in FIG. 143(5), the displayed volume setting screen ends.

According to this example, after the volume setting by the administrator, the player can immediately enjoy the performance at the desired volume, and the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

<Volume setting method of the present invention/Embodiment 4>
FIG. 144 is a diagram chronologically showing the volume setting method according to the fourth embodiment.

In this example, when the front door 102 is in the open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor is in the open detection state, when a specific operation is performed, a system setting screen that allows various settings related to the game machine is displayed. It is

For example, as shown in FIG. 144(a)(3), when the front door 102 is in the door body open state and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state, a specific operation (in this example, the front door 102 can be operated even when it is in the closed state). 144(a)(3), the system shown in FIG. A setting screen menu screen SD1 is displayed.

The menu screen SD1 of the system setting screen in this example includes a volume setting menu for shifting to a volume setting screen, a power saving setting menu for shifting to a power saving setting screen, a time setting menu for shifting to a time setting screen, and an error history screen. It consists of an error history menu that transitions to

On the menu screen SD1 of the system setting screen, when the volume setting menu is selected by operating the administrator switch PSW (in this example, a cross key or the like), the volume setting screen SD2 shown in FIG. 144(a)(4) is displayed. Is displayed.

The volume setting screen SD2 of this example is composed of a player adjustable menu that allows the player to set the volume and a player unadjustable menu that disables the player from setting the volume. When selected, the player setting value is invalidated, and the volume of the speakers 272 and 277 is set to the volume corresponding to the administrator setting value (for example, if the administrator setting value is F, regardless of the player setting value, The sound pressure is 93 dB corresponding to the default value 8 of the player setting value).

Further, in this example, when the front door 102 is in the open state, the detection state of the open/close sensor is in the open detection state, and the light amount setting screen (a certain setting display) is displayed, the administrator switch MSW is pressed. When a certain operation is performed on the (first operating means), the displayed light amount setting screen (a certain setting display) is terminated.

In the state shown in FIG. 144(b)(1), the front door 102 is opened and the open/close sensor is switched to the closed detection state by performing a predetermined operation by the administrator while the front door 102 is left open. state. In this state, when the operation of the upper button or the lower button of the player switch PSW is accepted, the state shifts to the light amount setting possible state in which the light amount can be set, and the light amount setting screen LD is displayed.

When the upper button of the player switch PSW is operated while the light amount setting screen LD is displayed, the light amount increases by one step. 144(b)(4), the light intensity setting screen is cleared when the administrator switch MSW is operated as shown in FIG. 144(b)(4).

According to this example, when an operation by the administrator switch MSW is accepted, the light intensity setting screen disappears even when the light intensity does not change due to the operation (for example, when the administrator setting value is changed from E to F). Therefore, when the administrator performs volume setting work, visibility is not hindered, and work efficiency can be improved. In addition, after the sound volume is set by the manager, the player can immediately enjoy the performance with the desired amount of light, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

<Volume setting method of the present invention/Embodiment 5>
FIG. 145 is a diagram chronologically showing the volume setting method according to the fifth embodiment.

In this example, when a specific operation is performed while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume setting screen is cleared and an error message is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 145(a)(4) is a state in which the player switch PSW is operated and the volume setting screen is displayed while the front door 102 is in the door body open state and the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state. . In this example, in a state where the volume setting screen is displayed, a specific operation (in this example, an operation means provided at a position that can be operated even when the front door 102 is closed and an operation means when the front door 102 is open) is performed. 145(a) (5), the volume setting screen is erased and an error A display (in this example, an error display including characters "setting error" indicating an error in the volume setting) is displayed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 145(b)(2), when a specific operation is performed while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume setting screen is erased and the description is made with reference to FIG. 144(a). The menu screen SD1 of the system setting screen may be displayed.

With such a configuration, after confirming the player setting value on the volume setting screen, for example, the menu screen SD1 of the system setting screen can be shifted to the volume setting screen SD2 described with reference to FIG. 144(a). , it is possible to immediately set the player to disable the volume setting, thereby enhancing the convenience. <Volume setting method of the present invention/Embodiment 6>

FIG. 146(a) is a diagram showing the volume setting method according to the sixth embodiment in chronological order.

In this example, the volume of the payout sound can be adjusted during the payout operation of the medals, but the volume of the settlement sound cannot be adjusted during the payout operation of the medals.

Here, the payout operation is an operation of paying out medals from the medal payout device 180 shown in FIG. to output a payout sound. The settlement operation means that when the settlement button 134 shown in FIG. 1 is pressed, the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the medals placed on the bet are settled, and the medals are released from the medal payout port 155 shown in FIG. It is an operation to discharge, and during this settlement operation, the settlement sound is output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

146(a) (1) to (2) show a state in which the manager switch MSW is operated during the payout operation to increase the manager set value from D to F by two steps. . In this example, since the volume of the payout sound can be adjusted during the medal payout operation, the volume of the payout sound is increased from 81 dB to 95 dB.

146(a) (3) to (4) show a state in which the administrator switch MSW is operated during the settlement operation to increase the administrator setting value from D to F by two steps. ing. In this example, since the volume of the settlement sound cannot be adjusted during the medal settlement operation, the volume of the settlement sound is maintained at 100 dB before and after the administrator switch MSW is operated.

<Volume setting method of the present invention/Embodiment 7>
FIG. 146(b) is a diagram showing the volume setting method according to the seventh embodiment in chronological order.

In this example, when a certain sound is being output at the first volume and the front door open error described with reference to FIG. It is configured to change to a second volume, which is smaller, and to output an error sound at a third volume, which is higher than the second volume. In addition, even during the payout operation of medals, if a certain error occurs, it is configured such that the administrator setting value cannot be changed.

In the states shown in (1) to (3) of FIG. 146(b), during the payout operation, the administrator switch MSW is operated to decrease the administrator setting value from F to D by two steps, and then the front door It shows the state in which an open error has occurred. In this example, since the volume of the payout sound can be adjusted during the medal payout operation, the volume of the payout sound is reduced from 95 dB to 81 dB.

In addition, when a front door opening error occurs in a state where a certain sound (discharge sound in this example) is being output at a first volume (81 dB in this example), the volume of a certain sound (discharge sound) is changed to a second volume (20 dB in this example) smaller than the first volume, and the error sound is output at a third volume (100 dB in this example) larger than the second volume.

According to this example, it is possible to make the error sound stand out while maintaining the output of a certain sound, and the operation (dispensing operation in this example) corresponding to the certain sound continues and the error occurs. can be reliably grasped, and convenience can be improved.

The states shown in (4) to (6) of FIG. 146(b) show a state in which a front door opening error occurs during the payout operation, and then the manager switch MSW is operated. In this example, when a front door opening error occurs in a state where a certain sound (discharge sound in this example) is output at a first volume (95 dB in this example), a certain sound (discharge sound) is changed to a second volume (20 dB in this example) that is smaller than the first volume, and the error sound is output at a third volume (100 dB in this example) that is larger than the second volume. .

Further, in this example, even during the payout operation of medals, if a certain error (front door open error in this example) occurs, the administrator setting value cannot be changed. Before and after the operation by the manager switch MSW, the volume of the payout sound is maintained at 20 dB, and the volume of the error sound is maintained at 100 dB.

According to this example, it is possible to make the error sound stand out while maintaining the output of a certain sound, and the operation (dispensing operation in this example) corresponding to the certain sound continues and the error occurs. can be reliably grasped, and convenience can be improved.

<Invention 5>
FIG. 147 is a diagram showing an outline of the fifth invention of the present application. As described above, the gaming machine according to the fifth aspect of the present invention (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIGS. 1 and 147) includes display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIGS. 1 and 147) and a game Provided on the front surface of the table, a door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIGS. 1 and 147), and notification means (for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3, various lamps 420 shown in FIG. 3, Shutter 163 and reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1), and first operation means and second operation means used to change certain settings (for example, volume setting, light amount setting) related to the notification means and a plurality of types of operation means, wherein the first operation means is provided at a position operable only when the door body is in the open state out of the closed state and the open state. means (for example, an administrator switch MSW shown in FIG. 147, a back knob (rotary switch) or a slide switch used by an administrator (game store clerk, etc.)), and the second operation means is the door Means provided at a position that can be operated even when the body is in the closed state (for example, the player switch PSW shown in FIG. 147, the cross key used by the player, which has up, down, left, and right buttons and a determination button, and the effect button , a touch panel, etc.), and the display means displays a certain setting value (for example, 139(a) and FIG. 147, and a player setting value PD shown in FIGS. 139(a) and 147). In a certain state where a certain screen display including the certain setting value display (hereinafter referred to as "first screen display", for example, the display of the volume setting screen shown in FIG. 147 (3)) is displayed, When a certain operation is performed on the first operation means, a screen display different from the first screen display (hereinafter referred to as "second screen display". For example, FIG. 147(4) (or the first screen display disappears).

Conventionally, there are game machines that can be set by both administrator operation and player operation regarding a certain setting related to the game machine. There is a specification in which the setting range of the player operation (operation by the second operating means) is determined based on the setting value of the operation), and a specification in which the maximum setting value of the player operation is determined based on the setting value of the administrator operation. With such specifications, there are cases where the volume desired by the player cannot be obtained only by the player's operation. Since it is impossible to check whether the set value of the administrator's operation has been changed, the user is uneasy, and is sometimes dissatisfied when the desired volume is not achieved.

In this respect, according to the gaming machine according to the fifth aspect of the present application, when a certain operation is performed on the first operating means, the display is switched to the second screen display different from the first screen display, so that the first screen display is switched to the second screen display. It is possible to easily visually recognize that the operation by the operation means has been accepted. As a result, for managers such as store clerks of amusement arcades, convenience in changing certain settings is improved, and for players, it is possible to confirm that certain settings have been changed without fail. You can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the setting value of the certain setting includes a first type of setting value (for example, administrator setting value) that can be changed by operating the first operating means and a setting value that can be changed by operating the second operating means. A plurality of types of setting values including a possible second type of setting values (e.g., player setting values) are included, and the display means displays a first type of setting values indicating the first type of setting values. means for displaying a display (e.g., administrator set value display MD shown in FIG. 139(a) or FIG. 147), wherein the display means displays the second type setting value indicating the second type setting value; 139(a) and FIG. 147), and the certain setting value display is one of the first type of setting value displays. and at least when the door is in the open state, at least the first type of setting value display out of the first type of setting value display and the second type of setting value display is displayed. It may be configured to be displayable.

With such a configuration, when the door is in the open state, at least the first type of set value display can be displayed. It becomes possible to do so, and the convenience can be further improved.

Further, at least when the door body is in the open state, a certain screen display including both of the first type set value display and the second type set value display (hereinafter, "second 147(4)) may be displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to change a certain setting while confirming both the first type setting value display and the second type setting value display. Convenience can be further improved.

Further, the display means is means capable of displaying a door open state display (for example, a front door open error display shown in FIG. 138(a)(2)) indicating that the door body is in the open state, Regardless of whether the third screen display is displayed or not, the door open state display is displayed when the door body changes from the closed state to the open state. The display means is means capable of starting display of the third screen display when the door is in the closed state, and the display means is capable of Means incapable of starting display of the third screen display (or at least the second type of set value display) in a certain case of the open state, wherein the door body is in the closed state and the third screen In a certain state in which the display is displayed, the third screen display being displayed can be continuously displayed when the door is in a different state from the open state. may be configured to

With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the display of the door open state is hidden by the third screen display when the door body is opened due to a fraudulent act or the like. etc. can be reliably prevented. In addition, when displaying the volume etc. first, it is necessary to display the system setting screen etc. after a predetermined period of time has passed since the end of one game (for example, after the end of payout). Because it is conspicuous, it does not pose a problem for fraud prevention.

Further, in a certain state in which the door body is in the closed state and the third screen display is displayed, when a certain operation is performed on the second operation means, the third screen display is displayed. The set value display of the second type included is configured to be updatable, and in a certain state in which the door body is in the open state and the third screen display is displayed, the first operation means When a certain operation is performed on the third screen display, the first type set value display included in the third screen display can be updated, and the door body is in the open state and the third In a state where the screen display is displayed, even if a certain operation is performed on the second operation means, the display of the second type of setting value included in the third screen display is updated. may be configured not to

With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly distinguish between a state in which the operation by the first operation means is valid and a state in which the operation by the second operation means is valid, so that mistakes in operation to change a certain setting can be prevented. can be prevented. Further, in a certain state where the door is open and the third screen display is displayed, even if a certain operation is performed on the second operation means, the third screen display included in the third screen display is displayed. Since the display of the second set value is not updated, the player can be made to recognize that only the operation by the first operation means is effective when the door is open, and the player can be given a sense of satisfaction. can be done.

Further, in a state where the door body is in the closed state and the third screen display is displayed, when the door body is in the open state, the third screen display includes the door open state display. A screen display (hereinafter referred to as a "fourth screen display") is configured to be displayed, and the fourth screen display is at least part of the second type of setting value display. is overlapped with the door open state display, and the first type set value display is not overlapped with the door open state display.

With such a configuration, the visibility of the setting value display of the second type can be reduced, while the visibility of the setting value display of the first type can be improved. is in a valid state, and mistakes in changing certain settings can be prevented.

<Invention 6>
FIG. 148 is a diagram showing an outline of invention 6 of the present application. As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIGS. 1 and 148) according to the sixth invention of the present application includes display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIGS. 1 and 148) and a game A door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIGS. 1 and 148) provided on the front surface of the stand and capable of detecting the opening/closing state of the door body (for example, an open/close sensor 103 shown in FIG. 148) , magnetic sensors, proximity switches, micro switches, Hall elements, etc.) and notification means (for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3, various lamps 420 shown in FIG. 3, shutter 163 shown in FIG. 1, reels 110 to 112), and a plurality of types of operation means including a first operation means and a second operation means used to change certain settings (for example, volume setting, light intensity setting) related to the notification means. In the amusement machine, the first operation means is a means (for example, a control device shown in FIG. 148) provided at a position operable only when the door body is in the open state out of the closed state and the open state. back knob (rotary switch, slide switch, etc.) used by an administrator (game store clerk, etc.), and the second operation means operates even when the door body is in the closed state. Means (for example, a player switch PSW shown in FIG. 148, a cross key having up, down, left, and right buttons and an enter button used by a player, a production button, a touch panel, etc.) provided at a possible position, and the detection When the door body is in the closed state, the means detects that the detection state is a closed detection state (for example, a state in which the detection means is detecting that it is in a closed detection state, or a signal indicating that it is in a closed detection state). The detection means can be in an open detection state (for example, the detection means is in an open detection state, or a state in which the detection means outputs a signal indicating the open detection state to the outside), and the detection By performing a predetermined operation related to the means (for example, an operation to block the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 and change the detection state to the closed detection state by pushing in the rod-shaped body), the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, and the display means displays a certain setting related to the certain setting (for example, FIG. 139(a) and Figure 148 is capable of displaying a player setting value PD shown in , wherein the display means is means capable of displaying a certain error display when the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and the door In a state where the body is in the closed state, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, and the certain setting display is displayed, when the door body changes from the closed state to the open state, the detection means becomes the open detection state, and the display of the certain setting display that was being displayed ends, and the certain error display (for example, the front door open error display ER shown in FIG. 148(2) or the (a) The front door open error display shown in (2)) is displayed, and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state. When the predetermined operation is performed while the error indication is being displayed, the detection state of the detection means changes to the closed detection state, and the display of the certain error indication being displayed is terminated. (for example, the state shown in FIG. 148(3)), and when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state, display of the certain setting display can be started. 148 (for example, the state shown in FIG. 148(4)), the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, and the certain setting display is displayed. When a certain operation (for example, an operation to change the administrator setting value from 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 148(4) and 148(5)) is performed on the first operation means, the displayed 148(5), the setting display ends, but the certain error display is not displayed (for example, the state shown in FIG. 148(5)).

Conventionally, there are game machines that can be set by both administrator operation and player operation regarding certain settings related to game machines. Since it is necessary to consider the volume of each type of machine, administrators should check the combination of setting values operated by administrators and set values operated by players before opening the business or setting up the machines. was going

For example, in the case of a specification in which the setting range of the player operation (operation by the second operation means) is determined based on the setting value of the administrator operation (operation by the first operation means), the setting value of the administrator operation and the player If the setting values for the operation are both in 10 stages, there are 100 possible combinations. After opening the door, changing the set value of the manager's operation to 2, closing the door, and confirming the set value of the player's operation from 1 to 10 in the same manner as before.

In conventional confirmation work, it is necessary to repeatedly open and close the door, which reduces work efficiency. There was also the fear of causing trouble. In other words, conventionally, there have been problems in that work efficiency is low and there is a risk of causing trouble to surrounding players.

Here, for example, the door open/close sensor is set to be temporarily closed, and the above-mentioned confirmation work can be performed while the door is open. Possible problem. That is, when the setting value of the administrator operation is 1, the setting values of the player operation are checked from 1 to 10, the setting value of the administrator operation is set to 2, and the setting value is set to 3. This is a problem of skipping 10 types of confirmation work when the set value of the operator's operation is 2. If it is known that the previous work is to change the set value of the administrator's operation, the next operation is to confirm the set value of the player's operation from 1 to 10, but there is no way to know it, In the past, confirmation work was often skipped.

In this respect, according to the game machine according to the sixth invention of the present application, when a predetermined operation is performed, the detection state of the detection means changes to the closed detection state, and the display of the certain error display that has been displayed is terminated. Therefore, it is not necessary to repeatedly open and close the door when changing a certain setting regarding the notification means, and the work load can be significantly reduced as compared with the conventional one. Further, when a certain operation is performed on the first operating means in a state in which the door is in an open state, the detection state of the detection means is a closed detection state, and a certain setting display is displayed, the Since the display of the setting display that has been on is terminated, the error display is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to solve the conventional problem of skipping confirmation work. In addition, since the certain error display is not displayed, the visibility in the confirmation work is not hindered, and the certain error display is displayed when the operation by the first operation means is not performed. , fraudulent acts, etc. can be prevented.

It should be noted that "the display of a certain setting display ends" includes not only displaying behind a certain error display, but also displaying a certain setting display thinly (transparent display) to reduce visibility. It is a concept. Also, the certain error display may be a display indicating that the door is open and not an error.

Further, a certain state in which the door body is in the closed state, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, and the certain setting display is displayed (for example, the sound volume or the amount of light can be changed (increased or decreased) state), when a certain operation is performed on the second operating means, the set value of the certain setting of the informing means changes, and the display mode of the displayed setting display also changes. In a certain state in which the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, and the certain setting display is displayed, the first When a certain operation is performed on the operation means, the setting value of the certain setting of the notification means is changed, but the display of the certain setting display that was being displayed may be terminated. .

With such a configuration, when the display of a certain setting display ends, it is possible to reliably recognize that the operation by the first operation means has been accepted, thereby skipping the confirmation work. can solve the problem.

In addition, second notification means (for example, effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) different from the notification means (hereinafter referred to as "first notification means". For example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3) and a second certain setting related to the second notification means can be changed by a change operation, and the display means displays a second certain setting related to the second certain setting (for example , display of the set value of the light amount of the backlight), and when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state, the second certain setting display is displayed. is configured to be able to start the first When a certain operation is performed on the operating means, the display of the second certain setting display that has been displayed may end.

With such a configuration, it is possible to turn off the second certain setting display that is irrelevant to the operation by the first operating means, and to reliably execute the operation of changing a certain setting related to the first notification means. can be done.

In addition, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven, and a certain amount of time is provided from the start of rotation of the plurality of reels to the end of rotation of all the reels. In a state where at least the first notification means is used, a predetermined effect using at least the first notification means can be executed, and at least a reel stop state in which the plurality of reels are not rotating (for example, a non-gaming state shown in FIG. 141) middle), the certain setting can be changed by performing a certain operation on the second operating means, and a reel rotation state in which at least the plurality of reels are rotating (for example, , during rotation special effect shown in FIG. , at least in any of the certain reel stopped state and the certain reel rotating state, the certain setting can be changed by performing a certain operation on the first operating means. may be

In addition, control means (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) capable of executing payout control of game media based on the result of the game, storage means (for example, a storage device) capable of storing game media, and settlement and an operation means (for example, the settlement button 134 shown in FIG. 1), and when the settlement operation means is operated, the game media stored in the storage means can be settled. The notification means is sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3), the first notification means is means capable of outputting a payout sound in relation to the payout control, and the first The one notifying means is means capable of outputting a settlement sound in relation to settlement of the game media, and the payout sound is generated when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state. is being output (for example, during the payout operation shown in FIG. 146(a)(1)), when a certain operation is performed on the first operating means, the volume of the payout sound being output is changeable, the state in which the door is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, and the settlement sound is output (for example, FIG. 146(a) (3 ), even if a certain operation is performed on the first operation means, the volume of the settlement sound being output may not change. The amount of change in volume of the payout sound (including 0) may be larger or smaller than the amount of change in volume of the settlement sound (including 0).

With such a configuration, it becomes possible to reliably output the settlement sound, and it is possible to prevent settlement due to fraudulent activity.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying a management setting display for an administrator (for example, the menu screen SD1 of the system setting screen shown in FIG. 144(a)(3)), and The display of the setting display for management may not be started when the state and the detection state of the detection means are the closed detection state.

In addition, the display means can be operated by a specific operation (for example, an operation means provided at a position that can be operated even when the front door 102 is closed, and a position that can be operated only when the front door 102 is open). When the provided operation means are pressed simultaneously), the management setting display for the administrator (for example, the menu screen SD1 of the system setting screen shown in FIG. 145 (b) (2)) can be displayed. is displayed when the specific operation is performed in a state in which the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, and the certain setting display is displayed. The management setting display may be displayed at the same time as the display of the certain setting display that was being displayed ends.

With such a configuration, it is possible to terminate the display of a certain setting display and immediately perform settings for the administrator, thereby improving work efficiency more than conventionally.

The management setting display is a setting display related to volume (for example, the volume setting screen SD2 shown in (5) to (6) of FIG. 144(b)), and the administrator setting display is displayed. 3, when the certain operation is performed on the first operating means, the setting value of the certain setting relating to the volume is changed, but the setting display for administrator may not be erased. .

With such a configuration, it is possible to change the administrator setting value while the administrator setting display is being displayed, and work efficiency can be improved more than before.

[Embodiment 6]
In the slot machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of reels, into which a predetermined number of game media are inserted and on which a plurality of types of symbols are respectively applied, start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the receipt of the rotation start instructing operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of wins is determined by a lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instructing operation, If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game is finished, and if not, the game medium is discarded. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 149 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 149 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown) are housed in the center of the main body 101 and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. and a light-receiving portion, a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line. The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 to be activated.

The notification lamp 123 informs the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. It's a lamp to let you know. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment lights up until the bonus game ends after the bonus notification for notifying the bonus determination. Note that the notification lamp 123 may be lit before the bonus is announced (during the bonus or just before the bonus is announced). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation executing device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110 to 112. . More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped.

Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be called the first stop reel, the reel to be stopped by the second stop operation may be called the second stop reel, and the reel to be stopped by the third stop operation may be called the third stop reel.

Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137-139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110-112 is called the operation order or the pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be lit to inform the player.

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the AT system game state of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can recognize the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190 .

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) changes to the front of the slot machine 100 (game display). (user side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

It should be noted that, even if the display device is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen is rectangular, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Note that the notification lamp 123 and the high-navigation state lamp 190 notify the predetermined information by lighting the lamps, but the manner of notification is not limited to the lighting of the lamps. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a partial area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a full liquid crystal slot machine, the area near the reels 110 to 112 may be used). In the following description, the lighting of the notification lamp 123 or the high-navigation state lamp 190 is meant to include notification by other production devices (for example, a display device, etc.) having the same function.

<Inside the housing>
FIG. 150 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. The main body 101 is a box-shaped body surrounded by an upper plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a lower plate 264 and a rear plate 242, and having an open front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board housing case 210 containing a main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242. Three reels 110-112 are arranged below. On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the left side plate 260, a first sub control board housing the first sub control board constituting the first sub control unit is stored. A case 220 is provided. In addition, an external centralized terminal board 248 connected to the main control board and outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in the bucket) is disposed on the lower plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is arranged, and a power switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252 . The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate when the door is closed.

The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies power to each of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, etc., which will be described later. Supplied to the control unit and each device. In addition, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided for supplying power to predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after external power is cut off. there is

A medal auxiliary storage box 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal dispensing device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind it (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 265 , and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101 . there is

The front door 102 is hinged to the side plate 260 on the left side of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276. Above the liquid crystal display device 157, a production device 160 and a production control board (illustrated) for controlling the production device 160 are provided. omitted), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. Below the liquid crystal display device 157, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals, and a path 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals onto the medal receiving tray 161. there is Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 180 .

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control part>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and stopping of the reels. A ROM 306 for storing positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A WDT (watch dog timer) 314 is mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a random number generation circuit 316 that is activated when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). ).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110, index sensor of the reel 111, index sensor of the reel 112, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detects a put operation when The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the respective reels 110 to 112. Each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, the L become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (win line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, accumulated number display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 for driving the indicator 126, the payout number indicator 127, and the high navigation status lamp 190) is provided.

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output. In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 detects that the voltage value of the power supply is a predetermined value (this embodiment). 9v), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. Signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. there is This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. are doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like. are provided.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

The first sub-controller 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422. The drive circuit 422 is connected to various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input/output interface. 123, etc.) are connected.

A drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163 is provided in the first sub-controller 400, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. A timer 512 is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The second sub-controller 500 also has a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the second sub-controller 500 as a whole, image display data, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 516 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
Next, with reference to FIG. 152(a), the pattern arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. In addition, this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols provided on each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (20 frames numbered 0 to 19 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (eight types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in this embodiment, the frame numbered 19 on the left reel 110 has a "bell pattern", the frame numbered 19 on the middle reel 111 has a "blank pattern", and the frame numbered 18 on the right reel 112 has a "seven 2 Designs” are arranged respectively. In the following description, "Seven 1 pattern" may be referred to as "Blue 7 (design)", and "Seven 2 design" may be referred to as "Red 7 (design)".

<Winning line>
Next, with reference to FIG. 152(b), the winning lines will be explained. FIG. 152(b) is a diagram showing winning lines of the slot machine according to Embodiment 6 of the present invention.

The symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 1) is displayed on the left reel upper stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 2). The symbol to be displayed is the left reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 3) is the left reel bottom stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (4 shown in the figure). (also referred to as symbol position 4) is the middle reel upper stage symbol, the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 5) is the middle reel middle stage symbol, The symbol displayed on the lower stage of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 6) is displayed on the middle reel lower stage symbol and the upper stage of the right reel 112 (position 7 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 7). The symbol displayed is the right reel upper stage symbol, the symbol displayed in the middle stage of the right reel 112 (the position of 8 in the figure; also called symbol position 8) is the right reel middle stage symbol, and the right reel 112 lower stage symbol (9 shown in the figure) position (also referred to as symbol position 9) are called right reel lower symbols, and each symbol on each reel 110 to 112 is vertically three-dimensionally displayed on each reel 110 to 112 through a symbol display window 113. , a total of nine are displayed.

In this embodiment, one prize line 114 is provided, which is a middle prize line L1 composed of a left reel middle pattern (symbol position 2), a middle reel middle pattern (symbol position 5) and a right reel middle pattern (symbol position 8). ing. The winning line 114 is a line set at a symbol stop position that can be visually recognized through the reel window 113, and is a symbol corresponding to a winning combination to be described later with reference to FIGS. This is the line on which it is determined whether or not the combination has been displayed. FIG. 152(b) shows the middle winning line L1. A valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “valid line”) is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media.

The slot machine 100 of this embodiment can bet three or two, and when the number of inserted medals is less than two, none of the winning lines are activated and three or two medals are placed. The winning line L1 becomes effective when a coin is betted. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 .

Also, the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, a right-down winning line consisting of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel lower symbols, and left reel lower symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel upper symbols. A total of three pay lines 114 may be set as the valid pay lines 114, or the number of pay lines 114 corresponding to the number of bets may be set as the valid pay lines 114.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 153(a) and 153(b). FIG. 10(a) shows the types of winning combinations (including activated combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the activation or payout of each winning combination in a three-coin bet game. (b) is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including active combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and activation or payout of each winning combination in a two-coin bet game.

The winning combination of the slot machine 100 includes special combinations (special combination 1, special combination 2), general combinations (replay combination 1 to replay combination 13, small combination 1 to small combination 5), and the like. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Of the winning combinations in this embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations that shift to a special game state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. Further, the replay combination 1 to replay combination 13 are combinations that can be replayed without inserting new medals. These winning hands are sometimes referred to as "working hands". Further, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. Winning a special role 2 and a replay role 1 to a replay role 13 are included.

The special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations (operating combination) that shift to a special game state by winning a prize. In this example, the special combination 1 is a combination that can be won only in the 3-coin bet game, and the special combination 2 is a combination that can be won only in the 2-coin bet game. It should be noted that no medals are paid out for winning this role. The corresponding symbol combination is "seven 1-seven 1-seven 2" for special role 1 (BB1) and "BAR-BAR-seven 1" for special role 2 (BB2).

When the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to this internally won combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special combination 1, the main control unit 300 shifts the game state to the internal winning state of the special combination 1 (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2). Further, when the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special combination 2, the main control unit 300 shifts the game state to the internal winning state of the special combination 2 (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3). .

This flag is kept ON until the internal winning combination is won, and the state in which the internally winning combination is likely to be won in the next and subsequent games. That is, even if the special role is not won in the game in which the special role 1 or the special role 2 is internally won, the special role will be internally won in the game after the next time, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (for example, special If the winning combination 1 is internally won, the pattern combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2 (BB1)") will be in a state where it is easy to win all together. This special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2) and special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

The main control unit 300 shifts the game state to a special game state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special prize 1 or the special prize 2. Furthermore, in this special game state, when a predetermined number of payouts (in this example, 110 for winning by BB1 and 55 for winning by BB2) are paid out, a replay low probability state (hereinafter, this state will be referred to as RT1) there is). The special game state (RT4) and the low replay probability state (RT1) will be described later.

The “replay role (replay role 1 to replay role 13)” is a winning role (operating role) that can be played without inserting medals (game media) in the next game due to winning, No medals will be paid out. In addition, the corresponding symbol combination is "replay-replay-replay" for replay role 1 (normal replay), "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1" for replay role 2 (effect replay 1), and replay role 3 (Effect replay 2) is "seven 1-seven 2-seven 1", etc., as shown in FIG.

“Small wins (small wins 1 to 5)” are winning wins in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning. The role 2 (watermelon 1) is "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon", etc., as shown in FIG. Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in the figure. In the case of "ANY-cherry-ANY", the symbol of the middle reel 111 should be "cherry", and the symbols of the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 may be any symbols.

<Reel stop control>
Next, the outline of the stop control of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. For reel stop control, one of a plurality of types of predetermined reel stop control data is selected based on a predetermined condition (for example, the result of an internal lottery process for a winning combination to be described later), and the selected reel is stopped. Based on control data.

In this embodiment, so-called pull-in control (frame sliding control) is performed. The pull-in control shifts the stop positions of the reels 110-112 within a certain number of frames (the number of symbols) after the player operates the stop buttons 137-139. refers to control. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300 . Each reel stop data consists of permissive control that permits the symbol combination of a predetermined winning combination to be displayed together on the winning line, and prohibition control that the symbol combination of any winning combination is not displayed together on the winning line. , is roughly divided into.

Examples of the allowable control are, for example, when a winning combination is internally won, or when a special combination is internally won (while the flag is being carried over), and the timing at which the player operates each stop button 137 to 139. Control is performed so that the symbol combination of the winning combination is displayed in a uniform manner within the range of the number of frames, even if it is bad. However, since it is only "accepted", there are cases where the symbol combination is not complete depending on the timing of operating each of the stop buttons 137-139.

For example, when the small win 2 (watermelon 1) is internally won, the watermelon pattern is arranged in more than 4 frames. don't stop at

Of course, depending on the arrangement of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 and the number of drawn frames, there are cases where the symbols are aligned 100%. For example, since the replay symbol arrangement interval corresponding to the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is a maximum of 4 frames, if the replay combination 1 is internally won, the player wins 100% regardless of the timing.

On the other hand, an example of prohibition control is, for example, when the internal lottery result is a loss and the internal winning of the special role is not in progress (flag carried over), and the timing of operating each stop button 137 to 139 by the player. At best, the control is performed so that the symbol combination of the winning combination is not displayed together within the range of the above number of frames.

<Types of game state>
Next, the types and transitions of game states of the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 154(a) is a game state transition diagram of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. FIG.

The main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a low replay probability state (RT1), a high replay probability state and a special prize 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a replay high probability state and a special prize 2 internal winning state. It has a state (RT3) and a special game state (RT4). In the present embodiment, these four game states are referred to as RT-based game states. In addition, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls a state related to so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter referred to as an AT-based game state), and according to the AT-based game state determined by the main control unit 300, The first sub-control section 400 is designed to set the game state. The game state of the AT system will be described later with reference to FIG. 154(b).

In addition, the replay low probability state (RT1) is a state in which the probability of operating the condition device related to the replay combination does not change (default state), a special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a special combination 2 internal winning state. (RT3) and the special game state (RT4) are also states in which the probability of activation of the condition device relating to the replay combination varies from the default state.

<Lottery table>
FIG. 155(a) is a diagram showing a lottery table used for internal lottery processing for a winning combination. The horizontal axis represents each game state (RT type game state), and the vertical axis represents the lottery value of each winning combination. In addition, the item "No." in each figure is a number attached to each lottery result for convenience, and in the case of a single role, one "No." corresponds to one "condition device" However, in the case of duplicate hands, one "No." corresponds to multiple "conditional devices."

The internal winning probability of a winning combination in each gaming state, which will be explained later, is obtained from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306, and the numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each winning combination is obtained at the time of the internal lottery. It is obtained by a value divided by numerical data within a numerical range (eg, 65535). For example, in the replay low probability state (RT1), the lottery value for the small winning combination 2 is 512, and the winning probability for the small winning combination 1 is 512/65536×100≈0.8%. The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination and loss.

A random number value obtained as a result of executing an internal lottery is determined as a value corresponding to lottery data corresponding to which combination, and an internal lottery combination is determined. Setting 1 to setting 6 are prepared for this lottery data with different winning probabilities of at least one combination, and the staff of the game parlor can arbitrarily select and set any of the set values. It should be noted that the internal winning probability shown in this figure is an example, and the probability is not limited to this.

Hereinafter, the RT system game state of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The low replay probability state is the lowest (disadvantageous to the player) game state among the other game states (for example, game states excluding the special game state) in which the internal winning probability of replay is the lowest, and is referred to as the normal game state. There is also In the replay low-probability state, a winning combination for internal winning is selected by referring to the lottery table in the "RT1" column on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 155(a).

Winning hands that are internally won in the replay low probability state include special hand 1 (condition device No. 1, only 3 bet games), special hand 2 (not shown, only 2 bet games), replay hand 1 ( Condition device No. 2), replay hands 2, 4 to 10 (condition device No. 3), replay hands 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13 (condition device No. 4), small hand 1 to small There is a role 5 (condition device No. 5 to 9). If the winning combination is not won, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. It should be noted that the fact that the symbol combination relating to the winning line is not stopped may be referred to as "losing". In addition, there is a case where the fact that the player did not win the winning role is expressed as "won the wrong way".

Here, "replay hands 2, 4 to 10" are replay hands 2, replay hands 4, replay hands 5, replay hands 6, replay hands 7, replay hands 8, replay hands 9 , and replay combination 10 are internally elected at the same time. In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to which combination is displayed is determined according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order (in this example, when the stop operation is performed by pressing in the reverse direction), the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 2 is displayed. Displayed on the winning line, otherwise, replay combination 4, replay combination 5, replay combination 6, replay combination 7, replay combination according to the timing of the stop operation of each reel 110 to 112 8, a symbol combination corresponding to either a replay combination 9 or a replay combination 10 is displayed on the winning line. It should be noted that, like this "replayed combination 2, 4 to 10", there is a case where the combination in which the winning combination is determined by the order of operations is called a "push order combination".

Further, "replay hands 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13" are replay hands 3, replay hands 4, replay hands 6, replay hands 8, replay hands 10, replay hands 11 , replay combination 12, and replay combination 13 are internally elected at the same time. In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to which combination is displayed is determined according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order (in this example, when the stop operation is performed by pressing in the reverse direction), the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 3 is displayed. Displayed on the winning line, otherwise, replay combination 4, replay combination 6, replay combination 8, replay combination 10, replay combination according to the timing of the stop operation of each reel 110 to 112 11, a replay combination 12, and a replay combination 13 are displayed on the winning line.

When the "small winning combination 4" is internally won, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (bell) is displayed on the winning line according to the player's operation order (Fig. 155 ( a) See remarks). More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order, "Bell-Bell-Bell" is displayed on the winning line, and 11 medals are paid out ( bell award). On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed according to the correct operation order, "Bell-Bell-Bell" is not displayed on the winning line (losing).

In addition, even if the "small win 4" is internally won and the stop operation is not performed according to the correct operation order, there is a case where the player wins a one-coin win where one medal is paid out. If the stop operation is performed in accordance with the predetermined incorrect operation order, the win is won, and if the stop operation is performed in accordance with the other incorrect operation order, the win is not awarded, It is configured so as not to pay out medals.

Further, the "small winning combination 4" is composed of the "small winning combination 4a" and the "small winning combination 4b", and when the "small winning combination 4a" is internally won, "Bell-Bell-Bell" is selected according to the order of operation of the player. ” is displayed on the pay line. On the other hand, if the “small win 4b” is internally won, “Bell-Bell-Bell” is displayed on the pay line regardless of the operation order. It may be configured as

Here, with reference to FIG. 155(b), the correct operation order of "small winning combination 4" will be described in detail. "Small role 4" is exactly six of "small role 4LCR", "small role 4LRC", "small role 4CLR", "small role 4CRL", "small role 4RLC", and "small role 4RCL". , and a different correct operation order is assigned to each of the subdivided "small wins 4". It should be noted that the range of the lottery data associated with each of the six subdivided "small wins 4" is the same.

For example, when the "small win 4LCR" of the "small win 4" is internally won, the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The stop operation is the correct operation, and the other stop operations are the incorrect operations. Further, when the "small winning combination 4 CRL" of the "small winning combination 4" is internally won, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110. The stop operation is the correct operation.

FIG. 154(a) shows that when the special combination 1 is internally elected (when the condition (A) is satisfied), the state shifts to the special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2), which will be described later. When the special combination 2 is internally elected (when the condition (B) is satisfied), it is indicated that the state shifts to the special combination 2 internal election state (RT3) described later.

<Special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), Special role 2 internal winning state (RT3)>
Special combination internal winning state (RT2) and special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) (hereinafter collectively referred to as "special combination internal winning state") are replay low probability states (RT1 ), the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is set to ON, and the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing. By doing, it is a game state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the special role corresponding to this flag can be displayed.

In the special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), the internal winning winning combination is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the "RT2" column on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. In RT3), a winning combination for internal winning is selected by referring to the lottery table in the row of "RT3" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 155(a). Winning hands internally won in the special role internal winning state include replay hand 1, replay hands 2, 4 to 10, replay hands 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13, small hand 1 to small hand 4. There is If the winning combination is not won, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. In addition, in FIG. 154 (a), in the special role internal winning state, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is displayed (when the condition (C) is satisfied), a special game to be described later A transition to state (RT4) is shown.

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special game state (RT4) is the most advantageous game state for the player among all the game states. In the special game state, the lottery table in the row of "RT4" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. The winning combination internally won in the special game state is only the small combination 5. - 特許庁Also, if the winning combination is not won, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed.

FIG. 154(a) shows that in the special game state (RT4), when the prescribed number of coins is paid out (when the condition (D) is satisfied), the state shifts to the replay low probability state (RT1). ing. Specifically, when the special game state is entered based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1, when more than 110 medals are paid out, the replay low probability state (RT1) is entered. transition to In addition, when the state is shifted to the special game state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 2, the state is shifted to the replay low probability state (RT1) when more than 55 medals are paid out. .

In the present embodiment, the special game state ends when the specified number of payouts is executed. For example, the game may end when a prize is won eight times, or when a predetermined number of games (for example, six times) are played. That is, the condition (D) shown in FIG. 154(a) is not limited to this example.

<Transition of game state of AT system>
In the present embodiment, the special game state ends when the specified number of coins are paid out. Next, the AT game state will be described with reference to FIG. 154(b). FIG. 154(b) is a transition diagram of the AT system game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. FIG.

The game state of the AT system is roughly classified into a low navigation state and a high navigation state, as shown in FIG. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode. The high-navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is higher than in the low-navigation state, and is also called an AT mode. Here, the operation navigator means that an internal winning combination (in this example, replay combination 2, 4 to 10, replay combination 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13, or a small combination 4) is won. In this case, it refers to an effect that informs the correct operation order. That is, operation navigation refers to an effect that notifies the content of a stop operation for obtaining medals, or the content of a stop operation for shifting to an advantageous game state or maintaining an advantageous game state.

Operation navigation will now be described with reference to FIGS. 155(b) and 156. FIG. In this embodiment, the payout number display 127 and effect image display device 157 are used to execute operation navigation. FIG. 155(b) is a diagram for explaining the order of correct operation for pushing the winning hand of the slot machine according to Embodiment 6 of the present invention, and FIG. It is a diagram.

For example, the display data 01 is data suggesting a stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel, the display data 02 is data suggesting a stop operation with the middle reel 111 as the first stop reel, and the display data 03 is , and data suggesting a stop operation with the right reel 112 as the first stop reel.

Therefore, when "replay hands 2, 4 to 10" or "replay hands 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13" are internally won in the AT mode, the first stop reel is the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is correct, the display data 03 suggesting that the first stop operation is right is selected, and the payout number indicator 127 displays a lighting mode corresponding to the display data 03, and an effect image is displayed. Device 157 displays an image (eg, the characters “--1”) that suggests that the first stopping reel is right reel 112 .

The display data 04 is data suggesting a stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel, the middle reel 111 as the second stop reel, and the right reel 112 as the third stop reel, and the display data 05 is the first stop reel. is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the middle reel 111. Display data 06 is the first stop reel, the middle reel 111, and the second stop reel. Data suggesting a stop operation with the left reel 110 and the third stop reel as the right reel 112, and the display data 07 are the first stop reel as the middle reel 111, the second stop reel as the right reel 112, and the third stop reel as the left reel. Data suggesting a stop operation with the reel 110, the display data 08 is data suggesting a stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112, the second stop reel as the left reel 110, and the third stop reel as the middle reel 112. , the display data 09 is data suggesting a stop operation with the right reel 112 as the first stop reel, the middle reel 111 as the second stop reel, and the left reel 110 as the third stop reel.

Therefore, when the small win 4CLR of the "small win 4" is internally won in the AT mode, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is correct, the display data 06 suggesting that the first stop operation is middle, the second stop operation is left, and the third stop operation is right is selected. and the effect image display device 157 indicates that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. An image (for example, the characters “213”) is displayed.

In this embodiment, based on the lighting mode of the payout number indicator 127, it is possible to determine whether the internal winning combination is a replay combination or a small combination of 4. However, for example, the stop operation of the correct answer for the small winning combination 4 may be three choices like the replay winning combination, and the small winning combination 4 may also be notified using the display data 01-03. In this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode. In addition, it is also possible to configure the stop operation of the correct answer for the replay combination to be six options such as the small combination 4, and to notify the replay combination using the display data 04 to 09 as well. Also in this case, it is not possible to determine the internal winning combination only by the lighting mode.

In the present embodiment, the low navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of manipulation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of manipulation navigation is higher than in the low navigation state. The state in which the operation navigation is not executed and the high navigation state may be set as the state in which the operation navigation is executed. When the stop operation is performed according to the operation content of the operation navigation, a result advantageous to the player is brought about, so the high navigation state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state. Here, the term “advantageous” specifically refers to the total number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machine as compared to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets when playing the game for a predetermined period of time. It refers to the ratio, the so-called payout rate (ball output rate).

In this embodiment, when a certain condition is satisfied in the low navigation state (for example, when winning a winning combination other than losing), the game shifts to the normal state of the high navigation state. After that, as shown in FIG. 154(c), for example, it shifts in the order of fixed notification state→AT1 state→judging state, and from this judging state, it shifts to normal game state or AT2 state via pullback state. There is a route, and a route that directly transitions from the judge state to the AT2 state. In the present embodiment, when it is determined to shift to the AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state), a predetermined number (eg, 50 games) of AT mode games (hereinafter referred to as AT game number) is provided. Further, although details will be described later, if a certain condition is satisfied in the high navigation state, the vehicle shifts to the LMT (limit) state.

<AT system state transition>
FIG. 154(b) is a diagram showing an effect state in each game state of the AT system. Each game state of the AT system is subdivided and managed as shown in FIG. 154(b), which is called an effect state. Specifically, the production state of the low navigation state is the normal state, and the production state of the high navigation state is the normal state, the final announcement state, the judge state, the withdrawal state, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state. . Note that the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state are, in principle, states in which the number of paid balls increases.

Here, the limit state is, in principle, the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state, that is, the production state from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state (from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state (This case will be described later). In this embodiment, when the high-navigation state becomes 20 or less games remaining, an ending effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ED effect") suggesting the end of the high-navigation state is executed.

<Production table>
Next, the effect table provided in the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 157. FIG. FIG. 157(a) shows an image of an effect table provided in the first sub-control section 400. FIG. The storage means (for example, ROM 406 and RAM 408 shown in FIG. 151) of the first sub-control section 400 stores an effect table provided for each effect state.

The first sub-control unit 400, in the command processing (step S3604) of the first sub-control unit main processing to be described later, effect information included in the command received from the main control unit 300 (for example, effect state, high navigation state counter, Production state counter, etc.) is acquired, and in the subsequent production control process (step S3605), the production table corresponding to the production state, etc. is referred to, and production corresponding to the production state counter, etc. is performed. For example, when the current effect state is the AT1 state, the effect table corresponding to the AT1 state (AT1 state effect table) is referred to, and processing such as reading effect data for executing the later-described AT1 effect from the ROM 406 is performed. If the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

Further, when the current effect state is the judge state, the effect table corresponding to the judge state (judgment state effect table) is referred to, and processing such as reading effect data for executing the later-described judge effect from the ROM 406 is performed. If the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

FIG. 157(b) is a diagram showing an example of the judgment state rendering table. When the effect state included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is the judge state, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to, for example, a judge state effect table as shown in FIG. Judge performances corresponding to points and performance state counters are performed.

Specifically, when the performance control is performed according to the judgment state performance table shown in FIG. <B) is performed, and when the point is 2, the judgment effect is performed to change the enemy character in the order of A->A->B->B. In addition, when the effect control is performed according to the judgment state effect table shown in FIG. -1→D2-1→D3-1→… Performs a judgment effect that changes in turn, and when the value of the effect state counter is N-1 (the number of remaining games in the judge state is N-1), the effect mode is changed. Judge performance is performed to change in the order of D1-2→D2-2→D3-2→ . . .

Further, when the current effect state is the LMT state, the effect table corresponding to the LMT state (LMT state effect table) is referred to, and processing such as reading effect data for executing the LMT effect described later from the ROM 406 is performed. If the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

FIG. 157(c) is a diagram showing an example of the LMT state rendering table. When the effect state included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is the LMT state, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the LMT state effect table as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the corresponding opportunity (starting condition, end condition, etc. of the performance) has arrived, and when the opportunity has arrived, the performance corresponding to the counter is performed.

Specifically, when effect control is performed according to the LMT state effect table shown in FIG. When the pressing operation (lever on) is received, using the lottery table for the setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. to select a predetermined effect, perform processing such as reading effect data for executing the effect from the ROM 406, and execute setting suggestion effect A (for example, display of a character image).

Also, when the value of the effect state counter is 0 (the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0) and the third stop operation is received, the lottery table for setting suggestion effect B shown in FIG. Select a predetermined effect from among a plurality of types of effects B1 to B10 according to the current set value, perform processing such as reading effect data for executing the effect from the ROM 406, etc., and perform setting suggestion effect B (for example, the background image of the end screen).

Further, although the details will be described later, in the case of a two-coin bet game, in the case of controlling to continuously display a specific scene (not to display the subsequent scene) in the interlocking effect, the main control unit 300 is in the effect state. Since the counter value is not updated, the first sub-control unit 400 continues to display the scene corresponding to the same rendering state counter value. It should be noted that the method of controlling to continuously display a specific scene (not to display subsequent scenes) in the interlocked effect is not limited to this example. It may be configured not to transmit the command for displaying the subsequent scene in the presentation.

It should be noted that the effect mode, type, determination method, etc. of the setting suggestion effect are not limited to this example. For example, as shown in FIG. , the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be changed. For example, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be higher or lower when the effect state counter (the number of remaining games in the LMT state) is larger than when it is small.

<Operation of the slot machine>
Based on the above characteristics, the processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this start signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt is disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables to be stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the WDT 314 is permitted to operate, and the initialization is performed. Set values, etc.

In step S102, a bet number setting/start operation acceptance process (details will be described later) is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted, and preparations are made to send an insert command indicating that the medals have been inserted. When the player wins the replay role in the previous game, the processing of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so the player does not need to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, winning line determination processing is performed to determine the number of inserted medals and to determine an effective winning line.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is obtained, and internal winning combination lottery processing is performed. In the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the acquired random number, and the result of this internal lottery is displayed. Prepare to send the internal lottery command to the first sub-controller 400 . As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the working combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is turned on.

In step S105, reel stop data selection processing for selecting reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery processing. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300. FIG. Also, in step S105, preparations are made to transmit a reel stop data command containing information about the selected reel stop data to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S106, an effect control process A (details will be described later) relating to the control of the game state of the AT system is executed based on the start lever operation. In step S107, the process for production|presentation is performed. In this effect processing, freeze effect control and the like are performed.

Here, the freeze effect refers to a effect that makes the originally planned effect seem to be interrupted in the middle, a effect that makes the slot machine stop responding, or the like. Furthermore, with regard to light emission, for example, stopping the change in lighting mode is referred to as freezing. With regard to sound output, for example, continuing to output the same sound is referred to as freezing. Stopping may be referred to as freezing.

In step S108, reel rotation start processing is executed to start rotation of all the reels 110-112.

In step S109, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, it is possible to accept the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when one of the stop buttons is pressed, a stop table of reel stop data is created in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. One of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of frames to be drawn set in the stop table. When all the reels 110-112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S110. In this step S109, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (more specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command, the second stop operation, and the for the stop button reception 2 command, and for the third stop operation, prepare to transmit the stop button reception 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel (Specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop command for the third stop operation 3 command) to the first sub-controller 400.

In step S110, winning determination processing for determining winning is performed. In this winning determination process, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the activated pay line, it is determined that a small win 3 (Bell) has been won. Also, in this step S110, preparations are made to transmit a prize determination command indicating the result of the prize determination to the first sub-control section 400. FIG.

In step S111, medal awarding processing is performed. In the medal awarding process, if the player wins some winning combination with a payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines. Also, in this step S111, the number of medals (number of insertions) that the player has inserted in the game is subtracted from the number of medals (number of payouts) that the player has acquired (given to the player) in the game. By adding the value to the current counter value of the difference number counter, the count value of the difference number counter is updated. In addition, in step S111, preparations are made to transmit a payout command containing at least information on the number of inserted coins and information on the number of payouts indicating the number of coins to be paid out to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S112, game state control processing is performed. In the game state control processing, processing relating to the transition of each game state of the RT system is performed, and the game state is shifted when the start condition or end condition is met. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command including information indicating the current RT-system game state.

In step S113, an effect control process B (details will be described later) relating to the control of the game state of the AT system is executed. In step S114, a high-navigation state termination process (details will be described later) relating to termination of the high-navigation state is executed.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. Various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission processing (step S2006 in FIG. 159) of the main control unit timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S2001, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S2002, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S2003, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S2004, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed. In step S2005, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S<b>2006 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S2007, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S2008, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S2003, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S2009, it monitors whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (power shutdown is detected), the process proceeds to step S2011, and if the low voltage signal is off (power shutdown is not detected), the process proceeds to step S2010.

In step S2010, various processes for ending the timer interrupt ending process are performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S2001 are set in the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S2011, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 when power is restored, and power failure processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 158 is returned to.

<Processing of the first sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 160(a) is a flow chart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 160(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 160(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, the main processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 160(a).

When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S3001. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state.

In step S3002, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S3003. In step S3003, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S3004, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S3005, effect control processing is performed. Here, production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408 . This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing updating processing of the effect data when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S3006, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command for the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S3005, this command is output to the sound source IC 418. FIG. In step S3007, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to various lamps 420 in the performance data read in step S3005, this command is output to the drive circuit 422. FIG.

In step S3008, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the performance data read in step S3005, this command is output to the driving circuit 424. FIG. In step S3009, information output processing is performed to set the transmission of a command to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-controller 500 in the effect data read out in step S3005, the setting for outputting this control command is made, and the process returns to step S3002.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 160(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S3101 of command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 160(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S3201, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S3002 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 160(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S3002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S3202, the command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S3009, the random number value for effect is updated, and the like.

<Processing of the second sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 161(a) is a flow chart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 161(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 161(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 161(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S4001 of FIG. 161(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S4001. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, initialization processing of storage areas in the VRAM 536, and the like are performed.

In step S4002, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S4003. In step S4003, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S4004, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S4005, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S4004, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S4006, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S4005. For example, if there is an image control instruction in the effect data read in step S4005, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S4002.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 161(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S4101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 161(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S4201, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S4002 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 161(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S4002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S4202, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing in step S4006 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 161(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S4301, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 536), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 534 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S4302, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 534. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S4303; otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S4303, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S4301, the CPU 504 obtains information of the image data forming the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 536, image size, and so on). , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), transparency, etc.) to the VDP 534 . The VDP 534 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S4304, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S4305, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 534 based on the end of image rendering. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S5306; wait for is entered.

In step S4306, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Bet number setting/start operation acceptance process>
Next, with reference to FIG. 162(a), the bet number setting/start operation receiving process will be described. FIG. 162(a) is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the bet number setting/start operation acceptance process in step S102 of FIG.

In step S201, in a medal-insertable state before the start lever is operated, a high-navigation state update process (details will be described later) relating to the transition from the low-navigation state to the high-navigation state and the update of the high-navigation state is executed.

In step S202, other bet amount setting/start operation acceptance processing is executed. That is, the number of bets is set, and it is determined whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated.

<High navigation state update process>
Next, high navigation state update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 162(b). FIG. 162(b) is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of high navigation state update processing in step S201 of FIG. 162(a).

In step S301, it is determined whether or not high navigation state counter>0. If the high navigation state counter>0, the process proceeds to step S302; otherwise, the high navigation state update process ends. In step S302, 1 is subtracted from the value of the high navigation state counter.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state flag is off. The high navigation state flag is a flag indicating whether or not the game state of the AT system is in the high navigation state. When ON, it indicates a high navigation state, and when OFF, it indicates a low navigation state. If the high navigation state flag is off, the process proceeds to step S304; otherwise, the high navigation state update process ends.

In step S304, the high navigation state flag is turned on. In this embodiment, an initial value (1000 in this example) is set to the high navigation state counter in a game in which transition from the low navigation state to the high navigation state is determined (see step S703 in FIG. 164(b) described later). , and when the start lever of the next game is operated, it shifts to the high navigation state. By turning on the high navigation state flag, the high navigation state lamp 190 starts lighting.

<Production State Control Processing A>
Next, the effect state control process A will be described with reference to FIG. 163(a). FIG. 163(a) is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of effect state control processing A in step S106 of FIG.

In step S401, a game common process (details will be described later) is executed. In step S402, it is determined whether or not the processing prohibition flag is off. The processing prohibition flag is a flag indicating whether or not to execute processing related to the high navigation state in the high navigation state. When the processing prohibition flag is off, the game is capable of executing processing related to the high navigation state. , and when the processing prohibition flag is ON, it indicates that the game does not execute the processing related to the high navigation state. If the process prohibition flag is off, the process proceeds to step S403, otherwise, that is, if the process prohibition flag is on, the process proceeds to step S406.

In step S403, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state flag is off. If the high navigation state flag is off, the process proceeds to step S404, and if the high navigation state flag is not off, that is, it is on, the process proceeds to step S405.

In step S404, since the vehicle is in the low navigation state, low navigation state processing A (details will be described later) is executed. In step S405, since the vehicle is in the high navigation state, high navigation state processing A (details will be described later) is executed. In step S406, another effect state control process A is executed.

In the effect state control process A of this embodiment, a process prohibition flag is provided, and only when the process prohibition flag is off, the low navigation state process A or the high navigation state process A is executed, but the process prohibition flag is not provided. may In this case, the low navigation state processing A or the high navigation state processing A is always executed in the effect state control processing A.

<Process common to each game>
Next, the processing common to each game will be described with reference to FIG. 163(b). FIG. 163(b) is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the process common to every game in step S401 of FIG. 163(a).

In step S501, it is determined whether or not the conditions for executing high navigation state related processing are satisfied. Here, the condition for executing the high navigation state related processing is, for example, that the game is a recommended number game (in this example, a 3-coin bet game). The recommended number-of-numbers game is not limited to the 3-pieces game, and the recommended number-of-numbers game may differ for each state of the slot machine. As a result of the determination in step S501, if the conditions for executing high navigation state related processing are satisfied (for example, if the game is a 3-bet game), proceed to step S502, otherwise (for example , if the game is a two-coin bet game), the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S502, the processing prohibition flag is turned off. In step S503, the processing prohibition flag is turned on. In step S504, other common processing for each game is executed.

<Low navigation state processing A>
Next, the processing common to each game will be described with reference to FIG. 164(a). FIG. 164(a) is a flow chart showing in detail the low navigation state process A in step S404 of FIG. 163(a).

In step S601, high navigation state transition processing (details will be described later) for determining whether to transition to the high navigation state is executed. In step S602, another low navigation state process A is executed.

<High navigation state transition processing>
Next, high navigation state transition processing will be described with reference to FIG. 164(b). FIG. 164(b) is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of high navigation state transition processing in step S601 of FIG. 164(a).

In step S701, high navigation state transition determination is executed. In this high navigation state transition determination, when the high navigation state transition condition is satisfied (in this example, when winning a winning combination other than losing in the winning combination internal lottery process), it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied, and the following Decide to go from game to high nav state.

In step S702, it is determined whether or not the transition to the high navigation state has been determined. If so, the process proceeds to step S703, and if not, the high navigation state transition processing ends.

In step S703, an initial value (1000 in this example) is set to the high navigation state counter. Needless to say, the initial value of the high navigation state counter is not limited to 1,000, and may be, for example, 1,500. In step S705, other high navigation state transition processing is executed. Here, the number of games to be executed after shifting to the high-navigation state is set. For example, the ceiling counter is set to an initial value (700 in this example).

In step S701, in the high-navigation state transition determination, it is decided to transition to the high-navigation state when a winning combination other than a losing combination is won, but the high-navigation transition condition is not limited to this. The transition to the high navigation state may be determined based on the result of the lottery used, or a lottery may be conducted using a lottery value set for each winning combination, and the transition to the high navigation state may be made based on the result of the lottery. may be determined.

<High navigation state processing A>
Next, high navigation state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 165 is a flow chart showing in detail the high navigation state process A in step S405 of FIG. 163(a).

In step S801, high navigation state common processing (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S802, it is determined whether or not the rendering state is the normal state. If so, go to step S803, otherwise go to step S804. In step S803, normal state processing A (details will be described later) is executed. Although the details will be described later, in this normal state process A, for example, the number of games in the effect state (premonition state) is decremented. In addition, effect setting is performed according to the result of the internal winning combination lottery process of the game.

In step S804, it is determined whether or not the production state is the final notification state. In step S805, a confirmation notification state process A (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S806, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT1 state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S807, and if not, the process proceeds to step S808. In step S807, AT1 state processing A (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S808, it is determined whether or not the rendering state is the judgment state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S809, and if not, the process proceeds to step S810. In step S809, judgment state processing A (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S810, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT2 state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S811, and if not, the process proceeds to step S812. In step S811, AT2 state processing A (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S812, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the pullback state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S813, and if not, the process proceeds to step S814. In step S813, pullback state processing A (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S814, an instruction information setting process (details will be described later) regarding setting of instruction information is executed.

<High navigation state common processing A>
Next, high navigation state common processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing in detail the high navigation state common processing A in step S801 of FIG.

In step S901, it is determined whether or not the rendering state counter>0. If the rendering state counter>0, the process proceeds to step S902, otherwise, the process proceeds to step S903. In step S902, 1 is subtracted from the value of the effect state counter. Here, the effect state counter is a counter for managing the transition of the effect state. If the number of games in each production state is determined by lottery, table, etc., the value of the production state counter may be set to the result of the lottery or the value obtained from the table, etc., or the state may be shifted to the high navigation state. When the game is played, the number of games in which some or all of the effects are performed may be collectively determined.

In step S903, it is determined whether or not the current rendering state is the LMT state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S904, and if not, the process proceeds to step S909.

In step S904, it is determined whether or not the value of the high navigation state counter is equal to or less than the LMT transition value A (19 in this example). The process proceeds to step S905. In this example, since the LMT state is 20G, the LMT transition value A is set to 19 (=20G-1G), but other numerical values may be used.

In step S905, it is determined whether or not the value of the difference number counter is equal to or less than the LMT shift value B (1840 in this example). Proceed to S909. In this example, when the LMT state is 20G, the maximum number of payouts in the 3-bet game is 11 (the maximum increase is 8), and the difference number exceeds 2000, the high-navigation state is terminated. Therefore, the LMT shift value B is set to 1840 (=2000 sheets−8 sheets×20 G), but other numerical values may be used.

In step S906, the LMT initial value (19 in this example) is set in the effect state counter, and in the next step S907, freeze information (various information for executing the freeze effect) is set. Also, in step S908, after the LMT state is set in the presentation state, the process proceeds to step S909. As a result, the presentation state shifts from the game to the LMT state.

In this example, the LMT initial value is set to 19 (=20G-1G) in order to shift from the game to the LMT state, but other values may be used. Also, the processing itself in step S906 may be deleted. With such a configuration, after shifting to the LMT state, it is possible to stay in the high navigation state until the number of games reaches the maximum number of games or until the difference number reaches the maximum difference number. , the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

In step S909, after executing other high navigation state common processing A, the high navigation state common processing A ends.

<Normal state processing A>
Next, normal state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 167 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of normal state processing A in step S803 of FIG.

In step S1001, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter>0. If the ceiling counter>0, the process proceeds to step S1002; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1002, 1 is subtracted from the value of the ceiling counter. Here, the ceiling counter is a counter for managing the number of games up to the ceiling. In this embodiment, the initial value (700 in this example) is set to the ceiling counter in step S705 of the high navigation state transition process described with reference to FIG. may

In step S1003, it is determined whether the AT1 winning flag is off or on, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S1004, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1011. In step S1004, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter is 0. If so, the process proceeds to step S1007, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1005. At step S1005, an AT1 transition lottery is performed. Here, the AT1 shift lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the AT1 state, and in this example, determination is made based on the results of internal lottery processing for winning combinations, random numbers, and the like. The content of the AT1 transition lottery is not limited to this example, and for example, the value of the high navigation state counter may be taken into account to determine the success or failure, or the points may be determined based on the results of the internal lottery process for the winning combination. may be given and the eligibility may be determined based on the points.

In step S1006, it is determined whether or not the AT1 transition lottery in step S1005 has been won. If the lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S1007, and if the lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S1016. In step S1007, an AT1 type lottery is performed. Here, the AT1 type lottery is a lottery for determining the type of the AT1 state, and in this example, either "high" or "low" is determined based on a random number or the like. In addition, the contents of the AT1 type lottery are not limited to this example, for example, "high" is selected as the AT1 type in the lottery when winning the AT1 transition lottery rather than the lottery when reaching the ceiling. A configuration that is easy (or difficult to be selected) may be adopted.

In step S1008, the result of the AT1 type lottery in step S1007 is set to AT1 type, and in the next step S1009, the number of games is determined by lottery, and the number of games is set in the effect state counter. Also, in step S1010, after turning on the AT1 winning flag, the process proceeds to step S1016.

At step S1011, it is determined whether or not the AT1 type is "low". In step S1012, a promotion counter addition lottery is performed. Here, the promotion counter addition lottery is a lottery for determining the numerical value to be added to the promotion counter, and in this example, the numerical value is determined based on a random number or the like. In step S1013, the numerical value (lottery result value) determined by the promotion counter addition lottery in step S1012 is added to the promotion counter, and then the process proceeds to step S1016.

In step S1014, a judge mode lottery is performed. Here, the judge mode lottery is a lottery for determining one judge mode from a plurality of types of judge modes (three types of "normal", "high accuracy", and "heaven" in this example). Yes, and in this example, the judgment mode is determined based on a random value or the like. In step S1015, the lottery result of the judge mode lottery in step S1014 is set to judge mode, and then the process proceeds to step S1016. In step S1106, after other normal state processing A is performed, the normal state processing A ends.

<Confirmation notification state processing A>
Next, with reference to FIG. 168, the confirmation notification state process A will be described. FIG. 168 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the decision notification state process A in step S805 of FIG.

In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the AT1 type is "low". In step S1102, a promotion counter addition lottery is performed. As described above, the promotion counter addition lottery is a lottery for determining the numerical value to be added to the promotion counter, and in this example, the numerical value is determined based on a random number or the like. In step S1103, the numerical value (lottery result value) determined by the promotion counter addition lottery in step S1102 is added to the promotion counter, and then the process proceeds to step S1104.

In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the value of the promotion counter is equal to or greater than the ceiling value (for example, 700). At step S1105, the AT1 type is set to "high", and at the next step S1106, the judge mode is set to "high probability", and the process proceeds to step S1109.

In step S1107, a judge mode lottery is performed. As described above, the judge mode lottery is a lottery for determining one judge mode from among a plurality of types of judge modes (three types of "normal", "high accuracy", and "heaven" in this example). , and in this example, the judgment mode is determined based on a random number value or the like. In step S1108, the lottery result of the judge mode lottery in step S1107 is set to the judge mode, and then the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1109, after performing other confirmation notification state processing A, the confirmation notification state processing A is terminated.

<AT1 state processing A>
Next, with reference to FIG. 169, AT1 state processing A will be described. FIG. 169 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of AT1 state processing A in step S807 of FIG.

In step S1201, a judge mode lottery is performed. As described above, the judge mode lottery is a lottery for determining one judge mode from among a plurality of types of judge modes (three types of "normal", "high accuracy", and "heaven" in this example). , and in this example, the judgment mode is determined based on a random number value or the like. In step S1202, the lottery result of the judge mode lottery in step S1201 is set to judge mode, and then the process proceeds to step S1203. In step S1203, after performing other AT1 state processing A, the AT1 state processing A ends.

<Judge status processing A>
Next, with reference to FIG. 170, the judgment state processing A will be explained. FIG. 170 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of judgment state processing A in step S809 of FIG.

In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the cancellation counter>0. If the release counter>0, the process proceeds to step S1302; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1304. In step S1302, 1 is subtracted from the value of the release counter. Here, the release counter is a counter for managing the number of games until the judge mode is released. In this embodiment, in step S2104 of AT1 state processing B, which will be described later, a lottery value is set in the release counter, but other numerical values may be used. In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the release counter=0. If the release counter=0, the process proceeds to step S1306; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1304.

In step S1304, a release lottery corresponding to the judge mode is performed, and in the next step S1305, if the release lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S1306, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1307. Here, the release lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the AT2 state. In this example, if the judge mode is heaven and the release lottery is won, the judge mode heaven is continued without shifting to the AT2 state. Also, if the judge mode is heaven and a specific rare hand (in this example, a small hand 2 or a small hand 3) is internally won, there is a 100% chance of AT2 regardless of the result of the release lottery. transition to state. The content of the cancellation lottery is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a lottery for determining whether to shift to a certain specialized zone.

In step S1306, after setting the determined state in the judgment state, the process proceeds to step S1307. In this example, if it is determined in step S1303 that the release counter is 0 (when the judge mode heaven ends), the AT2 state is set as the judge state in step S1306. That is, in this example, when Heaven in the judge mode ends, there is a 100% probability that the state will shift to the AT2 state. Also, in steps S1304 and S1305, if the judge mode is heaven and the release lottery is won, the judgment state is set to heaven in the judge mode. Also, in steps S1304 and S1305, if the judge mode is Heaven and a specific rare hand (in this example, a small hand 2 or a small hand 3) is internally elected, regardless of the result of the release lottery, At step S1306, the AT2 state is set as the judge state.

In step S1307, the AT1 state processing A is terminated after other judgment state processing A is performed.

<AT2 state processing A>
Next, with reference to FIG. 171, AT2 state processing A will be described. FIG. 171 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of AT2 state processing A in step S811 of FIG.

In step S1401, an AT count addition lottery is performed. Here, the AT number addition lottery is a lottery for determining the number of games to be added (added) to the number of AT games. In step S1402, the lottery result value (additional game number) of the AT number addition lottery is added to the effect state counter.

In step S1403, a judge mode lottery is performed. As described above, the judge mode lottery is a lottery for determining one judge mode from among a plurality of types of judge modes (three types of "normal", "high accuracy", and "heaven" in this example). , and in this example, the judgment mode is determined based on a random number value or the like. In step S1403, the lottery result of the judge mode lottery in step S1401 is set to judge mode, and then the process proceeds to step S1404. In step S1404, after performing other AT2 state processing A, the AT2 state processing A ends.

<Pullback state processing A>
Next, with reference to FIG. 172, the retraction state process A will be described. FIG. 172 is a flow chart showing in detail the pullback state process A in step S813 of FIG.

At step S1501, a pull-back lottery is performed, and at step SS1502, it is determined whether or not the pull-back lottery has been won. In step S1503, the retracted state is set to the determined state. In this example, the lottery result of the pullback lottery in step S1501 is set to the pullback state. In step S1504, after performing other pullback state processing A, the pullback state processing A ends.

<Instruction information setting process>
Next, referring to FIG. 173, instruction information setting processing will be described. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing in detail the instruction information setting process in step S814 of FIG.

In step S1601, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the instruction information notification possible state. Here, the instruction information notification possible state indicates the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT state in this example. If the effect state is the instruction information notification possible state, the process proceeds to step S1602, and if not, the instruction information setting process ends.

In step S1602, it is determined whether or not the winning combination is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process. In this example, the pushing hand means the internal winning of "small hand 4" in the conditional device. If the player is internally elected to the winning hand, the process advances to step S1603; otherwise, the instruction information setting process ends.

In step S1603, the pressing order of the correct answer is set in the information (instruction information) regarding the notification contents of the instruction information notification. As a result, operation navigation using the payout number display 127 is executed (see FIG. 156). Also, although illustration is omitted, in step S1603, other operation navigation information setting processing is executed. For example, preparations are made to transmit to the first sub-controller 400 an operation navigation command including instruction information indicating the order of pressing the correct answer. As a result, the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 is executed by the first sub-controller 400 .

In addition, in the confirmed announcement state of this example, the number of medals will continue to decrease until the small win corresponding to the AT1 type is won. In the case of internal winning, the operation navigation is executed only in a specific type of pressing order (for example, if the small winning combination 4 is internally selected, any one of the small winning combination 4LCR, ..., small winning combination 4RCL, or Execute operation navigation for multiple), or execute operation navigation at a rate of once every three times (for example, if you can not win three times in the order of pushing, Push order navigation may be executed when a role is internally elected).

<Production State Control Processing B>
Next, the effect state control process B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of effect state control processing B in step S113 of FIG.

In step S1701, it is determined whether or not the processing prohibition flag is off. If the processing prohibition flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1702; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1702, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state flag is off. If the high navigation state flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S1703, and if the high navigation state flag is not OFF, that is, if the high navigation state flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S1704.

In step S1703, since the vehicle is in the low navigation state, low navigation state processing B is executed. Although illustration is omitted, in the low navigation state process B, when it is determined to shift to the high navigation state, a process for setting an effect state based on information regarding each effect state is performed.

On the other hand, in step S1704, since the vehicle is in the high navigation state, high navigation state processing B (details will be described later) is executed. At step S1705, the effect state control process B is terminated after the other effect state control process B is executed.

In other effect state control processing B, difference number counter update processing is performed in the case of high navigation state. In this difference number counter update process, the number of medals inserted by the player in the game (number of inserted medals) is subtracted from the number of medals obtained by the player (given to the player) in the relevant game (the number of medals paid out). By adding this value to the current counter value of the difference number counter, the count value of the difference number counter is updated. Also, preparations are made to transmit to the first sub-controller 400 a payout command containing at least information on the number of inserted coins and information on the number of payouts indicating the number of coins to be paid out.

<High navigation state processing B>
Next, high navigation state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing in detail the high navigation state process B in step S1704 of FIG.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the rendering state is normal. In step S1802, normal state processing B (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S1803, it is determined whether or not the presentation state is the final notification state. In step S1804, final notification state processing B (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S1805, it is determined whether or not the production state is the AT1 state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S1806, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1807. In step S1806, AT1 state processing B (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S1807, it is determined whether or not the rendering state is the judgment state. In step S1808, judgment state processing B (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S1809, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT2 state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S1810, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1811. In step S1812, AT2 state processing B (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S1811, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the pullback state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1812, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1813. In step S1812, pullback state processing B (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S1813, after executing LMT state processing B (details will be described later), high navigation state processing B ends.

<Normal state processing B>
Next, normal state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 176 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of normal state processing B in step S1802 of FIG.

In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the rendering state counter=0 (whether or not the normal state has ended). If the rendering state counter=0, the process proceeds to step S1902, otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1903. In step S1902, after setting the fixed notification state in the effect state, the process proceeds to step S1903. As a result, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the normal state to the confirmed notification state, and an effect (for example, bonus confirmation display) corresponding to the confirmed notification state is started. In step S1903, after performing other normal state processing B, the normal state processing B ends.

<Confirmation notification state processing B>
Next, with reference to FIG. 177, the confirmation notification state process B will be described. FIG. 177 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the decision notification state process B in step S1804 of FIG.

In step S2001, it is determined whether the decision notification flag is off or on. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S2002, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2002, after turning on the confirmation notification flag, the process proceeds to step S2006. In step S2003, it is determined whether or not the result is an internal winning result related to the AT1 type.

Specifically, in this example, when the AT1 type is low, it is determined whether the internal winning result is "replay combination 2, 4 to 10" of the condition device No. 3, and the AT1 type is In the case of high, it is determined whether or not the internal winning result is "replay combination 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13" of condition device No. 4. As a result of the determination, if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2004, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S2006.

In step S2004, the AT1 initial value (20 in this example) is set in the effect state counter, and in the next step S2005, the AT1 state is set in the effect state, and then the process proceeds to step S2006. As a result, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the fixed notification state to the AT1 state, and the effect (for example, operation navigation) corresponding to the AT1 state is started. In this embodiment, an initial value (20 in this example) is set to the rendering state counter in step S2004, but other numerical values may be used. In step S2006, after performing other confirmed notification state processing B, the confirmed notification state processing B ends.

<AT1 state processing B>
Next, with reference to FIG. 178, AT1 state processing B will be described. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of AT1 state processing B in step S1806 of FIG.

In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter=0 (whether or not the AT1 state has ended). If the rendering state counter=0, the process proceeds to step S2102, otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2106. In step S2102, a judgment initial value (10 in this example) is set to the effect state counter. In this embodiment, an initial value (10 in this example) is set to the rendering state counter in step S2102, but other numerical values may be used. Therefore, for example, the initial value may be changed according to the effect state immediately before the judgment state, or the initial value may be determined by lottery.

In step S2103, it is determined whether or not the judge mode is Heaven. In step S2104, the lottery value (the number of games) determined by lottery is set in the release counter, and then the process proceeds to step S2105. The contents of the lottery in step S2104 are not particularly limited, but in this example, the higher the setting value is, the smaller the number is selected. It is configured so that a smaller numerical value is selected.

In step S2105, after the judgment state is set in the rendering state, the process proceeds to step S2106. As a result, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the AT1 state to the judge state, and the effect corresponding to the judge state is started. In step S2106, after performing other AT1 state processing B, the AT1 state processing B ends.

<Judge status processing B>
Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the judgment state process B will be explained. FIG. 179 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of judgment state processing B in step S1808 of FIG.

In step S2201, it is determined whether or not the judgment state=confirmed (whether or not the judgment was successful). In step S2202, AT 2 times initial number lottery is performed. This AT2 number initial number lottery is a lottery for determining the number of games in the AT2 state. In this example, one of the numbers 30, 50, 55, 66, and 100 is selected by lottery. As an exception, when the set value is set to 5, 55 is selected regardless of the lottery, and when the set value is set to 6, 66 is selected regardless of the lottery.

At step S2203, the lottery value (the number of games) of the AT2 initial number lottery is set in the effect state counter, and then the process proceeds to step S2204. In step S2204, the AT2 state is set in the effect state, and then the process proceeds to step S2208. As a result, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the judge state to the AT2 state, and the effect corresponding to the AT2 state is started.

In step S2205, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter=0 (whether or not the judgment state has ended). In step S2206, the pullback initial value (in this example, 1) is set in the effect state counter, and in the next step S2207, the pullback state is set in the effect state. As a result, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the pullback state, and the effect corresponding to the pullback state is started.

In addition, in this embodiment, the initial pullback value (1 in this example) is set to the effect state counter in step S2206, but other numerical values may be set. Therefore, for example, it may be a fixed value other than 1, or 1+α (variable value). In step S2208, after performing other judgment state processing B, the judgment state processing B ends.

<AT2 state processing B>
Next, with reference to FIG. 180, AT2 state processing B will be described. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of AT2 state processing B in step S1810 of FIG.

In step S2301, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter=0 (whether or not the AT2 state has ended). If the rendering state counter=0, the process proceeds to step S2302, otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2306. In step S2302, a judgment initial value (10 in this example) is set to the effect state counter. In this embodiment, an initial value (10 in this example) is set to the rendering state counter in step S2302, but other numerical values may be used. Therefore, for example, the initial value may be changed according to the effect state immediately before the judgment state, or the initial value may be determined by lottery.

In step S2303, it is determined whether or not the judge mode is Heaven. In step S2304, the lottery value (the number of games) determined by lottery is set in the release counter, and then the process proceeds to step S2305. The contents of the lottery in step S2304 are not particularly limited, but in this example, the higher the set value is, the smaller the number is selected. It is configured so that a smaller numerical value is selected.

In step S2305, after the judgment state is set in the rendering state, the process proceeds to step S2306. As a result, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state, and the effect corresponding to the judge state is started. In step S2306, after performing other AT2 state processing B, the AT2 state processing B ends.

<Pullback state processing B>
Next, with reference to FIG. 181, the retraction state process B will be described. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of pullback state processing B in step S1812 of FIG.

In step S2401, it is determined whether or not the pullback state is determined (whether or not to pull back). In step S2402, AT 2 times initial number lottery is performed. This AT2 number initial number lottery is a lottery for determining the number of games in the AT2 state. In this example, one of the numbers 30, 50, 55, 66, and 100 is selected by lottery. As an exception, when the set value is set to 5, 55 is selected regardless of the lottery, and when the set value is set to 6, 66 is selected regardless of the lottery.

In step S2404, the AT2 state is set in the effect state, and then the process proceeds to step S2407. As a result, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the pullback state to the AT2 state, and the effect corresponding to the AT2 state is started. In this embodiment, at the first hit (transition to the first AT state after shifting from the low navigation state to the high navigation state), the production state is shifted to AT1, whereas in the judge state or pullback state The presentation state is configured to shift to AT2 which is more advantageous to the player than AT1.

In step S2405, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter=0 (whether or not the pullback state has ended). In step S2406, the high navigation state end standby flag is turned on, and then the process proceeds to step S2407. In step S2407, after other pullback state processing B is performed, the pullback state processing B ends.

<LMT state processing B>
Next, with reference to FIG. 182, LMT state processing B will be described. FIG. 182 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of LMT state processing B in step S1813 of FIG.

In step S2501, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter=0 (whether or not the LMT state has ended). If the rendering state counter=0, the process proceeds to step S2502, and if not, the LMT state processing B ends. In step S2502, the high navigation state end waiting flag is set to ON, and then the process proceeds to step S2503. In step S2503, after performing other LMT state processing B, the LMT state processing B ends.

<High navigation state end processing>
Next, high navigation state end processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 183 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state end processing in step S114 of FIG.

In step S2601, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state flag is ON. If the high navigation state flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S2602; otherwise, the high navigation state end processing is terminated. In step S2602, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state end waiting flag is ON. If the high-navi state end standby flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S2603; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2604.

In step S2603, the high navigation state end standby flag is turned off. After the process of step S2603, the process proceeds to step S2606.

In step S2604, it is determined whether or not the value of the high navigation state counter is zero. If there is a game with the process prohibition flag ON, the value of the high navigation state counter may become 0 before the high navigation state end waiting flag is turned ON, so this corresponds to this case. is. If the value of the high navigation state counter is 0, proceed to step S2606; otherwise, proceed to step S2605.

In step S2605, it is determined whether or not difference number counter > high navigation state end maximum value. If yes, go to step S2606. This is because if there is a game for which the processing prohibition flag is ON, the condition of difference number counter>high navigation state end maximum value may be satisfied before the high navigation state end waiting flag is turned ON. It corresponds to the case.

In step S2606, the high navigation state flag is turned off. As a result, the high navigation state lamp 190 that has been lit is extinguished. In step S2607, after executing other high-navi state end processing, the high-navi state end processing ends. Other high-navigation state end processing includes, for example, setting the AT system game state to a low-navigation state (normal mode), and processing to initialize various flags and counters used for high-navigation state transition control. conduct.

<Normal State Processing A (Modification 1)>
Next, normal state processing A according to Modification 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 184 is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 167 and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of normal state processing A according to Modification 1. FIG. The same reference numerals are given to the same processes as the normal state process A described with reference to FIG. 167, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The normal state process A according to Modification 1 is obtained by deleting steps S1012 to S1013 and adding steps S1021 to S1025 to the normal state process A described with reference to FIG.

Step S1021 is a process that is executed when it is determined that the ceiling counter is 0 in step S1004. In this example, a process of setting the ceiling reaching flag to on is executed in step S1021.

Further, step S1022 is a process that is executed when it is determined that the AT1 type is "low". If so, the process proceeds to step S1023; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1016. In step S1023, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter is 0. If so, the process proceeds to step S1024, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1016.

In step S1024, the AT1 type is set to "high", and in the next step S1025, the judge mode is set to "high accuracy", and then the process proceeds to step S1106.

In the normal state processing A described using FIG. It was configured to be promoted to ". On the other hand, in the normal state process A according to the modified example 1, the state is managed only by the ceiling counter without using the promotion counter. It is configured so that it is promoted from "high" to "high" and the judge mode is set to high accuracy.

<Normal State Processing A (Modification 2)>
Next, normal state processing A according to Modification 2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 185 is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 167 and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the normal state process A according to Modification 2. FIG. The same processing as the normal state processing A explained using FIG. 167 and the normal state processing A (Modification 1) explained using FIG. do.

In the normal state process A according to Modification 2, steps S1012 to S1013 are deleted from the normal state process A described with reference to FIG. is added.

Step S1031 is a process that is executed when it is determined in step S1022 that the ceiling reaching flag is ON. , the numerical value (lottery result value) determined by the promotion counter addition lottery is added to the promotion counter, and then the process proceeds to step S1016.

In the normal state process A according to Modification 1, the state is managed only by the ceiling counter without using the promotion counter, and when the ceiling counter reaches 0, the AT1 type is changed from "low" to "high". Along with promoting it, it was configured to set the judge mode accurately. On the other hand, in the normal state process A according to the modified example 2, when the ceiling counter reaches 0, the AT1 type is promoted from "low" to "high" and the judge mode is set with high accuracy. However, the state is managed using a promotion counter, and if the value of the promotion counter is equal to or higher than the ceiling value, the AT1 type is promoted from "low" to "high". there is

<Confirmation notification state process A (Modification 1)>
Next, with reference to FIG. 186, the confirmation notification state process A according to Modification 1 will be described. FIG. 186 is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 168 and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the confirmation notification state process A according to Modification 1. As shown in FIG. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the same processes as the confirmation notification state process A explained using FIG. 168, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

The confirmed notification state process A according to Modification 1 is obtained by deleting steps S1102 to S1104 and adding steps S1121 to S1125 to the confirmed notification state process A described with reference to FIG. .

In step S1120, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter>0. If ceiling counter>0, proceed to step S1121; otherwise, proceed to step S1101. In step S1121, 1 is subtracted from the value of the ceiling counter.

Step S1123 is a process that is executed when it is determined that the AT1 type is "low" in step S1101. If so, the process proceeds to step S1124; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1124, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter is 0. If so, the process proceeds to step S1125, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1125, the ceiling flag is set to ON, and then the process proceeds to step S1105.

In the confirmed notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 168, the AT1 type is promoted from "low" to "high" after shifting to the confirmed notification state. On the other hand, in the confirmed notification state process A according to the modification 1, the state is managed only by the ceiling counter without using the promotion counter. The classification is promoted from "low" to "high", and the judge mode is configured to be set with high accuracy.

<Confirmation notification state process A (Modification 2)>
Next, with reference to FIG. 187, the confirmation notification state process A according to Modification 2 will be described. FIG. 187 is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 168 and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the confirmation notification state process A according to Modification 2. As shown in FIG. Note that the same processing as the confirmed notification state processing A described using FIG. 168 and the confirmed notification state processing A (modified example 2) described using FIG. are omitted.

Confirmation notification state processing A according to Modification 2 eliminates the processing of steps S1102 to S1104 from the confirmation notification state processing A described using FIG. S1133 is added.

Step S1131 is a process executed when it is determined that the AT1 type is "low" in step S1101. , the numerical value (lottery result value) determined by the promotion counter addition lottery is added to the promotion counter, and then the process proceeds to step S1133. In step S1133, it is determined whether or not the value of the promotion counter is equal to or greater than the ceiling value. If so, the process proceeds to step S1105, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1123.

In the confirmed notification state process A according to Modification 1, the state is managed only by the ceiling counter without using the promotion counter, and when the ceiling counter reaches 0 in the confirmed notification state, the AT1 type is set to "low". configured to promote from to "high". On the other hand, in the confirmation notification state process A according to the modified example 2, when the ceiling counter becomes 0 in the confirmation notification state, the AT1 type is promoted from "low" to "high". Furthermore, the state is managed using a promotion counter, and if the value of the promotion counter is equal to or higher than the ceiling value, the AT1 type is promoted from "low" to "high", while if the value of the promotion counter is less than the ceiling value is configured such that when the ceiling counter is 0, the AT1 type is promoted from "low" to "high".

<Confirmation Notification State Processing A and Confirmation Notification State Processing B (Modification 3)>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 188 and 189, the confirmation notification state process A and the confirmation notification state process B according to Modification 3 will be described. FIG. 188 is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 168 and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the confirmation notification state process A according to the third modification. FIG. 189 is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 177 and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the confirmation notification state process B according to Modification 3. As shown in FIG. 168 and 177. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same processes as the fixed notification state process A described using FIG. 168 and the fixed notification state process B described using FIG. 177, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Confirmation notification state processing A according to modification 3 shown in FIG. 188 is obtained by adding the processing of step S1140 to the confirmation notification state processing A described using FIG. Step S1140 is a process that is executed when it is determined in step S1104 that the promotion counter is equal to or greater than the ceiling value. In step S1140, the promotion flag is set to ON, and then the process proceeds to step S1109.

Confirmation notification state processing B according to Modification 3 shown in FIG. 189 is obtained by adding processing of steps S2010 to S2012 to confirmation notification state processing B described using FIG. Step S2010 is a process executed when it is determined in step S2001 that the confirmation flag is ON. In step S2010, it is determined whether the promotion flag is ON or OFF. , and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S2003.

In step S2011, it is determined whether the promotion notification is off or on, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S2012, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2012, after turning on promotion notification, the process proceeds to step S2006.

In the confirmed notification state processing A described using FIG. 168 and the confirmed notification state processing B described using FIG. It was configured so that the internal election of No. 4 would not occur at the same time. On the other hand, in the confirmed notification state processing A and the confirmed notification state processing B according to the modified example 3, the AT1 type promotion and the internal winning of the condition device No. 4 can occur at the same time. It is configured so that it does not transition to the state. With such a configuration, since it is possible to avoid simultaneous execution of the operation navigation and the promotion performance at the time of AT1 type promotion, only the promotion performance can be clearly shown to the player, and the player's interest is heightened. sometimes it is possible.

Incidentally, when the normal state processing A according to the modified example 1 described with reference to FIG. 184 and the normal state processing A according to the modified example 2 described using FIG. There is a possibility that the internal winning of the condition device No. 4 will occur at the same time, but in this case, as in the third modification, the promotion flag should be used so as not to shift to the AT1 state in the game that occurred at the same time. Just do it.

<Modification of Embodiment 6>
Next, a slot machine according to a modification of Embodiment 6 of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In order to avoid duplication of explanation, in principle only the configuration different from that of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment will be explained. 190 to 199 are basically used only for the description of the modification of the sixth embodiment, and even if overlapping codes are shown in other drawings, the In the description of the modification, priority is given to the symbols shown in FIGS. 190-199.

<Types of winning roles>
First, with reference to FIG. 190, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 190 is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including activated combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and activation or payout of each winning combination.

The winning combination of the slot machine 100 includes a special combination (special combination 1) and a general combination (replay combination 1 to replay combination 3, small combination 1 to small combination 3). Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Of the winning combinations in this embodiment, the special combination 1 is a combination that shifts to a special game state in which a predetermined profit is awarded to the player. Further, the replay combination 1 to replay combination 3 are combinations that can be replayed without inserting new medals. These winning hands are sometimes referred to as "working hands". In addition, "winning" in the present embodiment includes a case where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. Winning of the replay role 1 to replay role 3 is included.

The special combination 1 is a combination (operating combination) that shifts to a special game state by winning a prize. It should be noted that no medals are paid out for winning this role. The corresponding symbol combination is "BAR-BAR-BAR".

When the special combination 1 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to this internally won combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special combination 1, the main control unit 300 shifts the game state to the special combination internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2).

This flag is kept ON until the internal winning combination is won, and the state in which the internally winning combination is likely to be won in the next and subsequent games. That is, even if the special role is not won in the game in which the special role 1 is internally won, the special role will be internally won in the next game and later, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (in this example, "BAR- BAR-BAR” pattern combination) will be in a state where it is easy to win all together. This special combination internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

The main control unit 300 shifts the game state to a special game state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 being displayed. Further, in this special game state, when a predetermined number of coins (300 in this example) are paid out, the replay low probability state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT1) is shifted to. The special game state (RT3) and the low replay probability state (RT1) will be described later.

The “replay role (replay role 1 to replay role 3)” is a winning role (operating role) that can be played without inserting medals (game media) in the next game due to winning, No medals will be paid out. It should be noted that the corresponding symbol combination, replay role 1 is "replay-replay-replay (normal replay)", re-play role 2 is "bell-replay-replay (promoted replay)", re-play role 3 is "replay- Replay-Bell (Fall Replay 2)”.

“Small wins (small wins 1 to 3)” are winning wins in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbol combinations are “ANY-Cherry-ANY” for the small win 1 and “ANY-Cherry-ANY” for the small win 2. "Watermelon-watermelon-watermelon (watermelon 1)", and the small player 3 is "Bell-Bell-Bell (Bell)". Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in the figure. In the case of "ANY-cherry-ANY", the symbol of the middle reel 111 should be "cherry", and the symbols of the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 may be any symbols. In addition, when the small win 2 (watermelon 1) is internally won, the watermelon pattern is arranged in more than four frames. don't stop at

<Types of game state>
Next, the types and transitions of game states of the slot machine according to the modification of the sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 191(a) is a game state transition diagram of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine according to the modification of the sixth embodiment of the present invention.

The main control unit 300 of the slot machine according to the modification of the sixth embodiment of the present invention can be roughly classified into a low replay probability state (RT1), a high replay probability state (RT4), and a special combination internal winning state (RT2). , and a special game state (RT3). In the present embodiment, these four game states are referred to as RT-based game states. In addition, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls a state related to so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter referred to as an AT-based game state), and according to the AT-based game state determined by the main control unit 300, The first sub-control section 400 is designed to set the game state. The game state of the AT system will be described later with reference to FIG. 191(b).

In addition, the replay low probability state (RT1) is a state in which the probability of operating the condition device related to the replay combination does not change (default state), a replay high probability state (RT4), and a special combination internal winning state (RT2 ), and the special game state (RT3) are also states in which the probability of activating the conditional device relating to the replay combination varies with respect to the default state.

<Lottery table>
FIG. 192(a) is a diagram showing a lottery table used for internal lottery processing for a winning combination. The horizontal axis represents each game state (RT type game state), and the vertical axis represents the lottery value of each winning combination.

The internal winning probability of a winning combination in each gaming state, which will be explained later, is obtained from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306, and the numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each winning combination is obtained at the time of the internal lottery. It is obtained by a value divided by numerical data within a numerical range (eg, 65535). For example, in the replay low probability state (RT1), the lottery value for the small winning combination 2 is 512, and the winning probability for the small winning combination 1 is 512/65536×100≈0.8%. The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination and loss.

A random number value obtained as a result of executing an internal lottery is determined as a value corresponding to lottery data corresponding to which combination, and an internal lottery combination is determined. Setting 1 to setting 6 are prepared for this lottery data with different winning probabilities of at least one combination, and the staff of the game parlor can arbitrarily select and set any of the setting values. It should be noted that the internal winning probability shown in this figure is an example, and the probability is not limited to this.

Hereinafter, the RT system game state of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The low replay probability state is the lowest (disadvantageous to the player) game state among the other game states (for example, game states excluding the special game state) in which the internal winning probability of replay is the lowest, and is referred to as the normal game state. There is also In the replay low-probability state, the lottery table in the "RT1" column on the horizontal axis shown in FIG.

Winning hands that are internally elected in the replay low probability state include special role 1, special role 1 + small role 1, special role 1 + small role 2, replay role 1, replay role 1 + replay role 2, small role 1, There are a small winning combination 2, a small winning combination 3a, and a small winning combination 3b. If the winning combination is not won, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. It should be noted that the fact that the symbol combination relating to the winning line is not stopped may be referred to as "losing". In addition, there is a case where the fact that the player did not win the winning role is expressed as "won the wrong way".

Here, "special winning combination 1+small winning combination 1" means that the special winning combination 1 and the small winning combination 1 are internally elected at the same time. Similarly, "special winning combination 1 + small winning combination 2" indicates that the special winning combination 1 and the small winning combination 2 are internally elected at the same time. In these cases, it is determined whether the symbol combination corresponding to any combination is displayed according to the operation of the player. More specifically, the symbols forming the symbol combination corresponding to the winning line are stopped as long as it is not impossible to win any of the winning combinations internally won on any of the winning lines.

Further, "replay combination 1+replay combination 2" means that replay combination 1 and replay combination 2 are internally won at the same time. In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to which combination is displayed is determined according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is the predetermined operation order, the symbol combination (promotion replay) corresponding to the replay combination 2 is displayed on the pay line (FIG. 192 ( a) In the remarks column, see when the pressing order is correct), otherwise, the symbol combination (normal replay) corresponding to the replay combination 1 is displayed on the winning line (Fig. 192(a) in the remarks column). , If the pressing order is incorrect).

Like this "replay combination 1+replay combination 2", there is a case where a combination in which a winning combination is determined by the order of operations is called a "push order combination".

Here, with reference to FIG. 192(b), the correct operation order of "replay combination 1+replay combination 2" will be described in detail. FIG. 192(b) is a diagram for explaining the order of correct operations for pushing first hand in this embodiment.

"Replay combination 1 + replay combination 2" is set by being subdivided into three, "replay combination 2L", "replay combination 2C", and "replay combination 2R", to be precise. A different correct operation sequence is assigned corresponding to each of the subdivided "replay combination 1+replay combination 2". The range of the lottery data associated with each of the "replay combination 1+replay combination 2" subdivided into three is the same.

For example, when "replay combination 2L" of "replay combination 1+replay combination 2" is internally won, the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is the correct operation. A stop operation is an incorrect operation. Further, when the "replay combination 2C" of the "replay combination 1+replay combination 2" is internally won, the correct operation is to stop the first stop reel with the middle reel 111, and other operations are performed. A stop operation is an incorrect operation. Further, when the "replay combination 2R" out of the "replay combination 1+replay combination 2" is internally won, the stop operation with the right reel 112 as the first stop reel is the correct operation. A stop operation is an incorrect operation.

So far, "replay combination 1+replay combination 2" in FIG. 192(a) has been described, but "small combination 3a" is also a pushing-order combination with different winning combinations according to the order of operation of the player.

When the "small winning combination 3a" is internally won, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 3 (bell) is displayed on the winning line according to the operation order of the player (Fig. 192 ( a) See remarks). More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order, "Bell-Bell-Bell" is displayed on the winning line, and 11 medals are paid out ( bell award). On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed according to the correct operation order, "Bell-Bell-Bell" is not displayed on the winning line (losing).

On the other hand, when the "small winning combination 3b" is internally won, "Bell-Bell-Bell" is displayed on the winning line regardless of the operation order, and 11 medals are paid out. (Refer to the remarks column in FIG. 192(a)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 192(b), the correct operation order of "small win 3a" will be described in detail.

"Minor role 3a" is, to be exact, six of "small role 3LCR", "small role 3LRC", "small role 3CLR", "small role 3CRL", "small role 3RLC" and "small role 3RCL". It is subdivided and set, and a different correct operation order is assigned to each of the subdivided "small wins 3a". It should be noted that the range of the lottery data associated with each of the six subdivided "minor wins 3a" is the same.

For example, when the "small win 3LCR" of the "small win 3a" is internally won, the left reel 110 is the first stop reel, the middle reel 111 is the second stop reel, and the right reel 112 is the third stop reel. The stop operation is the correct operation, and the other stop operations are the incorrect operations. Further, when the "small winning combination 3CRL" of the "small winning combination 3a" is internally won, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110. The stop operation is the correct operation. It should be noted that the "small winning combination 3a" and "small winning combination 3b" described here are the same in the game states described below.

In FIG. 191(a), in the replay low probability state (RT1), when the condition (A) is met, that is, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 2 is displayed on the activated line (replay In the case of winning combination 2), it is indicated that the state is shifted to a replay high probability state (RT2), which will be described later. In addition, the figure shows that when the condition (C) is established, that is, when the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally elected, the state shifts to the special combination internal winning state (RT3) to be described later. ing. Furthermore, when the condition (D) is established, that is, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is displayed on the effective line (when the special role 1 or the special role 2 is won), A shift to a special game state (RT4), which will be described later, is indicated.

In the present embodiment, the small winning combination 3a as the pushing winning combination is a single winning combination, but it may be a double winning combination that is won at the same time as other small winning combinations. It is the same in that the small winning combination 3 is won when the first to third stop operations are performed in accordance with the operation order of the correct answer.

For example, "small win 3 + small win A + small win B" is set, and (1) correct stop operation (correct order of operation) is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the small win 3 is placed on the activated line. (2) If an incorrect stop operation is performed (the first stop operation is correct), the symbol combination corresponding to the minor combination A is displayed on the activated line, and (3) an incorrect stop operation is performed. (the first stop operation is an incorrect answer), and if the stop operation is performed within the drawing range of the symbol of the minor winning combination B, the symbol combination corresponding to the minor winning combination B is displayed on the activated line, (4) If an incorrect stop operation is performed (the first stop operation is incorrect), and if the stop operation is performed outside the drawing range of the symbol of the small win B, the spilled dot will be on the effective line. may be displayed.

Also, when "small win 3 + small win X" is set, (1) correct stop operation (stop operation from the first stop operation to the third stop operation is the correct answer) corresponds to the small win 3. (2) An incorrect stop operation is performed (the first stop operation is correct, the second stop operation is incorrect, or the first stop operation is incorrect, the second stop operation is displayed). If the operation is correct) and the third stop operation is performed within the drawing range of the symbol of the minor win X, the symbol combination corresponding to the minor win X is displayed on the activated line, and (3) the stop operation of the incorrect answer. is performed (the first stop operation is correct, the second stop operation is incorrect, or the first stop operation is incorrect, the second stop operation is correct), and the third stop is outside the drawing range of the symbol of the small win X When the operation is performed, the spilled line may be displayed on the effective line. In the third stop operation, there is a case where the player aims at the small winning combination X and wins the small winning combination X. Here, the correct stop operation means that the operation order is correct and/or the operation timing is suitable (operate within the drawing range of the symbol corresponding to the predetermined minor win).

Further, in addition to the above-mentioned "small winning combination 3 + small winning combination X", "small winning combination 3 + small winning combination Y" is set, and (1) when the stop operation of the correct answer is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination of 3 is set. When (2) an incorrect stop operation is performed and the third stop operation is performed within the drawing range of the symbols of the minor win X, the symbol combination corresponding to the minor win Y is displayed on the activated line. (3) If an incorrect stop operation is performed and the third stop operation is performed outside the drawing range of the symbol for the small winning combination Y, the spilled mark is displayed on the effective line. You may do so. In this case, in the third stop operation in the incorrect stop operation, since it is not clear whether the winning combination to be aimed at is the small winning combination X or the small winning combination Y, it is possible to prevent the shooting of the small winning combination in the third stopping operation. Sometimes.

<Replay High Probability State (RT4)>
The replay high probability state (RT4) is a gaming state in which the internal winning probability of the replay combination is higher than that in the replay low probability state (RT1). In the replay high probability state (RT4), the lottery table in the "RT4" column on the horizontal axis shown in FIG.

Winning hands internally won in the replay high probability state (RT4) include special role 1, special role 1 + small role 1, special role 1 + small role 2, replay role 1, replay role 1 + replay role 3, small role There are a hand 1, a small hand 2, a small hand 3a, and a small hand 3b. If the winning combination is not won, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed.

Here, "replay combination 1+replay combination 3" means that replay combination 1 and replay combination 3 are internally won at the same time. In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to which combination is displayed is determined according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order, the symbol combination (normal replay) corresponding to the replay combination 1 is displayed on the pay line (Fig. 192 ( a) In the remarks column, see when the pushing order is correct), otherwise, the symbol combination (falling replay) corresponding to the replay combination 3 is displayed on the winning line (Fig. 192(a) in the remarks column). , If the pressing order is incorrect). In other words, "replay combination 1+replay combination 3" is also a winning combination.

Here, with reference to FIG. 192(b), the correct operation order of "replay combination 1+replay combination 3" will be described in detail.

"Replay combination 1+replay combination 3" is, as shown in FIG. , and a different correct operation sequence is assigned to each of the subdivided "replay combination 1+replay combination 3". The range of lottery data associated with each of the "replay combination 1+replay combination 3" subdivided into three is the same.

For example, when "replay combination 3L" out of "replay combination 1+replay combination 3" is internally won, the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is the correct operation. A stop operation is an incorrect operation. Further, when the "replay combination 3C" out of the "replay combination 1+replay combination 3" is internally won, the stop operation with the first stop reel being the middle reel 111 is the correct operation. A stop operation is an incorrect operation. Further, when the "replay combination 3R" out of the "replay combination 1+replay combination 3" is internally won, the correct operation is to stop the right reel 112 as the first stop reel. A stop operation is an incorrect operation.

In the present embodiment, when an internal winning combination (replay combination 1+replay combination 2, replay combination 1+replay combination 3, small combination 3a) is won, a unique In other words, the correct operation order is determined by one lottery process. However, when adopting a configuration that does not subdivide the winning combination, after the winning combination is internally won in the internal lottery process of the winning combination, the lottery process for determining the correct operation order is executed to perform the correct operation. The order may be determined.

In FIG. 191(a), in the replay high probability state (RT4), when the condition (B) is satisfied, that is, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 3 is displayed on the activated line (replay In the case of winning the winning combination 3), it is indicated that the above-described low replay probability state (RT1) is entered. Also, in the same figure, when the condition (C) is established, that is, when the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally elected, it is shown that the transition to the special combination internal winning state (RT2) to be described later is made. Furthermore, when the condition (D) is established, that is, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is displayed on the effective line (when the special role 1 or the special role 2 is won) , a shift to a special game state (RT3), which will be described later.

<Special part internal elected state (RT2)>
The special winning internal winning state (RT2) is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to the special winning 1 or special winning 2 is set to ON. This is a game state in which a symbol combination corresponding to a corresponding special combination can be displayed. In the state of internal winning of a special combination, a winning combination for internal winning is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column of "RT2" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 192(a). Winning combinations internally won in the special combination internal winning state include a replay combination 1, a small combination 1, a small combination 2, a small combination 3a, and a small combination 3b. If the winning combination is not won, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed.

In addition, in FIG. 192(a), when the condition (D) is established in the special combination internal winning state (RT2), that is, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is displayed, A shift to a special game state (RT4), which will be described later, is indicated.

<Special game state (RT3)>
The special game state (RT3) is the most advantageous game state for the player among all the game states. In the special game state, a winning combination for internal winning is drawn by referring to the drawing table in the row of "RT3" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 192(a). The winning combination internally won in the special game state is only the small combination 3b. Also, if the winning combination is not won, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed.

FIG. 192(a) shows that, in the special game state (RT3), when the condition (E) is met, that is, when the prescribed number of coins is paid out, the state shifts to the replay low probability state (RT1). It is Specifically, when the special game state is entered based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1, when more than 275 medals are paid out, the replay low probability state (RT1) is entered. transition to

In the present embodiment, the special game state ends when the specified number of payouts is executed. For example, the game may end when a prize is won eight times, or when a predetermined number of games (for example, six times) are played.

<Transition of game state of AT system>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 191(b) and 191(c), the game state of the AT system will be described. 191(b) and (c) are transition diagrams of the AT system game states of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine according to the modification of the sixth embodiment of the present invention.

The game state of the AT system is roughly classified into a low navigation state and a high navigation state, as shown in FIG. 191(a). The low navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode.

The high-navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is higher than in the low-navigation state, and includes an AT mode and a chance mode. Here, the operation navigation is the operation order of the correct answer when internally elected to the pushing order role (specifically, replay role 1 + replay role 2, replay role 1 + replay role 3, small role 3a) It refers to a performance that notifies That is, operation navigation refers to an effect that notifies the content of a stop operation for obtaining medals, or the content of a stop operation for shifting to an advantageous game state or maintaining an advantageous game state.

Operation navigation will now be described with reference to FIGS. 192(b) and 193. FIG. In this embodiment, the payout number display 127 and effect image display device 157 are used to execute operation navigation. FIG. 192(b) shows the display data indicating the order of correct operation for the winning combination of this embodiment, and FIG.

For example, the display data 01 is data suggesting a stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel, the display data 02 is data suggesting a stop operation with the middle reel 111 as the first stop reel, and the display data 03 is , and data suggesting a stop operation with the right reel 112 as the first stop reel.

Therefore, when the replay combination 2L of "replay combination 1+replay combination 2" is internally won in the AT mode, the correct stop operation is to set the first stop reel to the left reel 110, so the first stop operation is the left reel. is selected, and the payout number display 127 displays the lighting mode corresponding to the display data 01 (see FIG. , an image (eg, characters “1--”) indicating that the first stop reel is the left reel 110 is displayed (not shown).

The display data 04 is data suggesting a stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel, the middle reel 111 as the second stop reel, and the right reel 112 as the third stop reel, and the display data 05 is the first stop reel. is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the middle reel 111. Display data 06 is the first stop reel, the middle reel 111, and the second stop reel. Data suggesting a stop operation with the left reel 110 and the third stop reel as the right reel 112, and the display data 07 are the first stop reel as the middle reel 111, the second stop reel as the right reel 112, and the third stop reel as the left reel. Data suggesting a stop operation with the reel 110, the display data 08 is data suggesting a stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112, the second stop reel as the left reel 110, and the third stop reel as the middle reel 112. , the display data 09 is data suggesting a stop operation with the right reel 112 as the first stop reel, the middle reel 111 as the second stop reel, and the left reel 110 as the third stop reel.

Therefore, when the small win 3CLR of the "small win 3a" is internally won in the AT mode, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is correct, the display data 06 suggesting that the first stop operation is middle, the second stop operation is left, and the third stop operation is right is selected. (see FIG. 193(b)), and the effect image display device 157 displays the first stop reel as the middle reel 111, the second stop reel as the left reel 110, and the third stop reel as An image suggesting that it is the right reel 112 (for example, characters “213”) is displayed.

In this embodiment, based on the lighting mode of the payout number indicator 127, it is possible to determine whether the internal winning combination is a replay combination or a minor combination 3a. However, for example, the stop operation of the correct answer for the small winning combination 3a may be three choices like the replay winning combination, and the small winning combination 3a may also be notified using the display data 01-03. In this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode. In addition, it is also possible to configure the stop operation of the correct answer for the replay combination to be six choices like the small combination 3a, and to inform the replay combination using the display data 04-09. Also in this case, it is not possible to determine the internal winning combination only by the lighting mode.

In the present embodiment, the low navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of manipulation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of manipulation navigation is higher than in the low navigation state. The state in which the operation navigation is not executed and the high navigation state may be set as the state in which the operation navigation is executed. When the stop operation is performed according to the operation content of the operation navigation, a result advantageous to the player is brought about, so the high navigation state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state. Here, the term “advantageous” specifically refers to the total number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machine as compared to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets when playing the game for a predetermined period of time. It refers to the ratio, the so-called payout rate (ball output rate).

<AT system state transition>
FIG. 191(b) is a diagram showing an effect state in each game state of the AT system. Each game state of the AT system is subdivided and managed as shown in FIG. 191(b), which is called an effect state. Specifically, the production state of the low navigation state is the normal state, and the production state of the high navigation state is the normal state, the confirmation announcement state, the judge state, the withdrawal state, the BB state, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state. I have. Note that the high-navigation state rendering state according to the modification of the sixth embodiment is just the BB state added to the rendering state described with reference to FIG. 154(c), so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 according to the modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 194 . FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit main processing according to the modification of the sixth embodiment, and corresponds to the main control unit main processing according to the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. 158 above.

In the main control unit main process according to the modification of the sixth embodiment, the effect state control process A of step S106 of the main control main process according to the sixth embodiment described with reference to FIG. 158, the effect process of step S107, and The content of the effect state control process B of step S113 is changed.

<Production State Control Processing A>
Next, the effect state control process A of step S121 in FIG. 194 will be described with reference to FIG. 195(a). FIG. 195(a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the effect state control process A according to the modification of the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the effect state control process A according to the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. 163(a). is.

Since the rendering state control processing A according to the modification of the sixth embodiment is the same processing as the rendering state control processing A according to the sixth embodiment described with reference to FIG. , the description of which is omitted.

<Process common to each game>
Next, with reference to FIG. 195(b), the processing common to every game in step S401 of FIG. 195(a) will be described. FIG. 195(b) is a flow chart showing the flow of the game-by-game common processing according to the modification of Embodiment 6, and is a diagram corresponding to the game-by-game common processing according to Embodiment 6 shown in FIG. 163(b) above. .

In the process common to every game according to the modification of the sixth embodiment, the contents of step S501 of the process common to every game according to the sixth embodiment described with reference to FIG. 163(b) are changed to the contents of step S521. Specifically, in step S521, it is determined whether or not the conditions for executing the high navigation state related process are satisfied. Here, the condition for executing the high-navigation state-related processing is that the gaming state is either during internal winning of a bonus or during operation of a bonus with a setting difference. Note that this condition is not limited to the operation of bonuses with setting differences, and may be the operation of all bonuses. As a result of the determination in step S521, if the conditions for executing the high navigation state related processing are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S502; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S503.

<High navigation state processing A>
Next, high navigation state processing A in step S405 of FIG. 195(a) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the flow of the high navigation state process A according to the modification of the sixth embodiment, and corresponds to the high navigation state process A according to the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. 165 above.

In the high navigation state process A according to the modification of the sixth embodiment, steps S821 and S822 are added to the high navigation state process A according to the sixth embodiment described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in step S821, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the BB state. In step S822, BB state processing A is executed. In this BB state process A, processes related to BB games are performed.

<Production processing>
Next, the effect processing in step S122 of FIG. 194 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 197 is a flow chart showing the flow of effect processing according to the modification of the sixth embodiment.

In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the value of the high navigation state counter is equal to or less than the LMT transition value A (19 in this example). The process advances to step S2102. In this example, since the LMT state is 20G, the LMT transition value A is set to 19 (=20G-1G), but other numerical values may be used.

In step S2102, it is determined whether or not the value of the difference number counter is equal to or less than the LMT transition value B (1840 in this example). Proceed to S2104. In this example, when the LMT state is 20G, the maximum number of payouts in the 3-bet game is 11 (the maximum increase is 8), and the difference number exceeds 2000, the high-navigation state is terminated. Therefore, the LMT shift value B is set to 1840 (=2000 sheets−8 sheets×20 G), but other numerical values may be used.

At step S2103, the freeze information is set, and at the next step S2104, after executing other processing for presentation, the processing for presentation ends.

In the sixth embodiment, the freeze state is set when the rendering state is the LMT state in the high navigation state common processing A. However, in the modification of the sixth embodiment, the rendering state is the LMT state. Regardless of whether or not the condition of step S2101 or step S2102 is satisfied, the freeze state is set.

<Production State Control Processing B>
Next, the effect state control process B in step S123 of FIG. 194 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the flow of the rendering state control process B according to the modification of the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the rendering state control process B according to the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. 174 above.

Steps S1701 to S1704 of the effect state control process B according to the modification of the sixth embodiment are the same processes as the effect state control process B according to the sixth embodiment described with reference to FIG. , and description thereof will be omitted. At step S1721, the effect state control process B is terminated after the other effect state control process B is executed. In the other production state control processing B, for example, when the high navigation state termination condition is satisfied in the BB state and the high navigation state is changed to the low navigation state, processing is performed to shift the production state from the BB state to the normal state. .

<High navigation state processing B>
Next, the high navigation state process B in step S1705 in FIG. 198 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the flow of the high navigation state process B according to the modification of the sixth embodiment, and corresponds to the high navigation state process B according to the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. 175 above.

In the high navigation state process B according to the modification of the sixth embodiment, steps S1821 and S1822 are added to the high navigation state process B according to the sixth embodiment described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in step S1821, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the BB state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S1822, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1804. In step S1822, BB state processing B is executed. In this BB state processing B, after the BB state is completed, processing for returning the presentation state to the state immediately before the BB state is performed.

<Specific examples of various productions, various displays, etc.>
Next, using FIGS. 200 to 226, specific examples of various effects, various displays, etc. executed by the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. 200 to 226 are timing charts showing the flow of effects, and show the effect modes of the effects to be executed in association with the timing charts.

Here, the item of "low/high navigation state" in each figure indicates the game state of the AT system (in this example, high navigation state or low navigation state), and the item of "production state" in each figure is , AT-system game states (in this example, normal state, final announcement state, judge state, withdrawal state, AT1 state, AT2 state, or LMT (limit) state). The item "high navigation state counter" in each diagram indicates the number of remaining games in the high navigation state, and the item "production state counter" in each diagram indicates the number of remaining games in each production state. ing. Also, the item "BET" in each figure indicates the number of bets (BET number) of game media in each game.

<Specific example of counter update display>
First, with reference to FIGS. 200 to 202, specific examples of counter update display will be described. 200 to 202 are timing charts showing the flow of effects, and show the effect modes of the effects to be executed in association with the timing charts.

<Specific example of counter update display / 3 bet games only>
In FIG. 200, only the 3-bet game is performed when the production state shifts in the order of AT2 state→judge state→LMT state (limit state) in the high navigation state and then shifts to the normal state in the low navigation state. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of an update display of a time counter;

Game R28 is a game in which the number of remaining games is 28 in the high navigation state and the number of remaining games is 2 in the AT2 state, and is a three-coin bet game. In this game R28, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the operation of pressing the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the effect state in the AT2 state. , AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, operation navigation suggesting a stop operation (in this example, display of "2-1-3") is executed, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (effect state counter ) is 2, the display including the image indicating the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST2G") is executed.

The condition for starting the remaining number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state is not limited to the case where the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted. LAST3G" may be displayed, and after receiving the third stop operation, the display of "LAST2G" may be started. Also, the effect mode of the AT2 effect is not particularly limited, and for example, it may be a series of effects executed over a plurality of games, or may be an effect completed in one game. Also, the display mode of the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state is not limited to this example. can be indicated by

The following game R27 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 27 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 1, and a 3-coin bet game is performed. In this game R27, similar to the game R28, the AT2 effect is executed and the operation navigation is executed. display of an image containing characters "LAST1G").

The following game R26 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 26 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0, and is a game in which a 3-coin bet game is performed. In this game R26, similar to the games R28 to R27, the AT2 effect is executed and the operation navigation is executed. In the example, the display of an image including characters "LAST0G") is executed.

In addition, in this game R26, the effect image display device 157 is used when a certain condition is established (acceptance of the third stop operation in this example). , the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is displayed, and the result display 1 in the AT2 state (for example, display of the number of acquired game media) is executed, while the remaining number of games in the AT2 state ( The display including the image showing the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST0G") and the display of the operation navigation are erased. In addition, the conditions for starting the AT2 end screen and the result display are not limited to when the third stop operation is received, and the effect mode of the AT2 end screen and the display contents of the result display are not particularly limited.

The following game R25 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 25 and the number of remaining games in the judge state shifted from the AT2 state is 9, and a three-coin bet game is performed. In this game R25, the effect image display device 157 is used until a certain condition is established (in this example, until the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted (immediately after BET, etc.)). state, the judge effect corresponding to the start of the judge state is started, and since the number of remaining games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 10, the number of games (the effect state counter count value) (in this example, display of an image including the characters "LAST10G").

After that, when a certain condition is met in the game R25 (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to change the effect state to the judgment state. , the judge effect corresponding to the judge state is executed, and since the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 9, an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, display of an image including the characters "LAST9G") is executed. Note that the flow of effects from game R24 to game R20 is also substantially the same, so description thereof will be omitted.

Game R19 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the judge state is 19, and a 3-coin bet game is performed. In this game R19, the effect state is changed from the judge state to the LMT state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Since the transition is made, an ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and operation navigation suggesting a stop operation (in this example, display of "2-1-3") is executed, and LMT is performed. Since the total number of games in the state is 20 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 20, the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the effect state counter display (in this example, display of an image including the characters "20/20 more") is executed. It should be noted that the filled operation navigation indicates that the stop operation has not yet been performed at the same timing.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in the game R19 (accepting the third stop operation in this example), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the effect state because the effect state is the LMT state. An ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and since the total number of games in the LMT state is 20 and the remaining number of games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 19, the LMT state is executed. and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter). there is Note that the flow of effects from game R18 to game R1 is also substantially the same, so description thereof will be omitted.

The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0, and is a three-bet game. In this game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the effect state because the effect state is the LMT state. , an ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and since the total number of games in the LMT state is 20 and the remaining number of games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 0, the LMT and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter). ing.

After that, when a certain condition is established in this game R0 (acceptance of the third stop operation in this example), the effect image display device 157 is used as the final game in the LMT state. While executing the display (end effect) of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state, and executing the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, the display of the number of acquired game media, the number of games in the AT2 state, etc.). , the display including the image showing the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "0/20 left") and the display of the operation navigation are erased. ing. The conditions for starting the ED effect end screen and the result display are not limited to when the third stop operation is received, and the effect mode of the ED effect end screen and the display contents of the result display are not particularly limited.

<Specific example of counter update display / 3-coin bet game and 2-coin bet game>
FIG. 201 shows a 3-coin bet game and a 2-coin bet in the case where the production state shifts in the order of AT2 state→judge state→LMT state (limit state) in the high navigation state, and then shifts to the normal state in the low navigation state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of counter update display when both games are played. Note that descriptions of the same effects and displays as "concrete example of counter update display/only 3-coin bet game" described with reference to FIG.

Game R28 is a game in which the number of remaining games is 28 in the high navigation state and the number of remaining games is 2 in the AT2 state, and is a three-coin bet game. In this game R28, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the operation of pressing the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the effect state in the AT2 state. , AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, operation navigation suggesting a stop operation (in this example, display of "2-1-3") is executed, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (effect state counter ) is 2, the display including the image indicating the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST2G") is executed.

The subsequent game R27 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 27, and is a game in which a two-coin bet game is performed in the AT2 state. In this game R27, since a two-coin bet game is performed in the AT2 state, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains 2.

Therefore, in the game R27, the effect image display device 157 is used to set the effect state to the AT2 state when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Therefore, while the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, the display including the image showing the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) is not updated. Furthermore, since the two-coin bet game was performed in the AT2 state, even if the player was internally elected to the winning hand, the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation was not executed. In this example, the AT2 effect is executed even when the two-coin bet game is performed in the AT2 state. In the case where the scene is composed of the scene of (2), when the two-coin bet game is performed in the AT2 state, the scene of the AT2 effect may not be updated in the game.

Game R1 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 1 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the judge state is 2, and is a two-coin bet game. In this game R1, since a 2-coin bet game is played in the LMT state, the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains 2.

Therefore, in the game R1, the effect image display device 157 is used to set the effect state to the LMT2 state when a certain condition is established (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Therefore, while the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the display including the image indicating the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) is not executed. Furthermore, since the two-coin bet game was performed in the LMT state, even if the player was internally elected to the winning hand, the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation was not executed. In this example, an example is shown in which the ED effect is executed even when a two-coin bet game is performed in the LMT state. , the ED effect scene may not be updated in the game when a two-coin bet game is performed in the LMT state.

In this example, after the first display (in this example, the display of an image containing the characters "LAST2G" in this example) is displayed in the advantageous state (AT2 state in this example), the first game (in this example, When the execution of the 3-bet game) is started, a specific count value (high navigation state counter in this example) is updated and the second display ( In this example, display of an image including characters "LAST1G") can be displayed.

On the other hand, after the first display (the display of the image including the characters "LAST2G") is displayed in the advantageous state (AT2 state), the execution of the second game (two bet game in this example) is started. In this case, the specific count value (high navigation state counter) is updated, and the second display (display of the image including the characters "LAST1G") is not displayed in the second game (2-bet game). is configured as

Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the player has been playing a game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

<Specific example of counter update display / when judgment effect is not performed>
FIG. 202(a) is a diagram showing an example of an update display of the counter when the judgment effect is not performed by the two-coin bet game.

Game R27 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 27, and is a game in which a two-coin bet game is performed in the AT2 state. In this game R27, since a two-coin bet game is performed in the AT2 state, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains 2.

Therefore, in the game R27, the effect image display device 157 is used to set the effect state to the AT2 state when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Therefore, while the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, the display including the image showing the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) is not updated. Furthermore, since the two-coin bet game was performed in the AT2 state, even if the player was internally elected to the winning hand, the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation was not executed.

In this example, since the two-coin bet game is played over the period from game R27 to game R18, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains 2. However, since a 3-coin bet game is performed in the subsequent game R17, the effect state has shifted from the AT2 state to the LMT state without shifting to the judge state. Therefore, the judgment effect corresponding to the judgment state is not executed. In addition, in this example, since the AT2 state is shifted to the LMT state, the AT2 end screen corresponding to the termination of the AT2 state is not displayed.

Game R17 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 17 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the AT2 state is 19, and is a three-bet game. In this game R17, the effect state is changed from the AT2 state to the LMT state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Since the transition has been made, an ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and operation navigation suggesting a stop operation (display of "2-1-3" in this example) is being executed. .

On the other hand, the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 17, but the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) is 20. Therefore, a display including an image indicating the total number of games in the LMT state and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters "20/20 remaining") display) is running.

The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 2, and is a three-coin bet game. In this game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the effect state because the effect state is the LMT state. , an ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed.

On the other hand, the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 0, but the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 2. Therefore, a display including an image indicating the total number of games in the LMT state and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters "2/20 left") display) is running.

After that, the effect image display device 157 is used to display the number of remaining games in the LMT state (effect state The count value of the counter) is 2, but since this is the final game in the high navigation state, the display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state is executed, and the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, game media , the number of games in the AT2 state, etc.), and a display including an image showing the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, "2/20 left ”) and display of operation navigation are erased.

In this example, in the game after shifting to the LMT state, a 3-coin bet game is performed, but since a 2-coin bet game is performed in the previous AT2 state, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (effect state counter ) are not played, and only the number of remaining games in the high-nav state (the count value of the high-nav state counter) is played. As a result, the transition from the high navigation state to the LMT state is delayed, and the game transitions to the normal low navigation state while part of the game cannot be completed in the LMT state.

<Specific example of counter update display/when judge effect and ED effect are not performed>
FIG. 202(b) is a diagram showing an example of the update display of the counter when the judge effect and the ED effect are not performed by the two-coin bet game.

Game R27 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 27, and is a game in which a two-coin bet game is performed in the AT2 state. In this game R27, since a two-coin bet game is performed in the AT2 state, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains 2.

Therefore, in the game R27, the effect image display device 157 is used to set the effect state to the AT2 state when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Therefore, while the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, the display including the image showing the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) is not updated. Furthermore, since the two-coin bet game was performed in the AT2 state, even if the player was internally elected to the winning hand, the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation was not executed.

In this example, since the two-coin bet game is performed over the period from game R27 to game R0, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 2. , the presentation state shifts from the high navigation state to the low navigation state without shifting from the AT2 state to the judge state or LMT state. Therefore, the judge effect corresponding to the judge state and the ED effect corresponding to the LMT state are not executed. In this example, since the AT2 state has shifted to the low navigation state, the display of the AT2 end screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state and the display of the judgment end screen corresponding to the end of the judge state are not executed.

The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games is 0 in the high navigation state and the number of remaining games is 2 in the AT2 state, and is a two-coin bet game. In this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to display the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (effect state counter count value) is 2, but since this is the final game in the high navigation state, the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state is displayed even though the LMT state has not been entered, and the high navigation state is reached. While the result display 2 (for example, display of the number of acquired game media, the number of games in the AT2 state, etc.) is executed, the AT2 effect is finished.

In this example, since the two-coin bet game is performed over the period from game R27 to game R0, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) is not consumed, and the high navigation state is reached. Only the number of remaining games (the count value of the high navi state counter) has been completed. As a result, transition to the judge state or the LMT state in the high navigation state is not performed, and all games in the LMT state (20 games in this example) cannot be completed, and the transition to the normal state in the low navigation state is made. there is

<Specific examples of ED production, freeze production, and setting suggestion production>
Next, specific examples of the ED effect, freeze effect, and setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 to 206. FIG. FIGS. 203 to 206 are timing charts showing the flow of effects, and show the effect modes of the effects to be executed in association with the timing charts.

<Specific examples of ED effect, freeze effect, and setting suggestion effect / only 3 bet games>
FIG. 203 shows the ED when only a 3-coin bet game is performed in a high-navigation state in which the rendering state shifts in the order of judge state to LMT state (limit state) and then shifts to a normal state in a low-navigation state. It is the figure which showed an example of production|presentation and freeze production|presentation.

Game R19 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the judge state is 19, and a 3-coin bet game is performed. In this game R19, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the freeze effect is started, and at the same time, the effect image display device 157 is used to display the effect state. has shifted from the judge state to the LMT state, the ED production (ending production) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and the operation navigation that suggests a stop operation (in this example, "2-1-3" display) is executed, and since the total number of games in the LMT state is 20 and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) is 20, the total number of games in the LMT state and the remaining number in the LMT state (in this example, the display of an image including characters "20/20 remaining") is executed.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in the game R19 (accepting the third stop operation in this example), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the effect state because the effect state is the LMT state. An ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and since the total number of games in the LMT state is 20 and the remaining number of games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 19, the LMT state is executed. and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter). there is It should be noted that the flow of effects in subsequent games R18 to R2 is also substantially the same, so description thereof will be omitted.

Game R1 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 1 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 1, and is a game in which a 3-coin bet game is performed. In this game R1, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the effect state in the LMT state. , an ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and since the total number of games in the LMT state is 20 and the remaining number of games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 1, the LMT and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter). ing. In addition, in this game R1, the effect image display device 157 is used to generate a setting suggestion effect (a set value can be guessed) that suggests a setting value (setting 1 to setting 6) indicated by symbol A or "suggestion A" in the figure. performance) is being performed. Although the effect mode of the setting suggesting effect is not particularly limited, in this example, the setting suggesting effect is executed so as to partially overlap the ED effect.

The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0, and is a three-bet game. In this game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the effect state because the effect state is the LMT state. , an ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and since the total number of games in the LMT state is 20 and the remaining number of games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 0, the LMT and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter). ing.

After that, when a certain condition is established in this game R0 (acceptance of the third stop operation in this example), the effect image display device 157 is used as the final game in the LMT state. While executing the display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state and executing the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, the display of the number of acquired game media, the number of games in the AT2 state, etc.), the LMT state The display including the image indicating the number of remaining games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "0/20 left") and the display of the operation navigation are erased. In addition, in this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value (a effect that makes it possible to guess the setting value) indicated by symbol B or "suggestion B" in the figure. . Although the effect mode of the setting suggesting effect is not particularly limited, in this example, the setting suggesting effect is executed in part of the background display. Also, the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, and suggestion A and suggestion B may be performed at the same time in the final game in the LMT state.

<Specific examples of ED effect, freeze effect, and setting suggestion effect / 3-bet game and 2-bet game>
FIG. 204(a) shows a 3-coin bet game and a 2-coin bet in the case where the production state shifts in the order of judge state to LMT state (limit state) in the high navigation state, and then shifts to the normal state in the low navigation state. It is the figure which showed an example of ED production|presentation and freeze production|presentation when playing a game.

Game R19 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19, and a two-coin bet game is performed in the judge state. In this game R19, since a two-coin bet game was played in the judge state, the number of remaining games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 4.

Therefore, in the game R19, the effect image display device 157 is used to set the effect state to the judge state when a certain condition is established (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Therefore, while executing the judge effect corresponding to the judge state, the display including the image indicating the number of remaining games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is not updated. In game R19, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19, and the condition for transition from the judge state to the LMT state (the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is less than 20 G) is satisfied, but it is a two-bet game. Therefore, the ED effect and the freeze effect are not executed.

In this example, an example was shown in which the judge effect is executed even when a two-coin bet game is performed in the judge state. In the case where the scene is composed of the scene of (2), when a two-coin bet game is performed in the judge state, the scene of the judge effect may not be updated in the game.

The following game R18 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 18 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the judge state is 19, and a 3-coin bet game is performed. In this game R18, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the freeze effect is started, and at the same time, the effect image display device 157 is used to display the effect state. has shifted from the judge state to the LMT state, the ED production (ending production) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and the operation navigation that suggests a stop operation (in this example, "2-1-3" display) is running.

On the other hand, the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 18, but the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) is 20. Therefore, a display including an image indicating the total number of games in the LMT state and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters "20/20 remaining") display) is running.

After that, when a certain condition is established in the game R18 (accepting the third stop operation in this example), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the effect state because the effect state is the LMT state. An ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 19. The number of games in the state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 18, but there is a display (this In the example, the display of an image including characters "19/20 left") is executed. It should be noted that the flow of effects in subsequent games R17 to R1 is also substantially the same, so description thereof will be omitted.

The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 1, and is a three-coin bet game. In this game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the effect state because the effect state is the LMT state. , an ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed.

On the other hand, the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 0, but the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 1. Therefore, a display including an image indicating the total number of games in the LMT state and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters "1/20 left") display) is running. In addition, in this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value (a effect that makes it possible to guess the setting value) indicated by symbol A or "suggestion A" in the drawing. . Although the effect mode of the setting suggesting effect is not particularly limited, in this example, the setting suggesting effect is executed so as to partially overlap the ED effect.

After that, when a certain condition is established in this game R0 (acceptance of the third stop operation in this example), the effect image display device 157 is used as the final game in the LMT state. While executing the display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state and executing the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, the display of the number of acquired game media, the number of games in the AT2 state, etc.), the LMT state The display including the image showing the number of remaining games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "1/20 left") and the display of the operation navigation are erased. In addition, in this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value (a effect that makes it possible to guess the setting value) indicated by symbol B or "suggestion B" in the drawing. . Although the effect mode of the setting suggesting effect is not particularly limited, in this example, the setting suggesting effect is executed in part of the background display. Also, the display timing of the ED effect end screen is not limited to this example, and the display may be started when other conditions are satisfied, such as acceptance of pressing operation of the start lever 135 .

In this example, it is configured to be able to start execution of a specific effect (ED effect in this example) in an advantageous state (LMT state in this example), and a certain requirement is satisfied at the start of game execution. In the case (in this example, when the number of remaining games in the high navigation state reaches 20G), if the game is the first game (in this example, a 3-bet game), a specific count value (this In the example, the high navigation state counter) is updated and execution of a specific effect (ED effect) can be started in the first game (three bet game).

On the other hand, when a certain requirement is satisfied at the start of game execution (when the number of remaining games in the high navigation state reaches 20G), the game is the second game (in this example, a two-bet game). In the case of , a specific count value (high navigation state counter) is updated so that execution of a specific effect (ED effect) is not started in the second game (three bet game). Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the player has been playing a game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

In this example, it is configured to be able to start executing a certain freeze effect in an advantageous state (in this example, LMT state), and if certain requirements are met when starting execution of the game (in this example, high When the number of remaining games in the navigation state reaches 20 G), if the game is the first game (in this example, a 3-bet game), a specific count value (in this example, a high navigation state counter ) is updated and execution of a certain freeze effect can be started in the first game (three bet game).

On the other hand, when a certain requirement is satisfied at the start of game execution (when the number of remaining games in the high navigation state reaches 20G), the game is the second game (in this example, a two-bet game). In the case of , a specific count value (high navigation state counter) is updated so that execution of a certain freeze effect is not started in the second game (three bet game). Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the player has been playing a game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

In addition, in this example, in the game after shifting to the LMT state, a 3-coin bet game is performed, but since a 2-coin bet game is performed in the immediately preceding judge state, the remaining number of games in the judge state (effect The count value of the state counter) has not been completed, and only the number of remaining games in the high navi state (the count value of the high navi state counter) has been completed. As a result, the transition from the high navigation state to the LMT state is delayed, and the game transitions to the normal low navigation state while part of the game cannot be completed in the LMT state.

FIG. 204(b) is a diagram showing a modification of the setting suggestion effect described with reference to FIG. 204(a). In this example, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19 in game R19, and the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 18 in game R18. (The number of remaining games in the high navigation state is less than 20G) is satisfied, but since it is a two-bet game, the ED effect and the freeze effect are not executed.

In addition, since the game R19 and game R18 are two games in the judge state, the remaining number of games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is not consumed, and the high navigator is used. Only the remaining number of games in the state (the count value of the high navi state counter) has been completed, and the number of games in the LMT state is 18. For this reason, the ED effect of the final game in the high navigation state (LMT state when transitioning to the LMT state) is not executed, without executing the setting suggestion effect (suggestion A) executed at the 19th game in the LMT state. Only the setting suggesting effect (suggestion B) that is executed when the end screen is displayed is executed.

<Specific examples of ED effect, freeze effect, and setting suggestion effect / only two bet games>
FIG. 205 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggesting effect when the double bet game is continued in the judge state of the high navigation state.

Games R25 to R19 are games in which the number of remaining games is 25 to 19 in the high navigation state, and are games in which a two-coin bet game is performed in the judge state. During the period from game R25 to game R19, the number of remaining games in the judgment state (the count value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains 9 because the two-coin bet game is performed in the judgment state.

Therefore, in games R25 to R19, the effect image display device 157 is used to judge the effect state when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the operation of pressing the start lever 135 is accepted). Therefore, while the judge effect corresponding to the judge state is executed, the display including the image indicating the number of remaining games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is not updated. In game R19, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19, and the condition for transition from the judge state to the LMT state (the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is less than 20 G) is satisfied, but it is a two-bet game. Therefore, the ED effect and the freeze effect are not executed.

The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the judge state is 9, and is a two-coin bet game. In this game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the effect state as the judge state. , a judgment effect corresponding to the judgment state is executed.

After that, when a certain condition is established in this game R0 (acceptance of the third stop operation in this example), the effect image display device 157 is used as the final game in the LMT state. While executing the display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state and executing the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, the display of the number of game media acquired, the number of games in the AT2 state, etc.), the judgment state The display including the image indicating the number of remaining games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST9G") and the display of the judge effect are deleted. In addition, in this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value (a effect that makes it possible to guess the setting value) indicated by symbol B or "suggestion B" in the figure. .

In this example, since the two-coin bet game continues in the judge state, the number of remaining games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is not exhausted from the remaining 9 games, and the remaining number in the high navigation state. Only the number of games (the count value of the high navigation state counter) has been digested. As a result, the transition to the LMT state from the high navigation state is not performed, and the game transitions to the normal state of the low navigation state without being able to finish all the games in the LMT state.

In addition, since the transition to the LMT state has not occurred, the setting suggestion effect (suggestion A) that is executed at the 19th game in the LMT state is not executed. Only the setting suggestion effect (suggestion B) that is executed with the display of the ED effect end screen of the final game in the LMT state) as a trigger is executed.

<Specific examples of ED effect, freeze effect, and setting suggestion effect/variant example of freeze effect>
FIGS. 206(a) and 206(b) are diagrams showing an example of a modification of the freeze effect. In this example, a freeze effect different from the freeze effect executed simultaneously with the ED effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "second freeze effect") is configured to be executable.

FIG. 206(a) is a diagram showing an example of the second freeze effect when a three-coin bet game is performed. Game R327 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 327 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 31, and a 3-coin bet game is performed. In this game R327, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the condition for starting the interlocking effect is satisfied), the effect for managing the number of games up to the game that starts the second freeze effect Begin counting the start counter.

Game R325 is a game in which the number of remaining games is 325 in the high navigation state and the number of remaining games is 229 in the AT2 state, and is a three-coin bet game. In this game R327, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the three-coin betting game is started and the effect start counter that started counting in the game R327 reaches a certain value), The interlocking effect executed over the game R327 to game R326 is terminated (or interrupted), and the second freeze effect is started without executing the ED effect.

In this example, since the AT of 200 G was added in the game R325, an image including the number of AT added games is displayed after the second freeze effect (in this example, "+200 G!!" (display of an image including characters) is executed, the effect image display device 157 is used to change the effect state to Since it is in the AT2 state, the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, and since the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is 229, the number of games (count of the effect state counter) value) (in this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST229G”).

On the other hand, FIG. 206(b) is a diagram showing an example of a second freeze effect when a two-coin bet game is performed in the middle of the AT2 state. Game R325 of this example is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 325, and a two-coin bet game is played. In this game R325, since a two-coin bet game was performed in the AT2 state, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains 30.

Therefore, in the game R325, the effect image display device 157 is used to set the effect state to the AT2 state when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the operation of pressing the start lever 135 is accepted). Therefore, while the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, the display including the image showing the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) is not updated.

The following game R324 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 324 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 229, and a three-coin bet game is performed. In this game R324, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the three-coin bet game is started and the effect start counter that started counting in the game R327 reaches a certain value), The interlocking effect executed over the game R327 to game R325 is ended (or interrupted), and the second freeze effect is started without executing the ED effect. The flow of effects after the second freeze effect is the same as the flow of effects of game R325 in FIG. 206(a).

<Specific example of ED effect in non-AT state>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 207 and 208, a specific example of ED effects in the non-AT state will be described. 207 and 208 are timing charts showing the flow of effects, and show the effect modes of the effects to be executed in association with the timing charts.

FIG. 207 is a diagram showing an example of an ED effect when a three-coin bet game is played. Game R550 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 550 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state shifted from the normal state is 19, and a 3-coin bet game is performed. In this game R550, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the operation of pressing the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the effect state in the AT1 state. , AT1 effect corresponding to the AT1 state is executed, operation navigation suggesting a stop operation (in this example, display of "2-1-3") is executed, and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state (effect state counter ) is 19, the display including the image indicating the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST19G") is executed.

The game R50 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 50 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state shifted from the AT1 state is 24, and a 3-coin bet game is performed. In this game R50, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the effect state in the AT2 state. , AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, operation navigation suggesting a stop operation (in this example, display of "2-1-3") is executed, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (effect state counter ) is 24, the display including the image indicating the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST24G") is executed.

Game R19 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the AT2 state is 19, and a 3-coin bet game is performed. In this game R19, the effect state is changed from the AT2 state to the LMT state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is established (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Since the transition is made, an ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and operation navigation suggesting a stop operation (in this example, display of "2-1-3") is executed, and LMT is performed. Since the total number of games in the state is 20 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 20, the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the effect state counter display (in this example, display of an image including the characters "20/20 more") is executed.

Game R1 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 1 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 1, and is a game in which a 3-coin bet game is performed. In this game R1, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the effect state in the LMT state. , an ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and since the total number of games in the LMT state is 20 and the remaining number of games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 1, the LMT and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter). ing. In addition, in this game R1, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value (a effect that allows the setting value to be guessed), indicated by symbol A or "suggestion A" in the drawing. .

The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0, and is a three-bet game. In this game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the effect state because the effect state is the LMT state. , an ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and since the total number of games in the LMT state is 20 and the remaining number of games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 0, the LMT and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter). ing.

After that, when a certain condition is established in this game R0 (acceptance of the third stop operation in this example), the effect image display device 157 is used as the final game in the LMT state. While executing the display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state and executing the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, the display of the number of acquired game media, the number of games in the AT2 state, etc.), the LMT state The display including the image indicating the number of remaining games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "0/20 left") and the display of the operation navigation are erased. In addition, in this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value (a effect that makes it possible to guess the setting value) indicated by symbol B or "suggestion B" in the figure. .

FIG. 208(a) is a diagram showing an example of an ED effect in the case of shifting to the LMT state after performing a two-coin bet game in the normal state. Games R900 to R18 are normal state games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 900 to 18, and two-coin bet games are performed. In games R19 to R18, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19 to 18, and the condition for transition from the judge state to the LMT state (the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is less than 20G) is satisfied, but two bets are made. Since it is a game, the ED effect and the freeze effect are not executed.

The following game R17 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 17 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the normal state is 19, and a 3-coin bet game is performed. In this game R17, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the ED effect is started, and at the same time, the effect image display device 157 is used to display the effect state. has shifted from the normal state to the LMT state, the ED production (ending production) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and the operation navigation that suggests a stop operation (in this example, "2-1-3" display) is running.

On the other hand, the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 17, but the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) is 20. Therefore, a display including an image indicating the total number of games in the LMT state and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters "20/20 remaining") display) is running.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in the game R17 (accepting the third stop operation in this example), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the LMT state, so that An ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 19. The number of games in the state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 17, but there is a display (this In the example, the display of an image including characters "19/20 left") is executed. It should be noted that the flow of effects in subsequent games R16 to R1 is also substantially the same, so description thereof will be omitted.

The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 2, and is a three-coin bet game. In this game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the effect state because the effect state is the LMT state. , an ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed.

On the other hand, the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 0, but the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 2. Therefore, a display including an image indicating the total number of games in the LMT state and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters "2/20 left") display) is running.

After that, when a certain condition is established in this game R0 (acceptance of the third stop operation in this example), the effect image display device 157 is used as the final game in the LMT state. Display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state (end effect related to the end of the AT2 state (= high navigation state)) is executed, and the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, display of the number of acquired game media, The number of games in the AT2 state, etc.) is executed, while a display including an image showing the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters "2/20 left") display) and operation navigation display are erased. In addition, in this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value (a effect that makes it possible to guess the setting value) indicated by symbol B or "suggestion B" in the figure. .

In this example, in an advantageous state (in this example, high navigation state), it is configured to be able to shift to a first advantageous game state (in this example, AT2 state (= high navigation state)), and the first advantageous game The end effect (in this example, the display of the ED effect end screen) relating to the end of the state (AT2 state (=high navigation state)) can be executed, and in the advantageous state (high navigation state), the first game ( In this example, when only a 3-coin bet game is played, the system is configured so that the state may shift to the first advantageous game state (AT2 state) and the end effect may be executed. When only the second game (in this example, a two-coin bet game) is performed in the (high navigation state), the end effect is executed without shifting to the first advantageous game state (AT2 state). is configured as follows.

Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the player has been playing a game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the players by notifying that the game in which the second game is being played has ended in an advantageous state. In addition, by giving the player the impression that he has lost the number of games in an advantageous game state, it is possible to make the player carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in subsequent games.

In this example, the normal state is shifted to the LMT state without shifting to a state other than the LMT state (AT1 state, AT2 state, etc.). running the performance.

FIG. 208(b) is a diagram showing an example of an ED effect when a two-coin bet game is continued in the normal state.

The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the normal state is 0, and is a two-coin bet game. In this game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the effect state because the effect state is the normal state. , a normal effect corresponding to the normal state is executed.

After that, when a certain condition is established in this game R0 (acceptance of the third stop operation in this example), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the final game in the high navigation state. , the display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the high navigation state is executed, and the result display 2 in the high navigation state (for example, the display of the number of acquired game media, etc.) is executed, while the normal effect is displayed. erased. In addition, in this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value (a effect that makes it possible to guess the setting value) indicated by symbol B or "suggestion B" in the drawing. .

In this example, in the high-navigation state, the state is shifted to the low-navigation state without shifting to a state other than the normal state (AT1 state, AT2 state, etc.), but the ED effect and the setting-suggestion effect are executed.

<Specific example of ED production during BB internal election>
Next, with reference to FIG. 209, a specific example of the ED effect during BB internal winning will be described. FIGS. 209A and 209B are timing charts showing the flow of the effects, and show the effect modes of the effects to be executed in association with the timing charts.

FIG. 209(a) is a diagram showing an example of the ED effect performed after the BB game. In order to avoid duplication of explanation, only effects different from those explained using FIG. 207 will be explained.

Game R580 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 580 and BB is internally won in the normal state. In this game R580, when a certain condition is met (accepting a bet operation in this example), the effect image display device 157 is used to change the effect state from the normal state to the normal state. A corresponding normal effect is executed, and a BB confirmation effect (in this example, display of an image including the characters "bonus confirmed!") suggesting internal winning of the BB is executed.

After that, when a certain condition is established in this game R580 (in this example, the operation of pressing the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to suggest a stop operation regarding the BB winning. Operation navigation (in this example, navigation suggesting aiming at the symbol combination "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1" corresponding to BB (bonus combination)) is executed.

The following game R579 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 579 and BB is won in the normal state. In this game R579, when a certain condition is established (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed on the winning line), an effect image is displayed. A device 157 is used to start a BB effect for notifying the start of a BB game.

FIG. 209(b) is a diagram showing an example of an ED effect performed during internal winning of BB. In order to avoid duplication of explanation, only effects different from the effects described with reference to FIG. 209(b) will be described.

Game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and BB is internally winning. In this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to trigger the establishment of a certain condition (acceptance of the third stop operation in this example). Display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the state (end effect related to the end of the AT2 state (=high navigation state)) is executed, and result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, display of the number of acquired game media, etc.) running

In addition, in this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to operate navigation that suggests a stop operation related to BB winning (in this example, a symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" corresponding to BB (bonus combination). ” continues to be displayed, and a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value (a effect that allows the setting value to be guessed), indicated by symbol B or “suggestion B” in the figure, is executed. .

In this example, in an advantageous state (high navigation state in this example), it is configured to be able to shift to a certain advantageous game state (some game state) (AT2 state in this example). An effect related to the end (end effect) (in this example, the display of the ED effect end screen) can be executed, and in an advantageous state (high navigation state), a transition to a certain game state (AT2 state) is performed to end the effect. Execution of (display of ED effect end screen) is configured to be able to start, and when a game is played in a state in which it is in an advantageous state (high navigation state) and a special role is internally elected, the advantageous state ( In the high navigation state), execution of the end effect (display of the ED effect end screen) can be started without shifting to a certain game state (AT2 state).

For this reason, even if the advantageous state ends because the symbols relating to the special role are not arranged, the player's feelings of regret and impatience can be reduced by making the player feel that he has shifted to a certain advantageous game state. becomes possible. In addition, since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

<Specific example of interlocking production>
Next, a specific example of interlocking effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 210 to 212. FIG. 210 and 211 are timing charts showing the flow of effects, and show the effect modes of the effects to be executed in association with the timing charts. Also, FIG. 212 is a diagram showing an example of the interlocking effect in chronological order.

<Specific example of interlocking production / When interlocking production progresses normally>
FIG. 210(a) is a diagram showing the flow of the effect when the interlocking effect progresses normally. Here, the interlocking effect means an effect that is composed of a plurality of related scenes (storylines) and executed over a plurality of games. Although the effect mode of the interlocking effect is not particularly limited, the interlocking effect (normal pattern) of this example includes, as shown in FIG. , confrontation” scene, “enemy attack” scene indicated by reference N+2, “friendly attack” scene indicated by reference N+3, and “victory (or defeat)” scene indicated by reference N+4.

Returning to FIG. 210, game R90 is a game in which the number of remaining games is 90 in the high navigation state and the number of remaining games is 9 in the judge state, and is a three-coin bet game. In this game R90, the "enemy selection" scene is executed as one scene of the interlocking effect. Although illustration is omitted, since the 3-coin bet game is performed in the following period from game R89 to game R85, one scene of the interlocking effect is executed in each game, and the interlocking effect progresses normally.

The subsequent games R86 to R83 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 86 to 83, and the number of remaining games in the judge state is 5 to 2, and are three-bet games. During the period from game R86 to game R83, as a continuation of the interlocking production, the scene of "enemy determination and confrontation" → the scene of "enemy attack" → the scene of "ally attack" → the scene of "victory" is executed in this order. , and the interlocking effect is executed up to the last scene.

<Specific example of interlocking production / When interlocking production does not progress normally>
FIG. 210(b) is a diagram showing the flow of effects when the interlocking effects do not proceed normally. Games R86 to R85 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 86 to 85 and the number of remaining games in the judge state is 5 to 4, and are three-bet games. During the period from game R86 to game R85, as the interlocking effect, the scene of "enemy determination and confrontation"→the scene of "enemy attack" is executed in this order, and the interlocking effect progresses normally.

The following game R84 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 84 and a two-coin bet game is played in the judge state. In this game R84, since a two-coin bet game was played in the judge state, the number of remaining games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 4.

Therefore, in the game R84, the effect image display device 157 is used to set the effect state to the judge state when a certain condition is established (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Therefore, while the judge effect corresponding to the judge state is executed, a display including an image indicating the number of remaining games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, a display including the characters "LAST4G") is displayed. ) has not been updated. Further, since the two-coin bet game was performed during the interlocking performance of the judge state, the scene of the interlocking performance is not advanced, and the "enemy attack" scene executed in the previous game R85 is executed again. Therefore, in this example, the same "enemy attack" scene is performed redundantly in both game R85 and game R84, and the interlocking effect does not progress normally. However, in the subsequent games R83 to R82, since a three-coin bet game was performed, during the period of this game R83 to game R82, as a continuation of the interlocking effect, the scene of "attack on allies" → the scene of "victory" are executed in this order, and the interlocking effect is executed up to the last scene.

In this example, a certain effect (first effect) (in this example, judge effect) can be executed over a plurality of games, and the first effect (judge effect) is the first scene. (In this example, the "enemy attack" scene) and the second scene (in this example, the "enemy attack" scene) production, including the production of the first scene ("enemy attack" scene) If the execution of the first game (in this example, the three-bet game) is started after the game in which the Execution of the effect of the "attack" scene) can be started, and after the game in which the first scene (the "enemy attack" scene) is performed, the second game (in this example, two Execution of the second scene ("friend attack" scene) is not started in the second game (two bet game) when execution of the betting game) is started. .

Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the player has been playing a game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player.

FIG. 211(a) is a diagram showing the flow of the effect when the ED effect is started without the interlocking effect progressing normally. Games R86 to R85 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 86 to 85 and the number of remaining games in the judge state is 5 to 4, and are three-bet games. During the period from game R86 to game R85, as the interlocking effect, the scene of "enemy determination and confrontation"→the scene of "enemy attack" is executed in this order, and the interlocking effect progresses normally.

The subsequent games R84 to R18 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 84 to 18, and two-coin bet games are played in the judge state. During the period from game R84 to game R18, the number of remaining games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains 4 because the two-coin bet game is performed in the judge state.

Therefore, in the games R84 to R18, the effect image display device 157 is used to judge the effect state when a certain condition is established (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). state, the judge effect corresponding to the judge state is executed, while a display including an image indicating the number of remaining games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the characters "LAST4G") is displayed. ) are not updated. Furthermore, since the two-coin bet game was performed during the interlocking effect in the judge state, the scene of the interlocking effect is not advanced, and the scene of "enemy attack" executed in the previous game R85 is continued. . Therefore, in this example, the same "enemy attack" scene is executed in duplicate during the period from game R85 to game R18, and the interlocking effect does not proceed normally.

The following game R17 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 17 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the judge state is 19, and a 3-coin bet game is performed. In this game R17, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the ED effect is started, and at the same time, the effect image display device 157 is used to display the effect state. has shifted from the judge state to the LMT state, the ED production (ending production) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and the operation navigation that suggests a stop operation (in this example, "2-1-3" display) is running.

On the other hand, the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 17, but the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) is 20. Therefore, a display including an image indicating the total number of games in the LMT state and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters "20/20 remaining") display) is running.

In this example, the same "enemy attack" scene was repeatedly performed during the period from game R85 to game R18, and the interlocking effect did not progress normally. It has been started, and the interlocking effect has not been executed until the last scene (in this example, the "win" scene or the "defeat" scene of the interlocking effect functioning as an advance notice of the subsequent game).

FIG. 211(b) is a diagram showing an example of an interlocking effect in the case where the two-coin bet game is continued in the judge state.

Games R86 to R85 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 86 to 85 and the number of remaining games in the judge state is 5 to 4, and are three-bet games. During the period from game R86 to game R85, as the interlocking effect, the scene of "enemy determination and confrontation"→the scene of "enemy attack" is executed in this order, and the interlocking effect progresses normally.

The subsequent game R84 to game R1 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 84 to 1, and two-coin bet games are played in the judge state. During the period from game R84 to game R1, since the two-coin bet game was performed in the judge state, the number of remaining games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 4.

Therefore, in games R84 to R1, the effect image display device 157 is used to judge the effect state when a certain condition is established (in this example, the operation of pressing the start lever 135 is accepted). state, the judge effect corresponding to the judge state is executed, while a display including an image indicating the number of remaining games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the characters "LAST4G") is displayed. ) are not updated.

Furthermore, since the two-coin bet game was performed during the interlocking effect in the judge state, the scene of the interlocking effect is not advanced, and the scene of "enemy attack" executed in the previous game R85 is continued. . Therefore, in this example, during the period from game R85 to game R1, as shown in FIG. 212(B), the same "enemy attack" scene is repeatedly executed, and the interlocking effect does not progress normally. Therefore, the player can easily notice that a two-coin bet game has been played by watching the progress of the interlocking effect.

The following game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the judge state is 4, and is a game in which a two-coin bet game is performed. In this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to indicate that the final game is in a high navigation state, triggered by the establishment of a certain condition (acceptance of pressing operation of the start lever 135 in this example). , the display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the high navigation state is executed, and the result display 2 in the high navigation state (for example, the display of the number of acquired game media, etc.) is executed, while the judge effect is displayed. is erased. In addition, in this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value (a effect that makes it possible to guess the setting value) indicated by symbol B or "suggestion B" in the figure. .

In this example, the same "enemy attack" scene was executed repeatedly during the period from game R85 to game R1, and the interlocking effect did not progress normally. is started, and the interlocking effect cannot be executed until the last scene (in this example, the "victory" scene or the "defeat" scene of the interlocking effect functioning as an advance notice of the subsequent game). Therefore, the player can easily notice that a two-coin bet game has been played by watching the progress of the interlocking effect.

FIG. 212(B) to FIG. 212(D) are diagrams showing modifications of the interlocking effect. The interlocking effect according to the present invention is not limited to the interlocking effect described with reference to FIG. 212(A). , Confrontation" may be configured in one scene.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 212(C), a scene of "enemy attack and ally attack" is newly added, and as indicated by reference numeral N+1 in FIG. and "enemy attack" scenes are composed in one scene, and as indicated by symbol N+2 in FIG. may

212(D), after executing the scene of "enemy attack and ally attack" composed of one scene as indicated by reference numeral N+1, one scene is executed as indicated by reference numeral N+2 in FIG. A plurality of "enemy attack" scenes may be executed.

Also, depending on the type of interlocking effect shown in FIGS. 212(A) to 212(D), the content of the privilege given to the player may be changed, or the degree of expectation may be varied. In addition, even when a two-coin bet game is performed, all scenes may be always executed in a certain aspect of the interlocking effect, or when a two-coin bet game is performed, all scenes may be executed. (or the final scene suggesting the judgment result (for example, the scene of "Victory" or "Loss") may not be reproduced.

<Specific example of specific indication>
Next, specific examples of the specific display will be described with reference to FIGS. 213 to 215. FIG. 213 and 214 are timing charts showing the flow of effects, and show the effect modes of the effects to be executed in association with the timing charts. FIG. 215 is a diagram showing an example of specific display in chronological order.

<Specific example of specific display / 3 bet game when transitioning to judge>
FIG. 213(a) is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when a 3-coin bet game is performed when the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state.

Game R82 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 82 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 1, and is a three-coin bet game. In this game R82, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used, and the effect state is the AT2 state. , an AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state (for example, an effect in which the character of Tono is running, indicated by symbol d1 in FIG. -1-3” display) is executed, and since the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (the count value of the production state counter) is 1, an image showing the number of games (the count value of the production state counter) is included. Display (in this example, display of an image including characters "LAST1G") is executed.

In this game R82, the effect image display device 157 is used to display the number of game media acquired in the high-navigation state (in the example indicated by symbol d1 in FIG. ), and when a certain condition is established (accepting the third stop operation in this example), the effect image display device 157 is used to indicate that the third stop operation has been accepted. An effect (for example, an effect of darkening the entire screen, indicated by symbol d1′ in FIG. 215(A)) is executed.

The following game R81 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 81 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0, and a 3-coin bet game is performed. In this game R81, as in the game R82, the AT2 effect is executed and the operation navigation is executed. display of an image including the characters "LAST0G").

In addition, in this game R81, the effect image display device 157 is used when a certain condition is established (acceptance of the third stop operation in this example). , displays an AT2 end rendering screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state (for example, a background image including the characters "end" indicated by reference d2 in FIG. 215A), and displays result 1 ( For example, while displaying the number of game media acquired in the high navigation state, indicated by symbol d2 in FIG. The display including (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST0G") and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. In this example, the AT2 end effect screen is displayed in the final game in the AT2 state, but it may be displayed at another timing (for example, after shifting to the judge state).

The subsequent game R80 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 80 and the number of remaining games in the judge state shifted from the AT2 state is 9, and a three-coin bet game is performed. In this game R80, the effect image display device 157 is used until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received (immediately after BET, etc.)). state, the judge effect corresponding to the start of the judge state is started, and since the number of remaining games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 10, the number of games (the effect state counter count value) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "defeat within 10G") is executed.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in the game R80 (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to change the effect state to the judgment state. , the judge effect corresponding to the judge state is executed, and since the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 9, an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, display of an image including the characters "LAST9G") is executed.

Here, an example of the judgment effect executed in game R80 will be described with reference to FIG. 215(A). In this example, when the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received, the judgment effect start screen indicated by reference d3 is displayed, and when the first stop operation is received in the game, the judge effect (interlocked effect) indicated by reference d4 is displayed. A scene of "enemy selection", which is one scene, and an effect indicating that an enemy has not been selected) is executed, and when a third stop operation is received in the game, a judge effect indicated by symbol d4' When a certain amount of time has passed since the third stop operation was received in the game after executing (an "enemy selection" scene, which is one scene of the interlocking effect, and an effect indicating that an enemy has been selected). Then, a judgment effect (a scene of "enemy selection", which is one scene of the interlocking effect, indicating that the enemy has been confirmed) indicated by code d4'' is executed.

<Specific example of specific display/double bet game when transitioning to judge>
FIG. 213(b) is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when a two-coin bet game is performed when the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state. Note that the flow of effects of games R82 to R81 and game R79 is substantially the same as the effects described with reference to FIG. 213(a), so description thereof will be omitted.

Game R80 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 80, and a two-coin bet game is played. In this game R80, since a two-coin bet game is played in the judge state, a display including an image showing the judge effect corresponding to the judge state and the number of remaining games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is displayed. Triggered by the establishment of a certain condition (in this example, acceptance of the pressing operation of the start lever 135), the effect image display device 157 is used to display a specific display (in this example, black-painted display that contains only a background image).

Here, "specific display (specific display)" refers to a display that is not related to an advantageous state, for example, a display that is displayed when the first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 state) ends (for example, AT2 end screen display), a certain display corresponding to the second advantageous game state (eg, judge state) (eg, judge effect), and the like. Note that the display mode of the specific display is not particularly limited. Alternatively, it may be a display made up of a certain pattern, figure, or the like.

In this example, the 3-coin bet game is performed after the 2-coin bet game in the judge state. Triggered by the establishment (in this example, acceptance of the pressing operation of the start lever 135), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the specific display. In this case, the AT2 end screen may be displayed until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the start lever 135 is pressed down). With such a configuration, even when the specific display is displayed, the player can recognize the end of the AT2 state, and convenience for the player can be enhanced.

<Specific example of specific display/Modified example of 3-coin bet game at the time of transition to judge>
FIG. 214(a) is a diagram showing a modification of the flow of effects when a 3-coin bet game is performed when the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state.

Game R81 is a game in which the number of remaining games is 81 in the high navigation state and the number of remaining games is 0 in the AT2 state, and is a three-coin bet game. In this game R81, as in the game R82, an AT2 effect (for example, an effect in which the character of Tono is running, indicated by symbol d1 in FIG. 215(A)) is executed and operation navigation is executed. A display including an image indicating the number of remaining games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, displaying an image including the characters “LAST0G”) is executed.

Also, in this game R81, the effect image display device 157 is used to display the number of game media acquired in the high-navigation state (in the example indicated by symbol d1 in FIG. ) is performed, and when a certain condition is established (accepting the third stop operation in this example), the effect image display device 157 is used to perform AT2 because this is the final game in the AT2 state. While executing the display of the AT2 end rendering screen corresponding to the end of the state (for example, the background image including the characters "end" indicated by symbol d2 in FIG. 215(A)), the result display 1 in the AT2 state is executed. not.

The subsequent game R80 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 80 and the number of remaining games in the judge state shifted from the AT2 state is 9, and a three-coin bet game is performed. In this game R80, result display 1 in the AT2 state (for example, display of the number of game media acquired in the high navigation state, indicated by symbol d2 in FIG. 215A, display including the characters "GET 1328 sheets") is executed. ing.

<Specific example of specific display/Modified example of double bet game at the time of transition to judge>
FIG. 214(b) is a diagram showing a modification of the flow of effects when a two-coin bet game is performed when the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state. Note that the flow of the effect of the game R81 is almost the same as the effect explained using FIG. 214(a), so the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Game R80 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 80, and a two-coin bet game is played. In this game R80, since a two-coin bet game is played in the judge state, a display including an image showing the judge effect corresponding to the judge state and the number of remaining games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is displayed. Triggered by the establishment of a certain condition (in this example, acceptance of the pressing operation of the start lever 135), the effect image display device 157 is used to display a specific display (in this example, black-painted display that contains only a background image).

Further, in this game R81, when a certain condition is established (acceptance of the third stop operation in this example), the result display 1 in the AT2 state (for example, the symbol d2 in FIG. 215B) 4, the display of the number of game media obtained in the high-navigation state, a display including the characters "GET 1326 (1328 - 2 because you won a losing game with 2)" is executed.

In this example, in an advantageous state (high navigation state in this example), it is possible to shift to a first advantageous game state (AT2 state in this example) and a second advantageous game state (judge state in this example). The first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state) is more advantageous for the player than the second advantageous gaming state (judge state), and the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state) is After finishing, it is configured to be able to shift to a second advantageous game state (judgment state), and the display means (in this example, the effect image display device 157) displays the first display (in this example, the AT2 end screen ), a second display (in this example, a judge effect), and a third display (in this example, a specific display (display containing only a black background image)). The display is a display displayed at the end of the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state), the second display is a certain display corresponding to the second advantageous gaming state (judgment state), The third display is a specific display unrelated to the advantageous state (high navigation state), and after the first display is displayed, the execution of the first game (three bet game in this example) is started. In this case, a specific count value (high navigation state counter in this example) is updated so that the second display can be displayed in the first game, and the first display is displayed. When the execution of the second game (in this example, the two-bet game) is started later, the specific count value (in this example, the high navigation state counter) is updated and the third display is performed in the game. is configured to be visible.

Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the player has been playing a game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. Since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure fairness between the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, while the first game is correctly played, the player can comfortably enjoy the game in the next game state.

FIGS. 215(A) to 215(D) are diagrams showing a specific example of the flow of effects including the specific display. In the above-described embodiment, the effects shown in (A) and (B) of the same figure are mainly applied. As indicated by reference numeral d6 in FIG. 4D, instead of displaying the number of game media acquired in the high-navigation state, the number of game media acquired is displayed in a certain rendering state (AT2 state in this example). good too.

<Specific example of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter>
Next, a specific example of updating the ceiling counter and the elevation counter will be described with reference to FIGS. 216 to 222. FIG. 216 to 222 are timing charts showing the flow of effects, and show the effect modes of the effects to be executed in association with the timing charts.

Here, the item "ceiling counter" in each figure indicates the number of remaining games until the ceiling is reached. Also, "promotion counter", "AT1 type", "judge mode", and "confirmation notification flag" in each figure respectively indicate variables, flags, etc. (internal information of the slot machine) in the various flow charts described above. In addition, the item "Condition Device" in each figure corresponds to the No. of the condition device in FIG. (number).

<Specific example of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter / When reaching the ceiling in a 3-bet game>
FIG. 216 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of presentation when the 3-card game is played in the high navigation state and reaches the ceiling, and the presentation state shifts in the order of normal state→determined announcement state→AT1 state.

Game R300 is a game in which the number of remaining games is 300 in the high navigation state and the number of remaining games is 4 in the normal state, and is a game in which a three-coin bet game is performed. In this game R300, since the ceiling counter after subtraction has reached a certain value (in this example, 0), it is determined that the ceiling has been reached, and as a normal presentation, an omen presentation suggesting a shift to the AT1 state. is starting. Also, in the normal state process A described with reference to FIG. 167, since the ceiling counter after subtraction has reached a certain value (0 in this example), the AT1 type lottery is performed and the AT1 winning flag is turned on. It is set, and preparations are being made to shift the production state to the AT1 state. Although not shown, in the following period from game R299 to game R297, the precursor effect is continued as the normal effect.

The following game R296 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 296 and the number of remaining games in the normal state is 0, and a three-coin bet game is performed. In this game R296, since the production state counter has reached 0 in the normal state (because the normal state has ended), preparations are being made to shift the production state from the normal state to the final announcement state, and as a normal production, , a premonition effect suggesting a shift to the AT1 state is executed.

The subsequent game R295 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 295, and which is in a fixed announcement state immediately after shifting from the normal state, and in which a 3-coin bet game is performed. In this game R295, as a normal effect, a bonus confirmation display (in this example, a display including the characters "Bonus Confirmation!") for informing the transition to the AT1 state (in this example, pseudo bonus) is executed. Also, in this game R295, since the AT1 type is low in the final notification state process A described with reference to FIG. After that, in the confirmation notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 177, processing such as setting the confirmation notification flag from off to on is performed.

The following game R294 is the second game in the fixed announcement state with 294 remaining games in the high navigation state, and is a game in which a 3-coin bet game is played. In this game R294, the bonus confirmation display (in this example, the display including the characters "bonus confirmation!") continues as the normal effect. In addition, in this game R294, since the AT1 type is low in the final notification state process A described with reference to FIG. After that, a display (promotion lottery display) relating to the promotion lottery for the AT1 type is performed.

Furthermore, in this game R294, since the confirmed notification flag is ON in the confirmed notification state process B described with reference to FIG. No. 4) is determined. In this example, the condition device is No. Since it was 5, the production state is maintained in the fixed notification state.

The following game R293 is the third game in the fixed announcement state with 293 remaining games in the high navigation state, and is a game in which a 3-coin bet game is played. In this game R293, the bonus confirmation display (in this example, the display including the characters "Bonus Confirmation!") continues as the normal effect. Also, in this game R293, since the AT1 type is low in the finalized notification state process A described with reference to FIG. Is going.

Furthermore, in this game R293, since the confirmation notification flag is ON in the confirmation notification state process B described using FIG. No. 4) is determined. In this example, the condition device is No. Since it was 3, operation navigation (in this example, navigation to encourage reverse push operation aiming at the symbol of Seven 1 or Seven 2) is executed, and preparations are made to shift the production state from the final notification state to the AT1 state. Is going.

The following game R292 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 292 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state shifted from the fixed announcement state is 20, and a three-coin bet game is performed. In this game R292, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, a BET operation is performed), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the AT1 state because the effect state is the AT1 state. Along with executing the AT1 effect corresponding to , the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation (in this example, the display of "2-1-3") is executed, and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state (the effect state counter before subtraction ) is 20, the display including the image indicating the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "20G") is executed.

<Specific example of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter / When the ceiling is not reached in a two-bet game>
FIG. 217 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when a two-coin bet game is performed in the high navigation state, the game does not reach the ceiling, and the normal state of the effects is maintained.

In this example, the ceiling counter is not decremented because the two-coin bet game continues in the game after the ceiling counter reaches 699. Therefore, in the normal state process A described with reference to FIG. 167, it is not determined that the post-subtraction ceiling counter has reached a certain value (0 in this example), and the effect state shifts to the AT1 state. Not at all. In addition, since the effect state counter in the normal state is not updated in the two-bet game, it is not determined that the effect state counter has become 0 in the normal state process B described with reference to FIG. , the production state does not change to the final announcement state.

That is, in this example, a certain second counter (ceiling counter in this example) that is separate from the first counter (high navigation state counter in this example) relating to the advantageous state (high navigation state in this example) A certain count value of the second counter (ceiling counter) can be updated each time a game is played in an advantageous state (high navigation state). When the value becomes 0 (0 in this example), it is configured to shift to a specific advantageous state (AT1 state in this example) that is advantageous to the player. When one game (three bet game in this example) is played, both a specific count value (high navigation state counter value) and a certain count value (ceiling counter value) are counted. The value can be updated, and when the second game (in this example, a two-bet game) is played in an advantageous state (high navigation state), a specific count value (high navigation state counter value) and a certain count value (ceiling counter value), only the specific count value (high navigation state counter value) is configured to be updateable.

Therefore, since the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure fairness between the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, by giving preferential treatment to players who correctly played the first game, it can be expected that players who did not correctly play the game will be corrected.

<Specific example of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter/When reaching the ceiling in a 3-bet game and a 2-bet game>
FIG. 218 shows an example of the flow of effects when the 3-coin game and the 2-coin bet game are performed in the high navigation state, reaching the ceiling, and the production state shifts in the order of normal state→determined announcement state→AT1 state. It is a diagram.

In this example, since the 2-bet game is performed in a plurality of games after the ceiling counter reaches 699, the period of the 2-bet game (in this example, the game from the game next to the game R999) 100 games up to R899), the ceiling counter is not decremented. Therefore, in the following game R898 and subsequent games, a 3-coin bet game is played and the ceiling counter is decremented. reached), the number of games until reaching the ceiling is delayed by 100 games, and the number of remaining games in the high navigation state reaches the ceiling with 200 games. It should be noted that the flow of presentation in the case of shifting from the normal state to the final announcement state to the AT1 state is the same as in other embodiments, so the explanation thereof will be omitted.

<Updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter/When shifting to LMT state without reaching the ceiling>
FIG. 219 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when a 3-coin game and a 2-coin bet game are performed in the high navigation state, and the state is shifted to the LMT state without reaching the ceiling.

In this example, since the 2-bet game is performed in a plurality of games after the ceiling counter reaches 699, the period of the 2-bet game (in this example, the game from the game next to the game R999) During the period up to the game before R20), the ceiling counter is not decremented. Therefore, in the games after the game R19 that follows, a 3-coin bet game is played, but compared to the example of effect explained with reference to FIG. The number of games until the ceiling is reached is delayed, and the ceiling is not reached (the ceiling counter does not reach 0), and the state is shifted to the LMT state. It should be noted that the flow of presentation when shifting from the normal state to the LMT state is the same as in the other embodiments, so the description thereof will be omitted.

<Specific example of updating the ceiling counter and elevation counter / when shifting to low navigation state without reaching the ceiling>
FIG. 220 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when a 3-coin game and a 2-coin bet game are performed in the high navigation state, and the game moves to the low navigation state without reaching the ceiling.

In this example, since the 2-bet game is performed in a plurality of games after the ceiling counter reaches 699, the period of the 2-bet game (in this example, the game from the game next to the game R999) During the period up to R0), the ceiling counter is not decremented. For this reason, compared to the production example described with reference to FIG. (The ceiling counter never reaches 0.) The high navigation state ends in the normal state and shifts to the low navigation state.

It should be noted that the flow of effects when transitioning from the normal state of the high navigation state to the normal state of the low navigation state is the same as in the other embodiments, so the explanation thereof will be omitted, but referring to FIG. 208(b). As described above, in this example, in the high navigation state, the state is shifted to the low navigation state without shifting to a state other than the normal state (AT1 state, AT2 state, etc.), but the ED effect and setting suggestion effect are executed. ing.

<Specific example of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter / When the promotion counter is not updated>
FIG. 221 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when the 3-coin game and the 2-coin bet game are performed in the finalized announcement state of the high navigation state and the promotion counter is not updated.

In this example, since the two-coin bet game is performed in a plurality of games in the fixed announcement state in which the effect state has shifted from the normal state, the period of the two-coin bet game (in this example, the period following the game R294) During the period from the game to game R270), the promotion counter is not decremented. For this reason, compared to the production example described with reference to FIG. After displaying the type promotion lottery display (promotion lottery display) over a period of a plurality of games (in this example, the period from game R294 to game R270), the state shifts to AT1 state. Note that the flow of presentation when shifting from the final notification state to the AT1 state is the same as in the other embodiments, so the description thereof will be omitted.

<Specific example of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter/without operation navigation>
FIG. 222 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when operation navigation is not performed in the finalized notification state of the high navigation state.

In this example, in contrast to the production example described with reference to FIG. The only difference is that it is 3. In the confirmation notification state process B described using FIG. 177, when the confirmation notification flag is ON, the condition device is the internal winning result (No. 3 or No. 4 in this example) related to the AT1 type It is determined whether or not However, in the game R295, since the determination notification flag is off, the determination itself is not performed. Alternatively, navigation for prompting a reverse push operation aiming at the symbol of Seven 2) is not executed, and preparations for shifting the presentation state from the final notification state to the AT1 state are not performed.

<Specific example of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter / When AT1 type is promoted>
FIG. 223 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when the AT1 type is promoted in the confirmed notification state of the high navigation state.

Game R270 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 270, the promotion counter reaches a certain value (in this example, 10) in the final announcement state, and a 3-coin bet game is performed. be. In this game R270, since the promotion counter has reached a certain value (10 in this example), the AT1 type is changed from low to high (the AT1 type is promoted), and the judge mode is changed from normal to high accuracy. are doing.

In addition, in this game R270, when a certain condition is established (in this example, an operation to press the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to display a promotion lottery for the AT1 type. After performing (promotion lottery display), when another certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to promote the AT1 type. display (elevated display) that suggests that the

In game R270, since the confirmation flag is on, if the condition device is an internal winning result related to the AT1 type, in addition to the promotion display, the operation navigation (in this example, Seven 1 or Seven 2 (navigation for prompting a reverse push operation aiming at the pattern of ) is executed, and preparations are made to shift the production state from the final notification state to the AT1 state.

Game R268 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 268, and a 3-coin bet game is played. In this game R268, the bonus confirmation display (in this example, the display including the characters "Bonus Confirmation!") continues as the normal effect. In addition, in this game R268, since the confirmation notification flag is ON in the confirmation notification state process B described with reference to FIG. No. 4) is determined. In this example, the condition device is No. 4, operation navigation (in this example, navigation for prompting a reverse push operation aimed at the symbol of blue 7) is executed.

<Specific example of change in rights due to reaching the ceiling>
Next, a specific example of right change due to reaching the ceiling will be described with reference to FIGS. 224 and 225. FIG. 224 and 225 are timing charts showing the flow of effects, and show the effect modes of the effects to be executed in association with the timing charts.

FIG. 224 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when the ceiling is not reached in the high-navi state confirmation notification state.

Game R329 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 329, and which is in a fixed announcement state immediately after shifting from the normal state, and in which a 3-coin bet game is performed. In this game R329, as a normal effect, a bonus confirmation display (in this example, a display including the characters "Bonus Confirmation!") for informing the transition to the AT1 state is executed. In addition, in this game R329, since the result of the internal winning is a loss, the presentation state is maintained in the fixed notification state.

The following game R328 is the second game in the fixed announcement state with 328 remaining games in the high navigation state, and is a game in which a 3-coin bet game is played. In this game R328, the bonus confirmation display (in this example, the display including the characters "Bonus Confirmation!") continues as the normal effect. Also, in this game R328, the conditional device is No. Since it was 3, operation navigation (in this example, navigation to encourage reverse push operation aiming at the symbol of Seven 1 or Seven 2) is executed, and preparations are made to shift the production state from the final notification state to the AT1 state. Is going.

The following game R327 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 327 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state shifted from the fixed announcement state is 20, and a 3-coin bet game is performed. In this game R327, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, a BET operation is performed), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the AT1 state because the effect state is the AT1 state. Along with executing the AT1 effect corresponding to , the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation (in this example, the display of "2-1-3") is executed, and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state (the effect state counter before subtraction ) is 20, the display including the image indicating the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "20G") is executed.

In this example, the AT1 type is not changed from low to high (not promoted) because the ceiling has not been reached in the final announcement state of the high navigation state.

FIG. 225 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects in the case of reaching the ceiling in the high-navi state confirmation notification state.

Game R300 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 300 and the game is in a fixed announcement state. In this game R300, since the ceiling counter after subtraction reaches a certain value (0 in this example), it is determined that the ceiling has been reached, and the AT1 type is changed from low to high (promoting there). In addition, in this game R300, as a normal effect, a bonus confirmation display (in this example, a display including the characters "Bonus Confirmation!") for informing the transition to the AT1 state is executed. Furthermore, in this game R300, the conditional device is No. 4, operation navigation (in this example, navigation for prompting a reverse push operation aimed at the symbol of Seven 1) is executed.

In this example, the second right (pseudo bonus with high profit) is obtained from the state where the first right (pseudo bonus with low profit) is obtained when the ceiling is reached in the confirmed announcement state of the high navigation state. Since it is configured to be in the obtained state, even if the game takes a long time from the determination of the awarding of the privilege to the transition to a certain advantageous game state (for example, AT1 state) in the advantageous state. The game can be played with a sense of anticipation.

<Other production examples>
Next, another rendering example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 226 is a diagram for explaining another example of effect.

FIG. 226(a) is a diagram showing an example of an ED effect when a 3-coin bet game is performed in the LMT state, and FIG. 226(b) is a diagram for a case where a 2-coin bet game is performed in the LMT state. is a diagram showing an example of the ED effect of.

According to the slot machine according to the modification of the sixth embodiment, when the normal 3-coin bet game continues to be executed in the LMT state, as shown in FIG. During the middle, an ED effect is performed, and an end screen is executed in the final game. On the other hand, if the two-coin bet game continues to be executed in the LMT state, the end screen continues to be displayed as shown in FIG. 226(b).

FIG. 226(c) is a diagram showing a modification of the specific display shown in FIG. 215(D). In the effect example shown in FIG. 215(D), the specific display is displayed using all the display areas of the effect image display device 157, but as shown in FIG. , the upper half display area) and a second display area (in this example, the lower half display area), and the first display area switches the display in a certain period The second display area is a display area whose display is not switched during the certain period, and a specific display may be displayed in the first display area. With such a configuration, it is possible to display a specific display in the first display area while continuing to display a certain display in the second display area, thereby enhancing the presentation effect. There is

As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 149) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "the present invention 7-1") includes operating means (for example, shown in FIG. 149). stop buttons 137 to 139), and transition to one of the normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 154(b)) and the advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 154(b)) 151) and display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display (for example, effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 149). , operation information of the operation means (for example, operation navigation using the payout number display device 127 shown in FIGS. 156 and 193, operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 200, etc. Stopping each reel The advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and a specific counter (for example, , high navigation state counters shown in FIGS. 166 and 200, etc.), and is configured so that the count value of the specific counter can be updated each time a game is played in the advantageous state, and a certain termination condition is satisfied. The certain end condition is when the count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the advantageous state is reached). The number of bets on the game media is a first game (for example, a three-bet game), and is configured to be able to execute a second game (for example, a two-coin bet game) in which the number of bets is a second number, the second number is a number different from the first number, In the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and one of the plurality of types of display includes an image showing a certain value. This is a display (hereinafter referred to as "first display"; for example, the first display d1 shown in FIG. 227), and one of the plurality of types of display indicates the updated value of the certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "second display". For example, numerical value 30 shown in FIG. 227), and after the first display is displayed in the advantageous state, the first game is displayed. When the execution is started, the count value is updated and the second game is played in the first game. can be displayed, and when the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous state, the count value is updated and the first display is displayed. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is constructed such that the second display is not displayed in the second game. It should be noted that FIG. 227 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 7-1 of the present application.

According to the gaming machine according to Invention 7-1 of the present application, it is possible to inform the player that the game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player has been played in a manner that does not embarrass the player. In addition, since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Note that the gaming machine according to Invention 7-1 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to the first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 state shown in FIG. 154, etc.), and the first advantageous gaming state can notify the operation information. A certain gaming state, wherein the certain value is a value indicating a value relating to the number of games played (for example, the number of remaining games) in the first advantageous gaming state, and one of the plurality of types of display. is a display (hereinafter referred to as "third display") including an image indicating that the number of remaining games in the first advantageous gaming state is 0, and the third display in the first advantageous gaming state. When the second game is played, the first advantageous game state may end without displaying the third display.

With such a configuration, when returning from the second game to the first game, the fact that the player was playing a disadvantageous game (second game) is reported in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. It becomes possible to In addition, since the first advantageous gaming state may end without displaying the third display, the player is given the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous gaming state, and the third display is not displayed. The sudden display makes it possible to carefully select the number of bets on game media in subsequent games. Also, it is possible to secure fairness between a player who is playing the first game correctly and a player who is playing the second game.

Further, one of the plurality of types of display is a display including an image related to an increase in the number of remaining games in the first advantageous game state (hereinafter referred to as "fourth display"), and The fourth display is a display including an image related to the increase in the number of remaining games in the first advantageous gaming state (for example, a display including characters such as "+20", or a display including the number of remaining games "LAST5" to "LAST25"). display to change), and when the first game is played in the first advantageous gaming state, the fourth display may be displayed, and the fourth display may be displayed in the first advantageous gaming state. The fourth display may not be displayed when the second game is played.

With such a configuration, there is no possibility that the fourth display is displayed when the second game is played in the first advantageous gaming state, giving the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous gaming state. is given to the player, it is possible to make the player carefully select the number of bets on the game media in subsequent games. Also, it is possible to secure fairness between a player who is playing the first game correctly and a player who is playing the second game.

Further, even if the first game is played after the second game is played in the first advantageous game state, the third display is not displayed and the first game is played. There may be cases where the advantageous game state ends.

With such a configuration, the first advantageous game state may end without displaying the third display, thereby giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous game state. Therefore, it is possible to carefully select the number of bets on game media in subsequent games. Also, it is possible to secure fairness between a player who is playing the first game correctly and a player who is playing the second game.

Also, in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to a second advantageous gaming state (for example, the LMT state shown in FIG. 154, etc.), and the second advantageous gaming state is different from the first advantageous gaming state. It is another game state in which the operation information can be notified, and when the first game is played after the second game is played in the first advantageous game state, the third There may be a case where the first advantageous gaming state ends without the display of , and the second advantageous gaming state starts.

With such a configuration, the first advantageous game state may end without displaying the third display, thereby giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous game state. Therefore, while the selection of the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent game is made carefully, there is a case where the second advantageous game state starts when returning from the second game to the first game, A privilege can be given to the player who has returned to the first game, and the desire to play can be maintained.

In addition, a lottery means (for example, winning combination internal lottery processing (step S104) shown in FIG. 158) is provided for performing lottery processing related to internal winning of a winning combination and determining the lottery result, and the winning combination can be won regardless of the insertion of game media. In a certain control state, the winning probability of the replaying role in the second game is higher than the winning probability of the replaying role in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

With such a configuration, it is difficult to return to the first game (for example, a three-ply game) after performing the second game (for example, a two-ply game). In some cases, the game can be played more carefully. Moreover, even if the game takes a long time from the determination of the awarding of the privilege to the transition to a certain game state, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation.

Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated, and a state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is higher than that in the normal state.

Further, the above-mentioned "when the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous state" means "the first display is displayed in a certain state in the advantageous state." is displayed," and the above-mentioned "after the first display is displayed in the advantageous state, the execution of the second game is started. "when the second game is started" may mean "when the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed in a certain state in the advantageous state". Further, the above-mentioned "when the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous state, the count value is updated and the first display is displayed in the first game." The second display is configured to be able to be displayed" means that "when the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous state, the count value is updated to display the second display in the first game."

Further, the gaming machine (for example, slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 149) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "present invention 7-2") has operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 137 shown in FIG. 149). 139) and a control means (for example, a normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 154(b)) or an advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 154(b)) for shifting to a state ( For example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 151), and the operation information of the operation means (for example, operation navigation using the payout number indicator 127 shown in FIGS. 156 and 193, FIG. Information that can identify the stop position and stop order of each reel, such as operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in 200 etc., can be notified. is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to, and a specific counter (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 166, FIG. 200, etc.) regarding the advantageous state is provided, and each time a game is played in the advantageous state, the The count value of a specific counter can be updated, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is changed to the normal state, and the certain end condition is the A condition that is satisfied when the count value becomes a first specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games played after shifting to an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times), and is a bet on game media. A first game in which the number is a first number (for example, a three-coin bet game) and a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number (for example, a two-coin bet game) can be executed. wherein the second number is a number different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous for the player than the second game , and is configured to be able to start execution of a specific effect (for example, ED effect ed1 shown in FIG. 228) in the advantageous state, and when certain requirements are satisfied at the start of game execution, the game is the first game, the count value is updated and execution of the specific effect can be started in the first game, and when the game is started, the certain requirement is satisfied, if the game is the second game, the count value is updated so that the execution of the specific effect is not started in the second game. It is a game table that features. It should be noted that FIG. 228 is a diagram showing an outline of invention 7-2 of the present application.

According to the gaming machine according to Invention 7-2 of the present application, it is possible to inform the player that the game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player has been played in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Incidentally, the gaming machine according to Invention 7-2 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the certain requirement is satisfied, the game transitions to the second advantageous game state, and execution of the specific effect may be started on the condition of the transition.

Also, the certain requirement is that the second count value is a second specific value, and the first specific value and the second specific value are different values. good.

With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player that he or she has been playing a game that is disadvantageous (second game) in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player.

In addition, in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to a second advantageous gaming state (for example, the LMT state shown in FIG. 154, etc.), and the second advantageous gaming state is a certain state capable of informing the operation information. is a game state, the second advantageous game state is a game state to which the game can be shifted after the number of games played after shifting to the advantageous state reaches a certain number of times, and the second advantageous game state is the above It may be a game state in which it is possible to stay until the end of the advantageous state, and the specific effect may be an effect that can be executed in the second advantageous game state.

With such a configuration, by giving the player the impression that he or she has lost the number of games in an advantageous game state, it is possible to make the player carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in subsequent games. Also, it is possible to secure fairness between a player who is playing the first game correctly and a player who is playing the second game.

In addition, when the transition to the second advantageous gaming state occurs without the second game being performed after the transition to the advantageous state (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), the second advantageous state When the maximum number of executions of the first game in the gaming state is the first number of times, and the transition to the second advantageous gaming state occurs after the second game is played after transitioning to the advantageous state. (hereinafter referred to as "second case"), the maximum number of executions of the first game in the second advantageous gaming state may be the second number of times, and the The second number of times is a smaller number of times, and a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 149) is provided, and one of the plurality of types of display is , the display corresponding to the first number of times (hereinafter referred to as "first display"), and in the first case, the first display is displayed at the time of transition to the second advantageous gaming state. In the second case, the first display may be displayed when transitioning to the second advantageous game state.

With such a configuration, by giving the player the impression that he or she has lost the number of games in an advantageous game state, it is possible to make the player carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in subsequent games. Also, it is possible to secure fairness between a player who is playing the first game correctly and a player who is playing the second game.

In addition, it is configured to be able to shift to a first advantageous gaming state in the advantageous state, and the first advantageous gaming state is different from the second advantageous gaming state, and is capable of notifying the operation information. and one of the plurality of types of display is a display including an image indicating that the number of remaining games in the first advantageous gaming state is 0 (hereinafter referred to as "second display"), and when the second game is played in the first advantageous gaming state, the first advantageous gaming state ends without the second display being displayed. There may be

Further, when the second game is played in the advantageous state, the advantageous state may end without the specific effect being performed.

With such a configuration, the advantageous state may end without performing a specific effect, giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous game state, thereby reducing the number of games to be played in subsequent games. It is possible to make the player carefully select the number of bets on game media. Also, it is possible to secure fairness between a player who is playing the first game correctly and a player who is playing the second game.

Further, the specific effect may be an effect in which information advantageous to the player may be announced.

With such a configuration, the advantageous state may end without notification of information advantageous to the player. It is possible to allow the player to carefully select the number of bets on game media in subsequent games. Also, it is possible to secure fairness between a player who is playing the first game correctly and a player who is playing the second game.

In addition, it is configured to be able to start executing a certain freeze effect (for example, freeze effect fz1 shown in FIG. 229) in the advantageous state, and the specific effect is a effect related to the certain freeze effect. good too.

Further, display means (for example, effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 149) is provided, and the display means provides first display (for example, first display d1 shown in FIG. 227) and second display (for example, Means capable of displaying a first display d2) shown in FIG. 227, wherein the first display includes an image showing the number of remaining games in the advantageous state (for example, the numerical value 30 shown in FIG. 227). , and the second display is a display including an image indicating a certain number of remaining games (for example, the numerical value 29 shown in FIG. 227), and after the second game is played in the advantageous state, the When the first game is played, the second display may be displayed without displaying the first display.

With such a configuration, when returning from the second game to the first game, the fact that the player was playing a disadvantageous game (second game) is reported in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. It becomes possible to In addition, since the first advantageous gaming state may end without displaying the third display, the player is given the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous gaming state, and the third display is not displayed. The sudden display makes it possible to carefully select the number of bets on game media in subsequent games. Also, it is possible to secure fairness between a player who is playing the first game correctly and a player who is playing the second game.

In addition, a lottery means (for example, winning combination internal lottery processing (step S104) shown in FIG. 158) is provided for performing lottery processing related to internal winning of a winning combination and determining the lottery result, and the winning combination can be won regardless of the insertion of game media. In a certain control state, the winning probability of the replaying role in the second game is higher than the winning probability of the replaying role in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

With such a configuration, it is difficult to return to the first game (for example, a three-ply game) after performing the second game (for example, a two-ply game). In some cases, the game can be played more carefully. Moreover, even if the game takes a long time from the determination of the awarding of the privilege to the transition to a certain game state, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation.

Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated, and a state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is higher than that in the normal state.

Further, the gaming machine (for example, slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 149) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "present invention 7-3") has operating means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 137 shown in FIG. 149). 139) and a control means (for example, a normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 154(b)) or an advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 154(b)) for shifting to a state ( For example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 151), and the operation information of the operation means (for example, operation navigation using the payout number indicator 127 shown in FIGS. 156 and 193, FIG. Information that can identify the stop position and stop order of each reel, such as operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in 200 etc., can be notified. is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to, and a specific counter (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 166, FIG. 200, etc.) regarding the advantageous state is provided, and each time a game is played in the advantageous state, the The count value of a specific counter can be updated, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is changed to the normal state, and the certain end condition is the A condition that is satisfied when the count value becomes a first specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games played after shifting to an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times), and is a bet on game media. A first game in which the number is a first number (for example, a three-coin bet game) and a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number (for example, a two-coin bet game) can be executed. wherein the second number is a number different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous for the player than the second game , and is configured to be able to start executing a certain freeze effect (for example, the freeze effect fz1 shown in FIG. 229) in the advantageous state, and when certain requirements are met at the start of game execution, the When the game is the first game, the count value is updated and execution of the certain freeze effect can be started in the first game, and when the game is started, When the requirements are satisfied and the game is the second game, the count value is updated so that the execution of the certain freeze effect is not started in the second game. It is a game machine characterized by It should be noted that FIG. 229 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 7-3 of the present application.

According to the gaming machine according to Invention 7-3 of the present application, it is possible to inform the player that the game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player has been played in a manner that does not embarrass the player. In addition, since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Note that the gaming machine according to Invention 7-3 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the certain requirement is satisfied, the game transitions to the second advantageous game state, and execution of the specific effect may be started on the condition of the transition.

Also, the certain requirement is that the second count value is a second specific value, and the first specific value and the second specific value are different values. good.

With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player that he or she has been playing a game that is disadvantageous (second game) in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player.

Also, in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to a certain advantageous game state (hereinafter referred to as "second advantageous game state". For example, the LMT state shown in FIG. 154 etc.), and the second advantageous game The state is a certain game state in which the operation information can be notified, and the second advantageous game state is a game state to which the transition can be made after the number of games played after shifting to the advantageous state reaches a certain number of times. , the second advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which it is possible to stay until the end of the advantageous state, and the certain freeze effect is started in relation to the transition to the second advantageous gaming state. It may be a production that is

With such a configuration, by giving the player the impression that he or she has lost the number of games in an advantageous game state, it is possible to make the player carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in subsequent games. Also, it is possible to secure fairness between a player who is playing the first game correctly and a player who is playing the second game.

In addition, when the transition to the second advantageous gaming state occurs without the second game being performed after the transition to the advantageous state (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), the second advantageous state When the maximum number of executions of the first game in the gaming state is the first number of times, and the transition to the second advantageous gaming state occurs after the second game is played after transitioning to the advantageous state. (hereinafter referred to as "second case"), the maximum number of executions of the first game in the second advantageous gaming state may be the second number of times, and the The second number of times is a smaller number of times, and a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 149) is provided, and one of the plurality of types of display is , the display corresponding to the first number of times (hereinafter referred to as "first display"), and in the first case, the first display is displayed at the time of transition to the second advantageous gaming state. In the second case, the first display may be displayed when transitioning to the second advantageous game state.

With such a configuration, by giving the player the impression that he or she has lost the number of games in an advantageous game state, it is possible to make the player carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in subsequent games. Also, it is possible to secure fairness between a player who is playing the first game correctly and a player who is playing the second game.

In addition, it is configured to be able to shift to a first advantageous gaming state in the advantageous state, and the first advantageous gaming state is different from the second advantageous gaming state, and is capable of notifying the operation information. and one of the plurality of types of display is a display including an image indicating that the number of remaining games in the first advantageous gaming state is 0 (hereinafter referred to as "second display"), and when the second game is played in the first advantageous gaming state, the first advantageous gaming state ends without the second display being displayed. There may be

Further, when the second game is played in the advantageous state, the advantageous state may end without the certain freeze effect being performed.

With such a configuration, the advantageous state may end without performing a certain freeze effect, thereby giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous game state. It is possible to carefully select the number of bets for game media in . Also, it is possible to secure fairness between a player who is playing the first game correctly and a player who is playing the second game.

Also, in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to start execution of a specific effect (for example, ED effect ed1 shown in FIG. 228), and the certain freeze effect is an effect related to the specific effect. good.

Further, the specific effect may be an effect in which information advantageous to the player may be announced.

With such a configuration, the advantageous state may end without notification of information advantageous to the player. It is possible to allow the player to carefully select the number of bets on game media in subsequent games. Also, it is possible to secure fairness between a player who is playing the first game correctly and a player who is playing the second game.

Further, display means (for example, effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 149) is provided, and the display means provides first display (for example, first display d1 shown in FIG. 227) and second display (for example, Means capable of displaying a first display d2) shown in FIG. 227, wherein the first display includes an image showing the number of remaining games in the advantageous state (for example, the numerical value 30 shown in FIG. 227). , and the second display is a display including an image indicating a certain number of remaining games (for example, the numerical value 29 shown in FIG. 227), and after the second game is played in the advantageous state, the When the first game is played, the second display may be displayed without displaying the first display.

With such a configuration, when returning from the second game to the first game, the fact that the player was playing a disadvantageous game (second game) is reported in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. It becomes possible to In addition, since the first advantageous gaming state may end without displaying the third display, the player is given the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous gaming state, and the third display is not displayed. The sudden display makes it possible to carefully select the number of bets on game media in subsequent games. Also, it is possible to secure fairness between a player who is playing the first game correctly and a player who is playing the second game.

In addition, a lottery means (for example, winning combination internal lottery processing (step S104) shown in FIG. 158) is provided for performing lottery processing related to internal winning of a winning combination and determining the lottery result, and the winning combination can be won regardless of the insertion of game media. In a certain control state, the winning probability of the replaying role in the second game is higher than the winning probability of the replaying role in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

With such a configuration, it is difficult to return to the first game (for example, a three-ply game) after performing the second game (for example, a two-ply game). In some cases, the game can be played more carefully. Moreover, even if the game takes a long time from the determination of the awarding of the privilege to the transition to a certain game state, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation.

Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated, and a state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is higher than that in the normal state.

Further, the gaming machine (for example, slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 149) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "present invention 7-4") has operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 137 shown in FIG. 149). 139) and a control means (for example, a normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 154(b)) or an advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 154(b)) for shifting to a state ( For example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 151), and the operation information of the operation means (for example, operation navigation using the payout number indicator 127 shown in FIGS. 156 and 193, FIG. Information that can identify the stop position and stop order of each reel, such as operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in 200 etc., can be notified. is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to, and a specific counter (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 166, FIG. 200, etc.) regarding the advantageous state is provided, and each time a game is played in the advantageous state, the The count value of a specific counter can be updated, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is changed to the normal state, and the certain end condition is the This is a condition that is satisfied when the count value reaches a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games played after shifting to an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times), and the number of bets on the game medium is the first. A first game with one number (for example, a three-bet game) and a second game with a second number of bets on the game medium (for example, a two-bet game) can be executed. the second number is a number different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, In the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to the first advantageous game state (for example, AT2 state shown in FIG. 154 etc.), and a certain effect related to the end of the first advantageous game state (for example, shown in FIG. 230 An end effect fn1) can be executed, and when only the first game is played in the advantageous state, the state is shifted to the first advantageous game state and the certain effect is executed. When only the second game is played in the advantageous state, the certain effect is executed without shifting to the first advantageous game state. This game machine is characterized by: It should be noted that FIG. 230 is a diagram showing an outline of invention 7-4 of the present application.

According to the gaming machine according to the invention 7-4 of the present application, it is possible to inform the player that a game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player has been played in a manner that does not embarrass the player. In addition, since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the players by notifying that the game in which the second game is being played has ended in an advantageous state. In addition, by giving the player the impression that he has lost the number of games in an advantageous game state, it is possible to make the player carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in subsequent games.

Note that the gaming machine according to Invention 7-4 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 149) is provided, and the display means displays the number of difference between the game media inserted by the player and the game media acquired by the player. means capable of displaying a difference number display indicating the difference number, and when the difference number is less than 0, a display indicating 0 is displayed as the difference number display, and in the advantageous state, the second When only the second game is played, the expected value of the difference number is less than 0, and when only the second game is played in the advantageous state, the certain game is executed. Even if it is an effect, the difference number display may be displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure fairness between a player who is playing the first game correctly and a player who is playing the second game. In addition, by giving the player the impression that he has lost the number of games in an advantageous game state, it is possible to make the player carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in subsequent games.

Further, even when the first game is played after the second game is played in the advantageous state, the certain effect is executed without shifting to the first advantageous game state. There may be cases where

With such a configuration, a certain effect may be executed without shifting to the first advantageous game state, thereby giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous game state. , it is possible to carefully select the number of bets on game media in subsequent games. Also, it is possible to secure fairness between a player who is playing the first game correctly and a player who is playing the second game.

Also, in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to a second advantageous gaming state (for example, the LMT state shown in FIG. 154, etc.), and the second advantageous gaming state is different from the first advantageous gaming state. It is another advantageous game state, and when the first game is played after the second game is played in the advantageous state, the first game is played without transitioning to the first advantageous game state. It may be configured such that there is a case where the certain effect is executed after shifting to the second advantageous game state.

With such a configuration, the number of games may be lost in an advantageous game state by shifting to the second advantageous game state without shifting to the first advantageous game state and executing the end effect. By giving the player the impression that he/she is in a bad mood, the player is made to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in subsequent games, while a second advantageous game state is established when the player returns to the first game from the second game. Since the game may start, it is possible to give a privilege to the player who has returned to the first game, and to keep the desire to play.

Further, the above-mentioned "certain effect related to the end of the first advantageous gaming state" may be "certain effect related to the end of the advantageous state".

In addition, a lottery means (for example, winning combination internal lottery processing (step S104) shown in FIG. 158) is provided for performing lottery processing related to internal winning of a winning combination and determining the lottery result, and the winning combination can be won regardless of the insertion of game media. In a certain control state, the winning probability of the replaying role in the second game is higher than the winning probability of the replaying role in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

With such a configuration, it is difficult to return to the first game (for example, a three-ply game) after performing the second game (for example, a two-ply game). In some cases, the game can be played more carefully. Moreover, even if the game takes a long time from the determination of the awarding of the privilege to the transition to a certain game state, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation.

Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated, and a state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is higher than that in the normal state.

Further, the gaming machine (for example, slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 149) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "present invention 7-5") has operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 137 shown in FIG. 149). 139) and a control means (for example, a normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 154(b)) or an advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 154(b)) for shifting to a state ( For example, a main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 151) and a lottery means (for example, a winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 158) that performs lottery processing related to internal winning of a role and determines the lottery result. 156 and 193, operation navigation using the performance image display device 157 shown in FIG. 200, etc. , information that can identify the stop position and stop order of each reel), the advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and the advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 166, FIG. 200, etc.) is provided, and the count value of the specific counter can be updated each time a game is played in the advantageous state, The advantageous state is changed to the normal state when a certain termination condition is satisfied, and the certain termination condition is when the count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0). (For example, when the number of games played after shifting to an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times), the combination is a special game (for example, FIG. 154 (a) or FIG. 191 ( (a) special game state shown in FIG. 154), and is configured to be able to shift to a certain advantageous game state (for example, AT2 state shown in FIG. 154 etc.) in the advantageous state, and the certain advantageous state A certain effect (for example, end effect fn1 shown in FIG. 231) relating to the end of the game state can be executed, and the execution of the end effect can be started by shifting to the certain advantageous game state in the advantageous state. When a game is played in the advantageous state and the special role is internally won, the certain effect is performed without transitioning to the certain advantageous gaming state in the advantageous state. The gaming machine is characterized by being configured so that execution can be started. It should be noted that FIG. 231 is a diagram showing an outline of invention 7-5 of the present application.

According to the game machine according to the invention 7-5 of the present application, even if the advantageous state is over without arranging the symbols related to the special role, by making the player feel that he has shifted to a certain advantageous game state, It is possible to reduce feelings of regret and impatience. In addition, since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Incidentally, the gaming machine according to Invention 7-5 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 149) is provided, and the display means displays the number of difference between the game media inserted by the player and the game media acquired by the player. means capable of displaying a difference number display indicating the difference number, and when the difference number is less than 0, a display indicating 0 is displayed as the difference number display. Even in the certain effect executed without shifting to the advantageous game state, the difference number display may be displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure fairness between a player who is playing the first game correctly and a player who is playing the second game. Also, by making it possible to emphasize the small number of winnings, the player is given the impression of losing money, and can be made to carefully select the number of bets on game media in subsequent games. In addition, since the player who is playing the game correctly displays a relatively large number of winnings, it is possible to satisfy such a player's sense of superiority.

In addition, in the certain performance that is executed in the advantageous state without transitioning to the certain advantageous gaming state, even if the special role is internally won, the special role is not notified. may be configured to

With such a configuration, it may be possible to satisfy the sense of superiority of advanced users.

Further, the above-mentioned "certain effect related to the end of the certain advantageous gaming state" may be "certain effect related to the end of the advantageous state".

Further, a first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is a first number and a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number can be executed. is a number different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the first game is a game more advantageous for the player than the second game, and the combination is a game medium Including a replay role that can be played without input, in a certain control state, the winning probability of the replay role in the second game is higher than the probability of winning the replay role in the first game. The winning probability may be higher than the probability.

With such a configuration, it is difficult to return to the first game (for example, a three-ply game) after performing the second game (for example, a two-ply game). In some cases, the game can be played more carefully. Moreover, even if the game takes a long time from the determination of the awarding of the privilege to the transition to a certain game state, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation.

Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated, and a state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is higher than that in the normal state.

Further, when the second game is played in the advantageous state and the special role is internally won, the certain effect is performed without transitioning to the certain advantageous gaming state in the advantageous state. It may be configured to start execution.

In addition, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 149) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "the present invention 7-6") is a game machine in which the number of game media bets is the first number. One game (for example, a three-bet game) and a second game (for example, a two-bet game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number can be executed, and the second game The number is a number different from the first number, and in a certain state, the first game is a more advantageous game for the player than the second game, and over a plurality of games A certain effect (for example, an interlocking effect shown in FIG. 232) can be executed, the certain effect is a effect including a plurality of scene effects, and one of the plurality of scene effects is selected. The scene production is the production of the first scene (for example, the first scene shown in FIG. 232), and the production of one of the plurality of scene productions is the production of the second scene (for example, the 232), and when the execution of the first game is started after the game in which the first scene is produced, the first game is performed in the first game. Execution of the second scene effect can be started, and when the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the first scene effect is performed, the second game The amusement machine is characterized in that it is configured so that the execution of the second scene effect is not started at. It should be noted that FIG. 232 is a diagram showing an outline of invention 7-6 of the present application.

According to the gaming machine according to the invention 7-6 of the present application, it is possible to inform the player that the game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player has been played in a manner that does not embarrass the player.

Note that the gaming machine according to Invention 7-6 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the second game is performed after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, and then the execution of the first game is started, in the first game It may be configured such that execution of the second scene effect can be started.

With such a configuration, the player who has returned from the second game to the first game can be entertained by seeing the correct flow of presentation.

Further, when the second game is performed after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, and the execution of the first game is started after that, the second game is performed in the first game. It may be configured such that the execution of another certain effect can be started without starting the execution of the effect of the scene.

With such a configuration, by suddenly executing a different effect, the effect strongly impresses the player, and the player who has returned to the first game is encouraged to play the first game again. You can double check what you were doing.

Further, when the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, the execution of the production of the second scene is not started in the second game. Execution of at least a part of the effect of the first scene may be started immediately.

With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player that he or she has been playing a game that is disadvantageous (second game) in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, by repeating the effect, the player can be made aware that the second game is being played by giving the player a sense of incompatibility. In addition, by attracting the player's attention by making the player think that it is a rare effect in which the same effect is repeated, it may be possible to make the player pay more attention to the number of game media to bet.

In addition, operation information of the operation means (for example, operation navigation using the payout number display device 127 shown in FIGS. 156 and 193, operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. information that can identify the stop position and stop order), the advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and a specific counter regarding the advantageous state ( 166, 200, etc.), and is configured so that the count value of the specific counter can be updated each time a game is played in the advantageous state. It is configured to transition from the advantageous state to the normal state when satisfied, and the certain end condition is when the count value reaches a first specific value (e.g., 0) (e.g., , the number of games played after shifting to an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times), and the above-mentioned "execution of the first game after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed is started, the execution of the second scene effect can be started in the first game," means "the game in which the first scene effect is performed When the execution of the first game is started later, the first count value is updated and execution of the second scene effect can be started in the first game, That is, the above-mentioned "when the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, the production of the second scene is performed in the second game. Execution is not started," means that 'when execution of the second game is started after the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed, the count value is set to It may be configured such that it is updated so that execution of the second scene effect is not started in the second game.

With such a configuration, since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game. It becomes possible.

In addition, a lottery means (for example, winning combination internal lottery processing (step S104) shown in FIG. 158) is provided for performing lottery processing related to internal winning of a winning combination and determining the lottery result, and the winning combination can be won regardless of the insertion of game media. In a certain control state, the winning probability of the replaying role in the second game is higher than the winning probability of the replaying role in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

With such a configuration, it is difficult to return to the first game (for example, a three-ply game) after performing the second game (for example, a two-ply game). In some cases, the game can be played more carefully. Moreover, even if the game takes a long time from the determination of the awarding of the privilege to the transition to a certain game state, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation.

Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated, and a state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is higher than that in the normal state.

In addition, a first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is a first number (for example, a three-bet game) and a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number (for example, a bet on two game), the second number is a number different from the first number, and in a certain state, the first game is more likely than the second game It is an advantageous game for the player, and a certain effect (for example, the interlocking effect shown in FIG. 211 and the interlocking effect shown in FIG. 212(D)) can be executed over a plurality of games, and 211 is an effect including the effect of a plurality of scenes, and the effect of one scene among the effect of the plurality of scenes is the first scene (for example, the "enemy attack" scene shown in FIG. 211, ("enemy attack" scene shown in FIG. 212(D)), and when execution of the first game is started after the game in which the first scene is produced, the first game is executed. In one game, the effect of the first scene can be continuously executed, and when the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed The amusement machine may be characterized in that the first scene is not continuously executed in the second game.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to inform the player that the game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player has been played in a manner that does not embarrass the player.

Further, when the second game is performed after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, and the execution of the first game is started after that, the second game is performed in the first game. It may be configured such that the execution of the rendering of one scene can be started.

Further, when the second game is performed after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, and the execution of the first game is started after that, the second game is performed in the first game. It may be configured such that the execution of another certain effect can be started without starting the execution of the effect of one scene.

Further, when the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, the execution of the production of the second scene is not started in the second game. Execution of at least a part of the effect of the first scene may be started immediately.

Further, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 149) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "the present invention 7-7") has operating means (for example, the stop buttons 137 to 137 shown in FIG. 149). 139) and a control means (for example, a normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 154(b)) or an advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 154(b)) for shifting to a state ( For example, a main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 151), a first game (for example, a three-bet game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number, and a game medium is configured to be able to execute a second game (for example, a two-coin bet game) in which the number of bets is a second number, the second number is a number different from the first number, In the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous for the player than the second game, and the operation information of the operation means (for example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 156 or FIG. 193) , operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, has a specific counter (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 166, FIG. 200, etc.) regarding the advantageous state, and the game is played in the advantageous state is performed, the count value of the specific counter (hereinafter referred to as "specific count value") can be updated. state, and the certain end condition is when the count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0) 233, 167, 216, etc.) is provided, and each time a game is played in the advantageous state, The count value of the certain counter (hereinafter referred to as "a certain count value") is configured to be able to be updated, and when the certain count value becomes a certain value (for example, 0), the player 233 or the AT1 state shown in FIG. 216, etc.), and when the first game is played in the advantageous state includes the specific count value and the both count values of the count value are configured to be updatable, and when the second game is played in the advantageous state, one of the specific count value and the certain count value The gaming machine is characterized in that only the specific count value is configured to be updatable. It should be noted that FIG. 233 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 7-7 of the present application.

According to the amusement machine according to Invention 7-7 of the present application, since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game is fair. can be guaranteed. In addition, by giving preferential treatment to players who correctly played the first game, it can be expected that players who did not correctly play the game will be corrected.

It should be noted that the gaming machine according to invention 7-7 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the first game is played after the second game is played in the advantageous state, the advantageous state may shift to the specific advantageous state. good too.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give a privilege to a player who has returned from the second game to the first game, so that the player's willingness to play can be maintained.

Further, when the number of times the second game is played in the advantageous state exceeds a certain number of times, even if the first game is played in the advantageous state, there is no case of shifting to the specific advantageous state. It may be configured as

With such a configuration, while a player who miscounts the number of games is allowed to play the second game, a player who maliciously plays the second game (for example, looking for a strategy) By not giving favors to players who play irregular games such as the following, preferential treatment is given to players who are playing the first game correctly, and players who are playing the second game are corrected. can be expected.

Further, in said advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to a first advantageous gaming state, wherein said first advantageous gaming state is a certain advantageous gaming state in which said operation information can be notified, and said specific advantageous state. may be a state related to the transition to the first advantageous game state.

Also, in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to a second advantageous gaming state (for example, the LMT state shown in FIG. 154, etc.), and the second advantageous gaming state is a state in which the operation information can be notified. is an advantageous gaming state, and when the specific count value becomes a third value (for example, 20), it is configured to be able to shift to the second advantageous gaming state, and the specific value and the The third value is another value, and even if the number of times the second game is played in the advantageous state exceeds the certain number of times, the first game is played in the advantageous state. In some cases, the second advantageous gaming state may be entered before the advantageous state ends.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give a privilege to a player who has returned from the second game to the first game, so that the player's willingness to play can be maintained.

In addition, a lottery means (for example, winning combination internal lottery processing (step S104) shown in FIG. 158) is provided for performing lottery processing related to internal winning of a winning combination and determining the lottery result, and the winning combination can be won regardless of the insertion of game media. In a certain control state, the winning probability of the replaying role in the second game is higher than the winning probability of the replaying role in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

With such a configuration, it is difficult to return to the first game (for example, a three-ply game) after performing the second game (for example, a two-ply game). In some cases, the game can be played more carefully. Moreover, even if the game takes a long time from the determination of the awarding of the privilege to the transition to a certain game state, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation.

Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated, and a state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is higher than that in the normal state.

Further, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 149) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "present invention 7-8") has operating means (for example, the stop buttons 137 to 137 shown in FIG. 149). 139) and a control means (for example, a normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 154(b)) or an advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 154(b)) for shifting to a state ( For example, a main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 151) and display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display (for example, effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 149), wherein the operation means Operation information (for example, operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 156 and 193, operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. The advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and a specific counter (for example, FIG. 166 or 200, etc.), and is configured to be able to update the count value of the specific counter each time a game is played in the advantageous state, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, It is configured to transition from the advantageous state to the normal state, and the certain end condition is when the count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, after transition to the advantageous state When the number of games reaches the upper limit number of times), a first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, a three-bet game), and a number of bets on the game medium is A second game that is a second number (for example, a two-coin bet game) is configured to be executable, the second number is a number different from the first number, and in the advantageous state , the first game is a game more advantageous for the player than the second game, and in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to one of a plurality of advantageous game states. One of the plurality of advantageous game states is the first advantageous game state (for example, the first advantageous game state shown in FIG. 234 and the AT2 state shown in FIG. 154, etc.). , one of the plurality of advantageous game states is a second advantageous game state (for example, the first advantageous game state shown in FIG. 234 and the judge state shown in FIG. 154, etc.), The first advantageous gaming state is better than the second advantageous gaming state is an advantageous state for the player, and after the first advantageous gaming state ends, it is configured to be able to shift to the second advantageous gaming state, and one of the plurality of types of display is , a display displayed at the end of the first advantageous gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "first display"). For example, it is the first display d1) shown in FIG. 234, and one of the plurality of types of display is a display corresponding to the second advantageous gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "second display"). For example, the second display d2) shown in FIG. (Hereinafter referred to as "third display". For example, the third display d1 shown in FIG. 234), and when the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed , when the count value is updated and the second display can be displayed in the first game, and the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed; is configured so that the count value is updated and the third display can be displayed in the game,

It is a game machine characterized by FIG. 234 is a diagram showing an outline of invention 7-8 of the present application.

According to the amusement machine according to Invention 7-8 of the present application, it is possible to inform the player that a game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player has been played in a manner that does not embarrass the player. Since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure fairness between the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, while the first game is correctly played, the player can comfortably enjoy the game in the next game state.

It should be noted that the gaming machine according to inventions 7-8 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, the second display may be a display regarding the start of the second advantageous gaming state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to enjoy the game in the next game state comfortably while the first game is correctly played.

Further, the second display is a display configured by displaying a plurality of scenes, the display of one scene among the display of the plurality of scenes is the display of the first scene, and the display of the plurality of scenes is a display of the first scene. The display of one of the scene displays is the display of the second scene, the display of the first scene is the display started by an operation related to the progress of the game, and the display of the first scene. The display of the second scene may be a display that is started by another certain operation related to the progress of the game, which is performed subsequent to the certain operation.

With such a configuration, it is possible to enjoy the game in the next game state comfortably while the first game is correctly played.

In addition, a lottery means (for example, winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 158) is provided for performing a lottery process for internal winning of a combination and determining the lottery result, and the display of the second scene is the same as that of the second scene. The display mode may change in relation to the lottery result in the game in which the display of the second display is started.

With such a configuration, it is possible to enjoy the game in the next game state comfortably while the first game is correctly played.

In addition, a lottery means (for example, winning combination internal lottery processing (step S104) shown in FIG. 158) is provided for performing lottery processing related to internal winning of a winning combination and determining the lottery result, and the winning combination can be won regardless of the insertion of game media. In a certain control state, the winning probability of the replaying role in the second game is higher than the winning probability of the replaying role in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

With such a configuration, it is difficult to return to the first game (for example, a three-ply game) after performing the second game (for example, a two-ply game). In some cases, the game can be played more carefully. Moreover, even if the game takes a long time from the determination of the awarding of the privilege to the transition to a certain game state, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation.

Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated, and a state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is higher than that in the normal state.

Further, the gaming machine (for example, slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 149) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "present invention 7-9") has operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 137 shown in FIG. 149). 139), a lottery means for performing a lottery process for internal winning of a combination and determining the lottery result (for example, the winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 158), and a normal state (for example, FIG. 154(b)). 154) and an advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 154(b)) (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 151); A gaming machine provided with a privilege giving means (for example, AT number addition lottery of AT2 state processing A shown in FIG. 171) capable of giving a privilege related to the advantageous state in an advantageous state, and a certain counter (for example, FIG. 235, FIG. 167, FIG. 216, etc.), and the count value of the certain counter (hereinafter referred to as "certain count value") can be updated each time a game is played. , In the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to a certain advantageous gaming state (for example, BB state shown in FIG. After the BB internal winning or the right to shift to the AT1 state) is acquired, a winning notification suggesting acquisition of the right (for example, bonus confirmation notification bk1 shown in FIG. 235, bonus confirmation shown in FIGS. 216, 218, etc.) Execution of display (display of an image containing the characters "Bonus confirmed!") is started, and the right to shift to a certain advantageous gaming state includes a first symbol (for example, a symbol 152 (a) and Seven 1 symbol shown in FIG. ) and Seven 2 symbols shown in FIG. is a right that is more advantageous to the player, and in the state where the first right has been acquired after the execution of the winning notification has started, the first result is the result of the internal winning. When it is determined, the execution of the first notification can be started, and after the execution of the winning notification is started and in the state where the second right has been acquired, the internal winning The second result is as a result of When it is determined, the execution of the second notification can be started, and the first result is the first symbol when the operation means is operated according to the content of the first notification. It is the result displayed (for example, displayed on the activated line (or winning line other than the activated line) shown in FIG. 235 or FIG. 152(b)), and the second result is the result of the second notification. When the operation means is operated according to the content, the second symbol is displayed (for example, it is displayed on the activated line (or winning line other than the activated line) shown in FIG. 235 or FIG. 152(b)). As a result, the certain count value in a certain state from the state in which the first right is acquired to the certain advantageous game state after the execution of the winning notification is started. becomes a certain value (for example, 0), the state in which the first right is acquired changes to the state in which the second right is acquired. It is a play table that It should be noted that FIG. 235 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 7-9 of the present application.

According to the gaming machine according to Invention 7-9 of the present application, even if the game takes a long time from the determination of awarding to the transition to a certain game state, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation.

Note that the gaming machines according to Inventions 7 to 9 of the present application are not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the state in which the first right is acquired changes to the state in which the second right is acquired, the first notification may not be executed.

In addition, a first game in which the number of bets on the game media is the first number (for example, a three-bet game) and a second game in which the number of bets on the game media is the second number (for example, two betting game), wherein the second number is a number different from the first number, and in the advantageous state (or/and the normal state), more than the second game Also, the first game is a game more advantageous to the player, and the first game is performed after the execution of the winning notification has been started and in the state where the first right has been acquired. If the count value is updatable, the second game is played after the execution of the winning notification has been started and the first right has been acquired. is performed, the certain count value may not be updated.

With such a configuration, since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game. It becomes possible. In addition, by giving preferential treatment to a player who has correctly played the first game, it can be expected that the player who has not played the game correctly will correct the game method. Moreover, even if the game takes a long time from the determination of the awarding of the privilege to the transition to a certain game state, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation.

In addition, operation information of the operation means (for example, operation navigation using the payout number display device 127 shown in FIGS. 156 and 193, operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. information that can identify the stop position and stop order), the advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and a specific counter regarding the advantageous state ( For example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 166, FIG. 200, etc.) is provided, and the count value of the specific counter (hereinafter referred to as “specific count value”) is updated each time a game is played in the advantageous state. The advantageous state is changed to the normal state when a certain termination condition is satisfied, and the certain termination condition is that the specific count value is a specific value. (e.g., 0) (e.g., when the number of games played after shifting to an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times), the certain counter is a condition different from the specific counter. is a certain counter relating to said advantageous state, said certain count value is a value that can be updated each time a game is played in said advantageous state, and when said first game is played in said advantageous state is configured so that both count values of the specific count value and the certain count value can be updated, and when the second game is played in the advantageous state, the specific count value Of the count value and the certain count value, only the specific count value may be configured to be updatable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure fairness between a player who is playing the first game correctly and a player who is playing the second game. In addition, by giving preferential treatment to a player who has correctly played the first game, it can be expected that the player who has not played the game correctly will correct the game method. Moreover, even if the game takes a long time from the determination of the awarding of the privilege to the transition to a certain game state, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation.

Further, the combination includes a replay combination that can be played without inserting a game medium, and in a certain control state, the winning probability of the replay combination in the first game is higher than the winning probability of the replay combination. The winning probability of the replay combination in the second game may be higher.

With such a configuration, it is difficult to return to the first game (for example, a three-ply game) after performing the second game (for example, a two-ply game). In some cases, the game can be played more carefully. Moreover, even if the game takes a long time from the determination of the awarding of the privilege to the transition to a certain game state, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation.

Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the specific count value can be updated, and a state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is higher than that in the normal state.

[Embodiment 7]
A slot machine according to Embodiment 7 of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. In order to avoid duplication of explanation, in principle only the configuration different from that of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment will be explained. In principle, FIGS. 236 to 244 are used only for the explanation of the seventh embodiment, and even if overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the description of the seventh embodiment 244 has priority.

<AT2 state processing A>
First, the AT2 state processing A according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 236(a). FIG. 236(a) is a flow chart showing the flow of the AT2 state process A according to the seventh embodiment, and corresponds to the AT2 state process A according to the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. 171 above.

In the AT2 state process A according to the seventh embodiment, steps S1451 to S1453 are added to the AT2 state process A according to the sixth embodiment described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in step S1451, it is determined whether the LMT standby flag is off or on, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S1452, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1453. In step S1452, AT number addition lottery 1 is performed using the lottery value corresponding to "LMT standby flag off" in the lottery table shown in FIG. On the other hand, in step S1453, in the lottery table shown in FIG. 236(b), the lottery value corresponding to "LMT standby flag ON" is used to perform AT count addition lottery 2, and then the process proceeds to step S1402.

Thus, in this example, the number of AT-added games in the AT2 state is varied according to the state of the LMT standby flag. Specifically, when the LMT standby flag is off, the number of AT-added games is selected in the range of 0G to 100G according to the internally elected role, but when the LMT standby flag is on, the internally elected Select the number of AT-added games in the range of 0G to 10G according to the role. That is, in the AT2 state, when the LMT standby flag is on (when shifting from the AT2 state to the LMT state), the AT is faster than when the LMT standby flag is off (when not shifting from the AT2 state to the LMT state). It is configured so that the number of additional games is reduced.

<Judge status processing B>
Next, judgment state processing B according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 237(a). FIG. 237(a) is a flow chart showing the flow of the judgment state process B according to the seventh embodiment, and corresponds to the judgment state process B according to the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. 179 above.

In the judgment state process B according to the seventh embodiment, steps S2251 to S2253 are added to the judgment state process B according to the sixth embodiment described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in step S2251, it is determined whether or not the correction condition is satisfied. necessary), the process proceeds to step S2252.

Here, the determination of whether or not the correction conditions are satisfied in step S2251 (correction condition determination) is performed in the following procedure. In the AT2 initial number lottery of step S2202, one of the AT2 initial numbers specified in the AT2 initial number lottery table shown in FIG. 237(b) is selected. Subsequently, in the correction condition determination in step S2251, the value (X) of the high navigation state counter at the time of the determination is acquired, and from the value X of the high navigation state counter, the AT2 selected in the AT2 initial number lottery in step S2202 Subtract the initial number (Y). If the value (XY) after the subtraction is equal to or less than the first determination value (100 in this example), it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied.

In addition, in the correction condition determination of step S2251, the difference number of sheets (A) at the time of the determination is acquired, and from the difference number of sheets (A), the AT2 initial number of times (Y) selected in the AT2 initial number lottery of step S2202 corresponds. Subtract the expected number of copies (B). If the subtracted value (AB) is less than or equal to the second determination value (1500 in this example), it is also determined that the correction condition is satisfied.

In step S2252, the AT2 correction value is set in the effect state counter, and in the next step S2253, the LMT standby flag is set to ON, and then the process proceeds to step S2204. Here, the AT correction value in step S2252 is calculated by adding a certain value (20 in this example) to the AT2 initial count (Y) selected in the AT2 initial count lottery in step S2202. Therefore, for example, when the value (X) of the high navigation state counter at the time of correction condition determination is 100 and the AT2 initial number of times (Y) selected by the AT2 initial number lottery is 30, the correction condition is satisfied. At step S2252, 50 (=AT2 initial number of times (Y) 30+20 selected in the AT2 initial number lottery) is set as an AT2 correction value.

In the judgment state process B according to the seventh embodiment, a lottery value (number of pullback G) is set in the effect state counter of the pullback state in step S2206. The degree of expectation for the pullback is higher when the lottery value (number of pullback Gs) is 1G than when the number of pullbacks is 2 to 9G.

<AT2 state processing B>
Next, with reference to FIG. 238, AT2 state processing B according to the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing the flow of AT2 state processing B according to the seventh embodiment, and corresponds to the AT2 state processing B according to the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. 180 above.

In the AT2 state process B according to the seventh embodiment, steps S2351 to S2353 are added to the AT2 state process B according to the sixth embodiment described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in step S2351, it is determined whether the LMT standby flag is off or on, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S2302, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S2352. At step S2352, the effect state counter is set to the LMT initial value+1, and at the next step S2353, the LMT state is set to the effect state, and then the process proceeds to step S2306.

Thus, in this example, in the judge state (judgment state processing B shown in FIG. 237), when the AT2 state is set in the effect state and the LMT standby flag is set to ON, from the AT2 state It is configured to transition to the LMT state.

<Pullback state processing B>
Next, with reference to FIG. 239(a), the pullback state process B according to the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 239(a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the pulled-back state process B according to the seventh embodiment, and corresponds to the pulled-back state process B according to the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. 181 above.

In the pulled-back state process B according to the seventh embodiment, steps S2451 to S2453 are added to the pulled-back state process B according to the sixth embodiment described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in step S2451, it is determined whether or not the correction condition is satisfied. necessary), the process proceeds to step S2452. Note that the correction condition determination (determining whether or not the correction condition is satisfied) executed in step S2451 is the same as step S2251 of the judgment state process B described with reference to FIG. are omitted.

In step S2452, the AT2 correction value is set in the effect state counter, and in the next step S2453, the LMT standby flag is set to ON, and then the process proceeds to step S2404.

FIG. 239(b) is a diagram showing a transition example of the AT state in the high navigation state. FIG. 239(b)(1) shows a typical AT state transition example, in which the AT1 state (20G)→AT2 state (30G to 100G) is shifted in order.

On the other hand, FIG. 239(b)(2) shows another example of transition of the AT state, AT1 state (20G) → judge state → AT2 state (30G to 100G) → pullback state → AT2 state (10G). This is an example of moving in order. In this example, the AT2 state, which has been shifted from the pullback state, is more disadvantageous to the player than the AT1 state. It should be noted that the number of games in the AT2 state after transition from the pullback state is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, 10G to 50G.

Also, FIG. 239(b)(3) shows another example of transition of the AT state, AT1 state (20G) → judge state → AT2 state (30G to 100G) → pullback state → AT3 state (10G). This is an example of moving in order. In this example, the AT state shifted from the pullback state is the AT3 state different from the AT1 state and the AT2 state, and is more disadvantageous to the player than the AT1 state. It should be noted that the number of games in the AT3 state after transition from the pullback state is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, 10G to 50G.

<Specific examples of various productions, various displays, etc.>
Next, using FIGS. 240 to 244, specific examples of various effects, various displays, etc. executed by the slot machine according to the seventh embodiment will be described. 240 to 244 are timing charts showing the flow of effects, and show the effect modes of the effects to be executed in association with the timing charts.

<AT2 state → Judge state → Pull back state → Low navigation state>
FIG. 240(a) is a diagram showing the flow of presentation when the presentation state shifts in the order of AT2 state→judgment state→pullback state in the high navigation state, and then shifts to the normal state in the low navigation state.

Game R328 is a game in which the number of remaining games is 328 in the high navigation state and the number of remaining games is 2 in the AT2 state. In this game R328, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used, and the effect state is the AT2 state. , AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, operation navigation suggesting a stop operation (in this example, display of "2-1-3") is executed, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (effect state counter ) is 2, the display including the image indicating the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST2G") is executed.

The following game R327 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 327 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 1. In this game R327, as in the game R328, the AT2 effect is executed and the operation navigation is executed. display of an image containing characters "LAST1G").

The following game R326 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 326 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0. In this game R326, similar to the games R328 to R327, the AT2 effect is executed and the operation navigation is executed. In the example, the display of an image including characters "LAST0G") is executed.

In addition, in this game R326, the effect image display device 157 is used when a certain condition is established (acceptance of the third stop operation in this example). , the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is displayed, and the result display 1 in the AT2 state (for example, display of the number of acquired game media) is executed, while the remaining number of games in the AT2 state ( The display including the image showing the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST0G") and the display of the operation navigation are erased.

The following game R325 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 325 and the number of remaining games in the judge state shifted from the AT2 state is 9. In this game R325, the effect image display device 157 is used until a certain condition is established (in this example, until the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted (immediately after BET, etc.)). state, the judge effect corresponding to the start of the judge state is started, and since the number of remaining games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 10, the number of games (the effect state counter count value) (in this example, display of an image including the characters "LAST10G").

After that, when a certain condition is established in this game R325 (in this example, acceptance of pressing operation of the start lever 135), the effect image display device 157 is used to change the effect state to the judgment state. , the judge effect corresponding to the judge state is executed, and since the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 9, an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, display of an image including the characters "LAST9G") is executed.

Games R315 to R314 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 315 to 314, and the number of remaining games in the withdrawal state shifted from the judge state is 1 to 0. In the games R315 to R314, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the operation of pressing the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to change the effect state from the judge state. Since the state has shifted to the pullback state, the normal screen (pullback) corresponding to the pullback state is displayed. Further, after the game R314 is finished, the pullback state of the high navigation state ends, the state shifts to the normal state of the low navigation state, and the effect image display device 157 is used to display the normal screen ( normal) is displayed.

At least part of the display mode of the normal screen (normal) may be the same as the display mode of the normal screen (pullback), or may be entirely different from the display mode of the normal screen (pullback). Moreover, when displaying a screen in the same display mode, it is preferable that the probability that the screen is displayed in the pullback state is higher than the probability that the screen is displayed in the low navigation state.

<AT2 state → LMT state → low navigation state>
FIG. 240(b) is a diagram showing the flow of presentation when the presentation state transitions in order from the AT2 state to the LMT state in the high navigation state and then transitions to the normal state in the low navigation state.

Game R69 is a game in which the number of remaining games is 69 in the high navigation state and the number of remaining games is 0 in the AT2 state. In this game R69, as in the previous games R71 to R70, the AT2 effect is executed and the operation navigation is executed. (In this example, display of an image including characters "LAST0G") is executed.

In addition, in this game R69, the effect image display device 157 is used when a certain condition is established (acceptance of the third stop operation in this example). , the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is displayed, and the result display 1 in the AT2 state (for example, display of the number of acquired game media) is executed, while the remaining number of games in the AT2 state ( The display including the image showing the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST0G") and the display of the operation navigation are erased.

Game R68 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 68 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the AT2 state is 19. In this game R68, the effect state is changed from the AT2 state to the LMT state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is established (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Since the transition is made, an ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and operation navigation suggesting a stop operation (in this example, display of "2-1-3") is executed, and LMT is performed. Since the total number of games in the state is 20 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 20, the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the effect state counter display (in this example, display of an image including the characters "20/20 more") is executed. It should be noted that the filled operation navigation indicates that the stop operation has not yet been performed at the same timing.

After that, when a certain condition is established in the game R68 (accepting the third stop operation in this example), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the effect state because the effect state is the LMT state. An ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and since the total number of games in the LMT state is 20 and the remaining number of games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 19, the LMT state is executed. and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter). there is Note that the flow of effects from game R67 to game R50 is almost the same, so the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Game R49 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 49 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0. In this game R49, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the effect state because the effect state is the LMT state. , an ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and since the total number of games in the LMT state is 20 and the remaining number of games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 0, the LMT and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter). ing.

After that, when a certain condition is established in this game R49 (acceptance of the third stop operation in this example), the effect image display device 157 is used as the final game in the LMT state. While executing the display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state and executing the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, the display of the number of acquired game media, the number of games in the AT2 state, etc.), the LMT state The display including the image indicating the number of remaining games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "0/20 left") and the display of the operation navigation are erased. Further, after the game R49 ends, the LMT state of the high navigation state ends, the state shifts to the normal state of the low navigation state, and the effect image display device 157 is used to display a normal screen ( normal) is displayed.

In this example, after the second advantageous game state (AT2 state in this example) is completed, it is configured to be able to shift to a fourth advantageous game state (in this example, judge state or pullback state). After the end of the third advantageous game state (LMT state in this example), it is configured to shift to a normal state (low navigation state in this example), and the effect in the second advantageous game state (this example Then, the mode of AT2 effect) is a mode different from the mode of the effect (in this example, ED effect) in the third advantageous game state.

According to this example, the game state that can be expected to be advantageous is easy to understand, so that the player can play the game with a sense of expectation.

<AT2 state → Judge state → Pull back state → AT2 state>
FIG. 241(a) is a diagram showing the flow of the effect when the effect state shifts in the order of AT2 state→judgment state→pull-back state→AT2 state in the high navigation state, using FIG. 240(a). It shows the continuation of the explained production.

Game R315 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 315, and the number of remaining games in the pullback state shifted from the judge state is 1. This is a game that shifts to the AT2 state from the next game on because an internal lottery is won in 3). In this game R315, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to change the effect state from the judge state to the pullback state. Since the transition has been made, the normal screen (pullback) corresponding to the pullback state is displayed.

The following game R314 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 314 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state shifted from the pullback state is 9. In this game R314, the effect image display device 157 is used until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted (immediately after BET, etc.)), the effect state is changed from the judge state to AT2. state, the AT2 effect corresponding to the start of the AT2 state is started. (In this example, display of an image including the characters "50G") is executed.

After that, when a certain condition is established in this game R314 (in this example, acceptance of pressing operation of the start lever 135), the effect image display device 157 is used to confirm that the effect state is the AT2 state. , the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, and since the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is 49, an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, display of an image including the characters "LAST49G") is executed.

In this example, when the withdrawal state is shifted to the AT state, the state is shifted to the AT2 state, which is more advantageous for the player than the AT1 state. Although illustration is omitted, if a 3-coin bet game is performed after a 2-coin bet game is performed in the pullback state, the state is not shifted to the AT2 state but is shifted to another high navigation state (for example, LMT state). sometimes. Also, although not shown, if the two-coin bet game is continued in the pullback state, the high navigation state may end without shifting to the AT2 state and shift to the low navigation state.

<AT2 state → LMT state → low navigation state → normal state → final announcement state → AT1 state>
In FIG. 241(b), in the high navigation state, the production state shifts in the order of AT2 state→LMT state, then shifts to the normal state of the low navigation state, shifts again to the high navigation state, and the production state changes from the normal state to the normal state. FIG. 240B is a diagram showing the flow of the effect in the case of shifting in order from the fixed notification state to the AT1 state, and shows the continuation of the effect explained with reference to FIG. 240(b).

In this example, after shifting to the normal state of the low navigation state, it shifts to the high navigation state again, and the production state shifts in the order of the normal state, the fixed announcement state, and the AT1 state.

Game R658 is a game in which the number of remaining games is 658 in the high navigation state and the number of remaining games is 19 in the AT1 state shifted from the final announcement state. In this game R658, the effect image display device 157 is used until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received (immediately after BET, etc.)), the effect state is changed from the final notification state to the Since the state has shifted to the AT1 state, the AT1 effect corresponding to the start of the AT1 state is started, and since the number of remaining games in the AT1 state before the update (the count value of the effect state counter) is 20, the number of games. A display including an image indicating (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, displaying an image including the characters “20G”) is executed.

After that, when a certain condition is established in this game R658 (in this example, acceptance of pressing operation of the start lever 135), the effect image display device 157 is used to confirm that the effect state is the AT1 state. , the AT1 effect corresponding to the AT1 state is executed, and since the number of remaining games in the AT1 state (count value of the effect state counter) is 19, an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, display of an image including the characters "LAST19G") is executed.

In this example, after the second advantageous game state (AT2 state in this example) is completed, it is configured to be able to shift to a fourth advantageous game state (in this example, judge state or pullback state). After the end of the third advantageous game state (LMT state in this example), it is configured to shift to a normal state (low navigation state in this example), and the effect in the second advantageous game state (this example Then, the mode of the AT2 effect) is a mode different from the mode of the effect (the ED effect in this example) in the third advantageous game state, and the operation information is changed from the fourth advantageous game state (judgment state or pullback state). is configured to shift to the second advantageous gaming state (AT2 state), and from the state after the third advantageous gaming state (LMT state) ends When shifting to a game state in which operation information can be notified, the game is configured to shift to a first advantageous game state (AT1 state in this example).

According to this example, the game state that can be expected to be advantageous is easy to understand, so that the player can play the game with a sense of expectation. Also, expectations can be given even after the end of an expected advantageous game state.

Further, in this example, when the LMT state is shifted to the low navigation state, the state is shifted again to the high navigation state, and the state is shifted to the AT state in the high navigation state, the state is changed to the AT1 state, which is more disadvantageous for the player than the AT2 state. configured to migrate.

<Notification when a winning combination is established in the AT2 state>
FIG. 242(a) is a diagram showing an example of notification when a winning combination is established in the AT2 state.

Game R328 is a game in which the number of remaining games is 328 in the high navigation state and the number of remaining games is 2 in the AT2 state. In this game R328, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used, and the effect state is the AT2 state. , the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, and the operation navigation (in this example, the display of "2-1-3") is executed to suggest the stop operation of the pushing order, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state. Since (the count value of the effect state counter) is 2, display including an image indicating the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, displaying an image including the characters “LAST2G”) is executed. are doing.

The following game R327 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 327 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state has increased from 1 to 51. In this game R327, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the operation of pressing the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the effect state in the AT2 state. , an AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, and a non-identifiable display g2 (in this example, “!-!-! ) is executed, and since the number of remaining games in the AT2 state before addition (the count value of the effect state counter) is 1, a display (this example , the display of an image including the characters "LAST1G") is executed.

Also, in this game R327, when a certain condition is established (accepting the third stop operation in this example), an effect image is overlap-displayed on the non-identifiable display. (In this example, the character "+50G" is displayed), and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (the count value of the production state counter) has increased from 1 to 51 due to the addition of AT. A display including an image indicating the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "LAST51G") is executed.

In addition, the display mode of the non-identifiable display is not limited to this example. display), and the internal winning of the second or third hand of the same type is performed with a second non-specific display (for example, display of "?-?-?"), the second hand It may be configured so that internal winning cannot be identified. In addition, the internal winning of the first or fourth hand of a different kind is performed with a first non-specific display (for example, display of "!-!-!"), and the second or third hand of the same kind is won. may be configured so that internal winning of any combination cannot be specified by performing the internal winning of .

<Notification when a winning combination is established in the LMT state>
FIG. 242(b) is a diagram showing an example of notification when a winning combination is established in the LMT state.

Game R50 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 50 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 1. In this game R50, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the effect state because the effect state is the LMT state. , ED production (ending production) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and an operation navigation that suggests a stop operation of the pushing order (in this example, "2-1-3" in the same display mode as the operation navigation in the AT2 state display) is executed, and since the total number of games in the LMT state is 20 and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) is 2, the total number of games in the LMT state and A display including an image indicating the number of remaining games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "2/20 left") is executed.

Further, in this game R50, when a certain condition is established (in this example, a certain period of time has passed after accepting the pressing operation of the start lever 135), the effect image display device 157 is used to Along with executing an identifiable display g1 (display of a watermelon pattern in this example) capable of specifying an internally won winning combination (for example, a watermelon with a small winning combination of 3), the number of remaining games in the LMT state (effect state counter count value) is 1, the display including an image indicating the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of an image including the characters "1/20 left") is executed. ing.

Furthermore, in this game R327, the identifiable display is erased when a certain condition is established (acceptance of the third stop operation in this example). In addition, in this example, unlike the notification when a winning combination is established in the AT2 state described with reference to FIG.

In this example, after the second advantageous game state (AT2 state in this example) is completed, it is configured to be able to shift to a fourth advantageous game state (in this example, judge state or pullback state). After the end of the third advantageous game state (LMT state in this example), it is configured to shift to a normal state (low navigation state in this example), and the effect in the second advantageous game state (this example Then, the mode of the AT2 effect) is a mode different from the mode of the effect (the ED effect in this example) in the third advantageous game state, and the lottery result is the first in the third advantageous game state (LMT state). In the case of a winning combination (in this example, a small winning combination 2 (watermelon 1)), a first notification that can specify the first combination (in this example, a watermelon pattern display) is configured to be able to be notified. If the lottery result is the first combination in the second advantageous gaming state (AT2 state), a second notification indicating that it is a chance (in this example, the display of "!-!-!" ) can be notified.

According to this example, the game state that can be expected to be advantageous is easy to understand, so that the player can play the game with a sense of expectation. In addition, in the expected advantageous game state, the player is made to play the game with a sense of expectation, and in the regulated advantageous game state, the player is prevented from missing a game, and the advantageous state is ended pleasantly. can be made

Note that the display mode of the identifiable display is not limited to this example. ) may be displayed, or part or all of the symbols of the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination may be displayed. In addition, the display area, display position, display size, display timing, presentation mode after display, etc. of each display may be different between the identification impossible display and the identification possible display.

In addition, the display indicating the possibility that a privilege advantageous to the player will be granted (for example, the identification possibility display g1 shown in FIG. 242(b)) should not be displayed in the AT state before the start of the ED effect or during the execution of the ED effect. may be configured.

<Specific example of AT2 initial count correction>
Next, a specific example of correction of the AT2 initial count described with reference to FIGS. 236 to 238 will be described.

<Specific example of correction of AT2 initial count/when correction is performed>
FIG. 243(a) is a diagram showing the flow of effects when the AT2 initial number is corrected. Game R120 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 120 and the number of remaining games in the judge state is 0. In this game R120, in the judge state process B described using FIG. ing. Specifically, the value (X) of the high navigation state counter at the time of correction condition determination is 120, the AT2 initial number of times (Y) selected in the AT2 initial number lottery is 30, and "X (= 120) - Y (=30)<=100”, Y(=30)+20=50 is set as the AT2 correction value, and the LMT standby flag is set to ON.

Game R119 is a game in which the number of remaining games is 119 in the high navigation state and the number of remaining games is 50 in the AT2 state that has shifted from the judge state. In this game R119, since the LMT standby flag is ON in the AT2 state process A described with reference to FIG. Watermelon 1) is internally elected, and 0G is selected as the number of AT-added games.

In addition, in this game R119, the effect image display device 157 is used until a certain condition is established (in this example, until the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted (immediately after BET, etc.)). Since the AT2 state has been shifted from, the AT2 effect corresponding to the start of the AT2 state is started, and since the number of remaining games in the AT2 state before the update (the count value of the effect state counter) is 50, the game A display including an image indicating the number (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "50G") is executed.

After that, when a certain condition is established in this game R119 (in this example, acceptance of pressing operation of the start lever 135), the effect image display device 157 is used to confirm that the effect state is the AT2 state. , the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, and since the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is 49, an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, display of an image including the characters "LAST49G") is executed.

Game R69 is a game in which the number of remaining games is 69 in the high navigation state and the number of remaining games is 0 in the AT2 state. In this game R69, in the AT2 state process B described with reference to FIG. 238, the AT2 state is finished and the LMT standby flag is ON, so preparations are made to shift the presentation state from the AT2 state to the LMT state. ing. In addition, in this game R69, as in the games R119 to R70, the AT2 effect is executed and the operation navigation is executed. (In this example, display of an image including characters "LAST0G") is executed.

Furthermore, in this game R69, the effect image display device 157 is used to trigger the establishment of a certain condition (in this example, acceptance of the third stop operation). , the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is displayed, and the result display 1 in the AT2 state (for example, display of the number of acquired game media) is executed, while the remaining number of games in the AT2 state ( The display including the image showing the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST0G") and the display of the operation navigation are erased. In this example, the result display 1 may be configured not to be displayed, or the result display 1 may be configured to be performed only when the AT2 initial count is not corrected.

In this example, since the AT2 initial count is corrected, the AT2 state and the LMT state can be seamlessly transitioned (without going through other production states).

<Specific example of correcting AT2 initial count / When displaying the number of remaining games in AT2 state>
FIG. 243(b) is a diagram showing the flow of effects when the number of remaining games is falsely displayed in the AT2 state. Game R328 is a game in which the number of remaining games is 328 in the high navigation state and the number of remaining games is 52 in the AT2 state. In this game R328, since the LMT standby flag is off in the AT2 state process A described with reference to FIG. Watermelon 1) is internally elected, and 50G is selected as the number of AT-added games.

In addition, in this game R328, when a certain condition is established (in this example, an operation to press the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect and the operation is performed. While executing navigation, display including an image indicating the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "LAST 52G"). As a display (fake display), a display including an image showing the remaining number of games (2 in this example) before adding the number of AT additional games (50 in this example) (in this example, "LAST 2G" display of images containing characters).

The following game R327 is a game with 327 remaining games in the high navigation state and 51 remaining games in the AT2 state. In this game R327, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute an AT2 effect in the same manner as in the game R328 when a certain condition is established (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). While executing operation navigation, display including an image indicating the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "LAST51G") is not performed. In addition, as a fake display (fake display), a display including an image showing the number of remaining games (1 in this example) before adding the number of AT games (50 in this example) (in this example, " LAST1G”) is executed.

Further, in this game R327, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, a certain period of time has passed since the operation of pressing the start lever 135), a display suggesting AT addition (in this example, " After the display of the characters "It will continue"), when another certain condition is satisfied (accepting the third stop operation in this example), a display ( In this example, the characters "+50G" are displayed), and a display (in this example, "LAST51G") showing the number of remaining games in the true AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) is displayed. display of an image containing characters).

<Specific example of correction of AT2 initial count / When displaying result at transition to AT2 state>
FIG. 244(a) is a diagram showing the flow of effects when results are displayed after the transition to the AT2 state. Game R326 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 326 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0. In this game R326, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to perform AT2 as in the games R328 to R327. A display including an image showing the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of an image including the characters "LAST0G") while executing the effect and the operation navigation. running

Furthermore, in this game R326, the effect image display device 157 is used as a trigger when a certain condition is established (acceptance of the third stop operation in this example). , the display of the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is executed, but the result display 1 (for example, display of the number of acquired game media) in the AT2 state is not executed.

The following game R325 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 325 and the number of remaining games in the judge state shifted from the AT2 state is 9. In this game R325, the effect image display device 157 is used to display result 1 ( For example, the display of the number of acquired game media) is executed, and when a certain condition is established (in this example, the operation of pressing the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to An image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) since the judge effect corresponding to the start of the judge state is started and the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the judge state is 9. (in this example, display of an image including the characters "LAST9G") is executed.

<Specific example of correcting the initial number of AT2/When the result is not displayed after the AT2 state ends>
FIG. 244(b) is a diagram showing the flow of effects when the results are not displayed after the end of the AT2 state, and corresponds to FIG. 243(a). In the effect described using FIG. 243(a), in game R69, the effect image display device 157 is used to display the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state because it is the final game in the AT2 state. In this example, in the same game R69, the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is shown. is executed, the result display 1 (for example, display of the number of acquired game media) in the AT2 state is not executed.

According to this example, it is possible to seamlessly transition from the AT2 state to the LMT state (without going through other production states), and since the results in the AT2 state are not displayed during the transition, the AT2 state to the LMT state The player does not need to be more conscious of the transition of , and can be given a coherent impression of the performance in the high navigation state.

As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 149) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "the present invention 8-1") includes operating means (for example, shown in FIG. 149). stop buttons 137 to 139), and transition to one of the normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 154(b)) and the advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 154(b)) and a control means (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 151), wherein the operation information of the operation means (for example, using the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 156 and 193 information that can identify the stop position and stop order of each reel, such as operation navigation, operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. A state that is more advantageous than the normal state in terms of notification of operation information, has a specific counter (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 166, FIG. 200, etc.) relating to the advantageous state, and a game is played in the advantageous state. The count value of the specific counter can be updated every time, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is changed to the normal state, and the certain end The condition is a condition that is established when the count value becomes a first specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games played after shifting to an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times), In the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous game states, and in one of the plurality of advantageous game states, the operation information can be notified. A certain advantageous gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "second advantageous gaming state". For example, the second advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 245, or the AT2 state shown in FIG. 154 (b), etc.), and the plurality of One advantageous game state among the advantageous game states is an advantageous game state different from the second advantageous game state (hereinafter referred to as "third advantageous game state") in which the operation information can be reported. For example, the third advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 245, or the LMT state shown in FIG. An advantageous game state different from the state and the third advantageous game state (hereinafter referred to as "fourth advantageous game state". For example, the fourth advantageous game state shown in FIG. 245 or FIG. 154 (b) etc.), and the fourth The advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state that is more disadvantageous than any of the second advantageous gaming state and the third advantageous gaming state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and the third advantageous gaming state is , a game state in which the second advantageous game state can be shifted when the count value reaches a second specific value (for example, 19), wherein the count value is the first specific value and The first specific value and the second specific value are different values, and after the second advantageous game state ends, the fourth advantageous game state It is configured to be able to shift to a game state, and is configured to shift to the normal state after the end of the third advantageous game state. AT2 effect ad2 shown in FIG. 240 and the like) is the mode of the effect in the third advantageous gaming state (for example, ED effect ed1 shown in FIG. 245 and ED effect shown in FIG. 240 etc.). It is a game machine characterized in that it is a different aspect from. It should be noted that FIG. 245 is a diagram showing an outline of the present invention 8-1.

According to the amusement machine according to Invention 8-1 of the present application, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of anticipation because the game state which can be expected to be advantageous is easy to understand.

One advantageous gaming state among the plurality of advantageous gaming states is an advantageous gaming state different from both the second advantageous gaming state and the third advantageous gaming state in which the operation information can be notified. (hereinafter referred to as "first advantageous gaming state"), and the first advantageous gaming state may be an advantageous gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the second advantageous gaming state with respect to the notification of the operation information. good.

Further, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 149) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "the present invention 8-2") has operation means (for example, the stop buttons 137 to 137 shown in FIG. 149). 139) and a control means (for example, a normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 154(b)) or an advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 154(b)) for shifting to a state ( For example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 151), and the operation information of the operation means (for example, operation navigation using the payout number indicator 127 shown in FIGS. 156 and 193, FIG. Information that can identify the stop position and stop order of each reel, such as operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in 200 etc., can be notified. is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to, and a specific counter (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 166, FIG. 200, etc.) regarding the advantageous state is provided, and each time a game is played in the advantageous state, the The count value of a specific counter can be updated, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is changed to the normal state, and the certain end condition is the A condition that is established when the count value becomes a first specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games played after shifting to an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times), and in the advantageous state , a transition to any one of a plurality of advantageous game states, and one of the plurality of advantageous game states is an advantageous game state to which the operation information can be notified. A game state (hereinafter referred to as "first advantageous game state". For example, the first advantageous game state shown in FIG. 246 and the AT1 state shown in FIG. 154(b), etc.), and the plurality of advantageous game states One of the advantageous gaming states is an advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state in which the operation information can be reported (hereinafter referred to as a "second advantageous gaming state". For example, FIG. 246 and the AT2 state shown in FIG. 154(b), etc.), and one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is the second advantageous gaming state that can notify the operation information. An advantageous game state different from the one advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state (hereinafter referred to as "third advantageous game state". The third advantageous game state shown in FIG. 246 and the b) is the LMT state shown in FIG. One advantageous game state among the number of advantageous game states is an advantageous game state different from any of the first advantageous game state, the second advantageous game state and the third advantageous game state (hereinafter, It is called "fourth advantageous gaming state". The fourth advantageous game state shown in FIG. 246 and the pull-back state shown in FIG. and the third advantageous game state, an advantageous game state that is more disadvantageous with respect to the notification of the operation information than any of the advantageous game states, and the third advantageous game state is such that the count value is a second specific value ( For example, in the case of 19), it is a game state that can be shifted from the second advantageous game state, and is a game state that can be stayed until the count value reaches the first specific value. The one specific value and the second specific value are different values, and after the second advantageous game state is completed, the fourth advantageous game state can be entered, After the third advantageous game state is completed, it is configured to shift to the normal state, and the effect in the second advantageous game state (for example, AT2 effect ad2 shown in FIG. effect) is a mode different from the mode of the effect in the third advantageous game state (for example, the ED effect ed1 shown in FIG. 246 and the ED effect shown in FIG. 240, etc.), and the first advantageous game The second advantageous game state is a game state more advantageous than the state, and when shifting from the fourth advantageous game state to the game state in which the operation information can be notified, the second advantageous game state state, and in the case of shifting to a game state in which the operation information can be notified from the state after the third advantageous game state is completed, the game state is shifted to the first advantageous game state. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to play. It should be noted that FIG. 246 is a diagram showing an outline of invention 8-2 of the present application.

According to the amusement machine according to Invention 8-2 of the present application, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of anticipation because the expected advantageous game state is easy to understand. Also, expectations can be given even after the end of an expected advantageous game state.

In addition, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 149) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "the present invention 8-3") has operating means (for example, the stop buttons 137 to 137 shown in FIG. 149). 139) and a control means (for example, a normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 154(b)) or an advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 154(b)) for shifting to a state ( For example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 151), and the operation information of the operation means (for example, operation navigation using the payout number indicator 127 shown in FIGS. 156 and 193, FIG. Information that can identify the stop position and stop order of each reel, such as operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in 200 etc., can be notified. is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to, and a specific counter (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 166, FIG. 200, etc.) regarding the advantageous state is provided, and each time a game is played in the advantageous state, the The count value of a specific counter can be updated, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is changed to the normal state, and the certain end condition is the A condition that is established when the count value becomes a first specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games played after shifting to an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times), and in the advantageous state , a transition to any one of a plurality of advantageous game states, and one of the plurality of advantageous game states is an advantageous game state to which the operation information can be notified. A game state (hereinafter referred to as a "second advantageous game state". For example, a second advantageous game state shown in FIG. 247 or an AT2 state shown in FIG. One of the advantageous gaming states is an advantageous gaming state different from the second advantageous gaming state in which the operation information can be notified (hereinafter referred to as "third advantageous gaming state". For example, FIG. or LMT state shown in FIG. An advantageous game state different from any of the three advantageous game states (hereinafter referred to as "fourth advantageous game state". For example, the fourth advantageous game state shown in FIG. 247, or the withdrawal shown in FIG. 154(b) state), and the fourth advantageous gaming state is , an advantageous game state that is more disadvantageous in terms of notification of the operation information than any of the second advantageous game state and the third advantageous game state, and the third advantageous game state is the count value becomes a second specific value (e.g., 19), the game state can be shifted from the second advantageous game state, and can be stayed until the count value reaches the first specific value The first specific value and the second specific value are different values, and after the second advantageous game state is completed, the fourth advantageous game state is entered. It is configured to be possible, and is configured to shift to the normal state after the end of the third advantageous game state, and the effect in the second advantageous game state (for example, the AT2 effect shown in FIG. 247 ad2 and the AT2 effect shown in FIG. 240 etc.) is a different form from the mode of the effect in the third advantageous gaming state (for example, the ED effect ed1 shown in FIG. 247 and the ED effect shown in FIG. 240 etc.). , and when the lottery result in the third advantageous gaming state is the first combination (for example, a small combination 2 (watermelon 1) shown in FIG. 153), the first combination can be specified. (for example, the second image g1 shown in FIG. 247 and the identifiable display g1 (display of watermelon pattern) shown in FIG. 242 (b)) can be notified, and the second advantageous game If the lottery result is the first combination in the state, a second notification indicating that it is a chance (for example, the second image g2 shown in FIG. 247 or the non-identifiable display shown in FIG. g2 (“! -! -! ” display)) is configured to be able to notify. It should be noted that FIG. 247 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 8-3 of the present application.

According to the amusement machine according to Invention 8-3 of the present application, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of anticipation because the expected advantageous game state is easy to understand. In addition, in the expected advantageous game state, the player is made to play the game with a sense of expectation, and in the regulated advantageous game state, the player is prevented from missing a game, and the advantageous state is ended pleasantly. can be made

Note that the gaming machines according to Inventions 8-1 to 2-3 of the present application are not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, a lottery means (for example, winning combination internal lottery process shown in FIG. 158) is provided for performing lottery processing related to internal winning of a combination and determining the lottery result, and when the lottery result is the first combination, or and the mode of the certain report in the third advantageous game state may be different from the mode of the certain report in the second advantageous game state. .

Further, when the result of the lottery is the second winning combination (for example, a small winning combination 4 (bell) shown in FIG. 153(a) or FIG. 155), the operation information can be notified. The mode of notification of the operation information of the second combination in the advantageous game state may be the same as the mode of notification of the operation information of the second combination in the second advantageous game state.

With such a configuration, since the operation navigation mode does not change depending on the type of advantageous game state, it is possible to prevent the failure of winning the winning hand, etc., and keep the player's desire to play. In addition, since the expected advantageous game state is easy to understand, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation.

The operation information may be information that enables identification of the stop positions and stop order of the reels that enable display of the combination of symbols related to the second combination.

Further, in the second advantageous game state, the number of remaining games in the second advantageous game state can be increased, and in the third advantageous game state, the number of times in the third advantageous game state It may be configured so that the number of remaining games is not increased.

With such a configuration, in the advantageous game state of the regulated state, the advantageous state can be comfortably ended without arousing the player more than necessary. In addition, since the expected advantageous game state is easy to understand, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation.

In addition, it is configured so that a display indicating that the number of remaining games in the second advantageous game state increases may be performed, and the number of remaining games in the third advantageous game state increases. may be configured so that there is no display indicating

Further, when the second advantageous gaming state ends, a certain end display (for example, an AT end screen suggesting the end of the AT2 state shown in FIG. 240, etc.) can be displayed. A process of regulating the transition to the third advantageous gaming state after the transition to the second advantageous gaming state and before the end display relating to the second advantageous gaming state is displayed. (For example, processing using the LMT standby flag described with reference to FIGS. 236 to 239) may be executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which profits cannot be obtained in an expected advantageous game state, satisfy the player's satisfaction, and as a result, give the player a sense of expectation. becomes possible. In addition, since the expected advantageous game state is easy to understand, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation.

In addition, when shifting to the third advantageous game state, it may be configured such that a certain freeze effect can be executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide an opportunity for the player to change his or her mind, because it is easy to understand an advantageous game state that should not be expected. In addition, since the expected advantageous game state is easy to understand, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation.

Also, the initial number of remaining games in the second advantageous game state is variable (for example, the number of games determined by the AT2 initial number lottery in FIG. 237(a), the game corrected by the number of games shown in FIG. 237(b) number of times), and the initial number of remaining games in the third advantageous game state may be fixed (for example, 20G).

With such a configuration, it is possible to comfortably end the advantageous state without stirring in the advantageous game state of the regulated state. In addition, since the expected advantageous game state is easy to understand, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation.

In addition, in the second advantageous gaming state, a display indicating the number of games that is smaller than the actual number of remaining games in the second advantageous gaming state (for example, false display of the number of remaining games shown in FIG. 243(b), etc.) (false display)) may be displayed, and in the third advantageous game state, a display indicating the number of times less than the actual number of remaining games in the third advantageous game state. may be configured so as not to be displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to comfortably end the advantageous state without stirring in the advantageous game state of the regulated state. In addition, since the expected advantageous game state is easy to understand, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation.

Also, in one of the advantageous states, after the third advantageous gaming state ends, the fourth advantageous gaming state (for example, pullback state) may not occur.

In addition, a first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is a first number (for example, a three-bet game) and a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number (for example, a bet on two game), the second number is a number different from the first number, and the first game is more advantageous for the player than the second game. It is a game, and when the second game is played, the transition to the second advantageous game state may not be started.

With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp whether the game is being played in the first game or the second game depending on whether or not the transition to the second advantageous game state is made. In some cases, the player can notice that the first game is more advantageous than the second game.

Further, when the fourth advantageous game state does not shift to the advantageous game state in which the operation information can be notified, the game may be configured to be able to shift to the normal state.

Further, the above-mentioned ``a game state in which the second advantageous game state is more advantageous than the first advantageous game state,'' means ``a game medium acquired in the first advantageous game state. The expected value of acquisition of game media in the second advantageous game state is higher than the expected value."

In addition, the above-mentioned "the fourth advantageous game state is the first advantageous game state, the second advantageous game state, and the third advantageous game state. "is a disadvantageous advantageous gaming state with regard to", "said fourth advantageous gaming state is any advantageous gaming state of said first advantageous gaming state, said second advantageous gaming state and said third advantageous gaming state The operation information is reported less frequently than in the game state, or it is an advantageous game state in which the operation information is not reported.

[Embodiment 8]
A slot machine according to Embodiment 8 of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. In order to avoid duplication of explanation, in principle only the configuration different from the game machines according to the sixth to second embodiments will be explained. In principle, FIGS. 248 to 255 are used only for the explanation of the eighth embodiment. 255 has priority.

<Various operations>
First, various operations that can be performed in the slot machine according to the eighth embodiment will be described. The slot machine according to the eighth embodiment includes a start lever 135, stop buttons 137-139, bet buttons 130-132, medal return button 133, checkout button 134 described with reference to FIG. 149, and a cross key 192 shown in FIG. 250 and other operation means such as the PUSH button 194 shown in FIG. 250, and various operations can be performed by these operation means. Moreover, in addition to various operations by these operating means, it is also possible to perform an inserting operation by inserting medals from the medal inserting slot 141 .

Hereinafter, the operation using the start lever 135 may be referred to as "lever operation", the operation using the PUSH button 194 as "PUSH button operation", and the operation using the cross key 192 as "cross key operation".

<State transition of various operations>
Next, an example of state transition of various operations will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 248 is a diagram showing state transitions of PUSH button operation, cross key operation, insertion operation, and lever operation.

In FIG. 248, the state indicated by "o" is a state in which acceptance of various operations is enabled, and the state indicated by "x" in FIG. 248 is a state in which the acceptance of various operations is disabled. The slot machine according to the eighth embodiment is configured to determine whether various operations are valid or invalid according to the state transition shown in FIG.

For example, when the previous game is not replayed, the selection screen is displayed (or hidden), and the setting screen is not displayed, the operation of the cross key 192 corresponding to "setting screen call" is valid. , when the operation is accepted, the display of the setting screen is started (the setting screen is called), but since the PUSH button operation, the input operation, and the lever operation are invalid, even if the operation is performed , the display of the setting screen does not start (the setting screen is not called).

In addition, when the previous game is not replayed, the selection screen is hidden, and the setting screen is hidden, the input operation corresponding to "AT2 type determination" is valid. determines the character for the AT2 effect (determines the AT2 type), which will be described later, but since the PUSH button operation, the cross key operation, and the lever operation are invalid, even if the operation is performed, the character for the AT2 effect is determined. No determination (AT2 type determination) is made.

On the other hand, when the previous game is not replayed, the selection screen is displayed, and the setting screen is not displayed, in addition to the input operation corresponding to "AT2 type determination", the PUSH button operation is also valid. Also when the button operation is accepted, the character for AT2 presentation (AT2 type determination) is determined.

Also, when the previous game is not replayed, the selection screen is hidden, and the setting screen is displayed, any of the PUSH button operation, cross key operation, insertion operation, and lever operation corresponding to "AT2 type determination" Since it is invalid, the character cannot be determined, but since lever operations other than those corresponding to the "AT2 type selection screen display" are valid, it is possible to select characters by operations other than lever operations.

Also, when the previous game is replayed, the selection screen is hidden, and the setting screen is hidden, the lever operation corresponding to "AT2 type determination" is valid. , determines the character for the AT2 effect (AT2 type determination), but since the PUSH button operation, the cross key operation, and the input operation are invalid, even if the operation is performed, the character for the AT2 effect is determined (AT2 type determination). type determination) is not performed.

On the other hand, when the previous game is replayed, the selection screen is displayed, and the setting screen is hidden, in addition to the input operation corresponding to "AT2 type determination", the PUSH button operation is also valid, so the PUSU button Also when the operation is accepted, the character for the AT2 effect is determined (AT2 type determination). In these cases, the input operation is invalid, but the input operation may be validated, and when the operation is accepted, the character for the AT2 effect (AT2 type determination) may be determined.

<Specific examples of various operations>
Next, specific examples of various operations including PUSH button operation, cross key operation, input operation, and lever operation will be described with reference to FIGS. 249 to 252. FIG. FIG. 249A is a diagram showing an example of various operations for switching display between a normal screen and a demo screen in chronological order. In this example, when the normal screen is displayed using the effect image display device 157, when the decision button 192a of the cross key 192 is operated, the setting screen starts to be displayed. Here, the setting screen is a screen for performing various settings (for example, volume adjustment, light amount adjustment, model information display, etc.) related to the slot machine.

Although the condition for starting the display of the setting screen is not particularly limited, in this example, the display of the setting screen is started only when the operation of the enter button 192a of the cross key 192 is accepted during non-game. When the operation of the decision button 192a of the cross key 192 is accepted at the beginning, the display of the setting screen is not started.

When the decision button 192a of the cross key 192 is operated while this setting screen is displayed, the demonstration screen starts to be displayed. Here, the demo screen is a screen that is mainly displayed during non-game play, and is, for example, a screen that displays an introduction to a new model, an advertisement for amusement arcades, and the like. If an operation to insert medals into the medal slot 141 is received while the demo screen is being displayed, the display of the normal screen is started (returns from the demo screen to the normal screen).

FIG. 249B is a diagram showing an example of various operations in time series when volume adjustment is performed using the setting screen. In this example, when the normal screen is displayed using the effect image display device 157, when the decision button 192a of the cross key 192 is operated, the setting screen starts to be displayed. When the up button 192b (or down button 192c) of the cross key 192 is operated while this setting screen is displayed, the cursor (arrow) displayed on the setting screen moves upward (or downward). In this example, since the operation of the up button 192b is accepted on the setting screen, the cursor is moved upward to the volume adjustment position.

Moving the cursor to a menu initiates display of the submenu corresponding to the cursor. In this example, since the cursor has been moved to the volume adjustment position, the display of the volume adjustment screen corresponding to volume adjustment is started. When the right button 192d (or the left button 192e) of the cross key 192 is operated while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the volume can be adjusted, and the adjusted volume is displayed by the volume meter. . In this example, since one operation of the right button 192d is accepted on the volume adjustment screen, the volume is increased by one level (in this example, the volume is increased from level 3 to level 4 in five levels from level 1 to 5). ), and the adjusted volume (level 4) is displayed by the volume meter.

Further, when the decision button 192a of the cross key 192 is operated while the volume adjustment screen is being displayed, the volume adjustment is terminated and the setting screen is restored. In this example, since the operation of the decision button 192a is accepted after adjusting the volume, the volume adjustment is terminated and the display of the volume adjustment screen is switched to the display of the setting screen. Further, subsequently, since the operation of the down button 192c on the setting screen is accepted, the cursor is moved downward to the position of "return". The subsequent operation and display are the same as the example described with reference to FIG. 249(A).

FIG. 249C is a diagram showing an example of various operations in chronological order when volume adjustment is performed without displaying the setting screen. In this example, when the normal screen is displayed using the effect image display device 157, when the operation of the right button 192d (or the left button 192e) of the cross key 192 is accepted, the display of the volume adjustment screen is started.

Although the condition for starting the display of the volume adjustment screen is not particularly limited, in this example, the volume adjustment screen is displayed only when the operation of the right button 192d (or the left button 192e) of the cross key 192 is accepted during non-game play. , and when the operation of the right button 192d (or the left button 192e) of the cross key 192 is accepted during the game, the display of the volume adjustment screen is not started.

When the right button 192d (or the left button 192e) of the cross key 192 is operated while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the volume can be adjusted, and the adjusted volume is displayed by the volume meter. Points are the same as the example described using FIG. 249(B). Further, when the decision button 192a of the cross key 192 is operated while the volume adjustment screen is being displayed, the volume adjustment is terminated and the volume adjustment end screen indicating that the volume has been determined is returned. Further, when the decision button 192a of the cross key 192 is operated while the volume adjustment end screen is being displayed, the demonstration screen is started to be displayed.

249(D) and 249(E) are diagrams showing an example of other various operations in chronological order. In the example described with reference to FIG. 249(A), when an operation to insert medals into the medal slot 141 is accepted while the demo screen is being displayed, the display of the normal screen is started (returns from the demo screen to the normal screen). ) example, as shown in FIG. 249(D), when an operation to insert medals into the medal slot 141 is received while the setting screen is being displayed, the display of the normal screen is started (from the demo screen to the normal screen). It may be configured to return to the screen).

Further, in the example described with reference to FIG. 249(B), when an operation of inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 141 is accepted while the demo screen is being displayed after volume adjustment, display of the normal screen is started (demonstration screen 249(E), when an operation of inserting medals into the medal slot 141 is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is being displayed, the normal screen is displayed. It may be configured to start (return from the demo screen to the normal screen). In this case, if the input operation is received after the volume adjustment end screen is displayed, the volume is not determined, so the volume may not be adjusted. (Even before the volume is determined), the volume may be adjusted with the volume displayed on the volume adjustment screen at the time of the input operation.

<Specific example of character select operation>
Next, a specific example of character select operation (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “character select operation”) will be described with reference to FIGS. 250 to 253. FIG. Here, the character select operation is an operation for selecting a character to appear in various effects according to the player's preference, and in the slot machine according to the eighth embodiment, the character select operation It can be performed.

<Specific example of character select operation/Example where character cannot be selected by player's will>
FIG. 250 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, the character select operation when the presentation state transitions from the judge state to the AT2 state in the high navigation state. It is a diagram showing.

In this example, since the operation of the PUSH button 194 is accepted while the AT2 confirmation display screen indicating that the transition to the AT2 state is confirmed is being displayed, the character selection operation screen for performing the character selection operation in the AT2 state is displayed. have started. The display mode of this character select operation screen is not particularly limited, but in this example, it is configured so that the player can select a favorite character from three types of characters A, B, and C. (default), the character A is provisionally selected.

When an operation of the PUSH button 194 is accepted while the character selection operation screen is being displayed, the operation becomes a character determination operation, and the character temporarily selected on the character selection operation screen becomes a character appearing in the AT2 effect executed in the AT2 state. It is determined. As a result, in the AT2 state, an effect by the character determined by the player is started.

In this example, since the character A is temporarily selected on the character selection operation screen, the character that appears in the AT2 effect is determined as the character A by the character determination operation, and the AT2 effect by the character A is started. Subsequently, when the input operation (or BET operation) is performed with the AT2 effect started, and the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, the first game in the AT2 state is started.

FIG. 250B is a diagram showing the second embodiment of the character select operation in chronological order. In this example, since the insertion operation is accepted while the AT2 confirmation display screen is being displayed, the default character is displayed without displaying the character selection operation screen (without giving the player an opportunity to select a favorite character). AT2 production by A is started.

FIG. 250(C) is a diagram showing Example 3 of the character select operation in chronological order. In this example, the operation of the PUSH button 194 is accepted while the AT2 confirmation display screen is being displayed, so the display of the character selection operation screen is started. , without selecting a character on the character select operation screen (without giving the player an opportunity to select a favorite character), the AT2 effect with the default character A is started.

FIG. 250(D) is a diagram showing Example 4 of the character select operation in chronological order. In this example, since the right button 192d of the cross key 192 is accepted while the AT2 confirmation display screen is being displayed, the volume adjustment screen is displayed. Therefore, without displaying the character selection operation screen (without giving the player an opportunity to select a favorite character), the AT2 effect by the default character A is started.

<Specific example of character select operation/Example of character selection by player>
FIG. 251A is a diagram showing the fifth embodiment of the character select operation in chronological order. In this example, since the operation of the PUSH button 194 is accepted while the AT2 confirmation display screen is being displayed, the display of the character selection operation screen cd1 is started. 192d is accepted, the volume adjustment screen sd1 is displayed. In this example, since the input operation is accepted while the volume adjustment screen sd1 is being displayed, after the character selection operation screen cd1 is redisplayed, if the input operation is accepted while the character selection operation screen cd1 is being displayed, Even so, the input operation is not accepted as a character selection operation (a character is not selected against the player's will), and the display of the character select operation screen cd1 is maintained.

A character that notifies that a character (in this example, character A) to appear in the AT2 effect has been determined when a pressing operation (lever operation) of the start lever 135 is received while the character selection operation screen cd1 is being displayed. After the decision screen ed1 is displayed, an AT2 effect in which the character appears is started.

FIG. 251B is a diagram showing the sixth embodiment of the character select operation in chronological order. In this example, the flow until the character selection operation screen cd1 is redisplayed after the volume adjustment screen sd1 is displayed is the same as the example described with reference to FIG. Since the operation of the PUSH button 194, that is, the character determination operation is accepted during the display, the character appearing in the AT2 effect is determined to be the character A provisionally selected on the character select operation screen, and is made to appear in the AT2 effect. After displaying the character determination screen ed1 for notifying that the character (character A in this example) has been determined, the AT2 effect in which the character appears is started.

In the example shown in FIGS. 252(A) to 252(C), the PUSH button 194 is composed of a button capable of emitting light, and is configured to emit light when the character select operation screen can be displayed. are doing.

FIG. 252A is a diagram showing the sixth embodiment of the character select operation in chronological order. In this example, since the character select operation screen can be displayed while the AT2 confirmation display screen is being displayed, the non-luminous PUSH button 194 that has been turned off is made to emit light, and the PUSH button 194 is operated (character select operation). screen calling operation) is received, the display of the character selection operation screen is started. Further, since the character select operation screen can be displayed even while the character select operation screen is being displayed, if the PUSH button 194 is illuminated and an operation of the PUSH button 194 (character determination operation) is received, The character appearing in the AT2 production is determined to be the character A temporarily selected on the character select operation screen, and the AT2 production by the character A is started. During the AT2 presentation, the PUSH button 194 is extinguished since the character select operation screen cannot be displayed.

FIG. 252B is a diagram showing the seventh embodiment of the character select operation in chronological order. In this example, the PUSH button 194 is extinguished during the display of the volume adjustment screen and the demonstration screen because the character select operation screen cannot be displayed. In this example, when the decision button 192a of the cross key 192 is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is being displayed, the volume adjustment end screen is displayed. seconds) has elapsed, the display of the volume adjustment end screen may be started.

FIG. 252C is a diagram showing the eighth embodiment of the character select operation in chronological order. In this example, the flow until the volume adjustment end screen is displayed is the same as the example described with reference to FIG. is displayed again, and since the character selection operation screen can be displayed during the display, the non-light emitting PUSH button 194 that has been turned off is caused to emit light.

<Specific example/modification of character select operation>
FIG. 253A is a diagram showing variation 1 of the character select operation in chronological order. In this example, after the character select operation screen is displayed, a selection decision effect is performed to notify information of the character selected on the character select operation screen (character A in this example). With such a configuration, the player can check whether or not the desired character has been selected before the performance is started, which may increase the interest of the player.

FIG. 253B is a diagram showing variation 2 of the character select operation in chronological order. In this example, since the input operation was accepted while a screen other than the character select operation screen was being displayed, the default Since the AT2 effect by the character A has started, the selection decision effect is not performed. With such a configuration, even if the player is not given an opportunity to select a favorite character, it may be possible to reduce the disappointment of the player.

As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 149) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "claimed invention 9-1") is capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. means, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a display prompting an operation for a first decision (hereinafter referred to as "first display For example, the first display d1 shown in FIG. 254 and the character select operation screen cd1 shown in FIG. (hereinafter referred to as "second display". For example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 254, the volume adjustment screen sd1 shown in FIG. 251 (A)), and the first display is displayed 254, an input operation shown in FIG. When one operation, or a plurality of these operations, is performed, a determination regarding the first determination (for example, selection of a character to appear in a certain production) is executable, and the first determination is performed. The display of the second display can be started while one display is being displayed, and the determination regarding the first determination is executed after the display of the first display is started. Even if the first operation is performed in the state where the second display that started to be displayed before is displayed (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the first determination A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured such that a decision regarding is not executed. FIG. 254 is a diagram showing an outline of invention 9-1 of the present application.

According to the amusement machine according to Invention 9-1 of the present application, it is possible to carefully make a decision regarding the previous decision (decision regarding the first decision). Also, after the second display, there is a risk of forgetting the contents of the first display, and if the decision regarding the first display becomes unintended by the player (for example, the first display at the start of the game) To prevent such unintended operation by a player and to prevent the loss of the player's desire to play, etc. becomes possible.

It should be noted that the gaming machine according to Invention 9-1 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and even if the first operation is performed after the display of the second display ends, It may be configured such that a decision regarding the first decision is not executed.

With such a configuration, even after the display of the operation display for the later decision is finished, it is possible to make the decision about the previous decision (decision about the first decision) carefully. This is because, after the second display, the content previously displayed (the content of the first display) may be forgotten. If the operation is the same, there is a risk that an unintended decision will be made by repeating the decision operation (for example, repeated hits). In addition, even if the determination operation regarding the second display and the determination operation regarding the first display are not the same, if the determination operation regarding the first display is inadvertently performed after the display of the second display, an unintended Decisions are likely to be made. According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent such an unintended operation by the player and prevent the player from losing the desire to play.

In addition, when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and after the display of the second display ends and during the first display, the first display is displayed. is performed, the decision regarding the first decision may not be executed.

Further, when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display is terminated, and even if the first operation is performed after the display of the second display is terminated, the second display is displayed. A decision regarding one decision is not executed, but a decision regarding the first decision is executable when a second operation is performed, and the first operation and the second operation are different operations. There may be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity and make him/her carefully make a decision regarding the previous decision (decision regarding the first decision). It can also make the player feel uncomfortable and buy them time, during which they can be reminded of the first display. In addition, since a lever operation subsequent to the input operation may result in a decision regarding the previous decision (decision regarding the first decision), it is possible to provide a smooth decision method for players accustomed to the game. can. In addition, it is possible to prevent unintended operations by the player and prevent the player from losing motivation to play.

In addition, when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and after the display of the second display ends and during the first display, the first display is displayed. is performed, the determination regarding the first determination is not performed, but if a certain operation other than the first operation (hereinafter referred to as "second operation") is performed, the first A decision regarding a decision may be configured to be executable.

In addition, an operation means (for example, PUSH button 194 shown in FIG. 251(B), etc.) that may be used for production is provided, and when the operation means is operated while the first display is displayed, , the determination regarding the first determination is executable, and when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and the display of the second display The decision regarding the first decision may be executed when the operation means is operated after the end.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make a decision regarding the first decision without being affected by the display state by the operation means that may be used for the effect. In addition, since it is possible to make a stable decision with the operation means that may be used for the production, it is possible to make the player who is not interested in the operation means pay attention to the operation means and enjoy the production. Sometimes we can. In addition, it is possible to prevent unintended operations by the player and prevent the player from losing motivation to play.

Note that the operation means that may be used for production may be an operation means capable of adjusting the volume of sound output means (eg, speaker), or light output means (eg, LED, lamp, liquid crystal display device). It may also be an operating means capable of adjusting the amount of light and adjusting the luminance.

Further, one display among the plurality of types of display is a fourth display (for example, a screen suggesting that the AT2 state has been established), and from a state in which the fourth display is displayed to the fourth display. It is configured to be able to shift to a state where one display is displayed, and when the first operation is performed in the state where the fourth display is displayed, the determination regarding the first determination can be executed. may be configured to

With such a configuration, the decision regarding the first decision can be made smoothly. In addition, it is possible to provide a smooth decision method for a player accustomed to the game. In addition, it is possible to prevent unintended operations by the player and prevent the player from losing motivation to play.

Further, the second display can be started to be displayed while the fourth display is being displayed, and the first display is displayed after the fourth display is started to be displayed. When the first operation is performed in a state in which the second display is displayed, the display of which started before the display is performed, even if the decision regarding the first decision is executable good.

With such a configuration, the decision regarding the first decision can be made smoothly. In addition, it is possible to provide a smooth decision method for a player accustomed to the game. In addition, it is conceivable that a player who causes the second display to be displayed instead of the first display in a state in which the first display can be displayed is not interested in the decision regarding the first display. Such a player can be smoothly determined. In addition, it is possible to prevent unintended operations by the player and prevent the player from losing motivation to play.

In addition, a lottery means (for example, winning combination internal lottery processing (step S104) shown in FIG. 158) is provided for performing lottery processing related to internal winning of a winning combination and determining the lottery result, and the winning combination can be won regardless of the insertion of game media. including a replay combination that can be replayed at any time, and in a state in which execution of the replay cannot be started, both of the first display and the second display can be displayed. and only the first display out of the first display and the second display may be displayed in the state in which execution of the replay can be started.

In addition, in a state in which execution of the replay can be started and the first display is displayed, even if the first operation is performed, the decision regarding the first decision is not executed. It may be configured as

Further, in a state in which execution of the replay can be started and the fourth display is displayed, even if the first operation is performed, the decision regarding the first decision is not executed. It may be configured as

Further, one of the plurality of types of display is a third display (for example, an interlocking effect shown in FIG. 212), and the third display is a display configured by displaying a plurality of scenes. A display of the plurality of scenes includes a display of a first scene and a display of a second scene, and the display of the first scene is the display of the first scene while the first display is being displayed. The display of the second scene is started when the first operation is performed while the first display is not displayed. It may be an indication that there is a case.

In addition, a first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is a first number (for example, a three-bet game) and a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number (for example, a bet on two game), the second number is a number different from the first number, and the first game is more advantageous for the player than the second game. is a game, and in the first state in the first game, even if the first operation is performed, the decision regarding the first decision is not executed, and the second game In the first state of , even if the first operation is performed, the decision regarding the first decision may not be executed.

With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp whether the game is being played in the first game or the second game depending on whether or not the decision regarding the first decision is executed. In some cases, the player can notice that the first game is more advantageous than the second game.

Further, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 149) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "present invention 9-2") has display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display. A gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine, and one of the plurality of types of display is a display prompting an operation for a first decision (hereinafter referred to as a "first display". For example, , the first display d1 shown in FIG. 255, and the character selection operation screen cd1 shown in FIG. Hereinafter, referred to as a “second display.” For example, the second display d2 shown in Fig. 255 and the volume adjustment screen sd1 shown in Fig. 251(A). The display after the determination regarding the first determination (hereinafter referred to as "third display". For example, the third display d3 shown in FIG. 255, the character determination screen ed1 shown in FIG. 251B), In a state where one display is displayed, a first operation (for example, a certain operation h1 shown in FIG. 255, an input operation shown in FIG. 251(B), an operation of the PUSH button 194, and When any one of a plurality of button operations, or a plurality of these operations, is performed, the third display can be displayed, and the first display is displayed. display of the second display can be started in the state, and the display is started after the display of the first display is started and before the display of the third display is started. In a state where the second display is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "first state"), even if the first operation is performed, the third display is not displayed. It is a game machine characterized by It should be noted that FIG. 255 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 9-2 of the present application.

According to the amusement machine according to Invention 9-2 of the present application, it is possible to carefully make a decision regarding the previous decision (decision regarding the first decision). Also, after the second display, there is a risk of forgetting the contents of the first display, and if the decision regarding the first display becomes unintended by the player (for example, the first display at the start of the game) To prevent such unintended operation by a player and to prevent the loss of the player's desire to play, etc. becomes possible.

Note that the gaming machine according to Invention 9-2 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and even if the first operation is performed after the display of the second display ends, The third display may be configured not to be displayed.

With such a configuration, even after the display of the operation display for the later decision is finished, it is possible to make the decision about the previous decision (decision about the first decision) carefully. This is because, after the second display, the content previously displayed (the content of the first display) may be forgotten. If the operation is the same, there is a risk that an unintended decision will be made by repeating the decision operation (for example, repeated hits). In addition, even if the determination operation regarding the second display and the determination operation regarding the first display are not the same, if the determination operation regarding the first display is inadvertently performed after the display of the second display, an unintended Decisions are likely to be made. According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent such an unintended operation by the player and prevent the player from losing the desire to play.

In addition, when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and after the display of the second display ends and during the first display, the first display is displayed. The third display may not be displayed even if the operation of .

Further, when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display is terminated, and even if the first operation is performed after the display of the second display is terminated, the second display is displayed. Even if the third display is not displayed, but the third display can be displayed when an operation other than the first operation (hereinafter referred to as "second operation") is performed good.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity and make him/her carefully make a decision regarding the previous decision (decision regarding the first decision). It can also make the player feel uncomfortable and buy them time, during which they can be reminded of the first display. In addition, since a lever operation subsequent to the input operation may result in a decision regarding the previous decision (decision regarding the first decision), it is possible to provide a smooth decision method for players accustomed to the game. can. In addition, it is possible to prevent unintended operations by the player and prevent the player from losing motivation to play.

In addition, when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and after the display of the second display ends and during the first display, the first display is displayed. The third display is not displayed even if the operation is performed, but if an operation other than the first operation (hereinafter referred to as "second operation") is performed, the third display is displayed. The display may be configured to be displayable.

In addition, an operation means (for example, PUSH button 194 shown in FIG. 251(B), etc.) that may be used for production is provided, and when the operation means is operated while the first display is displayed, , the third display is configured to be displayable, the display of the second display ends when the first operation is performed in the first state, and after the display of the second display ends The third display may be displayed when the operation means is operated.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make a decision regarding the first decision without being affected by the display state by the operation means that may be used for the effect. In addition, since it is possible to make a stable decision with the operation means that may be used for the production, it is possible to make the player who is not interested in the operation means pay attention to the operation means and enjoy the production. Sometimes we can. In addition, it is possible to prevent unintended operations by the player and prevent the player from losing motivation to play.

Note that the operation means that may be used for production may be an operation means capable of adjusting the volume of sound output means (eg, speaker), or light output means (eg, LED, lamp, liquid crystal display device). It may also be an operating means capable of adjusting the amount of light and adjusting the luminance.

Further, one display among the plurality of types of display is a fourth display (for example, a screen suggesting that the AT2 state has been established), and from a state in which the fourth display is displayed to the fourth display. The first display is configured to be displayed, and when the first operation is performed in the state where the fourth display is displayed, the third display is configured to be displayed. may have been

With such a configuration, the decision regarding the first decision can be made smoothly. In addition, it is possible to provide a smooth decision method for a player accustomed to the game. In addition, it is possible to prevent unintended operations by the player and prevent the player from losing motivation to play.

Further, the second display can be started to be displayed while the fourth display is being displayed, and the first display is displayed after the fourth display is started to be displayed. The third display may be displayed when the first operation is performed in a state where the second display is displayed, the display of which is started before the third display is performed.

With such a configuration, the decision regarding the first decision can be made smoothly. In addition, it is possible to provide a smooth decision method for a player accustomed to the game. In addition, it is conceivable that a player who causes the second display to be displayed instead of the first display in a state in which the first display can be displayed is not interested in the decision regarding the first display. Such a player can be smoothly determined. In addition, it is possible to prevent unintended operations by the player and prevent the player from losing motivation to play.

In addition, a lottery means (for example, winning combination internal lottery processing (step S104) shown in FIG. 158) is provided for performing lottery processing related to internal winning of a winning combination and determining the lottery result, and the winning combination can be won regardless of the insertion of game media. including a replay combination that can be replayed at any time, and in a state in which execution of the replay cannot be started, both of the first display and the second display can be displayed. and only the first display out of the first display and the second display may be displayed in the state in which execution of the replay can be started.

Further, in a state in which execution of the replay can be started and the first display is displayed, the third display is not displayed even if the first operation is performed. may be configured.

Further, in a state in which execution of the replay can be started and the fourth display is displayed, the third display is not displayed even if the first operation is performed. may be configured.

Further, one of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display (for example, an interlocking effect shown in FIG. 212), and the fifth display is a display configured by displaying a plurality of scenes. A display of the plurality of scenes includes a display of a first scene and a display of a second scene, and the display of the first scene is the display of the first scene while the first display is being displayed. The display of the second scene is started when the first operation is performed while the first display is not displayed. It may be an indication that there is a case.

In addition, a game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (hereinafter referred to as "first game"; for example, a three-bet game) and a game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number (hereinafter referred to as "first game"; , a "second game", for example, a two-coin bet game), wherein the second number is a number different from the first number, and the second number is different from the first number. Also, the first game is a game more advantageous to the player, and the third display is not displayed even if the first operation is performed in the first state in the first game In the first state of the second game, even if the first operation is performed, the third display may not be displayed.

With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp whether the game is being played in the first game or the second game depending on whether or not the decision regarding the first decision is executed. In some cases, the player can notice that the first game is more advantageous than the second game.

It should be noted that, during the AT2 state (or AT1 state), an increase display of points (or a display (title or item) corresponding to the internal points) may be performed according to the minor win. Also, the advantage in the judgment state may be changed according to the value. Also, based on the points accumulated by the player, etc., in the final stage of the game, such as the AT2 state, the mode of the judge state may be determined or notified.

In addition, in the case of the second game (double-play game), it may be configured so that there is no increase in points, items, or the like. Further, when the second game (double-play game) is configured not to display (skip) a specific scene, it may be configured not to display (skip) the fanning effect.

In addition, on a game machine with specifications where the bonus symbols are complete unless the symbols are avoided, operation navigation is performed in a displayable state (in the case of a match state, except for replay, it is lost, and it is not always drawn in). may In addition, when the symbols are aligned, a predetermined effect display is repeatedly performed (for example, a still image is displayed continuously), and even if the final game of the advantageous section is reached at that time, the number of acquisitions, etc. may be displayed. Further, the predetermined effect may be continued even after the transition to the normal section (after the next game).

Further, it is also possible to shift to the default screen of the normal game state after the bonus without shifting to the advantageous section during the bonus. Also, during the bonus, the game state may shift to a game state in which only the second game (2-bet game) is possible. In other words, in a game machine designed to collect bonus symbols unless symbols are avoided, only the second game (two bet game) may be allowed during the bonus. It should be noted that, during the bonus, a game with 2 IN and 2 OUT and a difference of 0 is played over several tens of games, and the bonus may be terminated when the payout exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 60). .

Further, even if the value of the high navigation state counter reaches 19 games remaining during the bonus of the double bet game, the transition to the LMT state may be prevented. Alternatively, the ED effect may be started (or the ED effect may not be performed) without transitioning to the LMT state. Also, for example, if the bonus ends before the number of remaining games reaches 0, it may be possible to shift to the LMT state thereafter (or it may always shift, or if it shifts may be). In addition, even after the transition to the low navigation state due to the reaching of the limiter during the bonus, the second game (double bet game) may be forced and the transition to the high navigation state may not occur during the game. good.

[Embodiment 9]
A slot machine according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. In order to avoid duplication of explanation, in principle only the configuration different from the game machines according to the sixth to third embodiments will be explained. In principle, FIGS. 256 to 305 are used only for the explanation of the ninth embodiment. The code shown in 305 has priority.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 256 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 256 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown) are housed in the center of the main body 101 and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. and a light-receiving portion, a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line. The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 to be activated.

The notification lamp 123 informs the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. It's a lamp to let you know. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment lights up until the bonus game ends after the bonus notification for notifying the bonus determination. Note that the notification lamp 123 may be lit before the bonus is announced (during the bonus or just before the bonus is announced). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation executing device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110 to 112. . More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped.

Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be called the first stop reel, the reel to be stopped by the second stop operation may be called the second stop reel, and the reel to be stopped by the third stop operation may be called the third stop reel.

Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137-139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110-112 is called the operation order or the pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be lit to inform the player.

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the AT system game state of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can recognize the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190 .

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) changes to the front of the slot machine 100 (game display). (user side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

It should be noted that, even if the display device is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen is rectangular, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Note that the notification lamp 123 and the high-navigation state lamp 190 notify the predetermined information by lighting the lamps, but the manner of notification is not limited to the lighting of the lamps. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a partial area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a full liquid crystal slot machine, the area near the reels 110 to 112 may be used). In the following description, the lighting of the notification lamp 123 or the high-navigation state lamp 190 is meant to include notification by other production devices (for example, a display device, etc.) having the same function.

<Inside the housing>
FIG. 257 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. The main body 101 is a box-shaped body surrounded by an upper plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a lower plate 264 and a rear plate 242, and having an open front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board housing case 210 containing a main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242. Three reels 110-112 are arranged below. On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the left side plate 260, a first sub control board housing the first sub control board constituting the first sub control unit is stored. A case 220 is provided. In addition, an external centralized terminal board 248 connected to the main control board and outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in the bucket) is disposed on the lower plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is arranged, and a power switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252 . The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate when the door is closed.

The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies power to each of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, etc., which will be described later. Supplied to the control unit and each device. In addition, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided for supplying power to predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after external power is cut off. there is

A medal auxiliary storage box 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal dispensing device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind it (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 265 , and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101 . there is

The front door 102 is hinged to the side plate 260 on the left side of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276. Above the liquid crystal display device 157, a production device 160 and a production control board (illustrated) for controlling the production device 160 are provided. omitted), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. Below the liquid crystal display device 157, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals, and a path 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals onto the medal receiving tray 161. there is Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 180 .

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control part>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and stopping of the reels. A ROM 306 for storing positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A WDT (watch dog timer) 314 is mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a random number generation circuit 316 that is activated when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). ).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110, index sensor of the reel 111, index sensor of the reel 112, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detects a put operation when The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the respective reels 110 to 112. Each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, the L become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (win line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, accumulated number display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 for driving the indicator 126, the payout number indicator 127, and the high navigation status lamp 190) is provided.

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output. In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 detects that the voltage value of the power supply is a predetermined value (this embodiment). 9v), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. Signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. there is This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. are doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like. are provided.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

The first sub-controller 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422. The drive circuit 422 is connected to various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input/output interface. 123, etc.) are connected.

A drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163 is provided in the first sub-controller 400, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. A timer 512 is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The second sub-controller 500 also has a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the second sub-controller 500 as a whole, image display data, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 516 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
Next, with reference to FIG. 259(a), the pattern arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. In addition, FIG. 1(a) is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols provided on each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (20 frames numbered 0 to 19 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (eight types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in this embodiment, the frame numbered 19 on the left reel 110 has a "bell pattern", the frame numbered 19 on the middle reel 111 has a "blank pattern", and the frame numbered 18 on the right reel 112 has a "seven 2 Designs” are arranged respectively. In the following description, "Seven 1 pattern" may be referred to as "Blue 7 (design)", and "Seven 2 design" may be referred to as "Red 7 (design)".

<Winning line>
Next, with reference to FIG. 259(b), the winning lines will be explained. FIG. 10(b) is a diagram showing pay lines of the slot machine according to Embodiment 6 of the present invention.

The symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 1) is displayed on the left reel upper stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 2). The symbol to be displayed is the left reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 3) is the left reel bottom stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (4 shown in the figure). (also referred to as symbol position 4) is the middle reel upper stage symbol, the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 5) is the middle reel middle stage symbol, The symbol displayed on the lower stage of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 6) is displayed on the middle reel lower stage symbol and the upper stage of the right reel 112 (position 7 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 7). The symbol displayed is the right reel upper stage symbol, the symbol displayed in the middle stage of the right reel 112 (the position of 8 in the figure; also called symbol position 8) is the right reel middle stage symbol, and the right reel 112 lower stage symbol (9 shown in the figure) position (also referred to as symbol position 9) are called right reel lower symbols, and each symbol on each reel 110 to 112 is vertically three-dimensionally displayed on each reel 110 to 112 through a symbol display window 113. , a total of nine are displayed.

In this embodiment, one prize line 114 is provided, which is a middle prize line L1 composed of a left reel middle pattern (symbol position 2), a middle reel middle pattern (symbol position 5) and a right reel middle pattern (symbol position 8). ing. The winning line 114 is a line set at a symbol stop position that can be visually recognized through the reel window 113, and is a symbol corresponding to a winning combination to be described later with reference to FIGS. This is the line on which it is determined whether or not the combination has been displayed. FIG. 152(b) shows the middle winning line L1. A valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “valid line”) is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media.

The slot machine 100 of this embodiment can bet three or two, and when the number of inserted medals is less than two, none of the winning lines are activated and three or two medals are placed. The winning line L1 becomes effective when a coin is betted. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 .

Also, the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, a right-down winning line consisting of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel lower symbols, and left reel lower symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel upper symbols. A total of three pay lines 114 may be set as the valid pay lines 114, or the number of pay lines 114 corresponding to the number of bets may be set as the valid pay lines 114.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 260(a) and 260(b). FIG. 10(a) shows the types of winning combinations (including activated combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the activation or payout of each winning combination in a three-coin bet game. (b) is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including active combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and activation or payout of each winning combination in a two-coin bet game.

The winning combination of the slot machine 100 includes special combinations (special combination 1, special combination 2), general combinations (replay combination 1 to replay combination 13, small combination 1 to small combination 5), and the like. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Of the winning combinations in this embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations that shift to a special game state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. Further, the replay combination 1 to replay combination 13 are combinations that can be replayed without inserting new medals. These winning hands are sometimes referred to as "working hands". Further, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. Winning a special role 2 and a replay role 1 to a replay role 13 are included.

The special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations (operating combination) that shift to a special game state by winning a prize. In this example, the special combination 1 is a combination that can be won only in the 3-coin bet game, and the special combination 2 is a combination that can be won only in the 2-coin bet game. It should be noted that no medals are paid out for winning this role. The corresponding symbol combination is "seven 1-seven 1-seven 2" for special role 1 (BB1) and "BAR-BAR-seven 1" for special role 2 (BB2).

When the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to this internally won combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special combination 1, the main control unit 300 shifts the game state to the internal winning state of the special combination 1 (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2). Further, when the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special combination 2, the main control unit 300 shifts the game state to the internal winning state of the special combination 2 (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3). .

This flag is kept ON until the internal winning combination is won, and the state in which the internally winning combination is likely to be won in the next and subsequent games. That is, even if the special role is not won in the game in which the special role 1 or the special role 2 is internally won, the special role will be internally won in the game after the next time, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (for example, special If the winning combination 1 is internally won, the pattern combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2 (BB1)") will be in a state where it is easy to win all together. This special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2) and special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

The main control unit 300 shifts the game state to a special game state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special prize 1 or the special prize 2. Furthermore, in this special game state, when a predetermined number of payouts (in this example, 110 for winning by BB1 and 55 for winning by BB2) are paid out, a replay low probability state (hereinafter, this state will be referred to as RT1) there is). The special game state (RT4) and the low replay probability state (RT1) will be described later.

The “replay role (replay role 1 to replay role 13)” is a winning role (operating role) that can be played without inserting medals (game media) in the next game due to winning, No medals will be paid out. In addition, the corresponding symbol combination is "replay-replay-replay" for replay role 1 (normal replay), "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1" for replay role 2 (effect replay 1), and replay role 3 (Effect replay 2) is "seven 1-seven 2-seven 1", etc., as shown in FIG.

“Small wins (small wins 1 to 5)” are winning wins in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning. The role 2 (watermelon 1) is “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon”, etc., as shown in FIG. Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in the figure. In the case of "ANY-cherry-ANY", the symbol of the middle reel 111 should be "cherry", and the symbols of the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 may be any symbols.

<Types of game state>
Next, the types and transitions of game states of the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 261(a) is a transition diagram of the game state of the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100. FIG.

The main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a low replay probability state (RT1), a high replay probability state and a special prize 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a replay high probability state and a special prize 2 internal winning state. It has a state (RT3) and a special game state (RT4). In the present embodiment, these four game states are referred to as RT-based game states. In addition, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls a state related to so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter referred to as an AT-based game state), and according to the AT-based game state determined by the main control unit 300, The first sub-control section 400 is designed to set the game state. The game state of the AT system will be described later with reference to FIG. 261(b).

In addition, the replay low probability state (RT1) is a state in which the probability of operating the condition device related to the replay combination does not change (default state), a special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a special combination 2 internal winning state. (RT3) and the special game state (RT4) are also states in which the probability of activation of the condition device relating to the replay combination varies from the default state.

<Lottery table>
FIG. 262(a) is a diagram showing a lottery table used for internal lottery processing for a winning combination in a 3-coin bet game, and FIG. It is a figure which shows a part of lottery table used. The horizontal axis represents each game state (RT type game state), and the vertical axis represents the lottery value of each winning combination. In addition, the item "No." in each figure is a number attached to each lottery result for convenience, and in the case of a single role, one "No." corresponds to one "condition device" However, in the case of duplicate hands, one "No." corresponds to multiple "conditional devices."

Although the lottery table used in the 2-bet game is different from the lottery table used in the 3-bet game, FIG. omitted. In this example, the expected value of game media obtained by a small winning combination is set to be higher in the 2-ply game than in the 3-ply game.

The internal winning probability of a winning combination in each gaming state, which will be explained later, is obtained from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306, and the numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each winning combination is obtained at the time of the internal lottery. It is obtained by a value divided by numerical data within a numerical range (eg, 65535). For example, in the replay low probability state (RT1), the lottery value for the small winning combination 2 is 512, and the winning probability for the small winning combination 1 is 512/65536×100≈0.8%. The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination and loss.

A random number value obtained as a result of executing an internal lottery is determined as a value corresponding to lottery data corresponding to which combination, and an internal lottery combination is determined. Setting 1 to setting 6 are prepared for this lottery data with different winning probabilities of at least one combination, and the staff of the game parlor can arbitrarily select and set any of the setting values. It should be noted that the internal winning probability shown in this figure is an example, and the probability is not limited to this.

Hereinafter, the RT system game state of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The low replay probability state is the lowest (disadvantageous to the player) game state among the other game states (for example, game states excluding the special game state) in which the internal winning probability of replay is the lowest, and is referred to as the normal game state. There is also In the replay low-probability state, the lottery table in the "RT1" column on the horizontal axis shown in FIG.

Winning hands that are internally won in the replay low probability state include special hand 1 (condition device No. 1, only 3 bet games), special hand 2 (not shown, only 2 bet games), replay hand 1 ( Condition device No. 2), replay hands 2, 4 to 10 (condition device No. 3), replay hands 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13 (condition device No. 4), small hand 1 to small There is a role 5 (condition device No. 5 to 9). If the winning combination is not won, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. It should be noted that the fact that the symbol combination relating to the winning line is not stopped may be referred to as "losing". In addition, there is a case where the fact that the player did not win the winning role is expressed as "won the wrong way".

Here, "replay hands 2, 4 to 10" are replay hands 2, replay hands 4, replay hands 5, replay hands 6, replay hands 7, replay hands 8, replay hands 9 , and replay combination 10 are internally elected at the same time. In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to which combination is displayed is determined according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order (in this example, when the stop operation is performed by pressing in the reverse direction), the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 2 is displayed. Displayed on the winning line, otherwise, replay combination 4, replay combination 5, replay combination 6, replay combination 7, replay combination according to the timing of the stop operation of each reel 110 to 112 8, a symbol combination corresponding to either a replay combination 9 or a replay combination 10 is displayed on the winning line. It should be noted that, like this "replayed combination 2, 4 to 10", there is a case where the combination in which the winning combination is determined by the order of operations is called a "push order combination".

Further, "replay hands 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13" are replay hands 3, replay hands 4, replay hands 6, replay hands 8, replay hands 10, replay hands 11 , replay combination 12, and replay combination 13 are internally elected at the same time. In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to which combination is displayed is determined according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order (in this example, when the stop operation is performed by pressing in the reverse direction), the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 3 is displayed. Displayed on the winning line, otherwise, replay combination 4, replay combination 6, replay combination 8, replay combination 10, replay combination according to the timing of the stop operation of each reel 110 to 112 11, a replay combination 12, and a replay combination 13 are displayed on the winning line.

When the "small winning combination 4" is internally won, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (bell) is displayed on the winning line according to the player's operation order (Fig. 262 ( a) See remarks). More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order, "Bell-Bell-Bell" is displayed on the winning line, and 11 medals are paid out ( bell award). On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed according to the correct operation order, "Bell-Bell-Bell" is not displayed on the winning line (losing).

In addition, even if the "small win 4" is internally won and the stop operation is not performed according to the correct operation order, there is a case where the player wins a one-coin win where one medal is paid out. If the stop operation is performed in accordance with the predetermined incorrect operation order, the win is won, and if the stop operation is performed in accordance with the other incorrect operation order, the win is not awarded, It is configured so as not to pay out medals.

Further, the "small winning combination 4" is composed of the "small winning combination 4a" and the "small winning combination 4b", and when the "small winning combination 4a" is internally won, "Bell-Bell-Bell" is selected according to the order of operation of the player. ” is displayed on the pay line. On the other hand, if the “small win 4b” is internally won, “Bell-Bell-Bell” is displayed on the pay line regardless of the operation order. It may be configured as

Here, with reference to FIG. 262(b), the operation order for the correct answer of "small winning combination 4" will be described in detail. "Small role 4" is exactly six of "small role 4LCR", "small role 4LRC", "small role 4CLR", "small role 4CRL", "small role 4RLC", and "small role 4RCL". , and a different correct operation order is assigned to each of the subdivided "small wins 4". It should be noted that the range of the lottery data associated with each of the six subdivided "small wins 4" is the same.

For example, when the "small win 4LCR" of the "small win 4" is internally won, the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The stop operation is the correct operation, and the other stop operations are the incorrect operations. Further, when the "small winning combination 4 CRL" of the "small winning combination 4" is internally won, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110. The stop operation is the correct operation.

FIG. 261(a) shows that when the special combination 1 is internally elected (when the condition (A) is satisfied), the state shifts to the special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2), which will be described later. When the special combination 2 is internally elected (when the condition (B) is satisfied), it is indicated that the state shifts to the special combination 2 internal election state (RT3) described later.

<Special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), Special role 2 internal winning state (RT3)>
Special combination internal winning state (RT2) and special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) (hereinafter collectively referred to as "special combination internal winning state") are replay low probability states (RT1 ), the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is set to ON, and the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing. By doing, it is a game state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the special role corresponding to this flag can be displayed.

In the special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), the internal winning winning combination is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the "RT2" column on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. In RT3), a winning combination for internal winning is selected by referring to the lottery table in the row of "RT3" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 262(a). Winning hands internally won in the special role internal winning state include replay hand 1, replay hands 2, 4 to 10, replay hands 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13, small hand 1 to small hand 4. There is If the winning combination is not won, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. In addition, in FIG. 261(a), in the special role internal winning state, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is displayed (when the condition (C) is satisfied), a special game to be described later is performed. A transition to state (RT4) is shown.

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special game state (RT4) is the most advantageous game state for the player among all the game states. In the special game state, the lottery table in the row of "RT4" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. The winning combination internally won in the special game state is only the small combination 5. - 特許庁Also, if the winning combination is not won, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed.

FIG. 261(a) shows that, in the special game state (RT4), when the prescribed number of coins is paid out (when the condition (D) is satisfied), the state shifts to the replay low probability state (RT1). ing. Specifically, when the special game state is entered based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1, when more than 110 medals are paid out, the replay low probability state (RT1) is entered. transition to In addition, when the state is shifted to the special game state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 2, the state is shifted to the replay low probability state (RT1) when more than 55 medals are paid out. .

In the present embodiment, the special game state ends when the specified number of payouts is executed. For example, the game may end when a prize is won eight times, or when a predetermined number of games (for example, six times) are played. That is, the condition (D) shown in FIG. 261(a) is not limited to this example.

<Transition of game state of AT system>
Next, with reference to FIG. 261(b), the game state of the AT system will be described. FIG. 261(b) is a transition diagram of the AT system game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. FIG.

The game state of the AT system is roughly classified into a low navigation state and a high navigation state, as shown in FIG. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode. The high-navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is higher than in the low-navigation state, and is also called an AT mode. Here, the operation navigator means that an internal winning combination (in this example, replay combination 2, 4 to 10, replay combination 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13, or a small combination 4) is won. In this case, an effect to notify the correct operation order (push order) (details will be described later) and an effect to notify the operation timing (for example, grouping the reel patterns into one or more groups (color coding, symbols and numbers given) and suggesting one or more groups (colors, symbols, numbers, etc.), or an effect that notifies both the correct operation order (push order) and operation timing.

That is, operation navigation refers to an effect that notifies the content of a stop operation for obtaining medals, or the content of a stop operation for shifting to an advantageous game state or maintaining an advantageous game state.

Operation navigation will now be described with reference to FIGS. 262(b) and 263. FIG. In this embodiment, the payout number display 127 and effect image display device 157 are used to execute operation navigation. FIG. 262(b) is a diagram for explaining the order of correct operation for pushing the winning combination of the slot machine according to Embodiment 6 of the present invention, and FIG. It is a diagram.

For example, the display data 01 is data suggesting a stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel, the display data 02 is data suggesting a stop operation with the middle reel 111 as the first stop reel, and the display data 03 is , and data suggesting a stop operation with the right reel 112 as the first stop reel.

Therefore, when "replay hands 2, 4 to 10" or "replay hands 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13" are internally won in the AT mode, the first stop reel is the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is correct, the display data 03 suggesting that the first stop operation is right is selected, and the payout number indicator 127 displays a lighting mode corresponding to the display data 03, and an effect image is displayed. Device 157 displays an image (eg, the characters “--1”) that suggests that the first stopping reel is right reel 112 .

The display data 04 is data suggesting a stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel, the middle reel 111 as the second stop reel, and the right reel 112 as the third stop reel, and the display data 05 is the first stop reel. is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the middle reel 111. Display data 06 is the first stop reel, the middle reel 111, and the second stop reel. Data suggesting a stop operation with the left reel 110 and the third stop reel as the right reel 112, and the display data 07 are the first stop reel as the middle reel 111, the second stop reel as the right reel 112, and the third stop reel as the left reel. Data suggesting a stop operation with the reel 110, the display data 08 is data suggesting a stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112, the second stop reel as the left reel 110, and the third stop reel as the middle reel 112. , the display data 09 is data suggesting a stop operation with the right reel 112 as the first stop reel, the middle reel 111 as the second stop reel, and the left reel 110 as the third stop reel.

Therefore, when the small win 4CLR of the "small win 4" is internally won in the AT mode, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is correct, the display data 06 suggesting that the first stop operation is middle, the second stop operation is left, and the third stop operation is right is selected. and the effect image display device 157 indicates that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. An image (for example, the characters “213”) is displayed.

In this embodiment, based on the lighting mode of the payout number indicator 127, it is possible to determine whether the internal winning combination is a replay combination or a small combination of 4. However, for example, the stop operation of the correct answer for the small winning combination 4 may be three choices like the replay winning combination, and the small winning combination 4 may also be notified using the display data 01-03. In this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode. In addition, it is also possible to configure the stop operation of the correct answer for the replay combination to be six options such as the small combination 4, and to notify the replay combination using the display data 04 to 09 as well. Also in this case, it is not possible to determine the internal winning combination only by the lighting mode.

In the present embodiment, the low navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of manipulation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of manipulation navigation is higher than in the low navigation state. The state in which the operation navigation is not executed and the high navigation state may be set as the state in which the operation navigation is executed. When the stop operation is performed according to the operation content of the operation navigation, a result advantageous to the player is brought about, so the high navigation state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state. Here, the term “advantageous” specifically refers to the total number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machine as compared to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets when playing the game for a predetermined period of time. It refers to the ratio, the so-called payout rate (ball output rate).

In this embodiment, when a certain condition is satisfied in the low navigation state (for example, when winning a winning combination other than losing), the game shifts to the normal state of the high navigation state. After that, as shown in FIG. 261(c), for example, the transition is made in the order of fixed notification state→AT1 state→AT2 state, and from this AT2 state, a route of shifting to a normal game state via a pullback state; There is a route for shifting (returning) from the AT2 state to the AT1 state again. In this embodiment, there is one set of AT states (AT1 state and AT2 state), and in principle, when two sets are completed, the state shifts to the pullback state.

Here, the AT1 state is an AT state in which the progress of the game is controlled by the number of games (AT state of game number management), and ends when, for example, a certain number of games (for example, 20 G) are completed. On the other hand, the AT2 state is an AT state in which the progress of the game is controlled by the difference in the number of game media (AT state of management of the difference in the number of game media). end if

In addition, the AT1 state and AT2 state both have a ball payout rate set to a value greater than 1. It is an AT state in which the ball rate is set low, and the AT2 state is an AT state in which the ball payout rate is set higher than that in the AT1 state. In the AT1 state, for example, when the pressing order bell is won, the probability of operation navigation being executed is lower than in the AT2 state, or the pressing order is notified by two-choice navigation (two-choice operation navigation), or , and by performing operation navigation that combines these, the payout rate is lower than in the AT2 state.

Here, "two-choice navigation (two-choice operation navigation)" is a kind of operation navigation, and the operation order (push order) of the correct stop operation, the timing of the stop operation, etc. are notified with two options. Say. For example, when the small win 4CLR of the "small win 4" is internally won in the AT mode, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The stop operation is the correct answer, but in 2-choice navigation, while suggesting that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, an image that conceals the operation order of the second stop reel and the third stop reel (for example, (image including letters and numbers “?1?”) is displayed on the effect image display device 157 .

In this example, the player performs a stop operation with the middle reel 111 as the first stop reel, the left reel 110 as the second stop reel, and the right reel 112 as the third stop reel, or the middle reel 111 as the first stop reel, A stop operation is performed by selecting either one of the stop operation with the right reel 112 as the second stop reel and the left reel 110 as the third stop reel (selecting one from two kinds of pressing orders). Become.

Further, although details will be described later, if a certain condition is satisfied in the high navigation state, the vehicle shifts to the LMT (limit) state.

<AT system state transition>
FIG. 261(b) is a diagram showing an effect state in each game state of the AT system. Each game state of the AT system is subdivided and managed as shown in FIG. 261(b), which is called an effect state. Specifically, the low-navigation state rendering state includes a normal state, and the high-navigation state rendering state includes a normal state, a fixed notification state, a retraction state, an AT1 state, an AT2 state, and an LMT (limit) state. Note that the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state are, in principle, states in which the number of paid balls increases.

Here, the limit state means, in principle, the remaining 20 games or less in the high-navigation state, that is, the presentation state from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high-navigation state. In this embodiment, when the high-navigation state becomes 20 or less games remaining, an ending effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ED effect") suggesting the end of the high-navigation state is executed.

<Production table>
Next, the effect table provided in the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 264. FIG. FIG. 264(a) shows an image of an effect table provided in the first sub-control section 400. FIG. The storage means (for example, ROM 406 and RAM 408 shown in FIG. 258) of the first sub-control section 400 stores an effect table provided for each effect state.

The first sub-control unit 400, in the command processing (step S3604) of the first sub-control unit main processing to be described later, effect information included in the command received from the main control unit 300 (for example, effect state, high navigation state counter, Production state counter, etc.) is acquired, and in the subsequent production control process (step S3605), the production table corresponding to the production state, etc. is referred to, and production corresponding to the production state counter, etc. is performed. For example, when the current effect state is the AT1 state, the effect table corresponding to the AT1 state (AT1 state effect table) is referred to, and processing such as reading effect data for executing the later-described AT1 effect from the ROM 406 is performed. If the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

Further, when the current effect state is the LMT state, the effect table corresponding to the LMT state (LMT state effect table) is referred to, and processing such as reading effect data for executing the LMT effect described later from the ROM 406 is performed. If the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

FIG. 264(b) is a diagram showing an example of the LMT state rendering table. When the effect state included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is the LMT state, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the LMT state effect table as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the corresponding opportunity (starting condition, end condition, etc. of the performance) has arrived, and when the opportunity has arrived, the performance corresponding to the counter is performed.

Specifically, when effect control is performed according to the LMT state effect table shown in FIG. When the pressing operation (lever on) is received, using the lottery table for the setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. to select a predetermined effect, perform processing such as reading effect data for executing the effect from the ROM 406, and execute setting suggestion effect A (for example, display of a character image).

Also, when the value of the effect state counter is 0 (the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0) and the third stop operation is received, the lottery table for setting suggestion effect B shown in FIG. Select a predetermined effect from among a plurality of types of effects B1 to B10 according to the current set value, perform processing such as reading effect data for executing the effect from the ROM 406, etc., and perform setting suggestion effect B (for example, the background image of the end screen).

Further, although the details will be described later, in the case of a two-coin bet game, in the case of controlling to continuously display a specific scene (not to display the subsequent scene) in the interlocking effect, the main control unit 300 is in the effect state. Since the counter value is not updated, the first sub-control unit 400 continues to display the scene corresponding to the same rendering state counter value. It should be noted that the method of controlling to continuously display a specific scene (not to display subsequent scenes) in the interlocked effect is not limited to this example. It may be configured not to transmit the command for displaying the subsequent scene in the production.

Note that the effect mode, type, determination method, etc. of the setting suggestion effect are not limited to this example. For example, as shown in FIG. , the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be changed. For example, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be higher or lower when the effect state counter (the number of remaining games in the LMT state) is larger than when it is small.

<Operation of the slot machine>
Based on the above characteristics, the processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt is disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables to be stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the WDT 314 is permitted to operate, and the initialization is performed. Set values, etc.

In step S102, a bet number setting/start operation acceptance process (details will be described later) is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted, and preparations are made to send an insert command indicating that the medals have been inserted. When the player wins the replay role in the previous game, the processing of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so the player does not need to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, winning line determination processing is performed to determine the number of inserted medals and to determine an effective winning line.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is obtained, and internal winning combination lottery processing is performed. In the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the acquired random number, and the result of this internal lottery is displayed. Prepare to send the internal lottery command to the first sub-controller 400 . As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the working combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is turned on.

In step S105, reel stop data selection processing for selecting reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery processing. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300. FIG. Also, in step S105, preparations are made to transmit a reel stop data command containing information about the selected reel stop data to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S106, an effect control process A (details will be described later) relating to the control of the game state of the AT system is executed based on the start lever operation. In step S107, the process for production|presentation is performed. In this effect processing, freeze effect control and the like are performed.

Here, the freeze effect refers to a effect that makes the originally planned effect seem to be interrupted in the middle, a effect that makes the slot machine stop responding, or the like. Furthermore, with regard to light emission, for example, stopping the change in lighting mode is referred to as freezing. With regard to sound output, for example, continuing to output the same sound is referred to as freezing. Stopping may be referred to as freezing.

In step S108, reel rotation start processing is executed to start rotation of all the reels 110-112.

In step S109, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, it is possible to accept the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when one of the stop buttons is pressed, a stop table of reel stop data is created in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. One of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of frames to be drawn set in the stop table. When all the reels 110-112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S110. In this step S109, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (more specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command, the second stop operation, and the for the stop button reception 2 command, and for the third stop operation, prepare to transmit the stop button reception 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel (Specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop command for the third stop operation 3 command) to the first sub-controller 400.

In step S110, winning determination processing for determining winning is performed. In this winning determination process, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the activated pay line, it is determined that a small win 3 (Bell) has been won. Also, in this step S110, preparations are made to transmit a prize determination command indicating the result of the prize determination to the first sub-control section 400. FIG.

In step S111, medal awarding processing is performed. In the medal awarding process, if the player wins some winning combination with a payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S112, game state control processing is performed. In the game state control processing, processing relating to the transition of each game state of the RT system is performed, and the game state is shifted when the start condition or end condition is met. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command including information indicating the current RT-system game state.

In step S113, an effect control process B (details will be described later) relating to the control of the game state of the AT system is executed. In step S114, a high-navigation state termination process (details will be described later) relating to termination of the high-navigation state is executed.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. Various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S2006 in FIG. 266) of the main controller timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S2001, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S2002, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S2003, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S2004, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed. In step S2005, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S<b>2006 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S2007, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S2008, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S2003, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S2009, it monitors whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (power shutdown is detected), the process proceeds to step S2011, and if the low voltage signal is off (power shutdown is not detected), the process proceeds to step S2010.

In step S2010, various processes for ending the timer interrupt ending process are performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S2001 are set in the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S2011, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 when power is restored, and power failure processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. 265, and then returns to the main control unit main processing shown in FIG.

<Processing of the first sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 267(a) is a flow chart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. 267(b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. 267(c) is a flow chart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 267(d) is a flow chart of effect control processing of the first sub-control section 400. FIG.

First, the main processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 267(a). When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S3001. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state.

In step S3002, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S3003. In step S3003, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S3004, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S3005, effect control processing is performed. Although details will be described later, here, processing related to display of the number of coins and processing such as production preparation are performed according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408 . This preparation includes, for example, processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and updating the effect data when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S3006, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command for the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S3005, this command is output to the sound source IC 418. FIG. In step S3007, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to various lamps 420 in the performance data read in step S3005, this command is output to the drive circuit 422. FIG.

In step S3008, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the performance data read in step S3005, this command is output to the driving circuit 424. FIG. In step S3009, information output processing is performed to set the transmission of a command to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-controller 500 in the effect data read out in step S3005, the setting for outputting this control command is made, and the process returns to step S3002.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 267(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S3101 of command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 267(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S3201, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S3002 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 267(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S3002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S3202, the command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S3009, the random number value for effect is updated, and the like.

Next, the effect control processing of the first sub-control section 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 267(b). At step S3301 of this effect control process, the number display related process (details will be described later) is performed, and at the next step S3302, after other effect control processes are performed, the effect control process is terminated.

<Processing of the second sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 268(a) is a flow chart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. 268(b) is a flow chart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 268(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. 268(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S4001 of FIG. 268(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S4001. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, initialization processing of storage areas in the VRAM 536, and the like are performed.

In step S4002, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S4003. In step S4003, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S4004, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S4005, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S4004, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S4006, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S4005. For example, if there is an image control instruction in the effect data read in step S4005, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S4002.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 268(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S4101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 268(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S4201, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S4002 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 268(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S4002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S4202, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing in step S4006 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 268(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S4301, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 536), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 534 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S4302, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 534. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S4303; otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S4303, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S4301, the CPU 504 obtains information of the image data forming the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 536, image size, and so on). , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), transparency, etc.) to the VDP 534 . The VDP 534 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S4304, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S4305, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 534 based on the end of image rendering. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S5306; wait for is entered.

In step S4306, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Bet number setting/start operation acceptance process>
Next, with reference to FIG. 269(a), the bet amount setting/start operation receiving process will be described. FIG. 269(a) is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the bet number setting/start operation acceptance process in step S102 of FIG.

In step S201, in a medal-insertable state before the start lever is operated, a high-navigation state update process (details will be described later) relating to the transition from the low-navigation state to the high-navigation state and the update of the high-navigation state is executed.

In step S202, other bet amount setting/start operation acceptance processing is executed. That is, the number of bets is set, and it is determined whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated.

<High navigation state update process>
Next, high navigation state update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 269(b). FIG. 269(b) is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of high navigation state update processing in step S201 of FIG. 269(a).

In step S301, it is determined whether or not high navigation state counter>0. If the high navigation state counter>0, the process proceeds to step S302; otherwise, the high navigation state update process ends. In step S302, 1 is subtracted from the value of the high navigation state counter.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state flag is off. The high navigation state flag is a flag indicating whether or not the game state of the AT system is in the high navigation state. When ON, it indicates a high navigation state, and when OFF, it indicates a low navigation state. If the high navigation state flag is off, the process proceeds to step S304; otherwise, the high navigation state update process ends.

In step S304, the high navigation state flag is turned on. In this embodiment, an initial value (in this example, 1000) is set to the high navigation state counter in the game in which the transition from the low navigation state to the high navigation state is determined (see step S703 in FIG. 271(b), which will be described later). , and when the start lever of the next game is operated, it shifts to the high navigation state. By turning on the high navigation state flag, the high navigation state lamp 190 starts lighting.

<Production State Control Processing A>
Next, the effect state control process A will be described with reference to FIG. 270(a). FIG. 270(a) is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of effect state control processing A in step S106 of FIG.

In step S401, a game common process (details will be described later) is executed. In step S402, it is determined whether or not the processing prohibition flag is off. The processing prohibition flag is a flag indicating whether or not to execute processing related to the high navigation state in the high navigation state. When the processing prohibition flag is off, the game is capable of executing processing related to the high navigation state. , and when the processing prohibition flag is ON, it indicates that the game does not execute the processing related to the high navigation state. If the process prohibition flag is off, the process proceeds to step S403, otherwise, that is, if the process prohibition flag is on, the process proceeds to step S406.

In step S403, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state flag is off. If the high navigation state flag is off, the process proceeds to step S404, and if the high navigation state flag is not off, that is, it is on, the process proceeds to step S405.

In step S404, since the vehicle is in the low navigation state, low navigation state processing A (details will be described later) is executed. In step S405, since the vehicle is in the high navigation state, high navigation state processing A (details will be described later) is executed. In step S406, another effect state control process A is executed.

In the effect state control process A of this embodiment, a process prohibition flag is provided, and only when the process prohibition flag is off, the low navigation state process A or the high navigation state process A is executed, but the process prohibition flag is not provided. may In this case, the low navigation state processing A or the high navigation state processing A is always executed in the effect state control processing A.

<Process common to each game>
Next, the processing common to every game will be described with reference to FIG. 270(b). FIG. 270(b) is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the process common to every game in step S401 of FIG. 270(a).

In step S501, it is determined whether or not the conditions for executing high navigation state related processing are satisfied. Here, the condition for executing the high navigation state related processing is, for example, that the game is a recommended number game (in this example, a 3-coin bet game). The recommended number-of-numbers game is not limited to the 3-pieces game, and the recommended number-of-numbers game may differ for each state of the slot machine. As a result of the determination in step S501, if the conditions for executing high navigation state related processing are satisfied (for example, if the game is a 3-bet game), proceed to step S502, otherwise (for example , if the game is a two-coin bet game), the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S502, the processing prohibition flag is turned off. In step S503, the processing prohibition flag is turned on. In step S504, other common processing for each game is executed.

<Low navigation state processing A>
Next, the processing common to every game will be described with reference to FIG. 271(a). FIG. 271(a) is a flow chart showing in detail the low navigation state process A in step S404 of FIG. 270(a).

In step S601, high navigation state transition processing (details will be described later) for determining whether to transition to the high navigation state is executed. In step S602, another low navigation state process A is executed.

<High navigation state transition processing>
Next, high navigation state transition processing will be described with reference to FIG. 271(b). FIG. 271(b) is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of high navigation state transition processing in step S601 of FIG. 271(a).

In step S701, high navigation state transition determination is executed. In this high navigation state transition determination, when the high navigation state transition condition is satisfied (in this example, when winning a winning combination other than losing in the winning combination internal lottery process), it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied, and the following Decide to go from game to high nav state.

In step S702, it is determined whether or not the transition to the high navigation state has been determined. If so, the process proceeds to step S703, and if not, the high navigation state transition processing ends.

In step S703, an initial value (1000 in this example) is set to the high navigation state counter. Needless to say, the initial value of the high navigation state counter is not limited to 1,000, and may be, for example, 1,500. In step S705, other high navigation state transition processing is executed. Here, the number of games to be executed after shifting to the high-navigation state is set. For example, the ceiling counter is set to an initial value (700 in this example).

In step S701, in the high-navigation state transition determination, it is decided to transition to the high-navigation state when a winning combination other than a losing combination is won, but the high-navigation transition condition is not limited to this. The transition to the high navigation state may be determined based on the result of the lottery used, or a lottery may be conducted using a lottery value set for each winning combination, and the transition to the high navigation state may be made based on the result of the lottery. may be determined.

<High navigation state processing A>
Next, high navigation state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 272 is a flow chart showing in detail the high navigation state process A in step S405 of FIG. 270(a).

In step S801, high navigation state common processing (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S802, it is determined whether or not the rendering state is the normal state. If so, go to step S803, otherwise go to step S804. In step S803, normal state processing A (details will be described later) is executed. Although the details will be described later, in this normal state process A, for example, the number of games in the effect state (premonition state) is decremented. In addition, effect setting is performed according to the result of the internal winning combination lottery process of the game.

In step S804, it is determined whether or not the production state is the final notification state. In step S805, a confirmation notification state process A (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S806, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT1 state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S807, and if not, the process proceeds to step S810. In step S807, AT1 state processing A (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S810, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT2 state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S811, and if not, the process proceeds to step S812. In step S811, AT2 state processing A (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S812, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the pullback state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S813, and if not, the process proceeds to step S814. In step S813, pullback state processing A (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S814, an instruction information setting process (details will be described later) regarding setting of instruction information is executed.

<High navigation state common processing A>
Next, high navigation state common processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing in detail the high navigation state common processing A in step S801 of FIG.

In step S901, it is determined whether or not the rendering state counter>0. If the rendering state counter>0, the process proceeds to step S902, otherwise, the process proceeds to step S903. In step S902, 1 is subtracted from the value of the effect state counter. Here, the effect state counter is a counter for managing the transition of the effect state. If the number of games in each production state is determined by lottery, table, etc., the value of the production state counter may be set to the result of the lottery or the value obtained from the table, etc., or the state may be shifted to the high navigation state. When the game is played, the number of games in which some or all of the effects are performed may be collectively determined.

In step S903, it is determined whether or not the current rendering state is the LMT state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S904, and if not, the process proceeds to step S909.

In step S904, it is determined whether or not the value of the high navigation state counter is equal to or less than the LMT transition value A (19 in this example). The process proceeds to step S905. In this example, since the LMT state is 20G, the LMT transition value A is set to 19 (=20G-1G), but other numerical values may be used.

In step S905, it is determined whether or not the value of the difference number counter is equal to or less than the LMT shift value B (1840 in this example). Proceed to S909. In this example, when the LMT state is 20G, the maximum number of payouts in the 3-bet game is 11 (the maximum increase is 8), and the difference number exceeds 2000, the high-navigation state is terminated. Therefore, the LMT shift value B is set to 1840 (=2000 sheets−8 sheets×20 G), but other numerical values may be used.

In step S906, the LMT initial value (19 in this example) is set in the effect state counter, and in the next step S907, freeze information (various information for executing the freeze effect) is set. Also, in step S908, after the LMT state is set in the presentation state, the process proceeds to step S909. As a result, the presentation state shifts from the game to the LMT state.

In this example, the LMT initial value is set to 19 (=20G-1G) in order to shift from the game to the LMT state, but other values may be used. Also, the processing itself in step S906 may be deleted. With such a configuration, after shifting to the LMT state, it is possible to stay in the high navigation state until the number of games reaches the maximum number of games or until the difference number reaches the maximum difference number. , the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

In step S909, after executing other high navigation state common processing A, the high navigation state common processing A ends.

<Normal state processing A>
Next, normal state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 274 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of normal state processing A in step S803 of FIG.

In step S1001, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter>0. If the ceiling counter>0, the process proceeds to step S1002; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1002, 1 is subtracted from the value of the ceiling counter. Here, the ceiling counter is a counter for managing the number of games up to the ceiling. In this embodiment, the initial value (700 in this example) is set to the ceiling counter in step S705 of the high navigation state transition process described with reference to FIG. may

In step S1003, it is determined whether the AT1 winning flag is off or on, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S1004, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1011. In step S1004, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter is 0. If so, the process proceeds to step S1007, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1005. At step S1005, an AT1 transition lottery is performed. Here, the AT1 shift lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the AT1 state, and in this example, determination is made based on the results of internal lottery processing for winning combinations, random numbers, and the like. The content of the AT1 transition lottery is not limited to this example, and for example, the value of the high navigation state counter may be taken into account to determine the success or failure, or the points may be determined based on the results of the internal lottery process for the winning combination. may be given and the eligibility may be determined based on the points.

In step S1006, it is determined whether or not the AT1 transition lottery in step S1005 has been won. If the lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S1007, and if the lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S1016. In step S1007, an AT1 type lottery is performed. Here, the AT1 type lottery is a lottery for determining the type of the AT1 state, and in this example, either "high" or "low" is determined based on a random number or the like. In addition, the contents of the AT1 type lottery are not limited to this example, for example, "high" is selected as the AT1 type in the lottery when winning the AT1 transition lottery rather than the lottery when reaching the ceiling. A configuration that is easy (or difficult to be selected) may be adopted.

In step S1008, the result of the AT1 type lottery in step S1007 is set to AT1 type, and in the next step S1009, the number of games is determined by lottery, and the number of games is set in the effect state counter. Also, in step S1010, after turning on the AT1 winning flag, the process proceeds to step S1016.

At step S1011, it is determined whether or not the AT1 type is "low". In step S1012, a promotion counter addition lottery is performed. Here, the promotion counter addition lottery is a lottery for determining the numerical value to be added to the promotion counter, and in this example, the numerical value is determined based on a random number or the like. In step S1013, the numerical value (lottery result value) determined by the promotion counter addition lottery in step S1012 is added to the promotion counter, and then the process proceeds to step S1016.

In step S1106, after other normal state processing A is performed, the normal state processing A ends.

<Confirmation notification state processing A>
Next, with reference to FIG. 275, the confirmation notification state process A will be described. FIG. 275 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the decision notification state process A in step S805 of FIG.

In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the AT1 type is "low". In step S1102, a promotion counter addition lottery is performed. As described above, the promotion counter addition lottery is a lottery for determining the numerical value to be added to the promotion counter, and in this example, the numerical value is determined based on a random number or the like. In step S1103, the numerical value (lottery result value) determined by the promotion counter addition lottery in step S1102 is added to the promotion counter, and then the process proceeds to step S1104.

In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the value of the promotion counter is equal to or greater than the ceiling value (for example, 700). At step S1105, the AT1 type is set to "high" and the process proceeds to step S1109.

In step S1109, after performing other confirmation notification state processing A, the confirmation notification state processing A is terminated.

Although illustration is omitted, when the AT1 type is "high" in this example, an additional lottery may be performed to add (add) the number of sets of AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state). However, an AT2 expected acquisition number addition lottery, which will be described later, may be performed, or the number of game media that can be acquired in the AT2 state may be added by a lottery different from the AT2 expected acquisition number addition lottery.

<AT1 state processing A>
Next, with reference to FIG. 276, AT1 state processing A will be described. FIG. 276(a) is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of AT1 state processing A in step S807 of FIG. be.

In step S1201, a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions is performed. This AT2 expected acquisition number addition lottery is a lottery for adding the number of game media that can be acquired in the AT2 state. The number of coins to be added is determined based on the winning combination and the random number. In the next step S1202, the lottery result (additional number) of the AT2 expected acquisition number addition lottery in step S1201 is added to the count value of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter stored in the RAM 308, and then the process proceeds to step S1203.

In step S1203, after performing other AT1 state processing A, the AT1 state processing A ends. In the other AT1 state process A, for example, a process of transmitting a command including information indicating the updated count value of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter (AT2 expected acquisition number information) to the first sub-controller 400 is performed.

Here, the lottery table (for AT1) used in the lottery for adding the number of game media expected to be acquired in step S1201 is for determining the initial value (initial number) of the number of game media that can be acquired in the AT2 state, which will be described later. Compared to the lottery table (for AT2) shown in FIG. It is not added, but in the lottery table (for AT1), game media are added even if you lose and replay).

It should be noted that the lottery table used in the AT2 expected acquisition number addition lottery in the AT1 state process A is not limited to the example shown in FIG. , is set so as to increase the probability of adding game media. Therefore, for example, the lottery table (for AT1) may have more lottery results (winning combinations) to be added than the lottery table (for AT2), and in the case of the first lottery result, the lottery table ( It is always added in the lottery table (for AT1), but may not be added (or may not be added) in the lottery table (for AT2), and in the case of the first lottery result, the lottery table (AT1 (for AT2) and the lottery table (for AT2) are always added, but the added value may be different (or the same).

<AT2 state processing A>
Next, with reference to FIG. 277, AT2 state processing A will be described. FIG. 277(a) is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of AT2 state processing A in step S811 of FIG.

In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the previous game is non-replay (whether or not a replay role has been won), and in the case of non-replay, the process proceeds to step S1302, and in the case of replay, the process proceeds to step S1303. . In step S1302, after subtracting the inserted number (3 in this example) in the game from the AT2 expected acquisition number counter, the process proceeds to step S1303.

In step S1303, a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions is performed. This AT2 expected acquisition number addition lottery is a lottery for adding the number of game media that can be acquired in the AT2 state. The number of coins to be added is determined based on the winning combination and the random number. In the next step S1304, the lottery result (number of additions) of the AT2 expected acquisition number addition lottery in step S1303 is added to the count value of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter, and then the process proceeds to step S1305.

In step S1305, after other AT2 state processing A is performed, the AT2 state processing A ends. In the other AT2 state processing A, for example, a process of transmitting a command including information indicating the count value of the AT2 planned acquisition number counter after updating (AT2 expected acquisition number information) to the first sub control unit 400, A command including information indicating the count value of the AT planned acquisition number counter (AT2 expected acquisition number information) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

<Pullback state processing A>
Next, with reference to FIG. 278, the retraction state process A will be described. FIG. 278 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of pullback state processing A in step S813 of FIG.

At step S1501, a pull-back lottery is performed, and at step SS1502, it is determined whether or not the pull-back lottery has been won. In step S1503, the retracted state is set to the confirmed state. In this example, the lottery result of the pullback lottery in step S1501 is set to the pullback state. In step S1504, after performing other pullback state processing A, the pullback state processing A ends.

<Instruction information setting process>
Next, referring to FIG. 279, instruction information setting processing will be described. FIG. 279 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of instruction information setting processing in step S814 of FIG.

In step S1601, it is determined whether or not the winning combination is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process. In this example, the pushing hand means the internal winning of "small hand 4" in the conditional device. If the player is internally elected to the winning hand, the process advances to step S1602; otherwise, the instruction information setting process ends. Note that the "push order" according to the present invention includes a winning combination that allows a prize to be won when an operation is performed in accordance with a predetermined correct operation order (push order), as well as a predetermined operation. Timing (for example, grouping reel symbols into one or more (color coding, assigning symbols and numbers, etc.), and suggesting by reporting one or more groups (color, symbol, number, etc.) A winning combination that allows a prize to be won when an operation is performed according to timing), or when an operation is performed in accordance with both a predetermined correct operation order (push order) and predetermined operation timing. includes a prize-winning combination that can win a prize.

In step S1602, it is determined whether or not the current rendering state is the AT2 state or the LMT state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S1603, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1604.

In step S1603, the pressing order of the correct answer is set in the information (instruction information) regarding the notification contents of the instruction information notification. As a result, operation navigation using the payout number display 127 is executed (see FIG. 263). Also, although illustration is omitted, in step S1603, other operation navigation information setting processing is executed. For example, preparations are made to transmit to the first sub-controller 400 an operation navigation command including instruction information indicating the order of pressing the correct answer. As a result, the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 is executed by the first sub-controller 400 .

In addition, in the confirmed announcement state of this example, the number of medals will continue to decrease until the small win corresponding to the AT1 type is won. In the case of internal winning, the operation navigation is executed only in a specific type of pressing order (for example, if the small winning combination 4 is internally selected, any one of the small winning combination 4LCR, ..., small winning combination 4RCL, or Execute operation navigation for multiple), or execute operation navigation at a rate of once every three times (for example, if you can not win three times in the order of pushing, Push order navigation may be executed when a role is internally elected).

In step S1604, it is determined whether or not the current rendering state is the AT1 state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S1605, and if not, the instruction information setting process ends. In step S1605, the pressing order obtained by converting the correct pressing order (pressing order after conversion) is set in the information (instruction information) regarding the notification contents of the instruction information notification.

As described above, in the AT1 state, for example, when the pressing order bell is won, the probability of operation navigation being executed is lower than in the AT2 state, or the pressing order is notified by two-choice navigation (two-choice operation navigation). Or, by performing an operation navigation that combines these, the rate of ball output is lower than in the AT2 state. Processing such as conversion of timing and the like to two-choice navigation (two-choice operation navigation) is performed.

In the present embodiment, it is sufficient that the payout rate of the AT1 state is lower than that of the AT2 state, and the payout rate of the AT1 state and the AT2 state may be changed by other methods. In addition, as a method of lowering the probability of operation navigation being executed in the AT1 state than in the AT2 state, for example, when winning the push order bell, operation navigation is performed only once every N times (N is a positive integer). There is a method in which operation navigation is performed only once in N times, and a method in which operation navigation is performed only once in N times and 2-choice navigation is performed for others.

<Production State Control Processing B>
Next, the effect state control process B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 280 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of effect state control processing B in step S113 of FIG.

In step S1701, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state flag is off. If the high navigation state flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S1702, and if the high navigation state flag is not OFF, that is, if the high navigation state flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S1704. In step S1702, it is determined whether or not the processing prohibition flag is off. If the processing prohibition flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1703; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1707.

In step S1703, since the vehicle is in the low navigation state, low navigation state processing B is executed. Although illustration is omitted, in the low navigation state process B, when it is determined to shift to the high navigation state, a process for setting an effect state based on information regarding each effect state is performed.

In step S1704, the process advances to step S1705 after updating the difference number counter. In this difference number counter update process, the number of medals inserted by the player in the game (number of inserted medals) is subtracted from the number of medals obtained by the player (given to the player) in the relevant game (the number of medals paid out). By adding this value to the current counter value of the difference number counter, the count value of the difference number counter is updated. Also, preparations are made to transmit to the first sub-controller 400 a payout command containing at least information on the number of inserted coins and information on the number of payouts indicating the number of coins to be paid out.

In step S1705, it is determined whether or not the processing prohibition flag is off. If the processing prohibition flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1706; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1707.

In step S1706, since the vehicle is in the high navigation state, high navigation state processing B (details will be described later) is executed. At step S1707, the effect state control process B is terminated after the other effect state control process B is executed.

<High navigation state processing B>
Next, high navigation state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing in detail the high navigation state process B in step S1704 of FIG.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the rendering state is normal. In step S1802, normal state processing B (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S1803, it is determined whether or not the presentation state is the final notification state. In step S1804, final notification state processing B (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S1805, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT1 state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S1806, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1809. In step S1806, AT1 state processing B (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S1809, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT2 state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S1810, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1811. In step S1812, AT2 state processing B (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S1811, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the pullback state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1812, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1813. In step S1812, pullback state processing B (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S1813, after executing LMT state processing B (details will be described later), high navigation state processing B ends.

<Normal state processing B>
Next, normal state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 282 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of normal state processing B in step S1802 of FIG.

In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the rendering state counter=0 (whether or not the normal state has ended). If the rendering state counter=0, the process proceeds to step S1902, otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1903. In step S1902, after setting the fixed notification state in the effect state, the process proceeds to step S1903. As a result, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the normal state to the confirmed notification state, and an effect (for example, bonus confirmation display) corresponding to the confirmed notification state is started. In step S1903, after performing other normal state processing B, the normal state processing B ends.

<Confirmation notification state processing B>
Next, with reference to FIG. 283, the confirmation notification state process B will be described. FIG. 283 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the decision notification state process B in step S1804 of FIG.

In step S2001, it is determined whether the decision notification flag is off or on. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S2002, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2002, after turning on the confirmation notification flag, the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2003, it is determined whether or not the result is an internal winning result related to the AT1 type.

Specifically, in this example, when the AT1 type is low, it is determined whether the internal winning result is "replay combination 2, 4 to 10" of the condition device No. 3, and the AT1 type is In the case of high, it is determined whether or not the internal winning result is "replay combination 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13" of condition device No. 4. As a result of the determination, if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2004, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S2007.

In step S2004, an AT set count lottery is performed. In this AT set count lottery, a lottery is performed to determine the AT set count (the number of executions of the AT1 state and the AT2 state) using a lottery value or the like. In this example, the number of AT sets to be won with the highest probability is two. Note that the number of AT sets is not limited to the example determined by lottery, and may be a fixed value (for example, two times). In the next step S2005, the lottery result (the number of AT sets) of the AT set number lottery in step S2004 is set in the AT set remaining number counter as the AT set initial value, and the process proceeds to step S2006. In step S2006, AT1 start setting processing (details will be described later) is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2007, after performing other confirmed notification state processing B, the confirmed notification state processing B ends.

<AT1 start setting process>
Next, the AT1 start setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 284 is a flowchart showing in detail the AT1 start setting process in step S2006 of FIG.

In step S2051, the AT set remaining number counter is decremented by one, and in the next step S2052, AT1 initial number lottery is performed. In this AT1 initial number lottery, a lottery is performed to determine the number of games in the AT1 state (the number of AT1 games) using a lottery value or the like. A lottery may be performed based on the AT1 type (high and low), etc. The number of AT1 games is not limited to being determined by lottery, and may be a fixed value. In the next step S2053, the lottery result (the number of AT1 games) of the AT1 initial number lottery in step S2052 is set in the effect state counter as the AT1 initial value, and the process proceeds to step S2054. A step S2054 ends the AT1 start setting process after setting the AT1 state in the effect state.

<AT1 state processing B>
Next, with reference to FIG. 285, AT1 state processing B will be described. FIG. 285 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of AT1 state processing B in step S1806 of FIG.

In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter=0 (whether or not the AT1 state has ended). If the rendering state counter=0, the process proceeds to step S2102, otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2102, after setting the AT1 state in the presentation state, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, after performing other AT1 state processing B, the AT1 state processing B ends.

<AT2 state processing B>
Next, with reference to FIG. 286, AT2 state processing B will be described. FIG. 286 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of AT2 state processing B in step S1810 of FIG.

In step S2301, after adding the payout number in the game to the AT2 acquisition number counter, the process proceeds to step S2302. In this step S2302, even when the internal winning combination is not won (when the internal winning combination is lost), the payout number corresponding to the internal winning combination is added.

In step S2302, it is determined whether or not the count value of the AT acquisition number counter is equal to or greater than the count value of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter. .

In step S2303, it is determined whether or not the AT set remaining counter is greater than 0. If so, the process advances to step S2304 to perform the AT1 start setting process described with reference to FIG. Proceed to S2305. At step S2305, the initial pullback value (in this example, 1) is set to the effect state counter, and at the next step S2306, after setting the pullback state to the effect state, the process proceeds to step S2307.

In step S2307, after performing other AT2 state processing B, the AT2 state processing B ends. In the other AT2 state process B, for example, a process of transmitting a command including information (AT2 acquired number information) indicating the updated count value of the AT2 acquired number counter to the first sub-controller 400 is performed.

<Pullback state processing B>
Next, with reference to FIG. 287, the retraction state process B will be described. FIG. 287 is a flowchart showing in detail the pullback state process B in step S1812 of FIG.

In step S2401, it is determined whether or not the pullback state is determined (whether or not to pull back). In step S2402, an AT set count lottery is performed. In this AT set count lottery, a lottery is performed to determine the AT set count (the number of executions of the AT1 state and the AT2 state) using a lottery value or the like. In this example, the number of AT sets to be won with the highest probability is two. Note that the number of AT sets is not limited to the example determined by lottery, and may be a fixed value (for example, two times). In the next step S2403, the lottery result (the number of AT sets) of the AT set number lottery in step S2402 is set in the AT set remaining number counter as the AT set initial value, and the process proceeds to step S2404. In step S2404, after performing the AT1 start setting process described using FIG. 284, the process proceeds to step S2407.

In step S2405, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter=0 (whether or not the pullback state has ended). In step S2406, the high navigation state end standby flag is turned on, and then the process proceeds to step S2407. In step S2407, after other pullback state processing B is performed, the pullback state processing B ends.

<LMT state processing B>
Next, the LMT state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 288 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of LMT state processing B in step S1813 of FIG.

In step S2501, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter=0 (whether or not the LMT state has ended). If the rendering state counter=0, the process proceeds to step S2502, and if not, the LMT state processing B ends. In step S2502, the high navigation state end waiting flag is set to ON, and then the process proceeds to step S2503. In step S2503, after performing other LMT state processing B, the LMT state processing B ends.

<High navigation state end processing>
Next, high navigation state end processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 289 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state end processing in step S114 of FIG.

In step S2601, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state flag is ON. If the high navigation state flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S2602; otherwise, the high navigation state end processing is terminated. In step S2602, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state end waiting flag is ON. If the high-navi state end standby flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S2603; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2604.

In step S2603, the high navigation state end standby flag is turned off. After the process of step S2603, the process proceeds to step S2606.

In step S2604, it is determined whether or not the value of the high navigation state counter is zero. If there is a game with the process prohibition flag ON, the value of the high navigation state counter may become 0 before the high navigation state end waiting flag is turned ON, so this corresponds to this case. is. If the value of the high navigation state counter is 0, proceed to step S2606; otherwise, proceed to step S2605.

In step S2605, it is determined whether or not difference number counter > high navigation state end maximum value. If yes, go to step S2606. This is because if there is a game for which the processing prohibition flag is ON, the condition of difference number counter>high navigation state end maximum value may be satisfied before the high navigation state end waiting flag is turned ON. It corresponds to the case.

In step S2606, the high navigation state flag is turned off. As a result, the high navigation state lamp 190 that has been lit is extinguished. In step S2607, after executing other high-navi state end processing, the high-navi state end processing ends. Other high-navigation state end processing includes, for example, setting the AT system game state to a low-navigation state (normal mode), and processing to initialize various flags and counters used for high-navigation state transition control. conduct.

<Number of sheets display related processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 290, the number display related processing executed by the first sub-controller 400 will be described. FIG. 290 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of number display related processing in step S3301 of FIG.

In step S2701, it is determined whether or not an operation of the start lever 135 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "lever on") has been accepted. If the operation has been accepted, the process proceeds to step S2702. The process advances to step S2705. In step S2702, the count value of the total winning number display counter stored in the RAM 408 is updated based on the inserted number information and the paid-out number information received from the main control unit 300. FIG.

In step S2703, it is determined whether or not it is a 3-bet game, and if it is a 3-bet game, the process proceeds to step S2704, and if it is not a 3-bet game (in this example, in the case of a 2-bet game) goes to step S2715. In step S2704, the RAM 408 is stored based on the AT2 expected acquisition number information (AT2 expected acquisition number information count value) and the AT2 acquisition number information (AT2 acquisition number counter count value) received from the main control unit 300. Update the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter. In step S2704, it is possible to determine whether or not the AT2 state ends by updating the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter. Therefore, when it is determined that the AT2 state ends, the AT2 state ends. It is also possible to display a message suggesting that the user has completed the process (for example, display an image including the characters "LAST").

In step S2705, it is determined whether or not one game has ended, and if one game has ended, the process proceeds to step S2706, and if one game has not ended (if the game is in progress), the process proceeds to step S2715. In step S2706, the count value of the total acquired number display counter is updated based on the inserted number information and the paid-out number information received from the main control unit 300. FIG.

In step S2707, it is determined whether or not it is a 3-bet game, and if it is a 3-bet game, the process proceeds to step S2708, and if it is not a 3-bet game (in this example, in the case of a 2-bet game) goes to step S2712. In step S2708, based on the AT2 expected acquisition number information (the count value of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter) and the AT2 acquisition number information (the count value of the AT2 acquisition number counter) received from the main control unit 300, an AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter is displayed. update the count value of

In step S2709, it is determined whether or not the total acquired number has reached a predetermined number (whether or not the count value of the total acquired number display counter has reached a certain value). If not, the process advances to step S2715. In step S2710, it is determined whether or not the current rendering state is the AT2 state or the LMT state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S2711, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2712.

In step S2711, a predetermined number acquisition display is determined based on the count value of the total acquisition number display counter. Although the method of determining the predetermined number of winning display is not particularly limited, in this example, a predetermined number of winning display lottery table is referred to, and the predetermined number of winning display is determined based on the set value, the predetermined number, and the random number.

For example, if it is determined in step S2709 that the total number of acquired cards has reached 135, when the setting value is an odd number (setting 1, setting 3, or setting 5), the probability of reaching 135 is 2/100. If the set value is an even number, the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed. Therefore, when the predetermined number acquisition display indicating that the number of cards has reached 135 is displayed, it is determined that the set value is an odd number (setting 1, setting 3, or setting 5). For this reason, the display can be said to be a display suggesting that the set value is an odd number (display suggesting odd number setting).

Also, when it is determined in step S2709 that the total number of obtained cards has reached 246, when the setting value is an even number (setting 2, setting 4, or setting 6), the probability of reaching 246 is 2/100. If the set value is an odd number, the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed. Therefore, when the predetermined number acquisition display indicating that the number of cards has reached 246 is displayed, it is determined that the set value is an even number (setting 2, setting 4, or setting 6). For this reason, the display can be said to be a display suggesting that the set value is an even number (display suggesting an even number setting).

If it is determined in step S2709 that the total number of acquired cards has reached 333, a predetermined number of acquisition display ( For example, when the set value is set to 4, the same predetermined number of acquisition display is performed with a probability of 2/100, and when the set value is set to 5 or set 6. In addition, the same predetermined number acquisition display is performed with a probability of 1/100, and the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed at other set values. Therefore, when the predetermined number acquisition display indicating that 333 cards have been reached is displayed, it is determined that the set value is 3 or more. Therefore, the display can be said to be a display suggesting that the set value is 3 or higher (display suggesting 3 or higher setting).

When the total number of acquired cards reaches 456, 555, and 666, the predetermined number of acquisition display also indicates that the set value is 4 or more (display indicating that the set value is 4 or more), and the set value is set. A display suggesting that the value is 5 or more (display suggesting setting 5 or more) and a display suggesting that the setting value is 6 (display suggesting setting 6).

If it is determined in step S2709 that the total number of obtained cards has reached 500, a predetermined number of obtained display (for example, " 500 cards" is displayed), and if it is determined in step S2709 that the total number of cards acquired has reached 1,000, there is a 100/100 probability that 1,000 cards have been reached regardless of the set value. A display indicating that a predetermined number of coins has been acquired (for example, a display including a character string of "over 1000") is displayed.

In step S2712, display update processing for updating the display of the total acquired number of sheets is performed based on the count value of the total acquired number display counter updated in step S2706. Based on the count value of the acquired number display counter, display update processing for updating the AT2 remaining acquired number display is performed, and then the flow advances to step S2714.

In step S2714, the processing for displaying the display of the acquisition of the predetermined number determined in step S2711 is performed, and then the flow advances to step S2715. In step S2715, after performing other processing related to display of the number of sheets, the processing related to display of number of sheets ends.

In this example, the set value is suggested by the predetermined number acquisition display. In a gaming machine in which a mode regarding an AT-related advantage (high (or low) addition probability, etc.) can be set, the mode may be suggested.

<Updating and displaying count values of various counters>
Next, updating and display of count values of various counters provided in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 291 to 301. FIG. FIGS. 291 to 301 are timing charts showing the count values of various counters and the flow of various effects, and show the effect mode of the effects to be executed and the count values to be displayed in association with the timing charts.

Here, before explaining the update and display of the count values of various counters, the update and display control of the count values of various counters will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 291(a). FIG. 291(a) is a diagram showing an example of control of updating and display of count values of various counters in chronological order. The item "high navigation state counter" in FIG. 291(a) indicates the number of remaining games in the high navigation state updated by the main control unit 300 in the high navigation state, and the content thereof is as described above. .

<Difference number counter>
The item "difference number counter" in FIG. 291(a) indicates the count value of the difference number counter managed by the main control unit 300. Note that the "difference number counter" may be managed by another control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500).

At the end of the game (in this embodiment, in step S1704 of the effect state control process B (FIG. 280)), the main control unit 300 determines the number of medals (given to the player) obtained by the player in the game ( After the count value of the difference number counter is updated by adding the value obtained by subtracting the number of medals inserted by the player in the game (the number of inserted medals) from the number of payouts) to the current counter value of the difference number counter. , a payout command including at least information on the number of inserted coins indicating the number of coins to be inserted and information on the number of coins to be paid out indicating the number of coins to be paid out to the first sub-controller 400 .

For example, as shown in FIG. 291(a), when the main control unit 300 accepts a three-bet game with a count value of 42 in the difference number counter before lever-on, the main control unit 300 At the end of the game, the value (8 in this example) obtained by subtracting the number of inserted coins (3 in this example) from the number of payouts (11 in this example) is added to the current counter value of the difference number counter (42 in this example). By doing so, after the count value of the differential number counter is updated to 50 in this example, a payout command including at least information on the number of inserted pieces (3) and information on the number of paid out pieces (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control section 400. .

<AT2 Expected Acquisition Number Counter>
The item "AT2 expected winning number counter" in FIG. 291(a) indicates the count value of the AT2 expected winning number counter managed by the main control unit 300. Note that the "AT2 expected number-of-acquisition counter" may be managed by another control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500).

When the main control unit 300 accepts Lebaon (in the AT1 state processing A (FIG. 276) and AT2 state processing A (FIG. 277) in this embodiment), the AT2 expected acquisition number addition lottery is performed, and the lottery After the lottery result (additional number of sheets) is added to the AT2 scheduled acquisition number counter, a command including information indicating the updated count value of the AT2 scheduled acquisition number counter (AT2 scheduled acquisition number information) is sent to the first sub-control unit 400. Send to

For example, as shown in FIG. 291(a), in the state where the count value of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before lever-on is 300, when the main control unit 300 receives the lever-on of the three-bet game, the main control unit After receiving Lebaon, 300 performs an AT2 expected win count addition lottery, adds the lottery result (0 in this example) to the AT2 expected win count counter, and then updates the AT2 expected win count counter. A command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating a count value (300 in this example) is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 .

<AT2 acquisition counter>
The item "AT2 Acquisition Number Counter" in FIG. Note that the "AT2 acquisition number counter" may be managed by another control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500).

When the production state is the AT2 state and lever-on is accepted (in the AT2 state process A (FIG. 277) in this embodiment), the main control unit 300 determines the number of insertions in the game from the AT2 acquisition number counter (this example Then, after subtracting 3), a command including information indicating the updated count value of the AT acquisition sheet counter (AT2 acquisition sheet information) is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . Therefore, in this embodiment, when the effect state is the AT1 state, the AT2 acquisition number counter is configured not to be updated. If a replay role is won in the immediately preceding game, the game can be played without inserting game media, so the number of inserted coins in the game is zero.

For example, as shown in FIG. 291(a), in a state where the count value of the AT2 acquisition number counter before lever-on is 0, when the main control unit 300 receives a three-bet game lever-on, the main control unit 300 , after receiving Levaon, subtracts the number of inserted pieces in the game (3 in this example) from the AT2 acquired number counter, and then AT2 acquired number information indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter (- in this example) 3) is sent to the first sub-controller 400.

Also, at the end of the game (in the AT2 state process B (FIG. 286) in this embodiment), by adding the number of payouts in the game to the AT2 acquired number counter, the count value of the AT2 acquired number counter is updated. A command including information indicating the count value of the AT2 acquired number counter (AT2 acquired number information) is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 .

For example, as shown in FIG. 291(a), when the count value of the AT2 acquisition number counter after lever-on is -3, when the main control unit 300 pays out 11 cards, the main control unit 300 , At the end of the game, after adding the number of payouts in the game (11 in this example) to the count value of the AT2 acquisition number counter (-3 in this example), the updated count value of the AT acquisition number counter (in this example 8) is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400, including AT2 acquired sheet information.

<AT2 Remaining Acquisition Number Counter>
291(a), the item "AT2 Remaining Obtained Number Display Counter" indicates the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter managed by the first sub-control section 400. FIG. Note that the "AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter" may be managed by another control unit (for example, the main control unit 300 or the second sub-control unit 500).

Triggered by the fact that the main control unit 300 has accepted Lebaon (in the number display related process (FIG. 290) in the present embodiment), the first sub-control unit 400 receives the AT2 expected acquisition number information from the main control unit 300. and the AT2 acquisition number information, the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter stored in the RAM 408 is updated.

For example, as shown in FIG. 291(a), in a state in which the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter before lever-on is 300, the first sub-control unit 400 is triggered when the main control unit 300 accepts lever-on. Then, based on the AT2 expected number of acquisition information (300) and the AT2 acquisition number information (-3), the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter after Lebaon is updated from 300 to 303 (= 300 - (-3)) do. After Leva-on, the display corresponding to the count value (303 in this example) of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter may or may not be updated.

In addition, at the end of the game (in the number display related process (FIG. 290) in this embodiment), the first sub-control unit 400 receives from the main control unit 300 the AT2 expected number of acquisition information and the AT2 acquisition number information. , update the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter.

For example, as shown in FIG. 291(a), when the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter after lever-on is 303, the 3-coin game is completed and 11 coins are paid out in the game. , at the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 303 based on the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300) and the AT2 acquisition number information (8). to 292 (=300-8).

<Total acquisition number display counter>
The item "total acquired number display counter" in FIG. Note that the "total acquired number display counter" may be managed by another control unit (for example, the main control unit 300 or the second sub-control unit 500).

Triggered by the fact that the main control unit 300 has accepted the lever-on (in the number display related process (FIG. 290) in this embodiment), the first sub-control unit 400 receives the input number information and the payout number information received from the main control unit 300. Based on the number information, the count value of the total acquired number display counter stored in the RAM 408 is updated.

For example, as shown in FIG. 291(a), in a state where the count value of the total winning number display counter before lever-on is 42, when the main control unit 300 accepts the lever-on of the three-bet game, the first sub When the main control unit 300 accepts Lebaon, the control unit 400 updates the count value of the total acquired number display counter after Lebaon to 39 (=42-3) based on the inserted number information (3). do. After Leva-on, the display corresponding to the count value (39 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter may or may not be updated.

In addition, although not shown, when the main control unit 300 accepts a double-bet game with a count value of 42 in the total winning number display counter before lever-on, the first sub-control unit 400 When the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the count value of the total acquired number display counter after Reba-on is updated to 40 (=42-2) based on the inserted number information (2).

Also, at the end of the game (in the number display related process (FIG. 290) in this embodiment), the first sub-control unit 400, based on the input number information and the payout number information received from the main control unit 300, Update the count value of the number display counter.

For example, as shown in FIG. 291(a), when the count value of the total winning number display counter after Lebaon is 39, the 3-coin game ends and 11 coins are paid out in the game. At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 updates the count value of the total win number display counter at the end of the game to 50 (=39+11) based on the payout number information (11). Also, although not shown, when the count value of the total winning number display counter after Lebaon is 40, the double bet game ends and 11 payouts are made in the game, the first sub At the end of the game, the control unit 400 updates the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game to 51 (=40+11) based on the payout number information (11).

<Specific example of update and display of count values of various counters>
Next, specific examples of updating and displaying the count values of various counters will be described with reference to FIGS.

It should be noted that the item "low/high navigation state" in each figure indicates the game state of the AT system (high navigation state or low navigation state in this example), and the item "production state" in each figure It shows the effect state (in this example, normal state, final notification state, withdrawal state, AT1 state, AT2 state, or LMT (limit) state) in each game state of the AT system.

The item "high navigation state counter" in each figure indicates the number of remaining games in the high navigation state that the main control unit 300 updates in the high navigation state. , shows the count value of the difference number counter, and the item "effect state counter" in each figure indicates the number of remaining games in each effect state updated by the main control unit 300 in each effect state. Also, the item "AT2 Planned Acquisition Number Counter" in each figure indicates the count value of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter managed (updated) by the main control unit 300, and the details will be described using FIG. 291(a). As I said. Also, the item "AT2 acquisition number counter" in each figure indicates the count value of the AT2 acquisition number counter managed (updated) by the main control unit 300, and the details are as described with reference to Fig. 291(a). is.

Also, the item of "Condition Device" in each figure shows the No. (see FIG. 262) corresponding to the winning combination in each game. As described above, the "No." item in FIG. 262 is a number attached to each lottery result for convenience. ”, but in the case of duplicate hands, one “No.” corresponds to a plurality of “conditional devices”.

Also, the item "BET" in each figure indicates the number of bets (BET number) of game media in each game. Also, the item "AT2 Remaining Acquired Number Display Counter" in each figure indicates the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter managed (updated) by the first sub-control section 400. Details are shown in FIG. 291(a). It is as explained using The item "total acquired number display counter" in each figure indicates the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter managed (updated) by the first sub-control unit 400. For details, refer to Fig. 291(a). As explained.

<Specific example 1 of updating and displaying count values of various counters>
FIG. 291(b) is a diagram showing a specific example 1 of updating and displaying count values of various counters.

This example is an example in which the presentation state shifts in order from the AT1 state to the AT2 state in the high navigation state. As described above, the AT1 state is an AT state in which the game progress is controlled by the number of games (AT state of game number management), and ends when, for example, a certain number of games (eg, 20 G) are completed. On the other hand, the AT2 state is an AT state in which the progress of the game is controlled by the difference in the number of game media (AT state of management of the difference in the number of game media). end if

<Concrete example 1/AT1 state (game R378)>
Game R378 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 378 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state is 28, and a 3-coin bet game is performed.

Since the effect state is the AT1 state, the game R378 uses the effect image display device 157 to execute the AT1 effect corresponding to the AT1 state with the receipt of Lebaon as a trigger, No. 8) is internally won, so the operation navigation corresponding to the AT1 state (in this example, the display of two-choice navigation "?-1-?" that informs the correct operation order of the minor winning combination 4 with two options) is displayed. Running.

In addition, since the number of remaining games in the AT1 state (count value of the effect state counter) is 28, a display including an image indicating the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, "LAST28G") display of images containing characters).

Subsequently, after accepting Lebaon, the main control unit 300 performs an AT2 expected acquisition number addition lottery, adds the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter, and then after updating While transmitting a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (0 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter to the first sub-control unit 400, since the effect state is the AT1 state, AT2 acquisition The number counter is not updated, and the display of the remaining number display DP including an image showing the remaining number of obtainable numbers in the AT2 state (the count value of the AT2 remaining number of acquisition number display counter) The total payout number display AP including the image showing the count value of ) is not displayed either.

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (0), and obtains AT2 remaining after Reba-on. The count value of the number display counter is updated from 0 to 0 (=0-(0)).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R378, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won a small win 4 (condition device No. 8), after paying out the number of payout medals corresponding to the small win 4 (11 in this example) (at the end of the game) ), and the value (8 in this example) obtained by subtracting the number of input (3 in this example) from the number of payouts (11 in this example) is added to the current counter value of the difference number counter (0 in this example). , after updating the count value of the difference number counter to 8 in this example, a payout command including at least information on the number of inserted coins (3) and information on the number of payouts (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, Since the effect state is the AT1 state, the AT2 acquisition number counter is not updated, and the remaining number display DP including an image showing the remaining number of acquisition possible in the AT2 state (the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter). Neither the display nor the display of the total payout number display AP including the image showing the total number of payouts (the count value of the counter for displaying the total number of acquired coins) is performed.

In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (0) at the end of the game, and changes the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter from 0 at the end of the game. Update to 0 (=0-0).

<Concrete example 1/AT1 state (game R377)>
The next game R377 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 377 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state is 27, and a 3-coin bet game is performed.

After Leva-on of this game R377, since the effect state is the AT1 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT1 effect corresponding to the AT1 state, and the small combination 1 (condition device No. 5) Since the player has won the internal prize, a small winning combination announcement (in this example, the display of "!-!-!" indicating that the small winning combination 1 has been internally won) is executed.

Also, since the number of remaining games in the AT1 state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 27, a display including an image indicating the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, "LAST27G" display of images containing characters).

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after receiving Lebaon, and sets the lottery result of the lottery (30 in this example) to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (0 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (30 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, while the effect state is Since it is in the AT1 state, the AT2 acquisition number counter is not updated, and the display of the remaining number display DP including an image showing the remaining number of acquisition possible in the AT2 state (the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) The display of the total payout number display AP including the image showing the total number of payouts (the count value of the counter for displaying the total number of acquired coins) is not displayed either.

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (30), and obtains AT2 remaining after Reba-on. The count value of the number display counter is updated from 0 to 30 (=30-(0)).

In addition, in this game R377, since the number of additions to the number of AT2 scheduled acquisitions is determined to be 30 by the AT2 scheduled acquisition number addition lottery, an additional effect UG for AT2 (in this example, the AT2 scheduled acquisition number is increased by 30) display of an image containing the characters "+30 sheets" suggesting that the In addition, when the AT2 state is not the number management but the game number management, an effect that suggests the number of games added in the AT2 state (for example, the characters "+30G" suggesting that the number of AT2 games has been added by 30G) display of images containing images) may be performed. In addition, when the effect state is the AT1 state, the display corresponding to the AT2 expected number-of-acquisition counter is configured not to be displayed, but may be displayed.

Next, since the game has ended in this game R377, the small winning announcement is erased. In addition, since the main control unit 300 has won a small win 1 (condition device No. 5), after paying out the number of payout medals corresponding to the small win 1 (3 in this example) (at the end of the game ), and the value (0 in this example) obtained by subtracting the number of input (3 in this example) from the number of payouts (3 in this example) is added to the current counter value of the difference number counter (8 in this example). , after updating the count value of the difference number counter to 8 in this example, a payout command including at least information on the number of inserted coins (3) and information on the number of payouts (3) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, Since the effect state is the AT1 state, the AT2 acquisition number counter is not updated, and the remaining number display DP including an image showing the remaining number of acquisition possible in the AT2 state (the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter). Neither the display nor the display of the total payout number display AP including the image showing the total number of payouts (the count value of the counter for displaying the total number of acquired coins) is performed.

At the end of the game, the first sub control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (30), and changes the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game from 0 to Update to 30 (=30-0).

<Concrete example 1/AT1 state (game R376)>
The next game R376 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 376 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state is 26, and a 3-coin bet game is performed.

Although illustration is omitted, since the effect state is the AT1 state after Leva-on of this game R376, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT1 effect corresponding to the AT1 state, and a small win 4 (condition Device No. 8) is internally won, so operation navigation corresponding to AT1 state (in this example, display of 2-choice navigation "?-1-?" indicating the correct operation sequence for minor winning 4 with 2 options) running

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and sets the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (30 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (30 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, while the effect state is Since it is in the AT1 state, the AT2 acquisition number counter is not updated, and the display of the remaining number display DP including an image showing the remaining number of acquisition possible in the AT2 state (the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) The display of the total payout number display AP including the image showing the total number of payouts (the count value of the counter for displaying the total number of acquired coins) is not displayed either.

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (30), and obtains AT2 remaining after Reba-on. The count value of the number display counter is updated from 0 to 30 (=30-(0)).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R376, the operation navigation is deleted. In addition, since the main control unit 300 made a mistake in the operation of the 2-choice navigation and won the one-coin win of the small win 4 (conditional device No. 8), the number of payouts corresponding to the one-couple win of the small win 4 ( In this example, after paying out 1 medal) (at the end of the game), the number of payouts (1 in this example) minus the number of inserted medals (3 in this example) is subtracted (-2 in this example). , is added to the current counter value of the difference number counter (8 in this example) to update the count value of the difference number counter to 6 in this example, and then input number information (3) and payout number information (1) While sending a payout command containing at least to the first sub-control unit 400, since the effect state is the AT1 state, the AT2 acquisition number counter is not updated, and the remaining acquirable number in the AT2 state ( The display of the remaining number display DP including an image showing the AT2 remaining winning number display counter) and the display of the total payout number display AP including an image indicating the total number of payouts (the count value of the total winning number display counter) are also displayed. Absent.

At the end of the game, the first sub control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (30), and increases the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game from 30. Update to 30 (=30-0).

<Concrete example 1/AT2 state (game R349)>
Game R349 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 349, the number of medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of medals to be obtained in AT2) is 300, and a 3-coin bet game.

After Leva-on of this game R349, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) Since the internal lottery has been won, operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, display of operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the minor winning combination 4) is executed.

In addition, since the remaining number of obtainable sheets in the AT2 state at Lebaon (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 300, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "300 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (the count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 42 , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 42") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (300 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (300 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before lever-on After subtracting the number of insertions in the game (3 in this example) from the acquired number counter (0 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (-3 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter The included command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (-3) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), The count value of the acquired number display counter is updated to 303 (=300-(-3)), and the input number information (3) is subtracted from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (42 in this example). , the count value of the counter for displaying the total number of acquired cards after Lebaon is updated to 39 (=42-3).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R349, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won a small win 4 (condition device No. 8), after paying out the number of payout medals corresponding to the small win 4 (11 in this example) (at the end of the game) ), and the value (8 in this example) obtained by subtracting the number of input (3 in this example) from the number of payouts (11 in this example) is added to the current counter value of the difference number counter (42 in this example). , after the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 50 in this example, a payout command including at least information on the number of inserted coins (3) and information on the number of payouts (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the number of payouts in the game (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter, a command containing AT2 acquired number information (8 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is sent to the first sub. Send to the control unit 400 .

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (8) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 292 ( = 300-8), and the payout number information (11) is added to the count value (39 in this example) of the total winning number display counter after lever-on, and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 50 (=39+11).

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 50, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 50 sheets").

<Concrete example 1/AT2 state (game R345)>
Game R345 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 345, a 3-coin bet game is played, and a small winning combination 4 (conditional device No. 8) is internally won, but the small winning combination 4 is not won. .

In this game R345, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after receiving Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (in this example 310), and then send a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the updated count value (310 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter to the first sub-control unit 400, while Levaon After subtracting the number of insertions in the game (3 in this example) from the previous AT2 acquisition number counter (16 in this example), AT2 acquisition number information (13 in this example) indicating the count value of the AT acquisition number counter after updating ) to the first sub-controller 400.

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (13) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (310), and obtains AT2 remaining after Reba-on. Update the count value of the number display counter to 297 (= 310 - (13)), subtract the number of input information (3) from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (58 in this example), and After that, the count value of the total acquired number display counter is updated to 55 (=58-3).

At the end of the game R345, the main control unit 300 does not pay out medals because the small win 4 (conditional device No. 8) was not won, and the payout number (0 in this example) is inserted. By adding the value obtained by subtracting the number of sheets (3 in this example) (-3 in this example) to the current counter value of the difference number counter (55 in this example), the count value of the difference number counter is 55, a payout command containing at least the inserted number information (3) and the payout number information (0) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the AT2 acquired number counter (13 in this example) After adding the number of payouts in the game (in this example, the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) was missed, but the number of payouts corresponding to the small combination 4 is 11), the updated AT acquisition number counter A command including the AT2 acquisition number information (24 in this example) indicating the count value is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 .

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (24) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (310), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 286 ( = 310-24), and the payout number information (0) is added to the count value of the total winning number display counter after lever-on (55 in this example), and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 55 (=55+0).

In this example, even if the internal winning combination is not won (if the internal winning combination is lost), the number of payouts corresponding to the internal winning combination (11 in this example) is added to the AT2 winning combination counter. Therefore, the number of game media that can be acquired in the AT2 state is reduced.

<Specific example 2 of update and display of count values of various counters>
FIG. 292 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 of updating and displaying count values of various counters.

This example is an example in which the production state shifts in order from the AT1 state to the AT2 state in the high navigation state, and the difference number reaches the predetermined number (500 in this example) in the AT2 state.

<Concrete example 2/AT2 state (game R221)>
Game R221 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 221, and the number of medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of medals to be obtained in AT2) is 280, and a 3-coin bet game is performed.

After Lebaon of this game R221, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) Since the internal lottery has been won, operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, display of operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the minor winning combination 4) is executed.

In addition, since the remaining number of obtainable numbers in the AT2 state at Lebaon (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 272, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "272 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (the count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 498 , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 498") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (280 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (280 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before Lebaon After subtracting the number of insertions in the game (3 in this example) from the acquired number counter (8 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (5 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (5) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (280), and obtains AT2 remaining after Reba-on. The count value of the number display counter is updated to 275 (=280-5), and the number of input information (3) is subtracted from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (498 in this example), and after Lebaon The count value of the total acquired number display counter is updated to 495 (=498-3).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R221, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won a small win 4 (condition device No. 8), after paying out the number of payout medals corresponding to the small win 4 (11 in this example) (at the end of the game) ), and the value (8 in this example) obtained by subtracting the number of inputs (3 in this example) from the number of payouts (11 in this example) is added to the current counter value of the difference number counter (498 in this example). , after the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 506 in this example, a payout command including at least information on the number of inserted coins (3) and information on the number of payouts (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the payout number in the game (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (5 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (16 in this example) indicating the count value of the AT acquired number counter after updating is included. command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

Also, at the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (16) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (280), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 264 ( = 280-16), and add payout number information (11) to the count value (495 in this example) of the total winning number display counter after lever-on, and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 506 (=495+11).

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 506, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 506 sheets").

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game, and the total number of acquired numbers reaches a predetermined number (the count value of the total acquired number display counter reaches a certain value), and If the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of winning display is determined based on the count value of the total winning number display counter.

In the game R221 of this example, since the total acquired number has reached the predetermined number (500) and the effect state is AT2, the count value (500 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter is used. , determine the predetermined number of acquisition display, and display the predetermined number of acquisition display TG (in this example, "500 medals Display that includes the character string "Breakthrough").

<Concrete example 2/AT2 state (game R207)>
Game R207 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 207, and the number of medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of medals to be obtained in AT2) is 280, and is a three-bet game.

The game R207 of this example is the same as the game R221 in that the total winning number reaches the predetermined number (500) and the effect state is the AT2 state. In game R207, after the display of obtaining the predetermined number of medals is performed once, the display of obtaining the predetermined number of medals is not performed in the AT2 state thereafter. The specified number of acquisition display suggesting is not performed.

The slot machine according to this example includes a first counter (in this example, a differential number counter) that counts the total number of game media acquired by the player based on at least the number of game media paid out during a certain game period. and a display means (this For example, when the first count value reaches a predetermined value (500 in this example), the effect image display device 157) displays a predetermined number of acquisitions (500 in this example, shown in FIG. 292). and the certain game period includes a first game period (in this example, a period during which the production state is AT1 state) and a second game period. It is a game period composed of a plurality of game periods including a period (in this example, the period in which the production state is AT2 state), and the first game period (in this example, the period in which the production state is AT1 state) to the second game period (in this example, the period in which the effect state is AT2 state), and in the second game period (in this example, AT2 state), the first count value (this In this example, after the count value of the differential number counter reaches a predetermined value (500 in this example), the first count value falls below the predetermined value, and then the first count value reaches the predetermined value again. Even when the number of cards reaches 500, the predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, the predetermined number acquisition display TG shown in FIG. 292, suggesting that 500 cards have been reached) is not displayed.

According to the slot machine of this example, after the first count value reaches the predetermined value in the second game period, the first count value falls below the predetermined value, and then the first count value Even when the predetermined value is reached again, the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed, so that it is possible to alleviate the feeling that the game media have not increased during the same game period.

<Specific example 3 of updating and displaying count values of various counters>
FIG. 293 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 of updating and displaying count values of various counters.

In this example, when the production state in the high-navigation state shifts in the order of AT1 state→AT2 state, in the AT1 state, the difference number of sheets reaches a predetermined number of sheets (500 in this example) and then falls below the predetermined number of sheets. After that, in the AT2 state, the difference number reaches the predetermined number (500 in this example) again.

<Concrete example 3/AT1 state (game R243)>
Game R242 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 243 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state is 20, and a 3-coin bet game is performed.

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game R243, and the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total acquisition number display counter reaches a certain value). ), and if the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of win display is determined based on the count value of the total win number display counter.

In the game R243 of this example, the total number of acquired medals has reached the predetermined number (500), but since the production state is the AT1 state and not the AT2 state (or LMT state), the number of acquired medals is The specified number of sheets acquisition display suggesting that the number of sheets has reached 500 is not displayed.

<Concrete example 3/AT2 state (game R222)>
Game R222 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 222, and the number of medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of medals to be obtained in AT2) is 280, and a 3-coin bet game is performed.

After Leva-on of this game R222, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and replay combination 1 (condition device No. 2). Therefore, a small winning combination announcement (in this example, an image containing three characters of "R" for Replay) suggesting internal winning of a replay combination is executed.

In addition, since the remaining obtainable number in the AT2 state at the time of lever-on (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 280, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "280 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 498 , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 498") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (280 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (280 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before Lebaon After subtracting the number of insertions in the game (0 in this example) from the acquired number counter (0 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (0 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (280), and obtains AT2 remaining after Reba-on. Update the count value of the number display counter to 280 (= 280 - 0), subtract the number of input information (0) from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (498 in this example), and after Lebaon The count value of the total acquired number display counter is updated to 498 (=498-0).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R222, the small winning announcement is erased. In addition, since the replay combination 1 (condition device No. 2) is won, the main control unit 300 does not pay out medals, and changes the number of payouts (0 in this example) to the number of insertions (0 in this example). is subtracted (0 in this example) to the current count value of the difference number counter (498 in this example), so that the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 498 in this example. A payout command containing at least information (0) and payout number information (0) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the number of payouts in the game (0 in this example) is set in the AT2 acquisition number counter (0 in this example) 0) is added, and then a command including AT2 acquired sheet information (0 in this example) indicating the updated count value of the AT acquired sheet counter is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 .

Also, at the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (280), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 280 ( = 280-0), and add payout number information (0) to the count value (498 in this example) of the total winning number display counter after lever-on, and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 498 (=498+0).

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 498, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 498 sheets").

<Concrete example 3/AT2 state (game R221)>
Game R221 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 221, and the number of medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of medals to be obtained in AT2) is 280, and a 3-coin bet game is performed.

After Lebaon of this game R221, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) Since the internal lottery has been won, operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, display of operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the minor winning combination 4) is executed.

In addition, since the remaining obtainable number in the AT2 state at the time of lever-on (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 280, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "280 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 498 , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 498") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (280 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (280 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, while After subtracting the number of insertions (3 in this example) in the game from the AT2 acquisition number counter (0 in this example), AT2 acquisition number information indicating the count value of the AT acquisition number counter after updating (-3 in this example) to the first sub-controller 400.

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (-3) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (280), The count value of the acquired number display counter is updated to 283 (=280-(-3)), and the input number information (3) is subtracted from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (498 in this example). , the count value of the counter for displaying the total number of acquired cards after Lebaon is updated to 495 (=498-3).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R221, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won a small win 4 (condition device No. 8), after paying out the number of payout medals corresponding to the small win 4 (11 in this example) (at the end of the game) ), and the value (8 in this example) obtained by subtracting the number of inputs (3 in this example) from the number of payouts (11 in this example) is added to the current counter value of the difference number counter (498 in this example). , after the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 506 in this example, a payout command including at least information on the number of inserted coins (3) and information on the number of payouts (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the number of payouts in the game (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (-3 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (8 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter The included command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (8) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (280), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 272 ( = 280-8), and the payout number information (11) is added to the count value of the total winning number display counter after lever-on (495 in this example), and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 506 (=495+11).

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 506, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 506 sheets").

In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game, and the total number of acquired numbers reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total acquired number display counter reaches a certain value). Moreover, when the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number acquisition display is determined based on the count value of the total acquired number display counter.

In the game R221 of this example, since the total acquired number has reached the predetermined number (500) and the effect state is AT2, the count value (500 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter is used. , determine the predetermined number of acquisition display, and display the predetermined number of acquisition display TG (in this example, "500 medals Display that includes the character string "Breakthrough").

In the slot machine according to this example, after a first count value (in this example, the count value of the difference number counter) reaches a predetermined value (in this example, 500), the first count value reaches the predetermined value. In the state below, the first game period (in this example, the period in which the production state is AT1 state) to the second game period (in this example, the period in which the production state is AT2 state), When the first count value reaches the predetermined value in the second game period, the predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, the second predetermined number acquisition display indicating that 500 cards have been reached is shown in FIG. 293). TG) can be displayed.

Further, after the first count value (in this example, the count value of the difference number counter) reaches a predetermined value (in this example, 500), the first count value falls below the predetermined value, and then the first count value count value has reached the predetermined value again, the first game period (in this example, the period in which the production state is AT1 state) to the second game period (in this example, the production state is AT2 state), the transition to the second game period alone indicates that the predetermined number of coins has been obtained (in this example, the second predetermined number indicating that 500 cards have been reached, as shown in FIG. 293). The number-of-gain display TG) is not displayed, and the predetermined number-of-gain display can be displayed based on the execution of the game during the second game period.

According to the slot machine according to the present example, the display of obtaining the predetermined number of coins is displayed based on the execution of the game in the second game period, so that it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the display of obtaining the predetermined number of coins.

In addition, the expected value of the increase in the number of game media per game in the first game period (in this example, the period in which the production state is AT1 state) is more than the second game period (in this example, the production state is in AT2 state). The expected value of the increase in the number of game media per game during the period is configured to be higher.

According to the slot machine of this embodiment, since the predetermined number acquisition display is performed in the game period in which the expected value of the increased number of game media is higher, the player's desire to play until the next display of the predetermined number acquisition display is displayed. can be sustained.

<Specific example 4 of update and display of count values of various counters>
FIG. 294 is a diagram showing specific example 4 of updating and displaying count values of various counters.

In this example, when the effect state shifts in order from the AT1 state to the AT2 state in the high navigation state, in the AT1 state, when the difference number of sheets reaches a predetermined number (500 in this example), the state shifts to the AT2 state. For example.

<Specific example 4/AT1 state (game R223)>
The game R223 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 223 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state is 0 (the final game in the AT1 state), and is a game in which three bets are played.

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game R223, and the total acquisition number reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total acquisition number display counter reaches a certain value). ), and if the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of win display is determined based on the count value of the total win number display counter.

In the game R223 of this example, the total number of acquired medals has reached the predetermined number (500), but since the production state is the AT1 state and not the AT2 state (or LMT state), the number of acquired medals is The specified number of sheets acquisition display suggesting that the number of sheets has reached 500 is not displayed. Also in the game R243 of this example, the total number of acquired medals has reached the predetermined number (500), but since the production state is the AT1 state and not the AT2 state (or LMT state), the number of acquired medals The specified number of sheets acquisition display suggesting that the number of sheets has reached 500 sheets is not performed.

<Specific example 4/AT2 state (game R222)>
Game R222 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 222, and the number of medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of medals to be obtained in AT2) is 280, and a 3-coin bet game is performed.

After Leva-on of this game R222, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and replay combination 1 (condition device No. 2). Therefore, a small winning combination announcement (in this example, an image including the character "R" for Replay) is executed to suggest internal winning of a replay combination.

In addition, since the remaining obtainable number in the AT2 state at the time of lever-on (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 280, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "280 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (the count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 514 , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 514") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (280 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (280 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before Lebaon After subtracting the number of insertions in the game (0 in this example) from the acquired number counter (0 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (0 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. command to the first sub-controller 400.

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (280), and obtains AT2 remaining after Reba-on. The count value of the number display counter is updated to 280 (=280-0), and the number of input information (0) is subtracted from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (514 in this example), and after Lebaon The count value of the total acquired number display counter is updated to 514 (=514-0).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R222, the small winning announcement is erased. In addition, since the replay combination 1 (condition device No. 2) is won, the main control unit 300 does not pay out medals, and changes the number of payouts (0 in this example) to the number of insertions (0 in this example). is subtracted (0 in this example) to the current count value of the difference number counter (514 in this example), so that the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 514 in this example. A payout command containing at least information (0) and payout number information (0) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the number of payouts in the game (0 in this example) is set in the AT2 acquisition number counter (0 in this example) 0) is added, and then a command including AT2 acquired sheet information (0 in this example) indicating the updated count value of the AT acquired sheet counter is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 .

Also, at the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (280), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 280 ( = 280-0), and the payout number information (0) is added to the count value of the total winning number display counter after lever-on (514 in this example), and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 514 (=514+0).

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 514, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 514 sheets").

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game, and the total number of acquired numbers reaches a predetermined number (the count value of the total acquired number display counter reaches a certain value), and If the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of winning display is determined based on the count value of the total winning number display counter.

In the game R222 of this example, the total winning number reaches the predetermined number (500) and the effect state is AT2 state, but in the slot machine according to this example, one or more medals are paid out in AT2 state. In game R222, the display of obtaining the predetermined number of medals suggesting that the number of medals obtained has reached 500 is not displayed because it is configured to perform the display of obtaining the predetermined number of medals when a winning combination is won. .

<Specific example 4/AT2 state (game R221)>
Game R221 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 221, and the number of medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of medals to be obtained in AT2) is 280, and a 3-coin bet game is performed.

After Lebaon of this game R221, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) Since the internal lottery has been won, operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, display of operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the minor winning combination 4) is executed.

In addition, since the remaining obtainable number in the AT2 state at the time of lever-on (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 280, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "280 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (the count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 514 , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 514") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (280 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (280 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before Lebaon After subtracting the number of insertions in the game (3 in this example) from the acquired number counter (0 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (-3 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter The included command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (-3) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (280), The count value of the acquired number display counter is updated to 283 (=280-(-3)), and the input number information (3) is subtracted from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (514 in this example). , the count value of the counter for displaying the total number of cards won after Lebaon is updated to 511 (=514-3).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R221, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won a small win 4 (condition device No. 8), after paying out the number of payout medals corresponding to the small win 4 (11 in this example) (at the end of the game) ), the number of payouts (11 in this example) minus the number of insertions (3 in this example) is subtracted (8 in this example) to the current counter value of the difference number counter (514 in this example). , after the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 522 in this example, a payout command including at least information on the number of inserted coins (3) and information on the number of paid coins (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the number of payouts in the game (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (-3 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (8 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter The included command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (8) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (280), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 272 ( = 280-8), and add payout number information (11) to the count value (511 in this example) of the total winning number display counter after lever-on, and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 522 (=511+11).

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 522, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 522 sheets").

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game, and the total number of acquired numbers reaches a predetermined number (the count value of the total acquired number display counter reaches a certain value), and If the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of winning display is determined based on the count value of the total winning number display counter.

In the slot machine according to this example, when a winning combination with one or more medals paid out is won in the AT2 state, a predetermined number of medals has been obtained is displayed. Since the number of medals has reached a predetermined number (500), the effect state is AT2, and the winning combination with the payout of 11 medals has been won, the count value of the total number of medals display counter (in this example, 500), the predetermined number acquisition display TG (this example display including the character string "over 500 sheets").

In the slot machine according to this example, the first count value (in this example, the count value of the difference number counter) is a first predetermined value (456 in this example) and a second predetermined value (500 in this example). ) in a state in which both predetermined values have been reached, the second game period (AT1 state in this example) transitions to the second game period (AT2 state in this example), and then the second game During the period, a first predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, a predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that 456 cards have been reached) and a second predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, indicating that 500 cards have been reached) (predetermined number acquisition display) (in this example, predetermined number acquisition display TG indicating that 500 cards have been reached, shown in FIG. 294) can be displayed.

According to the slot machine of this example, the first count value reaches both the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value, and the first game period to the second game period , since only one of the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display can be displayed during the second game period, the predetermined number acquisition display is excessively displayed. By not doing so, it is possible not only to prevent excessive gambling, but also to prevent misrecognition of the predetermined number acquisition display.

<Specific example 5 of updating and displaying count values of various counters>
FIG. 295 is a diagram showing specific example 5 of updating and displaying count values of various counters.

In this example, in a game machine set to a certain setting value of 4 or more, when the production state shifts in the order of AT1 state → AT2 state in the high navigation state, in the AT2 state, the difference number is the first This is an example of reaching a second predetermined number (500 in this example) after reaching a predetermined number (456 in this example).

<Specific example 5/AT2 state (game R238)>
Game R238 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 238, the number of expected medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of expected medals to be obtained in AT2) is 300, and a 3-coin bet game.

After Leva-on of this game R238, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) Since the internal lottery has been won, operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, display of operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the minor winning combination 4) is executed.

In addition, since the remaining number of obtainable sheets in the AT2 state at Lebaon (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 300, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. (In this example, the display of the image containing the characters "300 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (the count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 450. , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 450") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (300 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (300 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before lever-on After subtracting the number of insertions in the game (3 in this example) from the acquired number counter (0 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (-3 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter The included command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (-3) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), The count value of the acquired number display counter is updated to 303 (=300-(-3))), and the input number information (3) is subtracted from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (450 in this example). Then, the count value of the total acquired number display counter after Lebaon is updated to 447 (=450-3).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R238, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won a small win 4 (condition device No. 8), after paying out the number of payout medals corresponding to the small win 4 (11 in this example) (at the end of the game) ), and the value (8 in this example) obtained by subtracting the number of inputs (3 in this example) from the number of payouts (11 in this example) is added to the current counter value of the difference number counter (450 in this example). , after the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 458 in this example, a payout command including at least information on the number of inserted coins (3) and information on the number of payouts (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the number of payouts in the game (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (-3 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (8 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter The included command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (8) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 292 ( = 300-8), and the payout number information (11) is added to the count value (447 in this example) of the total winning number display counter after lever-on, and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 458 (=447+11).

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 458, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 458 sheets").

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game, and the total number of acquired numbers reaches a predetermined number (the count value of the total acquired number display counter reaches a certain value), and If the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of winning display is determined based on the count value of the total winning number display counter.

In the game R238 of this example, since the total number of acquired cards reaches the predetermined number (456 cards) and the effect state is AT2, the count value (456 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter is used. , a predetermined number acquisition display is determined by lottery, and since the lottery has been won, the number of acquired medals has reached 456 and the set value is set to 4 or more. A display TG1 (in this example, a display including a character string "over 456 sheets") is performed.

In this example, when the total number of obtained cards reaches a predetermined number (456 cards), a display is made to indicate that the set value is 4 or more, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the same way as when the total number of acquired cards reaches 555 or 666, a display may be made suggesting that the set value is set to 5 or 6, or in the same way as when the total number of acquired cards reaches 246, A display may be made to indicate that the set value is an even number (setting 2, setting 4, or setting 6), or if the setting value is an odd number (setting 1 , setting 3, or setting 5).

<Specific example 5/AT2 state (game R227)>
Game R227 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 227, and the number of medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of medals to be obtained in AT2) is 300, and a three-coin bet game is performed.

After Lebaon of this game R227, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) Since the internal lottery has been won, operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, display of operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the minor winning combination 4) is executed.

In addition, since the remaining number of obtainable sheets in the AT2 state at Lebaon (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 252, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "252 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (the count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 498 , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 498") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (300 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (300 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before lever-on After subtracting the number of insertions in the game (3 in this example) from the acquired number counter (48 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (45 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (45) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), and obtains AT2 remaining after Reba-on. The count value of the number display counter is updated to 255 (= 300-45)), and the number of input number information (3) is subtracted from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (498 in this example), after Lebaon to 495 (=498-3).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R227, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won a small win 4 (condition device No. 8), after paying out the number of payout medals corresponding to the small win 4 (11 in this example) (at the end of the game) ), and the value (8 in this example) obtained by subtracting the number of inputs (3 in this example) from the number of payouts (11 in this example) is added to the current counter value of the difference number counter (498 in this example). , after the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 506 in this example, a payout command including at least information on the number of inserted coins (3) and information on the number of payouts (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the number of payouts in the game (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (45 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (56 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (56) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 244 ( = 300-56), and the payout number information (11) is added to the count value of the total winning number display counter after lever-on (495 in this example), and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 506 (=495+11).

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 500, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 500 sheets").

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game, and the total number of acquired numbers reaches a predetermined number (the count value of the total acquired number display counter reaches a certain value), and If the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of winning display is determined based on the count value of the total winning number display counter.

In the game R227 of this example, since the total number of acquired cards reaches the predetermined number (500 cards) and the effect state is AT2, the count value (500 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter is used. , a predetermined number of acquisition display is determined, and a second predetermined number of acquisition display TG2 (in this example, display including the character string "over 500 sheets").

In the slot machine according to this example, in the second game period (in this example, the AT2 state), the first count value (in this example, the count value of the difference number counter) is changed to a second predetermined value (in this example, , 500) and when the first count value reaches the first predetermined value (456 in this example), the first predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, shown in FIG. 295) , a first predetermined number acquisition display TG1 suggesting that 456 cards have been reached can be displayed, and in the second game period (AT2 state in this example), the first count value (this In the example, the count value of the difference number counter) reaches the first predetermined value (456 in this example) and the first predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, it reaches 456 as shown in FIG. 295) After the first predetermined number acquisition display TG1) suggesting is displayed and the first count value reaches a second predetermined value (500 in this example), a second predetermined number acquisition A display (in this example, the second predetermined number acquisition display TG2, which suggests that 500 sheets have been reached, shown in FIG. 295) is configured to be displayable.

In addition, at least one display of the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, the first predetermined number of sheets indicating that the number of sheets has reached 456 is shown in FIG. 295). Acquisition display TG1) is a display as a setting suggestion rendering that suggests a set value (in this example, a display that suggests that the set value is 4 or more).

According to the slot machine of this example, in addition to the number of acquired game media, it is also possible to obtain information on the set value, so it is possible to further enhance interest and convenience of the player.

<Concrete example 6 of update and display of count values of various counters>
FIG. 296(a) is a diagram showing a specific example 6 of updating and displaying count values of various counters.

In this example, in the high navigation state, when the production state shifts in the order of AT1 state → AT2 state, in the AT1 state, after the difference number of sheets reaches the first predetermined number (456 in this example), the second This is an example of shifting to the AT2 state when the predetermined number of sheets (500 in this example) is reached.

<Specific example 6/AT1 state (game R265)>
Game R265 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 265 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state is 25, and a 3-coin bet game is performed.

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game R265, and the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total acquisition number display counter reaches a certain value). ), and if the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of win display is determined based on the count value of the total win number display counter.

In the game R265 of this example, the total acquired number has reached the predetermined number (456), but since the production state is the AT1 state and not the AT2 state (or LMT state), the 456 cards have been reached. The specified number of acquisition display suggesting is not performed.

<Specific example 6/AT1 state (game R247)>
Game R247 is a game (final game) in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 247 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state is 0, and a three-coin bet game is performed.

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of game R247, and when the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total acquisition number display counter reaches a certain value). ), and if the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of win display is determined based on the count value of the total win number display counter.

In game R247 of this example, the total number of acquired medals has reached the predetermined number (500), but since the production state is the AT1 state and not the AT2 state (or LMT state), the number of acquired medals is The specified number of sheets acquisition display suggesting that the number of sheets has reached 500 is not displayed.

<Specific example 6/AT2 state (game R239)>
Game R239 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 239, the number of medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of medals to be obtained in AT2) is 300, and a 3-coin bet game.

After Leva-on of this game R239, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and a replay combination 1 (condition device No. 2) is executed. Therefore, a small winning combination announcement (in this example, an image containing three characters of "R" for Replay) suggesting internal winning of a replay combination is executed.

In addition, since the remaining number of obtainable sheets in the AT2 state at Lebaon (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 300, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. (In this example, the display of the image containing the characters "300 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (the count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 514. , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 514") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (300 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (300 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before lever-on After subtracting the number of insertions in the game (0 in this example) from the acquired number counter (0 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (0 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), and obtains AT2 remaining after Reba-on. The count value of the number display counter is updated to 300 (=300-0), and the number of input information (0) is subtracted from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (514 in this example), and after Lebaon The count value of the total acquired number display counter is updated to 514 (=514-0).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R239, the small winning announcement is erased. In addition, since the replay combination 1 (condition device No. 2) is won, the main control unit 300 does not pay out medals, and changes the number of payouts (0 in this example) to the number of insertions (0 in this example). is subtracted (0 in this example) to the current count value of the difference number counter (514 in this example), so that the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 514 in this example. A payout command containing at least information (0) and payout number information (0) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the number of payouts in the game (0 in this example) is set in the AT2 acquisition number counter (0 in this example) 0) is added, and then a command including AT2 acquired sheet information (0 in this example) indicating the updated count value of the AT acquired sheet counter is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 .

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 300 ( = 300-0), and the payout number information (0) is added to the count value (514 in this example) of the total winning number display counter after lever-on, and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 514 (=514+0).

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 514, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 514 sheets").

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game, and the total number of acquired numbers reaches a predetermined number (the count value of the total acquired number display counter reaches a certain value), and If the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of winning display is determined based on the count value of the total winning number display counter.

In the game R239 of this example, the total winning number reaches the predetermined number (500) and the effect state is AT2 state. In the slot machine according to this example, one or more medals are paid out in AT2 state In game R239, the display for obtaining the predetermined number of medals suggesting that the number of medals obtained has reached 500 is not displayed because it is configured to perform the display for obtaining the predetermined number of medals when a winning combination is won. .

<Concrete example 6/AT2 state (game R238)>
Game R238 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 238, the number of expected medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of expected medals to be obtained in AT2) is 300, and a 3-coin bet game.

After Leva-on of this game R238, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) Since the internal lottery has been won, operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, display of operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the minor winning combination 4) is executed.

In addition, since the remaining number of obtainable sheets in the AT2 state at Lebaon (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 300, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "300 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (the count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 522 , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 522") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (300 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (300 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, while After subtracting the number of insertions (3 in this example) in the game from the AT2 acquisition number counter (0 in this example), AT2 acquisition number information indicating the count value of the AT acquisition number counter after updating (-3 in this example) to the first sub-controller 400.

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (-3) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), The count value of the acquired number display counter is updated to 303 (=300-(-3)), and the input number information (3) is subtracted from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (514 in this example). , the count value of the counter for displaying the total number of cards won after Lebaon is updated to 511 (=514-3).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R238, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won a small win 4 (condition device No. 8), after paying out the number of payout medals corresponding to the small win 4 (11 in this example) (at the end of the game) ), and the value (8 in this example) obtained by subtracting the number of input (3 in this example) from the number of payouts (11 in this example) is added to the current counter value of the difference number counter (511 in this example). , after the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 519 in this example, a payout command including at least information on the number of inserted coins (3) and information on the number of payouts (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the number of payouts in the game (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (-3 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (8 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter The included command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (8) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 292 ( = 300-8), and add payout number information (11) to the count value (511 in this example) of the total winning number display counter after lever-on, and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 522 (=511+11).

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 522, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 522 sheets").

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game, and the total number of acquired numbers reaches a predetermined number (the count value of the total acquired number display counter reaches a certain value), and If the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of winning display is determined based on the count value of the total winning number display counter.

In the game R238 of this example, since the total number of acquired cards reaches the predetermined number (500 cards) and the effect state is AT2, the count value (500 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter is used. , the predetermined number acquisition display is determined, and the predetermined number acquisition display TG (in this example, includes the character string "over 500") indicating that 500 cards have been reached with a probability of 100/100 regardless of the set value. display).

In the slot machine according to this example, the first count value (in this example, the count value of the difference number counter) is a first predetermined value (456 in this example) and a second predetermined value (500 in this example). ) in a state where both predetermined values are reached, the first game period (in this example, the period in which the production state is AT1 state) to the second game period (in this example, the production state is in AT2 state) period), in the second game period, a first predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, a predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that 456 cards have been reached) and a second predetermined number acquisition display ( In this example, either one of the predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that 500 cards have been reached) (in this example, the one with the larger predetermined value) is displayed (in this example, in FIG. 296(a) Only the specified number acquisition display TG) suggesting that the number of sheets has reached 500 can be displayed.

According to the slot machine of this example, the first count value reaches both the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value, and the first game period to the second game period , since only one of the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display can be displayed during the second game period, the predetermined number acquisition display is excessively displayed. By not doing so, it is possible not only to prevent excessive gambling, but also to prevent misrecognition of the predetermined number acquisition display.

It should be noted that, in this example, only the display of the first predetermined number of acquisition display and the second predetermined number of acquisition display, whichever has the larger predetermined value, is displayed, but the first predetermined number of acquisition display is shown. and the second predetermined number of winning display, only the display with the smaller predetermined value may be displayed, or only the display of the one selected by lottery may be displayed.

<Concrete example 7 of update and display of count values of various counters>
FIG. 296(b) is a diagram showing a specific example 7 of updating and displaying count values of various counters.

This example shows a continuation of the specific example 6 explained using FIG. is performed, and after the difference number falls below the first predetermined number (456 in this example), it reaches the first predetermined number (456 in this example) again. In addition, in this example, an example of performing a 2-piece game over the period of games R237 to R176 is shown, but a 3-piece game may be performed during the same period, or a 2-piece game and a 3-piece game may be played. You can do both.

<Specific example 7/AT2 state (game R174)>
Game R174 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 174 and the expected number of medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (AT2 expected number of medals to be obtained) is 300, and a 3-coin bet game is performed.

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game R174, and the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total acquisition number display counter reaches a certain value). ), and if the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of win display is determined based on the count value of the total win number display counter.

In the game R174 of this example, the total acquired number has reached the first predetermined number (456). is performed, the predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that the number of cards has reached 456 is not performed.

In the slot machine according to this example, the first count value (in this example, the count value of the difference number counter or the count value of the total winning number display counter) is the first predetermined value (456 in this example) and the second predetermined value. value (500 in this example) in a state in which both predetermined values are reached, the first game period (AT1 state period in this example) to the second game period (AT2 state period in this example) , the second predetermined number acquisition display of the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display in the second game period (in this example, it indicates that 500 cards have been reached) After only the suggested predetermined number acquisition display TG) is displayed, after the first count value falls below the first predetermined value in the second game period, it returns to the first predetermined value again. It is configured so that the display of obtaining the first predetermined number of sheets is not displayed even when the number of sheets reaches the predetermined number.

According to the slot machine according to the present example, it is possible to prevent excessive gambling by preventing the display of obtaining the predetermined number of coins excessively. In addition, for example, after displaying the larger number, if the player intentionally plays a game in which the player loses and displays the smaller number, the display with the larger number is displayed again. In this case, if it is displayed again, it will lead to excessive display of the acquisition of the predetermined number, and if it is not displayed again, the game will Players (players who have once forgotten that the larger number is displayed) may feel distrustful, so even if they intentionally lose a game, they will get a predetermined number of coins. By structuring so that no display is performed, it is possible to prevent the player from losing.

<Concrete example 8 of update and display of count values of various counters>
FIG. 297 is a diagram showing a specific example 8 of updating and displaying count values of various counters.

In this example, in the high navigation state, when the production state shifts in the order of AT1 state → AT2 state, in the AT2 state, after the difference number of sheets reaches the first predetermined number (500 in this example), the second This is an example of reaching a predetermined number (555 in this example).

<Specific example 8/AT2 state (game R238)>
Game R238 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 238, the number of expected medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of expected medals to be obtained in AT2) is 300, and a 3-coin bet game.

After Leva-on of this game R238, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) Since the internal lottery has been won, operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, display of operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the minor winning combination 4) is executed.

In addition, since the remaining number of obtainable sheets in the AT2 state at Lebaon (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 300, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "300 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (the count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 498 , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 498") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (300 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (300 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before lever-on After subtracting the number of insertions in the game (3 in this example) from the acquired number counter (0 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (-3 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter The included command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (-3) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), The count value of the acquired number display counter is updated to 303 (=300-(-3))), and the input number information (3) is subtracted from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (450 in this example). Then, the count value of the total acquired number display counter after Lebaon is updated to 495 (=498-3).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R238, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won a small win 4 (condition device No. 8), after paying out the number of payout medals corresponding to the small win 4 (11 in this example) (at the end of the game) ), and the value (8 in this example) obtained by subtracting the number of inputs (3 in this example) from the number of payouts (11 in this example) is added to the current counter value of the difference number counter (498 in this example). , after the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 506 in this example, a payout command including at least information on the number of inserted coins (3) and information on the number of payouts (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the number of payouts in the game (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (-3 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (8 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter The included command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (8) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 292 ( = 300-8), and add payout number information (11) to the count value (495 in this example) of the total winning number display counter after lever-on, and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 506 (=495+11).

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 506, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 506 sheets").

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game, and the total number of acquired numbers reaches a predetermined number (the count value of the total acquired number display counter reaches a certain value), and If the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of winning display is determined based on the count value of the total winning number display counter. In the game R238 of this example, since the total number of acquired cards reaches the predetermined number (500 cards) and the effect state is AT2, the count value (500 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter is used. , a second predetermined number acquisition display TG2 (in this example, the characters "over 500") suggesting that 500 cards have been reached with a probability of 100/100 regardless of the set value. display including columns).

<Specific example 8/AT2 state (game R227)>
Game R227 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 227, and the number of medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of medals to be obtained in AT2) is 300, and a three-coin bet game is performed.

After Lebaon of this game R227, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) Since the internal lottery has been won, operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, display of operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the minor winning combination 4) is executed.

In addition, since the remaining number of obtainable numbers in the AT2 state at Lebaon (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 244, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "244 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 554 , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 554") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (300 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (300 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before lever-on After subtracting the number of insertions in the game (3 in this example) from the acquired number counter (56 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (53 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (53) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), and obtains AT2 remaining after Reba-on. The count value of the number display counter is updated to 247 (= 300-53)), and the number of inserted number information (3) is subtracted from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (554 in this example), after Lebaon update the count value of the total acquired number display counter to 551 (=554-3).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R227, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won a small win 4 (condition device No. 8), after paying out the number of payout medals corresponding to the small win 4 (11 in this example) (at the end of the game) ), the number of payouts (11 in this example) minus the number of insertions (3 in this example) is subtracted (8 in this example) to the current counter value of the difference number counter (554 in this example). , after the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 562 in this example, a payout command including at least information on the number of inserted coins (3) and information on the number of payouts (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the number of payouts (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (53 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (64 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

Also, at the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (64) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 236 ( = 300-64), and add payout number information (11) to the count value (551 in this example) of the total winning number display counter after lever-on, and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 562 (=551+11).

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 562, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 562 sheets").

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game, and the total number of acquired numbers reaches a predetermined number (the count value of the total acquired number display counter reaches a certain value), and If the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of winning display is determined based on the count value of the total winning number display counter. In the game R227 of this example, since the total number of acquired cards reaches the predetermined number (555 cards) and the effect state is AT2, the count value (555 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter is used. , a predetermined number acquisition display is determined by lottery, and since the lottery has been won, the number of acquired medals has reached 555, and a second predetermined number acquisition indicating that the set value is 5 or more. A display TG2 (in this example, a display including a character string of "exceeding 555 sheets") is performed.

In the slot machine according to this example, the first count value (the count value of the difference number counter in this example) changes to the second predetermined value (this example 500 in this example) and when the first count value reaches the first predetermined value (456 in this example), the first predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, shown in FIG. 295, A first predetermined number acquisition display TG1) suggesting that 456 cards have been reached can be displayed, and a first count value ( In this example, the count value of the difference number counter) reaches the first predetermined value (456 in this example), and the first predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, it indicates that 456 has been reached as shown in FIG. 295). If the first count value reaches a second predetermined value (500 in this example) after the suggested first predetermined number acquisition display TG1) is displayed, the second predetermined number acquisition display is displayed. (In this example, the second predetermined number acquisition display TG2 suggesting that the number of sheets has reached 500, shown in FIG. 295) can be displayed.

In addition, at least one display of the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, the first predetermined number of sheets indicating that the number of sheets has reached 456 is shown in FIG. 295). Acquisition display TG1) is a display as a setting suggestion rendering that suggests a set value (in this example, a display that suggests that the set value is 4 or more).

According to the slot machine of this example, in addition to the number of acquired game media, it is also possible to obtain information on the set value, so it is possible to further enhance interest and convenience of the player.

<Specific example 9 of update and display of count values of various counters>
FIG. 298 is a diagram showing a specific example 9 of updating and displaying count values of various counters.

In this example, when the production state in the high navigation state is shifted in the order of AT1 state → AT2 state, in the AT1 state, after the difference number of sheets reaches the first predetermined number (500 in this example), the second This is an example of shifting to the AT2 state when the predetermined number of sheets (555 in this example) is reached.

<Specific example 9/AT1 state (game R265)>
Game R265 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 265 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state is 25, and a 3-coin bet game is performed.

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game R265, and the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total acquisition number display counter reaches a certain value). ), and if the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of win display is determined based on the count value of the total win number display counter.

In the game R265 of this example, the total acquired number has reached the predetermined number (500), but since the production state is in the AT1 state and not in the AT2 state (or LMT state), it has reached 500. The specified number of acquisition display suggesting is not performed.

<Specific example 9/AT1 state (game R247)>
Game R247 is a game (final game) in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 247 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state is 0, and a three-coin bet game is performed.

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of game R247, and when the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total acquisition number display counter reaches a certain value). ), and if the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of win display is determined based on the count value of the total win number display counter.

In the game R247 of this example, the total number of acquired medals has reached the predetermined number (555), but since the production state is the AT1 state and not the AT2 state (or LMT state), the number of acquired medals is There is no indication that the specified number of cards has been obtained indicating that the number of cards has reached 555.

<Specific example 9/AT2 state (game R239)>
Game R239 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 239, the number of medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of medals to be obtained in AT2) is 300, and a 3-coin bet game.

After Leva-on of this game R239, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and a replay combination 1 (condition device No. 2) is executed. Therefore, a small winning combination announcement (in this example, an image containing three characters of "R" for Replay) suggesting internal winning of a replay combination is executed.

In addition, since the remaining number of obtainable sheets in the AT2 state at Lebaon (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 300, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "300 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 570 , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 570") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (300 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (300 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before lever-on After subtracting the number of insertions in the game (0 in this example) from the acquired number counter (0 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (0 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), and obtains AT2 remaining after Reba-on. Update the count value of the number display counter to 300 (= 300-0), subtract the number of input information (0) from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (570 in this example), and after Lebaon The count value of the total acquired number display counter is updated to 570 (=570-0).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R239, the small winning announcement is erased. In addition, since the replay combination 1 (condition device No. 2) is won, the main control unit 300 does not pay out medals, and changes the number of payouts (0 in this example) to the number of insertions (0 in this example). is subtracted (0 in this example) to the current counter value of the difference number counter (570 in this example), so that the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 570 in this example. A payout command containing at least information (0) and payout number information (0) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the number of payouts in the game (0 in this example) is set in the AT2 acquisition number counter (0 in this example) 0) is added, and then a command including AT2 acquired sheet information (0 in this example) indicating the updated count value of the AT acquired sheet counter is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 .

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 300 ( = 300-0), and the payout number information (0) is added to the count value (570 in this example) of the total winning number display counter after lever-on, and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 570 (=570+0).

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 570, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 570 sheets").

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game, and the total number of acquired numbers reaches a predetermined number (the count value of the total acquired number display counter reaches a certain value), and If the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of winning display is determined based on the count value of the total winning number display counter.

In the game R239 of this example, the total winning number reaches a predetermined number (555) and the effect state is AT2 state, but the slot machine according to this example pays out one or more medals in AT2 state. In game R239, the display for obtaining the predetermined number of medals indicating that the number of medals obtained has reached 555 is not displayed because it is configured to perform the display for obtaining the predetermined number when a winning combination is won. .

<Specific example 9/AT2 state (game R238)>
Game R238 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 238, the number of expected medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of expected medals to be obtained in AT2) is 300, and a 3-coin bet game.

After Leva-on of this game R238, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) Since the internal lottery has been won, operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, display of operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the minor winning combination 4) is executed.

In addition, since the remaining number of obtainable sheets in the AT2 state at Lebaon (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 300, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "300 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 570 , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 570") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (300 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (300 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, while After subtracting the number of insertions (3 in this example) in the game from the AT2 acquisition number counter (0 in this example), AT2 acquisition number information indicating the count value of the AT acquisition number counter after updating (-3 in this example) to the first sub-controller 400.

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (-3) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), The count value of the acquired number display counter is updated to 303 (=300-(-3)), and the input number information (3) is subtracted from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (570 in this example). , the count value of the counter for displaying the total number of acquired cards after Lebaon is updated to 567 (=570-3).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R238, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won a small win 4 (condition device No. 8), after paying out the number of payout medals corresponding to the small win 4 (11 in this example) (at the end of the game) ), and the value (8 in this example) obtained by subtracting the number of input (3 in this example) from the number of payouts (11 in this example) is added to the current counter value of the difference number counter (570 in this example). , after the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 578 in this example, a payout command including at least information on the number of inserted coins (3) and information on the number of payouts (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the number of payouts in the game (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (-3 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (8 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter The included command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (8) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (300), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 292 ( = 300-8), and add payout number information (11) to the count value (567 in this example) of the total winning number display counter after lever-on, and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 578 (=567+11).

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 578, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 578 sheets").

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game, and the total number of acquired numbers reaches a predetermined number (the count value of the total acquired number display counter reaches a certain value), and If the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of winning display is determined based on the count value of the total winning number display counter.

In the game R238 of this example, the total winning number reaches the predetermined number (555) and the effect state is AT2. A predetermined number acquisition display is performed based on the count value of the number display counter (555 in this example). 500) is configured to display the acquisition of a predetermined number of sheets.

For this reason, when the lottery is won, as shown in FIG. display) is performed, and if the lottery is not won, as shown in FIG. display including character strings).

In the slot machine according to this example, the first count value (in this example, the count value of the difference number counter) is a first predetermined value (500 in this example) and a second predetermined value (555 in this example). ) in a state where both predetermined values are reached, the first game period (in this example, the period in which the production state is AT1 state) to the second game period (in this example, the production state is in AT2 state) period), in the second game period, a first predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, a predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that 500 cards have been reached) and a second predetermined number acquisition display ( In this example, one of the predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that 555 cards have been reached) (in this example, the person who won the lottery) display (in this example, shown in FIG. 298(a), A predetermined number acquisition display TGa) indicating that the number of sheets has reached 555 can be displayed.

According to the slot machine of this example, the first count value reaches both the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value, and the first game period to the second game period , since only one of the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display can be displayed during the second game period, the predetermined number acquisition display is excessively displayed. By not doing so, it is possible not only to prevent excessive gambling, but also to prevent misrecognition of the predetermined number acquisition display.

Note that this example shows an example of displaying the display of the winner in the lottery (or the display of the one who did not win in the lottery) of the first predetermined number of winning display and the second predetermined number of winning display. However, it is also possible to display only one of the first predetermined number of winning display and the second predetermined number of winning display, whichever wins the lottery. Further, when both the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value are reached in the first game period, the predetermined number of the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display is displayed. The display with the larger value (or the display with the smaller predetermined value) may always be displayed regardless of the lottery result.

<Specific example 10 of update and display of count values of various counters>
FIGS. 299(a) and 299(b) are diagrams showing a specific example 10 of updating and displaying count values of various counters.

The example shown in FIG. 299(a) is an example in which only the 3-bet game is performed in the AT2 state, and the number of difference has reached a predetermined number (500 in this example).

<Specific example 10/AT2 state (game R221), 3-card game>
Game R221 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 221, and the number of medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of medals to be obtained in AT2) is 280, and a 3-coin bet game is performed.

After Lebaon of this game R221, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) Since the internal lottery has been won, operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, display of operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the minor winning combination 4) is executed.

In addition, since the remaining number of obtainable numbers in the AT2 state at Lebaon (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 272, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "272 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (the count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 498 , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 498") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (280 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (280 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before Lebaon After subtracting the number of insertions in the game (3 in this example) from the acquired number counter (8 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (5 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (5) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (280), and obtains AT2 remaining after Reba-on. The count value of the number display counter is updated to 275 (=280-5), and the number of input information (3) is subtracted from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (498 in this example), and after Lebaon The count value of the total acquired number display counter is updated to 495 (=498-3).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R221, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won a small win 4 (condition device No. 8), after paying out the number of payout medals corresponding to the small win 4 (11 in this example) (at the end of the game) ), and the value (8 in this example) obtained by subtracting the number of inputs (3 in this example) from the number of payouts (11 in this example) is added to the current counter value of the difference number counter (498 in this example). , after the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 506 in this example, a payout command including at least information on the number of inserted coins (3) and information on the number of payouts (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the payout number in the game (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (5 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (16 in this example) indicating the count value of the AT acquired number counter after updating is included. command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

Also, at the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (16) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (280), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 264 ( = 280-16), and add payout number information (11) to the count value (495 in this example) of the total winning number display counter after lever-on, and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 506 (=495+11).

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 506, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 506 sheets").

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game, and the total number of acquired numbers reaches a predetermined number (the count value of the total acquired number display counter reaches a certain value), and If the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of winning display is determined based on the count value of the total winning number display counter.

In the game R221 of this example, since the total acquired number has reached the predetermined number (500) and the effect state is AT2, the count value (500 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter is used. , determine the predetermined number of acquisition display, and display the predetermined number of acquisition display TG (in this example, "500 medals Display that includes the character string "Breakthrough").

The slot machine according to this example is in a first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state in this example) and displays a first display (remaining number display DP shown in FIG. 299(a) in this example). When the first game (in this example, a 3-ply game) is executed in a state where the first result is (11 in this example, the number of payouts of game media is different from 3, which is the number of uses). , the number of game media used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game are the first count value (in this example, the count value of the difference number counter) and the second count value (in this example, the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter), and the number of used game media and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game can be reflected in the first display.

Also, the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state in this example) is the first display (in this example, the remaining number display DP shown in FIG. 299 (a)) and the second display (in this example, A first game (in this example, a three-bet game) is executed in a state where both displays of the total payout number display AP) shown in FIG. , the number of game media paid out is 11) different from the number of uses of 3, the number of used game media and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game are equal to the first count value (in this example, the difference count value of the number counter), second count value (in this example, AT2 remaining acquired number display counter), and third count value (in this example, count value of total acquired number display counter) In addition, the number of used game media and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game can be reflected on both the first display and the second display.

<Concrete example 10/AT2 state (game R221), double-play game>
The example shown in FIG. 299(b) is an example in which, in the AT2 state, a 3-bet game is performed after a 2-bet game, and the difference number reaches a predetermined number (500 in this example).

Game R221 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 221, and the number of medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of medals to be obtained in AT2) is 280, and is a two-bet game.

After Lebaon of this game R221, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and a small combination 4 (condition Since the device No. 18) was internally selected, the operation navigation is not displayed.

In addition, since the remaining number of obtainable numbers in the AT2 state at Lebaon (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 272, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "272 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (the count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 498 , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 498") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (280 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the updated count value (280 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400, Since it is a game, the count value of the AT2 acquisition number counter is not updated.

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Leva-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the input number information (2) from the count value (498 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter before Leva-on. Then, while updating the count value of the total acquired number display counter after Lebaon to 496 (= 498 - 2), since it is a double bet game, the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter is not updated, Further, the display of the remaining number display DP including an image showing the remaining number of obtainable cards in the AT2 state (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtainable number display counter) is not updated.

Next, since the game has ended in this game R221, the main control unit 300 wins a small winning combination 4 (condition device No. 8), so the number of payouts corresponding to the small winning combination 4 with 2-coin (this In this example, after 11 medals have been paid out (at the end of the game), the value (9 in this example) obtained by subtracting the number of inserted medals (2 in this example) from the number of payouts (11 in this example) is used as the current difference number of medals. By adding to the counter value of the counter (498 in this example), the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 507 in this example. While the payout command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, the count value of the AT2 acquisition number counter is not updated because it is a two-play game.

Also, at the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 adds the payout number information (11) to the count value (496 in this example) of the total winning number display counter after lever-on, and displays the total winning number at the end of the game. While the count value of the counter is updated to 507 (=496+11), since it is a double bet game, the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter is not updated, and the remaining acquisition number in the AT2 state ( The display of the remaining number display DP including the image showing the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) is not updated either.

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 507, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 507 sheets").

<Specific example 10/AT2 state (game R220), 3-card game>
Game R220 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 220, and the number of medals to be obtained in the AT2 state (the number of medals to be obtained in AT2) is 280, and is a three-bet game.

After Leva-on of this game R220, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) Since the internal lottery has been won, operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, display of operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the minor winning combination 4) is executed.

In addition, since the remaining number of obtainable numbers in the AT2 state at Lebaon (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is 272, an image showing the obtainable number (the count value of the AT2 remaining obtained number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, displaying an image including the characters "272 remaining") is executed, and the total number of payouts at Lebaon (the count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 507 , the total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 507") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for adding the number of AT2 expected acquisitions after accepting Lebaon, and the lottery result of the lottery (0 in this example) is set to the AT2 expected acquisition number counter before Lebaon (280 in this example). ), a command including AT2 expected acquisition number information indicating the count value (280 in this example) of the AT2 expected acquisition number counter after updating is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before Lebaon After subtracting the number of insertions in the game (3 in this example) from the acquired number counter (8 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (5 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

In addition, when the main control unit 300 accepts Reba-on, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (5) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (280), and obtains AT2 remaining after Reba-on. The count value of the number display counter is updated to 275 (=280-5), and the number of input information (3) is subtracted from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Lebaon (507 in this example), and after Lebaon The count value of the total acquired number display counter is updated to 504 (=507-3).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R220, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won a small win 4 (condition device No. 8), after paying out the number of payout medals corresponding to the small win 4 (11 in this example) (at the end of the game) ), and the value (8 in this example) obtained by subtracting the number of inputs (3 in this example) from the number of payouts (11 in this example) is added to the current counter value of the difference number counter (507 in this example). , after the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 515 in this example, a payout command including at least information on the number of inserted coins (3) and information on the number of payouts (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the payout number in the game (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (5 in this example), AT2 acquired number information (16 in this example) indicating the count value of the AT acquired number counter after updating is included. command is sent to the first sub-controller 400 .

Also, at the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (16) from the AT2 expected acquisition number information (280), and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 264 ( = 280-16), and the payout number information (11) is added to the count value of the total winning number display counter after lever-on (504 in this example), and the count value of the total winning number display counter at the end of the game. is updated to 515 (=504+11).

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 515, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 515 sheets").

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table at the end of the game, and the total number of acquired numbers reaches a predetermined number (the count value of the total acquired number display counter reaches a certain value), and If the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of winning display is determined based on the count value of the total winning number display counter.

In the game R220 of this example, since the total acquired number has reached the predetermined number (500) and the effect state is AT2, the count value (500 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter is used. , determine the predetermined number of acquisition display, and display the predetermined number of acquisition display TG (in this example, "500 medals Display that includes the character string "Breakthrough").

The slot machine according to this example is in a first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state in this example) and displays a first display (remaining number display DP shown in FIG. 299(b) in this example). When the second game (in this example, a two-play game) is executed in the state where the second game is played and the second result (in this example, the number of payouts of game media is 11, which is different from the number of uses of 3) , the number of game media used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are the first count value (in this example, the count value of the difference number counter) and the second count value (in this example, the AT2 remaining acquired number of the display counter), and the number of used game media and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are not reflected in the first display. there is

According to the slot machine of this example, the number of game media used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are not reflected in the first display. It is possible to inform the player that the second game has been executed in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. Also, even when the second game is executed, the number of game media used and the number of payouts are reflected in the first count value. In some cases, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing the game. Further, even if the number of game media increases in the second game, the number of used game media and the number of payouts of game media are not reflected in the second count value, and the first advantageous game state end condition is not affected. Therefore (because the first advantageous game advantageous state does not progress), it is possible to reduce the disappointment (feeling of loss) of the player who has executed the second game due to an operation error or the like.

Also, in the first advantageous gaming state (in this example, AT2 state), the first display (in this example, the remaining number display DP shown in FIG. 299 (b)) and the second display (in this example, A second game (in this example, a double bet game) is executed in a state where both displays of the total payout number display AP) shown in FIG. , the number of game media paid out is 11) different from the number of uses of 3, the number of used game media and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game are equal to the first count value (in this example, the difference the count value of the number counter), the second count value (in this example, the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter), and the third count value (in this example, the count value of the total acquired number display counter) and the third count value, and the number of game media used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are not reflected in the first display, but in the second display It is configured so that it can be reflected.

According to the slot machine of this example, the number of game media used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are not reflected in the first display, but can be reflected in the second display. By updating the second display related to the unfavorable profit, it is possible to prevent distrust from being given to the player.

FIG. 299(c) is a diagram showing an example of the screen transition of the three-bet game explained with reference to FIG. 299(a), and FIG. 299(d) is explained with reference to FIG. 299(b). It is the figure which showed an example of the screen transition of a 2-ply game.

When the game Rn has a 3-bet game, as shown in FIG. Both the display (remaining number display DP) and the second display (total payout number display AP) are updated.

On the other hand, when the game Rn is played with a double bet, as shown in FIG. Neither the display (remaining number display DP) nor the second display (total payout number display AP) is displayed, and after the end of the game Rn, when accepting the BET operation for the next game Rn+1 (FIG. 299(d) ), both the first display (remaining number display DP) and the second display (total payout number display AP) are updated.

That is, in the slot machine according to this example, in the first advantageous game state (AT2 state in this example), the first display (remaining number display DP) and the second The timing of updating the second display (total payout number display AP) is different.

FIG. 300(a) is a diagram showing an example of screen transition when the 2-coin game is performed after the 3-coin game explained with reference to FIG. 299(a), and then the 3-coin game is performed again. .

When a double bet game is performed in the game Rm after performing a three bet game in the game Rn, a freeze effect FG may be executed in the game Rm as shown in FIG. After that, when the 3-bet game is performed again, the first display (remaining number display DP) is the difference number MP including the image showing the count value of the difference number counter (in this example, "LAST 2240/2400 ” may be displayed).

Here, as described with reference to FIG. 273, in the high navigation state common processing A, when the value of the high navigation state counter is equal to or less than the LMT transition value A (19 in this example), or when the differential number counter is configured to set the freeze information (various information for executing the freeze effect) when the LMT transition value B (1840 in this example) or more is set, and the freeze information is set In this case, for example, the freeze effect FG shown in FIG. 300(a) is executed.

That is, the slot machine according to this example is in the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state in this example) and displays the first display (remaining number display DP shown in FIG. 300(a) in this example). When the second game (in this example, a two-ply game) is executed in the state of being played, and then the first game (in this example, a three-ply game) is executed, the first game The third display (in this example, the difference number display MP shown in FIG. 300(a)) can be displayed without displaying the display.

According to the slot machine according to this example, when the first game is executed after the second game, the third display can be displayed without displaying the first display. In some cases, it may be possible to make the player realize that he or she was playing a second game that is more disadvantageous.

FIG. 300(b) is a diagram showing an example of screen transition of the double-bet game described with reference to FIG. 299(d).

When the game Rn is played with a double bet, as shown in FIG. If neither the remaining number display DP) nor the second display (total payout number display AP) is displayed, and a three-bet game is played again after that, when the BET operation of the game Rm is accepted, the second After updating both the first display (remaining number display DP) and the second display (total payout number display AP), the freeze effect FG is executed, and the first display (remaining number display DP) changes to the difference number. In some cases, the difference number MP includes an image showing the count value of the counter (in this example, the display of an image including characters “LAST 2240/2400”).

That is, the slot machine according to this example is in the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state in this example) and displays the first display (remaining number display DP shown in FIG. 300(b) in this example). When the second game (in this example, a two-ply game) is executed in the state of being played, and then the first game (in this example, a three-ply game) is executed, the first game The third display (in this example, the difference number display MP shown in FIG. 300(b)) can be displayed without displaying the display.

According to the slot machine according to this example, when the first game is executed after the second game, the third display can be displayed without displaying the first display. In some cases, it may be possible to make the player realize that he or she was playing a second game that is more disadvantageous.

<Modified example 1 of update and display of count values of various counters>
300(c) and (d) are diagrams showing modification 1 of updating and displaying count values of various counters.

The example shown in FIG. 300(c) is an example in which a button effect is performed after the third stop in a certain game in the AT2 state, and an additional effect is performed when an operation of the operation means for effect is received.

In this example, in a certain game in the AT2 state, a chance production CG (in this example, a display of "!-!-!" indicating the possibility (chance) of giving the player an advantageous profit at the time of lever-on) is displayed. ) is displayed, and when the third stop is received (at the end of the game), a button effect BG (in this example, the appearance of the button is changed to A display consisting of a simulated image, the text "Press!", and an image of a downward arrow) is performed. Then, when the operation of the production operation means (production button) is received, the additional production UG for AT2 (in this example, the characters "+30" suggesting that the number of AT2 scheduled acquisitions has increased by 30) (including image display).

That is, the slot machine according to the present example performs the performance operation after all of the plurality of reels have been stopped by the operation of the plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 137 to 139 in this example). A certain effect (in this example, the button effect BG shown in FIG. 300(c)) can be started when the means (in this example, the effect button) is operated.

The example shown in FIG. 300(d) is an example in which the button effect explained using FIG. 300(c) is performed after the predetermined number acquisition display is started in a certain game in the AT2 state.

In this example, in a certain game in the AT2 state, a chance production CG (in this example, a display of "!-!-!" indicating the possibility (chance) of giving the player an advantageous profit at the time of lever-on) is displayed. ) is displayed, and when the third stop is received (at the end of the game), a predetermined number of medals obtained display TG indicating that the number of medals obtained has reached 500 (in this example, "500 exceeded"). display including a character string), and a button effect BG (in this example, an image imitating the appearance of the button and the text “Press!” , and an image of a downward arrow). Also, in this example, at least a part of the predetermined number acquisition display TG overlaps at least a part of the button effect BG. It will be erased and all the button effects will be visible.

That is, the slot machine according to the present example performs the performance operation after all of the plurality of reels have been stopped by the operation of the plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 137 to 139 in this example). The predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, the predetermined number acquisition display TG shown in FIG. 300(d)) can be started to be displayed before the means (in this example, the effect button) is operated, After all the reels out of the plurality of reels have been stopped by the operation of the plurality of stop operation means, a certain effect (in this example, FIG. 300 ( The button effect BG) shown in d) can be started to be executed.

According to the slot machine according to the present example, it becomes easier for the player to recognize both the certain effect and the display of obtaining the predetermined number of coins, and it may be possible to prevent the overlooking of the certain effect and the display of obtaining the predetermined number of coins.

It should be noted that the additional effect UG may be executed or may not be executed when the throwing operation or lever-on is performed without operation of the effect operation means (effect button). Also, in the case where it is configured to be executed, there may be a case where the display timing of the predetermined number acquisition display TG shown in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 300(d), when there is an operation of the effect operation means (effect button), the predetermined number acquisition display TG and the additional effect UG are overlapped, but when the insertion operation or lever-on is performed, the predetermined number acquisition display TG is performed. disappears, it does not overlap with the display of the additional effect UG.

<Modified example 2 of update and display of count values of various counters>
FIGS. 301(a) and 301(b) are diagrams showing modification 2 of update and display of count values of various counters.

In the ninth embodiment, the AT2 state is the AT state in which the progress of the game is controlled by the difference in the number of game media (AT state in which the difference in the number of game media is managed). Alternatively, an AT state in which the game progress is controlled by the number of games (AT state for managing the number of games) may be used, or may be combined with each effect state described in the sixth to third embodiments.
T state), or may be combined with each effect state described in the sixth to third embodiments.

FIG. 301(a) shows an example in which a three-bet game is performed in games R222 and R221.

<Modification 2/AT2 State (Game R222)>
The game 222 is a game in which the number of remaining games is 222 in the high navigation state and the number of remaining games is 2 in the AT2 state, and is a three-bet game.

Since the effect state is the AT2 state, the game R222 uses the effect image display device 157 to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state with the reception of Lebaon as a trigger, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) is internally won, so operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, display of operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of minor winning combination 4) is executed. In addition, since the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is 2, the remaining game display RG (in this example, " LAST2G”) is executed.

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at Lebaon is 490, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, " TOTAL 490 sheets of images including characters) is being executed.

Next, since the game has ended in this game R222, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won a small win 4 (condition device No. 8), after paying out the number of payout medals corresponding to the small win 4 (11 in this example) (at the end of the game) ), the number of payouts (11 in this example) minus the number of insertions (3 in this example) is subtracted (8 in this example) to the current counter value of the difference number counter (490 in this example). , the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 498 in this example.

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 498, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 498 sheets").

<Modification 2/AT2 State (Game R221)>
The game 221 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 221 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 1, and is a three-coin bet game.

Since the effect state is the AT2 state, the game R221 uses the effect image display device 157 to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state with the receipt of Lebaon as a trigger, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) is internally won, so operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, display of operation "2-1-3" for informing the correct operation order of minor winning combination 4) is being executed. In addition, since the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 1, the remaining game display RG (in this example, " LAST1G”) is executed.

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at Lebaon is 498, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, " TOTAL 498 sheets of images including characters) are being executed.

Next, since the game has ended in this game R221, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won a small win 4 (condition device No. 8), after paying out the number of payout medals corresponding to the small win 4 (11 in this example) (at the end of the game) ), and the value (8 in this example) obtained by subtracting the number of input (3 in this example) from the number of payouts (11 in this example) is added to the current counter value of the difference number counter (498 in this example). , the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 506 in this example.

In addition, since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total number of winnings display counter) at the end of the game is 506, the total number of payouts display AP (in this example, display of an image including the characters "TOTAL 506 sheets").

In addition, in the game R221 of this example, the total acquired number reaches the predetermined number (500) and the effect state is AT2 state, so the count value (500 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter Based on this, the predetermined number acquisition display is determined, and regardless of the set value, with a probability of 100/100, the predetermined number acquisition display TG (in this example, " display including the character string "500 sheets surpassed").

FIG. 301(b) shows an example in which, after a game R222, a three-coin game is performed, a two-coin game is performed in a game R221, and a three-coin game is performed in a subsequent game R220. Note that the three-bet game of the game R222 and the game R220 is the same as that explained with reference to FIG. 301(a), so the explanation thereof is omitted.

<Modification 2/AT2 State (Game R221)>
The game 221 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 221 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 2, and is a two-coin bet game.

Since the effect state is the AT2 state, the game R221 uses the effect image display device 157 to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state with the reception of Lebaon as a trigger, and also the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state. The operation navigation is not displayed because the small win 4 (conditional device No. 18) was internally won.

In addition, after accepting Lebaon, the main control unit 300 does not update the count value of the effect state counter because it is a two-play game, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter ) is not updated, but since the total number of payouts (the count value of the total winning number display counter) is 498, an image showing the count value of the total winning number display counter is included. A total payout number display AP (in this example, display of an image including characters of "TOTAL 498") is executed.

<Invention 10-1>
As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 256) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "the present invention 10-1") includes operating means (for example, shown in FIG. 256). stop buttons 137-139) and any of a plurality of states including a normal state (e.g., the low-navi state shown in FIG. 261(b)) and an advantageous state (e.g., the high-navi state shown in FIG. 261(b)). Control means (for example, main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 258) for shifting to that state, and display means (for example, effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 256) capable of displaying a plurality of types of display are provided. In the game machine, operation information of the operation means (for example, operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 263, operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 291(b), etc. information that can identify the stop position, stop order, stop timing, etc. of each reel), and the advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, A first counter that counts the total number of game media acquired by the player based on the number of game media used and the number of game media paid out in the advantageous state The first count value of the first counter (for example, the count value of the difference number counter shown in FIG. 302, FIG. ) can be updated, and when an advantageous state ending condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is changed to the normal state, and the advantageous state ending condition is the first count value reaches a first value (for example, when the number of games played after shifting to an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times), and in the advantageous state, among the plurality of advantageous game states One of the plurality of advantageous game states is a first advantageous game state (for example, AT2 state), and the first advantageous game state. A second counter (for example, FIG. 302 or FIG. 291 ( a), etc.), and the second count value of the second counter (for example, FIG. 302 or FIG. 91 (a), etc.) is configured to be renewable, and when the first advantageous game state end condition is satisfied, the first advantageous game state ends. The first advantageous game state end condition is when the second count value reaches the second value (for example, when the number of game media paid out after shifting to the AT2 state is AT2 when the number of coins to be acquired is reached), and one of the plurality of types of display is a first display indicating a value related to the second count value (for example, FIG. 302 or FIG. 291 (b) etc. shows the remaining number display DP), and the first game (for example, 3 bet game) in which the bet number of the game medium is the first number (for example, 3), and the number of game media A second game (e.g., a double bet game) in which the number of bets is a second number (e.g., 2) can be executed, and the second number is different from the first number. In the first advantageous game state, the first game is more advantageous for the player than the second game (for example, the number of game media paid out per time is greater, profit amount is large, the net increase in the number of cards per game is large, it is easy to shift from a normal state to an advantageous state, it is difficult to shift from an advantageous state to a normal state, etc.), and the execution result of the first game is the first and the execution result of the second game may be the second result, and the first result is the payout of game media. The result is a number (for example, 11) different from the first number, and the second result is a number (for example, 11) in which the number of payouts of game media is different from the second number. This is the result, and the state in which the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 302(A) or the state shown in game R221 in FIG. 299(a) ), when the first game is executed and the first result is obtained, the number of game media used (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game are the first count value and Both count values of the second count value can be reflected, and the number of game media used (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game can be reflected in the first display. When the second game is executed in the first advantageous game state and the first display is displayed and the second result is obtained, the second game The number of game media used for the execution of ( or the number of bets) and the number of payouts can be reflected only in the first count value out of the first count value and the second count value, and the use of the game medium in relation to the execution of the second game The gaming machine is characterized in that the number (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts are not reflected in the first display. FIG. 302 is a diagram showing an outline of the present invention 10-1.

According to the gaming machine according to Invention 10-1 of the present application, the number of game media used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are not reflected in the first display. It is possible to inform the player of the fact that the disadvantageous second game has been executed in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. Also, even when the second game is executed, the number of game media used and the number of payouts are reflected in the first count value. In some cases, the fairness of the players playing the game can be ensured. Further, even if the number of game media increases in the second game, the number of used game media and the number of payouts of game media are not reflected in the second count value, and the first advantageous game state end condition is not affected. Therefore (because the first advantageous game advantageous state does not progress), it is possible to reduce the disappointment (feeling of loss) of the player who has executed the second game due to an operation error or the like.

Note that the gaming machine according to Invention 10-1 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, the ``second counter'' according to the present invention is a ``counter for counting the total number of game media acquired by the player based on at least the number of game media paid out in the first advantageous game state. and includes a "counter for counting the total number of game media acquired by the player based on the number of game media used and the number of payouts in the first advantageous game state." Further, the "first display" according to the present invention may be a display indicating a value related to the second count value, and may be a value indicating the second count value itself, or a value indicating the second count value. and other values may be calculated.

In addition, a third counter (for example, a total counter shown in FIG. 302, FIG. The certain game period is a period including at least the game period in the first advantageous game state, and each time one game is played in the certain game period, the third The third count value of the counter (for example, the count value of the total acquired number display counter shown in FIG. 302, FIG. is a second display indicating a value related to the third count value (for example, total payout number display AP shown in FIG. 302, FIG. When both the first display and the second display are displayed (for example, the state shown in FIG. 302(A) or the state shown in game R221 in FIG. 299(a)), the first display When the game is executed and the first result is obtained, the number of used game media and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game are equal to the first count value, the second count value and the third count value. All of the count values can be reflected, and the number of game media used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game can be reflected in both the first display and the second display. The state in which both the first display and the second display are displayed in the first advantageous gaming state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 302(B) or the 299(a) in the state indicated by the game R221), when the second game is executed and the second result is obtained, the number of used game media and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are One count value, the second count value and the third count value, which can be reflected in the first count value and the third count value and are related to the execution of the second game The number of media used and the number of payouts may not be reflected on the first display, but may be reflected on the second display.

With such a configuration, the number of used game media and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are not reflected in the first display, but can be reflected in the second display. By updating the second display related to , it is possible to prevent distrust from being given to the player.

Further, one of the plurality of types of display is a third display indicating a value related to the first count value (for example, difference number display MP shown in FIG. 300(a), etc.). The display mode of the third display and the display mode of the second display are different display modes, and the second game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state and the first display is displayed. The third display may be displayed without displaying the first display when the game is executed and the first game is executed thereafter.

With such a configuration, when the first game is executed after the second game, the third display can be displayed without displaying the first display. In some cases, it is possible to make the player aware that he or she has been playing a second game that is disadvantageous.

Further, the execution of the second game in the first advantageous game state does not cause the first advantageous game state to end based on the establishment of the first advantageous game state end condition. Even if the first advantageous gaming state is terminated based on the establishment of the advantageous state ending condition by executing the second game in the first advantageous gaming state. good.

With such a configuration, the execution of the first game may not terminate the first advantageous game state, while the execution of the second game may terminate the first advantageous game state. , it may be possible to ensure fairness between the player who is playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

<Invention 10-2>
As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 256) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "claimed invention 10-2") is capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. means (for example, effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 256), and a first game (for example, 3 game) and a second game (for example, a double-bet game) in which the bet number of the game medium is a second number (for example, 2), and the second number is , a number different from the first number, and the first game is more advantageous for the player than the second game (for example, the number of game media paid out per time is larger, the amount of profit is large, the number of net increases per game is large, it is easy to shift from a normal state to an advantageous state, it is difficult to shift from an advantageous state to a normal state, etc.). A first counter for counting the total number of game media acquired by the player (for example, a total acquired number display counter shown in FIG. 303, FIG. 291(a), etc.) is provided based on , the first count value of the first counter (for example, the count value of the total winning number display counter shown in FIG. 303, FIG. 291(a), etc.) can be updated each time one game is played. , the display means can display a predetermined number of sheets obtained display (for example, a predetermined number of sheets obtained display TG shown in FIG. 303, FIG. 292, etc.) when the first count value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 500). When the first count value reaches the predetermined value due to the execution of the first game in the certain game period, the predetermined number acquisition display is displayed based on the execution of the first game. can be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 303(A) and game R221 in FIG. 299(a)), and the first count value reaches the predetermined value, the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed based on the execution of the second game (for example, FIG. 303 (B) or FIG. 299 ( (See game R211 in b)). FIG. 303 is a diagram showing an outline of the present invention 10-2.

According to the gaming machine according to the invention 10-2 of the present application, even if the first count value reaches the predetermined value due to the execution of the second game in a certain game period, the execution of the second game Therefore, the player's disappointment (feeling of loss) that has executed the second game due to an operation error or the like can be reduced. In addition, since the first count value is updated even when the second game is executed, fairness between the player executing the first game and the player executing the second game may be guaranteed.

It should be noted that the gaming machine according to Invention 10-2 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, operating means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 256), normal state (for example, low navigation state shown in FIG. 261 (b)) and advantageous state (for example, shown in FIG. 261 (b) and a control means (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 258) for shifting to one of a plurality of states including high navigation state), and operation information of the operation means (for example, in FIG. 263 Information that can identify the stop position, stop order, stop timing, etc. of each reel, such as operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. ), wherein the advantageous state is a state more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and based on the number of game media used and the number of game media paid out in the advantageous state , a second counter for counting the total number of game media acquired by the player (for example, the difference number counter shown in FIG. 303, FIG. The second count value of the second counter (for example, the count value of the difference number counter shown in FIG. 303, FIG. Secondly, the advantageous state is transitioned to the normal state, and the advantageous state end condition is when the second count value reaches the first value (for example, transition to the advantageous state When the number of games played from the game reaches the upper limit number of times), it is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous game states in the advantageous state, and the plurality of advantageous game states One of the advantageous gaming states is the first advantageous gaming state, and a third counter related to the management of the first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 remaining acquisition shown in FIG. 303, FIG. 291 (a), etc. number display counter), and every time one game is played in the first advantageous gaming state, the third count value of the third counter (for example, AT2 remaining acquisition shown in FIG. 303, FIG. 291 (a), etc. The count value of the number display counter) is configured to be able to update, and when the first advantageous gaming state end condition is satisfied, the first advantageous gaming state is terminated, and the first advantageous gaming state is terminated. The advantageous game state end condition is that when the third count value reaches the second value (for example, when the number of game media paid out after shifting to the AT2 state reaches the AT2 expected acquisition number) formed One of the plurality of types of display is a first display indicating a value related to the third count value (for example, the remaining number of sheets shown in FIG. 303, FIG. 291(b), etc.). display DP), a first game (for example, a three-bet game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is a first number (for example, 3), and a second number (for example, 2) is configured to be able to execute a second game (for example, a double-bet game), the second number is a number different from the first number, and the first advantageous game state, the first game is more advantageous for the player than the second game (for example, the number of game media paid out per hour is large, the profit amount per hour is large, the amount of profit per game is The number of net additions is large, it is easy to shift from a normal state to an advantageous state, it is difficult to shift from an advantageous state to a normal state, etc.), and the execution result of the first game may be the first result. and the execution result of the second game may be the second result, and the first result is different in the number of payouts of game media from the first number. (for example, 11), the second result is the result that the payout number of game media is a number (for example, 11) different from the second number, and the first advantageous The first game is executed in a game state in which the first display is displayed (for example, the state shown in FIG. 302(A) or the state shown in game R221 in FIG. 299(a)). is the first result, the number of game media used (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game are counts of both the second count value and the third count value and the number of game media used (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game can be reflected in the first display. state and the first display is displayed (for example, the state shown in FIG. 302(A) or the state shown by game R221 in FIG. 299(a)). If the second result is obtained, the number of game media used (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are the second count value and the third count value. Only the second count value can be reflected, and the number of game media used (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game may not be reflected in the first display. .

With such a configuration, the number of used game media and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are not reflected in the first display. It is possible to inform the player that the game has been played in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. Also, even when the second game is executed, the number of game media used and the number of payouts are reflected in the first count value. In some cases, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing the game. Further, even if the number of game media increases in the second game, the number of used game media and the number of payouts of game media are not reflected in the second count value, and the first advantageous game state end condition is not affected. Therefore (because the first advantageous game advantageous state does not progress), it is possible to reduce the disappointment (feeling of loss) of the player who has executed the second game due to an operation error or the like.

Further, the third counter may be a counter that counts the total number of game media acquired by the player based on at least the number of game media paid out in the first advantageous game state.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to ensure fairness between the player who is playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

In addition, by executing the first game, it is possible to win a certain combination (for example, a small combination 4 (conditional device No. 8)), and the number of payouts of game media based on the winning of the certain combination is A certain number of 1 or more (for example, 11), and in a certain state in which the first count value has reached the predetermined value due to the execution of the second game during the certain game period, The display of reaching the predetermined number is not displayed when a winning combination is not won by the execution of the first game, and the display of reaching the predetermined number is not displayed by the execution of the second game during the certain game period. In a certain state in which the first count value has reached the predetermined value, when the certain hand is won by executing the first game, the display of reaching the predetermined number can be displayed. (See, for example, game R211 in FIGS. 293 and 294).

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player feel a greater sense of accomplishment because the display is made in a state favorable to the player. In addition, in the case where an effect is produced by winning a prize, a synergistic effect with the winning effect can make the game even more lively.

Also, one of the plurality of types of display is a second display indicating a value related to the first count value (for example, total payout number display AP shown in FIG. 303, FIG. 291(b), etc.). Yes, the first game was executed in the first advantageous game state and both the first display and the second display were displayed, resulting in the first result. the number of game media used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game can be reflected in all of the first count value, the second count value and the third count value and the number of used game media and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game can be reflected in both the first display and the second display, and the first advantageous game state is achieved. and when the second game is executed in a state where both the first display and the second display are displayed and the second result is obtained, the second game The number of game media used and the number of payouts related to execution can be reflected in the first count value and the second count value out of the first count value, the second count value and the third count value. and the number of used game media and the number of payouts related to execution of the second game may not be reflected on the first display, but may be reflected on the second display.

With such a configuration, the number of game media used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are not reflected in the first display, but can be reflected in the second display. By updating the second display related to , it is possible to prevent distrust from being given to the player.

<Invention 10-3>
As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 256) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "claimed invention 10-3") is capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 256), and a player during a certain game period based on the number of game media used and the number of payouts during the certain game period. is equipped with a first counter (for example, the difference number counter shown in FIG. 304, FIG. 291(a), etc.) that counts the total number of game media acquired, and each time one game is played in the certain game period The first count value of the first counter (for example, the count value of the difference number counter shown in FIG. 304, FIG. 291(a), etc.) can be updated, and the display means Means capable of displaying a predetermined number acquisition display (for example, a predetermined number acquisition display TG shown in FIG. 304, FIG. 292, etc.) when the count value reaches one of a plurality of predetermined values (for example, 500), The certain game period is composed of a plurality of game periods including a first game period (for example, a period in which the production state is the AT1 state) and a second game period (for example, a period in which the production state is the AT2 state). is a game period in which the first game period is changed to the second game period, and the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed during the first game period. The predetermined number of winning display can be displayed during the second game period, and the display means provides a first predetermined number of winning display and a second predetermined number of winning display as the predetermined number of winning display. Means capable of displaying a plurality of predetermined number acquisition indications including indications, wherein the first predetermined number acquisition indication corresponds to a first predetermined value (for example, "456") among the plurality of predetermined values. the second predetermined number acquisition display is a display corresponding to a second predetermined value (for example, "500 sheets") of the plurality of predetermined values, and the first count value is The first predetermined value and the second predetermined value can be reached in this order, and the first count value is reached after the first count value reaches the predetermined value in the second game period. Even if the value falls below the predetermined value and then the first count value reaches the predetermined value again, the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed (for example, FIG. 304 ( A), see game R174 in FIG. After the first count value reaches the predetermined value, the first game period is shifted to the second game period while the first count value is below the predetermined value, and the second game period is changed to the second game period. (See, for example, FIG. 304(B) and game R221 in FIG. 292). , the first predetermined number acquisition display is a display as a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value, and the first count value has reached the first predetermined value, but the second predetermined value When the first game period is shifted to the second game period in a certain state in which the game period is not reached, the first predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed due to the execution of the game in the second game period. In a certain state in which the first count value reaches both the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value, the first game period , wherein the second predetermined number acquisition display is displayed by the execution of the game in the second game period when the game is shifted from the second game period to the second game period. is. FIG. 304 is a diagram showing an outline of the present invention 10-3.

According to the gaming machine according to the invention 10-3 of the present application, after the first count value reaches the predetermined value in the second game period, the first count value falls below the predetermined value, and then the first count value Even when the count value reaches the predetermined value again, the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed, so it is possible to alleviate the feeling that the game media have not increased during the same game period. Further, the first game period is shifted to the second game period while the first count value is lower than the predetermined value, and the first count value reaches the predetermined value in the second game period. Since the predetermined number of acquisition display can be displayed when the number is reached, the predetermined number of acquisition display may enhance the interest of the player.

When the game state is straddling (and the player can perceive the transition), there are many people who have expectations for the new advantageous game state and think of it separately from the advantageous game state before the transition. Therefore, for such a player, by performing a predetermined number reached display, it is possible to moderately provoke the new advantageous game state, and by notifying the standard number of cards, it is possible to start the new game state. In some cases, it is easy to grasp the increase in the number of

It should be noted that the gaming machine according to Invention 10-3 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, the ``first counter'' according to the present invention may be ``a counter that counts the total number of game media acquired by the player based on at least the number of game media paid out during a certain game period''. It may also include "a counter that counts the total number of game media acquired by the player based on the number of game media used and paid out during a certain game period".

Further, the plurality of predetermined number acquisition indications include a third predetermined number acquisition indication, and the third predetermined number acquisition indication is an indication corresponding to a third predetermined value among the plurality of predetermined values. , the first count value is configured to reach the first predetermined value, the second predetermined value, and the third predetermined value in order, and the third predetermined number acquisition display is set The display as a setting suggestion effect suggesting a value, and in a state where the first count value reaches both the second predetermined value and the third predetermined value, the first When the game period is shifted to the second game period, if the third predetermined number acquisition display is displayed by the execution of the game in the second game period, the second predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed and the third predetermined number of winning display is not displayed, the second predetermined number of winning display is displayed. Further, the above-mentioned "by executing the game during the second game period" may mean "when a winning combination is won by executing the game during the second game period". Further, the number of payouts of game media based on the winning of the winning combination may be a certain number equal to or greater than one.

Further, after the first count value reaches the predetermined value, the first count value falls below the predetermined value, and then the first count value reaches the predetermined value again. When one game period shifts to the second game period, the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed only by shifting to the second game period, and the execution of the game in the second game period is not performed. (See, for example, FIG. 304(C) and game R221 in FIG. 293).

With such a configuration, the display of obtaining the predetermined number of coins is displayed based on the execution of the game during the second game period, so that it may be possible to prevent the player from overlooking the display of obtaining the predetermined number of coins.

Further, the expected value of the increased number of game media per game in the second game period is higher than the expected value of the increased number of game media per game in the first game period (for example, the net increase in the number of game media per game). may be configured higher.

With such a configuration, since the predetermined number acquisition display is performed in the game period in which the expected value of the increased number of game media is higher, the player's desire to play the game is maintained until the next predetermined number acquisition display is displayed. sometimes it is possible.

In addition, a certain effect (for example, an additional effect UG shown in FIGS. 304(A), 291(b), 300(c), and (d), or button effect BG) can be executed, and the execution frequency of the certain effect during the first game period is higher than the execution frequency of the certain effect during the second game period. , and the certain effect may be a effect related to the profit of the second game period.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for the second game period even in the first game period, and to maintain the player's willingness to play from the first game period to the second game period. may be able to

It should be noted that the "effect related to the profit in the second game period" according to the present invention is not limited to the AT2 additional effect or the button effect. Also included are effects related to the number of navigations in AT (managed by how many times navigation is performed in AT), mode-up of AT2 (a good mode has a high probability of addition, a large number of additions, and a combination of both).

In addition, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 256) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate, and a plurality of stop operation means operated to individually stop the plurality of reels (For example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 256) and operation means for production (for example, production buttons not shown and bet button 130 shown in FIG. 256), and by operating the plurality of stop operation means After all the reels out of the plurality of reels have stopped and before the operation means for effect is operated, the predetermined number acquisition display (for example, predetermined number acquisition shown in FIG. 300(d)) is performed. display TG) is configured to be able to start displaying, and the effect operation means is operated after all of the plurality of reels have been stopped by the operation of the plurality of stop operation means. 300(c) and (d) of FIG. 300(d)) can be started to be executed.

With such a configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize both the certain effect and the display of obtaining the predetermined number of coins, and it may be possible to prevent the overlooking of the certain effect and the display of obtaining the predetermined number of coins.

It should be noted that it may be possible to start executing the certain effect based on the operation of an operation means other than the effect operation means (for example, the bet button 130 or the start lever 135 shown in FIG. 256), It may be configured such that the certain effect is not executed based on the operation of the operation means other than the effect operation means.

In addition, it is configured to be able to execute multiple types of freeze effects (for example, freeze effects FG shown in FIGS. 300(a) and 300(b)), and one of the multiple types of freeze effects is , is the first freeze effect (for example, effect to lock the reels 110 to 112, etc.) performed at the first timing in one game (for example, the timing at which Lebaon is accepted), and is one of the plurality of types of freeze effects One freeze effect is performed at a second timing different from the first timing in one game (for example, the timing at which any one of the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation is received). This is a second freeze effect (for example, a screen darkening effect, an additional effect, an effect at the start of the ED effect, etc.), and in the second game period, the first freeze effect is performed. Based on the above, the display of reaching the predetermined number may be displayed, and in the second game period, the display of reaching the predetermined number based on the execution of the game in which the second freeze effect is performed may be configured so as not to be displayed.

With such a configuration, the player is prevented from feeling distrustfulness by making it possible to display the predetermined number acquisition display as much as possible while making it possible to give priority to the execution of the freezing performance which is generally highly expected. be able to.

<Invention 10-4>
As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 256) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "claimed invention 10-4") is capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 256), and the number of game media acquired by the player based on at least the number of game media payouts during a certain game period. A first counter for counting the total number (for example, a difference number counter shown in FIG. 305, FIG. 291(a), etc.) is provided, and the first (for example, the count value of the differential number counter shown in FIG. 305, FIG. 291(a), etc.) can be updated. Means capable of displaying a predetermined number acquisition display when reaching any one of them, and the certain game period includes a first game period (for example, a period in which the effect state is the AT1 state) and a second game period. (for example, a period in which the effect state is the AT2 state). The predetermined number of winning display can be displayed during the second game period, and the display means can display a first predetermined number of winning display (for example, FIG. 305(A) or Means capable of displaying a plurality of predetermined number acquisition displays including a predetermined number acquisition display TG1 shown in FIG. 295) and a second predetermined number acquisition display (for example, predetermined number acquisition display TG2 shown in FIG. 305(A) and FIG. 295) , the first predetermined number acquisition indication is an indication corresponding to a first predetermined value (for example, 456) of the plurality of predetermined values, and the second predetermined number acquisition indication is an indication corresponding to the plurality of is a display corresponding to a second predetermined value (e.g., 500) among the predetermined values of, and the first count value can reach the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value in this order. When the first count value reaches the first predetermined value before the first count value reaches the second predetermined value in the second game period (See, for example, FIG. 305(A) and game R238 in FIG. 295). The first predetermined number of sheets after reaching the first predetermined value After the acquisition display is displayed, the second predetermined number acquisition display can be displayed when the first count value reaches the second predetermined value (for example, FIG. 305 ( A) and game R227 in FIG. 295), the first game period in a state where the first count value has reached both the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value to the second game period, during the second game period, only one of the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display can be displayed. (See, for example, FIG. 305(B), game R238 in FIG. 296(a), and game R238 in FIG. 298). FIG. 305 is a diagram showing an outline of the present invention 10-4.

According to the amusement machine according to the invention 10-4 of the present application, when the first count value reaches both the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value, the second game period starts from the first game period. after the transition to the game period of (2), since only one of the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display can be displayed in the second game period, the predetermined number acquisition By not displaying excessively, it is possible not only to prevent excessive gambling, but also to prevent misrecognition of the predetermined number acquisition display.

It should be noted that the gaming machine according to Invention 10-4 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, the "first counter" according to the present invention may be "a counter that counts the total number of game media acquired by the player based on at least the number of game media paid out during a certain game period." It may also include "a counter that counts the total number of game media acquired by the player based on the number of game media used and paid out during a certain game period".

Further, the first game period is shifted to the second game period while the first count value has reached both the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value. Later, after only the second predetermined number of winning display out of the first predetermined number of winning display and the second predetermined number of winning display is displayed in the second game period, the second predetermined number of winning display is displayed. Even when the first count value falls below the first predetermined value in the game period and then reaches the first predetermined value again, the first predetermined number acquisition display is displayed. (see, for example, game R174 in FIG. 296(b)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent excessive gambling by preventing the predetermined number of winning display from being performed excessively. In addition, for example, after displaying the larger number, if the player intentionally plays a game in which the player loses and displays the smaller number, the display with the larger number is displayed again. In this case, if it is displayed again, it will lead to excessive display of the acquisition of the predetermined number, and if it is not displayed again, the game will Players (players who have once forgotten that the larger number is displayed) may feel distrustful, so even if they intentionally lose a game, they will get a predetermined number of coins. By structuring so that no display is performed, it is possible to prevent the player from losing.

Also, the first game period in a state where the first count value has reached both the first predetermined value (for example, 456) and the second predetermined value (for example, 500) to the second game period, the first predetermined number acquisition display (for example, the first predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that 456 cards have been reached) and the first predetermined number acquisition display in the second game period Of the two predetermined number acquisition indications (for example, the second predetermined number acquisition indication suggesting that 500 cards have been reached), after only the first predetermined number acquisition indication is displayed, the second predetermined number acquisition indication is displayed. The second predetermined number of winning display may be displayed during the game period.

With such a configuration, the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display are displayed a plurality of times. Since the acquisition display of the predetermined number of coins is performed from , it is possible to moderately stimulate the gambling spirit and give the player a sense of accomplishment.

Also, the first game period in a state where the first count value has reached both the first predetermined value (for example, 456) and the second predetermined value (for example, 500) to the second game period, the first predetermined number acquisition display (for example, the first predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that 456 cards have been reached) and the first predetermined number acquisition display in the second game period After both of the two predetermined number acquisition indications (for example, the second predetermined number acquisition indication suggesting that 500 cards have been reached) are not displayed, the first predetermined number in the second game period The acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display may be configured so as not to be displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from making a loss by arranging so that the predetermined number of winning display is not performed even if the player intentionally loses a game.

Further, the plurality of predetermined number acquisition indications include a third predetermined number acquisition indication, and the third predetermined number acquisition indication is set to a third predetermined value (for example, 1000) among the plurality of predetermined values. A corresponding display, wherein the first count value has reached both the first predetermined value (e.g., 456) and the second predetermined value (e.g., 500). After the transition from one game period to the second game period, the first predetermined number acquisition display (for example, the first predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that 456 cards have been reached) is displayed in the second game period. ) and the second predetermined number acquisition display (for example, the second predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that 500 cards have been reached) are not displayed, in the second game period, the second Although one predetermined number of acquisition display and the second predetermined number of acquisition display are not displayed, the third predetermined number of acquisition display (for example, a third predetermined number of acquisition display suggesting that 1000 cards have been reached) is displayed. ) may be configured to be displayable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from making a loss by configuring so that the predetermined number acquisition display is not performed even if the player intentionally loses a game. A sense of accomplishment can be given to the player at appropriate timing.

In addition, at least one of the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display (for example, the first predetermined number of sheets indicating that the number of sheets has reached 456 shown in FIG. 295 is displayed). The acquisition display TG1) may be a display as a setting suggestion effect suggesting a set value (for example, a effect suggesting that the set value is 4 or more).

With such a configuration, in addition to the acquired number of game media, information on the set value can be obtained, so that the interest and convenience of the player can be further enhanced.

The configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the above embodiment. ), for example, it may be configured to be determined by lottery from a plurality of AT types such as game number management, difference number management, and Bernavi number management.

Also, two-choice navigation may be executed in the AT2 state. For example, in step S2301 of AT2 state processing B shown in FIG. adds 11 to the AT2 acquisition number counter, the first stop operation is operated according to the navigation during two-choice navigation, and if the second stop operation is missed, adds 1 to the AT2 acquisition number counter, and two-choice navigation Even if the first stop operation is performed without following the navigation and the number of sheets becomes 0, 11 may be added to the AT2 acquisition sheet counter.

Also, in the AT1 state, it may be configured so that "TOTAL 0", which is the total number of acquired sheets, is not displayed, in the AT1 state, a display corresponding to the AT2 expected acquired number counter may be performed, or +30 or the like may be displayed. It may be displayed by stacking them.

Also, for example, the time from the timing of the third stop operation to display the predetermined number acquisition display TG1 (456 cards exceeded) to the display start timing of the predetermined number acquisition display TG2 (500 cards exceeded) shown in FIG. As shown, when the count value of the difference number counter exceeds 500 in the AT1 state, from the timing of the third stop operation in the subsequent AT2 state to the display start timing of the predetermined number acquisition display TG (over 500) times may be different.

Also, among the multiple configurations described in Embodiments 6 to 4, the content described in one configuration may be applied to another configuration to expand the range of games. 7-1 to 1-9 (Figs. 227 to 235), Inventions of the present application 8-1 to 2-3 (Figs. 245 to 247), Inventions of the present application 9-1 to 3-2 (Figs. 254 to 255), the present application Any one of inventions 10-1 to 4-4 (FIGS. 302 to 305) or a plurality of inventions may be combined.

[Embodiment 10]
The slot machine according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

Incidentally, in the tenth embodiment, in principle, only the configuration different from the game machines according to the first to ninth embodiments will be described in order to avoid redundant description. 306 to 308 are basically used only for the explanation of the tenth embodiment, and even if overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the The code shown at 308 has priority.

FIGS. 306(A) and (B) are diagrams showing common outlines of Inventions 11-1 to 11-5.

<First game period, second game period>
First, using FIG. 306(A), the first game period and the second game period according to this embodiment will be described.

The slot machine according to the present embodiment is based on the number of uses and the number of payouts of game values (for example, game media such as medals) during a certain game period. 306(A)) (for example, the difference number counter shown in FIG. 302, FIG. 291(a), etc.).

Also, every time one game is played in the certain game period, the first count value of the first counter (for example, the count value of the differential number counter shown in FIG. 302, FIG. 291(a), etc.) can be updated. Then, when this first count value reaches one of a plurality of predetermined values (for example, 135, 246, 333, 456, 500, 555, 666, 1000, etc. shown in FIG. 290(b)) (for example, , 456), a predetermined acquisition display (for example, a predetermined acquisition display TG1 shown in FIG. 306(A) indicating that the number of acquired medals has reached 456) can be displayed there is

Further, as shown in FIG. 306(A), the slot machine according to the present embodiment can shift from the first game period T1 (for example, the period in which the production state is the AT1 state) and from the first game period T1. a plurality of game periods including a second game period T2 (for example, a period in which the effect state is the AT2 state), and the predetermined acquisition display is not displayed in the first game period T1. In the second game period T2, a predetermined acquisition display (for example, a predetermined acquisition display TG1 shown in FIG. 306(A) indicating that the number of acquired medals has reached 456) can be displayed. (There are cases where the predetermined acquisition display is not displayed).

<First Predetermined Acquisition Display, Second Predetermined Acquisition Display>
Next, the first predetermined acquisition display and the second predetermined acquisition display according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 306(B).

In the slot machine according to the present embodiment, as the predetermined winning indication, a first predetermined winning indication (eg, 456) corresponding to a first predetermined value (eg, 456) out of a plurality of predetermined values (eg, , a predetermined acquisition display TG1 suggesting that the number of acquired medals has reached 456), and a second predetermined acquisition display corresponding to a second predetermined value (for example, 500) among a plurality of predetermined values ( For example, it is possible to display a plurality of predetermined acquisition displays including (predetermined acquisition display TG2 indicating that the number of medals acquired has reached 500 shown in FIG. 306(B)) and may not).

Also, the first predetermined acquisition display is a display as a setting suggesting effect that suggests a set value (for example, the set value is set to 4 or more as shown in FIG. 290(b)).

Also, in the slot machine according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. In a state where the first predetermined value (for example, 456) is reached but the second predetermined value (for example, 500) is not reached, the first game period T1 to the second game period When the transition to T2 is made, the first predetermined acquisition display (for example, the number of acquired medals shown in FIG. It is configured such that the suggested predetermined acquisition display TG1) may not be displayed.

Further, in the slot machine according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. The first game period T1 to the second game period in a certain state where both the first predetermined value (for example, 456) and the second predetermined value (for example, 500) are reached When the transition to T2 is made, the second predetermined acquisition display (for example, as shown in FIG. A suggestive predetermined acquisition display TG2) is configured to be displayed.

<Invention 11-1>
FIG. 306(C) is a diagram showing features of the present invention 11-1. The gaming machine according to Invention 11-1 of the present application comprises control means for shifting to any one of a plurality of states including a normal state and an advantageous state (AT state in this example), and FIG. , the certain game period is a game period in the advantageous state, and the certain game period ends without transitioning from the first game period T1 to the second game period T2. (when shifting to normal state).

That is, the gaming machine according to Invention 11-1 of the present application (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 256) has display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIGS. 256 and 306). and control means (e.g., main control unit 300) for shifting to one of a plurality of states including a normal state and an advantageous state (e.g., AT state), Based on the number of uses and the number of payouts of game values in a certain game period, the total number of game values (for example, game media such as medals) acquired by the player in the certain game period (for example, FIG. (for example, the difference number counter shown in FIG. 304, FIG. 291(a), etc.), and the first The first count value of the counter (for example, the count value of the differential number counter shown in FIG. 304, FIG. 291(a), etc.) can be updated. By means capable of displaying a predetermined acquisition indication when any of a plurality of predetermined values (for example, 135, 246, 333, 456, 500, 555, 666, 1000, etc. shown in FIG. 290(b)) is reached The certain game period is a game period in the advantageous state, and the certain game period includes a first game period (for example, the first game period T1 shown in FIG. 306(A)) and a second game period. (for example, the second game period T2 shown in FIG. 306 (A)) is a game period composed of a plurality of game periods, and from the first game period to the second game period The predetermined win display is configured not to be displayed during the first game period, and the predetermined win display can be displayed during the second game period. The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of predetermined acquisition displays including a first predetermined acquisition display and a second predetermined acquisition display as the predetermined acquisition displays, and the first predetermined acquisition display comprises the plurality of acquisition displays. display corresponding to the first predetermined value (for example, 456) of the predetermined values of (for example, the predetermined acquisition display TG1 shown in FIG. ), and the second predetermined acquisition display is a display corresponding to a second predetermined value (for example, 500) of the plurality of predetermined values (for example, the number of medals obtained shown in FIG. 306(B). Suggests that the number of sheets has reached 500 is a predetermined acquisition display TG2), wherein the first count value is configured to reach the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value in order, and the first predetermined acquisition display is: 290(b), the display as a setting suggestion rendering that suggests a setting value (for example, the setting value is set to 4 or more, as shown in FIG. 290(b)), and the first count value is the first predetermined value. is reached but the second predetermined value is not reached, when the first game period is shifted to the second game period, execution of the game in the second game period (see, for example, FIG. 306(A)), the first count value may not be displayed depending on the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value When the transition from the first game period to the second game period occurs in a certain state in which both of the values have reached the predetermined values, the second predetermined value is reached by executing the game in the second game period. When the certain game period ends without transitioning from the first game period to the second game period, when an acquisition display is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 306(B)) This game machine is characterized in that it is configured to have

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there are amusement machines that display a specified number of coins reached during an increase period when the game value is expected to increase, and do not display a specified number of coins reached during a non-increase period when the game value is not expected to increase.

In such a game machine, if a specification is adopted to suggest settings by displaying the specified number of cards, for example, when 456 cards are reached, setting 4 or more is suggested, and when 555 cards are reached, setting 5 is confirmed. Since the number of sheets is close to the stipulated number of 500, if multiple stipulated numbers are reached during the non-increase period, especially when the stipulated number of sheets is reached during the non-increase period and the transition to the increase period is taken into consideration. There was room for

According to the gaming machine according to Invention 11-1 of the present application, when the number of acquired coins is small during the non-increase period, by providing an opportunity to suggest settings by displaying the specified number of coins, the feeling of disappointment over the small number of acquired coins is reduced. The player can be relieved by making it possible to provide important information regarding the decision to continue the game. On the other hand, if the number of winnings is large during the non-increase period, the player can receive more accurate information on the profit of the player by displaying the number of reaching the specified number closer to the actual number of winnings. It is possible to provide an opportunity to aim for acquisition of a game value.

In addition, since it is configured so that a certain game period may end without transitioning from the first game period to the second game period, the display of reaching the specified number of sheets is displayed to give a sharpness to the game. It can make you feel good about yourself.

It should be noted that the operation information of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation") can be notified, and the advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation navigation, and the operation The navigator may be navigator for the leading role.

<Invention 11-2>
FIG. 307(A) is a diagram showing features of Invention 11-2 of the present application. As shown in FIG. 307(A), the gaming machine according to Invention 11-2 of the present application performs a certain game method (in this example, game method 2 ( A penalty is given if an operation that does not follow the operation navigation is performed))), a penalty that is disadvantageous to the player (e.g., no lottery for AT transition, AT transition lowering the winning probability of the lottery, stopping the subtraction of the number of games up to the ceiling), and even in the certain case, the first count value can be updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 307(A), in the specific lottery, the specific 1-card hand and the specific 10-card hand can be won more than once. 1 (100%), the draw-in probability of the specific 10-card hand is 0/1 (0%), and regardless of the presence or absence of operation navigation, no disadvantageous penalty is given to the player. On the other hand, in the game method 2 (a certain game method), the pull-in probability of the specific 1-card role is 0/1 (0%), and the pull-in probability of the specific 10-card role is 1/1 (100%). A penalty that is disadvantageous to the player is given if the player performs an operation that does not comply.

A game method according to the present invention is not limited to game method 2 shown in FIG. 307(A). Therefore, for example, in a push order role, an incorrect push order operation other than a correct push order operation is more likely than a pull-in probability when a correct push order operation (for example, a correct push order operation or a pinching operation between left and right) is performed. is set high, and if an incorrect answer push order operation is performed (when a certain game method is performed) when the push order role is internally won, it is disadvantageous to the player. may be configured to give a penalty.

That is, the gaming machine according to Invention 11-2 of the present application (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 256) has display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIGS. 256 and 306). and, based on the number of uses and the number of payouts of the game value in a certain game period, the game value (for example, the game value such as medals) acquired by the player in the certain game period medium) (for example, the total acquisition number shown in FIG. 306 (A)) (for example, a difference number counter shown in FIG. Every time one game is played in the period, the first count value of the first counter (for example, the count value of the difference number counter shown in FIG. 304, FIG. The display means indicates that the first count value has reached one of a plurality of predetermined values (for example, 135, 246, 333, 456, 500, 555, 666, 1000, etc. shown in FIG. 290(b)) 306(A), the certain game period includes a first game period (for example, the first game period T1 shown in FIG. 306(A)) and a second game period ( For example, it is a game period composed of a plurality of game periods including a second game period T2) shown in FIG. The predetermined acquisition display is configured not to be displayed during the first game period, and the predetermined acquisition display is configured to be displayable during the second game period; is means capable of displaying a plurality of predetermined acquisition indications including a first predetermined acquisition indication and a second predetermined acquisition indication as the predetermined acquisition indications, wherein the first predetermined acquisition indication is the plurality of predetermined acquisition indications; A display corresponding to the first predetermined value (for example, 456) of them (for example, a predetermined acquisition display TG1 that suggests that the number of medals acquired has reached 456, shown in FIG. 306(A)), The second predetermined acquisition display is a display corresponding to a second predetermined value (for example, 500) among the plurality of predetermined values (for example, the number of acquired medals shown in FIG. 306(B) is 500). is a predetermined acquisition display TG2) suggesting that the first 290(b) shows a set value (for example, the setting value is equal to or greater than 4), and the first count value has reached the first predetermined value, but the second predetermined value has been reached. When the game period is shifted from the first game period to the second game period in a certain state in which the value is not reached, the first predetermined acquisition display is not displayed due to the execution of the game in the second game period. (see, for example, FIG. 306(A)), and the first count value reaches both the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value In a certain state, when the first game period is shifted to the second game period, the execution of the game in the second game period causes the second predetermined acquisition display to be displayed. (See, for example, FIG. 306(B)), a certain game method (in this example, a game method 2 shown in FIG. When one game is played, a penalty that is disadvantageous to the player (e.g., no lottery for AT transition, lowering the winning probability of lottery for AT transition, ceiling stop subtracting the number of games up to), and is configured to be able to update the first count value even in the certain case. is.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there are amusement machines that display a specified number of coins reached during an increase period when the game value is expected to increase, and do not display a specified number of coins reached during a non-increase period when the game value is not expected to increase.

In such a game machine, if a specification is adopted to suggest settings by displaying the specified number of cards, for example, when 456 cards are reached, setting 4 or more is suggested, and when 555 cards are reached, setting 5 is confirmed. Since the number of sheets is close to the stipulated number of 500, if multiple stipulated numbers are reached during the non-increase period, especially when the stipulated number of sheets is reached during the non-increase period and the transition to the increase period is taken into consideration. There was room for

According to the gaming machine according to Invention 11-2 of the present application, when the number of acquired coins is small during the non-increase period, by giving an opportunity to suggest settings by displaying the specified number of coins reached, the feeling of disappointment over the small number of acquired coins is reduced. The player can be relieved by making it possible to provide important information regarding the decision to continue the game. On the other hand, if the number of winnings is large during the non-increase period, the player can receive more accurate information on the profit of the player by displaying the number of reaching the specified number closer to the actual number of winnings. It is possible to give an opportunity to aim for acquisition of a game value.

In addition, when one game is played with a certain game method in a certain state, a penalty that is disadvantageous to the player can be given, and even in a certain case, one count value can be updated. Therefore, even if a player who is unfamiliar with the game mistakenly performs a specific game method in the specification that gives a penalty when a specific game method is performed when not navigating, the display of reaching the specified number of Since there is no influence on the update of the counter for the purpose, it is possible to stably provide setting suggestion and profit-related information by displaying the specified number of sheets reached.

<Invention 11-3>
FIGS. 307(B)(1) and 307(B)(2) are diagrams showing features of the present invention 11-3 and the conventional example. As shown in FIG. 307 (B) (2), in the conventional gaming machine, a predetermined number of games (in this example, 0 to 999 G, 1000 G to 1999 G, 2000 G or more) after the power is turned on. Since the setting suggestion effect is executed according to the result of the lottery, the lottery probability changes according to the number of games played since the power is turned on, and the number of times information on the player's profit (information on the set value) is provided. There is a problem that there is unevenness.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 307(B)(1), in the gaming machine according to the present invention 11-3, the first predetermined acquisition display is performed at a certain starting point (for example, when the power is turned on, when the setting is changed, not based on the number of times one game has been executed (for example, the number of games played since the power was turned on) from the time of initial setting, when a certain period of time has elapsed since the power was turned on, or when the first game was started after the power was turned on. Whether or not to display is determined based on the result of a predetermined lottery (in this example, a lottery using the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table shown in FIGS. 290(b) and 307(B)).

Specifically, when it is determined that the total number of acquired cards has reached 135 in step S2709 of the number display-related processing described with reference to FIG. For example, regardless of the number of games played after turning on the power, a lottery using a random number is performed, and when the setting value is an odd number (setting 1, setting 3, or setting 5), 135 with a probability of 2/100. A predetermined number acquisition display (for example, a display including a character string of "over 135") indicating that the number of sheets has been reached is performed, and when the set value is an even number, the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed.

Also, if it is determined in step S2709 that the total number of acquired cards has reached 246, the random number is set regardless of the number of times one game has been executed from a certain starting point (for example, the number of times the game has been played since the power was turned on). A lottery is performed using a lottery, and when the set value is an even number (setting 2, setting 4, or setting 6), a predetermined number acquisition display (for example, "246 cards display including the character string "breakthrough"), and when the set value is an odd number, the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed.

Also, when it is determined in step S2709 that the total number of acquired cards has reached 333, the random number is set regardless of the number of times one game has been executed from a certain starting point (for example, the number of times the game has been played since the power was turned on). When the set value is set to 3, a predetermined number acquisition display (for example, a display including a character string "333 sheets breakthrough") indicating that 333 sheets have been reached with a probability of 3/100 is displayed. When the set value is set 4, the same predetermined number acquisition display is performed with a probability of 2/100, and when the set value is set 5 or 6, the same predetermined number acquisition display is performed with a probability of 1/100. If the set value is any other value, the specified number acquisition display is not displayed.

That is, the gaming machine according to Invention 11-3 of the present application (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 256) is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIGS. 256 and 306). and, based on the number of uses and the number of payouts of the game value in a certain game period, the game value (for example, the game value such as medals) acquired by the player in the certain game period medium) (for example, the total acquisition number shown in FIG. 306 (A)) (for example, a difference number counter shown in FIG. Every time one game is played in the period, the first count value of the first counter (for example, the count value of the difference number counter shown in FIG. 304, FIG. The display means indicates that the first count value has reached one of a plurality of predetermined values (for example, 135, 246, 333, 456, 500, 555, 666, 1000, etc. shown in FIG. 290(b)) 306(A), the certain game period includes a first game period (for example, the first game period T1 shown in FIG. 306(A)) and a second game period ( For example, it is a game period composed of a plurality of game periods including a second game period T2) shown in FIG. The predetermined acquisition display is configured not to be displayed during the first game period, and the predetermined acquisition display is configured to be displayable during the second game period; is means capable of displaying a plurality of predetermined acquisition indications including a first predetermined acquisition indication and a second predetermined acquisition indication as the predetermined acquisition indications, wherein the first predetermined acquisition indication is the plurality of predetermined acquisition indications; A display corresponding to the first predetermined value (for example, 456) of them (for example, a predetermined acquisition display TG1 that suggests that the number of medals acquired has reached 456, shown in FIG. 306(A)), The second predetermined acquisition display is a display corresponding to a second predetermined value (for example, 500) among the plurality of predetermined values (for example, the number of acquired medals shown in FIG. 306(B) is 500). is a predetermined acquisition display TG2) suggesting that the first 290(b) shows a set value (for example, the setting value is equal to or greater than 4), and the first count value has reached the first predetermined value, but the second predetermined value has been reached. When the game period is shifted from the first game period to the second game period in a certain state in which the value is not reached, the first predetermined acquisition display is not displayed due to the execution of the game in the second game period. (see, for example, FIG. 306(A)), and the first count value reaches both the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value In a certain state, when the first game period is shifted to the second game period, the execution of the game in the second game period causes the second predetermined acquisition display to be displayed. (See, for example, FIG. 306(B)), the first predetermined acquisition display is a predetermined lottery (for example, a lottery using a predetermined number acquisition display lottery table shown in FIG. 290(b) or FIG. 307(B). ), and the predetermined lottery is displayed at a certain starting point (for example, when the power is turned on, when the setting is changed, when the initial setting is made, or after a certain period of time has elapsed since the power was turned on). A game machine characterized in that a lottery is performed without being based on the number of times one game has been executed (for example, the number of times the game has been played since the time the power was turned on) from when the first game was started after the power was turned on. is.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there are amusement machines that display a specified number of coins reached during an increase period when the game value is expected to increase, and do not display a specified number of coins reached during a non-increase period when the game value is not expected to increase.

In such a game machine, if a specification is adopted to suggest settings by displaying the specified number of cards, for example, when 456 cards are reached, setting 4 or more is suggested, and when 555 cards are reached, setting 5 is confirmed. Since the number of sheets is close to the stipulated number of 500, if multiple stipulated numbers are reached during the non-increase period, especially considering the processing in the case of transitioning to the increasing period while reaching multiple stipulated numbers during the non-increase period There was room for

According to the gaming machine according to Invention 11-3 of the present application, when the number of acquired coins is small during the non-increase period, by providing an opportunity to suggest setting by displaying the specified number of coins reached, the feeling of disappointment over the small number of acquired coins is reduced. The player can be relieved by making it possible to provide important information regarding the decision to continue the game. On the other hand, if the number of winnings is large during the non-increase period, the player can receive more accurate information on the profit of the player by displaying the number of reaching the specified number closer to the actual number of winnings. It is possible to give an opportunity to aim for acquisition of a game value.

Conventionally, there is an effect in which the lottery probability varies according to the number of times the game has been played since the power was turned on. Since the possibility of display is determined based on the result of a predetermined lottery that is performed independently, the lottery probability does not change according to the number of times the game has been played since the power was turned on. information) can be reliably provided to the player, and the satisfaction of the player can be enhanced.

<Invention 11-4>
FIG. 307(C) is a diagram showing features of the present invention 11-4. The gaming machine according to Invention 11-4 of the present application comprises operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 256), and as shown in FIG. , push order navigation shown in FIG. , 1 hand (small hand 4)) can be won. Further, the predetermined winning display can be displayed by winning the certain winning combination, and during the second game period (eg, the second game period T2 shown in FIG. 306(A)), the operation Even if the operation means is operated without following the contents indicated by the navigation (for example, if the player makes an operation error), the predetermined acquisition display (for example, the acquired medal shown in FIG. 307(C)) is displayed. TG2) is configured to display a predetermined acquisition display TG2) suggesting that the number of .

Note that a winning combination according to the present invention is not limited to a one-piece combination, and may be, for example, a common bell. With such a configuration, even if the operation means is operated without following the operation navigation when the common bell is internally won, the game value (for example, 10 game media) can be acquired. , a predetermined acquisition display can be displayed. Also, if the operation means is operated without following the operation navigation, the game value cannot be obtained, but there is a case where another winning combination is won, and if the winning combination is won, the game value ( For example, it may be configured so that one game medium can be acquired.

In addition, when the winning combination is won, a second predetermined acquisition display corresponding to the second predetermined value (eg, 500) (eg, the number of acquired medals shown in FIG. 306(B) becomes 500) Although the predetermined acquisition display TG2 suggesting that it has been reached is not displayed, as a result of the lottery, the first predetermined acquisition display corresponding to the first predetermined value (eg, 456) (eg, shown in FIG. 306(A), A predetermined acquisition display TG1) indicating that the number of acquired medals has reached 456 may or may not be displayed.

That is, the gaming machine according to Invention 11-4 of the present application (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 256) has display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIGS. 256 and 306). and operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 256), wherein, based on the number of uses and the number of payouts of game values in a certain game period, A first counter (for example, FIG. 304 or FIG. 291) that counts the total number of game values (for example, game media such as medals) acquired by the player (a), etc.), and every time one game is played in the certain game period, the first count value of the first counter (for example, in FIG. 304, FIG. 290(b), and the display means displays a plurality of predetermined values (eg, 135, 246, 333, 456, 500, 555, 666, 1000, etc.), the certain game period is a means capable of displaying a predetermined acquisition display, and the certain game period is a first game period (for example, FIG. 306 (A ) and a second game period (for example, the second game period T2 shown in FIG. 306(A)). It is configured to be able to shift from the first game period to the second game period, is configured so that the predetermined acquisition display is not displayed during the first game period, and is configured not to display the predetermined acquisition display during the second game period. is configured to be able to display the predetermined acquisition displays, and the display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of predetermined acquisition displays including a first predetermined acquisition display and a second predetermined acquisition display as the predetermined acquisition displays. The first predetermined acquisition display is a display corresponding to a first predetermined value (for example, 456) out of the plurality of predetermined values (for example, the number of medals acquired shown in FIG. 306(A) is 456), and the second predetermined acquisition indication is an indication corresponding to a second predetermined value (eg, 500) among the plurality of predetermined values (eg, 500). , FIG. 306(B), a predetermined acquisition display TG2) suggesting that the number of acquired medals has reached 500, wherein the first count value is the first predetermined value, the second are configured to be reachable in the order of The first predetermined acquisition display is a display as a setting suggesting effect suggesting a setting value (for example, as shown in FIG. 290(b), the setting value is 4 or more) When one count value has reached the first predetermined value but has not reached the second predetermined value, and the first game period has shifted to the second game period , the first predetermined acquisition display may not be displayed due to the execution of the game during the second game period (see, for example, FIG. 306(A)), and the first count value is the When the first game period transitions to the second game period in a certain state in which both the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value are reached, the second game The second predetermined acquisition display is displayed according to the execution of the game during the period (see, for example, FIG. 306(B)), and the operation information of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation"). For example, the push order navigation shown in FIG. a winning combination (for example, a single combination (small combination 4)) can be won, and when the certain winning combination is won, the predetermined winning display can be displayed; During the period (for example, the second game period T2 shown in FIG. 306(A)), even if the operation means is operated without following the content indicated by the operation navigation, the predetermined acquisition display (for example, 307(C), and is configured to be able to display a predetermined acquisition display TG2) indicating that the number of acquired medals has reached 500.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there are amusement machines that display a specified number of coins reached during an increase period when the game value is expected to increase, and do not display a specified number of coins reached during a non-increase period when the game value is not expected to increase.

In such a game machine, if a specification is adopted to suggest settings by displaying the specified number of cards, for example, when 456 cards are reached, setting 4 or more is suggested, and when 555 cards are reached, setting 5 is confirmed. Since the number of sheets is close to the stipulated number of 500, if multiple stipulated numbers are reached during the non-increase period, especially considering the processing in the case of transitioning to the increasing period while reaching multiple stipulated numbers during the non-increase period There was room for

According to the gaming machine according to the invention 11-4 of the present application, when the number of acquired coins is small during the non-increase period, by giving an opportunity to suggest settings by displaying the specified number of coins, the feeling of disappointment over the small number of acquired coins is reduced. The player can be relieved by making it possible to provide important information regarding the decision to continue the game. On the other hand, if the number of winnings is large during the non-increase period, the player can receive more accurate information on the profit of the player by displaying the number of reaching the specified number closer to the actual number of winnings. It is possible to give an opportunity to aim for acquisition of a game value.

In addition, even if the operation means is operated without following the contents indicated by the operation navigation, it is possible to display the predetermined acquisition display, so that a player who is unfamiliar with the game may mistake the order of pressing. Even in such a case, it is possible to provide information regarding the player's profit, and the player's satisfaction can be enhanced.

<Invention 11-5>
FIG. 308(A) is a diagram showing features of the present invention 11-5. As shown in FIG. 308(A), in the gaming machine according to Invention 11-5, the display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIGS. 256 and 306) displays 308(A), it is possible to display a certain effect display related to the winning (for example, the winning effect EG including the character string "10 cards GET" shown in FIG. 308(A)). When one count value reaches the second predetermined value (for example, 500), the second predetermined acquisition display (for example, the number of acquired medals has reached 500 shown in FIG. 308(A) The display of the certain effect display can be started before the display of the predetermined acquisition display TG2) suggesting that is started.

It should be noted that, in the present invention, it is sufficient that display of a certain effect display can be started before display of the second predetermined acquisition display is started. For example, as shown in FIG. After a certain effect display (in this example, the winning effect EG) is displayed, a second predetermined win display (in this example, the medals won may start a predetermined acquisition display TG2) suggesting that the number of has reached 500. In this case, the first count value becomes the second predetermined value at the timing when the bet button 130 is pressed. (In this example, 500), the second predetermined acquisition display may be started even if the number has not been reached.

With such a configuration, the second predetermined acquisition display can be started based on the player's operation, and the player can start the second predetermined acquisition display at a timing of his/her own preference.

Also, as shown in FIG. 308(C), at the timing when the bet button 130 for the next game is pressed, first, a certain effect display (in this example, the winning effect EG) is displayed, Subsequently, a second predetermined acquisition display (in this example, a predetermined acquisition display TG2 suggesting that the number of medals acquired has reached 500) may be started. In this example, at least part of the winning effect EG) is over at least part of the second predetermined win display (in this example, the predetermined win display TG2 suggesting that the number of medals won has reached 500). They may be overlapped, or one display may be configured so as not to overlap the other display.

That is, the gaming machine according to Invention 11-5 of the present application (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 256) has display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIGS. 256 and 306). and, based on the number of uses and the number of payouts of the game value in a certain game period, the game value (for example, the game value such as medals) acquired by the player in the certain game period medium) (for example, the total acquisition number shown in FIG. 306 (A)) (for example, a difference number counter shown in FIG. Every time one game is played in the period, the first count value of the first counter (for example, the count value of the difference number counter shown in FIG. 304, FIG. The display means indicates that the first count value has reached one of a plurality of predetermined values (for example, 135, 246, 333, 456, 500, 555, 666, 1000, etc. shown in FIG. 290(b)) 306(A), the certain game period includes a first game period (for example, the first game period T1 shown in FIG. 306(A)) and a second game period ( For example, it is a game period composed of a plurality of game periods including a second game period T2) shown in FIG. The predetermined acquisition display is configured not to be displayed during the first game period, and the predetermined acquisition display is configured to be displayable during the second game period; is means capable of displaying a plurality of predetermined acquisition indications including a first predetermined acquisition indication and a second predetermined acquisition indication as the predetermined acquisition indications, wherein the first predetermined acquisition indication is the plurality of predetermined acquisition indications; A display corresponding to the first predetermined value (for example, 456) of them (for example, a predetermined acquisition display TG1 that suggests that the number of medals acquired has reached 456, shown in FIG. 306(A)), The second predetermined acquisition display is a display corresponding to a second predetermined value (for example, 500) among the plurality of predetermined values (for example, the number of acquired medals shown in FIG. 306(B) is 500). is a predetermined acquisition display TG2) suggesting that the first 290(b) shows a set value (for example, the setting value is equal to or greater than 4), and the first count value has reached the first predetermined value, but the second predetermined value has been reached. When the game period is shifted from the first game period to the second game period in a certain state in which the value is not reached, the first predetermined acquisition display is not displayed due to the execution of the game in the second game period. (see, for example, FIG. 306(A)), and the first count value reaches both the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value In a certain state, when the first game period is shifted to the second game period, the execution of the game in the second game period causes the second predetermined acquisition display to be displayed. (See, for example, FIG. 306(B)), the display means displays a certain effect display (for example, a winning effect EG shown in FIG. 308(A)) when a certain winning combination is won. As a possible means, when the first count value reaches the second predetermined value due to the winning of the certain winning combination, the second predetermined win display (for example, shown in FIG. 308(A), The display of the certain effect display can be started before the display of the predetermined acquisition display TG2) indicating that the number of medals acquired has reached 500 is started. It is a play table that

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there are amusement machines that display a specified number of coins reached during an increase period when the game value is expected to increase, and do not display a specified number of coins reached during a non-increase period when the game value is not expected to increase.

In such a game machine, if a specification is adopted to suggest settings by displaying the specified number of cards, for example, when 456 cards are reached, setting 4 or more is suggested, and when 555 cards are reached, setting 5 is confirmed. Since the number of sheets is close to the stipulated number of 500, if multiple stipulated numbers are reached during the non-increase period, especially considering the processing in the case of transitioning to the increasing period while reaching multiple stipulated numbers during the non-increase period There was room for

According to the gaming machine according to Invention 11-5 of the present application, when the number of acquired coins is small during the non-increase period, by giving an opportunity to suggest settings by displaying the specified number of coins reached, the feeling of disappointment over the small number of acquired coins is reduced. The player can be relieved by making it possible to provide important information regarding the decision to continue the game. On the other hand, if the number of winnings is large during the non-increase period, the player can receive more accurate information on the profit of the player by displaying the number of reaching the prescribed number closer to the actual number of winnings. It is possible to give an opportunity to aim for acquisition of a game value.

Further, when the first count value reaches the second predetermined value due to the winning of a certain winning combination, the display of the certain effect display is started before the display of the second predetermined winning display is started. Since it is configured to be possible, it is possible to make each display easier to see by making the display start timing of the display regarding the result of the game and the display of reaching the specified number different.

[Embodiment 11]
The slot machine according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. In order to avoid duplication of explanation, in principle only the configuration different from that of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment will be explained. 309 to 326 are basically used only for the explanation of the eleventh embodiment. The code shown at 326 has priority.

<Types of game state>
The types and transitions of game states of the slot machine 100 of this embodiment will be described. 309(a) is a transition diagram of the game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. FIG.

The main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a low replay probability state (RT1), a high replay probability state and a special prize 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a replay high probability state and a special prize 2 internal winning state. It has a state (RT3) and a special game state (RT4). In the present embodiment, these four game states are referred to as RT-based game states. Since the game state of the RT system is the same as that of the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 154(a)), the explanation is omitted. In addition, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls a state related to so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter referred to as AT game state), and according to the AT game state determined by the main control unit 300, The first sub-control section 400 is designed to set the game state. The game state of the AT system will be described with reference to FIGS. 309(b) and (c). 309(b) and (c) are transition diagrams of the AT system game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. FIG.

The game state of the AT system is roughly classified into a low navigation state and a high navigation state, as shown in FIG. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode. The high-navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is higher than in the low-navigation state, and is also called an AT mode. Here, operation navigation refers to an effect of notifying the correct operation order when the player wins internally for the pushing order. That is, operation navigation refers to an effect that notifies the content of a stop operation for obtaining medals, or the content of a stop operation for shifting to an advantageous game state or maintaining an advantageous game state.

In this embodiment, when a certain condition is established in the low navigation state (for example, when a winning combination other than a losing combination is internally won), the game shifts to the normal state of the high navigation state. After that, as shown in FIG. 309(c), for example, the transition is made in the order of fixed notification state→AT1 state→judging state, and from this judging state, it shifts to the normal game state or AT2 state via the pullback state. There is a route, and a route that directly transitions from the judge state to the AT2 state. In the present embodiment, when it is determined to shift to the AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state), a predetermined number (eg, 50 games) of AT mode games (hereinafter referred to as AT game number) is provided. Further, although details will be described later, if a certain condition is satisfied in the high navigation state, the state shifts to the LMT1 (limit 1) state or the LMT2 (limit 2) state. In this embodiment, the LMT1 (limit 1) state and the LMT2 (limit 2) state may be collectively referred to as the LMT state (limit state). In addition, although the details will be described later, when transitioning to the LMT state in the high navigation state, there are cases where the state transitions from the AT2 state to the LMT state via the standby state, and cases where the AT2 state directly transitions to the LMT state. .

Each game state of the AT system is subdivided and managed as shown in FIG. 309(b), which is called an effect state. Specifically, the production state of the low navigation state is the normal state, and the production state of the high navigation state is the normal state, the confirmation announcement state, the judge state, the withdrawal state, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, the LMT1 (limit 1) state, the LMT2 ( It has a limit 2) state and a standby state. Note that the AT1 state, the AT2 state, the LMT1 (limit 1) state, and the LMT2 (limit 1) state are, in principle, states in which the number of paid balls increases.

Here, the LMT state is an effect state provided at the end of the high navigation state. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of games in the high navigation state is set to 1000 games, and the upper limit of the difference number in the high navigation state is set to 2000. Therefore, the transition condition to the LMT state is set based on this upper limit value (limiter). ing. In the present embodiment, an ending effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ED effect") suggesting the end of the high navigation state is executed in the LMT state. The LMT state and conditions for transition to the LMT state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 310 is a diagram showing conditions for shifting to the LMT state in the high navigation state.

The LMT2 state is an effect state provided near the end of the high navigation state. As shown in FIG. 310(a), the LMT2 state is when the number of games in the high navigation state is 980 or more, or when the difference number in the high navigation state is 1840 or more (hereinafter, "LMT2 state transition condition 1" is satisfied). is set to ). The area where LMT2 state transition condition 1 is satisfied is area S1 shown in FIG. 310(a).

Also, the LMT2 state may be set in a state in which the number of games played is smaller than that in which the LMT2 state transition condition 1 is satisfied, or in which the difference is smaller. In the LMT2 state in this case, as shown in FIG. 310(b), the number of games in the high navigation state is 900 or more, or the difference number in the high navigation state is 1600 or more, and the hit state is within the BB. (hereinafter referred to as "LMT2 state transition condition 2" is established). The area where LMT2 state transition condition 2 is satisfied in LMT2 state transition condition 1 is area S2 shown in FIG. 310(b). Even if the number of games in the high navigation state is 900 or more, or the number of difference sheets in the high navigation state is 1600 or more, it is not in the BB hitting state (hereinafter referred to as "waiting state transition condition 2" is satisfied). , it shifts to the standby state, and then shifts to the LMT2 state when the BB hit state occurs in the standby state. Here, the determination of whether or not it is in the BB win state is based on the presence or absence of information (see FIG. 311(a) to be described later) indicating that the bonus combination (BB1) has been internally won. In addition, since the LMT2 state transition condition 2 has a margin up to the limiter in the high navigation state compared to the LMT2 state transition condition 1, the predetermined game is started after the transition to the LMT2 state, not from when the ending effect is shifted to the LMT2 state. The ending effect may be started after the number has passed.

The LMT2 state is set up to the high nav state limiter. In other words, the LMT2 state ends when the number of games in the high navigation state reaches 1000 games or the difference number in the high navigation state reaches 2000. Termination of the LMT2 state terminates the high-nav state and transitions to the low-nav state.

The LMT1 state is an LMT state that is easier to transition to than the LMT2 state, and is set in a state with a greater margin than the LMT2 state transition condition 2 to the limiter of the high navigation state. In the LMT1 state, as shown in FIG. 310(b), the number of games in the high navigation state is 700 or more, the difference number in the high navigation state is 1000 or more, and the hit state is within the BB (hereinafter referred to as " "LMT1 state transition condition" is satisfied). The region where the LMT1 state transition condition is satisfied is region S3 shown in FIG. 310(b). Even if the number of games in the high navigation state is 700 games or more and the number of difference sheets in the high navigation state is 1000 or more, if it is not in the BB hitting state (hereinafter referred to as "waiting state transition condition 1" is satisfied) shifts to the standby state, and then shifts to the LMT1 state when the BB hit state occurs in the standby state.

The LMT1 state ends when fixed games (20 games in this embodiment) are completed. The end of the LMT1 state ends the high-nav state and transitions to the low-nav state. The LMT1 state is an ending state that enters early in the high navigation state, and ends with a fixed number of games.

In addition, when the number of games in the high navigation state is 700 games or more and the difference number in the high navigation state is less than 1000 (hereinafter referred to as "judgment state (low probability) transition condition" is satisfied), the judge state Switch to low accuracy mode. The judge mode of this embodiment includes “low accuracy mode (hereinafter abbreviated as “low accuracy”), “normal mode” (hereinafter abbreviated as “normal”), “high accuracy mode” (hereinafter, “high accuracy”). There are four types of judgment mode: low accuracy is the judgment mode with the lowest probability of transition to AT state 2. In other words, low probability is the most disadvantageous judgment mode for the player. Other judge modes are as described in the sixth embodiment.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the LMT1 state transition condition is satisfied for the number of games condition, but the LMT1 state transition condition is not satisfied for the difference number condition. If the difference number is insufficient, it is possible to move to the judgment state (low probability) without forcibly moving to the ending state, and end the high navigation state in a natural flow.

<Clear processing at the end of high navigation state and at the time of setting change processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 311(a), clear processing at the end of the high navigation state and at the time of setting change processing in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 311(a) is a diagram showing an outline of the clearing process at the end of the high navigation state and at the time of the setting change process. The “replay probability state” shown in FIG. 311(a) means information indicating the RT system game state (RT1, RT2, RT3, RT4). Also, the "bonus win state" shown in FIG. 311(a) means information indicating that the bonus combination (BB1) is internally won, and may be abbreviated as the above-described "BB win state". Also, the "bonus operating state" shown in FIG. 311(c) means a state in which the bonus is operating.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 311(a), at the end of the high navigation state, the information indicating the "replay probability state", "bonus hit state" and "bonus operation state" is not initialized. I have to. On the other hand, when the setting change process is performed, the information indicating the "replay probability state", the "bonus hit state" and the "bonus operating state" is initialized. Here, the setting change process is a process of changing the set value, and the set value is the total number of game media used on the gaming machine as the number of bets made by the player when playing the game for a predetermined period. is a value for adjusting the ratio of the total number of game media paid out by the gaming machine, and is called a "payout rate". 6” can be set. In the past, even when the setting change process was performed, the information indicating the above-described "bonus winning state" was not initialized.

<Winning role that can transition to high navigation state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 311(b), a winning combination capable of transitioning from the low navigation state to the high navigation state in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 311(b) is a diagram showing part of the winning combination of the present embodiment, and a high value is shown for each internal winning combination during BB winning (RT2, RT3) and BB non-winning (RT1, RT4) respectively. It is a table showing whether or not it is possible to shift to the navigation state.

In FIG. 311(b), when the result 1 is derived in the winning combination internal lottery process in the BB non-matching state, that is, when the "special combination + small combination A" is internally won, it is possible to shift to the high navigation state. However, it indicates that if the "special combination + minor combination A" is internally won during the BB win, the transition to the high navigation state cannot be made. In addition, in FIG. 311(b), when the result 2 is derived in the winning combination internal lottery process during the BB non-winning, that is, when the "minor combination A" is internally won, it is possible to shift to the high navigation state. This indicates that if the "small hand A" is internally won during the BB win, it is not possible to shift to the high navigation state. This is because the internal winning probability of the minor combination A is different between the BB non-winning (lottery value 128) and the BB winning (lottery value 384=128+256).

On the other hand, in FIG. 311(b), when the result 3 is derived in the winning combination internal lottery process, that is, when the "minor combination B" is internally won, the BB winning is within the BB even if the BB is not winning. This indicates that the state can be shifted to the high navigation state even if the

<Operation of the slot machine>
Based on the above characteristics, the processing of the main control unit 300 of this embodiment will be described using the drawings.

<High navigation state transition processing>
First, high navigation state transition processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 312 is a flow chart showing the flow of high navigation state transition processing of the eleventh embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to step S601 of FIG. 164(a) and high navigation state transition processing of FIG. 164(b) of the sixth embodiment. be.

In step S611, it is determined whether or not a winning combination other than a losing combination has been internally won in the internal winning combination lottery process of the game. In the case of a loss, the condition for transitioning to the high navigation state is not satisfied, so the high navigation state transition processing is terminated. If a winning combination other than a losing combination is internally won, the process proceeds to step S612.

In step S612, it is determined whether or not the BB hit state exists. If it is not in the BB hit state, the process proceeds to step S614, and if it is in the BB hit state, the process proceeds to step S613.

In step S613, it is determined whether or not the minor combination A is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process of the game. If the minor winning combination A is not internally won, that is, if the winning combination other than the minor winning combination A is internally won in the BB winning state, the process proceeds to step S614. On the other hand, when the minor winning combination A is internally won, that is, when the minor winning combination A is internally won in the BB winning state, the transition to the high navigation state cannot be performed (see FIG. 311(b)), so the high navigation state transition processing is executed. finish.

In step S614, it is determined whether or not a special role is internally won in the game. If the special combination is internally elected, the process proceeds to step S615, and if not, the process proceeds to step S703.

In step S615, it is determined whether or not a small winning combination A is internally won in the game. If the small winning combination A is internally won, the process proceeds to step S616; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S703.

In step S616, the specific flag is set to ON. In other words, when the "special combination + minor combination A" is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process in the BB non-matching state and low navigation state, the specific flag is set to ON. The specific flag indicates the non-inclusive state of the BB after the setting is changed (as shown in FIG. The information is cleared even in this state), and it is a flag indicating that the "special combination + minor combination A" was internally won in the low navigation state. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, if the BB hit state is not reached in the high navigation state, the specification is such that the BB hit state waits in the high navigation state. In this case, it remains in the BB hit state. A specific flag is provided in order to discriminate from the case of shifting to the high navigation state again while in the BB hitting state. That is, the specific flag is also a flag that can determine whether or not it is the first thing in the morning even if the special role is internally won. The so-called state of the first thing in the morning, more precisely, is the state in which the conditions for transitioning to the high navigation state are met for the first time after the setting change.

In step S703, since it is determined that the next game will be shifted to the high navigation state, the initial value (1000 in this example) is set to the high navigation state counter. More specifically, when the initial value is set to the high navigation state counter, (1) when the specific flag is turned on, that is, when the internal winning combination lottery process in the BB non-matching state wins "special combination + small combination A" internally. (Step S612: YES, Step S614: YES, Step S615: YES), (2) In the winning combination internal lottery process in the BB non-matching state, "small combination A" or "small combination B" is internally won. (step S612: YES, step S614: NO), (3) if a winning combination other than a small combination A (for example, a small combination B) is internally won in the BB winning state (step S612: NO, Step S613: YES, Step S614: NO). Needless to say, the initial value of the high navigation state counter is not limited to 1,000, and may be, for example, 1,500.

In step S705, other high navigation state transition processing is executed. Here, the number of games to be executed after shifting to the high-navigation state is set. For example, the ceiling counter is set to an initial value (700 in this example). It also sets initial information for high navigation state start setting processing 1 and high navigation state start setting processing 2, which will be described later.

<High navigation state common processing A>
Next, high navigation state common processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 313 is a flow chart showing the flow of high navigation state common processing A of the eleventh embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to step S801 of FIG. 165 and high navigation state common processing A of FIG. 166 of the sixth embodiment.

In step S901, it is determined whether or not the rendering state counter>0. If the rendering state counter>0, the process proceeds to step S902, otherwise, the process proceeds to step S903. In step S902, 1 is subtracted from the value of the effect state counter. Here, the effect state counter is a counter for managing the transition of the effect state. If the number of games in each production state is determined by lottery, table, etc., the value of the production state counter may be set to the result of the lottery or the value obtained from the table, etc., or the state may be shifted to the high navigation state. When the game is played, the number of games in which some or all of the effects are performed may be collectively determined.

In step S902A, it is determined whether or not it is the first game in the high navigation state. If it is the first game in the high navigation state, the process proceeds to step S902B; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S903A.

In step S902B, it is determined whether or not the BB hit state exists. If it is not the BB inside hit state, that is, if it is the BB non-inside hit state, the process proceeds to step S902D, and if it is the BB inside hit state, the process proceeds to step S902C.

In step S902C, it is determined whether or not the specific flag is ON. If the specific flag is on, the process proceeds to step S902D, and if the specific flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S902E.

In step S902D, since it is the first thing in the morning, high navigation state start setting processing 1 corresponding to the first thing in the morning is executed. Specifically, the results of the winning combination internal lottery process for the game in which the conditions for transitioning to the high navigation state are established first after the setting change are result 1 (special combination + small combination A) and result 2 (small combination A). , or if the result is 3 (small win B), the high navigation state start setting process 1 is executed.

On the other hand, in step S902E, since it is not the first thing in the morning (the first thing in the morning), the high navigation state start setting process 2 corresponding to the first thing in the morning is executed. Specifically, when the result of the internal lottery process for the winning combination in the low navigation state that is started after the high navigation state that is in the BB hitting state is ended is the result 3 (small combination B), the start of the high navigation state is set. Execute process 2.

Here, using FIG. 314(a), high navigation state start setting processing 1, which is so-called first thing in the morning, and high navigation state start setting processing 2, which is so-called first thing in the morning, will be compared. FIG. 314(a) is a table comparing high navigation state start setting processing 1 and high navigation state start setting processing 2. FIG. The high navigation state start setting process 1 has a high probability of transition to the AT1 state, which is the first hit, and the probability of continuing AT2 is low. The transition probability of AT2 is low, and the probability of 1 continuing AT2 is high. As described above, the high-navi state start setting process 1 and the high-navi state start setting process 2 have a trade-off relationship in terms of processing contents, but the ball payout rate is substantially the same. That is, when the high navigation state start setting process 1 and the high navigation state start setting process 2 are compared, the advantages for the player are the same.

After completing the processing of steps S902D and S902E, the process proceeds to step S902F. In step S902F, the effect state is set to the normal state. After completing the process of step S902F, the process proceeds to step S909.

In step S903A, it is determined whether or not the current rendering state is the LMT2 state, and if it is not the LMT2 state, the process proceeds to step S904A, and if it is the LMT2 state, the process proceeds to step S909.

In step S904A, it is determined whether or not the value of the high navigation state counter is equal to or less than the LMT transition value A1 (19 in this example; see A1 in FIG. 310(a)), and if so, step S907. , and if not applicable, proceed to step S905A.

In step S905A, it is determined whether or not the value of the difference number counter is equal to or greater than the LMT transition value B1 (1840 in this example; see B1 in FIG. 310(a)). Proceed to step S909 if not applicable.

In step S907, since LMT2 state transition condition 1 is satisfied, freeze information (various information for executing freeze effect) is set in order to shift to LMT2 state. Also, in step S908A, after setting the LMT2 state in the presentation state, the process proceeds to step S909. As a result, the presentation state shifts from the game to the LMT2 state.

In step S909, after executing other high navigation state common processing A, the high navigation state common processing A ends. For example, the number of ceiling games may be varied according to the type of high navigation state start setting process that has been set (specifically, high navigation state start setting processes 1 and 2).

<Judge status processing A>
Next, the judgment state process A will be described with reference to FIG. 315(a). FIG. 315(a) is a flowchart showing the flow of judgment state processing A of the eleventh embodiment, and corresponds to step S809 of FIG. 165 and judgment state processing A of FIG. 170 of the sixth embodiment.

Since the flow of the judgment state process A shown in FIG. 315(a) is the same as the flow of the judgment state process A of the sixth embodiment, description of each step will be omitted. However, since the content of the release lottery table used for the release lottery according to the judge mode in step S1304 is different, the release lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 315(b).

FIG. 315(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the release lottery table of this embodiment. In the cancellation lottery according to the judge mode of the present embodiment, the lottery result (winning or not winning) is determined according to the result of the internal winning combination lottery process and the judge mode. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of judge modes (in this example, four types of "low probability", "normal", "high probability", "heaven") are prepared, and the judge mode is heaven For example, the winning probability of the release lottery is "high probability">"normal">"low probability". It should be noted that if the judge mode is heaven, there is a 100% chance that it will shift to the AT2 state.

It should be noted that, in the later-described AT2 state processing B, if the judge state (low probability) condition is satisfied and the judge state (low probability) is set, then the transition to the AT2 state is made in the judge state (low probability). When it is determined (for example, when a specific rare combination is internally won), a process may be executed to make it difficult for the player to grasp that fact. For example, it is possible to inform the player of the details of the operation that does not allow him/her to win a specific rare role (non-winning navigation) so that the player does not notice. Also, the execution frequency of such non-winning navigation may be changed according to the type of judge mode (for example, 100% execution when the probability is low).

<AT2 state processing A>
Next, the AT2 state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. 316(a). FIG. 316(a) is a flowchart showing the flow of AT2 state processing A of the eleventh embodiment, and corresponds to step S811 of FIG. 165 and AT2 state processing A of FIG. 171 of the sixth embodiment.

Since the flow of the AT2 state processing A shown in FIG. 316(a) is the same as the flow of the AT2 state processing A of the sixth embodiment, description of each step will be omitted. However, since the contents of the judge mode lottery table used for the judge mode lottery in step S1403 are different, the judge mode lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 316(b).

FIG. 316(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the judge mode lottery table of this embodiment. In the judge mode lottery according to the present embodiment, the lottery result (won or not to move to another judge mode) is determined according to the result of the winning combination internal lottery process and the judge mode. In the judge mode lottery of the present embodiment, a lottery is used to decide whether to switch to a mode that is better than the current judge mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 316(b), when the judge mode is "low probability", it is possible to shift to "normal", "high probability" or "heaven" according to the result of the winning combination internal lottery process. When the judge mode is "normal", it is possible to shift to "high probability" or "heaven" according to the result of the winning combination internal lottery process, and the judge mode is "high probability". , it is possible to shift to "Heaven" depending on the result of the internal winning combination lottery process. "Low", "medium", and "high" in each table indicate the probability of winning in qualitative terms, and "x" indicates no possibility of winning. For example, if the judge mode is "low probability" and the "lottery result is 1", the probability of transition to the judge mode "normal" is low, indicating that there is no transition to the judge mode "high probability" or "heaven". ing. If the judge mode is "heaven", the judge mode lottery is not performed and the judge mode remains "heaven".

Note that the judge mode lottery is also executed in other processes (for example, normal state process A, decision notification state process A, AT1 state process A), but the same lottery as the judge mode lottery table shown in FIG. A table may be used, or a different lottery table may be used. Further, when the judge state (low probability) condition is satisfied in the AT2 state processing B described later and the judge state (low probability) is set, it may be reflected in the contents of the judge mode lottery in step S1403. good. For example, the judge mode lottery may be a lottery that makes it more difficult to shift to a better mode than the contents of the lottery table shown in FIG. 316(b). A lottery may be used to make it easier to switch to a good mode.

<Instruction information setting process>
Next, referring to FIG. 317, instruction information setting processing will be described. FIG. 317 is a flow chart showing the instruction information setting process of the eleventh embodiment, and corresponds to step S814 of FIG. 165 and the instruction information setting process of FIG. 173 of the sixth embodiment.

In step S1602, it is determined whether or not the winning combination is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process. In this example, the pushing hand means the internal winning of "small hand 4" in the conditional device. If the player is internally elected to the winning hand, the process advances to step S1602A; otherwise, the instruction information setting process ends.

In step S1602A, it is determined whether or not the effect state is AT1 state, AT2 state, LMT1 state, or LMT2 state. If the rendering state is the AT1 state, AT2 state, LMT1 state, or LMT2 state, the process proceeds to step S1603; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1604.

In step S1603, the pressing order of the correct answer is set in the information (instruction information) regarding the notification contents of the instruction information notification. As a result, operation navigation using the payout number display 127 is executed (see FIG. 156).

In step S1604, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the standby state. If the presentation state is the standby state, the process proceeds to step S1605; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1606.

In step S1605, the pressing order after conversion is set in the information (instruction information) regarding the notification contents of the instruction information notification. As a result, operation navigation using the payout number display 127 is executed. Here, the converted pressing order means a pressing order obtained by converting the correct pressing order. For example, only the content of the first stop operation may be set. In the standby state, this is a measure for maintaining the status quo without increasing or decreasing the difference number of sheets. It should be noted that if the operation navigation in the standby state continues with incorrect operations (for example, incorrect answers N times), when the next push order is internally elected, the correct push order is set in the instruction information. can be

In step S1606, other instruction information setting processing is executed. For example, when winning the winning role and executing operation navigation, preparations are made to transmit an operation navigation command including instruction information to the first sub-control unit 400 . As a result, the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 is executed by the first sub-controller 400 .

<High navigation state processing B>
Next, high navigation state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 318 is a flow chart showing the flow of high navigation state processing B of the eleventh embodiment, and corresponds to step S1704 of FIG. 174 and high navigation state processing B of FIG. 175 of the sixth embodiment.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the rendering state is normal. In step S1802, normal state processing B (described above) is executed.

In step S1803, it is determined whether or not the presentation state is the final notification state. In step S1804, the confirmation notification state process B (described above) is executed.

In step S1805, it is determined whether or not the production state is the AT1 state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S1806, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1807. In step S1806, AT1 state processing B (described above) is executed.

In step S1807, it is determined whether or not the rendering state is the judgment state. In step S1808, the judgment state process B (described above) is executed.

In step S1809, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT2 state, and if so, the process proceeds to step S1810, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1811. In step S1810, AT2 state processing B (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S1811, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the pullback state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1812, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1814. In step S1812, pullback state processing B (described above) is executed.

In step S1814, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the standby state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1815, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1816. In step S1815, standby state processing B (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S1816, it is determined whether or not the rendering state is the LMT1 state. In step S1817, LMT1 state processing B (details will be described later) is executed.

<AT2 state processing B>
Next, with reference to FIG. 319, AT2 state processing B will be described. FIG. 319 is a flowchart showing the flow of AT2 state processing B of the eleventh embodiment, and shows in detail the flow of AT2 state processing B in step S1810 of FIG.

In step S2311, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter=0 (whether or not the AT2 state has ended). If the rendering state counter=0, the process proceeds to step S2312, otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2332.

In step S2312, it is determined whether or not the judge mode is heaven, and if so, the process advances to step S2313, and if not, the process advances to step S2316.

In step S2313, the lottery value (the number of games) determined by lottery is set in the release counter, and then the process proceeds to step S2314. The lottery contents in step S2313 are not particularly limited, but in this example, the higher the set value, the smaller the number selected. It is configured so that a smaller numerical value is selected.

In step S2314, the judgment initial value (10 in this example) is set to the production state counter. In this embodiment, an initial value (10 in this example) is set to the effect state counter in step S2314, but other numerical values may be used. Therefore, for example, the initial value may be changed according to the effect state immediately before the judgment state, or the initial value may be determined by lottery.

In step S2315, after the judgment state is set in the effect state, the process proceeds to step S2332. As a result, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state, and the effect corresponding to the judge state is started.

In step S2316, it is determined whether or not the value of the high navigation state counter is equal to or less than the LMT shift value A2 (99 in this example; see A2 in FIG. 310(b)), and if so, step S2318. , and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S2317.

In step S2317, it is determined whether or not the value of the difference number counter is equal to or greater than the LMT shift value B2 (1600 in this example; see B2 in FIG. 310(b)). Proceed to step S2322 if not applicable.

In step S2318, it is determined whether or not the BB hit state exists. If it is in the BB hit state, the process proceeds to step S2319; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2320.

In step S2319, since the LMT2 state transition condition 2 is established, the effect state is set to the LMT2 state. After step S2319, the process proceeds to step S2332.

At step S2320, the LMT2 reservation flag is set to ON, and then at step S2321, the effect state is set to the standby state. The LMT2 reservation flag is a flag for determining whether or not the performance state is set to the LMT2 state when a special role is internally won and the state shifts to the BB hit state, and if it is ON, the performance state is changed from the standby state to the LMT2 state. set. After step S2321, the process proceeds to step S2332.

In step S2322, it is determined whether or not the value of the high navigation state counter is equal to or less than the LMT transition value A3 (299 in this example; see A3 in FIG. 310(b)), and if so, step S2323. , and if not applicable, proceed to step S2330.

In step S2323, it is determined whether or not the value of the difference number counter is equal to or greater than the LMT transition value B3 (1000 in this example; see B3 in FIG. 310(b)). If not, the process proceeds to step S2329.

In step S2324, it is determined whether or not the BB hit state exists. If it is in the BB hit state, the process proceeds to step S2325; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2327.

In step S2325, since the LMT1 state transition condition is established, the LMT1 initial value (20 in this example) is set in the effect state counter, and then in step S2326, the effect state is set to the LMT1 state. After step S2326, the process proceeds to step S2332.

At step S2327, the LMT1 reservation flag is set to ON, and then at step S2328, the effect state is set to the standby state. The LMT1 reservation flag is a flag for determining whether or not the performance state is set to the LMT1 state when the special role is internally won and the state shifts to the winning state in the BB. set to After step S2328, the process proceeds to step S2332.

In step S2329, the judge mode is set to "low probability", then in step S2330, the judgment initial value (in this example, 10) is set to the production state counter, and then in step S2331, the production state is changed to the judge mode. After setting the state, the process proceeds to step S2332. As a result, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state, and the effect corresponding to the judge state is started. That is, (1) the value of the high navigation state counter is equal to or less than the LMT transition value A3 (299 in this example; see A3 in FIG. In the example, if the value is less than 1000 (see B3 in FIG. 310(b)) (if the condition of area S4 in FIG. 310(b) is met), the effect state is set to judge state, and the judge mode is set to "low probability". (2) When the value of the high navigation state counter is greater than the LMT transition value A3 (299 in this example; see A3 in FIG. 310(b)), the effect state is changed to the judge state.

In step S2332, after performing other AT2 state processing B, the AT2 state processing B ends.

In addition, in step S2329 of the present embodiment, the judge mode is set to "low accuracy", but the judge mode may be set to "heaven" separately from this to set a state in which it is easy to shift to the AT2 state.

<Waiting state process B>
Next, the standby state process B will be described with reference to FIG. 320(a). FIG. 320(a) is a flow chart showing the flow of standby state processing B of the eleventh embodiment, and is a diagram showing in detail the flow of AT2 state processing B in step S1815 of FIG.

In step S2701, it is determined whether or not the BB hit state exists. If it is in the BB hit state, the process advances to step S2702; otherwise, the standby state process B ends.

In step S2702, it is determined whether or not the LMT1 reservation flag is on. If the LMT1 reservation flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2703; otherwise, that is, if the LMT2 reservation flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2704.

In step S2703, since it is in the BB hit state and the LMT1 reservation flag is ON, the LMT1 state is set as the presentation state.

On the other hand, in step S2704, since it is in the BB hit state and the LMT2 reservation flag is ON, the LMT2 state is set as the effect state.

In step S2705, other standby state processing B is executed.

<LMT1 state processing B>
Next, the LMT1 state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. 320(b). FIG. 320(b) is a flow chart showing the flow of LMT1 state processing B of the eleventh embodiment, and is a diagram showing in detail the flow of LMT1 state processing B in step S1817 of FIG.

In step S2801, it is determined whether or not the rendering state counter=0 (whether or not the LMT1 state has ended). If the rendering state counter=0, the process proceeds to step S2802, otherwise, the LMT1 state processing B ends.

In step S2802, after setting the navi state end standby flag to ON, the process proceeds to step S2803. In step S2803, after performing other LMT1 state processing B, the LMT1 state processing B ends.

<High navigation state end processing>
Next, the high navigation state end processing will be described. The flow of the high navigation state end processing of the eleventh embodiment is the same as the flow of the high navigation state end processing (FIG. 183) shown in the sixth embodiment. omitted. It should be noted that in step 2607 of the high navigation state end processing of this embodiment, other information related to the high navigation state is initialized, but the information indicating the BB hit state is not initialized.

<Control of production state>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 321 and 322, control of the effect state will be specifically described. FIGS. 321(a) to (d) and FIGS. 322(a) to (b) are timing charts showing the flow of the game when the AT2 state is ended, and are tables in which each counter value is associated with the effect state. be.

FIG. 321(a) is an example of a timing chart when the AT2 state ends in the game with the BB hitting state, the judge mode being highly accurate, and the high navigation state counter 500 and the difference number counter 600. FIG. In this case, when the AT2 state ends, none of the LMT2 state transition conditions 1 and 2, the LMT1 state transition condition, the judge state (low probability), and the standby state transition conditions 1 and 2 are satisfied (Fig. 310 (b) conditions belonging to areas other than the areas S2 to S4 are established), the effect state is set to the judge state (judgment mode remains high accuracy), and the next game is started (S2311 in FIG. 319: YES, S2312: NO, S2316: NO, S2317: NO, S2322: NO, S2330, S2331). It should be noted that FIG. 321(a) shows a case where the AT2 state is entered again in the subsequent game.

FIG. 321(b) is an example of a timing chart when the AT2 state ends in the game with the BB hitting state, the judge mode being highly accurate, and the high navigation state counter 290 and the difference number counter 900. FIG. In this case, at the end of the AT2 state, the transition condition to the judgment state (low probability) is satisfied (the condition belonging to the area S4 in FIG. 310(b) is satisfied), so the effect state is set to the judge state and the judge mode is set to the low probability. Set (high accuracy judge mode is set to low accuracy), and start the next game (S2311 in FIG. 319: YES, S2312: NO, S2316: NO, S2317: NO, S2322: YES, S2323: NO, S2329, S2330, S2331). Incidentally, FIG. 321(b) shows a case in which the game transitions to the normal game state in the low navigation state after transitioning to the pullback state in the subsequent game.

FIG. 321(c) is an example of a timing chart when the AT2 state ends in the game with the BB hitting state, the judge mode being highly accurate, and the high navigation state counter 290 and the difference number counter 1050. FIG. In this case, when the AT2 state ends, the LMT1 state transition condition is satisfied (the condition belonging to the area S3 in FIG. 310(b) is satisfied), so the effect state is set to the LMT1 state, and the next game is started (see FIG. 310B). 319 S2311: YES, S2312: NO, S2316: NO, S2317: NO, S2322: YES, S2323: YES, S2324: YES, S2325, S2326). Note that FIG. 321(c) shows a case in which the game transitions to the normal game state of the low navigation state after completing 20 games in the LMT1 state.

FIG. 321(d) is an example of a timing chart when the AT2 state ends in the game with the BB non-intentional state, the judge mode is highly accurate, and the high navigation state counter 290 and the difference number counter 1050. FIG. In this case, when the AT2 state ends, the LMT1 state transition condition is not satisfied because the BB is not in the hit state, and the standby state transition condition 1 is satisfied (the condition belonging to the area S3 in FIG. 310(b) is satisfied). established), set the effect state to the standby state, and start the next game (S2311: YES, S2312: NO, S2316: NO, S2317: NO, S2322: YES, S2323: YES, S2324: NO, S2327 in FIG. 319) , S2328). In addition, in FIG. 321(d), since the special role is internally won in the standby state and the transition to the BB win state occurs, the transition to the LMT1 state occurs (S2701: YES, S2702: YES in FIG. 320(a), S2702: YES, S2703) is shown.

FIG. 322(a) is an example of a timing chart when the AT2 state ends in a game in which the BB hit state, the judge mode is highly accurate, and the high navigation state counter 120 and the difference number counter 1843 are present. In this case, when the AT2 state ends, the LMT2 state transition condition 2 is satisfied (the condition belonging to the area S2 in FIG. 310(b) is satisfied), so the effect state is set to the LMT2 state, and the next game is started ( S2311 of FIG. 319: YES, S2312: NO, S2316: NO, S2317: YES, S2318: YES, S2319). Note that FIG. 322(a) shows a case where the upper limit of the high navigation state (difference number of sheets is 2000) is reached in the LMT2 state, and then the game shifts to the normal game state of the low navigation state.

FIG. 322(b) is an example of a timing chart when the AT2 state ends in the game of the BB hit state, the judge mode is highly accurate, and the high navigation state counter 290 and the difference number counter 900 are used. In this case, at the end of the AT2 state, the transition condition to the judgment state (low probability) is satisfied (the condition belonging to the area S4 in FIG. 310(b) is satisfied), so the effect state is set to the judge state and the judge mode is set to the low probability. Set (high accuracy judge mode is set to low accuracy), and start the next game (S2311 in FIG. 319: YES, S2312: NO, S2316: NO, S2317: NO, S2322: YES, S2323: NO, S2329, S2330, S2331). In FIG. 322(e), transition from the judge state to the AT2 state (in the case where the AT2 state is set as the judge state in step S1306 of FIG. 315(a)), and in the game in the subsequent AT2 state, the condition for transition to the LMT1 state is 310(b) indicates a case where the conditions belonging to the area S3 of FIG. 310(b) are established.

Thus, when the AT2 state ends, even if the LMT1 state transition condition is not satisfied and the judgment state (low probability) is transitioned, the AT2 state is transitioned to after that, the LMT1 state transition condition is satisfied, and the LMT1 state may move to In addition, FIG. 322(b) shows a case in which when the AT2 state ends, the state transitions to the judge state (low probability) and then to the LMT1 state. There is also a case of moving to

FIGS. 322(c) and (d) are diagrams showing the effect mode of the ending effect. Here, FIG. 322(c) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode of the ending effect 1 executed when the effect state is in the LMT1 state (the first sub-control unit 400 is in the ending effect state 1). 322(d) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode of the ending effect 1 executed when the effect state is in the LMT2 state (the first sub-control unit 400 is in the ending effect state 1).

Since the LMT1 state ends when the fixed number of games (20 games) has been played, in the ending effect 1, the effect image display device 157 displays the number of remaining games d110 in the LMT1 state. On the other hand, the LMT2 state continues until the number of games in the high navigation state or the difference number reaches the upper limit of the high navigation state. . After the third stop operation of the final game in the LMT1 state and the LMT2 state, the total difference number d130 acquired in the navigation state is displayed. Note that the difference number d130 may be displayed not only in the high navigation state (LMT1 state, LMT2 state), but also in the low navigation state after the high navigation state ends.

In the LMT1 state of the present embodiment, completion of a fixed number of games is the end condition of the LMT1 state, but the end condition of the LMT1 state is not limited to this. For example, execution of operation navigation for a predetermined number of times, reaching a predetermined difference in the number of sheets, or the like may be conditions for ending the LMT1 state.

<Relationship between specific flag and high navigation state start setting process>
Next, using FIG. 323, the relationship between the specific flag and the high navigation state start setting process (steps S902D and S902E in FIG. 313) will be specifically described. FIGS. 323(a) to (d) are timing charts showing the flow of the game after ending the high navigator state, in which the hit state in the BB, the result of the winning combination internal lottery, the specific flag, and the setting for starting the high navigator state. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the relationship of processing;

FIG. 323(a) shows a case in which the high navigation state (LMT1 state) is ended in the BB hit state, and a small winning combination B, which is the result 3, is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery processing of the first game in the low navigation state. It is a timing chart. In this case, the information indicating the winning state within the BB is not initialized by the processing at the end of the high navigation state (see FIG. 311(a)). The game is shifted to the high navigation state (see result 3 in FIG. 31(b)), and the high navigation state start setting process 2, which is the so-called first thing in the morning processing, is executed (S902A: YES, S902B: NO, S902C in FIG. 313). : NO, S902E).

FIG. 323(b) shows that the setting change process is executed in the BB winning state and the high navigation state (LMT1 state), and the result 2 is obtained in the winning combination internal lottery processing of the first game in the low navigation state after the setting change processing. It is a timing chart when a small winning combination A is internally won. In this case, the setting change processing initializes the information indicating the BB winning state (see FIG. 311(a)), and the result 2, that is, the small winning combination A is internally won in the BB non-winning state, so that the next game. (See result 2 in FIG. 31B), and high navigation state start setting processing 1, which is so-called first thing in the morning, is executed (S902A: YES, S902B: YES, S902D in FIG. 313).

FIG. 323(c) shows that setting change processing is executed in the BB hit state and high navigation state (LMT1 state), and the result is 1 in the winning combination internal lottery processing of the first game in the low navigation state after the setting change processing. It is a timing chart when a certain special combination + minor combination A is internally won. In this case, the setting change processing initializes the information indicating the winning state of the BB (see FIG. 311(a)), and in the non-winning state of the BB, the result 1, the special combination + minor combination A, is internally won. , the next game is shifted to the high navigation state (see result 1 in FIG. 31(b)), and the high navigation state start setting processing 1, which is the first processing in the morning, is executed (S902A in FIG. 313: YES, S902B: NO, S902C: YES, S902D).

FIG. 323(d) shows a case in which the high navigation state (LMT1 state) is ended in the BB hit state, and the small winning combination A, which is the result 2, is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery processing of the first game in the low navigation state. It is a timing chart. In this case, while the information indicating the BB hit state is not initialized by the processing at the end of the high navigation state (see FIG. 311(a)), the internal winning of the small winning combination A that is the result 2 in the BB hit state is internally won. Therefore, the low navigation state is continued without transitioning to the high navigation state from the next game (see result 2 in FIG. 31(b)).

As described above, in the present embodiment, based on conditions such as whether or not the setting change process has been performed, whether or not the winning combination is in the BB winning state, and which winning combination has been internally won in the internal winning combination lottery process, Since the contents of the high-navigation state start setting process are different, it is possible to provide a high-navigation state with a variety of playability.

<Modification of Embodiment 11>
In this embodiment, the LMT2 state transition condition 2, the LMT1 state transition condition, and the judgment state (low probability) transition condition shown in FIG. A new condition may be provided in addition to the condition shown in FIG. 310(b). For example, as shown in FIG. 324, when the number of games in the high navigation state is 500 or more and the difference number in the high navigation state is 500 or less (when the condition of area S5 in FIG. 324 is satisfied), the judge You may make it transfer to the paradise mode of a state. In this way, a new condition may be provided before the limiter in the high navigation state, and the state may be shifted to a state better than the condition of the region S4. A game rich in diversity can be realized. Of course, even when the condition of the area S5 is satisfied, the mode may be shifted to the low-probability mode of the judgment state, similarly to when the condition of the area S4 is satisfied.

Further, although the high navigation state start setting process 1 and the high navigation state start setting process 2 of the present embodiment are qualitatively shown in FIG. 314(a), they are not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 314(b), high navigation state start setting processing 1 is divided into two types: high navigation state start setting processing 1A and high navigation state start setting processing 1B. The high navigation state start setting process 1 and the high navigation state start setting process 1B of the embodiment may be used as the processing contents of the high navigation state start setting process 2 of the present embodiment.

Also, as shown in FIG. 314(c), the high navigation state start setting process 1 and the high navigation state start setting process 2 may be reversed from those shown in FIG. 314(a). That is, in the high navigation state start setting process 1, the transition probability to the AT1 state, which is the first hit, is low, and the continuation probability of the AT2 state is high. The transition probability of AT2 state may be high and the continuation probability of the AT2 state may be low. Further, as shown in FIG. 314(d), such high navigation state start setting processing 1 is divided into two types, high navigation state start setting processing 1A and high navigation state start setting processing 1B. 1A may be the high navigation state start setting process 1 shown in FIG. 314(c), and the high navigation state start setting process 1B may be the processing contents of the high navigation state start setting process 2 shown in FIG. 314(c).

Also in the modifications shown in FIGS. 314(b) to (d), the high navigation state start setting process 1 and the high navigation state start setting process 2 have substantially the same ball payout rate, which is advantageous for the player. degrees are the same.

Also, in the AT2 state processing B, if the judgment state (low probability) condition is satisfied and the judgment state (low probability) is set, then the AT2 state is shifted to the judgment state processing B (step S1808 in FIG. 318, AT2 initial number lottery in step S2202 in FIG. 179 of Embodiment 6), AT2 initial number lottery in pull-back state process B (step S1812 in FIG. 318, see step S2402 in FIG. The number of times (eg, 30, 50, 55, 66, 100) may be set to be less (eg, 10 times) or greater (eg, 200 times).

<Invention 12-1>
As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 of Embodiment 11) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "present invention 12-1") is
operating means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139);
State control means (for example, main control unit 300, production state control processing AS 106 for shifting to one of a plurality of states including a normal state (for example, low navigation state) and an advantageous state (for example, high navigation state) , game state control processing S112, effect state control processing BS113, high navigation state end processing S114, etc.),
A game machine comprising
The operation information of the operation means (for example, the operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.) can be notified,
The advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information,
A first counter related to the advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state counter, the first count value in FIG. 325 (a)),
A second counter related to the advantageous state (for example, a difference number counter, a second count value in FIG. 325 (a)),
The count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as "first count value") can be updated each time one game is played in the advantageous state,
The count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") can be updated each time one game is played in the advantageous state,
The advantageous state is a state that ends when an advantageous state termination condition (for example, a high navigation state termination condition) is met,
The advantageous state end condition is one of a plurality of types of end conditions including a first end condition (e.g., a condition regarding the number of games in a high navigation state) and a second end condition (e.g., a condition regarding the number of games in a high navigation state). It is a condition that can be established when one of the termination conditions is established,
The first end condition is established when the first count value reaches a first upper limit value (for example, 1000),
The second end condition is established when the second count value reaches a second upper limit value (for example, 2000),
In a certain state in the advantageous state (for example, the final game in the AT2 state), based on at least both the first count value and the second count value, a control regarding state transition within the advantageous state. (For example, state control to transition to the judgment state (low probability), control regarding state transition when conditions belonging to area (D) in FIG. 325 (a) are satisfied) are configured to be executable,
It is characterized by Note that FIG. 325 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 12-1 of the present application. Here, FIG. 325(B) is a diagram showing an effect example in the control regarding the state transition when the condition belonging to the region (B) of FIG. 325(a) is satisfied, and FIG. FIG. 325(D) is a drawing showing an effect example in the state transition control when the condition belonging to the area (C) of FIG. 325(a) is satisfied; FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in the control regarding the state transition when materialized.

According to Invention 12-1 of the present application, state transition control is executed based on two count values for counting the advantageous state, so that the advantageous state can be terminated in a natural flow without discomfort.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that shifts to an ending state when the number of games has been consumed to the vicinity of a limiter in an advantageous state. However, if the number of medals obtained is small even after completing the number of games up to the vicinity of the limiter, the player may have a bad impression even after the transition to the ending state. Also, even if the transition to the ending state is not possible, the state may end with a bad impression on the player. In this way, if the number of medals obtained is small even if the number of games is completed to the vicinity of the limiter in an advantageous state, the player may have a bad impression whether or not the game transitions to the ending state. The invention 12-1 of the present application is an invention made in view of such circumstances, and is a gaming machine that allows the player to end the advantageous state in a natural flow without discomfort.

Also, in the certain state, a plurality of advantageous game states including a first advantageous game state (eg, judge state (low probability), etc.) and a second advantageous game state (eg, LMT1 state, LMT2 state, standby state, etc.) It is configured to be able to set one of the game states,
After the first advantageous gaming state is set and after the second advantageous gaming state is set, the degree of staying in the advantageous state (for example, the number of games until the high navigation state ends, more specifically , AT2 state win probability, AT game number addition rate, AT2 state continuation rate, etc.) are configured to be different,
The first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the second advantageous gaming state,
The certain control is control including setting of the first advantageous gaming state,
is preferred.

According to such a configuration, since it is possible to shift to a plurality of advantageous game states according to the conditions, it is possible to end the advantageous state in a natural flow without discomfort.

Further, in the certain state, the first count value satisfies the first requirement (for example, the high navigation state counter is 299 or less), and the second count value satisfies the second requirement. (for example, the differential number counter is less than 1000) (for example, when the condition belonging to area S4 in FIG. 310(b) is satisfied), the certain control can be executed. has been
is preferred.

According to such a configuration, the state transition control is executed based on the conditions of the two count values for counting the advantageous state. can be terminated.

In addition, it has a production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, etc.) capable of performing control related to production,
The plurality of advantageous gaming states further include a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, LMT1 state),
The specific advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player, in which operation information of the operating means can be notified,
In the certain state, a second case including that the first count value satisfies the first requirement and the second count value does not satisfy the second requirement (for example, When the conditions belonging to the area S3 of FIG. 310 (b) are satisfied), the specific advantageous gaming state can be set without executing the certain control,
When the specific advantageous game state is set, the effect control means is configured to be able to set the ending effect state (for example, ending effect state 1).
is preferred.

According to such a configuration, in the second case in which a condition more advantageous than in the first case is established, the state shifts to the specific advantageous game state, so that various game characteristics can be provided in the advantageous state, and the advantageous state can be achieved. It is possible to widen the range of output balls in the final stage.

Further, when at least one of the first count value and the second count value satisfies a certain requirement, the effect control means is configured to be able to set the ending effect state,
In connection with the end of the ending effect state, it is possible to display a difference number display (for example, difference number display d130 in FIGS. 322(c) and (d)) based on the number of game media used and the number of game media paid out. has been
is preferred.

According to such a configuration, since the winning number in the high navigation state is displayed at the end of the ending effect state after passing through the specific advantageous game state, it is possible to prevent a bad impression due to a small number of difference.

Further, in the first case, the execution of the certain control may set the specific advantageous gaming state in the advantageous state even after the first advantageous gaming state has been set. is configured as follows (for example, in the case of FIG. 322(b)),
is preferred.

According to such a configuration, even if the state is once shifted to the first disadvantageous advantageous game state, the state may be changed to the specific advantageous game state after that, so that the player can be motivated to continue playing the game. .

In addition, in the plurality of advantageous gaming states, a second specific advantageous gaming state (for example, LMT1 state) different from the specific advantageous gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "first specific advantageous gaming state") (for example, LMT1 state) e.g., LMT2 state),
In the first case, the execution of the certain control may set the second specific advantageous gaming state after the first advantageous gaming state has been set.
is preferred.

According to such a configuration, even if the state is once shifted to the first disadvantageous advantageous game state, the state may be changed to the specific advantageous game state after that, so that the player can be motivated to continue playing the game. You can enjoy a variety of gameplay together.

Further, the first counter is a counter (eg, a high navigation state counter) relating to the number of games played in the advantageous state (eg, the number of remaining games in a high navigation state);
The second counter counts the total number of game media acquired by the player (for example, the number of difference, MY, etc.) based on the number of game media used and the number of game media paid out in the advantageous state. (for example, a difference number counter),
is preferred.

According to such a configuration, the situation of the advantageous state is accurately controlled based on the number of games played and the total number of acquired game media, so that the advantageous state can be ended in a natural flow without discomfort. can.

<Invention 12-2>
As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 of Embodiment 11) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "present invention 12-2")
operating means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139);
State control means (for example, main control unit 300, production state control processing AS 106 for shifting to one of a plurality of states including a normal state (for example, low navigation state) and an advantageous state (for example, high navigation state) , game state control processing S112, effect state control processing BS113, high navigation state end processing S114, etc.),
A game machine comprising
The operation information of the operation means (for example, the operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.) can be notified,
The advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information,
A first counter related to the advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state counter, the first count value in FIG. 325 (a)),
A second counter related to the advantageous state (for example, a difference number counter, a second count value in FIG. 325 (a)),
The count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as "first count value") can be updated each time one game is played in the advantageous state,
The count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") can be updated each time one game is played in the advantageous state,
The advantageous state is a state that ends when an advantageous state termination condition (for example, a high navigation state termination condition) is met,
The advantageous state end condition is one of a plurality of types of end conditions including a first end condition (e.g., a condition regarding the number of games in a high navigation state) and a second end condition (e.g., a condition regarding the number of games in a high navigation state). It is a condition that can be established when one of the termination conditions is established,
The first end condition is established when the first count value reaches a first upper limit value (for example, 1000),
The second end condition is established when the second count value reaches a second upper limit value (for example, 2000),
In a state in the advantageous state (for example, the final game in the AT2 state), based on at least both the first count value and the second count value, in a first case (for example, the judge state (low probability ), control related to state transition when conditions belonging to area (D) in FIG. ) is configured to be one of the cases of the state transition control when the condition belonging to ) is satisfied,
The number of games in the advantageous state after the second case (for example, a fixed number of games such as 10 games) is higher than the number of games in the advantageous state after the first case (for example, variable number of games) may be higher,
It is characterized by Note that FIG. 325 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 12-2 of the present application. Here, FIG. 325(B) is a diagram showing an effect example in the control regarding the state transition when the condition belonging to the region (B) of FIG. 325(a) is satisfied, and FIG. FIG. 325(D) is a drawing showing an effect example in the state transition control when the condition belonging to the area (C) of FIG. 325(a) is satisfied; FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in the control regarding the state transition when materialized.

According to Invention 12-2 of the present application, state transition control is executed based on two count values for counting the advantageous state, so that it is possible to provide a variety of game features and to end the advantageous state in a natural flow without discomfort. can be done.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that shifts to an ending state when the number of games has been consumed to the vicinity of a limiter in an advantageous state. However, if the number of medals obtained is small even after completing the number of games up to the vicinity of the limiter, the player may have a bad impression even after the transition to the ending state. Also, even if the transition to the ending state is not possible, the state may end with a bad impression on the player. In this way, if the number of medals obtained is small even if the number of games is completed to the vicinity of the limiter in an advantageous state, the player may have a bad impression whether or not the game transitions to the ending state. Invention 12-2 of the present application is an invention that has been made in view of such circumstances, and is a gaming machine that allows the player to end the advantageous state in a natural flow without discomfort.

Further, the state control means is a means capable of setting any one of a plurality of types of advantageous gaming states including a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, LMT1 state),
The specific advantageous gaming state is a state advantageous to the player in which the operation information can be notified,
The specific advantageous gaming state is set in a certain state after the second case,
In a certain state after the first case, the specific advantageous gaming state is configured not to be set,
is preferred.

According to such a configuration, even if the specific advantageous state is not set, the number of times of playing the game in the advantageous state may increase, so that it is possible to reduce the regret that the player cannot shift to the specific advantageous state.

In addition, it has a production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, etc.) capable of performing control related to production,
When the specific advantageous game state is set, the effect control means is configured to be able to set the ending effect state (for example, ending effect state 1).
is preferred.

<Invention 12-3>
As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 of Embodiment 11) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "present invention 12-3") is
operating means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139);
setting change means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of executing setting change processing regarding the player's advantage;
State control means (for example, main control unit 300, production state control processing AS 106 for shifting to one of a plurality of states including a normal state (for example, low navigation state) and an advantageous state (for example, high navigation state) , game state control processing S112, effect state control processing BS113, high navigation state end processing S114, etc.),
A game machine comprising
The operation information of the operation means (for example, the operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.) can be notified,
The advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information,
The state control means performs advantageous state start processing (for example, high navigation state transition processing in FIG. 312, high navigation state common processing A in FIG. 313, etc.) regarding transition from the normal state to the advantageous state, and Means capable of executing multiple types of processing including advantageous state end processing (for example, AT2 state processing B in FIG. 319, high navigation state end processing in FIG. 183, etc.) related to transition to normal state,
The advantageous state start processing includes advantageous state start determination processing (for example, high navigation state transition processing in FIG. 312) for determining whether or not advantageous state transition conditions are satisfied, and advantageous state setting processing for setting the advantageous state ( For example, including multiple types of processing including high navigation state transition processing in FIG. 312 and high navigation state common processing A) in FIG. 313,
The advantageous state setting process is a process executed when the advantageous state transition condition is satisfied in the advantageous state start determination process,
The advantageous state end processing includes advantageous state end determination processing (for example, AT2 state processing in FIG. 319) for determining whether or not an advantageous state end condition is satisfied, and predetermined information regarding the advantageous state (for example, high navigator). (Information related to high navigation state such as state flag) Clear processing at the end of advantageous state (for example, high navigation state end processing in FIG. 183) including multiple types of processing including,
The clear process at the end of the advantageous state is a process executed when the advantageous state end condition is satisfied in the advantageous state end determination process,
The state control means is means for setting specific information (for example, information indicating a hit state in the BB, a specific flag) that is cleared in the setting change process but not cleared in the clear process at the end of the advantageous state,
The advantageous state transition condition is established even in a state in which the specific information is not set, and the advantageous state setting process can be executed,
The specific information is configured to be settable at least in the advantageous state,
The state control means performs first setting processing (for example, so-called first thing in the morning) regarding the advantageous state when a first condition including that the specific information is not set is satisfied in the advantageous state setting processing. 1) can be executed, and when the first condition is not met, the second setting process related to the advantageous state (for example, the so-called non-first thing in the morning process) A means capable of executing the high navigation state start setting process 2),
The second setting process is a process that is at least partially different from the first setting process (for example, the first setting process and the second setting process in FIGS. 314, 326 (A) and (B)). The difference of),
It is characterized by FIG. 326 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 12-3 of the present application. Here, in FIG. 326(A), the setting change process is executed in the advantageous state and the specific information is ON, and then the advantageous state transition condition is satisfied in the state in which the specific information is not set, and the first setting is performed. FIG. 326(B) is a time chart when the processing is executed. FIG. 326B shows that the advantageous state ends when the advantageous state and the specific information is ON, and then the advantageous state transition condition is set when the specific information is set. 326(C) is a time chart when the second setting process is executed, and FIG. 326(C) is an advantageous state and the specific information is OFF, the standby process is executed until the specific information is turned ON, and then, It is a time chart when specific information is turned on.

According to Invention 12-3 of the present application, different advantageous state setting processes can be executed based on whether the specific information is set or not, so that different playability can be provided according to the time zone in which the game is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating rate of the game machine from being lowered.

Further, "the state control means executes the first setting process regarding the advantageous state when a first condition including that the specific information is not set is satisfied in the advantageous state setting process." means capable of executing the second setting process regarding the advantageous state when the first condition is not satisfied", "the state control means, in the advantageous state setting process, When a first condition including that the specific information is not set is satisfied, a first setting process related to the advantageous state can be executed, and a first setting process including that the specific information is set is established. means capable of executing a second setting process relating to the advantageous state when two conditions are satisfied;

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a game machine that initializes information about an advantageous state when the advantageous state ends, thereby separating the normal state from the advantageous state and suppressing gambling. In the gaming machines having such specifications, the game can be started in the same state whether the game is started in the normal state first thing in the morning immediately after the store opens or in the normal state after the end of the AT state. Therefore, it can be said that the fairness of the game is ensured. However, the game machine having such specifications has the same situation whether it is the first thing in the morning or the first thing in the morning. Invention 12-3 of the present application is an invention made in view of such circumstances, and provides a game machine that can prevent a decrease in operating rate in the morning by providing different game characteristics according to the time zone when a game is started. is.

Further, the state control means performs specific information setting waiting processing (for example, waiting in AT2 state processing B in FIG. 319) for waiting until the specific information is set when the specific information is not set in the advantageous state. State setting, standby processing in (a) of FIG. 320, specific information setting standby processing in FIG. 326 (C), etc.)
is preferred.

According to such a configuration, since the specific information can be set in the advantageous state, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the setting of the specific information after the setting change process and the setting of the specific information in the advantageous state. It is possible to reliably differentiate the advantageous state setting processing.

In addition, the advantageous state includes a plurality of types of advantageous gaming states including a specific advantageous gaming state,
The state control means is a means capable of setting one of the plurality of types of advantageous gaming states (for example, LMT1 state, LMT2 state, etc.),
The state control means is a means capable of setting the specific advantageous gaming state after executing the specific information setting standby process.
is preferred.

According to such a configuration, after the specific information is set in the advantageous state, the game transitions to the specific advantageous gaming state, so the advantageous state can be ended in a natural flow.

In addition, the advantageous state includes a plurality of types of advantageous gaming states including a first advantageous gaming state (for example, normal state) and a second advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 state),
The state control means is a means capable of setting one of the plurality of types of advantageous game states,
The second advantageous gaming state is a gaming state more advantageous for the player than the first advantageous gaming state,
The advantageous state end condition can be satisfied without setting the second advantageous gaming state in the advantageous state,
When the advantageous state end condition is satisfied without the second advantageous gaming state being set in the advantageous state, the specific information setting standby process is not executed in the advantageous state (for example, , AT2 state end processing in FIG. 319, etc.),
is preferred.

According to such a configuration, since the advantageous state is ended without setting the specific information, it is possible to execute the first setting process regarding the advantageous state after that, and the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted. There is

Further, the state in which the specific information setting waiting process is being executed is a state that is more disadvantageous than the second advantageous gaming state with respect to the notification of the operation information (for example, the instruction information setting process in FIG. 317),
The advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information,
is preferred.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress gambling while the specific information setting waiting process is being executed.

Further, in the advantageous state setting process for the first time after the setting change process is executed, the first setting process is executed without executing the second setting process (for example, , high navigation state transition processing in FIG. 312, high navigation state common processing A in FIG. 313, FIG. 326 (A), etc.),
is preferred.

According to such a configuration, the first setting process related to the advantageous state is executed in the first thing in the morning after the setting change process, and the second setting process related to the advantageous state is executed in other time zones. , different playability can be provided according to the time zone in which the game is started.

[Other game machines]
In the above-described embodiment, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as game media is shown as an example of the game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and game balls (for example, pachinko balls) are used in the game. It can be applied to slot machines, pachinko machines, arranged ball game machines, Jankyu game machines, smart balls, casino machines, etc., which are used as media.

A pachinko machine includes a launching device that shoots balls into a predetermined game area, a winning opening configured to allow the ball fired from the shooting device to enter, a detection means that detects a ball that has entered the winning opening, Equipped with payout means for putting out a ball when the detection means detects the ball, and a variable display device for variably displaying a predetermined pattern (identification information). It may be a pachinko machine in which the display device stops displaying after changing the symbols to notify the transition of the game state.

The pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine in which balls are enclosed and the enclosed balls are circulated within the pachinko machine for use. The ball payout may be credit driven.

The slot machine may be a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals. In this case, the game medium includes electronic data corresponding to medals. Input is from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device with a function that can store the number of lent medals by an electronic method or a function that can store the number of medals won by an electronic method) , includes inputting digitized data, and paying out game media includes outputting digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Further, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured on a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured to allow two-way communication. good. Further, while bi-directional communication is enabled between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications can be made to the embodiments of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. Modifications and modifications can be applied, and those involving such modifications and modifications are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the invention. are not limited to those listed. Further, by applying the content described in one configuration among the multiple configurations described in the first to eleventh embodiments to another configuration, the width of the game may be broadened.

100 slot machine 110-112 reel 113 display window 130-132 bet button 135 start lever 137-139 stop button 157 effect image display device 272, 277 speaker 420 various lamps 300 main control unit 400 first sub-control unit 500 second sub-control Department

Claims (1)

display means;
A door body that is provided on the front of the game table and can be opened and closed,
a detecting means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door;
an operating means;
sound output means capable of outputting sound;
A game machine comprising
The detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state,
The detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to an open detection state when the door body is in an open state,
By performing a predetermined operation on the detection means, the detection state of the detection means is set to the closed detection state even when the door body is in the open state,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a volume setting display capable of setting the volume,
The display means is means capable of displaying a door body open display indicating that the door body is in the open state when the door body is in the open state,
When the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and the door body open display is displayed on the display means, an operation is performed on the operation means. is configured to end the display of the door opening display and start displaying the management display,
In a state where the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, and the volume setting display is displayed on the display means, when the certain operation is performed, the volume setting is performed. is configured to finish displaying the display but not to start displaying the administrative display;
In a state in which the door open display is displayed on the display means, the sound output means can output a sound indicating that the door is in the open state (hereinafter referred to as "door opening sound"). is configured to
In a state where the door opening sound is output from the sound output means, when the certain operation is performed on the operation means, the sound output means is configured to be in a state of not outputting sound. ing,
A playground characterized by:

Images